Copyright: Copyright © Corel Corporation Limited. 1996, 1997.   Friday, August 08, 1997 09:28:56. All Rights Reserved.


About Sending to Corel Barista
About Publishing to Corel Barista

Use Corel Barista to publish richly formatted documents into a Java format to make them available on the World Wide Web. You can publish almost any document you create from within Corel Quattro Pro, Corel WordPerfect or Corel Presentations to Corel Barista and view it in any Java-enabled web browser. For example, you can publish a Corel Quattro Pro notebook to Corel Barista to view tables, charts, or maps on the Web.

Related Concepts


To publish a file to Barista
To publish a file to Barista,

1	Click File [image] Send To [image] Corel Barista.

2	Specify whether you want to publish the current sheet or a selection.

3	Specify a directory and filename. Make sure the directory contains the Corel Barista files.

4	Click Publish.

Tips

The default destination for Corel Barista files is the Corel Barista folder that was created when you installed (for example, C:\Corel\Suite8\Shared\Barista). This folder contains the Corel Barista class files needed to open the Corel Barista file in your browser. If you save your Corel Barista files to a folder that does not contain the Corel Barista class files, your files will not open in the browser.

Why can't others see my Corel Barista document?

About Publishing to Corel Barista


Why can't others see my Corel Barista file?

They are browsing the web page with a browser that doesn’t support Java, or the web server doesn't have all the files it needs to view the document.

To place a Corel Barista document on a web server, you must copy the Corel Barista files to the web server in addition to the .HTM and .GIF files associated with your document.

1	Create the folder on the web server in which you want to place your document.

2	Copy the files and subfolders in the \corel\suite8\shared\barista folder to the folder on the web server.

3	Copy the .HTM file to the folder on the web server.

4	Copy the .GIF files associated with the .HTM file to the folder on the web server.

About Publishing to Corel Barista


Why don't others see the same fonts in Corel Barista documents?

For others to see the same fonts you used when creating a Corel Barista document, they must have TrueDoc fonts installed on their system. If they did not install the TrueDoc fonts when they installed the suite, the fonts Times New Roman, Arial, or Courier New will replace the TrueDoc fonts when they view the document.

About Publishing to Corel Barista


Why can't I see washes and patterns in graphics objects?
Why can’t I see washes and patterns in graphics objects?

Currently Corel Quattro Pro cannot publish washes and patterns to Corel Barista. These objects are published as solid colors. Select a solid color for graphics objects rather than a wash or pattern to control what colors appear in the published document.

About Publishing to Corel Barista


Prints a selected group of cells.

Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook. If a cell's contents spill over into adjacent cells onscreen, include the spillover cells in the selection; otherwise, only part of the entry will print.


Prints a selected group of cells.

Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook. If a cell's contents spill over into adjacent cells onscreen, include the spillover cells in the selection; otherwise, only part of the entry will print.


Prints a selected group of cells.

Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook. If a cell's contents spill over into adjacent cells onscreen, include the spillover cells in the selection; otherwise, only part of the entry will print.


Prints the entire contents of the current notebook sheet.


Specify the Corel Barista folder and a filename. The Corel Barista folder was created when you installed (for example, C:\Corel\Suite8\Shared\Barista). This folder contains the Corel Barista class files needed to open the Corel Barista file in your browser. If you save your Corel Barista files to a folder that does not contain the Corel Barista class files, your files will not open in the browser.


Specify the Corel Barista folder and a filename. The Corel Barista folder was created when you installed (for example, C:\Corel\Suite8\Shared\Barista). This folder contains the Corel Barista class files needed to open the Corel Barista file in your browser. If you save your Corel Barista files to a folder that does not contain the Corel Barista class files, your files will not open in the browser.


Specify the folder and filename you want the current document published to. Type the filename or click [image] to select a file.


View the published Corel Barista document in your web browser.


Publishes the current document to Corel Barista.


Close this dialog box without publishing the file you have been working on.


Display information about the dialog box.


Quattro Pro Help
Corel Quattro Pro Help

Click the Help Topics button to return to the list of topics.


Objects and Properties

Introduction to working with objects and properties in Quattro Pro

Basic Properties

Active Selection

Active Sheet

Active Notebook

Application

Properties in Each Window

Properties in the Notebook Window

Properties in the Chart Window

Properties in the Light Table Window

Properties in the Dialog Window

Objects You Can Inspect

Notebook Window Objects

Chart Window Objects

Light Table Window Objects

Dialog Window Objects

Reference Information

Property Reference


Lists the defined series. Below the series name is the list of entries in the series.


Displays the list of entries in the series.


Fills the cells in order from top to bottom of each column.


Fills the cells in order from left to right of each row.


Fills sheet tab names with entries in the series. This option is available only if you chose QuickFill with a single cell selected.


Lets you define a new series.


Lets you change the values in a series.


Deletes a series.


Select a slide that you want to go to, then click OK.


Q&E
Q Plus E

The dialog box lets you add, edit, and execute database queries through Q+E:

For more information, press F1 within Q+E to display Q+E Help.


Creates a new query.


Changes an existing query.


Runs the current query.


Type a new name for a palette, or click an existing name to modify from the list below.


Click the name of the palette you want to change.


Creates a new palette with the new name.


Permanently redefines the palette that appears in the edit field.


Permanently deletes the selected palette.


Closes this dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Provides help about this dialog box. For help about individual dialog box options, click [image] in the title bar, then click an option.


Type the file you want to use, or click [image] to select a file.


Lets you select a file from a specific folder or subfolder.


Specifies the type of file. Type a filename extension or choose a file type from the drop-down list.


Specifies the type of file to save. Type a filename extension or choose a file type from the drop-down list.


Sets the typeface of the selected text. If a font has a TT (TrueType) symbol beside it, text in that font will appear in print just as it does onscreen.


Sets the size of the selected text.


Sets whether the text is bold, italic, underlined, or strikeout (a line appears through the characters).


Shows sample text with the font settings you selected.


Applies changes without closing the dialog box.


Returns settings to the default Corel Quattro Pro settings.


Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.


Type the file you want to save, or click [image] to select another folder or file format.


Closes this dialog box.


Shows the result of the property settings you have made.


Displays helpful instructions in the left panel of the dialog box. Click the Tip button again to remove the tip.


Moves to the previous step of the Expert.


Moves to the next step of the Expert.


Completes the Expert and closes the dialog box.


Specifies the cells to analyze. Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.


Specifies the upper left cell where Corel Quattro Pro places the resulting output table. Type a cell address, or click [image] to select a cell from the notebook.


Specifies whether data in the input cells is grouped by Row or Column.


Check this box if the first row or column of the input cells contains labels; the labels will be used in the output cells. If the input cells you specified do not contain labels, do not check this box; Corel Quattro Pro generates appropriate column and row labels for the output table.


Check this box to include a column in the output table for standard error values.


To use Experts
To use Experts,

You can run an expert by clicking a Toolbar icon or clicking a menu option.

To use an Expert from the Toolbar,

1	Right-click a toolbar, then click Experts and Numeric Tools to display all the expert icons.

2	Point to an icon to see what the expert will do, then click an expert icon.

3	Follow the instructions in each Expert panel and click Next to move to the next step.

To use an Expert from a menu,

1	For an expert listed in the following table, follow the menu path to use the expert.

2	Follow the instructions in each Expert panel and click Next to move to the next step.

To use	click
Analysis	Tools [image] Numeric Tools [image] Analysis
Budget	Tools [image] Numeric Tools [image] Budget
Chart	Insert [image] Chart
Consolidate	Tools [image] Consolidate [image] New
Database	Insert [image] External Data [image] Expert
Map	Insert [image] Graphics [image] Map
Scenario	Tools [image] Scenario [image] New
Slide Show	Tools [image] Slide Show [image] New
What-If	Tools [image] Numeric Tools [image] What-If [image] Expert
Click here [image] for a description of each Expert.


Experts

Experts help you use some features at a basic level. Use Experts when you need to complete a task quickly and simply.

Corel Quattro Pro offers the following Experts:

Analysis

Offers 19 tools for financial, statistical, and engineering analysis. Click here [image] for information about each Analysis Expert.

Budget

Offers 5 different budget templates for both home and business use.

Chart

Builds a chart from the cells of data you select. If you include labels in the selection, they appear in the chart. If you select the data cells before you use the Chart Expert, the chart appears as soon as you open the Expert.

Database

Lets you easily import data from a database, for example, a Paradox or Quicken database. Creates LDAP queries on the fly, without having to use a separate application.

Map

Builds a map from the cells of data you select.

Slide Show

Lets you create slide shows that contain bullet charts--slides with bulleted lists. Click here [image] for an example of a bullet chart.

Consolidate

Lets you combine cells using statistical operators (SUM, AVG, COUNT, MIN, MAX, STD, STDS, VAR, VARS). You can include column and row labels in the cells to combine. Then, combined data is sorted according to label placement in the output cells.

Scenario

Lets you create and display groups of scenarios (data conditions and results) based on models in your notebook. Before you use this Expert, enter a set of values (the conditions) and formulas based on them (the results).

What-If

Lets you create tables that show the effect of changing one or two variable cells referenced in a formula.

To use Experts


Corel Quattro Pro Work Areas

Corel Quattro Pro has several work areas:

Notebook window

Where you enter and display data. It contains all standard spreadsheet features along with many enhancements. This is where you will do most of your work in Corel Quattro Pro.

Page view

This is a WYSIWYG (what you see is what you get) view. As you work on areas such as margins, headers, and footers, you can see how your pages will look when you print them. It is useful to choose a lower Zoom percentage if you want to see several pages at once. You can also drag objects between pages, set margins and page breaks in Page view.

Objects sheet

Where you link charts together to make slide shows, or link dialog boxes you have created to build a custom application. The Objects sheet is the last sheet in each notebook.

Chart window

Where you can build and customize charts based on data from the Notebook window.

Light Table window

Where you edit a slide show. It contains all of the slides you have selected, including the master slide.

Dialog window

Where you can build custom applications that run within Corel Quattro Pro.

Print Preview screen

Where you preview your work before printing.

Related Concepts


Toolbars

Just under the menu bar is a row of buttons called the toolbar. Toolbar buttons let you quickly choose commonly used features. Just click a button on the toolbar to use it.

As you point to each button, a QuickTip appears beneath the button describing what it does. For more help on how to use a toolbar button, press Shift+F1, then click the button.

Use View [image] Toolbars to customize a toolbar. You can choose buttons to use an existing Corel Quattro Pro feature, launch a Windows application or document icon, or play a Corel Quattro Pro or PerfectScript macro. You can also add a standard control to the toolbar (such as a pushbutton or edit field), then add link commands to the control to indicate what should happen when the user clicks it.

Use View [image] Toolbars also to

show or hide toolbars

create new toolbars

delete toolbars

reset a standard toolbar to its default settings

set toolbar options

You can display toolbars at the top, bottom, left, or right of the Corel Quattro Pro application window, or in a floating palette.

When you right-click anywhere on a toolbar, you can switch to another toolbar, edit the toolbar, or change settings.

Related Concepts


Property Bar

The Property Bar appears below the toolbar. Corel Quattro Pro comes many Property Bars to give you access to tools when you need them. When you click in a chart, a Chart Property Bar appears. When you are editing in a cell, a different Property Bar appears.To see what each Property Bar button does, point to it.

Related Concepts


Using Notebooks

Notebooks provide a way to organize many spreadsheets together in the same file.

A notebook is a collection of 256 spreadsheet sheets and the Objects sheet, which is the last sheet. Each spreadsheet sheet is a grid made up of columns and rows. The Objects sheet contains icons, each representing a chart, slide show, or dialog box you have created.

Each notebook is saved as its own file. The default file name for the first notebook is NOTEBK1.WB3.

There are three major ways to take advantage of notebooks:

by breaking up a spreadsheet into small pieces on separate sheets

by gathering logically-related data into the same file

by consolidating similarly-formatted spreadsheets into the same file

Breaking Up a Large Spreadsheet

If you are translating a large spreadsheet from Corel Quattro Pro for DOS or another application, it will be easier to work with if you break it into small pieces on separate sheets.

To quickly go to an individual sheet, click the sheet's tab. Also, when you write a formula that refers to cells on another sheet, the sheet name appears in the formula, making it easier to see what you are referencing.

Gathering Related Data

Instead of saving a budget, a schedule, an inventory, or other related information in different files on disk, you can make them separate sheets in the same notebook. This gives you one file name to remember, not many.

By default, notebook sheets are labeled A through IV, but you can give them descriptive names to remind you of their contents.

Consolidating Data

If you are working with data that conforms to a given template or layout, notebooks give you efficient ways to enter and format data. Grouping the sheets together before entering standard column heading information or before making formatting changes, for example, speeds up your work.

Moving Around Within a Notebook

To move to a different sheet in a notebook, click its tab. If its tab is not in view, use the tab scroll controls to reveal additional tabs. The tab scroll controls work like VCR controls.

To move quickly to the last sheet in a notebook (the Objects sheet), click the QuickTab button [image]. The Objects sheet contains icons representing each of the charts, slide shows, and dialog boxes you have created in the notebook. To switch back to the last active spreadsheet sheet, click the QuickTab button again. Notice that the arrow on the QuickTab button changes direction depending on whether the Objects sheet is active or not.

After you click a sheet tab, use the scroll bars to move to different parts of the sheet.

Related Concepts


Property Menus

With Property menus you can quickly see all changes that can be made to individual objects. Just point to an object and right-click to display a QuickMenu. Click the Properties item to list the object's properties. (For window title bars, the properties appears as soon as you right-click.)

Properties available for

cells (block)

sheets

notebooks

charts in windows, and their elements, such as bars, axes, or text boxes

floating objects, such as charts, graphic images, or QuickButtons that appear in a layer above notebook cells

dialog boxes you create and their elements, such as radio buttons or edit fields

the Corel Quattro Pro application itself

You can change additional properties for the current object. The property tab name turns blue if you change its setting.

You can also change properties of an object by clicking the following commands:

Command	Properties

Tools [image] Settings	Application properties

Format [image] Selection	Active Selection properties

Format [image] Sheet	Active sheet properties

Format [image] Notebook	Active Notebook properties

Related Concepts


Corel Quattro Pro Charts

Use charts to analyze your data. A chart presents a set of data as a picture. It may uncover a trouble spot, display a trend, or illustrate a correlation between categories of data.

You can display charts on the notebook or in a chart window. Each chart also exists as an icon on the Objects sheet.

In a Notebook Window

Create a floating chart directly on a notebook sheet when you want to see or print your chart on the same sheet as your data. The Notebook toolbar has a button that creates floating charts. You can right-click the chart to add titles to the chart, change the chart type, or redefine the data series plotted in the chart in this window. For other changes, click the chart to edit it.

In a Chart Window

Create a chart in its own chart window when you want the chart to appear in a slide show or on a printed page, but not on a notebook. You can enhance charts using the drawing tools on the Chart and Drawing Tools toolbar and the color palette on the Chart Color Schemes toolbar.

On the Objects sheet

The Objects sheet displays an icon for each chart in the notebook. You can right-click an icon to rename, delete, or copy and paste the chart. You can also print a series of charts, or create an onscreen slide show with special effects. To see the Objects sheet, click the QuickTab button [image] at the bottom of the notebook window.

Related Concepts


Mouse Techniques

Corel Quattro Pro for Windows fully supports standard Windows mouse functions, and also features several highly useful enhancements. Use the mouse as follows:

To select a:	Do this:
cell	Click the cell.
cells (block)	Drag then by clicking a cell in one corner, holding down the left mouse button, moving to the opposite corner and releasing the mouse button. Or click one corner, hold down the Shift key, and click the opposite corner.
Noncontiguous selection	Hold down the Ctrl key while you drag each selection.
Row	Click the row number in the border.
column	Click the column letter in the border.
Sheet	Click the Select-All box at the intersection of the row and column borders.
cell on another sheet	Click the sheet tab, then click the cell.
3-D selection	First select the 2-D cells in the first sheet in the 3-D block, then hold down the Shift key while clicking the last sheet in the 3-D selection. A black line appears under the tabs of the selected sheets.
To change object properties

Right-click an object, then click the Properties item. This lets you change many settings at once.

To move cells (a block)

Select the cells, release the left mouse button, point to an edge of the cells until you see a four-way arrow. Left-click, and drag the selected cells to another location.

To copy cells

Select the cells, release the left mouse button, point to an edge of the cells until you see a four-way arrow. Hold down Ctrl, left-click, and drag the selected cells to another location.

Related Concepts


Undoing Mistakes

Edit [image] Undo and the Undo/Redo button [image] on the toolbar let you reverse most kinds of operations after you have carried them out. For example, if you make an entry in a cell, then change your mind and want to remove it, choose Edit [image] Undo immediately after making the entry. The entry will be removed and whatever was previously entered in the cell will be returned.

You can identify your last action by the wording in Edit [image] Undo. For example, after making a cell entry, the Undo item reads "Undo Entry." After changing the Zoom Factor property in Format [image] Notebook [image] Zoom Factor, the Undo item reads "Undo Notebook Property."

If you change your mind again after using Undo and want to reinstate the first change, choose Edit [image] Redo.

Some actions are undoable only if you enable Undo in Tools [image] Settings [image] General. You can identify these actions because Undo is dimmed immediately after the action is taken. In all situations except where program speed and available memory are absolutely crucial, it is recommended that you keep Undo enabled.

To enable Undo

Related Concepts


DOS Spreadsheet Users

If you have used DOS-based versions of Corel Quattro Pro or 1-2-3, read the following topics for guidelines on using files and macros created with those DOS spreadsheets.

Alternative Menu Systems

File Compatibility

Macro Compatibility

Related Concepts


Alternative Menu Systems

When you are first using Corel Quattro Pro for Windows, you may want to use an alternative menu system.

To use Microsoft Excel menus, Corel Quattro Pro 7 menus, or a simplified Windows menu structure, right-click the menu bar and click a different menu structure.

To use a DOS menu system, click Tools [image] Settings, then click the Macro tab. Click Slash Key to display a list of available menu systems.

Using an alternative menu system can help you maintain productivity while you learn the program, but using the default Corel Quattro Pro for Windows interface makes it easier to access all features.

Related Concepts


File Compatibility

You can open files created with DOS versions of Corel Quattro Pro, 1-2-3 (versions 1 through 5), Excel, and several databases from in Corel Quattro Pro. Just retrieve the file as you would any other; Corel Quattro Pro automatically identifies the file type (by its extension or the first record in the file) and translates it. You can run most macros contained in a 1-2-3 file and Excel file.

To save an imported file as a Corel Quattro Pro file, click File [image] Save As and click QPW v7/v8 (*.wb3) in the File Type list box below the file name.

1-2-3 files

When loading a 1-2-3 file, linking is converted to the syntax used by Corel Quattro Pro.

Here is an example:

Corel Quattro Pro syntax	1-2-3 2.x syntax

[filename]celladdress	<<filename>>celladdress

+[BUDGET.WK1]B4	+<<BUDGET.WK1>>B4

Related Concepts


Macro Compatibility

Running Corel Quattro Pro for DOS macros

Macros using Corel Quattro Pro for DOS menu equivalents are still compatible. For example, the statement {/Graph;Type} still executes as Chart [image] Type/Layout.

Running 1-2-3 macros

You can run keystroke macros created in 1-2-3 (release 2.x and 3.x) in Corel Quattro Pro. Click Tools [image] Settings, then click the Macro tab. Click the Slash Key option and choose 1-2-3 / R 2.01.

Related Concepts


Click pictures on the bottom. Click arrows on the top.


Click pictures on the bottom. Click arrows on the top.


Click pictures on the bottom. Click arrows on the top.


Click pictures on the bottom. Click arrows on the top.


Click pictures on the bottom. Click arrows on the top.


Click pictures on the bottom. Click arrows on the top.


Type the cells for your chart data, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.

If you include column and row labels in the chart data, they appear in your chart as x-axis and y-axis labels.

Corel Quattro Pro chooses a chart type for your data, based on the number of rows and columns and the total number of data points in the chart data cells. You can change the chart type later.


Compares values of different items at specific points in time--to contrast monthly commissions for each sales representative, for example.


Plots a bar chart with the axes reversed: The x-axis is the vertical axis, and the y-axis is the horizontal axis.

Click this general chart type if you want to emphasize that values move forward rather than increase. This type also works well if you have long x-axis labels.


Compares individual values to other values and to the whole--how yearly expenses break down into categories, for example. Use them to focus on the individual values in a single series. Doughnut charts, available through this type choice, are like pie charts with a hole in the middle.


Shows the progression of values over time--to track sales, for example. Area charts are like filled-in line charts; they plot cumulative rather than invidual values.


Includes high-low charts, radar charts, and combination charts.


Selects a chart type for you based on the number of rows and columns and the total number of data points in the chart data cells.


Compares values of different items at specific points in time--to contrast monthly commissions for each sales representative, for example.


Shows the relationship of each value to the total--how total sales are divided between regions, for example. 100% stacked bar charts show the percentage each series contributes to the total.


Shows the relationship of each value to the total by displaying the percentage of the total contributed to each series.


Plots each series as a separate sub-chart.


Compares values of different items at specific points in time--to contrast monthly commissions for each sales representative, for example.


Shows the relationship of each value to the total--how total sales are divided between regions, for example. 100% stacked bar charts show the percentage each series contributes to the total.


Shows the relationship of each value to the total by displaying the percentage of the total contributed to each series.


Compares individual values to other values and to the whole--how yearly expenses break down into categories, for example. Use these chart types to focus on the individual values in a single series.


Like pie and column charts, plots a single series with each value plotted as a percentage of the whole. You can add text or graphics to the interior "hole" with chart window drawing tools.


Plots each series as a separate sub-chart.


Shows the progression of values over time--to track sales, for example. The chart in the upper right corner is an XY chart. It  plots data only if the first column of your chart data contains dates.


Shows 3-D representations of the line chart. Select ribbon, 3-D unstacked area, or step charts.


Shows the relationship of each value to the total over time--how each sales representative contributed to total sales over a 12-month period, for example.


Plots rows and columns as intersecting lines on a surface that is suspended in a 3-D frame. Surface charts are useful for plotting functions such as f(x) and f(x,y), and parametric curves (x(t), yt(t)).


Shows x-axis values as imaginary lines radiating from a common center, like spokes of a wheel, with y-axis values plotted on each "spoke." Radar charts are useful for highlighting trends, depending on the shapes drawn by the plot lines, or simplifying series comparisons.


Illustrates the difference between corresponding values in two series. Though most often used in tracking daily stock prices, high-low charts can be used whenever you want to compare the difference between pairs of values.


Combines different types of charts in one -- lines with bar, for example.


Displays the list of color schemes. The color scheme you select determines colors used for all chart elements and objects.

You can experiment with different color schemes. Select one from the list and see how it affects the chart in the left panel.

Click No Change to not use a color scheme.


Inserts the chart on a notebook sheet. When you click Create Chart, it appears over the selected cells. You can click inside its borders and drag it to a new location, if you prefer.


Displays the chart in a chart window, ready for editing. The toolbar contains drawing tools so you can add drawn objects and text to the chart, or you can right-click any part of the chart and click the Properties option to change its properties.


Type the coordinates for source cells you want to consolidate, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.

After you select cells, click Add to add the cells to the source cells list.

To select cells in another notebook, click Browse.


Type the coordinates of the cells that will change with each scenario, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.


Type new values into any cells that you want to change.


Takes a snapshot of the data in the changing cells and preserves it as a scenario.


Lists the scenarios you have captured using the Add Scenario button in the previous panel.


Show displays the selected scenario in the notebook, highlighting changes you have made to the baseline data. Changing cells are yellow and result cells are green.

Undo Show reverts the notebook to the baseline data.


Removes the named scenario from the list.


Creates a summary report of the change and result cells in each scenario. The Scenario Expert closes, and the report appears on a new sheet, the Scenarios sheet.


Click an analysis tool and then click Next.

Read the left panel for information about each tool.


Type the yearly interest rate; the default is 12%.


Type the number of years of the loan; the default is 30.

You can enter fractions to represent months. For example, 18+5/12 represents 18 years and 5 months; 100/12 represents 100 months.


Type the original loan balance; the default is $100,000.


Type the balance at loan completion; the default is $0.00.

You can enter fractions for Term and Last Year to represent months. For example, 18+5/12 represents 18 years and 5 months; 100/12 represents 100 months.


Type the last year through which the amortization table is generated; the default is the value entered for Term, which generates a table through the end of the loan.


Specifies the significance level at which to evaluate values for the F-statistic; the default is 5%.


Indicates the number of rows in each sample.


Displays a separate row in the output table for the nth largest value. Type 1 to display the largest value.


Displays a separate row in the output table for the nth smallest value. Type 1 to display the smallest value.


Displays the confidence level of the means for the input cells; the default is 95%.


Displays the following statistics for each data set in the input cells: Mean, Standard Error, Median, Mode, Standard Deviation, Variance, Kurtosis, Skewness, Range, Minimum, Maximum, Sum, Count, Largest, Smallest, Confidence Level.


Specifies the values to smooth. Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.

The input cells must be either a single column or row; they must not contain labels.


Specifies the upper left cell where Corel Quattro Pro starts the smoothed values. If there are not enough values to forecast a value or calculate a standard error, Corel Quattro Pro returns NA (not available).


Specifies the constant used to smooth the data. The Damping Factor indicates the percentage for error that the prior forecast can be adjusted; the default is 30%.


Specifies the cells to transform. The cells can contain real or complex numbers. (Complex numbers can be in x+yi, x+iy, x+yj, or x+jy format.) Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.

The number of values in the input cells must be a power of 2 (for example, 2, 4, 8, 16,...) between 2 and 1024, inclusive; you can pad the input cells with zeros so that the number of values is a power of 2.


Check this box to perform the inverse transformation on data in the input cells. If the input cells have already been transformed, Inverse FFT sets the values back to their original state.


Specifies the first column or row of numeric data to compare. Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.


Specifies the second column or row of numeric data to compare. Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.


Specifies the data to analyze. The cells can consist of one or more columns or rows of numeric values. They should not contain labels.

Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.


Specifies values that define the bin ranges for the data. Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.

If you do not specify bin cells, bins are distributed evenly from the minimum to the maximum value in the input cells, with the number of bins equal to the square root of the number of values in the input cells.


Check this box to generate a column for cumulative percentages in the output table.


Check this box to create an output table with data in both descending frequency order and ascending Bin Cells order.

If you do not check Pareto, the output table displays data only in ascending Bin Cells order.


Type the number of years remaining in the loan; the default is 30.


Type the current loan balance.


Type the current yearly interest rate.


Type the annual interest rate on the candidate loan.


Type the percentage fees ("points") for the candidate loan. For example, if you loan fee is 1 point, type .01.


Specifies the values to analyze. Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.

The input cells must be either a single column or row. They must not contain labels.


Specifies the upper left cell where Corel Quattro Pro starts the resulting output table. Type a cell address, or click [image] to select a cell from the notebook.

The table will extend to the right and downward as needed. If there are not enough values to forecast a value, Corel Quattro Pro returns NA (Not Available).


Specifies the number of values to include in the moving average; the default is 3.


Type the number of columns in the output cells. If you already specified multicells for Output Cells, type 0.


Type the number of rows in the output cells. If you already specified multicells for Output Cells, type 0.


Type a starting value for the random number generation algorithm. You can use Seed to generate the same sample of random numbers again.


Every value in this distribution has an equal probability of being selected.


This distribution has the qualities of a symmetrical, bell-shaped curve.


This distribution has two possible outcomes, failure or success, represented by 0 and 1, respectively.


This distribution represents the successful outcomes in a given number of independent Bernoulli trials. For example, a coin toss experiment produces a binomial distribution.


The distribution of values in any interval depends on the length of the interval and the constant Lambda, the expected number of occurrences in an interval.


This distribution produces a pattern of repeated values and sequences.


This distribution generates random numbers drawn from a sample group of values; each sample value has a discrete probability value, and the sum of the probability values equals 1.


Type a value indicating the lower bound on the set of numbers to generate; the default is 0.


Type a value indicating the upper bound on the set of numbers to generate; the default is 1.


Type a value indicating the mean of the set of numbers to generate; the default is 100.


Type a value indicating the standard deviation of the set of numbers to generate; the default is 10.


Type a value indicating the probability of success on each trial; the value must be greater than or equal to 0% and less than or equal to 100%; the default is 50%.


Type the number of trials to run; the default is 10.


Type the expected number of occurrences of a value in a given interval; the default is 1.


Type a value indicating the lower bound on the set of numbers to generate; the default is 1.


Type a value indicating the upper bound on the set of numbers to generate; the default is 100.


Type the increment used to generate numbers between From and To; the default is 1.


Type the number of times to repeat each value; the default is 1.


Type the number of times to repeat each sequence of values; the default is 1.


Specify a two-column area containing numbers in the first column and probability values (between 0 and 1) in the second column. The sum of the probability values must equal 1.

Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.


Specifies the y values (the dependent variables). The y values should be in a single column.

Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.


Specifies the +x values (the independent variables). The x values should be in one or more columns.

Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.


Sets the confidence level of the means for the input cells; the default is 95%.


Specifies the upper left cell of the resulting summary table. When you specify the cells, allow at least seven columns.

Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.

Output cells cannot overlap. Try placing output cells side by side instead of on top of one another.


Specifies the upper left cell of the resulting residuals output table. When you specify the cells, allow at least four columns.

Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.

Output cells cannot overlap. Try placing output cells side by side instead of on top of one another.


Specifies the upper left cell of the resulting probability output table. When you specify the cells, allow at least two columns.

Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.

Output cells cannot overlap. Try placing output cells side by side instead of on top of one another.


Check this box if labels are in the first row of both Y Range and X Range.


Check this box if you want to include residuals in the residuals output table.


Check this box if you want to include standardized residuals in the residuals output table.


Check this box if you want the regression line to pass through the y-axis at zero. If you do not specify the y-intercept as a zero, Corel Quattro Pro generates a y-intercept from an internal set of variables.


Specifies the cells to sample. Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.

For periodic sampling of cells with multiple columns, Corel Quattro Pro samples each column in order from left to right.


Specifies the type of sample, Random or Periodic; the default is Periodic. In a random sample, every value in the input cells has an equal probability of being selected. A periodic sample selects every nth value from the input cells.


For periodic sampling, specify the periodic interval used to sample data. For example, 3 means every third value from the input cells is selected.

For random sampling, specify the number of values in the output cells.


Specifies the first column or row of numeric data to compare. The cells should be a single column or row.

Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.


Specifies the second column or row of numeric data to compare. The cells should be a single column or row.

Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.


Check this box if the first row of both Variable 1 Input and Variable 2 Input contains labels; the labels will be used in the output cells. If the input cells you specified do not contain labels, do not check this box; Corel Quattro Pro generates appropriate column and row labels for the output table.


Performs a two-sample Student's t-Test for means using two independent (rather than paired) samples with equal variances.


Performs a paired two-sample Student's t-Test for means. Each value from one data set is paired with a value from another set; both sets must have the same number of values.


Performs a two-sample Student's t-Test for means using two independent (rather than paired) samples with unequal variances.


Sets the significance level of the test; the default is 5%.


Type a value indicating the hypothesized difference (the null hypothesis) in the means between Variable 1 Input and Variable 2 Input; the default is zero.

This option is not available if the t-Test Type is Two-Sample with Unequal Variances.


Type the population variance of Variable 1 Input.

You can use @VAR and @PUREVAR to calculate the population variance.


Type the population variance of Variable 2 Input.

You can use @VAR and @PUREVAR to calculate the population variance.


Type a value indicating the hypothesized difference (the null hypothesis) in the means between Variable 1 Input and Variable 2 Input; the default is zero.


Click a budget tool, then click Next .


Displays a list of the sources of income. To add an item to the list, type the item in the New Item edit field, then click Add.


Type a new item, then click Add.


Deletes the selected item.


Adds the new item to the list.


Displays a list of expenses. To add an item to the list, type the item in the New Item edit field, then click Add.


Click a Budget Period to indicate whether the budget should use monthly, quarterly, or yearly information.


If the Budget Period is Monthly, click a starting month.

If the Budget Period is Quarterly, click a starting quarter.


Type the starting year for the budget, or click the spin control to select a year.


Type the duration of the budget. The default is one year.


Check this box to show quarterly totals. If the Budget Period is Quarterly or Yearly, this option is unavailable.


Check this box to show annual totals. If the Budget Period is Yearly, this option is unavailable.


Type a title for the budget. If your budget consists of multiple notebook sheets, the same title will appear on each sheet.


Type a subtitle for the budget. If your budget consists of multiple notebook sheets, the same subtitle will appear on each sheet.


Creates the budget in a new notebook. The budget will start at cell A1 of sheet A of the new notebook.


Creates the budget in the current notebook.


Specifies the starting cell of the budget. Type the cell address or click [image] to select a cell from the notebook.


Click an option to break up your budget into multiple sheets by Month, Quarter, or Year. Click None to create the budget on one notebook sheet.


Click one of the following Format options:

None uses Corel Quattro Pro's default cell formatting.

Color formats the budget with text color, shading, and multiple fonts.

Laser Printer formats the budget in a monochrome format ideal for printing to laser printers.


Click the type of variance style you want to use in the budget.

One column in your budget will compare estimated values with actual values for each period. You can show the variance as a dollar value or as a percentage.


Displays a list of items factored into Cost of Goods Sold. To add an item to the list, type the item in the New Item edit field, then click Add.


Displays a list of General and Administrative Expenses. To add an item to the list, type the item in the New Item edit field, then click Add.


Check this box to show a column for the same period from the prior year. A Variance column also shows the difference in values. For example, you can compare the first quarter revenue from this year with the first quarter revenue from last year.


Specifies the starting cell of the budget. Type the cell address or click [image] to select a cell from the notebook.

The Business Income Statement requires three notebook sheets. The sheet of the starting cell and the next two sheets should be blank. The first sheet will contain the income statement. The second and third sheets will contain statements for Cost of Goods Sold and General/Administrative Expenses, respectively.


Substitutes values for one cell referenced in a formula (or formulas). Click the Tip button for an example.


Substitutes values for two cells referenced in a formula. Click the Tip button for an example.


Type a cell reference, or click [image] to select a cell from the notebook.

Select only one cell. The next step lets you select additional formula cells.

The formula you select must reference at least one other cell. For example, the formula @PMT(10000,A1,36) references cell A1.


If the formula you specified in the previous step references a cell that is also referenced by other formulas, you can substitute values for those other formulas in the What-If table.

Type a cell reference, or click [image] to select a cell from the notebook.


Lists the formula cells you have added.


Adds the formula cell specified in Additional Formula Cells to the list.


Deletes the selected formula cell from the list.


Specifies the cell containing the value you want to substitute for to create the What-If table. For example, in the formula @PMT(10000,A1,A2) cell A1 is one input cell.

Type a cell reference, or click [image] to select a cell from the notebook.

The input cell must be referenced by the formula(s) that you selected. The input cell cannot be blank and it must contain a numeric value.


Type a name (up to 30 characters) to identify the values substituted for the input cell in the What-If table. You can also click [image] to select a label from the notebook. The default name is "My Subst. Cell."


Lists the subsitution values that will be used to create the What-If table.


Lets you specify a different range of substitution values.


Creates a new list of substitution values based on the Start, Step, and Stop values you entered.


Sets the first value in the range of substitution values. Enter a number, a formula, or a date/time serial number.


Sets the constant value to add to the Start value. If you want the values to decrease, enter a negative number and a Stop value lower than the Start value.


Sets the limit for the substitution values.


Type the upper left cell where you want to create the What-If table. Type a single cell reference, or click [image] to select a cell from the notebook.

After you specify the table cells, click Make Table to create the What-If table.


Specifies the second cell containing the value you want to substitute for to create the What-If table. For example, in the formula @PMT(10000,A1,A2) cell A2 is a second input cell.

Type a cell reference, or click [image] to select a cell from the notebook.

The input cell must be referenced by the formula(s) that you selected. The input cell cannot be blank and it must contain a numeric value.


Type a name (up to 30 characters) to identify the values substituted for the second input cell in the What-If table. You can also click [image] to select a label from the notebook. The default name is "My 2nd Subst. Cell."


Check this box if you want the What-If table to show first substitution values in a row and second substitution values in a column. Otherwise, the What-If table shows first substitution values in a column and second substitution values in a row.


Select cells containing up to three columns of text for one or more bullet charts. Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.

When you select the bullet chart area, the first bullet chart in the area appears in the left panel.


Guides you through the steps of creating bullet chart text.


Displays styles from the Master Slide Gallery in the panel below.


Displays a list of charts you created. Click User Defined to use a template style from an existing chart (such as a bullet chart with drawn objects). If the notebook has no charts, User Defined is unavailable.


Click this button to not use a Master Slide for the slide show. You can select a master slide after the slide show has been created, if you want to.


Click the name of a chart you want to use for the Master Slide, which provides a background style for other slides. A bullet chart with an attractive background is usually a good choice.


Controls how one slide appears after another. For example, wipes and dissolves are two popular transition effects. Click Random to randomly apply a transition effect to each slide. Click From List to select a transition effect from the list.

The Slide Show Expert uses a display time of 0 seconds, which displays a slide until the viewer clicks the mouse or presses a key. It also uses fast transition effects; you can later slow down the effects if necessary by changing a slide's properties.


Select a map from the list. Once you are satisfied with your selection, click Next.


Type the cell coordinates for the map region names in your notebook, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook. If you do not specify map region names, you cannot display data in your map.


Type the cell coordinates for the color data series in your notebook, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook. If you do not specify color data series, your map will not contain any colored regions.


Type the cell coordinates for the pattern data series in your notebook, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook. If you do not specify pattern data series, your map will not contain any patterned regions.


Displays the list of color schemes. The color scheme you select determines colors used for all chart elements and objects.

You can experiment with different color schemes. Select one from the list and see how it affects the chart in the left panel.


Click the up or down arrows to change the number of colors. The maximum number of colors is six.


Click the up or down arrows to change the number of patterns. The maximum number of patterns is six.


Corel Quattro Pro can add other features to a map. These features are called overlays because they can be laid on top of each other, like overhead transparencies or tracing paper.

Overlays should be appropriate for the current map. For example, an overlay of U.S. Interstate Highways is of no use in a map of Japan.


If your notebook contains major world city names, you can use the Expert to mark any of those cities on your map.


Corel Quattro Pro recognizes many major city names so you don’t have to specify latitude and longitude to mark those location on your map. Location names recognized by Corel Quattro Pro are called Pin Names. Each sample notebook in the DataMaps directory includes a list of regional pin names.

Type the cell coordinates for the Pin Names in your notebook, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.


If you want to display labels next to the points you mark on the map, type the cell coordinates for the Pin Labels in your notebook, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook. If you want to use the Pin Names as labels, use the same cell coordinates in this field.


Displays a title above the map.


Displays a subtitle below the map title.


Displays a title above the map legend.


Inserts the map on a notebook sheet. When you click Create Map, a small world icon appears. Hold down the left mouse button, and drag the map to the size that you want.


Displays the map in a window, ready for editing.


Using @Functions

Corel Quattro Pro provides many built-in functions that perform calculations and return values. These functions, called @functions because they are preceded by an at-sign (@), are special commands you can enter in cells--either alone or in formulas.

Entering @functions

Syntax rules

Nesting @functions

Comments in @functions

Arguments in @functions

Recalculation

Using the Formula Composer


Entering @Functions

It is important to enter @functions in the proper format, or syntax:

@FUNCTION(Argument1, Argument2,...)

The type of information entered as a argument depends on the specific @function.

@Function formulas

An @function formula is the complete command string, including arguments and punctuation. You enter an @function formula in a cell just as you would any other value; select the cell and type the entry. The @function displays on the input line. When you press Enter, the result of the @function displays in the cell. If the result is a numeric value, it becomes a value entry. If the result is a string, it becomes a label entry.

These features can help you construct @function formulas:

The @Functions button appears in the input line when you start to type. Choose it to display the list of @functions categories. Click an @function category to display the @functions for that category. The All category lists all @functions. The Recently Used category lists the last 10 @functions you selected from the Functions dialog box. When you click an @function, a brief description of it appears at the bottom of the dialog box. Double-click an @function to place it in the input line. The Functions key (Alt+F3) also displays the @function list.

A cell name makes it easier to reference a selection of cells. Once you have named the cells, you can reference them by a name instead of coordinates.

Pointing lets you insert cell references in a function formula by pointing to them, either with the selector or the mouse.

Input-line parenthesis matching makes it easier to enter @functions with proper syntax. If you type one of these characters: ( [ { , it is colored red in the input line until you type the matching character: ) ] }. Then, they both turn green. If you forget to type a matching parenthesis in a complex formula with several sets of parentheses or brackets, for example, it is easy to pinpoint the error. Press F2 to display the selected formula in Edit mode, then move the insertion point through the formula. When you reach an unmatched parenthesis or bracket, the character turns red. You can check the formula and insert the matching character where it belongs. The new character and its match both turn green.

@Function Help is available from the input line; type any @function, then press F1.

Related Concepts


Syntax Rules

An @function formula's syntax must meet these rules:

There must be a leading at-sign (@), plus sign (+), or equal sign (=) at the beginning of the formula.

You can enter the @function in either uppercase or lowercase letters.

If there are arguments, enclose them in parentheses.

When there are multiple arguments, separate them by a semicolon or the argument separator specified by the punctuation setting of the International property in Tools [image] Settings [image] General. (In the @function examples in Help, we use a comma to separate multiple arguments.)

Enter arguments in the specified order.

If you specify an optional argument for an @function, you must also specify all preceding optional arguments for the @function.

There must be no spaces between @ and the @function name. There can be spaces between arguments, parentheses, and the @function name, but Corel Quattro Pro deletes them.

Related Concepts


Nesting @Functions

You can use more than one @function in a single formula. For example,

@ROUND(@AVG(C14..F24),2)

This @function formula calculates the average of cells C14 to F24, then rounds the average to two decimal places.

This is called nesting @functions. You can nest as many @functions as you like in a formula (up to 1022 characters), but it is more difficult to debug complex @function formulas if there is a problem. It is best to break them down into several smaller formulas, which you can reference with a final formula. The smaller pieces make it easier to pinpoint an error, and are available for use with other formulas, so they use memory more efficiently.

Related Concepts


Comments in @Functions

You can include an onscreen comment after any @function formula. Typically, comments serve as memory jogs, asides, or annotations that you do not want to appear in the notebook itself.

To enter a comment, type a semicolon (;) after the @function, then type the text. The @function and comment together can be up to 1022 characters long.

Examples

@DMAX(A2..E10,4,A13..A14); computes the top sale in July

@MOD(@TODAY,7); 1=Sun, 2=Mon, 3=Tues, 4=Wed, 5=Thurs, 6=Fri, 7 Sat

Related Concepts


Arguments in @Functions

"Argument" refers to the information required by an @function. Most @functions need at least one argument. There are three general types of arguments:

Numeric values

Cell values

String values

Most arguments require one of these types of values. Some @functions accept a combination or choice of types for a single argument. For example, @SUM accepts cells in combination with numeric values:

@SUM(B10..C25,50) ;totals numeric entries in cells B10..C25 plus 50

You can separate arguments with a semi-colon. Or, you can separate arguments according to the Punctuation setting in Tools [image] Settings [image] International. In the example above, a comma (a possible Punctuation setting) separates arguments.

If you get the message "Not enough arguments" when you are entering an @function, use a semi-colon between arguments.

The specific types of arguments for each @function are listed in the description for that @function.

Related Concepts


Numeric @Function Arguments

A numeric value can be used as an @function argument in any of these forms:

an actual value: @SIN(1.571)

the coordinates of a cell containing a numeric value: @SIN(B5)

the name of a cell name containing a single numeric value: @INT(TOTAL)

a formula resulting in a numeric value: @INT(B4*10)

another @function resulting in a numeric value: @INT(@PI)

a combination of these: @ABS(@INT(C4)+35-TOTAL)

Related Concepts


Cell @Function Arguments

Cells can be entered as an @function argument in a number of ways:

the coordinates of cells: @SUM(A1..B3)

the address of a single cell: @SUM(B3)

a cell name: @SUM(JANUARY)

You can use a combination of these in a list: @SUM(JANUARY,C15..D25,F10)

Related Concepts


String @Function Arguments

A string value can be used as an @function argument in these ways:

an actual string, in double quotes: @PROPER("ACME Company")

the address of a cell containing a label: @PROPER(G13)

the name of a single-cell containing a label: @PROPER(COMPANY NAME)

a formula resulting in a string: @LOWER(+MONTH&"Sales")

another @function resulting in a string: @LENGTH(@PROPER("ACME Industries"))

Related Concepts


Recalculation

By default, Corel Quattro Pro calculates formulas when you enter them, and recalculates them each time you change the data involved. Three options for formula recalculation are

Background (the default) recalculates between keystrokes.

Automatic pauses operation while Corel Quattro Pro recalculates formulas.

Manual recalculates the formulas only when you press F9. (Corel Quattro Pro still calculates formulas when you enter or edit them, but not when values in the cells they reference change.)

You change the recalculation mode in Format [image] Notebook [image] Recalc Settings.

A calculator appears on the Application Bar to tell you that data has been added or changed, and Corel Quattro Pro has not recalculated the spreadsheet. To recalculate a single cell in Manual mode, select the cell, press F2, then press Enter.

Related Concepts


Control Menu

The Control menu is common to all Windows applications. To display it, click the icon in the upper left corner of a window. Commands are

Restore	Returns a window to its previous size and position

Move	Moves a window

Size	Changes window size

Minimize	Reduces a window to an icon

Maximize	Expands a window to fill the screen

Close	Closes a window

Next	Switches to the next window in the series of current windows

Test	Tests a custom application

Switch To	Switches to another window that you pick from a list


3-D selection

The same cells that are selected on more than one sheet.


@function

One of a set of special commands you can enter in a cell, either alone or in a formula. @Functions perform calculations and return the resulting value.


absolute cell reference

A cell reference in a formula that always references the same cell, even if the formula is copied to a different part of the notebook. To make a cell reference absolute, use the Abs key (F4) to insert dollar signs in its address--for example, $A$5. Named cells are absolute, unless a tilde (~) has been added in front of the name. For example, AGE would be an absolute cell reference. ~AGE would be a relative cell reference.


active cell

The cell affected by options you choose. The selector distinguishes the active cell from other cells in the sheet.


active window

The window affected by options you choose. In Corel Quattro Pro, the active window is on top and its title bar and frame are the same color as the application title bar.


ANOVA

Analysis of variance (ANOVA) tools help determine if two or more samples come from the same population by calculating the F-statistic, the ratio of the mean variance between samples to the mean variance within samples. The ANOVA tools are commonly used in cases involving more than two samples (where t-Tests cannot be used).


ANSI

The American National Standards Institute (ANSI) character set used in Windows products. ANSI characters can be translated into decimal and hexadecimal numbers.


Application Bar

The bottom line of the Corel Quattro Pro screen, showing different states of the program; for example, [image] (if Caps Lock is on), [image] if the Num Lock key is on, and the mode (such as READY or EDIT).


argument

Information required by many @functions and macro commands. It supplies information to the command. For example, in @SUM(A4..A10), the cell coordinates A4..A10 is the argument; it indicates what values to add together.


array

Rows and columns of data you can work with independently, not just as a whole selection. @ARRAY is used in most array calculations.


ASCII

Acronym for the American Standard Code for Information Interchange, the accepted standard for translating the first 128 alphabetic and numeric characters, symbols, and control instructions into 7-bit binary code. The ASCII character set is different from ANSI, the standard character set used in Windows products.


aspect ratio

The proportion of width to height of a chart. There are several ways to control a chart's aspect ratio, depending on where you want to display or print the chart.


autoload file

A file that opens automatically when you start Corel Quattro Pro. You specify it with the Autoload File option of the application File Options property.


axis

Most charts contain two axes: The x-axis usually runs horizontally along the bottom of the chart; the y-axis usually runs vertically on the left. (On rotated charts, x-axis and y-axis positions are reversed.)


baseline

A fixed set of data against which you track changes. To set a scenario baseline, click Tools [image] Scenario [image] Edit [image] Capture.


binary file

A file that contains instructions in your printer's native language for creating a printout. By default, binary files have the .PRN extension.


bitmap image

A picture in one of many graphic file formats (such as .BMP) that you can use to fill bars, backgrounds, or graphic elements.


bitmap object

A floating object containing an image in bitmap format that was pasted from another application.


block

Any rectangular selection of cells, which can be selected by dragging the mouse. A block is identified in formulas by its coordinates or by its name. For example, A1..B4 is a block.


border (graphic)

The outer edge of a graphic element, as opposed to its fill.


borders (notebook)

The lettered row at the top of the notebook sheet(A to IV) and the numbered column at the left (1 to 8192) used to identify cell addresses.


cell

A single unit of a spreadsheet, used to store a formula or data. A notebook is made up of many spreadsheet sheets, each containing more than two million cells identified by row and column location.


cell address

The identifier for the location of a cell in a notebook.

D5 is the address of the cell in column D and row 5.

B:D5 is the address of the cell in column D, row 5 of sheet B.

[EAST]B:D5 is the address of the cell in a notebook named East in sheet B, column D, row 5.


cell identifier

The left part of the input line that displays the active cell's address.


cell selector

The black-bordered rectangle that indicates the active cell.


circular reference

A formula with a direct or indirect reference to its own cell.


client application

The application receiving data from another application through a DDE or OLE link.


Clipboard

A temporary storage area used to hold data for transfer between locations or between Windows applications.


command equivalents

Special commands that correspond to menu commands, used in macros.


command object

A collection of properties and actions that defines a menu command.


Consolidator

A Corel Quattro Pro tool that combines source cells using your choice of several statistical @functions, such as @SUM. To activate it, click Tools [image] Consolidate  [image] New.


constraint

A formula that defines a limit in a mathematical problem. For example, +A4 > 50 is a constraint formula which states that the value in cell A4 must be greater than 50.


contiguous

A rectangular area of adjoining cells.


controls

The elements of a dialog box or toolbar that affect program actions;  buttons, check boxes, and edit fields are examples of controls.


coordinates

The two addresses that define a selection. The upper left and lower right addresses are always used. For example, the coordinates of the selection stretching from column B, row 5 to column E, row 9 are B5..E9.


criteria table

Cells in a notebook that specifies what field(s) to search and what data to search for (the search criteria). Corel Quattro Pro looks for all database records that match search criteria in the specified criteria table.


database

An organized collection of information. In Corel Quattro Pro, a database is organized by rows (or records of information), divided into separate columns (or fields).


database cells

A Corel Quattro Pro database, including field names in the first row and data records in the remaining rows. Each column is a data field.


data label

The label (or the part of the label) that states the value of the slice of a pie chart, or the section of a column chart. This is usually expressed as a percentage of the entire pie or column. The Data Label property in the pie or column chart property controls the format of these labels, and has four options: Currency, Value, Percent, and None.


data point

A single cell value displayed in a chart.


data series

Cells of  data plotted as a group on a chart. Each value in a data series is represented by a bar in a bar chart, by a point on a line in a line chart, by a "slice" in a pie chart, and so forth. A data series is usually just called a "series," except when contrasted to a label series.


date/time number
date/time serial number

A number assigned to a date or time. The number counts the number of days before or after December 30, 1899 (day 0), and the portion of the day that has elapsed. The integer portion is for the date; the fractional portion is used for time (with .00000=12:00 midnight, .5=12:00 noon, and .999999=11:59 p.m.).


DDE

Dynamic Data Exchange. A method of exchanging data between Windows applications. You can use it to set up dynamic links between applications so that if the data in one application changes, it also changes in the other.


destination cells

The target cells for an action, such as a copy or move operation.


detailed cells

For notebook outlines, the data cells usually to the left or above summary cells.


dimmed

The state of a menu option when it is unavailable for choosing. The option name appears in dimmed (gray) type on the menu.


dithered

A pattern of various colors that approximate a new color that could not otherwise be displayed by the video driver.


DLL

Dynamic Link Library. Contains functions written in a programming language. You can use functions in DLLs as custom functions in a Corel Quattro Pro notebook.


Drag and Drop

The method of moving selected cells, chart, floating object, sheet tab, or other Corel Quattro Pro object by dragging it to a new location with the mouse. You can also press Ctrl while you drag certain objects to copy them to another location.


drill

To enter data through several grouped sheets at the same time. After creating a group and activating Group mode, you can select a cell and make an entry. Instead of pressing Enter, you can press Ctrl+Enter to drill the entry through all corresponding sheets in the group.


event

A user interface action that triggers a link option (for example, mouse clicks, keystrokes, values changing, and so on).


Experts

A way to perform certain spreadsheet tasks that walks you through each step. The experts are found in various parts of the program. Some experts include: Insert [image] Chart, Insert [image] Graphics [image] Map, Insert [image] External Data [image] Expert, and Tools [image] Numeric Tools [image] Budget.


explode

To move a pie chart slice away from the center of the chart to emphasize it.


extended selection

Cells selected by clicking a cell, then holding down the Shift key while clicking the opposite corner cell or while pressing arrow keys.


extension

A code of up to three characters attached to the end of a file name and separated from the rest of the name by a period. A file's extension often identifies the type of file it is. For example, Corel Quattro Pro notebook files have the default extension .WB3.


field

A category of information in a database. In a Corel Quattro Pro database, fields are set up as columns of information.


field name

The name used to identify a field. In Corel Quattro Pro, field names are the headings of the columns of information.


fill

The interior of a graphic element, as opposed to its border.


find string

In a find and replace operation, the group of characters to be found. You enter the find string in the Find edit field.


floating chart

A chart that appears on a notebook sheet. You can create a floating chart directly on a notebook, or place an existing chart on a notebook using Insert [image] Graphics [image] Map.


floating map

A map that appears on a notebook sheet. You can create a floating map directly on a notebook, or place an existing map on a notebook sheet by right-clicking and clicking Insert Chart.


floating object

A rectangular object that can be placed on top of cells. Corel Quattro Pro has floating charts, arrows, ellipses, lines, rectangles, rounded rectangles, text boxes, QuickButtons, OLE objects, bitmap objects, and picture objects.


frequency distribution

The number of times that numbers within given ranges are found in cells of data. To build a frequency distribution, click Tools [image] Numeric Tools [image] Frequency.


function

One of a set of special commands you can enter in a cell, either alone or in a formula. Corel Quattro Pro documentation refers to these as "@functions." @Functions perform calculations and return the resulting value.


chart

A visual representation of numerical information, often used to show trends and relationships in data.


chart button

A special type of text box that appears in a chart.You can click it to branch to another chart (using visual transition effects if desired), run a macro, or run a macro and then branch to another chart. The background area of a chart can also be programmed as a chart button. Chart buttons are active only when a chart is viewed in a slide show or when you right-click the chart and choose View.


chart objects

Chart parts that are selectable during editing. Chart objects include integral parts of a chart (for example, axes, legend, title, and bars or lines) plus drawn objects and text boxes added with the chart toolbar buttons.


chart pane

The area bordered by the x- and y- axes in a 2-D chart. Grid lines and the bars, lines, or areas that represent series are drawn on top of this area.


chart type
chart type/layout

The plotting style of a chart, such as line, bar, pie, 3-D ribbon, or text.


chart window

An area where you enhance charts and change their properties. Chart windows have two properties of their own: Aspect Ratio and Grid options. Because each chart has its own unique chart window, you set properties for each window individually.


graphic element

Drawn object or explanatory text added to a chart. Types of graphic elements include lines, arrows, polylines, polygons, rectangles, ellipses, freehand shapes, and text boxes.


grid

In a notebook sheet, the lines that separate rows and columns.

In a chart window, the dotted lines spaced at regular intervals in the background. You can use the grid to line up elements in a chart window.


grid lines

Lines that separate cells of a notebook. Also lines extending at regular intervals from axes across a chart frame, dialog window, or toolbar window. Chart grid lines help show the values represented by lines, bars, or areas on 2-D, 3-D, and combination charts.


group

In a notebook window, a series of contiguous sheets gathered together with Insert [image] Name [image] Group of Sheets. To activate the group, click View [image] Group Mode or press Alt+F5; a blue line indicates that Group mode is on and the group is active. Changes made to one sheet in the group affect others while the Group mode is on.

In a chart window, you can select multiple drawn elements and tie them together into one group. You can then move, resize, or change properties of the group as a whole.


handles

Small black squares, also called nibs, that appear on the border of an object when the object is selected. Drag a handle to resize the object. Drag within the selected object to move it.


headers

Information you specify that prints at the top of each notebook page. Use a header to print information such as the page number, file name, date, time, a person's name, a company name, or any text you want at the top of each notebook page.


headings

Descriptive label entries that appear at the top of columns or at the left of rows. You can specify that headings be repeated on the left or top of each printed sheet.


input line

The line below the toolbar where Corel Quattro Pro displays information about the active cell. In Edit mode, the input line shows the data you are entering or editing, and it contains Navigate (for displaying a list of cell names), @ (@functions), {} (macros), X (Cancel), and checkmark (Enter) buttons.


insertion point

A flashing vertical bar indicating where text will be inserted as you type.


label

In a notebook cell, any entry that begins with a letter or a label-prefix character. You can type a label, or it can result from a string formula.

In a chart, entries of any type that you assign to the chart to define plotted values.


label-prefix character

A character preceding a label entry that indicates how to align the entry. A single quote (') left-aligns a label entry, a double quote (") right-aligns it, and a caret (^) centers it.


label series

Cells containing the labels that correspond to the values in a data series. These labels are placed over bars in a bar chart, or over data points in a line chart. In pie and column charts, the label series is the same as the x-axis series, which places a text label next to the data label on each pie slice or column section.


legend

A key displayed beside or beneath a chart that specifies the colors, marker symbols, or fill for each series graphed.


legend series

Label cells that describe what the data in a chart represents. In 2-D and some 3-D charts, these labels appear beside the series markers in the legend box. In many 3-D charts, legend labels appear along the z-axis. In multiple charts, legend labels appear as the "titles" of the sub-charts that represent each data series. Legend labels do not appear in pie and column charts.


Light Table

A resizeable window that displays all the charts in a slide show in miniature form and in the order in which they will appear. Use the Light Table window to change the slide order, transition effect, display time, and transition speed assigned to each slide.


link

A reference to a cell or cells in another notebook, or a DDE or OLE operation with another application. You can also link a custom dialog box control to a notebook cell or another control.

For example, this notebook link refers to cells D6..E7 on sheet C of notebook SALES: [SALES]C:D6..E7. If that selection of cells is named February, you could also enter the link as [SALES]C:February.


link command

A command attached to a dialog object that runs when an event occurs.


locked titles

Columns or rows fixed onscreen at the left and/or above notebook data to serve as identification headings. They remain onscreen when you scroll the notebook sheet.


macro

A sequence of keystrokes or commands, stored in a notebook, that Corel Quattro Pro can run to perform an action. Macros are useful whenever a long or complicated procedure is done frequently.


macro command

One of a set of special commands that can be used within macros.


macro library

A notebook used to store macros. When you run a macro, if it is not stored in the active notebook, Corel Quattro Pro looks for it in any open macro libraries. You designate a notebook as a macro library with the notebook Macro Library property.


master slide

An optional slide selected in the Light Table window of a slide show. The master slide maintains common elements (such as a corporate logo and other chart annotations) and maintains a common background style for all slides in a slide show. The master slide does not display when you run the slide show unless it is also included as a separate slide.


matrix

A rectangular array of numbers used to solve linear formulas and equations. Click Tools [image] Numeric Tools [image] Invert and Tools [image] Numeric Tools [image] Multiply to invert and multiply matrices, respectively.


menu system

The arrangement of options that appear at the top of the Corel Quattro Pro window, and their suboptions and options. You can edit the Corel Quattro Pro menu system.


menu system definition

Notebook cells containing the information that makes up a menu system: menu titles, menu options, their shortcuts, and their underlined letters.


mode

A state the notebook can be in. Actions you take have different effects depending on the current mode. For example, pressing the arrow keys in READY mode moves the selector between cells; doing so in EDIT mode moves the insertion point in the entry. The current mode is shown by an indicator on the Application Bar.


multiple selection

Selections of cells that you select by holding down the Ctrl key while dragging each selection. Any action you perform will affect all the separate selections. You may give the multiple selection a single name (see named cells).


named cells

A selection of cells that has been assigned a name. You can reference such cells by name instead of by coordinates. To name cells, click Insert [image] Name [image] Cells.


noncontiguous selection

Selections of cells that do not touch each other. Select a noncontiguous selection by holding down Ctrl while dragging each selection of cells. You can reference a nontiguous selection in a formula as a list of coordinates separated by commas or you can reference it as a single name.


notebook

A Corel Quattro Pro data file that is a collection of sheets. The default file-name extension for a notebook is .WB3.


numeric format

The format in which Corel Quattro Pro displays a value. To change it for a selected cell or cells, click Format [image] Selection, then click the Numeric Format tab.

Changing the display of a value does not affect the actual value in the cell.


object

Corel Quattro Pro objects are a cell, cells, sheets, notebooks, charts, chart objects, dialog box objects, floating objects, and the application itself. To modify an object, point to it and right-click the mouse (click the Properties option if a QuickMenu appears).


object group

In a chart, a set of objects that have been grouped using the Format [image] Group option.


object ID

The number attached to an object, allowing it to be manipulated by macros and link commands.


Object Inspector

The dialog box or list that appears when you right-click a selected object and click the Properties option in a QuickMenu. Object Inspectors contain properties you can set to change the characteristics of objects.


Objects sheet

The last sheet in a notebook. It contains icons representing the charts, slide shows, and dialog boxes you have created. Double-click the icon on the Objects sheet to edit the object.

To immediately display the Objects sheet, click the QuickTab button [image] at the bottom of the notebook window to the right of the tab scroll controls. Click the QuickTab button again to return to the current notebook sheet.


OLE

Object Linking and Embedding. A method of bringing data objects (such as notebook cells, text selection, chart, drawing or other document element) from one Windows application into another.


OLE object

An object created in another Windows application that can be inserted into Corel Quattro Pro for Windows as a floating object. Double-clicking an OLE object in Corel Quattro Pro starts the application in which the object was created so you can use the object.


operator

A mathematical symbol used in a formula to express a relationship between two values. For example, + and / are operators in the formula +A6+10/B2.


Optimizer

A Corel Quattro Pro tool that lets you solve models for an optimal solution based on constraints. To use it, click Tools [image] Numeric Tools [image] Optimizer.


orientation

The direction that Corel Quattro Pro prints. Landscape orientation prints sideways across the length of the paper and Portrait orientation prints across the width of the paper (the default).


output cells

In a database query operation, an area of the notebook where Corel Quattro Pro copies records that match the specified search criteria. The output cells must include the names of the fields you want copied for those records.

In a parse operation, an area where Corel Quattro Pro copies the parsed data.


sheet

One layer of a notebook. Each notebook has 256 spreadsheet sheets and one Objects sheet. Select sheets using the tabs at the bottom of the notebook.


page break

The place where one printed page ends and another begins. You can have soft page breaks (those that Corel Quattro Pro calculates for you) and hard page breaks (those that you create yourself with Insert [image] Page Break).


pane

Part of a window. In Corel Quattro Pro, you can break a notebook window into two panes and view different parts of the notebook in each.


parse

To split a column of long labels (such as those created by importing a text file) into two or more columns of data, usually by copying the data to a new destination. To do this, use Tools [image] Data Tools [image] QuickColumns.


picture object

A floating object containing an image in the metafile format that was pasted from another application.


play

To give control of an OLE object to its server application by double-clicking the object. The activity that begins when you play an object (such as playing a sound, displaying a slide show, or editing the object) is determined by the server application.


precedence

The order in which operators are handled in a formula. For example, the multiplication operator (*) has a higher precedence than the addition operator (+); values are multiplied first, then added. Use parentheses to override default precedence. For example, in the following expression, the values will be added first, then multiplied: 7*(6+9).


primary notebook

A notebook containing a link to another notebook.


properties

The characteristics of an object. For example, two of a cell's properties are Alignment and Numeric Format. To change the properties of most objects, select the object; then right-click and click the Properties option. A dialog appears, containing a list of the object's properties.


protection

A security measure that prevents the contents of an entire notebook sheet from being changed. Specific cells and floating objects (such as charts and OLE objects) within the sheet can then be unprotected.


Property Bar

Buttons you can press to perform frequent tasks. The Property Bar appears above the column letters, and changes depending on what you are working on. For example, when you are working on a graphic, the Property Bar displays graphics tools. When you are working on a chart, the Property Bar displays chart tools.


query

To find specific information in a database. In Corel Quattro Pro, you use Tools [image] Data Tools [image] Notebook Query or Insert [image] External Data [image] Table Query to look for and extract information in a database. You can also use Insert [image] External Data [image] Database Desktop to query external database tables.


QuickMenu

A menu that appears when you right-click most objects in Corel Quattro Pro that lists common features. For example, if you right-click the selected cells, the QuickMenu menu options such as Cut and Copy.


QuickTemplate

A predesigned template file you can use as the basis for a new notebook when you click File [image] New. QuickTemplates provide the formatting and structural skeleton for some common spreadsheets and data entry forms used in business and at home. You can create your own customized QuickTemplates.


recalculation

The act of recomputing formulas after a change in a notebook. To recalculate a notebook, press F9.


record

A set of information in a database. In a Corel Quattro Pro database, records are rows of data.


regression analysis

A kind of analysis that shows how one set of variables is affected by one or more other sets of variables. To do a regression analysis, click Tools [image] Numeric Tools [image] Regression. For advanced regression analysis, click Tools [image] Numeric Tools [image] Analysis, then click the Advanced Regression tool.


relative cell reference

A cell reference Corel Quattro Pro tracks by its position in relation to the cell containing the formula, not by its absolute address. When you move or copy a formula containing a relative cell reference, the reference is adjusted to reflect its new location.


scale
replacement string

In a search-and-replace operation, the group of characters to replace the find string.


scale

The range of values assigned to an axis and used for plotting data on a chart. Corel Quattro Pro scales each numeric axis to best display the data plotted on it. You can also adjust the scale manually.


scenario

A set of conditions and results displayed in the notebook as changing and result cells. You can create and save groups of scenarios with Tools [image] Scenario [image] New.


secondary y-axis
search criteria

The specification of which field(s) in a database to search and what data to search for. The first row of the criteria table includes fields to use as search keys. The following rows may include exact values and strings or conditional formulas to match.


search criteria
secondary y-axis

An optional vertical scale on the right side of standard (non-rotated) 2-D charts. You can plot any series in 2-D bar, line, variance, and high-low charts on a secondary y-axis. To plot series on the secondary y-axis, right-click a chart series marker and click the Properties option. Click the Series Options tab. Then, click the Secondary setting under Y-Axis. When a chart has a secondary y-axis, the scale on the left side is called the primary y-axis.


selector

The bordered rectangle that indicates the active cell.


sensitivity table

A table that shows the results of varying one or two essential values in a formula. Also called a what-if table, because it shows what would happen to other figures if certain values change. To build one, click Tools [image] Numeric Tools [image] What-If.


series

Cells of data plotted as a group on a chart. Each value in a series is represented by a bar in a bar chart, by a point on a line in a line chart, by a "slice" in a pie chart, and so forth.


series labels

A group of text labels, one of which is placed over each bar in a bar chart, or over each data point in a line chart. To add series labels to a chart, right-click a bar or line, click the Properties item, then in the Label Series box enter a series or click [image] to select cells of labels from the notebook.


server application

The application sending data to another through a DDE or OLE link.


slide show

A series of text and data charts shown full screen in a sequence you choose. You can change the sequence, add transition effects, and control the amount of time each chart stays visible.


sort key

A column used to sort records. In Corel Quattro Pro, you can sort records in a database by the entries in a given field, such as Date. In other applications, sort keys are sometimes called "sort fields."


source cells

The original location of data to be copied or moved to destination cells.


QuickButton

A button you can create to run macros. You can use the QuickButton tool [image] in the Notebook toolbar to create QuickButtons, which float in a notebook sheet. Clicking the QuickButton runs the macro.


QuickTab button

A button at the bottom of the notebook window that jumps back and forth between the current notebook sheet and the Objects sheet, which contains icons for all charts, slide shows, and custom dialog boxes in the notebook.

On notebook sheets A through IV, the QuickTab button looks like this: .

On the Objects sheet, the QuickTab button looks like this: .


QuickTips

An identifying name that appears when you use the mouse to point to an object, such as a toolbar button.


spillover text

Part of a long label displayed in empty cells to the left or right of where the label was entered.


spreadsheet

A sheet of a notebook organized by rows and columns into cells.


startup directory
startup folder

The folder used by default for saving and loading files. The startup folder is the directory from which you installed Corel Quattro Pro unless you specify a different folder with the Folder option of the application File Options property.


style

A set of cell property settings (such as font, shading, and alignment) gathered under a name. You use a style by choosing it from the Style list in the toolbar. You can create new styles with Format [image] Styles.


summary cells

For notebook outlines, the cells containing formulas that summarize (average, subtotal, total, etc.) data in detailed cells.


supporting notebook
supporting file

A file that is referenced by a link from another notebook. The supporting file could be another notebook, another spreadsheet file that Corel Quattro Pro can open, or a file on the Internet.

See also primary notebook.


syntax

The rules for the way formulas, @functions, and macros must be entered.


system notebook

A notebook that, when hidden, remains open when you close all other notebooks. Application developers can use system notebooks to hold application macros and ensure their availability while Corel Quattro Pro is running. To make a notebook a system notebook, click Format [image] Notebook, then click the System tab.


tab

A marker you can click to move to the associated sheet of the notebook. Initially, tabs contain the letters of sheets, but you can specify full sheet names with the sheet Name property. Tabs display at the bottom of the notebook window. Also called sheet tab.


tab scroller
 tab scroll controls

Controls at the bottom-left of a notebook window that work like VCR (video cassette recorder) controls. The first button displays a group of sheets ahead of the active sheet(backward toward the first sheet), the last button at the right displays a group of sheets behind the active sheet (forward toward the last sheet), and the middle buttons move forward and backward one sheet at a time. To move directly to the Objects sheet, click the QuickTab button, the button to the right of the tab scroll controls.


template

A notebook file you can save to use as a basis for other notebooks. You may want to use a template to save standard property settings or column headings, for example.


text box

A graphic design element that can contain word-wrapped text.


tick mark

A small line on a chart axis indicating a value.


titles

In a notebook sheet, row or column headings that you can lock into view.

In a chart window, lines of explanatory text. You can have two major titles above the chart and one each along the x-axis, the y-axis, and the secondary y-axis.


Toolbar

The row of buttons and tools you can click just below the menu bar. The contents of the toolbar change according to the current activity.

To show or hide toolbars, click View [image] Toolbars.

To customize a toolbar, click View [image] Toolbars.

To switch to a different toolbar, right-click the toolbar, then click a toolbar name.


twip

A unit of measurement equal to 1/1440th of an inch.


two's complement notation

A code used to give meaning to a binary string. The sign bit of two's complement notation is the leftmost bit of the word. A number is positive if the sign bit is 0 and negative if it is 1. Negative integers are converted to two's complement by inverting each bit (that is, changing each 1 to a 0 and each 0 to a 1), and then adding 1.


URL

Acronym for Uniform Resource Locator (URL) address. A URL is a convention for naming an Internet resource, such as a World Wide Web page.


value

Any numeric entry in the notebook, entered either as a number, a date, or a formula that calculates a number.


value (of an object)

The current value of a dialog box control.


variable

Part of a formula that can have more than one value. For example, in the formula +B3+8, B3 is a variable whose value changes depending on what is entered in cell B3. The other part of this formula, 8, is a constant. Its value never changes.


what-if table

A table that shows the results of varying one or two essential values in a formula. Also called a sensitivity table, because it is sensitive to value changes. To build one, click Tools [image] Numeric Tools [image] What-If.


wildcard

Placeholder characters that can stand for one or more characters. In Corel Quattro Pro, you can use wildcards in search conditions in a find string, when querying a database, when accessing files, and when linking notebooks. There are two wildcards: * represents any number of characters, and ? represents a single character.


workspace

The arrangement of windows and files in Corel Quattro Pro, including the position and size of windows, and the files contained in each. You can save the current workspace with File [image] Workspace [image] Save. Workspace files have a .WBS file-name extension.


x-axis

The horizontal line, usually at the bottom of a chart, used to plot values.


x-axis series

Cells that contain the labels that are placed at each division of the x-axis. (In XY charts, the x-axis series contains data, instead of labels.) In pie and column charts, the x-axis series places a text label next to the data label on each pie slice or column section.


y-axis

The vertical line, usually at the left of a chart, used to plot values.


z-axis

Present in many 3-D charts, the z-axis projects from the right edge of the x-axis to the back wall of the chart. If a legend series is defined, the legend labels appear along this axis.


zoom factor

The enlargement or reduction of the screen display of cells in a notebook. You can change the zoom factor for the entire notebook or for individual sheets. Percentage settings greater than 100% enlarge cells, and settings under 100% reduce them. Zoom factor settings only affect the screen display, not printed size.


Glossary

Symbols

3-D selection

A

@function

absolute cell reference

active cell

active window

address

ANOVA

ANSI

Application Bar

argument

array

ASCII

aspect ratio

autoload file

axis

B

baseline

binary file

bitmap image

bitmap object

block

border (graphic)

borders (notebook)

C

cell

cell address

cell identifier

cell selector

chart

chart button

chart objects

chart type

chart window

circular reference

client application

Clipboard

command equivalents

command object

Consolidator

constraint

contiguous

controls

coordinates

criteria table

D

database

database cells

data label

data point

data series

date/time number

DDE

destination cells

detailed cells

dimmed

dithered

DLL

Drag and Drop

drill

E

event

Experts

explode

extended selection

extension

F

field

field name

fill

find string

floating chart

floating object

frequency distribution

function

G

graphic element

grid

grid lines

group

H

handles

headers

headings

I

input line

insertion point

L

label

label-prefix character

label series

legend

legend series

Light Table

link

link command

locked titles

M

macro

macro command

macro library

master slide

matrix

menu-equivalent commands

menu system

menu system definition

mode

multiple selection

N

named cells

noncontiguous selections

notebook

numeric format

O

object

object group

object ID

Object Inspector

Objects sheet

OLE

OLE object

operator

Optimizer

orientation

output cells

P

page break

pane

parse

picture object

play

precedence

primary notebook

properties

Property Bar

protection

Q

query

QuickButton

QuickMenu*

QuickTab button

QuickTemplate

QuickTips

R

recalculation

record

regression analysis

relative cell reference

replacement string

S

scale

scenario

search criteria

secondary y-axis

selector

sensitivity table

series

series labels

server application

sheet

slide show

sort key

source cells

spillover text

spreadsheet

startup folder

style

summary cells

supporting file

syntax

system notebook

T

tab

tab scroll controls

template

text box

tick mark

titles

toolbar

two's complement notation

U

URL

V

value

value (of an object)

variable

 W

what-if table

wildcard

workspace

X

x-axis

x-axis series

Y

y-axis

Z

z-axis

zoom factor


Keyboard Techniques

Throughout Corel Quattro Pro documentation, instructions emphasize the use of a mouse. The following topics list Corel Quattro Pro keyboard commands:

Special Keys

Edit Mode Keys

Point Mode Keys

Print Preview Keys

Navigation Keys

Function Keys

Formula Composer Keys

Related Topics


Special Keys

The following keys provide useful shortcuts for many Corel Quattro Pro tasks:

Key(s)	Description
Ctrl+N	File [image] New
Ctrl+O	File [image] Open
Ctrl+W	File [image] Close
Ctrl+S	File [image] Save
Ctrl+P	File [image] Print
Ctrl+Q	File [image] Exit
Ctrl+Z	Edit [image] Undo
Ctrl+X	Edit [image] Cut
Ctrl+C	Edit [image] Copy
Ctrl+V	Edit [image] Paste
Ctrl+B	Boldface
Ctrl+I	Italic
Ctrl+E	Center
Ctrl+U	Underline
Ctrl+L	Left align
Ctrl+R	Right align
Alt+Right Arrow	Displays a list of formats to apply to the selected cells; equivalent to clicking the SpeedFormat button.
Backspace	Erases the character to the left of the cursor.
Caps Lock	Enters Caps mode, in which all letters you type are displayed in uppercase letters. Press again to exit Caps mode.
Ctrl+Backspace	Clears an existing entry in a dialog box, or on the input line in Edit mode.
Ctrl+Break	If pressed while a macro is executing, terminates the macro.
Del	Erases the contents (but not properties) of the current cell or selected cells. To delete both contents and properties, use Edit [image] Clear.
Ctrl+Del	In Group mode, acts like Del, but "drills" the deletion through the group (deletes the selected cell, cells, or object on all grouped sheets).
/ (Slash)	Activates the active menu system, set with the Tools [image] Settings Macro [image] Slash Key option.
\ (Backslash)	Lets you enter one or more characters to repeat across an entire cell width.
Enter	In the notebook, writes the entry on the input line into the current cell and returns to Ready mode. In a menu, choice list, or dialog box, chooses the highlighted item.
Esc	Cancels whatever you are doing. For example, it can back you out of a menu, exit a dialog box, or erase any changes you made in the input line.
Num Lock	Toggles performance of the numeric keypad keys between numeric keys and direction keys.
Pause	Enters macro Debug mode.
Scroll Lock	Toggles performance of the arrow keys. When you first press Scroll Lock, the SCR indicator displays and the arrow keys scroll the contents of the active window without moving the selector. When you press it again you can move the selector with the arrow keys.
Ctrl+PgDn or PgUp	Moves from one sheet to the next or previous sheet; In a dialog box with multiple settings, changes panes (groups of property options).
Ctrl+Shift+PgDn or PgUp	Selects multiple sheets.
Up or Down Arrows	In a dialog box edit field, enters Point mode.
Tab	In the notebook, moves right one cell. In a dialog box, moves between controls. In a chart window, inserts a tab space in text boxes; use Ctrl+Tab to select the next object.
Shift+Tab	In the notebook, moves left one cell. In a dialog box, moves to the previous control. In a chart window, moves to the start of the current word in a text box; use Ctrl+Shift+Tab to select the previous object.
Ctrl+Left	In the notebook, moves left one screen.
Ctrl+Right	In the notebook, moves right one screen.
Ctrl+Shift+F	Displays a list of formats to apply to the selected cells; equivalent to clicking the SpeedFormat button (same as pressing Alt+Right Arrow).
Ctrl+Shift+L	Displays a list of series names you can choose to fill cells with a sequence of entries; equivalent to clicking the QuickFill button.
Ctrl+Shift+S	Displays a list of styles to apply to the selected cells.
Related Topics


Edit Mode Keys

The following keys are available when Corel Quattro Pro is in Edit mode.

Key(s)	Function
Esc	Exits Edit mode; if Tools [image] Settings [image] General [image] Compatible Keys is checked, the first Esc erases the contents of the input line, and a second Esc exits Edit mode.
Enter	Enters the data and exits Edit mode.
Ctrl+Enter	In Group mode, acts like Enter, but "drills" data through all grouped sheets at once.
Up	Moves the insertion point up a line (if data is wrapped on more than one line). If Tools [image] Settings [image] General [image] Compatible Keys is checked, Up enters the data, exits Edit mode, and moves up one cell. When the insertion point follows an operator in a formula, enters Point mode.
Down	Moves the insertion point down a line (if data is wrapped on more than one line). If Tools [image] Settings [image] General [image] Compatible Keys is checked, Down enters the data, exits Edit mode, and moves down one cell. When the insertion point follows an operator in a formula, enters Point mode.
PgDn	Enters the data, exits Edit mode, and moves down one screen. When the insertion point follows an operator in a formula, enters Point mode.
PgUp	Enters the data, exits Edit mode, and moves up one screen. When the insertion point follows an operator in a formula, enters Point mode.
Ins	Toggles between Insert and Overwrite modes. (Insert is the default.)
Backspace	Deletes characters to the left of the insertion point.
Del	Deletes characters to the right of the insertion point, or the selected cells, or a floating object.
Ctrl+Backspace	Erases the contents of the input line.
Tab or Ctrl+Right	Moves to the next word (or five spaces to the right if Tools [image] Settings [image] General [image] Compatible Keys is checked).
Shift+Tab or Ctrl+Left	Moves to the previous word (or five spaces to the left if Tools [image] Settings [image] General [image] Compatible Keys is checked).
Ctrl+Shift+Right	Highlights from the insertion point to the next word (or highlights five characters to the right of the insertion point if if Tools [image] Settings [image] General [image] Compatible Keys is checked.
Ctrl+Shift+Left	Highlights from the insertion point to the previous word (or highlights five characters to the left of the insertion point if Tools [image] Settings [image] General [image] Compatible Keys is checked.
F2	Toggles to display an indicator on the Application Bar that tells you what type of data you are editing--either value or label.
F3	With the insertion point positioned after an operator, displays a list of cell names.
Shift+F3	Displays a list of macro commands.
Alt+F3	Displays a list of @functions.
F9	Calculates and then displays result of formulas on the input line.
Related Topics


Point Mode Keys

The following keys are available when Corel Quattro Pro is in point mode.

Key(s)	Function
Period key + cells	To point to cells, move to one corner, press the period key to "anchor" the cells, move to the opposite corner, then press Enter.
	To extend the selection from a different corner of the highlighted cells, press the period key to move clockwise around the corners of the selection.
Enter	Enters the highlighted cells in the formula or dialog box and exits Point mode.
Esc	If pressed while pointing to cells, returns you to the anchor cell.
Backspace	If pressed while pointing to cells, returns you to the cell that was current before you entered Point mode.
F4	Makes the cell address to the left of the cursor absolute. Press repeatedly to cycle through the absolute combinations; for example, $A:$B$4, $A:B$4. (Does not disturb the position of the selector.)
Alt+F5	Toggles Group mode.
F6	If the window is split into two panes, jumps to the other pane.
Ctrl+F6	If multiple windows are open, jumps to the next window.
Related Topics


Print Preview Keys

The following table lists keys you can use while previewing:

Key	Effect
Esc	Exits the preview.
F1	Displays online help.
PgUp	Displays the previous sheet.
PgDn	Displays the next sheet.
+	(plus key) Zooms in a level, increasing detail.
-	(minus key) Zooms out a level, decreasing detail.
Up arrow	Scrolls the zoomed display up.
Down arrow	Scrolls the zoomed display down.
Right arrow	Scrolls the zoomed display right.
Left arrow	Scrolls the zoomed display left.
Home	Displays the top left of a zoomed sheet.
End	Displays the bottom right of a zoomed sheet.
Related Topics


Navigation Keys

The following keys let you move easily through Corel Quattro Pro notebooks.

Key(s)	Description
Left arrow	Moves left one cell.
Right arrow	Moves right one cell.
Up arrow	Moves up one cell.
Down arrow	Moves down one cell.
Ctrl+PgDn	Moves forward one sheet.
Ctrl+PgUp	Moves backward one sheet.
PgUp	Moves up one screen.
PgDn	Moves down one screen.
Home	Moves to upper left cell (A1) of the active sheet.
Ctrl+Home	Moves to upper left cell (A1) of the first sheet.
End+Home	Moves to lower right corner of the non-blank part of the notebook sheet.
End+Ctrl+Home	Moves to the last nonblank cell in the notebook.
End + arrow key	If in a filled cell, the selector moves in the direction of the arrow to the next non-blank cell before an empty one; if the next cell in the direction of the arrow is empty, moves to the next filled cell in that direction.
Tab	In the notebook, moves right one cell. In a dialog box, Tab moves between controls. In a chart window, Tab inserts a tab space in text boxes; use Ctrl+Tab to select the next object.
Shift+Tab	In the notebook, moves left one cell. In a dialog box, Shift+Tab moves to the previous control. In a chart window, Shift+Tab moves to the start of the current word in a text box; use Ctrl+Shift+Tab to select the previous object.
Ctrl+Left arrow	Moves left one screen.
Ctrl+Right arrow	Moves right one screen.
F5 (Go To)	Moves to the cell you specify.
Related Topics


Function Keys

The following list describes the use of each function key when pressed alone, or together with the Control, Shift,or Alt keys.

Key(s)	Description
F1	Opens Help.
Shift+F1	Displays a question mark (?) and a pointer, so you can click an item you want information about. For example, click Shift+F1, then click a Toolbar button, and help information for that button appears.  You can use Shift+F1 to find information about Toolbar buttons, property bar items, sheet tabs, row or column indicators, scroll bars, cells, etc.
Ctrl+F1	Opens the Spell Checker.
F2	Activates Edit mode so you can change a cell entry.
Shift+F2	Activates Debug mode so you can execute a macro step by step.
Alt+F2	Displays the Tools [image] Macro [image] Play dialog box.
Ctrl+F2	Opens the Formula Composer.
F3	When you are prompted for cells, or in Edit mode with the insertion point positioned after an operator, displays a list of cell names. To expand the list to show their coordinates, press the Expand key (+). Press the Contract key (-) to remove coordinates. Press F3 again to "zoom" the names list to full screen or to shrink it back down.
Shift+F3	Displays a list of available macros, by category.
Alt+F3	In Value or Edit mode, displays a list of @functions, by category.
Ctrl+F3	Lets you create a named cell or cell area.
F4	In Edit, Value, or Point mode, makes the cell address to the left of the cursor absolute. Press repeatedly to cycle through the eight absolute combinations; for example, $A:$B$4, $A:B$4. You can use F4 when entering or editing a formula. You can also use it in Point mode without disturbing the position of the selector.
Alt+F4	Exits Corel Quattro Pro.
Ctrl+F4	Closes a window (notebook, dialog box, chart window, Light Table window, or dialog window).
F5	Moves the selector to a specified cell address.
Shift+F5	Works like the QuickTab button; displays the Objects sheet, then returns to a spreadsheet sheet.
Alt+F5	Switches Group mode on and off.
F6	If the window is split into two panes, jumps to the other pane.
Shift+F6	Displays the previous open window
Ctrl+F6	Displays the next open window.
F7	Repeats the previous Query command.
Shift+F7	Press Shift+F7 and use the arrow keys to select cells of text in Ext mode.
F8	Repeats the last Tools [image] Numeric Tools [image] What-If command.
Shift+F8	Outline Group
Ctrl+F8	Outline Ungroup
F9	In Ready mode, recalculates the notebook. In Edit mode, calculates and then displays result of formulas on the input line. For example, if you type 8*9 on the input line, then press F9, Corel Quattro Pro replaces the formula with the result, 72. To recalculate the entire notebook afterwards, press F9 again in Ready mode.
Shift+F9	Expand Outline Group
Ctrl+F9	Collapse Outline Group
F10	Works like / or Alt; moves the selector to the menu bar.
Shift+F10	Shortcut to RtClick Menu
F11	Displays the current chart.
F12	Displays the properties for the selected object.
Shift+F12	Displays the properties for the active window.
Alt+F12	Displays the properties for the application.
Ctrl+F12	Displays the properties of the active sheet
Related Topics


Formula Composer Keys

The following list describes the shortcut keys available when working in the formula outline pane of the Formula Composer.

Key(s)	Description
Ctrl++	Expands the outline one level.
Ctrl+*	Expands the whole outline for the formula.
Ctrl+-	Collapses the current branch of the outline.
Ctrl+F	Goes to a referenced cell in the formula.
Ctrl+B	Returns to the previous cell containing a formula that references the current cell.
Ctrl+E	Converts the current expression to a value.
Ctrl+O	Replaces the current expression with an @function.
Ctrl+P	Switches to Point mode to specify a cell reference by pointing to a cell (or cells) on a notebook sheet.
Ctrl+N	Replaces the current expression with a cell name.
Related Topics


Link Command Examples

Each of the following topics shows sample link commands for a control:

Bitmap Button Link Examples

Check Box Link Examples

Color Control Link Examples

Combo Box Link Examples

Edit Field Link Examples

Edit Integer Link Examples

File Control Link Examples

Group Box Link Examples

Horizontal Scroller Link Examples

List Box Link Examples

Pick List Link Examples

Push Button Link Examples

Radio Button Link Examples

Scroller Link Examples

Spin Control Link Examples

Time Control Link Examples

Related Topics


Bitmap Button Link Examples

ON	Clicked	EXECUTE	Warning2:	execute

Displays the dialog box named Warning2 when the bitmap button is clicked.

ON	Clicked	DOMACRO	{_graph_data}

Runs the macro named _graph_data when the bitmap button is clicked.

ON	Init	SET	Yes	TO	BitmapButton1	Hidden

Hides the bitmap button named BitmapButton1 when the dialog box initially displays.

Related Topics


Check Box Link Examples

ON	Valuechanged	SEND	Value	TO	Active_Page	Conditional_Color.Enable

Enables or disables conditional colors in the active sheet whenever the check box is checked or unchecked.

ON	Init	RECEIVE	Label_Text	FROM	A:C23	Value

Sets the text appearing by the check box button when the dialog box initially displays. The text is taken from the cell A:C23.

Related Topics


Color Control Link Examples

ON	Init	RECEIVE	Value	FROM	Active_Notebook	Palette.Color_4

Sets the color control to the fourth color of the active notebook's palette when the dialog box displays.

ON	Init	SET	3	TO	Active_Block	Text_Color

Sets active cells' text color to the fourth color on the notebook palette when the dialog box initially displays (3 is sent because the settings for the text color property start at zero: 0 for the first color, 1 for the second, and so on).

ON	Valuechanged	SEND	Value	TO	Active_Notebook	Palette.Color_4

Changes the fourth color of the active notebook's color palette whenever the color control's value is changed.

Related Topics


Combo Box Link Examples

ON	Dynamic	SEND	Value	TO	Label5	Label_Font.TypeFace

Sets the typeface of the label named Label5 as the user scrolls through the combo box's list of items.

ON	Clicked	DOMACRO	{_refresh_query}

When the user clicks an item in the combo box, or highlights an item and presses Enter, this link command runs the macro named _refresh_query. Any keystroke commands in the macro affect the active window.

ON	Valuechanged	DOMACRO	{_refresh_query}

When the user changes the combo box's value, this link command runs the macro named _refresh_query. Any keystroke commands in the macro affect the combo box, not the active window.

Related Topics


Edit Field Link Examples

ON	Trigger	RECEIVE	Value	FROM	Active_Block	Font.Point_Size

Displays the point size of the active cells (or cell). This link command is triggered by another link command (see Time Control Link Examples for an example of a link command that does this).

ON	Valuechanged	SEND	Value	TO	Active_Block	String_Value

As the user types text into the edit field, the text is copied into the active cell and stored there as a label (using the String_Value property).

ON	Enter	SEND	Value	TO	Active_Block	Value

When the user types text into the edit field and presses Enter, the text is entered into the active cell exactly as it was typed by the user.

Related Topics


Edit Integer Link Examples

ON	Enter	SEND	Value	TO	A:A34	Number_Value

Sends the edit field's value to A:A34 whenever the user presses Enter.  Using Number_Value ensures that the entry is always stored as a value.

ON	Enter	SEND	Value	TO	EditInteger3	Maximum

If the edit field is named EditInteger3, this link command sets the edit field's maximum acceptable value to the current value whenever the user presses Enter. This is handy for setting up an edit field that has no maximum value, but still has a minimum value (set by the Minimum property).

Related Topics


File Control Link Examples

ON	Init	SET	*.BDG	TO	FileCtrl6	Value

Sets the initial wildcard displayed by the file control named FileCtrl6. All files with the extension BDG are displayed.

ON	Init	SET	C:\FILES\	TO	FileCtrl6	Value

Sets the initial directory displayed by the file control named FileCtrl6 to FILES on the C drive.

Related Topics


Group Box Link Examples

ON	Valuechanged	SEND	Value	TO	Label5	Label_Text

Sets the text of the label named Label5 whenever a different radio button in the group box is chosen.

ON	Valuechanged	RECEIVE	Group_Text	FROM	GroupBox2	Value

Sets the title of the group box named GroupBox2 whenever the value is changed.

Related Topics


Horizontal Scroller Link Examples

ON Valuechanged SEND Value TO Active_Block Value

Sets the active cell to the scroll bar's value.

ON	Init	RECEIVE	Value	FROM	A:C67	Value

Sets the initial value of the scroll bar to the value stored in A:C67.

Related Topics


List Box Link Examples

ON	Init	RECEIVE	List	FROM	A:A25	Value

Sets the list displayed to the cells stored as a label in cell A:A25 when the dialog box initially displays.

ON	Trigger	RECEIVE	List	FROM	A:A25	Value

Sets the list displayed to the cells stored as a label in cell A:A25 when another control uses the link command TRIGGER to generate the trigger event.

Related Topics


Pick List Link Examples

ON	Init	SET	Blocks	TO	PickList5	Title

Sets the title of the pick list button named PickList5 to Blocks when the the dialog box initially displays.

ON	Clicked	DOMACRO	{_new_display}

Runs the macro _new_display when the pick list is clicked.

Related Topics


Push Button Link Examples

ON	Clicked	DOMACRO	{BRANCH _refresh_view}

Runs the macro named _refresh_view whenever the button is clicked.

ON	Clicked	TRIGGER	ListBox6 Trigger

Makes the list box named ListBox6 run any link commands attached to it that respond to the event Trigger.

Related Topics


Radio Button Link Examples

ON	Activate	DOMACRO	{MESSAGE A:A1..C3,0,0,0}

Displays the message stored in the cells A:A1..C3 whenever the radio button is selected by the user.

ON	Init	RECEIVE	Label_Text	FROM	A:C3	Value

Sets the initial text appearing by the radio button to whatever is stored in cell A:C3.

Related Topics


Scroller Link Examples

ON	Valuechanged	SEND	Value	TO	Active_Block	Text_Color

Sets the text color of the active cell (or cells) whenever the scroll bar's value is changed. Make sure the scroll bar is restricted to the range 0 through 15.

ON	Valuechanged	SEND	Value	TO	Active_Notebook	Zoom_Factor

Sends the value of the scroll bar to the active notebook's Zoom Factor property. Make sure the scroll bar is restricted to the range 25 through 200.

Related Topics


Spin Control Link Examples

ON	Valuechanged	SEND	Value	TO	Active_Block	Shading.Blend

Sets the shading blend of the active cell or cells. Make sure the spin control is restricted to the range 0 through 6.

ON	Valuechanged	SEND	Value	TO	Rectangle2	Dimension.Height

Sets the height of the rectangle named Rectangle2 whenever the spin control's value changes.

Related Topics


Time Control Link Examples

ON	Timer	TRIGGER	EditField6	Trigger

Tells the edit field named EditField6 to run any link commands attached to it that respond to the event Trigger. Use this to create edit fields that constantly retrieve settings from the active object (cells, notebook, sheet, and so on).

ON	Alarm	DOMACRO	{MESSAGE A:A1..C3,0,0,0}

Displays a message stored in the cells A:A1..C3 when the time specified in the time control's Alarm Time property is reached.

Related Topics


Displays the list of chart categories. Choose from Bar, Rotated Bar, Pie, Line Or Area, Specialty, Templates.


Displays examples of chart styles for the selected category. When you select a style, the picture of your chart on the right side of the Chart Gallery dialog box updates to reflect your selection.


Displays the list of color schemes. The color scheme you select determines colors used for all chart elements and objects. Click No Change to not use a color scheme. If you selected Templates for the chart category, Color Scheme is unavailable.


Opens an Advisor dialog box appropriate for the chart category you selected. The Advisor presents a selection of styles based on stylistic criteria you specify.


Displays examples of template styles, which provide a background style for charts. Templates also affect the position, size, and color of chart titles and bulleted text.


Slide the boxes left or right to choose whether to chart the data series individually or together.


Slide the boxes left or right to choose whether the chart style should highlight differences in the data series or trends.


Slide the boxes left or right to choose whether you want the chart style to be simple or fancy.


Sets the number of data series (or columns) that you are graphing.


Sets the number of data points (or rows) per series that you are graphing.


Suggests appropriate chart styles given the constraints you specified.


Displays suggested chart styles after you click Advise. Select a style and click Apply.


Applies the selected style to your chart or slide.


Slide the boxes left or right to choose between informal and formal templates.


Slide the boxes left or right to choose between entertaining and serious templates.


Slide the boxes left or right to choose between sophisticated and simple templates.


Slide the boxes left or right to choose between vivid and subdued templates.


Slide the boxes left or right to choose between plain and fancy templates.


Check this box if you want the Advisor to suggest slide templates appropriate for viewing onscreen.


Check this box if you want the Advisor to suggest slide templates appropriate for viewing on paper in black and white.


Check this box if you want the Advisor to suggest slide templates appropriate for viewing on black and white transparencies.


Check this box if you want the Advisor to suggest slide templates appropriate for viewing in 35 millimeter slides.


Check this box if you want the Advisor to suggest slide templates appropriate for viewing on paper in color.


Check this box if you want the Advisor to suggest slide templates appropriate for viewing color transparencies.


Check this box if you want the Advisor to suggest slide templates appropriate for viewing in a darkened room.


Check this box if you want the Advisor to suggest slide templates appropriate for viewing in a lighted room.


Suggests appropriate template styles given the constraints you specified.


Displays suggested template styles after you click Advise. Select a style and click Apply.


Applies the selected template style to your chart or slide.


CChoose a category from the drop down list. The Chart types for that category appear below.


CSelect a chart type. The name of the chart appears below.


Specifies the cell coordinates of the data series of the chart. A series can be a single cell, cells next to each other, or groups of cells that are not next to each other. Type the cell coordinates in the series edit fields, or click [image] to select cells in the notebook.


Adds a series after the selected series.


Deletes the selected series.


Plots the last series first, then moves backward through the series order. This is useful in 3-D bar and unstacked area charts, for example, when a series with high values is plotted at the front of the chart, covering other series.


Plots columns as series when Corel Quattro Pro assigns series by rows, and plots rows as series when Corel Quattro Pro would plot columns. Row/column swap also puts x-axis series labels in the legend, and places legend series labels along the x-axis.


Type the main title (available in all numeric chart types). The main title appears above the chart.


Type the subtitle (available in all numeric chart types). The subtitle appears above the chart, directly beneath the main title.


Type the x-axis title (available in all numeric charts with axes). The x-axis title runs along the bottom of the chart (unless the axes are reversed or the chart is rotated).


Type the primary y-axis title (available in all numeric charts with axes). The y-axis title appears along the left side of the chart (unless the axes are reversed or the chart is rotated).


Type the secondary y-axis title (available in all numeric charts with axes except 3-D charts).


Specifies the graphics file to use. Type a filename or click [image] to select a graphics file from a different drive or directory, or specify a different format (BMP is the default).


Choose the compression method that the target application for this file can accept: PackBits or None (no compression).


Check this box to convert the colors in the chart to levels of gray. This is useful if you plan to import this file into a program that can accept only gray scale TIF files.


Displays the name of the current overlay, and lets you switch between overlays when the map contains more than one overlay.


Lets you add an overlay to the map.


Deletes the current overlay from the map.


Type the cell coordinates for the map region names in your notebook, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook. If you do not specify map region names, you cannot display data in your map.


Type the cell coordinates for the color data series in your notebook, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook. If you do not specify color data series, your map will not contain any colored regions.


Type the cell coordinates for the pattern data series in your notebook, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook. If you do not specify pattern data series, your map will not contain any patterned regions.


Corel Quattro Pro recognizes many major city names so you don’t have to specify latitude and longitude to mark those location on your map. Location names recognized by Corel Quattro Pro are called Pin Names. Each sample notebook in the MAPDATA directory includes a list of regional pin names.

Type the cell coordinates for the Pin Names in your notebook, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.


If you want to display labels next to the points you mark on the map, type the cell coordinates for the Pin Labels in your notebook, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.


Type the cell coordinates for the Latitude series in your notebook, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.


Type the cell coordinates for the Longitude series in your notebook, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.


Click this button to display pin names as labels in your map, instead of entering the same coordinates in both the Pin Name and Pin Label fields.


Select the region overlay you want to add to the map, then click OK.


Select the static overlay you want to add to the map, then click OK.

Static overlays do not require any notebook data, and you cannot change their content. They display only if they are appropriate for the current map. For example, a static overlay of U.S. highways is not appropriate for a map of Japan.


Click this button if you want to use pin names from a notebook in the DATAMAPS subdirectory, then select one of the predefined pin overlays below.


Click this button to apply latitude and longitude coordinates from a notebook.


Select a predefined pin overlay.


Type a custom name for the pin overlay that will use latitude and longitude coordinates from a notebook.


Type the main title of the map.


Type the subtitle of the map.


Type the title for the map legend.


Click Automatic to automatically redraw a map after each change to map data. Click Manual to redraw a map only when you click the Redraw button below; use Manual redraw mode to prevent interruptions while editing map data.


Click this button to redraw the map.


Specifies the cells to be sorted, including row labels, if any, but excluding column headings. Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.


Specifies up to five sort keys, in the order they are to be sorted. For example, if you want to sort a sales prospect file, the first key might be postal code and the second key might be last name. Corel Quattro Pro guesses what headings you want to sort by. Click the arrow to choose from your headings.


Check this box to sort in ascending order from smallest to largest (A-Z and 0-9). To sort in descending order, uncheck the box.


The Top to bottom setting sorts data down the column. The Left to right setting sorts data across rows.


Lets you sort blank cells first or sort numbers last. Also, if you included headings in the Sort Cells box, and you do not want the headings included in the sort, click that option.


Clears all entries and restores defaults.


Lets you sort blank cells first, sort numbers last, sort from left to right instead of top to bottom, and so on.


Click the arrow to choose a sort you did previously.


Select if your sort cells contain headings you do not want to be sorted.


Specifies the cells to fill with values. Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.


Sets the first value in the series. Enter a number, a formula, a date, or a time.


Sets the constant value to add (or multiply or use as an exponent) with the Start value or the previous value.


Sets the limit for the fill values.


The Column setting fills by moving down columns, starting with the leftmost column. The Row setting fills across rows, starting with the top row.


The type of fill operation to perform. If the Start value is a number or a formula, you can choose Linear (addition), Growth (multiplication), or Power (exponentiation). If the Start value is a date or time, addition is assumed, and you can use one of the remaining Series settings to determine the time unit (Year, Month, and so on) to use.


Lists the defined series. To create a new fill series, click Create.


Lets you define a new series.


Lets you change the values in the selected series.


Deletes the selected series.


Changes the name for the selected series.


The name of the current series you are defining; the name can be up to 200 characters.


SList creates a series consisting of a list of values. When List is selected, the Series Element options appear. Formula creates a series consisting of a sequence of formulas. When Formula is selected, the Formula Definition options appear.


Check this box to repeat the list of values in order to fill cells. If the Series Type selected is Formula, this option is unavailable.


Enter and edit series values. After you type a new value, click Add to add the value to the series. Each value can be up to 200 characters.


Draws values from a selected cells on a notebook sheet.


Changes a selected value in the series. Select a value from the list, edit the value in the text box, then choose Modify.


Removes a value from the series. Select the value from the series list, and click Delete.


Inserts a value before the selected value in the series list.


Adds a value after the selected value in the series list.


Sets the starting value used as a constant in the formula. Seed Value can be any decimal value; a Seed Value that is a string is evaluated as 0.


Specifies a formula used to define a series of values. The formula can include @functions. The formula can use arithmetic operators (such as - and +) and logical operators (such as <, >, and #OR#); You can also use the Seed, Previous, and Iteration buttons to insert a specific constant or variable into the formula.


Inserts a variable into the formula representing the value of the iteration number in the series list (for example, 1, 2, 3, and so on). The iteration number variable is represented by #ITER#.


Inserts the seed value constant into the formula expression. The seed value constant is represented by #SEED#.


Inserts a variable into the formula representing the value of the previous element in the series list. The previous element variable is represented by #PREV#.


Cells that are used as the source for the series. Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.


When checked, replaces any existing series values with the values in the source cells.


Displays the series name. If the series type is List, a Repeating check box appears. When checked, this option repeats the list of values to fill cells.


Type a name for the defined series (up to 200 characters).


Lists saved consolidation setups. To switch to another consolidation setup, choose a name from this list.


Lists the cells the consolidation operates on.


Adds an entry to the Source Cells list. You can choose cells from another notebook.


Removes an entry from the Source Cells list so it will not be part of the consolidation.


Saves the current consolidation setup (source cells, destination cells, and operator). The saved consolidation setup appears in the Conslidations list. Consolidation setups are saved with the active notebook, not as separate files.


Deletes the selected setup in the Consolidations list.


Specifies the operations to perform on the source cells. Choose between these operations: SUM, AVG, COUNT, MIN, MAX, STD, STDS, VAR, and VARS. These operations work like @functions of the same name. For more information, see the Corel Quattro Pro @Function Reference in online help.


Sets the cells to contain the consolidation results. Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.

The destination cells can contain column and/or row labels. You can use labels in the destination cells to sort the consolidated data.


Determines whether consolidation results appear as formulas or values.


Check this box if your source cells contain labels in the top row. When you consolidate the data, Corel Quattro Pro matches data from different cells based on the column labels.

The destination cells can contain column labels, also. You can use labels in the destination cells to sort the consolidated data.


Check this box if your source cells contain labels in the left column. When you consolidate the data, Corel Quattro Pro matches data from different cells based on the row labels.

The destination cells can contain row labels, also. You can use labels in the destination cells to sort the consolidated data.


Performs the consolidation of the source cells, placing the results in the specified destination cells, then closes the dialog box.


Type the name of the consolidation.


Determines how the data will be combined. Copy inserts data from a file into the active notebook; the other options determine the operations to be performed on combined data.


Click Entire File to copy the entire file into the existing one. Click Cell(s) to copy a specified cell(s) of the file. If you click Cell(s), type a cell name or coordinates in the edit field. You can also specify multiple groups of cells by separating them with commas. (Because the cell names are from another file, you cannot display a list of the names.)


Specifies the coordinates or name of the group of cells to be saved. Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells rom the notebook.


Specifies the password to assign to the saved file.


Saves an exact copy of the cells, including formulas.


Converts formulas to their resulting values in the extracted file.


Specifies the data to use when creating crosstab reports. Type the cell coordinates or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.


Specifies the target cells for the results from Data Modeling Desktop. Type the cell coordinates or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.


Specifies whether data will dynamically change when the database is updated. Click Hot to dynamically update data.


Type the name of the column containing each row's page identifier. "Page" is the default column name.

When Data Modeling Desktop copies the 3-D cells of data from the notebook, it uses this column to identify the page where each row originated.


Type the names of the notebook pages being sent to Data Modeling Desktop. You can use their given names, or change the page names for the crosstab report. Be sure to separate the page names with semicolons.


Specifies the data, including field names, to search. Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.


Specifies the cells containing search conditions, including field names. Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.


Specifies the cells where you want to copy field names and records that meet the criteria. Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.


Highlights all records that meet the search criteria.


Copies all records that meet the search criteria to the output cells.


Copies records like Extract, but skips duplicate records.


Deletes all records that meet the search criteria.


Assigns cell names to fields so you can use them in search formulas.


Removes all selection settings (Database Cells, Criteria Table, and Output Cells). It does not affect the criteria cells or output cells in your notebook, only the dialog box settings.


Specifies an external query file (with Query in File) or cells in the active notebook (with Query in Selection) as the source of the query text.


Specifies the file name (if you specified Query in File) or cell coordinates (if you specified Query in Selection) of the query text.

If running a query from a file, type the QBE filename, or click [image] to select the file from another folder.

If running a query from cells, be sure to include all rows in the column that contain text; type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.


Specifies the target cells for the query's Answer table (its results). Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.


Specifies cells where you want the linked table to appear. To show the whole table, type a cell reference for the upper left cell of the cells. To show only a portion of the table, specify cells consisting of several columns and rows. Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.


Sets the filename of the database table to which you want to establish a link. Click [image] to select a database table from another folder.


Type the complete path of your private directory, for temporary files.


Type the complete path of your working directory, where external data files are located.


Type the name of the text file you want to import, or click [image] to select a file.


Imports a plain, unformatted text file. Corel Quattro Pro converts the data into a single column of labels. Each line in the file becomes a label.

You can break up the single column entries into separate columns with Data [image] Parse.


Imports a file containing text enclosed in double quotes. Fields are delimited by commas or slashes to separate text in rows. The delimiters are used to place text in columns in the notebook sheet.


Imports a file delimited only with commas.


Imports a text file and breaks it into columns (database fields) at the same time. You may need to do some editing when the parse is complete.


Click this drop-down control to specify whether the Source is a group os cells or a file.


Enter the cells where you want to copy the parsed text. Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.


Click this button to load parse settings you previously saved.

Corel Quattro Pro saves parse settings in files that end with a .QPX extension.

To change parse settings, click the Options button.


Click this button to save the current parse settings.

Corel Quattro Pro saves parse settings in files that end with a .QPX extension.

To change parse settings, click the Options button.


Click this button to restore the previous parse settings.


Parses the text and copies it as data to the destination cells.


Sets text parse options that let you format the destination data, specify delimiters, and skip extra rows.


Displays a preview of how the text will be parsed.


Click this button to specify options for parsing an individual row.

Parse (the default) parses the row.

Skip skips the row.

Label copies the row to the destination cells as an unparsed label.


Displays the previous instance of a row that does not follow the same parsing rules as the rows surrounding it.


Displays the next instance of a row that does not follow the same parsing rules as the rows surrounding it.


Specifies the alignment of data in the selected column. Select Left, Right, or Center.


Specifies the numeric format of values in the selected column. Click Skip to ignore the column when parsing.


Specifies the number of decimal places to show in the selected column when it is using a numeric format.


Check this box to specify that the column format and alignment specified in the Preview pane should be applied to the destination cells.


Check this box to specify that the column widths specified in the Preview pane should be applied to the destination cells.


Check the box when the text contains rows at regular intervals that you want to skip or copy directly to the destination cells as unparsed labels. Type the number of lines of text on each page.

For example, if a file contains a header row that appears every 60 lines, check the box and type 60 in the edit field.

You can use the Preview pane to specify whether header rows are skipped or copied to the destination cells as unparsed labels.


Specifies which additional parse options are displayed.

Delimited displays options for text enclosed by comma, quotes, tabs, and so on.

Fixed Width displays options for text lined up in fixed width columns.


Specifies that text is separated by tab characters.


Specifies that text is separated by commas. The QuickColumns Expert parses the data based on its appearance (numbers are parsed into values, non-numerical data is parsed into labels, and so on).


Specifies that text is separated by commas and text data is enclosed in quotes. Text in quotes is always parsed as a label and can include commas. Unquoted data is parsed based on its appearance (numbers are parsed into values, non-numerical data is parsed into labels, and so on).


Specifies that text is separated by a space. If data is separated by multiple spaces, set Data Type to Fixed Width and used fixed width options to parse the text.


Specifies that a character other than tab, comma, quote, or space is used to separate the text. Type the character.

Use Text Qualifier and Value Qualifier to specify how the QuickColumns Expert parses the data.


Click the character that appears before and after any instance of data that contains the character specified by Other. Data enclosed by this character is always parsed as a label.

Text Qualifier only works when Other is selected.


Click the character that appears before and after any instance of data that should be parsed as a value.

Value Qualifier only works when Other is selected.


Check this box to skip delimiters that do not enclose data.

For example, if Tab is selected as the delimiter and the text to parse is Text<tab><tab>7930, check the box to copy Text, an empty cell, and 7930 to the destination cells. Uncheck the box to copy Text and 7930 to the destination cells.


Check this box to skip the first character in each line of text.


Check this box if the text file contains lines that were wrapped onto a second line by the application that generated them.

For example, if the text was generated by an application that wrapped text lines that exceeded 80 characters, check this option and enter 80. The QuickColumns Expert will unwrap the lines before parsing.


Check this box to skip lines in the text that the QuickColumns Expert cannot parse. Otherwise, these lines are copied into the destination cells as unparsed labels.


Specifies the name of the control to add link commands to.


Specifies the control name or cell address of the object to get the initial value from. When the dialog box is closed, the value of Source is sent back to this object. You can click [image] to select a cell from the notebook.


Check this box to send changes from the source to the target whenever the source's value changes, rather than waiting until the user closes the dialog box.


Creates a new link command below the selected link command.


Creates a new link command above the selected link command.


Removes the selected link command from the control.


Removes all link commands from the control.


Pastes the graph style of the copied graph.


Pastes the position of graph objects from the copied graph.


Pastes the graph title, subtitle, and axis title text from the copied graph.


Pastes the data series from the copied graph. When you choose this option, Corel Quattro Pro copies a reference to the data used in the copied graph. (Data is not physically copied to a different location in the notebook.) Data Series also pastes x-axis and legend series, legend label overrides, and label series.


Pastes the graph background style used in the copied graph.


Pastes the color scheme used in the copied graph. (Color Scheme does not affect the color of graph annotations.)


Copies all text and drawings you created for the source graph using the drawing tools on the Chart Tools toolbar. Annotations also includes any graphics you imported for the source graph.

Caution: To preserve annotations that already exist in the destination graph, uncheck Annotations. Annotations erases all annotation items in the destination graph, even when there are none to copy from the source graph.


Pastes the formulas from the copied selection.


Pastes the labels from the copied selection.


Pastes the numbers from the copied selection.


Pastes the properties from the copied selection. This option does not copy row heights or column widths; use Edit [image] Copy Cells to copy row/column sizes.


Pastes cell comments from the copied selection to the destination.


Avoids erasing data in the destination selection that otherwise would be replaced by blanks pasted from the source.


Switches the position of entries so that data listed in columns is placed in rows and vice versa. Be sure to allow enough room in the destination area for the changed size of the data. This option is equivalent to choosing Tools [image] Numeric Tools [image] Transpose.


When checked, pastes the values resulting from formulas, not the formulas themselves. Checking Paste Formulas As Values accomplishes the same thing as using Edit [image] Convert to Values.


Pastes the copied selection.


Pastes a link to each cell in the copied cells. Each pasted cell contains a formula using the following format:

+[Drive:\Path\File name]Sheet:Cell reference


Specifies the cells to be copied. The cells can be noncontiguous.

Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.


Specifies the destination cells. Enter the upper left cell of the cells to make a single copy. If the source is a single cell, column, or row, you can make multiple copies by selecting a group of cells as the destination.

Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.


Adjusts formulas that have absolute references to cells within the copied cells, but leaves the references absolute. Check this box if you are copying cells that contain absolute references to cells within the copied area.


Check this box to copy all formula cells in the source cells.


Check this box to copy all labels in the source cells.


Check this box to copy all numeric values in the source cells.


Check this box to copy all selection properties applied to each source cell.


Check this box to copy all QuickButtons, floating graphs, and other objects in the source cells.


Check this box to make the destination rows and columns the same sizes as those in the source cells.


Specify the source cell or group of cells. Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.


Specify the destination cell or cells. Be sure that there is enough room so that any existing data in the destination cells is not overwritten. Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.


Specifies the sheet(s) to be moved.


Specifies the sheet before which the moved sheets will be placed.


Specifies the range of cells to delete.


Tells whether to delete rows, columns, or sheets.


Select whole or partial rows, columns, or sheets.


Click the supporting file (spreadsheet or internet file). You can select multiple files by holding down the Ctrl key (as you click individual files) or the Shift key (as you click the last file in a range to be selected).


Click the supporting file (spreadsheet file or internet file) whose links you want to change.


Enter the name of the notebook you want to change links to. In the active notebook, all link references to the selected notebook change to the new notebook name.


Type the cell address or cell coordinates to go to, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook. You can include a sheet prefix and a notebook prefix, for example, [BUDGET]D:Z36.


Specifies the named cell or group of cells to go to.


Specifies the sheet to go to.


Specifies the cells or multiple cells to search. Type the cell coordinates or click [image] to select cells from the notebook. To search the entire sheet, leave this field blank.


Specifies the group of characters to be found in labels, values, or formulas. These characters are called the find string.


Specifies the group of characters to substitute for characters found. This is called the replacement string.


Looks at the formulas as they appear in the input line.


Looks at the results of the formulas, as they appear in the cells.


Treats the find string as a conditional expression. For example, a find string of B13>500 with Condition selected looks for the first value that is greater than 500, starting with cell B13.


Check this box to search down columns first, starting with column 1. By default, this option is unchecked for searching across rows starting with row 1.


Check this box if the find string must match all of a cell entry. When this option is unchecked (the default), searching will find partial matches as well as exact matches. For example, if the find string is cat, catamaran and scatter are found as well as cat.


Check this box if you want capitalization to be considered during the search. When this option is unchecked (the default), searching will find strings regardless of capitalization. For example, if the find string is HARPER, Harper, harper, and HaRpEr are found as well as HARPER.


Begins or resumes a forward search without replacing found entries.


Begins or resumes a backward search without replacing found entries.


Lets you decide on an individual basis whether to replace each string found.


Replaces all found strings without stopping.


Clears any entries in the dialog box and reinstates the defaults.


Creates a new, blank notebook window.


Creates a new notebook window based on the selected template from the QuickTemplates list.


Displays the list of QuickTemplates you can use.


Overwrite the file on disk with the file you are working on.


Close this dialog box without saving the file you have been working on.


Loads or saves the file in Impress format, and maintains the file's sheet layout settings.


Loads or saves the file in Allways format, and maintains the file's sheet layout settings.


Loads or saves the file in standard .WK1 format, and ignores any sheet layout specified in the Impress or Allways file.


Opens all supporting notebooks. If those notebooks contain links to closed notebooks, those notebooks open, too, until all supporting notebooks are open.


Accesses linked values in closed supporting notebooks without opening them. This takes up less memory than opening the notebooks. If you later decide to open the supporting notebooks, choose Edit [image] Links [image] Open Links.


Temporarily replaces links to closed supporting notebooks and server applications with the value NA (not available). This lets you examine or edit notebooks when you do not need the linked values.

If you later want to replace the NA placeholders with the actual link values from supporting notebooks, use Edit [image] Links [image] Refresh Links or Open Links to update values, or open the notebooks, respectively.


Type a title for the notebook.


Type a description of the notebook.


Type the author's name (by default, Author is the user name of the person who created the file).


Type keywords that identify the notebook. You can use these keywords later when searching for the file.


Type comments about the notebook. You can use these comments later when searching for the file.


Prints the entire contents of the current notebook sheet.


Prints all notebook pages.


Prints the cells you specify.

Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook. If a cell's contents spill over into adjacent cells onscreen, include the spillover cells in the selection; otherwise, only part of the entry will print.


Specifies the number of copies to print.


Specifies that all pages in the document be printed.


Specifies the beginning and ending pages in the document to print.


Opens the Print Preview window, which lets you examine the document's appearance before you actually print it.


Lets you specify the print destination.


Lets you specify placement of headings, gridlines, row and column borders, spacing between groups of cells or sheets, or whether cell contents are printed.


Lets you specify the page format of output.


Sends the document to the printer.


Makes printouts more readable. Prints all backgrounds white, all text black, and all lines black.


Specifies which of the available printers to use. Before printing from Corel Quattro Pro, use the Windows Control Panel to specify the printers available or click System Printers to see the current list.


Select Print to file to create a binary file to store the printed document instead of sending the document to a printer. If you select Print to file, type the file name or click [image] to select a file.


Lets you specify default print settings.


Adds the cell entries you specify as headings to print at the top of each printed page. Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.


Adds the cell entries you specify as headings to print at the left of each printed page. Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.


Check this box to print each cell's address and contents instead of its calculated results.


Check this box to include the spreadsheet grid in the printed document.


Check this box to include row and column borders in the printed document.


Check this box to center the cells of the print selection between the left and right margins of the printed page. (By default, the first column of each group of cells prints starting at the left margin.)


Choose Lines and type an entry in the edit field to separate each group of cells, if you have specified more than one group, with blank lines. Choose Page Advance to separate them with page breaks.


Choose Lines and type an entry in the edit field to separate sheets of 3-D cells with blank lines. Choose Page Advance to separate them with page breaks.


Resets the dialog box to its default settings, replacing all selections in the dialog box.


Saves the current dialog box selections as the default settings.


Specifies the type of paper loaded into your printer.


Prints data vertically, on individual pages.


Prints data horizontally, on individual pages.


Specifies the text for the header.


Specifies the text for the footer.


Specifies the typeface, point size, and type style for header text.


Specifies the typeface, point size, and type style for footer text.


Sets the amount of space between the edge of the page and the top of the document. The default is a third of an inch.


Sets the amount of space between the edge of the page and the bottom of the document. The default is a third of an inch.


Sets the amount of space between the edge of the page and the left of the document. The default is four-tenths of an inch.


Sets the amount of space between the edge of the page and the right of the document. The default is four-tenths of an inch.


Sets the amount of space between the header and the first row of data. The default is half an inch.


Sets the amount of space between the last row of data and the footer. The default is half an inch.


Check this box to start a new printed page at each soft page break. Uncheck Break Pages if you are printing a long printout to continuous-form paper.

This option does not affect hard page breaks.


Specifies the maximum width and height in pages to use when printing the print selection.


Specifies the percentage (15-1000) to increase or decrease the size of notebook data on the printed page. The margins (except for header and footer margins) do not change.


Type the name for a new print setting. Click Add to add the setting to the list.


Lists the named print settings you've already saved.


Creates a named print setting using the name in the New Set text box. The name is added to the named print setting list.


Uses the selected named print setting. When you click Use, the selected named print setting replaces the current print settings with those stored under the name.


Replaces the settings stored under the selected name with the current print settings.


Deletes the selected named setting.


Resets the dialog box to its default settings, replacing all selections in the dialog box.


Saves the current dialog box selections as the default settings, without clearing named settings.


Type a password for the file. Passwords can be up to 15 characters in length. The characters you type show onscreen as pound signs (#####) so they are hidden from view.


Specifies the coordinates of the cells where you want to put the reformatted text. The upper left cell in the existing cells should be the first cell to reformat.

Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.


Sets the style to revise or create. To create a new style, type a style name that has not been used.


Check the box to add the Alignment property to the style. Click the Alignment button to choose a particular alignment setting.


Check the box to add the Format property to the style. Click the Format button to choose a particular numeric format.


Check the box to add the Protection property to the style. Click the Protection button to choose a particular protection setting.


Check the box to add the Line Drawing property to the style. Click the Line Drawing button to choose a type of line drawing.


Check the box to add the Shading property to the style. Click the Shading button to choose a particular shading setting.


Check the box to add the Font property to the style. Click the Font button to choose a particular font setting.


Check the box to add the Text Color property to the style. Click the Text Color button to choose a particular color setting.


Deletes the style selected in the Define Style For option. Any cells that used the deleted style change to Normal style.


Lets you copy the style settings from a specified cell or an existing style.


Lets you apply the style you have changed to all new notebooks. For example, you can change the properties for the Normal style and click this box to have it affect all new notebooks.. Then you can click File [image] New to create a new notebook. When you choose Normal from the Property Bar, Normal will have the new properties you have set.


Specifies whether to copy from an existing style or a cell.


Enter the cell address, or style name, as appropriate. If you clicked Cell for Merge From, you can click [image] to select a cell from the notebook.


Lists predefined and custom formats.


By default, each format applies settings for Numeric Format, Font, Shading, Text Color, Alignment, Line Drawing, and Column Width (Auto-Width option) properties. To prevent SpeedFormat from applying a particular property throughout the selection, uncheck that property.


By default, each format applies properties to these parts of the active selection: Column Headings, Column Totals, Row Heading, Row Total, and Subtotals. To prevent SpeedFormat from applying any properties to a particular part of the selection, uncheck that part.


Creates a new custom format.


Deletes the active SpeedFormat.


Type the name of the new format you want to add to the SpeedFormat list. The name can be up to 14 characters long and can include spaces and punctuation marks.


Specifies cells with the formatting properties for the new format. The cell area must be at least 3 rows by 3 columns in size.

Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.


The name assigned to the chart. You can use the default name, or change it to a more descriptive one. The chart name appears on the Objects sheet. Right-click the chart on the Objects sheet, then right-click Icon Properties to change the chart name.


Displays all known regions in the current map. Select a name to replace the unknown name, or skip the current unknown name.


Replaces the unknown region name in your map data with the name you select from the list of known regions.


Ignores the current unknown region name and all data associated with it.


Ignores all unknown region names and their data.


Select the online service you want to use to connect to the Internet. To list the Internet services you have available, click Configure.


Checks your system to display the Internet services you have available. For example, if you have a CompuServe account, you can connect directly to the World Wide Web page through CompuServe.


Connects to the Internet's World Wide Web for information about Corel products.


Type the name of the file you want to insert, or click [image] to select a file.


SheetType the name of a cell on the sheet before which you want to insert the file, or click [image] to select a cell from the notebook.


Specifies the name for the cell or cells. The name can be up to 63 characters long.


Shows existing cell names.


Specifies a cell or cells to be named. Type the coordinates, or click [image] to select cell(s) from the notebook.


Adds a name for the specified cell(s) to the cell names list.


Deletes a selected cell name. When you delete a cell name, the contents of the cells are unaffected. Also, formulas referencing the name then change to reference the cell addresses. The formula results do not change.


Deletes all existing cell names from the notebook. Formulas that reference named cells change so they refer to cell addresses instead of names.


Lets you create cell names from adjacent labels.


Assigns names to single cells using adjacent labels.


Creates a table in the notebook listing all named cells by name and location.


Specifies the coordinates of the labels to use as cell names. If the entries are values instead of labels, they are ignored.

Type the coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.


Sets the direction from the Cells entry to find the cells to be named. For example, the Right setting assigns names to cells to the right of the cells in the Cells entry.


Specifies the address of the upper left cell where you want the table to be placed. Type the cell address, or click [image] to select a cell from the notebook.


Specifies the cells to name, including the labels to use. Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.


Check this box to name each column included in the Cells box by the label in its first row.


Check this box to name each row included in the Cells box by the label in its leftmost column.


Check this box to name each column included in the Cells box by the label in its bottom row.


Check this box to name each row included in the Cells box by the label in its rightmost column.


Check this box to name each cell included in the Cells box by the label in the top row of each column combined with the label in the leftmost cell of each row.


Type a name for the group (up to 15 characters). You can use letters, numbers, and spaces.


SheetType the name of the first sheet in the group.


SheetType the name of the last sheet in the group.


Lists the groups defined in the active notebook.


Deletes the group currently selected in the Defined Groups list box.


Select a Function Category on the left. The Function list on the right changes to show the functions for that category in alphabetical order. Double-click an @function, or select an @function and click OK.


Displays the available functions for the category selected. Double-click an @function, or select an @function and click OK. The full name and a brief description of the function appears at the bottom of the dialog box.


Specifies the cells you want to appear as the chart. Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.


Displays the template styles for creating bullet charts. When you select a style, the picture of your chart on the right side of the dialog box updates to reflect your selection.


Opens the Master Slide Advisor dialog box, which shows suggested template styles based on stylistic criteria you specify.


Type the name of the slide show (up to 15 characters).


Type the incorrect spelling of a word you commonly misspell or mistype, or type an abbreviation that you want expanded in your document.


Type the correct spelling of the misspelled or mistyped word, or type the expanded word(s) of the abbreviation.


Lists the common errors or abbreviations QuickCorrect replaces.

To add a QuickCorrect entry, type text in the Replace and With fields, then click Add Entry.

To delete a QuickCorrect entry, select one in the list, then click Delete Entry.


Adds the entry from the Replace and With fields to the QuickCorrect list.


Removes the selected entry from the QuickCorrect list.


Check this box to turn on QuickCorrect.

When you type text that is identical to the complete misspelled or abbreviated word, it is automatically replaced with the replacement text the moment you press the Spacebar.


Select a Corel Quattro Pro macro or PerfectScript macro.

Corel Quattro Pro macros are stored as labels in notebook cells and edited in Corel Quattro Pro.

PerfectScript macros are compatible with the PerfectScript macro technology available in other applications, such as Corel WordPerfect and Corel Presentations. PerfectScript macros are stored in .WCM files.


Enter the filename of the PerfectScript macro, or click [image] to select a file.


Enter the address of the cell containing the macro you want to run or record, or use the Macros/Named Cells option to choose the macro. Use full linking syntax ([LIBRARY]A:C2) if the cell address is not in the active notebook (linking is not needed when entering a cell name).

You can click [image] to select a cell from the notebook.


If the macro is stored in a notebook designated as a macro library, choose the notebook name here. Macros/Named Cells changes to display the macros available from the notebook.


You can choose the name of a macro to run or record from this list. Use Macro Library to specify the list displayed.


Closes the dialog box and runs (or records) the macro.


Uses standard cell addressing notation, like A1..C6.


Uses relative referencing, which specifies cells as offset from the cell selector. For example, the cell selector's relative reference is P(0):C(0)R(0).


Displays the calculated value for the current cell.


Displays the cell reference for the current formula.


Displays the current expression selected within the formula. You can type an entire formula here, or select parts of a formula in the outline pane.

Click [image] to insert a cell name into the formula.

Click [image] to select a cell or cell address from the notebook.


Displays an expandable/collapsible outline of the formula. The outline works like the Windows Explorer. Double-click part of the outline to expand or collapse it.


Provides entry fields for entering @function arguments. For help about an argument, click [image] to the left of the argument.


Provides a description of the current @function being edited in the Expression edit field. For help about an @function, click [image] to the left of the @function name.


Reverses all changes made to the original formula. The Formula Composer remains open.

Revert does not affect any changes to cells referenced in the original formula. For example, if you use the Follow button to move to a referenced cell, then make a change, the Revert button does not affect the change.


Lists scenarios you have captured in the active group of scenarios.


Takes a baseline snapshot of data. You can use Capture repeatedly to capture changes as scenarios to add to the group.


Deletes the selected scenario.


Creates a summary report of the change and result cells in each scenario.


Turns on and off coloring of change and result cells. You can specify different colors to highlight cells. The default colors are yellow for change cells and green for result cells.


Automatically locates changed cells after you capture the baseline scenario and make changes.


Defines the selected cells as change and result cells. Click Add to identify changed cells manually.


Excludes the selected change or result cells from the scenario. If you click Find to locate all changed cells, you can use Remove to manually remove cells to better focus the Scenario Report.


Lists the scenario groups included in the active notebook.


Defines the baseline capture area for a new group of scenarios, and renames and deletes existing groups.


Specifies the area where the Scenario Manager tracks data and format changes:

Notebook tracks changes within the entire notebook except the Objects sheet.

Sheet tracks changes on the specified sheet.

Cells tracks changes in the specified cells.


Creates and names a new Scenario Manager group.


Applies another name to the active group.


Offers on option for using the Scenario Manager to track versions.


Deletes the active group and all scenarios in it.


Type a name (up to 19 characters) for the current Scenario Group.


Check this box if you want the Scenario Manager to track all cell operations internally; no scenario changes are recorded.

Do not check this box if you are using the Scenario Manager for version control. If this box is unchecked, the scenarios register any moves, insertions, and deletions.


Type the name (up to 19 characters) of the current scenario.


Displays a report for each scenario group, not just the active group.


Identifies scenario cells with text in cells immediately to their left.


Identifies scenario cells with text above them.


SheetCheck this box to put the Scenario Summary Report on the first empty sheet in the notebook. To place it somewhere else, uncheck this box and enter a sheet and cells in the edit field.


Type the sheet and cell coordinates where you want the Scenario Summary Report to appear, or click [image] to select a sheet and cells in the notebook.


Check this box to highlight changing and result cells with different colors.


Sets the color used for changing cells when the Highlight box is checked. The default color is yellow.


Sets the color used for result cells when the Highlight box is checked. The default color is green.


Specifies the cell whose value you want Optimizer to maximize, minimize, or equal. The solution cell usually contains a formula whose result depends on the variable cells.

Type the cell address, or click [image] to select a cell from the notebook.


Indicates you want to maximize the formula in the solution cell. This is the default.


Indicates you want to minimize the formula in the solution cell.


Indicates you want to find a solution without considering a solution cell.


Specifies the value to be reached by the formula in Solution Cell.


Specifies the cells Optimizer can adjust to reach an optimal solution; problem solutions display in these cells.

Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.

You can assign up to 200 variable cells (individual cells or groups of cells). Separate variable cells and groups of cells with commas.

Variable cells must not contain dates, formulas, or text. They must not be protected.


Defines formulas that limit the Solution Cell formula and/or Variable Cell(s) contents.

Constraints can require cells to fall within upper or lower bounds. They can also specify a target value.


Adds a new constraint.


Edits the selected constraint.


Removes the selected constraint.


Offers calculation settings and methods, loads and saves model settings, and generates reports.


Clears Optimizer settings.


Restores original variable and solution cell values in the notebook after you use Solve to generate a set of solution values.


Finds a solution to the defined problem. If you revise Optimizer settings without saving a solution, and then click Solve, you will be asked to confirm your action before Optimizer overwrites the existing solution.


Closes the Optimizer dialog box and saves the settings.


Loads cells of Optimizer settings.


Saves cells of Optimizer settings for future use.


Generates Answer and Detail Reports.


Check this box to use a linear method to solve the problem. This indicates that your problem has only linear expressions in the solution cell or any of the constraint cells.

Expressions are linear when the algebraic statements express relationships where the variables are being added (or subtracted) in various combinations.


Check this box to pause between iterations so you can check the progress of the search. At each iteration you can continue the search or stop.


Check this box if you want to automatically scale variables to achieve the target value. When checked, this option can help when variable cell and target values differ greatly in size.


Indicates how long Optimizer can spend looking for the best solution (100 seconds is the default).


Sets the maximum number of iterations, or trials, Optimizer can perform to find the best solution (100 is the default).


Controls the accuracy of the solution, from 0 to 1. The default is .000001 or 1E-06. The greater the precision (the more decimal places), the more time it takes to find a solution.


Indicates the maximum percentage a solution can differ from a theoretical optimum integer solution. As you increase the Tolerance setting, Optimizer can produce solutions more quickly, but they may be less accurate.


Specifies the approach used to obtain initial estimates of the basic variables in each iteration. Tangent uses linear extrapolation from a tangent vector, while Quadratic uses quadratic extrapolation. Quadratic may be useful in highly nonlinear problems.


Selects Forward (the default) or Central differencing for estimates of partial derivatives. Central requires more iterations but may help if a message indicates a better solution is not available.


Selects a method for computing the search direction. Newton, the default, is a quasi-Newton method and may be faster, but Conjugate can help if you see a message indicating that the objective function is changing too slowly.


Specifies the cells for the Answer Report, which shows how well the constraints were met.

Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.


Specifies the cells for the Detail Report, which lists the variable and solution cell values at each iteration.

Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.


Click [image] to select a cell containing a formula that must be bounded, or that must equal a target value.

You can select a single cell, or select cells that must all have the same bound.


Click the operator that connects both terms of the constraint and describes their relationship: less than or equal to (<=), equal to (=), greater than or equal to (>=), or Integer (the cell must be a whole number).


Type a value for the target or bound, or specify a cell that contains a value (not a formula).

You can specify a group of cells equal to or larger than the number of cells included on the left side of the constraint. Each cell on the left is compared with the corresponding cell on the right. A single cell on the left is compared with the upper left cell of a cell area on the right.


Specifies the cell containing the formula you want to solve. The formula should not contain string functions.

Type a cell address, or click [image] to select a cell from the notebook.


Specifies the result you want from the Formula Cell.


Indicates which cell Corel Quattro Pro can change to solve for a desired value.

Type a cell address, or click [image] to select a cell from the notebook.


Determines how many passes Solve For makes to solve the formula (1 to 1000). The default is 5.


Specifies how close Solve For must get to the Target Value (the default is 0.0005).


Specifies the number of variables in the what-if formulas. Choose One Free Variable to substitute for one variable when building the what-if table; choose Two Free Variables to build a two-variable table.


Specifies the cells where you want to write the data table, including values for the first variable as the leftmost column and the formula row as the first row. (If you are using two variables, the first row includes one two-variable formula plus values for the second variable.)

Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.


Specifies the first (or only) cell referenced by the what-if formula(s). If you selected Two Free Variables for the What-If Table Type, the name of this field changes to Column Input Cell.

Type a cell address, or click [image] to select a cell from the notebook.


Specifies the second cell referenced by a two-variable what-if formula.

Type a cell address, or click [image] to select a cell from the notebook.


Builds the table.


Clears all settings.


Specifies cells containing up to 150 columns of independent variable (x-axis) data. Each variable must be in a separate column; the independent variables can be in noncontiguous columns.

Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.


Specifies the cells (partial column) containing dependent variable (y-axis) data.

Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.


Specifies the cells where results will be written.

Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.


Specifies whether to force the y-intercept value to zero or whether to compute it.


Specifies the cells or list of cells containing values to be counted.

Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.


Specifies the cells that define value intervals or "bins" of values to be counted.

Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.


Specifies the matrix cells you want to invert.

Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.


Specifies the upper left cell of the area where you want to write the inverted matrix. If you specify the same cells as the invert cells, the inverted matrix overwrites the existing matrix.

Type the cell address, or click [image] to select a cell from the notebook.


Specifies the first matrix to multiply.

Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.


Specifies the second matrix to multiply.

Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.


Specifies the top left cell of the area where you want to write the resulting matrix.

Type the cell address, or click [image] to select a cell from the notebook.


Click a category to change the selection of buttons to the right. Many of the categories correspond to Corel Quattro Pro menus.


Displays a selection of buttons you can add to a toolbar.  When you point to a button, a description of it appears at the bottom left of the tab. Drag a button from the Buttons panel to a toolbar.


Drag this separator onto a toolbar to add space between buttons.

The separator appears as a white box while you edit a toolbar.


Displays the name of the file that the button points to. Type the filename, or click [image] to select a file.


Type any command line options you want to pass to the specified target.


Specifies the folder that contains the file or related files. Leave this field blank if you want to use Corel Quattro Pro's startup directory.


Click the icon you want to associate with the file.


Displays the button with the icon you selected. Drag the button from the Buttons panel to a toolbar.

To change the icon used for the button, click another icon in the Select Icon box.


Type one or more Corel Quattro Pro macro commands (up to 199 characters). Each macro command must begin and end with braces: {}.

Click here [image] for more details about Corel Quattro Pro macro syntax.


Displays the controls you can add to a toolbar. These controls are identical to some of the controls you can add to custom dialog boxes. When you point to a control, a description of it appears at the bottom left of the tab.

Drag one or more controls from the Controls panel to a toolbar.


Sets the zoom percentage. The default setting is 100%. Percentages less than 100% show more columns and rows; percentages greater than 100% show fewer.

To expand the current cells to fill the screen, click Selection.

To set a custom zoom, click Custom, then enter a percentage.


Select Sheet to apply the new zoom factor to the active sheet. Select Notebook to apply the new zoom factor to every sheet in the notebook.


Lists all toolbars. Toolbars that are displayed in the selected context have a checkmark.

You can check the box to display a toolbar, or uncheck the box to hide it.


Displays a list of Corel Quattro Pro contexts. When you select a context, the toolbars that are displayed in that context are checked in the toolbars list. You can select more than one toolbar to be displayed in a context.


Shows or hides the selected toolbar.

You can also check the box to the left of the toolbar name to show it, and uncheck the box to hide it.


Removes a toolbar you created from the list. When you remove a custom toolbar from the list, the toolbar file remains in the Corel Quattro Pro directory.

You cannot remove standard toolbars (the ones that come with Corel Quattro Pro) from the list.


Changes the selected standard Corel Quattro Pro toolbar back to its default settings. You cannot reset custom toolbars.


Lets you create a toolbar and add it to the toolbar list.


Lets you set the position and the context in which the toolbar displays. You can also change the toolbar name.


Enter the name of toolbar (up to 32 characters).


Lets you specify the name of the file where you want to save the toolbar. Type the filename, or click [image] to select a file. Corel Quattro Pro saves toolbar information in files with a .BR3 extension.


Specifies where the toolbar will appear when onscreen. Select top, bottom, left, or right to dock the toolbar. Select floating to have the toolbar float above the notebook.


Lets you specify where a toolbar appears in all contexts. A check mark is Displayed next to the contexts that display the selected toolbar. Any changes you make will be updated in the toolbar list.


Displays or hides the scroll bars or the sheet tabs. Uncheck the display elements you want to hide; check them when you want them displayed again.


Splits the window from left to right.


Splits the window from top to bottom.


Removes the active pane.


Makes both panes scroll when you move the selector in one of the panes.


Clears all locked titles settings. All columns and rows scroll freely.


Locks rows above the selected cell(s). When you scroll up or down, locked rows remain fixed while the other rows scroll.


Locks columns to the left of the selected cell(s). When you scroll right or left, locked columns remain fixed while the other columns scroll.


Locks columns to the left and rows above the selected cell(s). When you scroll, locked columns and rows remain fixed while the rest of the spreadsheet sheet scrolls.


Dialog window objects
Dialog Window

Dialog window objects are controls used in building applications. If you right-click the Dialog window title bar, the properties that control the Dialog window appear.

Active Dialog Window Properties

Bitmap Button

Check Box

Color Control

Combo Box

Edit Field

Edit Integer

File Control

Group Box

Horizontal ScrollBar

Label

List Box

Pick List

Push Button

Radio Button

Rectangle

Spin Control

Tab Control

Time Control

Vertical ScrollBar

Related Topics


Active Dialog Window Properties

The following properties control the behavior of the dialog window:

Dimension	Specifies the exact size and position of the dialog window.

Title	Specifies the title of the dialog box, which the user will see.

Position Adjust	Specifies how the dialog box moves when the Corel Quattro Pro window  is resized.

Grid Options	Shows/hides a grid and sets the number of pixels between grid lines.

Name	Used to identify the dialog box in macros, link commands, and formulas.

Disabled	Disables all controls in the dialog box.

Value	The current setting of the dialog box (a comma separated list of the current control settings of the dialog box).

Related Topics


Bitmap Button Control

A bitmap button has a graphic image on its face instead of text. It can imitate the behavior of a check box, radio button, or push button. There are several different ways to specify the bitmap that appears on a bitmap button's face:

Right-click the control and choose the Properties command, then choose Bitmap. You will see a list of predefined bitmaps. Select a bitmap from the list (it then appears under Preview) and choose OK.

Click [image] from the Bitmap property dialog box, specify the name of an external Windows bitmap (BMP) file, and choose OK. The bitmap will be saved with the active notebook.

If the Clipboard contains a bitmap, select the bitmap button and choose Edit [image] Paste to paste the bitmap onto the button's face. The bitmap will be saved with the active notebook.

Bitmap buttons have the value of whatever button they are imitating. To specify how the button behaves, set the bitmap button's Button Type property.

Related Topics


Push Button Control

A push button runs a specified command when the user clicks it. To have a macro run when the user clicks a push button, add a DOMACRO link command to the push button.

Push buttons do not have a value. To make a push button close the dialog box, use the Button Type property.

Related Topics


Check Box Control

Check boxes present a Yes/No option to the user. The text that appears in this button is stored in its Label Text property. The value of a check box is Yes when it is checked, No when it is unchecked.

Related Topics


Color Control

A color control lets the user change a color setting. When you click a color control, you can select from 56 standard colors or click More to create a custom color.

The value of a color is in the format Red,Green,Blue where Red is the amount of red in the color, Green the amount of green, etc. Each amount is a number from 0 to 255. Each part of a color control's value is a number between 0 and 255. For example, black is 0,0,0; white is 255,255,255; and red is 255,0,0.

In addition to the Red/Green/Blue color model, you can use the Hue/Saturation/Luminosity to create custom colors. However, the control value is always in Red,Green,Blue format.

Related Topics


Combo Box Control

Combo boxes (also called drop-down list boxes) are a special type of list box that lets the user add items to the list. They consist of an edit field, a down arrow button, and a list box (which only appears when the user clicks the down arrow or presses Down in the edit field).

The value of the combo box is the value of its edit field. There are several ways users can change a combo box's value:

They can choose the edit field and enter the value. (You can disable this by setting Edit Disabled to Yes.)

They can press the Down key to move through the list, then press Enter on the desired choice. (Pressing Enter also clicks the dialog box's default button, which typically closes the dialog box. To disable this, set Terminate Dialog to No.)

They can click the down arrow button to display the list, then click the desired choice. (To remove a combo box's down arrow button, set Add Down Button to No.)

There are two ways you can specify the items that appear in a list box:

Using the Clipboard. Copy a block to the Clipboard, then select the list box and choose Edit [image] Paste. Each row of the block becomes one item in the list.

Using the List property. If your list is already in a block in the notebook, right-click the list box and choose the Properties command, then choose List, type or point to the block coordinates, and choose OK.

You can make a combo box store a history list of the entries that have been typed into its edit field. This history displays as the combo box's list.

Related Topics


Edit Field Control

An edit field is where a user types specific information. You can use the Field Type property to restrict the type of information an edit field accepts.

Field type	Result

Integer	Restricts user entry to integers. This adds three properties to the edit field properties (which is renamed Edit Integer). Minimum defines the lowest acceptable value users can enter. Maximum defines the highest acceptable value a user can enter. Default defines the initial value of the edit field.

String	Accepts any text a user enters (including numbers); this is the default edit field type.

Real	Accepts any number or formula.

Block	Accepts only cell addresses or block coordinates.

Hidden	Accepts any text, but displays a pound sign (#) for each character instead of the actual character. This is handy when users are entering passwords.

Related Topics


Edit Integer Control

The Edit Integer control is an edit field that only accepts integers. You create this control by placing an edit field in your dialog box, and setting the Field Type property to Integer.

Related Topics


File Control

A file control consists of an edit field for entering filenames and a button that displays a list of files on disk. From this list, the user can choose a file name, directory, and drive. The value of a file control determines the directory, drive letter, and file name that appears. For example, the value C:\FILES\QTRREP.WB3 means

Drives is set to C:

Directories is set to C:\FILES\

File Name is set to QTRREP.WB3

File Types is set to *.WB3 (if a wildcard is specified; otherwise File Types is not affected by the value)

Whenever a user chooses a different directory to view, or a different file name to use, the change is reflected in the file control's value.

Related Topics


Group Box Control

A group box usually contains other controls such as radio buttons or check boxes. It looks like a rectangle with a title at the top. When a group box contains radio buttons, its value is the title of the radio button chosen; otherwise, it does not have a value.

Initially, the Process Value of a group box is set to Yes, and the Process Values of radio buttons within the group box are set to No. In addition to the Value property, the group box has a property called Selected that indicates numerically which of its radio buttons is chosen, starting from the top left radio button (zero) and proceeding to the bottom right button.

Related Topics


Horizontal ScrollBar Control

Scroll bars let the user pick a value from a fixed range of values. You can use a vertical scroll bar or a horizontal one. The value of a scroll bar is an integer from a fixed range of integers.

Use the Parameters property to restrict the range of values that horizontal and vertical scroll bars accept and to specify how manipulating the scroll bar changes its value.

For a complete explanation of scroll bars, scroll boxes, and scroll arrows, see your Windows documentation.

Related Topics


Label Control

A label is simply descriptive text that you place beside another control, to describe the control's purpose to the user. Labels do not have a value. Resizing a label does not increase the text size; it makes a larger background to display the text on.

To see the background of a label, select it. By default, the label text appears in the upper left corner of its background; to specify a different position for the label text, right-click the label and choose the Properties command, then use the Text Draw Flags property. You can also use Text Draw Flags to create a multiple-line label and wordwrap the label text so that it fits in the label background. The options available under Text Draw Flags are:

Option	Description

Apply	Applies the Text Draw Flags properties you have selected.

Wrapping Text	Single Line specifies whether the label converts formatting codes. Uncheck this to allow formatting codes to be entered into the label (discussed next). This also enables the Word Break option. Word Break specifies whether to wrap the text onto a new line in the label background. Check this to enable line wrapping (available only when Single Line is unchecked).

Vertical Position	Top places text flush against the top edge of the label background. Center Vertically centers the text between the top and bottom of the background. It does not affect the horizontal position of the text. Bottom places text flush against the bottom of the background.

Horizontal Position	Left places text flush against the left side of the label background. Center Horizontally centers the text between the left and right sides of the label background. It does not affect the vertical position of the text. Right places text flush against the right side of the label background.

You can enter special text items in a label to change its appearance:

\n makes characters to the right of it display on a second line. This only works when the Single Line option (in the Text Draw Flags property) is unchecked.

\t inserts a tab into the text (a fixed amount of space that is handy for lining up columns of text).

\\ inserts a backslash (\) into the text. You can use this to enter \n or \t into a label as normal text.

& makes the character to the right of it appear underlined in the text (the ampersand does not appear). This is handy for naming controls. Use only one & character; if you use two, the & character appears underlined in the text.

Related Topics


List Box Control

A list box displays a list of items to choose from. Whichever item the user picks becomes the value of the list box. There are two ways to specify the items that appear in a list box:

Using the Clipboard. Copy a block to the Clipboard, then select the list box and choose Edit [image] Paste. Each row of the block becomes one item in the list.

Using the List property. If your list is already in a block in the notebook, right-click the list box and choose the Properties command, then choose List, type or point to the block coordinates, and choose OK.

List box properties change the way items appear.

Related Topics


Pick List Control

A pick list button displays a list of choices when the user points to it and holds down the left mouse button. If the list is empty, the user can double-click the pick list button and type a setting. The value of a pick list is whichever item the user selects (the value is initially set to the first item in the pick list). To create a pick list,

1	Enter the items of the pick list as labels in a block in the notebook, one label per row.

2	Select the block and click Edit [image] Copy.

3	Activate the dialog window you want to add the pick list to.

4	Choose the Pick List tool from the property bar and click in the dialog window to create the pick list button.

5	Click Edit [image] Paste. The first item in the list displays on the pick list button's face.

6	Use the Title property, if desired, to specify a title to display initially on the pick list button. This title does not have to be an item on the list. You can use a link command to set the Title property whenever the dialog box displays.

Choosing an item from the list changes the value of the list. By default, a pick list button does not resize when a user chooses an item too large to display on the button's face. You can set Resize to Yes to make it expand or shrink, depending on the size of the item the user picks.

Related Topics


Radio Button Control

Radio buttons, when placed in a group box with other radio buttons, present a list of mutually exclusive choices to the user--only one radio button can be chosen at a time. When the user chooses one of the radio buttons, it darkens to indicate that it is chosen.

To automatically fill a group box with radio buttons, paste a block stored in the Clipboard into a group box; one radio button is created for each row of the block. You can also hold down Ctrl and drag the lower right handle of the group box to increase its size. When you release the handle, radio buttons appear within. Repeat this process until the desired number of radio buttons appear.

By default, a radio button's Process Value property is set to No, and the group box containing it has Process Value set to Yes. When its Process Value property is set to Yes, a radio button has a value of Yes when chosen, No when not chosen.

Related Topics


Rectangle Control

A rectangle can be used to visually organize controls in a dialog box. Rectangles do not have a value.

Related Topics


Vertical ScrollBar Control

Scroll bars let the user pick a value from a fixed range of values. You can use a vertical scroll bar or a horizontal one. The value of a scroll bar is an integer from a fixed range of integers.

Use the Parameters property to restrict the range of values that horizontal and vertical scroll bars accept and specify to how manipulating the scroll bar changes its value.

For a complete explanation of scroll bars, scroll boxes, and scroll arrows, see the Windows documentation.

Related Topics


Spin Control

A spin control is an edit field with two arrows on its edge. The user can either click an arrow to increase or decrease the spin control's value, or type the value. The value of a spin control is always an integer. (You can use edit fields to enter decimal numbers.)

Related Topics


Tab Control

A tab control lets you organize settings into a notebook of controls. Clicking a tab displays controls associated with that tab. This control behaves like the tab controls found in many dialog boxes in Corel Quattro Pro.. The Active Page property indicates which tab is active.

The Page List property displays commands for creating, removing, and reordering tabs. Right-click the tab control, then click the Properties option [image] Page List to display the following controls:

Page Name indicates the tab to add or remove.

Page List lists the tabs already attached to the tab control. You can select an entry in this list to move it or to insert new tabs before it

Insert adds the tab indicated in Page Name before the tab name selected in Page List.

Add adds the tab indicated in Page Name after the tab name selected in Page List.

Delete removes the selected tab name from the tab control.

Move Up and Move Down change the position of the tab name selected in Page List.

To rename a tab, double-click its name and enter a new name (or right-click it and click Properties [image] Page Name Text)

Related Topics


Time Control

A time control shows the user the current time. You can also use a time control to run link commands at regular intervals or at a certain time of day. Time controls do not have a value.

You can use time controls to display the current time in a dialog box or toolbar.

To add a clock,

1	Create a time control in the dialog window.

2	Right-click the time control and choose the Properties command, then set Show Time to Yes. The timer changes into a small digital clock.

3	Right-click the timer and choose the Properties command, then set Timer On to Yes. This enables the clock.

You can use a time control to run link commands at regular intervals or at a certain time of day. This is handy for creating toolbar controls that periodically retrieve current values from the active window. There are two ways to configure a time control for generating regular events: as a Timer and as an Alarm.

As a Timer, it generates the Timer event at regular intervals (for example, every two seconds). Two properties of the time control are used to specify the amount of milliseconds to wait between Timer events, as shown in the following formula:

Wait = Units in Milliseconds X Interval in Units

Units in Milliseconds is set to 1000 by default, so you can use the Interval in Units property to specify how many seconds to wait between Timer events.

To make a timer,

1	Right-click the time control and choose the Properties command, then choose Units in Milliseconds and enter how many milliseconds it takes for one unit to elapse.

2	Right-click the time control and choose the Properties command, then choose Interval in Units and enter how many units to wait before generating a Timer event.

3	Right-click the time control and choose the Properties command, then choose Timer On and set it to Yes.

As an Alarm, the time control generates the Alarm event at a certain time of day (for example, at 5:00). The toolbar must be open; for example, an alarm set for 3:00 will not generate an Alarm event if the toolbar is not onscreen at 3:00.

To make a time control an Alarm,

1	Right-click the time control and choose the Properties command, then choose Alarm On and set it to Yes.

2	Right-click the time control and choose the Properties command, then choose Alarm Time and enter the time that the Alarm event should be generated.

A time control can have both of these functions enabled simultaneously. For example, you could have a timer generate Timer events every two seconds and send out an alarm event at 5:00 to signal the end of the work day.

Related Topics


Chart Window Objects

You can find or create the following objects in a chart window. The chart window is also an object with properties of its own.

Chart Window Properties

Drawn Chart Objects (created with tools on the toolbar)

Arrow

Link to Cells

Ellipse

Freehand Polygon

Freehand Polyline

Line

Polygon

Polyline

Rectangle

Rounded Rectangle

Text Box

Fixed Chart Objects

3-D Walls and Base

Area Series

Axis Titles

Bar Series

Bullet Series

Column Charts

Float Series

Chart Pane

Chart Background

Chart Subtitle

Chart Title

Legend

Line Series

Pie and Doughnut Charts

Series Labels

X-Axis

Y-Axis

Map Objects

Map

Map Legend


Arrow

You use the Arrow tool [image] on the Chart and Drawing Tools toolbar to create a straight line with an arrow at the end. You can also click Insert [image] Shape [image] Arrow.


Link To Cells

You use the Link To Cells tool [image] on the Chart and Drawing Tools toolbar to add linked notebook cells to a chart.


Text box (Chart window)
Text Box

You create text boxes using the Text tool [image] on the Chart and Drawing Tools toolbar. You can also click Insert [image] Shape [image] Text Box.


Ellipse

The Ellipse tool [image] on the Chart and Drawing Tools toolbar creates circles and ovals. You can also click Insert [image] Shape [image] Ellipse.


Freehand Polygon

The Freehand Polygon tool [image] on the Chart and Drawing Tools toolbar creates a closed shape after you drag the mouse to draw the border. You can also click Insert [image] Shape [image] Freehand Polygon.


Freehand Polyline

The Freehand Polyline tool [image] on the Chart and Drawing Tools toolbar draws a line anywhere you drag the mouse. You can also click Insert [image] Shape [image] Freehand Polyline.

To quickly change the line color only, select the freehand polyline, then click a square on the Draw palette of the Chart Color Schemes toolbar.

Related Topics


Line

The Line tool [image] on the Chart and Drawing Tools toolbar draws a straight line when you drag the mouse. You can also click Insert [image] Shape [image] Line.

To quickly change the line color only, select the line, then click a square on the Draw palette of the Chart Color Schemes toolbar.

Related Topics


Polygon

The Polygon tool [image] on the Chart and Drawing Tools toolbar creates closed shapes with as many sides as you want. You can also click Insert [image] Shape [image] Polygon.


Polyline

The Polyline tool [image] on the Chart and Drawing Tools toolbar creates lines with as many straight segments as you want. You can also click Insert [image] Shape [image] Polyline.

To quickly change the line color only, select the polyline, then click a square on the Draw palette of the Chart Color Schemes toolbar.

Related Topics


Rectangle

The Rectangle tool [image] on the Chart and Drawing Tools toolbar creates rectangles and squares. You can also click Insert [image] Shape [image] Rectangle.


Rounded Rectangle

The Rounded Rectangle tool [image] on the Chart and Drawing Tools toolbar creates rectangles and squares that have rounded corners. You can also click Insert [image] Shape [image] Rounded Rectangle.


3-D Walls and Base

Area Fill properties control the appearance of the walls and base of 3-D charts. The base and each wall are separate objects.

Tip

Grid lines on the walls are a property of the Y-Axis. Grid lines on the base are properties of the X-Axis.


Area Series

You can customize each series in an area, surface, shaded surface, or contour chart. Click the chart, right-click the area you want to change and choose the Properties option.


Axis Title

You create titles for the x-axis, the y-axis, and the secondary y-axis using the Chart [image] Titles option.


Bar Series

You can customize each series in a bar chart. The list of bar series properties varies depending on the type of bar chart; for example, the Riser Style property is available only for 3-D bar charts, and the Hi-Lo Bar Style property is available only for high-low bar charts. Click the chart, right-click the bar you want to change and choose the Properties option.


Bullet Series

You can customize each series in a bullet chart. Click the chart, right-click the bullet you want to change and choose the Properties option.

Tip

To change the text in the bullet series, change the labels in the bullet chart cells.

Related Topics


Column Charts

Column charts plot a single series. Each value in the series is represented by a section of the column, and section labels usually express values as a percentage of the whole. Negative values are plotted as though they are positive.

To change the appearance of a column chart, click the chart, right-click a section and choose the Properties option.


Float Series

You can customize each series in a floating marker chart. Click the chart, right-click the series you want to change and choose the Properties option.


Chart Pane

The chart pane is the area bordered by the x- and y-axes in a 2-D chart. Grid lines, and the bars, lines, or areas that represent series, are drawn on top of this area. (Horizontal grid lines are a property of the y-axis; vertical grid lines belong to the x-axis.)

To change chart pane properties, click the chart, right-click the chart pane and choose the Properties option.


Chart Background

The chart background is the area behind the chart title, the legend, the chart itself, and any drawing elements you add. To change properties of the background, click the chart, right-click the chart background, then choose the Properties option. Or click the chart, then click Chart [image] Background.


Chart Subtitle

The chart title and subtitle appear in a single text box, which is centered above the chart; the subtitle is placed under the title. To change the appearance of the subtitle, click the chart, right-click the subtitle and choose the Properties option.


Chart Title

The chart title and subtitle appear in a single text box above the chart; the title is placed over the subtitle. To change the appearance of the title, click the chart, right-click the title, then choose the Properties option.


Chart Window

Every chart has its own window; you set properties for each chart window individually. To set properties, click the chart, right-click the title bar (or the window area outside the chart border, if the chart window is maximized).


Legend

A legend box appears as soon as you define a legend series in all 2-D charts (except pie, doughnut, and column charts), and in some 3-D charts. To change legend properties, click Chart [image] Legend.

Legend labels in 3-D and multiple charts

Many 3-D charts display legend labels along the z-axis. In multiple charts, the legend label for each series appears as a "title" over the sub-chart that plots the series. Click Chart [image] Legend to change legend properties.


Line Series

A line series is any data series that is plotted as a line in a line chart, rotated line chart, 3-D ribbon chart, or combination chart. To change line series properties, click the chart, right-click either the line or the legend marker that corresponds to the line and choose the Properties option.


Pie charts
Pie and Doughnut Charts

Pie and doughnut charts plot a single series; each value is a "slice." Negative values in the series are plotted as though they are positive. You can explode a slice (pull it away from the rest of the circle) to emphasize it.

When you define an x-axis series or label series for a pie or doughnut chart, its labels appear next to the percentages. By default, the label for each slice shows what percentage the segment contributes to the whole. A tick mark connects the label and the slice.

To explode a slice, change the appearance of slices or labels, define a label series, or turn tick mark display off or on, click the chart, right-click a pie or doughnut slice and choose the Properties option.


Series Labels

Series labels appear on the bars, markers, or data points that represent each value in a bar chart or line chart.

To change the properties of series labels, click the chart, right-click one of the labels and choose the Properties option.

To delete series labels, delete the label series.

Related Topics


X-Axis

The x-axis is the horizontal scale on standard charts and the vertical scale on rotated charts. X-axis divisions typically represent categories or time periods; labels along this axis are provided by the x-axis series.

XY charts (often called scatter diagrams) plot values against two numeric scales. The x-axis scale in these charts is determined by the values in the x-axis series. Unlike most other chart types, where the x-axis series contains labels, the x-axis series in an XY chart contains data.


Y-Axis

The y-axis is the vertical scale on standard charts and the horizontal scale on rotated charts. Y-axis scale divisions and label positions are initially determined by the data plotted in the chart.


Map

Map properties vary depending on the type of map displayed. All maps have the Redraw Options property, but only maps with Pin data include properties for customizing Pin display.

Related Topics


Map Legend

Map legends explain the range of data associated with each color or pattern in a map. Maps without color or pattern data do not include legends. Changes in Map Legend properties affect the appearance of both the legend and the map.

Related Topics

More Info


Objects in the Notebook Window

While a notebook window is active, you can right-click and choose the Properties option (or press F12) to display the properties of any of the following objects:

Arrow

Bitmap Object

Selection

Ellipse

Chart

Line

Map

Picture

Rectangle

Rounded Rectangle

QuickButton

Text Box

OLE Object

Other objects that can be accessed only while a notebook window is active are

Active Notebook

Active Sheet

In addition, the Objects sheet of a notebook window supports the following

Chart Icon

Dialog Icon

Slide Show Icon

Related Topics


Arrow (Notebook)
Arrow

An arrow created with the Arrow tool in the toolbar appears in a layer above the cells in a notebook sheet.

Related Topics


Active Selection

The active selection is the currently selected cell or cells. Most selection properties affect the appearance of cell entries or of rows or columns. The Constraints property affects the ways you can enter data into cells.

Tip

Although it is tempting to preset properties in large areas of the notebook, doing so consumes memory. It is more efficient to set properties only in the cells or sheets you are currently using. Or, change the Normal style to change default properties.

If you move a cell, its properties move with the data and are removed from the original cell. If you copy a cell, the copy takes on the properties of the original cell. If you paste cells that you copied or cut with Edit [image] Paste Special, you can control whether the cell's properties are pasted.

Related Topics


Ellipse (Notebook)
Ellipse

An ellipse created with the Ellipse tool from the toolbar appears in a layer above the cells in a notebook sheet.

Related Topics


Chart Object

A floating chart object appears in a layer above the cells in a notebook sheet.

Related Topics


Line (Notebook)
Line

A line created with the Line tool from the toolbar appears in a layer above the cells in a notebook sheet.

Related Topics


Map Object

A floating map object appears in a layer above the cells in a notebook sheet.

Related Topics


Active Notebook

Notebook properties control recalculation methods, zoom effects, the color palette, screen display and whether the notebook is a macro library. The settings are saved with the notebook and affect all sheets in the notebook.

To change notebook properties, click Format [image] Notebook, or right-click the notebook's title bar.

Related Topics


Sheet

Most sheet properties affect the appearance of data or screen elements, with two exceptions: Name (which enters a sheet name) and Protection (which turns on overall sheet protection).

Related Topics


Rectangle (Notebook)
Rectangle

A rectangle created with the Rectangle tool from the toolbar appears in a layer above the cells in a notebook sheet.

Related Topics


Rounded Rectangle (Notebook)
Rounded Rectangle

A rounded rectangle created with the Rounded Rectangle tool from the toolbar appears in a layer above the cells in a notebook sheet.

Related Topics


QuickButton

A QuickButton floats above cells in a notebook sheet and, when pressed, runs a macro.

Related Topics


Text Box (Notebook)
Text Box

A text box created with the Text tool from the toolbar appears in a layer above the cells in a notebook sheet.

Related Topics


Bitmap Object

A bitmap object floats above cells in a notebook sheet and contains a picture in bitmap form.

Related Topics


Picture Object

A picture object floats above cells in a notebook sheet and contains a picture in the metafile graphics format.

Related Topics


OLE Object

An OLE object floats above cells in a notebook sheet and links other applications to Corel Quattro Pro.

Related Topics


Chart Icon

Chart icons appear on the Objects sheet Each icon represents a specific chart or map in the active notebook.

Related Topics


Slide Show Icon

Slide show icons appear on the Objects sheet. Each icon represents a specific slide show in the active notebook.

Related Topics


Dialog Icon

Dialog icons appear on the Objects sheet. Each icon represents a specific dialog box in the active notebook.

Related Topics


Objects in the Light Table Window

While a Light Table window is active, you can right-click a slide and click the Properties option to display the properties of a slide; see Slide.

The Light Table window is also an object with properties of its own; see Light Table for details.

Related Topics


Slide

To display the properties for the active slide, right-click the slide and click the Properties option. Properties differ slightly for slides and master slides.


Light Table

Displays all the charts in a slide show in miniature form and in the order in which they will appear.

To display properties for the active Light Table window, right-click the title bar or any area in the window outside a slide and click the Properties option.


Corel Quattro Pro Application

Consists of the Corel Quattro Pro windows and contents. Click Tools [image] Settings to change global properties.


Chart Window

Contains a chart you are editing. Click in a chart, right-click the outside slashed lines, then click Chart Window Properties to change overall chart window properties.


Dialog Window

Contains a dialog box you're creating. Right-click the title bar or any blank area in a dialog window to change its overall properties.


Toolbar Window

Contains a toolbar you're creating. Right-click the title bar or any blank area in a toolbar window to change its overall properties.


QuickButton

Floats above cells in a notebook sheet and, when clicked, goes to a URL on the Internet, runs a macro you've attached to it, or displays a dialog box. Right-click the QuickButton to change its properties.


Floating Bitmap

Appears above cells in a notebook sheet and contains a picture in bitmap form. Right-click the bitmap to change its properties.


Floating Chart

Appears above the cells in a notebook sheet. Right-click the floating chart to change its properties.


Floating Picture

Contains a picture in metafile graphics format. Right-click the picture to change its properties.


OLE Object

Floats above cells in a notebook sheet and links other applications to Corel Quattro Pro. Right-click the OLE object to change its properties.


Notebook Title Bar

Displays the notebook's file name. Right-click the notebook title bar to change properties that affect the entire notebook.


Sheet Tab

Identifies the sheet. Right-click the tab, then click Sheet Properties to change the sheet name or other properties of the sheet.


Chart Icon

Represents a specific chart in the notebook. Right-click the icon to change the name of the chart.


Dialog Icon

Represents a specific dialog box in the notebook. Right-click the icon to change properties of the dialog.


Slide Show Icon

Represents a specific slide show in the notebook. Right-click the icon to change properties of the slide show.


Block

A selected cell or group of cells. Right-click while the mouse pointer is within the selected cells to change the properties of the cells.


3-D Wall or Base

Each wall surrounds a 3-D chart and is a separate object. Click a chart, then right-click each wall to change its properties.


Grouped Objects

These are grouped objects that you treat as a single object in operations. For example, you can move and resize them with the mouse. To change the properties of every group object, right-click an object in the group (NOT an area between objects), click Properties, then make changes.

To ungroup them, click Format [image] Ungroup again to ungroup them.


Area Series

A data series plotted as an area, surface, shaded surface, or contour. Click a chart, then right-click the area representing the series you want to change.


Axis Title

Text created with the Chart [image] Titles command. Click a chart, then right-click the title to change its properties.


Bar Series

A data series plotted as a bar. Click a chart, then right-click the bar representing the series you want to change.


Column Chart

A single data series, with each value represented by a section of the column. Click a char, then right-click a section to change the chart's properties.


Chart Pane

The area bordered by the x- and y-axes in a 2-D chart. Click a chart, then right-click anywhere in the pane to change its properties.


Chart Background

The area within the chart window, behind the chart components. Click a chart, then right-click the background to change its properties.


Chart Subtitle

Text inside a transparent text box created with the Chart [image] Titles command. Click a chart, then right-click the title to change its properties.


Chart Title

Text inside a transparent text box created with the Chart [image] Titles command. Click a chart, then right-click the title to change its properties.


Chart Title Box

The text box around the title and subtitle. Click to display the box boundary, then right-click where the pointer is an arrow to set box properties.


Legend

A box that defines the series in some chart types. Click a chart, then right-click anywhere in the legend box except on the series markers to change legend properties.


Line Series

A data series plotted as line series. Click a chart, then right-click the area representing the series you want to change.


Pie Chart

A single data series, with each value represented as a slice of the pie. Click a chart, then right-click a pie slice to change its properties.


Series Label

Text that appears on the bars, markers, or points that represent values in a chart. Click a chart, then right-click a label to change the properties of all the labels.


X-Axis

The axis along which labels are usually placed, normally the horizontal axis, except in rotated charts. Click a chart, then right-click the axis to change its properties.


Y-Axis

The axis against which series elements are plotted, normally the vertical axis, except in rotated charts. Click a chart, then right-click the axis to change its properties.


Tab Scroll Controls

These four buttons control the scrolling of sheet tabs.
<<	Displays the previous group of sheet tabs.
<	Displays the previous sheet tab.
>	Displays the next sheet tab.
>>	Displays the next group of sheet tabs.


QuickTab

Moves quickly between the current notebook sheet and the Objects sheet.


Pane Splitter

Splits the notebook window into two panes, either vertically or horizontally.


Scroll Bar

Scrolls the active notebook sheet. You can drag the scroll box, click the scroll arrows, or click in the scroll bar itself.


Select All button

Selects all cells on the notebook sheet.


Column border

Selects all cells in the column.


Row border

Selects all cells in the row.


Corel Quattro Pro desktop

Contains all Corel Quattro Pro document windows.


Input line

Displays information about the active cell. In Edit mode, the input line shows the data you are entering or editing, and it contains cell names, @ (@functions), {} (macros), X (Cancel), and checkmark (Enter) buttons.


Navigate button

Displays a list of cell names in the current notebook. Use the Navigate button to go to a named area and have Corel Quattro Pro select it. If no cells have been named, the Navigate button is inactive.


Active cell address

Indicates the sheet, row, and column of the active cell.


Application Bar

Displays information about the current state of Corel Quattro Pro below the sheet tabs. For example, [image] (if Caps Lock is on), [image] if the Num Lock key is on, and the mode (such as READY or EDIT).


Objects sheet

Contains icons representing the charts, dialog boxes, and slide shows you have created.


@Functions button

Displays a list of @functions. You can select an @function and insert it into the input line.


Macros button

Displays a list of macro commands. You can select a macro command and insert it into the input line.


Cancel button

Cancels the entry you have made.


OK button

Completes (accepts) the entry you have made.


Line

A floating line drawn using the Line tool [image] from the toolbar. To customize the line, right-click it, then choose the Line Properties command.


Arrow

A floating arrow drawn using the Arrow tool [image] from the toolbar. To customize the arrow, right-click it, then choose the Arrow Properties command.


Rectangle

A floating rectangle drawn using the Rectangle tool [image] from the toolbar.To customize the rectangle, right-click it, then choose the Rectangle Properties command.


Rounded rectangle

A floating rectangle with rounded corners drawn using the Rounded Rectangle tool [image] from the toolbar.To customize the rounded rectangle, right-click it, then choose the Rounded Rectangle Properties command.


Ellipse

A floating ellipse drawn using the Ellipse tool [image] from the toolbar. To customize the ellipse, right-click it, then choose the Ellipse Properties command.


Text box

A floating text object drawn using the Text tool [image] from the toolbar. Double-click the text box to edit the text within it. To customize the text box, right-click it, then choose the Text Box Properties command.


Restore

Returns a windows to its previous size and position.


Move

Moves a window.


Size

Changes window size.


Minimize

Reduces a window to an icon.


Maximize

Expands a window to fill the screen.


Close

Closes a window.


Next

Switches to the next window in the series of current windows.


Test

Tests a custom application.


Slide

Represents a chart in miniature form, in the order it appears in the slide show. You can change the slide order, transition effect, display time, and transition speed assigned to each slide.


Master Slide

Maintains common elements and renders a background style for all slides in a slide show.

The master slide does not display when you run the slide show unless it is also included as a separate slide.


Using OLE Automation Features

Corel Quattro Pro's OLE automation features let you create and manipulate objects in other applications that support OLE 2.0 automation as a client. The following topics describe these features and their use.

OLE Automation Overview

OLE Automation Terms

Automation Expression Syntax

OLE Automation Object Functions

OLE Automation and Macros

OLE Automation Examples


OLE Automation Overview

OLE automation lets users operate another application from outside it, just as a remote control unit lets you operate a television at a distance. For this to happen, an object model must be created for the automated application.

In the case of a television, objects might represent the volume control, the power control, the channel selector, and various tuning controls for color quality and image centering. Properties are the settings each object can have to control appearance and other attributes, while methods are the actions you can perform with or on each object.

OLE automation works through automation expressions created with Corel Quattro macro statements.

1	First, you open an application and create a new object or get an existing object.

2	Next, you work with macro commands and an application's automation methods to set properties and perform other actions.

3	Finally, you close the object and exit the application.

To understand the structure of automation expressions, you need to know how certain terms are used for OLE automation in Corel Quattro Pro (see OLE Automation Terms).

Because this is complex material, you might want to print all the topics that describe OLE automation.

Related Concepts


OLE Automation Terms

These terms are important for understanding Corel Quattro Pro's OLE automation features. The terms are listed in order, from the most basic to the most complex. For the best understanding, read their definitions in order.

Within each definition, terms in italics are defined in other topics listed here.

Automation Objects

Collections (OLE Automation)

Methods (OLE Automation)

Properties (OLE Automation)

Values (OLE Automation)

Variables (OLE Automation)

Named Variables (OLE Automation)

Expressions (OLE Automation)

Arguments (OLE Automation)

Automation Expressions

Related Concepts


Automation Objects

An automation object is a representation of some part of an application or the application itself that has been exposed for OLE automation. Most applications that support OLE automation as clients expose the main application object--for example, Visio.Application or Excel.Application. Automation objects have properties and methods that can be used to change the attributes of objects and act on them. To learn which objects are exposed for OLE automation, check an application's documentation.

Related Concepts


Collections (OLE Automation)

A collection is a group of related automation objects, usually listed as a plural. For example, if MenuItem is an object, MenuItems could be a collection of all menu items. Like objects, collections can have their own sets of properties and methods.

Related Concepts


Methods (OLE Automation)

Like properties, methods are associated with automation objects. Methods act on objects and usually return the result of the action. To learn which methods are available for each object, check an application's documentation.

Related Concepts


Properties (OLE Automation)

Properties are characteristics of an automation object that describe its current state--usually either appearance or behavior. You can use methods to change some property settings. Other properties can be changed directly by specifying a different argument.

Related Concepts


Values (OLE Automation)

In Corel Quattro Pro OLE automation, a value can be a number, a double-quoted string, an automation object, or empty. Values can be stored as variables and included in expressions.

Related Concepts


Variables (OLE Automation)

In Corel Quattro Pro OLE automation, a variable is a place to store a value. A variable can be a cell (used to store a string, a number, or nothing/empty), a member of an automation object, or a named variable (used to store values of any type--often automation objects--in constrast to cells, which can hold only strings and numbers).

Related Concepts


Named Variables (OLE Automation)

Named variables are automation expressions created with the {ASSIGN} macro. They can't be used in formulas directly, but can be used indirectly if you first assign them to a cell name or reference. For details, see OLE Automation and Macros.

Named variables last as long as Corel Quattro Pro is running. To delete one before that, use {DELVAR}.

When Corel Quattro Pro parses an expression, names are first assumed to identify a cell, cells, then named variables. This means that a named variable can't have the same name as a cell reference, a group of cells, or a cell name in the notebook which contains the currently executed macro. Otherwise, it isn't accessible.

The name of a named variable can't contain any formula operators or leading or trailing spaces, although spaces within the name are acceptable.

Related Concepts


Expressions (OLE Automation)

An expression symbolizes a value or variable, depending on its use. An expression can be a string, a number, a cell (cell reference, cell coordinates, or cell name), the name of a named variable, a formula expression (see Syntax Rules for information about the syntax of @function formulas), or an automation expression.

If an expression is used to express a value and it represents a variable, the value of that variable is returned. For example, if a value is expected from expression A1, the value stored in A1 is used.

If an expression is used to express a variable and it represents a value, that value is converted to a cell or named variable if the value is a string. For example, +"A"&"1" results in a cell variable representing the cell reference A1.

A value expression is an expression of a value.

A variable expression is an expression of a variable.

Related Concepts


Arguments (OLE Automation)

An argument is information supplied to part of an automation expression--to a property, method, or formula.

Related Concepts


Automation Expressions

An automation expression is an automation object (or object hierarchy) plus any associated property or method and arguments, if any.

In its simplest form, the syntax is object.property or object.method. Because automation objects are usually found in hierarchies, members of successive hierarchical levels can be used to specify the exact target object. Elements of automation expressions are separated by periods--for example,

Application.ActiveSheet(1)

Range("RangeName").ClearContents

For syntax details, see Automation Expression Syntax.

Non-syntax errors in automation expressions can be trapped with the {ONERROR} macro command.

Related Concepts


Automation Expression Syntax

Automation Expression introduces OLE automation expressions and their basic syntax. The full syntax is

starting_object or

starting_object.member_cascade

7where

starting_object is an object function or named variable which represents an object.

object function is CreateObject(args) or GetObject(args).

member_cascade is member or object_member.member_cascade.

member is name or name(args) or [unquoted string].

object_member is member representing an object.

args is empty or arg or arg,arg.

arg is a value expression (expression of a value).

OLE automation methods and properties can all be included as member, usually at the end of an expression.

A property or method without arguments can be used without parentheses.

The object connector, shown above as a period (.), is determined by the international setting for a decimal point. The list separator, shown above as a comma (,)--as in arg,arg--is determined by the international separator character setting.

For sample expressions derived from these definitions, see OLE Automation Expression Examples.

For details on using CreateObject and GetObject, see OLE Automation Object Functions.

Corel Quattro Pro doesn't support the use of automation expressions in formulas, although there is a way to accomplish the same thing. For details, see {ASSIGN} in the following topic: OLE Automation and Macros.

Related Concepts


OLE Automation Object Functions

Corel Quattro Pro uses two OLE automation object functions to create and retrieve objects from other applications and insert them in Corel Quattro Pro notebooks: GetObject and CreateObject. They perform different tasks depending on the arguments used with them and the application that provides the objects. Both functions accept the progID argument, which is a programmatic identifier registered by an application during its installation--for example, Excel.Application, Visio.Application. These object functions can be used in OLE automation expressions within Corel Quattro Pro macros.

CreateObject

This object function is not the same as the macro {CREATEOBJECT}.

CreateObject(progID) locates the target application, loads it, creates an object, and returns the object. The application can be loaded only if its path is registered or specified in PATH. For example, CreateObject("Visio.Application") returns a Visio graphics object.

GetObject

This object function retrieves an existing object from somewhere, depending on the given arguments:

GetObject(filename) returns an object from the specified file. The file name should be fully qualified with path and extension. GetObject loads the application which can open that file and returns an object from that file back to the active Corel Quattro Pro notebook. If filename identifies a specific object, such as "c:\excel\a.xls!a1:b10", GetObject returns an object represented by a1:b10 in that file.

GetObject(filename,progID) loads the specified application and returns the specified file. Although this expression seems to work like GetObject(filename), it can return objects such as charts which the other expression can't access. For example, GetObject("c:\excel\test.xls!chart 1","Excel.Application") returns an Excel chart automation object, but GetObject("c:\excel\test.xls!chart 1") fails.

GetObject(,progID) or GetObject("",progID) returns the currently running object of the specified application. For example, this expression returns chart 1 from the active Excel notebook: GetObject("chart 1","Excel.Application")

GetObject(object_name) locates an embedded automation object inside Corel Quattro Pro. All of these syntaxes are acceptable:

GetObject("object")

GetObject("page:object")

GetObject("[notebook]page:object")

GetObject("[]page:object")

If GetObject(object_name) fails, then try GetObject(filename).

Note

All these expressions work with the {ASSIGN} macro to create a named variable that refers to the returned object. For example, the following macro expression creates the variable Chart1 that represents the returned object:

{ASSIGN Chart1,GetObject("chart 1","Excel.Application")}

Related Concepts


OLE Automation and Macros

These macro commands directly support OLE automation in Corel Quattro Pro:

{ASSIGN}	Assigns a value to a variable.

{DELVAR}	Deletes the named variable VarName and frees any object assigned to that variable.

{EXECAUTO}	Evaluates one or more automation expressions, but drops any returned values from expressions.

{GETLABEL}	Pauses the macro, displays Prompt, and stores subsequent keystrokes as a label in VariableExpression.

{GETNUMBER}	Pauses the macro, displays Prompt, and stores subsequent keystrokes as a numeric value in VariableExpression.

{IFAUTOOBJ}	Checks to see if ObjectExpression is an OLE automation object before continuing with the macro.

{SETLCID}	Specifies a locale ID for automation expressions to accommodate international localizations.

Related Concepts


OLE Automation Macro Tips

1	Because macro command arguments are value expressions, you can pass an automation expression as an argument to any macro command. For example, if calc.accum represents the accum value of the calc named variable, and excel.ActiveCell.Value represents the current value of the Excel ActiveCell object, then both these macros are valid:

{DOWN calc.accum}

{DOWN excel.ActiveCell.Value}

2	Corel Quattro Pro doesn't support the use of automation expressions in formula expressions. So, these macros are invalid:

{IF named_variable>0} {do something}

{LET A2, named_variable+A1}

{IF named_variable.member>0}

To solve this problem, assign the value of an automation expression to a cell first, then use that cell in a formula expression:

{ASSIGN A1,named_variable}

{IF A1>0}{do something}

3	If you use {ASSIGN} to create a named variable, the variable exists until you exit Corel Quattro Pro. To delete a variable before exiting, use {DELVAR VarName}.

Related Concepts


OLE Automation Examples

OLE automation expressions are used within Corel Quattro Pro macros to perform OLE automation tasks. See these topics for examples of acceptable expression forms and macros that use them:

OLE Automation Expression Examples

OLE Automation Macro Examples

Related Concepts


OLE Automation Expression Examples

Automation Expression Syntax defines acceptable syntax for OLE automation expressions in Corel Quattro Pro. The following acceptable expression forms are derived from the definitions given in that topic:

named_variable

CreateObject(progID) where progID is the program identifier registered for an application during its installation

GetObject(filename and/or progID)

named_variable.member

named_variable.member1.member2(arg1,arg2)

named_variable.member1(arg1,arg2).member2

OLE automation objects, properties, and methods can be included as member; properties and methods usually occur at the end of the expression. For more information on named variables, see Named Variable (OLE Automation).

For details on using CreateObject and GetObject in automation expressions, see OLE Automation Object Functions.

Related Concepts


OLE Automation Macro Examples

The following examples show how automation expressions are used within macros to work with objects in other applications. Although most work is done invisibly, "behind the scenes", the effects are real.

1	For example, the following macro opens TEST.XLS and saves it as TEST2.XLS. If you try to assign another variable to TEST2.XLS without using {DELVAR} to delete the variable File that represents TEST2.XLS, you'll be prompted that TEST2.XLS already exists and is open.

{ASSIGN Test,GetObject("c:\excel\test.xls!C2:C6")}

{EXECAUTO Test.SaveAs("c:\excel\test2.xls")}

{ASSIGN File,GetObject("c:\excel\test2.xls")}

{ASSIGN Myrange,File.Range("Myrange")}

{IFAUTOOBJ Myrange}{LET G39,"New"}{RETURN}

{LET G39,"Empty"}

2	This macro opens the graphics application VISIO, creates a new file, draws a rectangle in the workspace, saves the file, and exits VISIO:

{ASSIGN VisioApp,CreateObject("Visio.Application")}

{IFAUTOOBJ VisioApp}{EXECAUTO VisioApp.Documents.Add("")}

{EXECAUTO VisioApp.ActivePage.DrawRectangle(1,7,5,10)}

{EXECAUTO VisioApp.ActiveDocument.SaveAs(TestFile)}

{EXECAUTO VisioApp.Quit()}

TestFile is the cell name for a cell containing this string: C:\DATA\OLE2\VISIAUTO.VSD. The macro statement that saves the active document as TestFile actually creates VISIAUTO.VSD in the specified directory.

3	The next macro names a variable Test, assigns 0 to it, then prompts for an entry other than 0 and stores it in Test. After assigning the value in Test to VariableValue (the name of a cell) and deleting Test, it evaluates VariableValue and determines whether Test did indeed receive a new value which was assigned to VariableValue.

{ASSIGN Test,0}

{GETNUMBER "Enter a number other than 0:",Test}

{ASSIGN VariableValue,Test}

{DELVAR Test}

{IF VariableValue<>0}{LET A1,"PASS"}{RETURN}

{LET A1,"FAIL"}

For more information on named variables, see Named Variable (OLE Automation).

For details on using CreateObject and GetObject in automation expressions, see OLE Automation Object Functions.

Related Concepts


Properties in the Dialog Window

Active Sheet

Add Down Button

Alarm On

Alarm Time

Allow Point Mode

Attach Child

Bitmap

Button Type

Convert Text

Current Time

Custom Color

Default

Default Button

Depend On

Dialog Type

Dimension

Disabled

Draw to Right

Edit Disabled

Edit Length

Enabled

Field Type

56 Colors

File TypeList

Fill Color

Frame Color

Grayed

Grid Options

Group Text

Help line

Hidden

History List

Interval in Units

Label Font

Label Text

List

List Length

Maximum

Minimum

Name

Number of Columns

Object Help

Object ID

Ordered

Sheet List

Sheet Name Text

Parameters

Position Adjust

Process Value

Rectangle Style

Resize

Selected

Selection Text

Show

Show Frame

Show Time

Tab Stop

Terminate Dialog

Text Draw Flags

Timer On

Title

Units in Milliseconds

Value

Related Topics


Active Sheet Property

Indicates the name of the tab that’s active in a tab control.

Related Topics


Add Down Button Property

Adds a down arrow to the right of a combo box.

Related Topics


Alarm On Property

Turns the Timer alarm on or off. When set to Yes, the time control generates an alarm event at the time specified by the Alarm Time property.

Related Topics


Alarm Time Property

Specifies the time of day to generate an alarm event when Alarm On is set to Yes.

Related Topics


Allow Point Mode Property

Lets the pointer be used to select cells while a dialog box remains on the screen. The Field Type property must be set to a Field Type other than Integer before Allow Point Mode can be enabled.

Related Topics


Attach Child Property

Used to group controls for moving or resizing. Click here [image] for details. The Attach Child property is available for many dialog controls.

Related Topics


Bitmap Property

Specifies a bitmap file (.BMP) or an internal Corel Quattro Pro bitmap to appear on a button.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Related Topics


Displays internal bitmaps used by Corel Quattro Pro. Select one from the list, or type the name of another bitmap.


Sets the name of the bitmap you want to use. Click the folder button to select a different bitmap file.


Shows a sample of what the bitmap looks like.


Button Type Property

Specifies the type of button: Push Button, Radio Button, Checkbox Button, OK Exit Button, or Cancel Exit button.

Push button

Acts like a push button. You can use link commands to make it perform operations when a user clicks it.

Radio button

Acts like a radio button, including a radio button's behavior in the group box. (A bitmap button appears recessed when a user chooses it.)

Check box

Acts like a check box button.

OK Exit button

Closes the dialog box like a standard OK button. If the dialog box was displayed by {DODIALOG}, the values for controls whose Process Value property is set to Yes are written back to the setting block.

Cancel Exit button

Closes the dialog box like a standard Cancel button. If the dialog box was displayed by {DODIALOG}, the values for controls whose Process Value property is set to Yes are not written back to the setting block, since the dialog box was canceled.

Related Topics


Convert Text Property

Controls the format of text in edit fields. If Convert Text is set to Yes, all characters preceded by a \ are treated as escape sequences. Important: The Convert Text property is valid only if a field's value is set via a macro command or link, and not simply typed into the edit field.

Valid formatting codes for edit field text are:

\n	Displays following text on a new line

\t	Inserts a tab (handy for lining up columns of text within the edit field)

\\	Inserts a backslash (\) into the text. Use \\ when you have to enter \n or \t as normal text into the edit field.

Related Topics


Current Time Property

Fetches the current time. Settings cannot be altered.

Related Topics


Displays the current number of hours on your system clock.


Displays the current number of minutes on your system clock.


Displays the current number of seconds on your system clock.


Custom Color Property

Specifies whether the color control should include a button for specifying different colors.

Related Topics


Default Property

Determines the default value displayed in a spin control or an edit field control (with Field Type set to Integer).

Related Topics


Default Button Property

Specifies whether a push button or bitmap button is automatically clicked when the user presses Enter in a dialog box or toolbar. A button configured this way is called the default button. A button defined as the default button displays in the dialog box with a thick black border. Only one button in the dialog box can have this property set to Yes; by default, it is the OK button. Setting a control's Default Button property to Yes automatically sets the other control's Default Button properties to No.

Related Topics


Depend On Property

Specifies the areas of Corel Quattro Pro in which the dialog control is enabled when the dialog box displays. For example, some controls are only appropriate in a chart window. Depend On can be set to Desktop, Notebook, Chart, Dialog, Input Line, or Objects Sheet. If all of the options are checked, the dialog control is always available. The Depend On property is available for many dialog controls.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Related Topics


Enables the control when the dialog is displayed from the Corel Quattro Pro desktop.


Enables the control when the dialog is displayed from a notebook window.


Enables the control when the dialog is displayed from a chart window.


Enables the control when the dialog is displayed from another dialog box.


Enables the control when the dialog is displayed from the input line.


Enables the control when the dialog is displayed from the Objects sheet.


Dialog Type Property

Specifies whether a file control is for saving or opening files.

Related Topics


Dimension Property

Specifies the exact size and position of the control. Click here [image] for details. The Dimension property is available for many dialog controls, and is also available for Chart window objects when running Corel Quattro Pro in /D mode.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Tip

If you start Corel Quattro Pro in Developer Mode (with the /D parameter), the Dimension property will also be available for drawn chart objects.

Related Topics


Sets the distance in pixels between the left edge of the object and the left side of the window.


Sets the distance in pixels between the top edge of the object and the bottom edge of the window's title bar (or from the top of the chart background in the case of a drawn object).


Sets the width of the object in pixels.


Sets the height of the object in pixels.


Disabled Property

Disables the dialog control in the same manner as the Grayed property, but does not dim the control. The Disabled property is available for all dialog controls.

Related Topics


Draw to Right Property

Controls position of check box and radio button text. If set to Yes, text is placed to the right of the check box or radio button; if set to No, text is placed to the left. The default is Yes.

Related Topics


Edit Disabled Property

Disables typing in a combo box.

Related Topics


Edit Length Property

Specifies maximum number of characters allowed in an edit field, combo box, or spin control.

Related Topics


Enabled Property

Enables dialog controls that have been turned off with the Disabled property or by setting Enabled to No. It is used by link commands and does not appear in the control's properties.

The Enabled property is available for all dialog controls.

Related Topics


Field Type Property

Determines the allowable type of input to the edit field: Integer, String, Real, Block, or Hidden. After changing Field Type to Integer, properties change to Edit Integer.

Integer

Restricts user entry to integers. This adds three properties to the edit field properties (which is renamed Edit Integer). Minimum defines the lowest acceptable value users can enter. Maximum defines the highest acceptable value a user can enter. Default defines the initial value of the edit field.

String

Accepts any text a user enters (including numbers); this is the default edit field type.

Real

Accepts any number or formula.

Block

Accepts only cell addresses or block coordinates.

Hidden

Accepts any text, but displays a pound sign (#) for each character instead of the actual character. This is handy when users are entering passwords.

Related Topics


56 Colors Property

Specifies whether the color control should display 56 colors or 16 colors.

Related Topics


File TypeList Property

Specifies the file types that the browse button can display.

Related Topics


Enter the name of the list of types to use, or select it from the list.


Lists the file types you can use (only toolbar files, only database files, and so on).


Fill Color Property

Specifies the color inside a rectangle.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Related Topics


Check this option if you want to use the system color for the object.

For example, these are two default system colors:

Notebook sheet tabs are white.

Rectangles in a dialog boxes are gray with a black frame.


Sets the color of the object. If the Use System Color option is checked, the color control is disabled. Click the color control to select a color.


Frame Color Property

Specifies the color of a rectangle frame.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Related Topics


Grayed Property

Specifies whether the control can be used. When set to Yes, the control appears dimmer to indicate it is unavailable. The Grayed property is available for many dialog controls.

Tip

When you set the Grayed property for a control to Yes, you also have to set its Disabled property to No.

Related Topics


Grid Options Property

Shows or hides a grid in the dialog window, sets the number of pixels between grid lines, and turns Snap To Grid on or off. The grid is an aid in laying out dialog controls.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Related Topics


Sets the distance in pixels between grid lines.


Displays the grid to help you position objects in the window.


Snaps the sides of objects to the grid when you move, resize, or align objects.


Group Text Property

Specifies a title for a group box.

Related Topics


Help Line Property

A brief description that appears in a QuickTip when the control is selected by the user. The Help Line property is available for many dialog controls. For toolbar controls, this field sets the the QuickTip text that appears when you point to a toolbar button.

Related Topics


Hidden Property

Specifies whether the control is visible in the dialog box. When set to No, the control is hidden to the user but still displays when editing. The Hidden property is available for every dialog control.

Related Topics


History List Property

Set this to Yes to have a combo box store a history of value entered in its edit field; this supercedes the settings of the List property.

Related Topics


Interval in Units Property

Used with the Units in Milliseconds property to specify the interval at which the time control generates the timer event. The Interval in Units property determines how frequently the timer refresh event will be generated; the Units in Milliseconds property determines the number of milliseconds represented by each unit.

Related Topics


Label Font Property

Determines dialog label typeface and point size, and whether it is bold, italic, underlined, or strikeout.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Related Topics


Label Text Property

Specifies the text appearing on a QuickButton or control. To follow Windows conventions, when a button leads to another dialog box, you should end its text with an ellipsis (...).

Related Topics


List Property

Specifies a block containing a list to appear in a combo or list box, or selects one of Corel Quattro Pro's predefined lists: Fonts, DriveList, BitmapList, or BarExt.

If you specify a block and the block contents are changed after the List property has been set, the List settings will not be updated until the dialog box is opened again or an EXECUTE link command is used to refresh the list box.

Related Topics


List Length Property

Specifies the maximum number of history list entries in a combo box.

Related Topics


Maximum Property

Determines the highest number that can be entered in a spin control or an edit field (when its Field Type property is set to Integer).

Related Topics


Minimum Property

Determines the lowest number that can be entered in a spin control or an edit field (when its Field Type property is set to Integer).

Related Topics


Name Property (Dialog)

Used to identify a dialog control or drawn chart object. It can also be used by macros, link commands, and @functions to select the object, change its property settings, or read its property settings. The Name property is available for many objects.

Tip

If you start Corel Quattro Pro in Developer Mode (with the /D parameter), the Name property will also be available for many chart window objects.

Related Topics


Number of Columns Property

Specifies how many columns of items appear in a list box. The default is one column.

Related Topics


Object Help Property

Determines the contents of Object Help for the selected object. Use the Object Help property to create help for the objects in custom dialog boxes and toolbars.

The Object Help Title field sets the title of the object's help dialog.

The Object Help Text field sets the text that appears in the object's help dialog when you right-click the object in a dialog. (For toolbar buttons, the Help Line property sets the QuickTip that displays when the mouse is on the button.)

The WinHelp Context field lets you specify a WinHelp context string for a help topic--instead of using the Object Help title and text fields. The context string must be followed immediately by the @ symbol and help file name. You can then right-click the control to display help for it. (For more information about creating help files, see the Windows95 SDK documentation.)

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Tip

The combined total of all characters in the three Object Help fields cannot exceed 194 characters.

Related Topics


Sets the title of the object's help dialog.


Briefly describes the function of the object. This can be identical to the Help Line property text.


This optional field specifies the Winhelp context string of the relevant help topic. The context string must be followed immediately by the @ symbol and help file name.


Object ID Property

Assigns an identification number for dialog controls and drawn chart objects. It shows the order in which the dialog controls were created. The Object ID property is available for many objects. You can use the Object ID to identify objects in a macro command, link command, or @function. You cannot change the Object ID of an object; it is a read only property.

Tip

If you start Corel Quattro Pro in Developer Mode (with the /D parameter), the Object ID property will also be available for drawn chart objects.

Related Topics


Ordered Property

Sorts list box and combo box entries alphanumerically in ascending order. Setting it to No does not reset the order of a list that has been sorted.

Related Topics


Sheet List Property

The Sheet List property displays commands for creating, removing, and reordering tabs.

Related Topics


Indicates the tab to add or remove.


Lists the tabs already attached to the tab control. You can select an entry in this list to move it or insert new tabs before it.


Adds the tab indicated in Sheet Name before the tab name selected in Sheet List.


Adds the tab indicated in Sheet Name after the tab name selected in Sheet List.


Removes the selected tab name from the tab control.


Changes the position of the tab name selected in Sheet List.


Sheet Name Text Property

Lets you rename a tab in a tab control. You can also rename a tab in the Dialog Designer by double-clicking it and entering a new name.

Related Topics


Indicates the name of the tab.


Parameters Property

Controls the range of values a scroll bar accepts, and specifies how quickly the user can change the scroll bar's value.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Related Topics


Sets a horizontal bar's value when its scroll box is as far left as possible; vertical bars are set to this value when their scroll box is at the top of the scroll bar.


Sets a horizontal bar's value when its scroll box is as far right as possible; vertical bars are set to this value when their scroll box is at the bottom of the scroll bar.


Sets the amount the scroll bar's value changes when a user clicks a scroll arrow.


Sets the amount the scroll bar's value changes when a user clicks above or below the scroll box on a vertical scroll bar, or to the left or right of the scroll box on a horizontal scroll bar.


Sets the amount of time in milliseconds that Corel Quattro Pro waits before moving the scroll box in response to a user action (clicking a scroll bar, holding down the mouse button while pointing to a scroll arrow, and so on).


Position Adjust Property

Specifies how a control moves when its parent control is resized. The Position Adjust property is available for every dialog control.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Related Topics


Locks each edge of the child control in place so that when the parent control is resized, the child control resizes proportionally.


Centers the control between the left and right sides of the parent control whenever the parent control is resized.


Centers the control between the top and bottom of the parent control whenever the parent control is resized.


Position Relative To

Positions the child control relative to the sides of the parent control. Check Top, Bottom, Left, or Right to unlock edges of the child control. If you move an edge of the parent control, unlocked edges of the child control move instead of resizing.


Process Value Property

Setting this property to Yes lets the macro command {DODIALOG} access the control's value. See {DODIALOG} for more information. The Process Value property is available for many objects.

Related Topics


Rectangle Style Property

Determines the type of rectangle:

Plain

Draws the rectangle as a solid box without a frame.

Framed

Draws a frame around the rectangle (the default). To set the color of this frame, use the Frame Color property.

Beveled Out

Displays a slightly raised rectangle.

Beveled In

Displays a slightly recessed rectangle.

Transparent

Displays a clear, unfilled rectangle. This is handy for grouping controls together without displaying the rectangle they are attached to.

Engraved

Displays a rectangle with an etched frame.

To change a rectangle's color, right-click the rectangle and choose the Properties command, then click Fill Settings.

Related Topics


Resize Property

If set to Yes, makes the pick list automatically resize whenever the text appearing on it is too wide to fit.

Related Topics


Selected Property

Indicates numerically which radio button in a group box is chosen, or which item in a list box or pick list is highlighted. Numbers are sequential (such as 0,1,2,3,...9). If the first item is chosen or highlighted, Selected is set to 0. Choosing or highlighting the second item sets Selected to 1, and so on.

Related Topics


Selection Text Property

Returns the text of an item selected in a list box.

Related Topics


Show Property

The opposite of Hidden. Set it to No to hide the control from the user. It is used by link and macro commands and does not appear in the control's properties.

Related Topics


Show Frame Property

Displays a box around an edit field or spin control. Default is on.

Related Topics


Show Time Property

If set to Yes, shows the system time on the face of the time control.

Related Topics


Tab Stop Property

Determines whether the control can be activated by Tab. The Tab Stop property is available for many dialog controls.

Related Topics


Terminate Dialog Property

If set to Yes, pressing Enter triggers the default button (usually OK). This property is available for combo boxes, edit fields, and spin controls.

When set to No, keeps the dialog box from activating its default button when the user presses Enter in an edit field.

Related Topics


Text Draw Flags Property

Determines where the text appears in relation to its background (for labels, check boxes, and radio buttons) or in relation to the button itself (for push buttons and bitmap buttons).

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Special Characters

You can enter special text items in a label to change its appearance:

\n makes characters to the right of it display on a second line. This only works when the Single Line option (in the Text Draw Flags property) is unchecked.

\t inserts a tab into the text (a fixed amount of space that is handy for lining up columns of text).

\\ inserts a backslash (\) into the text. You can use this to enter \n or \t into a label as normal text.

& makes the character to the right of it appear underlined in the text (the ampersand does not appear). This is handy for naming controls. Use only one & character; if you use two, the & character appears underlined in the text.

Related Topics


Applies the Text Draw Flags properties you have selected.


Wrapping Text

Single Line specifies that the text appears on one line. Uncheck Single Line to wrap lines of text and enable the Word Break option. Word Break specifies wordwrapped lines (that is, lines of text that break between words, instead of in the middle of words).


Vertical Position

Top places text flush against the top edge of the label background. Center Vertically centers the text between the top and bottom of the background. It does not affect the horizontal position of the text. Bottom places text flush against the bottom of the background.


Horizontal Position

Left places text flush against the left side of the label background. Center Horizontally centers the text between the left and right sides of the label background. It does not affect the vertical position of the text. Right places text flush against the right side of the label background.


Timer On Property

Turns on or off the Timer, which specifies whether the time control generates time events at regular intervals.

Related Topics


Title Property

Determines the dialog box title or pick list title displayed to the user.

Related Topics


Units in Milliseconds Property

Controls Timer intervals together with the Interval in Units property. The Interval in Units property determines how frequently the timer refresh event will be generated; the Units in Milliseconds property determines the number of milliseconds represented by each unit.

Related Topics


Value Property

The current setting of a control. This varies from control to control. See the control descriptions for a discussion of their values. Value does not appear in the properties; you can access it using macros, link commands, or @functions. Most dialog controls have a Value property.

Related Topics


Properties in the Chart Window

3-D Options

3-D View

Alignment

Analyze

Aspect Ratio

Bar Options

Block

Border Color

Border Position

Border Settings

Box Settings

Bullet Color

Bullet Indentation

Bullet Style

Comparison Line

Display

Explode Slice

Fill Settings

Float Style

Format

Chart Button

Grid

Hi-Lo Bar Style

Label Alignment

Label Options

Legend Position

Line Spacing

Line Settings

Major Grid Style

Map Font

Map Legend Colors

Map Legend Patterns

Map Legend Title

Map Pin Symbol

Map Redraw

Marker Style

Minor Grid Style

Name

Numeric Format

Riser Style

Scale

Series Options

Text Font

Text Settings

Tick Options

Title

X-Axis Series

Related Topics


3-D Options Property

The 3-D Options property affects the appearance of the two walls and the base of 3-D charts. To change this property, display a 3-D chart, click the chart, then click Chart [image] Perspective.

To get information on an option, click [image], then click the option.

When wall or base display is on, you can right-click the wall or base and change its Fill and Border Properties. When display is off, only grid lines are visible, and you cannot right-click and change properties.

Related Topics


Hides or reveals the left wall.


Hides or reveals the back wall of the chart.


Hides the area under the series display.


Gives the chart 3-D walls. When thick walls are turned off, the walls look thin, like sheets of paper. This option applies to all walls in the chart.


3-D View Property

The 3-D View property lets you look at a 3-D chart from different vantage points. A sample chart in the dialog box lets you see changes before you apply them to your chart. The 3-D View property is available by clicking the chart, then clicking Chart [image] Perspective.

To get information on an option, click [image], then click the option.


Pivots the chart on its base. You can adjust the rotation to any angle between zero and 90 degrees. The default setting is 30 degrees.


View a chart from different heights. You can adjust the height to any angle between zero and 90 degrees. The default setting is 30 degrees.


Makes objects in the distance appear smaller than objects that are close. As you increase the Perspective setting, chart objects that are closest to your view get larger in proportion to objects that are farther away, and the chart looks somewhat distorted. When perspective is off, you view the chart at an ideal distance, and there is no distortion. When you check Perspective to turn this feature on, a slider bar for adjusting the amount of perspective appears.


Adjusts the distance between the front and back of the chart. When depth is set to 166, the top and base of a 3-D bar are square. To increase the depth, move the slider to the right. To make the chart appear flatter, or more two-dimensional, move the slider to the left.


Proportional to width when Corel Quattro Pro draws a chart with the standard 3-D View settings. This height is given the value 100. To increase the proportion of height to width, move the slider to the right. To decrease the height to width ratio, move the slider to the left.


Alignment Property

The Alignment property affects the placement of text within chart titles and text boxes. To change alignment, select the text box or chart title, right-click the box or title, then click the Properties option.

To get information on an option, click [image], then click the option.

Related Topics


Makes text left-justified, centered, or right-justified.


If checked, text goes to the next line when it reaches the right margin, and the box expands vertically to fit all the text you type. If unchecked, the box expands horizontally as you type; you have to press Enter to start a new line.


Sets tab stops within the text box at regular intervals you specify.


Analyze Property

The Analyze property is available in the area, bar, and line series properties in the chart window. It controls the type of analytical chart in use, if any. The options are:

None

Disables the analytical chart.

Aggregation

Combines, or aggregates, multiple data points and plots them as a single point that may be the sum, average, standard deviation, variance, minimum, or maximum of the data.

Moving Average

Smoothes fluctuating data points and highlights trends by plotting progressive averages for a specified number of points.

Linear Fit

Generates a straight line that best fits the data.

Exponential Fit

Generates a curve to fit data that increases or decreases geometrically.

Related Topics


Specify Aggregation, Moving Average, Linear Fit, or Exponential Fit as the analysis method to use. None (the default) disables the Analytical chart.


Indicates what the series values represent, or what period exists in the series. For example, if the series contains weekly information, choose Weeks. The aggregation period must be larger than the series period.


Indicates the number of data values to combine for each point on the chart. Choose a period, or type in a number (for example, 14 to represent 2 weeks) to use an arbitrary period. The aggregation period must be larger than the series period.


Select the function you want to use (sum, average, standard deviation, variance, minimum, or maximum) to combine data points. These functions are the same as the identically named @functions.


Creates a table of analysis data. Enter the upper left cell of the table's location in the Table edit field, or click [image] to select a cell from the notebook.


Displays the method of analysis for the specified series in the legend. Make sure the Legend Property is set to display a legend.


Specifies a number of points to average. Enter a number, or use the scroll bar.


Select Standard or None. Standard numerically places greater emphasis, or weight, on recent points (closest to the point it is working with) and less weight on older points (farthest from the most recent point). The oldest point is multiplied by 1, the next multiplied by 2, and so on; the most recent point is multiplied by the specified Period.


Aspect Ratio Property

The Aspect Ratio property affects the proportion of width to height in a chart. To change the aspect ratio, click a chart, right-click the border of the chart, then click Chart Window Properties [image] Aspect Ratio.

To get information on an option, click [image], then click the option.

Tip

Choose the aspect ratio for your final output before you begin to change properties or draw objects. A 35mm slide has different proportions than an 8 1/2 by 11 inch sheet of paper, for example. A chart and its labels may look right when the aspect ratio is set to 35mm screen slide, but everything may need to be resized when the aspect ratio is changed to Printer Preview.


Retains the proportions of the floating chart, even when you bring this chart into a chart window. This is the default aspect ratio when creating a floating chart using the Chart tool.


Gives the correct proportions to a chart that will be part of an onscreen slide show. This is the default aspect ratio when creating a chart using Insert [image] Chart.


Gives the correct proportions to a chart that will be sent to a slide service for processing into 35mm slides.


Shows the chart as it will look when printed with the current page setup.


Adjusts the chart display to fill the chart window and fit the area designated for the floating chart. Full extent assumes that charts and drawings are at their proper size when displayed full-screen; these elements are scaled down in smaller views, while fonts stay the same size no matter where they are displayed. This is why charts with the full extent aspect ratio often look different on a notebook sheet than they do in a chart window.


Bar Options Property

The Bar Options property is available when you right-click a bar in a chart and click the Properties command.

To get information on an option, click [image], then click the option.

Related Topics


Controls the thickness of the bars. When Corel Quattro Pro draws a bar chart, it divides the axis spaces evenly between the bars (reserving some of the axis area for spaces between the bars). The initial bar width depends on how many values you plot. To make the bars thinner, move the Bar Width Percentage slider to the left; to make the bars thicker, move the slider to the right.


Controls the amount of extra space between the bars and the right and left sides of the chart. A bar margin can give your chart a more polished look.


Determines how much the bars in a series cover the bars of the previous series. There are three settings: None (bars are placed side-by-side), Partial (bars overlap by 50% of their width), and Full (each series is drawn directly on top of the last one).


Cell Property

The Cell property lets you specify the notebook cells you want to appear in a chart. Type the cell coordinates, or click [image] to pick cells from the notebook.

Related Topics


Border Color Property

The Border Color property lets you specify a color for the border of the active floating object..

Related Topics


Border Position Property

The Border Position property lets you turn the display of each chart pane border off and on. This property also specifies whether chart grids appear behind or in front of bars, areas, and other chart markers.

To hide a side of the chart pane, deselect the border option (if checked). To reveal it, click the option (if unchecked).

To display the grid in front of bars and other chart markers, check Grids On Top. To hide the grid, change the Major Grid Style and Minor Grid Style properties of the y-axis and x-axis (select the blank line style).

When a hidden side coincides with an axis, the vertical or horizontal line that represents the axis is hidden, but all other features, such as tick marks and labels, are displayed.

The Border Position property is available when you right-click the chart pane of a 2-D chart (except a pie chart) and click the Properties command.

To get information on an option, click [image], then click the option.

Tip

If you turn off left and bottom border displays to hide axis lines, you will see a "plus sign" at the junction of the x- and y-axes, where tick marks cross. To eliminate these marks, right-click the x-axis, click the Properties command, and set Tick Options [image] Tick Style to None, then do the same for the y-axis.


When checked, turns on the display of each chart pane border. To set the color and thickness of the border, change the Border Settings property.


When checked, displays the grid in front of bars and other chart markers.


Border Settings Property

The Border Settings Property is available for every solid object that appears in or on a chart, except the chart background and text boxes. It sets the style, thickness, and color of the object's border.

To get information on an option, click [image], then click the option.

Related Topics


Sets the style or thickness of the lines. There are nine styles, ranging from transparent (the first button) to a thick line.


Sets the color of the lines.


Box Type property
Box Settings Property

The Box Settings property is available for the chart background, text boxes, and floating charts. A preview of the box type and color appears in the lower right corner.

To get information on an option, click [image], then click the option.

Tip

A similar property, Border Settings, sets the frame appearance for other chart objects.

Related Topics


Specifies the color of the box.


Sets the style of box that surrounds the object. The 12 choices range from "no frame" (the first button) to several 3-D styles.


Bullet Color Property

The Bullet Color property determines the color of bullet characters in a bullet series.

Related Topics


Bullet Indentation Property

The Bullet Indentation property sets the distance before and after bullets, and turns on or off hanging indentation.

To get information on an option, click [image], then click the option.

Related Topics


Sets the amount of spacing that appears before the bullet character in a series. Type a percentage of average character width (based on the Text Font property setting), or use the scroll bar to pick a value from 0 to 500.


Sets the amount of spacing that appears after the bullet character in a series. Type a percentage of average character width (based on the Text Font property setting), or use the scroll bar to pick a value from 0 to 500.


When checked, bullets are separated from their text, making items in the list easier to read. In a hanging indent, the first line is indented, then the rest of the lines for that bullet are indented farther.


Bullet Style Property

The Bullet Style property sets the type and size of bullets. Choose a bullet type from the sample bullets shown, then specify a number for the relative bullet size.

Related Topics


Use the scroll bar to pick a number from 0 to 32 to set the relative size of the bullets, or type a number in the edit field.

To not show bullets, set bullet size to 0.


Comparison Line Property

Selects the style and color of a comparison line for a stacked or 100% stacked bar comparison chart. The color and line options are identical to those in line charts.

Related Topics


Display Property

The Display property sets options for row and column borders, grid lines, and scaling for notebook cells added to a chart using the Cells tool [image].

To get information on an option, click [image], then click the option.


Shows row borders when checked; hides row borders when unchecked.


Shows column borders when checked; hides column borders when unchecked.


Shows horizontal grid lines when checked; hides horizontal grid lines when unchecked.


Shows vertical grid lines when checked; hides vertical grid lines when unchecked.


Maintains the same aspect ratio as the cells in the notebook cells. Uncheck this option to fit cells in the specified box, making each cell the same width.


Explode Slice Property

The Explode Slice property is available for 2-D and 3-D pie and doughnut charts, including multiple pie charts. Pie and doughnut charts plot a single series; each value is a "slice" of the chart circle. To emphasize a slice, you can explode it (pull it away from the rest of the circle).

To get information on an option, click [image], then click the option.

Multiple 2-D and 3-D pie charts plot each series as a separate pie. When you explode a slice in one pie, the corresponding slices in the other pies are also exploded.

Related Topics


Specifies the amount of space between the pie or doughnut and the exploded slice. The space is measured as a percentage of the radius (the default value is 25%).


Enables the explode feature.


Fill Settings Property

The Fill Settings Property is available for every solid object that appears in or on a chart, including bars, areas, line chart markers, and drawn objects such as ellipses and rectangles. Fill settings is also available for Map Legends.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Related Topics


Lets you to choose a pattern, a two-color wash, an imported bitmap, or no fill from the drop-down list.


Specifies the style of wash. A preview of the style appears in the lower right corner.


Specifies the style of the pattern. A preview of the style appears in the lower right corner.


Specifies the color of the pattern, or the start color if you are using a wash.


Specifies the color behind the pattern, or the end color if you are using a wash.


Displays only the part of the bitmap that fits within the object.


Shrinks or enlarges the bitmap to fit within the object.


Repeats the image until the entire object is full.


Enter the name of the bitmap file you want to use, or click the folder button to select a bitmap file.


Adjusts a bitmap to simulate the depth of a 3-D wall (for 3-D Chart walls only).


Float Style Property

The Float Style property selects the style of floating marker used in the 3-D floating marker chart.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.


Sets the style of floating marker. Choose one of the marker types pictured.


Sets the cross section (circle, square, hexagon, or octagon) of the marker type.


Sets the relative size of the markers. Type a number, or use the scroll bar to pick a value from 8 to 32.


Format Property

The Format property specifies how series labels are displayed (as text, or in a numeric format such as date or currency, for example).

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Tip

All numeric formats leave the cell values intact; they only affect the way values are displayed.

Related Topics


Chart Button Property

The Chart Button property is available for every Text Box and for the Chart Background. This property turns a text box, or the chart background, into a "live" button in a slide show.

The background chart button defines what action should be taken if a viewer clicks on any area outside of the defined text-box chart buttons. This invisible button traps random clicks, which makes it well suited for use in slide shows. Each chart can have as many text box chart buttons as you want, but there is only one background button per chart.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Tip

Chart Buttons do not work in a chart window, or in a floating chart on a notebook sheet.

Related Topics


Select the chart you want displayed after the macro has run. If Select Chart is unchecked, no other charts will be displayed.


Runs a macro from the Chart Button when it's clicked. Enter a defined macro or macro statements (up to 160 characters) into the Macro edit field.


Grid Property

Grid is one of two Chart Window Properties. A grid is a series of vertical and horizontal dotted lines spaced at regular intervals. When you draw objects, the grid can help you size and place objects correctly. Grid lines are a design aid only; they do not print or appear in slide shows.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Related Topics


Turns the grid display on and off. Display Grid and Snap to Grid work independently. For example, you can place objects using Snap to Grid even when the grid display is turned off.


Controls the distance between the dotted grid lines. The size is measured as a percentage of the chart window area. The default grid size, 4, means the distance between each grid line is 4% of the edge it intersects, with 25 increments in each direction (a 25 x 25 grid). The grid has the fewest guidelines when the grid size is set to 25 (a 4 x 4 grid), and the densest guidelines when the grid size is set to 1 (a 100 x 100 grid).


Automatically aligns objects with the nearest grid point when you create or move them. You can align several objects by placing them close to the same grid line. The grid forces the objects to align with the grid and with each other. Display Grid and Snap to Grid work independently. For example, you can place objects using Snap to Grid even when the grid display is turned off.


Hi-Lo Bar Style Property

This property determines how high and low values are represented in High-Low Charts. Choose between bar, I-beam, line, and marker styles.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Related Topics


Give you a "bar and whisker" (or "candle") chart. A line connects high and low values. A bar spans the open and close values. When the close value is higher than the open, the bar is white. When the open value is higher than the close, the bar is blue. (Retain this light/dark relationship if you change fill colors.)


High and low values determine each end of the I-beam. Open and close are represented by left and right tick marks, respectively.


Connects corresponding high and low values with a line and shows open and close values as left and right tick marks.


Assigns different-colored markers to high, low, open, and close values, and connects each set of corresponding values with a line.


Label Alignment Property

A label series places labels on the bars, markers, or data points that represent each value in a series. The Label Alignment property is available when you right-click one of these labels and click the Properties command.

Label Alignment sets the position of series labels relative to the bars or data points. The chart type determines which alignment options are available.

On bar charts, you have four choices, Above, Top, Middle, and Bottom. Above places the labels above the top margin of each bar. Top, Middle, and Bottom place labels on the bars, in different locations. Top places labels near the top margin; middle puts labels over the center of each bar, and bottom places labels just above the x-axis.

On line charts you can center series labels over the data points, or place each label to the Left, Above, to the Right, or Below the corresponding data point.

Related Topics


Label Options Property

The Label Options property is available when you right-click a slice in a pie or doughnut chart or a section of a column chart and click the Properties command.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Related Topics


Places text labels next to the data labels. (If you have an x-axis series defined for the chart, the x-axis series appears in this edit field.)


Shows the values from the notebook sheet, in dollars.


Shows the data as a percentage of the value of the whole series.


Shows the actual data that appears on the notebook sheet.


No value labels appear next to the slice.


Turns tick mark display off and on. Be sure to turn this option off if you do not have a label series defined, and if you set Data Label to None.


Legend Position Property

The Legend Position Property specifies where a legend box appears on the chart. The left option hides the legend. The middle option creates a horizontal legend and places it below the chart. The right option creates a vertical legend and places it to the right of the chart.

This property is available for all 2-D charts (except pie and column charts), maps, and for 3-D chart types that have legend boxes.

To change the legend position, click a chart, then click Chart [image] Legend. You can set the legend to a specific orientation, then drag it to any position inside of the chart window.


Line Spacing Property

The Line Spacing property sets the spacing before and after each line of text in a bullet series. For both the Before Text Line and After Text Line options, type a percentage of line height (based on the Text Font property setting), or use the scroll bar to pick a number from 0 to 500.

Related Topics


Line Settings Property

The Line Settings property is available for all line series (including those in Line charts, XY charts, High-Low charts and in line series in combination charts you create by overriding the chart type of an individual series).

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Related Topics


Major Grid Style Property

The Major Grid Style property is available for the x-axis and the primary and secondary y-axes of a chart. Major grid lines extend from each major tick on an axis to the opposite side of the chart. The appearance of the major grid is also affected by the Increment value, which is a Scale property option.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Related Topics


Map Font Property

The Map Font property lets you change the typeface, size, style, and color of pin label text or map legend text, depending on the object you select.

Related Topics


Select a color for the symbol.


Map Legend Colors Property

The Map Legend Colors tab lets you hide or display the color data legend, change the color and range of values for each color bin, and add descriptive text next to each color bin. You can use this property to change the color in a specific region by:

Changing the color of the region’s bin, or

Changing the range of values in the region’s bin so the region moves to another bin (either up or down).

You can also exclude color data from some regions by requiring exact matches with bin values. Bin values may be either numbers or text.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Related Topics


Specify up to six groups for your map data.


Displays or hides the color legend.


Specify the maximum value in each group.


Select a color for the group.


Type a description of the group. The description will appear in the legend.


Check this box to turn off the automatic grouping feature so you can specify the values of each group yourself.


Check this box to specify that the value in your data be exactly the same as the setting in the dialog box, instead of a number within a range.


Map Legend Patterns Property

The Map Legend Patterns tab lets you hide or display the pattern data legend, change the pattern and range of values for each pattern bin, and add descriptive text next to each pattern bin. You can use this property to change the pattern in a specific region by:

Changing the pattern of the region’s bin, or

Changing the range of values in the region’s bin so the region moves to another bin (either up or down).

You can also exclude pattern data from some regions by requiring exact matches with bin values. Bin values may be either numbers or text.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Related Topics


Displays or hides the pattern legend.


Select a pattern for the group.


Map Legend Title Property

The Legend Title tab lets you place a title at the top of the legend and specify the font and color of the title.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.


Type the text of the legend title.


Displays or hides the legend title.


Map Pin Symbol Property

The Pin Symbol property lets you change the symbol used to mark points on a map, as well as control display of pin labels.

Click here [image] for a table showing how Pin Symbol settings affect display of symbols and labels in a map.

Pin labels will only appear in your map if you select them along with your pin names or latitude and longitude coordinates. If you do not include the labels in your selection, pin locations will be marked with a symbol or left blank, depending on the Display Pin Symbol setting.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Related Topics


Displays or hides pin labels. You must also select pin label data before you can display pin labels.


Displays or hides pin symbols. You must also select pin names or latitude and longitude coordinates before you can display pin symbols.


Select a symbol to mark all defined pin locations in your map.


Pin Symbol Settings

If Display Pin Labels is...	and Display Pin symbol is...	the resulting map has...
Not checked	Not checked	No labels or symbols
Checked	Not checked	Pin labels only
Not checked	Checked	Pin symbols only
Checked	Checked	Both pin labels and pin symbols (default)


Map Redraw Property

The Map Redraw property sets map redraw to manual or automatic.The more complex a map you make, the longer it takes to redraw each time you modify an element in the map. You can set the Map Redraw property to Manual, so the map redraws when you open it or view it by right-clicing it and clicking View.


Marker Style Property

The Marker Style property is available for all line series (including those in line charts, XY charts, high-low charts and in line series in combination charts you create by overriding the chart type of an individual series). This property specifies the symbol placed at each data point in a series.

There are 16 marker styles. Eleven of these are outline styles--markers with no interior fill. The other five are solid markers with filled interiors. The color of outline-style markers and the border color of solid markers is determined by the Line Color. The type of line that forms the outline or border is set by the Line Settings property.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Related Topics


Sets the style of the markers.


Check this box to match the marker size to the size of the chart with a default weight of 5.


Sets the size of the markers relative to the line. When AutoSize is checked, the weight is 5.

Increase or decrease the weight to change the size of the markers. To not show markers, set the marker weight to zero.


Minor Grid Style Property

The Minor Grid Style property is available for the x-axis in an XY Chart and in the primary and secondary y-axes of a chart. Minor grid lines extend from each minor tick on an axis to the opposite side of the chart. The Minor Grid Style property selects the line style and line color for these lines. The appearance of the minor grid is also affected by the No. of Minors value, which is a Scale property option.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Related Topics


Name Property (Chart/Slide Show Icons)

The Name property is available when you view the properties of chart icons and slide show icons on the Objects sheet. This property lets you rename charts and slide shows.

Tip

If you start Corel Quattro Pro in Developer Mode (with the /D parameter), the Name property allows you to assign a name to drawn chart objects.

Related Topics


Numeric Format property (Chart)
Numeric Format Property

The Numeric Format property is available for labels on the primary y-axis, the secondary y-axis (which has the same set of properties as the primary y-axis) of a chart, and for the scaling x-axis of XY Charts.

By default, the Numeric Format setting is General, which means the numbers on the axis scale are displayed exactly as they are calculated from your data. Other formats are available, including formats that add commas, dollar signs, or other characters to your original number.

If the format you choose allows a variable number of decimal places, an edit field appears. If you want to display other than the default number of decimal places (2), enter a number from 0 to 15 in the edit field.

If you choose Date or Time, you must choose a specific date or time format.

If you choose User Defined, you can choose from a list of formats you create yourself.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Related Topics


Riser Style Property

The Riser Style property is available for 3-D bar types. It sets the type of riser used for bar series.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.


Sets the style of riser used for the 3-D bar.


Sets the cross section (circle, square, hexagon, or octagon) of the riser type.


Scale Property

The Scale property is available for labels on the primary y-axis, the secondary y-axis (which has the same set of properties as the primary y-axis) of a chart, and for the scaling x-axis of XY Charts. When Corel Quattro Pro draws a chart, it automatically adjusts the axis scale to fit the range of numbers assigned to the axis. You can change this scale to fine-tune the chart or to zoom in on a specific area.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Related Topics


Sets the scale to Normal or Log (logarithmic). In a normal scale, the value of each major division is exactly the same. In a logarithmically scaled axis, each major division of the axis represents 10 times the value of the previous major division. A logarithmic scale is useful when you are plotting series with wide ranges in magnitude.


Simplifies the axis labels where numbers on the axis scale are 1000 or greater. Show Units displays only the first characters of the label and automatically adds the appropriate units title in parentheses along the y-axis: "(thousands)" or "(millions)" for example. (To change the font, color, or other properties of the Show Units title, right-click it and click the Properties option.)


Refers to the scale that is automatically calculated from your data. If you change High, Low, Increment, or No. of Minors settings, this option becomes unchecked. If you check it, it clears your changes and resets the scale to Corel Quattro Pro's original settings.


Set the highest and lowest values for the axis scale. (To set a descending scale, reverse the high and low values.)


Sets the increase (or in descending scales, the decrease) in values between major tick marks. This option also affects the spacing between major grid lines.


Specifies how many minor tick marks and minor grid lines to place between major tick marks. (The default style for minor grid lines is "no lines," so you will not see minor grid lines unless you select a different Line Style option for the Minor Grid Style property.)


Appears as an option of the Scale property only when you right-click the y-axis of a variance chart and click Properties. The zero line provides the frame of reference for the "variance" that gives this chart type its name. Values less than the zero line setting project below the line; higher values extend above the line.


Series Options Property

Series Options properties can apply to lines, bars, or areas.for 2-D and 3-D charts. To view the properties of a particular series, right-click the bar, line, or area that plots the series and click the Properties command.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Related Topics


Selects or changes the data series to be plotted. Enter a series, or click [image] to select cells of numeric data from the notebook.


Places labels over bars in bar charts, and over data points in line and area charts. Enter a series, or click [image] to select cells of labels from the notebook.


Lets you enter legend text (or the coordinates where legend text is located), to override the legend label that is placed in the chart by the series.


Changes the chart type of the series you right-clicked. Use this option to create a custom combination chart. You can override a series on 2-D bar, line, variance, and high-low charts. (High-low charts restrict the override to the fifth series or greater.)


Lets you plot the selected series against the primary y-axis or secondary y-axis. This option is available only for 2-D bar, line, variance, and high-low charts.


Subtitle Font Property

The Subtitle Font property determines the font and font size of the chart subtitle, and whether the subtitle text appears bold, italic, underlined, or with strikeout.

Related Topics


Text Font Property

The Text Font Property is available for all text objects, including titles, axis labels, and text you create using the Text tool on the chart window toolbar.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Related Topics


Text Style property
Text Settings Property

The Text Settings Property is available for all text objects, including titles, subtitles, axis labels, and text you create using the Text tool on the Chart toolbar.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Tip

Wash, Bitmap, and 3-D options are not available for the y-axis and y2-axis in 2-D and 3-D chart types, and for the x-axis in rotated chart types.

Related Topics


Lets you choose a text fill style from the drop-down list: solid, two-color wash, imported bitmap, or 3-D text.


Specifies the type of 3-D text.


Specifies the color of the text or the start color if you are using a Wash.


Specifies the color of the drop shadow behind the text or the end color if you are using a Wash.


Creates a drop shadow.


Fills the area between the text and the shadow with a blend of the two colors.


Adjusts text background to simulate depth. Enter a number between 0 and 100, or use the scroll bar.


Tick Options Property

The Tick Options property is available for the x-axis, the y-axis, and the secondary y-axis (which has the same set of properties as the primary y-axis) of a chart. Major divisions on the axis are indicated by tick marks. You adjust the display and placement of tick marks and axis labels through the Tick Options property.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Related Topics


Displays no tick marks.


Extends tick marks below the x-axis.


Extends tick marks above the x-axis.


Extends tick marks to the left of the y-axis.


Extends tick marks to the right of the y-axis.


Makes tick marks cross the axis.


Turns axis label display off and on.


Places the labels in a single row, or in two or three staggered rows.


Eliminates some of the labels when label text would otherwise overlap.


Lets you choose how many evenly-spaced labels to eliminate, to prevent overlap. If you enter 2, for example, the first label is displayed, the second and third labels are skipped, the fourth label is displayed, the fifth and sixth labels are skipped, and so on.


Lets you specify the maximum number of characters displayed in a label. Any additional characters will not appear in the label.


Title Property

The Title property provides an edit field where you can change the text of an x-axis or y-axis title. This property is equivalent to choosing Chart [image] Titles and changing the entry for the corresponding axis.

Related Topics


X Axis Series property
X-Axis Series Property

The X-Axis Series property lets you add or change x-axis labels. This property is equivalent to selecting an x-axis series when you create a chart. To do this,

Enter a range in the Select Range edit field, or click [image] and point to cells of axis labels on the notebook sheet. If your labels are not in a continuous row or column, hold down the Ctrl key as you select each cell or selection.

In XY Charts (also called scatter diagrams), the x-axis series is data, not labels. Corel Quattro Pro gives the x-axis a scale to match the data.

Related Topics


Properties in the Notebook Window

Alignment

Border Color

Box Type

Column Width

Conditional Color

Constraints (Cells)

Default Effect

Default Width

Display

Display (Sheet)

Font

Label Text

Line Drawing

Macro Library

Macro

Master Slide

Name

Name (Sheet)

Numeric Format

Object Name

OLE

Palette

Password Level

Protection (Object)

Protection (Sheet)

Recalc Settings

Reveal/Hide

Row Height

Shading

Show Pointer

Source Chart

Statistics

Summary

System

Tab Color

Text Color

Zoom Factor

Related Topics


Recalc Settings Property

The notebook Recalc Settings property controls how Corel Quattro Pro updates formula results when you change values those formulas depend on.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Related Topics


Recalculates formulas automatically, but pauses until recalculation is finished. Use Automatic if you have complex formulas that Background calculation does not handle fast enough.


Recalculates the formulas you enter or edit, but does not recalculate the entire notebook until you press F9. If a formula needs to be recalculated, CALC appears on the Application Bar to remind you that the displayed results of formulas may not be accurate. Press F9 to recalculate all formulas.


Recalculates formulas between keystrokes. It does not interrupt your work and recalculates automatically. Corel Quattro Pro always finishes recalculation before saving, extracting, or printing the notebook.


Calculates cells in dependency order. Formulas without dependencies are calculated first, followed by formulas that depend on them.


Starts recalculation in cell A1 of the first sheet and proceeds down column A, ignoring formulas in other columns. When A is finished, recalculation continues in B1, and on down column B. This continues to the end of the sheet (column IV), and on to the last sheet in the notebook.


Sets the number of times Corel Quattro Pro recalculates formulas; enter a number from 1 (the default) to 255. If the notebook contains formulas that use circular references, increasing this number can result in more accurate calculations. If the notebook contains no circular references and recalculation order is set to Natural, the iteration count is ignored.


Starts recalculation in cell A1, but proceeds by rows, starting at 1 and continuing through row 8192, through to the last sheet.


Displays in each problem cell the sheet and cell reference where the problem started. The notebook name is included if the cell is in another notebook.


Zoom Factor Property

The Zoom Factor property lets you pull back to see a whole printed page, or focus in on the detail of a few cells. You can set a Zoom Factor for an entire notebook or for individual sheets. Select a standard Zoom Factor setting, or enter a custom setting.

The default setting is 100%. Percentages less than 100% show more columns and rows; percentages greater than 100% show fewer.

Tip

The Zoom Factor setting does not affect printed output; click File [image] Page Setup, then click the Print Scaling tab to scale printed documents.

Related Topics


Notebook Palette Property

The notebook Palette property determines the palette of colors displayed in the cell and sheet properties that set colors, such as the cell Text Color property and the sheet Line Drawing property.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Tip

Changing any color square in the notebook palette also changes any previous uses of that color square throughout the notebook. For example, if you set the Shading property for a cell with the color square that is initially set to red (the leftmost square in the second row of the palette) and later change the corresponding color square in the notebook palette to green, the shaded cell switches to green.

Related Topics


Each color square controls the color displayed in the same location in the corresponding palettes.


Opens a dialog box for modifying the active color square.


Returns the notebook palette to the default Corel Quattro Pro settings.


Notebook Display Property

The Display property sets display characteristics for the active notebook.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Related Topics


Displays or hides the scroll bars or the sheet tabs. Deselect the display elements you want to hide; click them when you want them displayed again.


Shows all objects on the notebook, such as floating charts.


Shows only the outline of objects. Select this option to save time when scrolling or printing.


Hides all objects. Select this option for fast scrolling or printing.


Columns automatically widen to fit values. Select this option to make sure values are always visible in the notebook.


Macro Library Property

A macro library is a convenient place to store frequently used macros. When you set a notebook's Macro Library property to Yes, Corel Quattro Pro searches it when you try to run a macro that is not in the active notebook.

Related Topics


Click Yes to make this notebook a macro library. When you run a macro in any notebook and Corel Quattro Pro doesn't find the macro, it looks for the macro in this macro library notebook if it is open.


Password Level Property

Click Format [image] Notebook to set the level of password protection for the active notebook.

None	Requires no password to open and use the notebook.

Low	Anyone can open the notebook, but only password holders can view and edit formulas. Other users see values instead of formulas. Selected formula cells show asterisks (*****) in the input line.

Medium	The notebook is always hidden once it is saved and closed. Then, only password holders can show it again. All the features of Low protection apply as well.

High	Only password holders can open the notebook. You are prompted for the password following any command that attempts to load the protected file. Remember, you must enter the assigned password in the same combination of lowercase and capital letters as the original entry.

If you need to edit formulas or password settings in a notebook with Low or Medium password protection, you can open the notebook with a startup command when you start Corel Quattro Pro.

Tip

If you select a password level of Low, Medium, or High, when you click OK, you can to enter a password up to 15 characters long. Passwords are case-sensitive.

Related Topics


System Property

A system notebook, when hidden, stays open even when users close all notebooks. Application developers can use system notebooks to hold application macros and ensure their availability while Corel Quattro Pro is running.

When you set a notebook's System property to Yes, you make it a system notebook. You can use this property with Window [image] Hide or the Password Level property, depending on the level of protection you want to apply (Medium level hides the notebook when you save and close it). If you are using a system notebook for macros, you will probably want to apply the Macro Library property, too.

Tip

The /File [image] Close All command, which is available if you have Corel Quattro Pro for DOS menus enabled, closes all open notebooks (even hidden ones), but does not close system notebooks that are hidden.

Related Topics


Click Yes to make this notebook a system notebook. You can place macros in this notebook that will always be available while Corel Quattro Pro is running


Statistics Property

Displays read-only statistical information about a notebook, including file name, directory path, the date it was created, the date it was last saved and by whom, and the revision number.

Tip

You can use the file's statistical information to search for the file.

Related Topics


Summary Property

Displays summary information about the current notebook, including title, subject, author, keywords, and comments.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Tip

You can use the file's summary information to search for the file.

Related Topics


Numeric Format Property

The Numeric Format property controls the displayed appearance of values in the selected cell or cells. Ordinarily, the default Numeric Format is General, which displays numbers exactly as you enter them (unless the column width is too narrow).

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Tip

All numeric formats leave the cell values intact; they only affect the way values are displayed.

If the format you choose creates a number too wide for its column, a string of asterisks appears. You can redisplay the number by widening the column.

The format you assign to a cell stays with the cell, even if you delete its contents. If you move the contents, however, the format moves with the data and is removed from the original cell. If you copy a formatted cell, the copy takes on the format of the original cell. If you paste copied or cut cells with Edit [image] Paste Special, you can control whether the cells' properties are pasted. To erase values and reset properties for cells, use the Edit [image] Clear command.

If the format you chose allows a variable number of decimal places, an edit field appears. If you want to display other than the default number of decimal places (2), enter a number from 0 to 15 in the edit field.

If you have hidden cell contents with the Hidden numeric format, you may want to use the sheet Protection property to prevent the cells' entries from being accidentally overwritten.

Related Topics


Displays no more than the specified number of decimal places. Examples: 46.1 or 0.56 or -34.123


Enter the number of decimal places you want to use (0 to 15). Numbers will display with no more than that number of decimal places. Examples: 46.1 or 0.56 or -34.123


Uses scientific notation. Allows only one digit in the integer portion of the number. Examples: 2.35E+2 or 4.76E+9


Displays numbers as currency, using the currency symbol of the country you specify. Examples: $3,467.00 or 35 or ($56.24)


Separates thousands with commas, and shows negative numbers in parentheses. Examples: 15,120.25 or (2,456)


Displays numbers as entered, unless they are too long to fit the active cell. Then, they are rounded (if fractional) or translated into scientific notation. Examples: 456.9452 or -365 or 0.41 or 1.955E+6


Transforms values into a horizontal bar chart. Each integer translates into a symbol: + for each positive integer, - for each negative integer, and . for zero. Examples: + + +  (3); - - - -  (-4); . (0)


Displays numbers as percentages. Examples: 13.40% or -56.44%


Displays numbers as dates in the format you choose:

DD-MMM-YY (Example: 09-Apr-92)
DD-MMM-YYYY (Example: 09-Apr-1992)
DD-MMM (Example: 09-Apr)
MMM-YY (Example: Apr-92)
MMM-YYYY (Example: Apr-1992)
Long International (Example: 04/09/92)
Short International (Example: 04/09)


Displays numbers as times in the format you choose:

HH:MM:SS AM/PM (Example: 11:31:28PM)
HH:MM AM/PM (Example: 05:15AM)
Long International (Example: 06:56:10)
Short International (Example: 06:56)


Displays formulas instead of their results. Displays numbers entered in the cells in General format. This is also known as the Show Formulas format. Example: +B6*C3 or @SUM(B1..B10)


Suppresses display of both value and label entries. Entries still appear on the input line when the cell is selected.


Lets you choose from a list of formats you create.


Lets you specify cells as fractions. Corel Quattro Pro accepts a fraction when you type it unless it could be confused as a date. In this case, select blank cells and apply this Fraction setting before you enter fractions.in the cells. Also, you can click this setting to set a denominator instead of having fractions appear as reduced fractions.


Shows fractions as reduced fractions; for example, shows 1/2 when you enter 5/10.


Click to specify a denominator rather than having fractions appear as reduced fractions. For example, click and set Base Denominator to 10 to show 5/10 instead of 1/2.


Specify the denominator (bottom value in a fraction) you want.


Font property
Cell Font Property

The Cell Font property controls the appearance of entries in the active cells. If you enlarge or reduce the font size, the row height changes to display the tallest letters in the row (unless you have set the row height explicitly).

The Text Color property controls the color of cell entries. This property controls the color of the characters that make up the data, not the color of the cell shading.

To change the colors available, use the notebook Palette property. If you create a new color for the palette that is dithered and later choose it for the Text Color, your text will appear in a substitute, nondithered color. You can use dithered colors for other elements besides text and drawn lines.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Tips

If text does not appear on your printout, you may need to choose a darker color. Light colors print as white on some printers.

With most color choices, you need to deselect the cells to see the new shading. This is because selected cells are shown in reverse color.

Related Topics


Single line or Double line show a total line in the cell(s) you selected. If you don't see a line, enter a number in the cell to see the single or double line.


Shading Property

The Shading property controls the background color of cells (the color of entries themselves is controlled by the cell Text Color property). The shading color is a mixture of two colors: Color 1 and Color 2. To change the colors available, use the notebook Palette property.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

With most color choices, you need to deselect the cells to see the new shading. This is because selected cells are shown in reverse color.

Tip

If shading does not appear on your printout, you may need to choose a darker color. Light colors print as white on some printers.

Related Topics


Choose the first color to be mixed.


Choose the second color to be mixed.


Choose the Blend square that provides the mix you want. The square at the far left is the same as the Color 1 selection; the Color 2 selection appears in the far right square.


Alignment Property

The Alignment property controls the placement of entries within cells.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Tip

There are two other ways to change alignment of entries. You can

click General, Left, Right, Center, Center Across Cells or Indent from the Alignment list in the Property Bar

precede an individual label with a label-prefix character.

Related Topics


Sets the horizontal alignment of entries within cells.

General right-aligns values and left-aligns labels.

Left left-aligns all types of entries.

Right right-aligns all types of entries.

Center centers all types of entries.

Center Across Cells centers text across the selected cells.

Indent moves text in from the edge of the cell.


Sets the vertical alignment of entries within cells. Click Top, Center, or Bottom. To change the row height, click Row/Column, and set the cells Row Height property.


Wraps entries that do not fit horizontally in a cell onto the next line within the cell. Wrap Text cannot be used with vertically oriented text.


Joins selected cells together.


Click either horizontal, vertical, or rotated orientation (specify the degrees to rotate the text).


Border/Fill Property

Click Format [image] Selection [image] Border/Fill to draw custom lines around cells and fill cells with a color. You can quickly add lines around cells by clicking [image] on the Property Bar.

To draw custom lines, specify the line segments you want to affect first, then click a border type and color.

To change the colors available, use the notebook Palette property. If you create a new color for the palette that is dithered and later click it for the Border Color, your lines will appear in a substitute, nondithered color. You can use dithered colors for other elements besides text and drawn lines.

The Fill Color determines the background color of cells. (To change the color of text and data, click the Cell Font tab).

With most color choices, you need to deselect the cells to see the new shading. This is because selected cells are shown in reverse color.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Tip

If shading or lines do not appear on your printout, you may need to choose a darker color. Light colors print as white on some printers.

Related Topics


Specify the lines you want to affect.

Click line segments with the mouse; nibs appear to show which segments are selected. Shift+click to select multiple segments. At least one segment is always selected.

To deselect a segment, click it again.


Selects lines around every cell in the selection.


Selects lines around the selection but not between cells.


Selects lines between cells but not around the perimeter of the selection.


Border Color

Applies a color to the selected lines; by default, the lines are black.


Border Types

Applies a border type to the selected lines. The No Line button removes previously-drawn lines.

You can combine line drawing options in the same selection. For example, you can draw a double-lined border around a selection, and single vertical lines between the cells in the selection.


Click the color you want. This color becomes the background color of the cell. Click More to blend two colors together. If you already changed the text color in the Cell Font tab, make sure the fill color contrasts enough so the text is still visible.


Check this box to turn off spreadsheet lines in the cells that you have filled with a fill color. This setting affects any cells you have filled with Fill Color, including those you filled with [image] from the Property Bar.


Text Color Property

The Text Color property controls the color of cell entries. This property controls the color of the characters that make up the data, not the color of the cell shading.

To change the colors available, use the notebook Palette property. If you create a new color for the palette that is dithered and later choose it for the Text Color property, your text will appear in a substitute, nondithered color. You can use dithered colors for other elements besides text and drawn lines.

Tips

If text does not appear on your printout, you may need to choose a darker color. Light colors print as white on some printers.

With most color choices, you need to deselect the cells to see the new shading. This is because selected cells are shown in reverse color.

Related Topics


Click the color you want. If you already changed the Fill color, make sure the Text Color contrasts enough to be visible.


Row Height property
Row/Column Property

Click Format [image] Selection [image] Row/Column to change column width, change row height, and hide or show columns and rows.

The Column Width property adjusts the width of single or multiple columns to an exact size. Select any cell in one or more columns, or select the column borders.

The Row Height property adjusts the height of single or multiple rows to an exact size. Select any cell in one or more rows, or select the row borders.

The Reveal/Hide property hides rows or columns from view without losing the data they contain. You can later redisplay the rows or columns with the same property.

After you use Hide, columns to the right of the hidden columns move left to fill in the empty space, or rows below the hidden rows move up. However, the identifying row numbers and column letters in the borders do not change. In other words, if you hide column B, the columns onscreen are labeled A, C, D, and so on.

If you use Tools [image] Data Tools [image] Extract To File to save part of a notebook that includes hidden rows or columns, Corel Quattro Pro saves the hidden rows or columns in the new file, although they will still be hidden from view when you open the file.

To reveal (or hide) all rows and columns on a notebook sheet, click the Select All button first (or click Edit [image] Select All), then click Format [image] Selection [image] Row/Column.

Tip

You can also reveal a single hidden row or column with the mouse. To reveal a hidden column, place the mouse pointer slightly to the right of the hidden column’s border, then drag. For a hidden row, drag from just below the hidden row’s border. The hidden row or column is revealed and sized as you drag. For example, you can use this technique to reveal row 1 and column A when they are hidden.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Related Topics


Shows the current height of the selected row. Type a new height here.


Resets the selected row's height to the default row height (as determined by the largest font used in the row).


Changes the height of the selected row to the value you type. Then click a unit of measurement (characters, inches, or centimeters).


Specifies whether the Row Height you entered is in points (the default), inches, or centimeters.


Enter a value for Column Width


Type the number of extra characters beyond the widest entry to allow for column width (if Auto Width is chosen). The default is 1.


Changes the selected column's width to the value you type. Then click a unit of measurement (characters, inches, or centimeters).


Resets the selected column's width to the default column width.


Changes the active column's width to the longest entry in the column plus the Extra Characters entry. The Auto Width option resizes contiguous columns based on the longest entry. The longest entry is chosen based on your initial column or selection:

If entire columns are selected, the width is based on the longest entry in each column.

If a multi-row selection (or just part of a column) is selected, the width in each column is based on the longest entry in each column of the selection.

If a single-row selection (or just one cell) is selected, the width is based on the longest entry in that row and all cells below it.


Specifies whether the Column Width you entered is in characters, inches, or centimeters.


Hides the active rows or columns.


Redisplays hidden rows or columns currently surrounded by the active rows or columns.


Makes no change.


Constraints Property

The Constraints property turns off protection in the active cells, and constrains types of data that can be entered in the cells.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Tip

Cell protection has an effect only if you have already turned on overall sheet protection with the sheet Protection property.

Related Topics


Cell Protection

Click Protect (the default setting) to reprotect cells that you have previously unprotected. Click Unprotect to remove protection from the active cells.

When a cell is protected, you cannot edit, replace, or delete its contents. Nor can you delete a column or row that contains a protected cell.

With sheet protection enabled, you can move the selector around the entire sheet, but you can make changes only to unprotected cells. To restrict the selector to unprotected cells only, use the {RestrictInput.Option} macro command.


Data Input Constraints

Click General (the default setting) to allow all entries in the cells. Click Labels Only to allow only label entries; if someone tries to enter a date, time, or number, it is converted to a label. Click Dates Only to allow only date or time entries; if someone tries to type a label or number, an error message appears.


Sheet Display Property

The Display property sets display characteristics for the active sheet. These options are useful for viewing a sheet as it would look when printed (grid lines are not printed by default).

Displaying or Suppressing Zeros

Zero suppression does not remove the zero values from the sheet. They remain in memory and reappear if you set Display Zeros to Yes.

A value must equal exactly zero to be suppressed. For example, a value such as .004 that appears as 0 if decimal precision is 2 or less, will still appear if Display Zeros is set to No, because it is not actually 0.

Tip

When zero suppression is on, it is easy to accidentally write over cells containing formulas that evaluate as zero. Make sure Undo is enabled, or consider protecting the sheet.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Related Topics


Suppresses the display of any value in the active sheet that equals exactly zero, whether it was entered directly or calculated with a formula. Select Yes to display zeros, or No to hide them.


Turns off row and column borders in the active sheet. Deselect Row Borders to turn off the numbered row borders at the left of the sheet. Deselect Column Borders to turn off lettered column borders at the top of the sheet. These options are useful for setting up a sheet as a form for data input.


Turns off the spreadsheet grid in the active sheet. Deselect Horizontal to turn off grid lines that separate rows. Deselect Vertical to turn off grid lines that separate columns. These options are useful for viewing a sheet as it would look when printed (grid lines are not printed by default).


Sheet Name Property

The sheet Name property controls the name of the active sheet. The name appears on the sheet's tab and in formulas referring to cells on the sheet. Sheets are initially named with letters of the alphabet in sequence, from A to Z, continuing from AA to AZ, up to IV.

Tip

The Objects sheet cannot be renamed.

Related Topics


Type a name up to 63 characters long. You can use letters, numbers, and spaces in the name, as well as the following special characters:

~  `  !  %  _  |  \  '  ?

You cannot use a name you have previously assigned to a group in the same notebook.


Restores the sheet name back to its original letter name.


Sheet Protection Property

The sheet Protection property turns on protection in the active sheet. It works together with the cell Constraints property and the object Protection property. Use sheet protection to set up protection for a sheet, then use cell or object protection to unprotect the specific cells or objects you want to allow to be changed.

To prevent unauthorized access to an entire notebook, protect it with a password.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Related Topics


Protects all cell entries in the active sheet, except those specifically unprotected with the cell Constraints property.


Protects all objects in the active sheet, except those specifically unprotected with the object Protection property.


Conditional Color Property

The sheet Conditional Color property changes the color of specific types of data in the active sheet: values above or below a specified range, and ERR values.

To change the conditional color of data, select the option, then select a color from the palette. To change the colors available, use the notebook Palette property.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Tip

If colored entries do not appear on your printout, you may need to choose a darker color. Light colors print as white on some printers.

Related Topics


Enter the smallest value of the range of values you consider normal. Cells with values within the range specified by Smallest Normal Value and Greatest Normal Value will appear in the Normal Color. The default setting for Smallest Normal Value is 0.


Enter the largest value of the range of values you consider normal. Cells with values within the range specified by Smallest Normal Value and Greatest Normal Value will appear in the Normal Color. The default setting for Greatest Normal Value is 1E+300.


Sets the color of cells whose values are below the Smallest Normal Value; the default is red.


Sets the color of cells whose values fall within the range set by Smallest Normal Value and Greatest Normal Value; the default is black.


Sets the color of cells whose values are above the Greatest Normal Value; the default is green.


Specifies the color to use for ERR and NA values generated by formula errors; the default is red.


Indicates whether to use the conditional colors set with this property.


Default Width Property

The Default Width property sets the default width of all columns in the active sheet. By default, columns are wide enough to display approximately nine characters in the default font.

The Default Width setting does not affect columns that were explicitly adjusted using the Fit button [image], the cell Column Width property, or the mouse. Before those columns can be affected by a change in the default width, you must select them and check the Reset Width option of the cell Column Width property.

Related Topics


Tab Color Property

The Tab Color property changes the tab color of the active sheet. The default tab color of the active sheet is white. Deselect Use System Color and select a color from the color palette to change the tab color.

Related Topics


Macro Property

Enter a macro that you want the QuickButton to run.

You can also click Link To URL to link the button to a site on the Internet, or click Execute Dialog to run a {DODIALOG} macro command to display a custom dialog box you created using Tools [image] Macro [image] Dialog Designer.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

To create a QuickButton

To display a dialog box with a QuickButton


Enter a macro (up to 200 characters) for the QuickButton to run.


Lets you link the QuickButton to a Uniform Resource Locator (URL) address, name of an Internet resource.


Makes the QuickButton display a dialog box. Using this option replaces whatever macro is assigned to the button with a {DODIALOG} command.


Link to URL Dialog Box

Type the URL address for a site on the Internet.

Corel Quattro Pro can access World Wide Web (http), gopher, and ftp sites. Internet files are opened for read-only access and you cannot save files onto the Internet.

Click here [image] for information on URL syntax.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

To create a QuickButton


Execute Dialog dialog box
Execute Dialog Box

Select the dialog you want the QuickButton to activate. The Activate Dialog list displays the names of dialog boxes you created using Tools [image] Macro [image] Dialog Designer.

Result Cell sets a cell where a value is stored that indicates how the dialog box was closed.

Values Range is a notebook selection that contains values for the initial settings for the dialog box.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

To display a dialog box with a QuickButton

Related Topics


Lists the names of dialog boxes you can display.

If you did not create a dialog box using Tools [image] Macro [image] Dialog Designer, no dialog boxes appear in the list.


Type a cell address or click [image] to point to a cell in the notebook. After the dialog box is closed, this cell contains 1 or 0. The value 1 means the dialog box was closed by OK; the value 0 means it was canceled.


Type a cell address or click [image] to point to cell in the notebook that contains initial settings for the dialog box. When the dialog box is closed, its final settings are written back into these cells.


Border Color Property

Border Color specifies a color for the border of the active floating object. The palette of colors used is determined by the Notebook Palette property.

Related Topics


Box Type Property

Box Type specifies the appearance of the border surrounding the active floating object.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Related Topics


Determines which chart is displayed in the active object.


Click the thickness you want for the box surrounding the object. Click None if you do not want a surrounding box.


Displays a black offset border that gives the object a 3-D appearance.


Makes the floating object transparent, which allows you to see notebook cells beneath the object. If you are working with a chart, you can also make objects within the chart pane transparent.


Object Name Property

Object Name specifies a name for the active floating object. This name can be used in macros that work with this object.

Related Topics


Specifies a name for the active object.


OLE Property

The OLE property identifies the OLE server, object, and link source (for linked OLE objects), and sets the resizing and updating methods.

Server identifies the OLE server used to create the object.

Object identifies the OLE object.

Link Source identifies the source of the linked OLE object.

To get information on other options in the dialog box, click [image], then click the option.


When checked, the object is automatically resized after you edit it. If you deselect this option, you can manually resize the object after editing it.


When checked, the OLE object always reflects edits in the server application. When unchecked, the object is updated only when you manually update it.


Default Effect/Slide Effect Property

Default Effect specifies the default slide show effects for the slide show icon. Slide Effect specifies the effects used for the active slide in a Light Table.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Related Topics


Select one of the transition effects from the list. The effect sets how the slide is replaced by the next slide in a slide show. For example, a wipe simulates turning a page.


Controls the speed of the transition effect.


Overlays the previous slide with the new slide, instead of replacing it.


Displays the template style and chart elements used in the master slide (the first slide in a slide show). The master slide also affects the position and color of chart titles and bulleted text in bullet chart slides.


Skips the slide when viewing the slide show.


Specifies how long the slide remains on screen, in seconds (up to 3600). The default is zero, which causes the slide to stay on screen until the viewer clicks the mouse or presses a key.


Name Property (Objects Sheet Icons)

Specifies a name for the active chart, dialog box, or slide show icon in the Objects sheet, or the active dialog control in the dialog window. This name can be used in macros that work with these icons or the objects they represent.

Related Topics


Source Chart Property

The Source Chart property determines which chart is displayed in the active floating chart object.

Select Chart displays a list of charts in the active notebook. The new floating chart will have the same dimensions as the original floating chart.

Related Topics


Source Map Property

The Source Map property determines which map is displayed in the active floating map object.

Select Map displays a list of maps in the active notebook. The new floating map will have the same dimensions as the original floating map.

Related Topics


Protection Property

The Protection property protects floating objects on the notebook. It works with the sheet Protection property. Use object Protection to unprotect floating objects you want to allow to be changed, then use sheet protection to protect all other floating objects or cells on the sheet.

To prevent unauthorized access to an entire notebook, protect it with a password.

Related Topics


Properties in the Light Table Window

Default Effect

Master Slide

Name

Show Pointer

Slide Comment

Slide Effect

Slide Type

Related Topics


Master Slide Property

Specifies which slide to use as the master slide. The master slide determines the template style, common design elements (such as logos), and positioning of bullet chart text. The template style and chart elements in the master slide are used in all slides except those that have the Use Master Slide option of the Slide Effect property unchecked.

The master slide appears in the first slide position in the Light Table window; it does not display when you run the slide show unless it is also included as a separate slide.

Related Topics


Show Pointer Property

The Show Pointer property shows or hides the pointer throughout the slide show. It is helpful to hide the pointer if your slide show contains no chart buttons for branching to different slides.


Slide Comment Property

The Slide Comment property lets you specify a description of the slide (up to 79 characters).


Slide Type Property

The Slide Type property specifies whether to show slides in small, medium, or large size, or to show names only.

Tip

You can also change the slide type in the Light Table by using commands on the View menu.


Application Properties

Click Tools [image] Settings to change application properties.

These properties affect the overall functioning of Corel Quattro Pro. Any changes you make to these properties remain in effect until you change them again, even after you exit and restart Corel Quattro Pro.

Display

International

Macro

File Options

General

If you start Corel Quattro Pro in Developer mode (with the /D parameter), two additional properties are available:

Title

Enable Inspection

Related Topics


Application Display Property

The Display property sets display characteristics that affect the entire Corel Quattro Pro application. You can set sheet notation method for 3-D selections, and determine what parts of Corel Quattro Pro you want to show or hide.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Related Topics


Displays the date and time on the Application Bar in your choice of formats.

Standard displays the date and time as DD-MMM-YY and HH:MM AM/PM.

International displays the long date format and short time format as specified with the International property.

If the time or date displayed is incorrect, you must update your computer's internal clock. You can do this with the Windows Control Panel.


When checked, displays the toolbar, the row of buttons and tools you can click just below the menu bar.

If you uncheck this box, all toobars (including floating ones) are hidden.


When checked, displays the Property Bar, a bar directly below the toolbar that lets you change the properties of objects and set format options.


When checked, shows the Application Bar at the bottom of the Corel Quattro Pro window.


When checked, shows the input line, which provides buttons that help you enter or edit data.


When checked, shows column or row indicators when you move the scroll box in a notebook window.


When checked, shows QuickTips, a help window that appears when you point at a toolbar button.


Uses the default sheet notation for cell references in 3-D selections. In this syntax, sheet references appear first, followed by a colon and the cell coordinates. For example, A..C:B4..D9 refers to the cells B4..D9 on sheets A, B, and C.


Uses an alternative sheet notation syntax for cell references in 3-D selections. In this syntax, each corner of the 3-D selection is specified with the sheet reference included. For example, A:B4..C:D9 refers to the cells B4..D9 on sheets A, B, and C.


Application International Property

The International property controls the appearance of currency, punctuation, dates, times, and international characters. The initial defaults are standard for the United States. If you are using Corel Quattro Pro in another country, or are doing business with another country, you can change these settings to suit your requirements.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Tip

Each Windows Default setting available with these options uses the corresponding setting in Regional Settings of the Windows Control Panel. See your Windows documentation for details.

Related Topics


Sets the default currency symbol used in the Numeric Format property's Currency setting and in the Currency styles. Select a country whose currency you want to use.


Controls whether negative values are preceded with a minus sign (Signed) or are surrounded with parentheses (Parens).


Changes the currency symbol and its placement (before or after currency values) for the selected country.


Controls the characters used as the thousands separator, the decimal separator, and as argument separators. The punctuation options first show the punctuation marks used to mark thousands and the decimal place, followed by the punctuation mark used to separate arguments in @functions and macros (a1,a2). The last four punctuation options specify that a blank space separates thousands in numbers.


Uses the corresponding setting in Regional Settings of the Windows Control Panel. See your Windows documentation for details.


Determines the international formats given as options for date display from the cell Numeric Format property. Each of the date format options is shown in its long and short versions.


Determines the international formats given as options for time display from the cell Numeric Format property. Each of the time format options is shown in its long and short versions.


Converts Lotus International Character Set characters into standard ANSI characters. LICS characters are identical to the standard ANSI set except in the range 128 through 255, which is usually used for international and graphics characters. When you save the file, Corel Quattro Pro writes these characters back to the LICS equivalents. For more on LICS characters, see the 1-2-3 documentation.


Currency Dialog Box

The Currency dialog box changes the currency symbol and its placement (before or after currency values) for the selected country.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.


Type a new currency symbol (up to 10 characters). To enter a special ANSI character not on your keyboard, hold down Alt and use the numeric keypad to type 0 and then the ANSI number for that character. For example, to enter a pound sign (£), press Alt and type 0163.


Places the currency symbol before values (as in $100).


Places the currency symbol after values (as in 500F).


Application Macro Property

The Macro property lets you control macros and alternate menu systems.

The Suppress-Redraw option controls which parts of the screen redraw while macros are running. Suppressing redrawing speeds up macros, since Corel Quattro Pro does not have to stop and draw windows, menus, dialog boxes, the Application Bar, and the input line.

The Slash Key option lets you use alternate menu systems.

The Startup Macro option lets you run a macro when you open a file.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Related Topics


Suppresses redrawing of both windows and the panel. Panel includes menus, dialog boxes, the Application Bar, and the input line.


Prevents redrawing of menus, dialog boxes, the Application Bar, and the input line.


Prevents redrawing of windows only.


Redraws all parts of the screen while macros are running. When you select None, macros run slower because Corel Quattro Pro has to stop and draw draw the window, menus, dialog boxes, the Application Bar, and the input line.


Controls which menu system displays when you press the slash key (/) from Ready mode. Choose Menu Bar (the default), Corel Quattro Pro - DOS, or 1-2-3 / R 2.01.


Sets the macro to be run every time any notebook containing a macro with this name is opened. The default startup macro is \0.


Application File Options Property

The File Options property lets you set file-handling options and includes information that is used every time you start Corel Quattro Pro. You can set the default directory, filename extension, and the file that's loaded every time you start Corel Quattro Pro. You can also automatically back up files at a specified interval, show filename paths in the notebook window title bar, and enable templates that are available when you click File [image] New.

Use the QuickTemplates and @Functions Library edit fields to set the directory location where you keep template files and add-in @functions, respectively.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Related Topics


Sets the directory initially displayed by file-handling commands.


Sets the file to be loaded every time Corel Quattro Pro is started.


Sets the default file extension to be used when you do not specify a file extension with file-handling commands.


Sets the directory where Corel Quattro Pro's template files are stored.


Sets the directory where add-in @functions are stored.


Sets the time interval at which notebooks are automatically backed up.


When checked, turns on auto-backup of files. Use the Auto-backup Time option to specify the time interval for backing up files.


Sets the time interval at which URLs are automatically refreshed.


When checked, turns on auto-refresh of URLs. Use the Auto-refresh URLs Time option to specify the time interval for refreshing URLs.


When checked, Corel Quattro Pro displays full path titles of filenames in the notebook window title bar.


When checked, Corel Quattro Pro displays available templates you can use when you choose File [image] New to create a new notebook. When unchecked, File [image] New creates a new, blank notebook.


Check this box to use the latest Windows Explorer-type dialogs instead of dialogs that look like Windows 3.1


Application General Property
Application General Options Property

The General property lets you set general options that affect how you use Corel Quattro Pro.

The Undo Enabled option makes Edit [image] Undo available to undo operations.

The Compatible Keys option makes a variety of keys work the same way they do in Corel Quattro Pro for DOS.

The Move Cell Selector On Enter Key option moves the cell selector down one cell when you press the Enter key. This option can make data entry easier.

The Compatible Formula Entry option selects how you want to enter formulas.

The Cell Drag And Drop Delay Time option sets the interval at which drag-and-drop mode is activated when pointing at cells with the mouse.

The Fit-As-You-Go option automatically increases column width so that number values are always visible, and are not displayed as asterisks, *******. Without Fit-As-You-Go enabled, if a number is wider than a cell it does not spill into adjacent cells as labels do. Instead, it appears either in scientific notation or as a row of asterisks (*********), depending on the cell's numeric format and width. The full number appears when you widen the column. With Fit-As-You-Go set, if the format you choose creates a number too wide for its column, the column automatically adjusts to fit the value.

Calc-As-You-Go lets you quickly evaluate a selection of cells. Select.cells, and you can see the sum, average, count, maximum value, and minimum value for those cells at the bottom-right of the screen.

QuickType helps you enter labels and functions. As you type a label, the closest match from the column is displayed (highlighted). If it’s the text you want, just press Enter. As you type a function, the likeliest function is displayed.

The Cell Reference Checker helps you copy formulas to other locations. When you copy a formula that contains cell addresses, the Cell Reference Checker shows you how the formula will appear in the new location. You can choose to have the formula adjust to the new location, or you can change the formula to contain the original formula and cell addresses.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Related Topics


Makes the Edit [image] Undo command available after the full range of undoable operations.


Makes a variety of keys work in the same way as in Corel Quattro Pro for DOS. When unchecked, these keys work as they would in most Windows applications.


When checked, makes the selector move down a cell each time you enter data. (This option is available only when Compatible Keys is unchecked.) When this option is not checked, the selector remains in a cell when you press Enter. To move the selector, you can still click the mouse, the Tab key, or the arrow keys.


Sets how you want to enter formulas. When this option is checked, you do not need to start formulas with a plus sign (+). Corel Quattro Pro interprets most data you enter as a formula. For example, 4/4 is interpreted as 4 divided by 4, and the result 1 is displayed.

When this option is not checked, start a formula with a plus sign (+) or another valid character (such as @ or =). Also, when Quattro Pro identifies possible dates, times, or text, it enters the data as dates, times, or text. For example, 4/4 is interpreted as the date 4/4. If you type 245 Juniper Park, it is displayed as text.


Specifies how long to wait, in milliseconds, before changing from cell selection to Drag-and-Drop mode. In drag-and-drop mode, you can drag a cell from one location to another.


Lets you select.cells and see the sum, average, count, maximum value, and minimum value.


As you type a label, the closest match from the column is displayed. As you type a function, the likeliest function is displayed.


The Cell Reference Checker helps you copy formulas to other locations. When you copy a formula that contains cell addresses, the Cell Reference Checker shows you how the formula will appear in the new location. You can choose to have the formula adjust to the new location, or you can change the formula to contain the original formula and cell addresses.


Application Title Property

The Application Title property changes the title displayed on Corel Quattro Pro's title bar. This property is only available after starting Corel Quattro Pro in developer mode (with /D parameter).


Type text to appear on the Corel Quattro Pro's title bar.


Enables or disables mouse right-clicking, the Property list in the Power Bar, and the Object Properties key (F12). To re-enable these after you disable them, click Ctrl+M from the main screen.


Application Enable Inspection Property

The Enable Inspection property globally enables/disables mouse right-clicking. This property is only available after starting Corel Quattro Pro in developer mode (with /D parameter).


Common Questions

Dates

How do I enter a date in Corel Quattro Pro? Answer

Import/Export

How do I export ASCII text files with Corel Quattro Pro? Answer

How do I copy a chart from Corel Quattro Pro into Corel WordPerfect for Windows? Answer

Moving From DOS to Windows

I've been using Corel Quattro Pro for DOS and have recently switched to Corel Quattro Pro for Windows. Can I use the DOS menus to run Corel Quattro Pro for Windows? Answer

How can I execute my hot key macros created in Corel Quattro Pro for DOS? Answer

Printing

How do I set up another printer for Corel Quattro Pro? Answer

How do I select noncontiguous print areas? Answer

I have a notebook that contains several sheets. How do I print each sheet on a separate sheet of paper? Answer

How can I make my notebook print on as many pages as I want? Answer

Can Corel Quattro Pro print page numbers or dates on each page? Answer

Selecting

I have enabled Move Cell Selector On Enter Key (by clicking Tools [image] Settings [image] General) in order to have the cell selector move down automatically after pressing Enter. However, it is not working. Why? Answer

Toolbars

How can I tell what toolbar buttons do? Answer

How do you load another toolbar in Corel Quattro Pro? Answer


How do I enter a date in Corel Quattro Pro?

Click Insert [image] Date to insert the current date. To insert other dates, enter it in one of the legal date or time formats. For example, you can type 04/04 in a cell to represent the date April 4.

If you type a plus sign (+) before the date, Corel Quattro Pro interprets the date as a formula. For example, +06/12 represents 6 divided by 12; 0.5 displays in the cell.

Related Topics


How do I export ASCII text files...
How do I export ASCII text files with Corel Quattro Pro?

There are three ways to export an ASCII text file: saving to a text file, extracting to a file, and printing to a text file.

Related Topics


How do I copy a graph...
How do I copy a chart from Corel Quattro Pro into Corel WordPerfect for Windows?

1	Click View [image] Objects.

2	Select the chart icon for the chart that you want to copy.

3	Click Edit [image] Copy.

4	Switch to Corel WordPerfect (if it is already running, click the Corel WordPerfect button on the taskbar).

5	Click Edit [image] Paste.


I have been using Corel Quattro Pro for DOS...
I have been using Corel Quattro Pro for DOS and have recently switched to Corel Quattro Pro for Windows. Can I use the DOS menus to run Corel Quattro Pro?

Yes. Click Tools [image] Settings [image] Macro. Click the down arrow to the right of the Slash Key option and click Corel Quattro Pro--DOS, then click OK. Now when you press the slash key, the familiar Corel Quattro Pro for DOS menus appear.

Tip

There are some functions of Corel Quattro Pro for Windows that are not accessible from the Corel Quattro Pro for DOS menus. In addition, any feature of Corel Quattro Pro for DOS that is not a feature in Corel Quattro Pro for Windows will be dimmed in the menus.


How can I execute my hot key macros...
How can I execute my hot key macros created in Corel Quattro Pro for DOS?

Macros executed with Alt+key combinations in Corel Quattro Pro for DOS can be executed with a Ctrl+Shift key combination in Corel Quattro Pro for Windows. This change allows the Alt keys to be used for Windows standard menu shortcuts.


How do I set up another printer for Corel Quattro Pro?

Corel Quattro Pro uses the Windows printer drivers.

To add a printer driver or change the selected printer in Corel Quattro Pro, click File [image] Print [image] Details [image] Add Printer.

You can also add a printer driver, by clicking the Start button on the Windows 95 Taskbar, then clicking Settings [image] Control Panel. Double-click Printers, then double-click Add Printer. Follow the instructions in the Add Printer Wizard.


How do I select noncontiguous print areas?

If the noncontiguous selections are on the same sheet, you may use your mouse to select the different selections. To select the cells with the mouse, highlight the first selection, hold down the Ctrl key, and continue highlighting the additional cells. When all selections are selected, click File [image] Print and verify that Selection is chosen and the print area is correct. Click Print.

If the noncontiguous selections are on different sheets, you can type the reference in the Selection edit field in File [image] Print, or you can use the Point Mode button [image] to point to noncontiguous selections in the notebook. Separate each noncontiguous selection with a comma. Refer to the following syntax as an example.

This will print sheets A, B, and F, and the cells listed.

(A:A1..G10,B:A1..E30,F:B2...C10)

Tips

If you have named your sheets, you can use those names in the reference.

(January:A1..G10,February:A1..E30,June:B2..C10)

You can also use Edit [image] Go To (or press F5) to pre-select contiguous cells on different sheets.


I have a notebook that contains several sheets...
I have a notebook that contains several sheets. How do I print each sheete on a separate sheet of paper?

If you chose File [image] Print and specified a 3-D selection, click File [image] Page Setup [image] Option and select Page Advance under Print Between 3D sheets.

If you chose File [image] Print and selected Notebook for Print Area, click Options in the Spreadsheet Print dialog box and select Page Advance under Print Between Cells.


How can I make my notebook print on as many pages as I want?

To print your notebook on as many pages as you specify, click File [image] Page Setup [image] Print Scaling [image] Print to desired width, then specify the width and height in pages.

An alternative method is the Scaling option. Click File [image] Page Setup [image] Print Scaling and enter a value for Scaling. You can manually scale down the document to make better use of the white space on the page.

Tip

You can also apply the Center Across Cells property (or click Center Across Cells from the Property Bar) or change print margins (File [image] Page Setup [image] Print Margins) to better control how the document is placed on the page.


Can Corel Quattro Pro print page numbers...
Can Corel Quattro Pro print page numbers or dates on each page?

Yes. Corel Quattro Pro supports special codes you can place in headers and footers.

About headers and footers


I have enabled Move Cell Selector On Enter Key...
I have enabled Move Cell Selector On Enter Key (by clicking Tools [image] Settings [image] General) in order to have the cell selector move down automatically after pressing Enter. However, it is not working. Why?

Click Tools [image] Settings [image] General. Make sure Compatible Keys is unchecked; otherwise, Move Cell Selector On Enter Key is automatically disabled.


How can I tell what toolbar buttons do?

When you point to a toolbar button with the mouse, a brief description of the button appears. For more detailed help on a toolbar button, press Shift+F1, then click the button.


How do you load another Toolbar...
How do you load another toolbar in Corel Quattro Pro?

You can show and hide toolbars using View [image] Toolbars.

To show or hide a toolbar

Related Topics


Tips for Data Entry

Speeding Data Entry

To speed data entry within selected cells, use the Enter and Tab keys. You can set Corel Quattro Pro to move the active cell on pressing Enter or Tab even when no cells are selected.

Closing Parentheses

Corel Quattro Pro helps you to close parentheses in two ways.

Writing Formulas

If you are used to using Excel, you can type an equal sign (=) to start a formula in Corel Quattro Pro.

Omitting @ in @functions

When typing an @function, you can omit the @ if it is not the first item in the formula.

Summing Noncontiguous Selections

You can sum noncontiguous selections in a single @SUM formula and even omit the required comma.

For example, follow these steps to create the formula @SUM(A2..A5,B2..B5),

1	Type @SUM(

2	Select cells A2..A5.

3	Press and hold Ctrl while selecting B2..B5.

4	Press Enter.

Typing Cell Coordinates

When typing cell coordinates in a formula, you can use one period instead of two.

Hidden Cell Comments

You can document your spreadsheet by adding hidden comments to any cells containing formulas or values.


Tips for @Functions and Formulas

Changing Notebook Links

It's easy to change notebook links in old formulas to refer to a different location or notebook.

Using @ARRAY Function

You can use the @Array function to create an entire matrix of values with one formula.


Tips for Graphics

Creating Instant Charts

To create an instant chart in Corel Quattro Pro, use the context-intelligent QuickChart tool on the toolbar.

Modifying Different Chart Elements

Inspecting different chart objects is very easy.

Live Link of Data Cells in a Chart

You can use the Link To Cells tool to include a "live" snapshot of your spreadsheet data in a chart.

Two Modes to Annotate a Chart

You can annotate or edit a chart in two different ways: "In-place editing" and "Full window editing".

Drag and Plot Data onto a Chart

You can drag and drop your spreadsheet data onto a chart to convert the data into series.

Linking Cell Labels to a Text Box in a Chart

You can link the contents of a cell label into a text box situated in a chart.

Making a Logarithmic X-axis

If you are unable to set your x-axis to logarithmic scaling, select the XY chart type instead of the Line chart type.

Importing .BMP Files Exported from CorelDraw

Sometimes some .BMP files created in CorelDraw import as just gray boxes without an image.

CorelDraw's internal compression might be turned on. Be sure compression is turned OFF at the CorelDraw BMP Export options menu.

Creating Default Settings for Your Charts

The way to "set defaults" is to create a template (or "seed") chart set to your specifications. Copy this chart every time you want to generate a new one.

Making a Scatterplot Chart

To make a scatterplot, create an XY Chart with your values.

Spell-check a Slide Show

You can check the spelling of text in a slide show.

Using the Chart Gallery Advisor

You can use the Chart Gallery Advisor to apply backgrounds and formats to your chart.

Using the Slide Show Template Advisor

You can use the Template Advisor to apply more than 34 different background styles to your slide shows.


Tips for Modifying Notebooks

Stopping Insertion of Rows and Columns

You can easily prevent the insertion of rows or columns in your spreadsheet.

Naming Cells

If you select the same noncontiguous selections frequently, consider giving them a name.

Automatically Generating Cell Names

Use the Generate button in the Cell Names dialog box to quickly name intersecting cells in a table.

Adjusting Row Height & Column Width

You can quickly adjust one or more column widths and rows height with your mouse.

Using Edit [image] Copy Cells

You can use Edit [image] Copy Cells to copy row heights and column widths of cells.

Operating on Multiple Sheets

To accomplish a single operation across multiple sheets, select a 3-D selection.

Deleting Entire Rows and Columns

To delete entire rows or columns, do not highlight the cells. Click in the row or column border instead.

Using Group Mode

If you want to make a series of changes to a group of sheets, use the more permanent Group Mode.

Centering Across Columns

The "Center across Cells" feature automatically centers formatting as well as data.

Selecting an Entire Sheet

You can instantly select all the cells in the current sheet by clicking the rectangle between the row and column headers.

Using Corel Quattro Pro for DOS Menus

You can use the Corel Quattro Pro-DOS slash key commands to modify your notebooks.

Revealing a Hidden Column

Once you hide column A, you can use the mouse to reveal it.


Tips for Help

Using Your Own Help Files

You can create your own help (HLP) files and use them for custom applications you build with Corel Quattro Pro.


Tips for Navigation and Drag-and-drop

Speeding Navigation

In addition to using the mouse for 3-D navigation, you may want to try using the keyboard.

Entering Point Mode from a Dialog Box

Point mode is useful from any edit field in a dialog box that requires cell references.

Moving and Copying Sheet Tabs

You can use your mouse to drag a sheet to a new location.

Setting Drag-and-drop Speed

You can easily change the drag-and-drop speed by inspecting the Application properties.


Tips for Using Experts

Parsing Text Files

When parsing an undelimited ASCII file into the spreadsheet, try the Tools [image] Data Tools [image] QuickColumns Expert command.

Tip

There’s often no need to parse tab-delimited text files with the QuickColumns Expert; open them into Corel Quattro Pro using File [image] Open.

Consolidation Expert Tip

You can enter multiple 2-D ranges into the Consolidation Expert in a few steps.

Scenario Expert Tip

You can change the colors of changed and affected cells in the Scenario Expert.


Tips for Function Keys and Shortcuts

Copying Portions of a Formula

You can copy-and-paste portions of one formula into the cell of another.

Simply press the F2 (Edit) key, highlight the portion you want to copy, and click the Copy button [image] on the toolbar. Press Enter or Esc to return to Ready mode. Select the cell where you want to add the copied formula and press F2. Place the input line where you want to insert the copied formula and click the Paste button [image]. (This is also a handy technique for copying an entire formula from one cell to another without a relative change.)

Making Cell References Absolute

You can use the F4 key when editing a formula to make a cell reference absolute.

Navigating Through Audit Errors

You can use the F5 (Goto) key to navigate through Audit Errors.

Calculating a Formula in the Input Line

You can use F9 to instantly calculate results of a formula as you input or edit it in the Input line.

Visiting Four Corners of a Selected Area

After selecting cells, you can press Shift+F7 to switch to Mark Selection mode. Then type the Period key (.) repeatedly to move the active cell to each of the four corners.

Recalculating a Single Cell

With manual recalculation turned on, you can use F2 (Edit) key to recalculate a single cell.

Displaying List of All Macros

You can display an entire list of macro commands by using Shift+F3.

Executing a Predefined Query

You can use the F7 (Query) key to quickly execute a predefined query.

Shortcut Keys

Corel Quattro Pro offers a variety of shortcut keystrokes for many of the most commonly used features.


Tips for Macros

Using the Macro Recorder

Writing macros is easy--just use the macro recorder and let Corel Quattro Pro create your macros for you.

Saving and Resetting Application Defaults

When you develop a Corel Quattro Pro application, it's usually best to store the user's environment settings.

If you create a custom application in Corel Quattro Pro that changes a user's environment settings, it's a good idea to include macro code that saves the user's current settings and preferences and restores them as the user exits the application. Assuming that you have a sheet called SETTINGS where these settings are to be saved, you can save the current settings with the following macro commands:

{LET SETTINGS:A1,@PROPERTY("Application.Display")}

{LET SETTINGS:A2,@PROPERTY("Application.International")}

{LET SETTINGS:A3,@PROPERTY("Application.Macro")}

{LET SETTINGS:A4,@PROPERTY("Application.File_Options")}

{LET SETTINGS:A5,@PROPERTY("Application.General")}

To change the settings, you can use macro commands like the following:

{Application.Display "None,Yes,Yes,Yes,A..B:A1..B2,Yes,Yes,Yes"}

{Application.International "$, Quattro Pro, Prefix, Signed, ""1,234.56 (a1,a2)"", MM/DD/YY (MM/DD), HH:MM:SS (HH:MM), Windows Default, English (American), No"}

{Application.File_Options "H:\, QUATTRO.WB3, WB3, No, 20, Yes, Yes,Yes"}

{Application.Macro "Both, No, Quattro Pro - DOS, \0"}

{Application.General "Yes,No,Yes,No,500"}

Finally, to restore the settings, use these macro commands:

{Application.Display +SETTINGS:A1}

{Application.International +SETTINGS:A2}

{Application.Macro +SETTINGS:A3}

{Application.File_Options +SETTINGS:A4}

{Application.General +SETTINGS:A5}

Using the Active Selection Within a Macro

@PROPERTY("Active_Block.Selection") returns the address of the actively selected cells as an address and can be used within macro command's. Consider the following macros that set the Print selection and create a named cell from the active cells:

Print_Block	{Print.Block @PROPERTY("Active_Block.Selection")}

Name_Blk	{BlockName.Create TestBlk", @PROPERTY("Active_Block.Selection")}

Updating Links via Macros

Corel Quattro Pro requires a specific syntax for passing linking parameters to the {FileOpen} macro command.

To pass linking parameters such as "Open Supporting", "Update References", or "None", you must spell out the entire parameter within the {FileOpen} macro command, like this:

{FileOpen "TEST.WB3, "Open Supporting"}

{FileOpen "TEST.WB3, "Update References"}

{FileOpen "TEST.WB3, "None"}

Using the Macro Debugger

Instead of pressing Shift+F2 to display the Macro Debugger, press the Pause key.

Attaching Bitmaps to Buttons

You can attach bitmap images to your custom QuickButtons that invoke macros.


Tips for toolbars

Displaying Multiple Toolbars

You can have as many toolbars on the screen as memory and screen area will allow.

Designing Custom Toolbars

Corel Quattro Pro for Windows makes creating a custom toolbar easier than ever before.

Bi-directional QuickFill

QuickFill recognizes row and column labels simultaneously.

Creating Your Own QuickFills

You can create your own custom QuickFills for your most frequently used data series.


Tips for Data Commands

Saving Queries

In Corel Quattro Pro's Database Desktop, save your queries as .QBE files for repeated queries later.

Linking External Tables into a Notebook

You can link external dBASE or Paradox tables into your spreadsheet notebooks.


Tips for Interconnectivity

Embedding Corel Quattro Pro Objects Inside Corel WordPerfect

Corel Quattro Pro is an OLE server, so you can paste any Corel Quattro Pro object into a Corel WordPerfect document.

Drag and Drop a Chart into Corel WordPerfect

You can drag either a range of data or a chart out of Corel Quattro Pro and into any other OLE 2.0-compliant application, such as Corel WordPerfect for Windows.

Hiding Row/Column Borders in OLE Object

You can eliminate row and column borders from an object that you're pasting to the Clipboard.

Tip

If the object you're pasting has previously been copied as an OLE object to another application, returning to the destination document in that application shows that the embedded object no longer has row and column borders.

Using the Windows Clipboard for OLE

Using the Windows clipboard, you can either embed data from Corel Quattro Pro into Corel WordPerfect (or any other OLE 2.0 client application), or establish a link to the data.

Creating a Text File

It's easy to create an ASCII (or text) file in Corel Quattro Pro.


Tips for Printing

Including File Name in Footer

Record the location of your notebook files in your printouts so you can easily find the files later.

If you have ever had trouble locating a file months after printing an archive copy, consider printing the file name and its path on all your reports. To do this, just click File [image] Page Setup and enter #F (for the file’s full path and name) or #f (for the file’s name only) in the dialog box's footer field. If you have already created a footer, you can just click View [image] Page View. Double-click inside the colored, dotted area at the top or bottom of the page, then click [image] to easily add the filename using the Property Bar.

Including Date and Time in Footer

You can include the date and time in the footer on all your reports and printouts.

If you tend to forget which printout represents your last or most recent report, you can put the time and date on all your printouts. To do this, follow these steps:

1	Click File [image] Page Setup.

2	Click Header/Footer, click to create and text for the footer, then click OK.

3	To add the date and time, click View [image] Page View. Double-click inside the colored, dotted area at the top or bottom of the page, then click [image] to easily add the date and time or any other options using the Property Bar.

4	Click outside the header or footer to see the final text.

Printing Multiple Charts

You can easily print multiple charts by first placing them in a slide show.

Printing Noncontiguous Selections

Print selections, like selections for formatting, need not be contiguous in Corel Quattro Pro.

Tip

When you print these noncontiguous selections, each selection will print just below the selection preceding it. To include blank spaces between the print selections, press Ctrl and select a blank group of cells between each selection.

Printing 3-D Sheets

It's easy to print all of the sheets in a 3-D notebook file with one File [image] Print command.

To print every filled sheet of a notebook:

1	Select any cell in the first sheet.

2	Shift+Click the tab for the last sheet to print.

3	Click Insert [image] Name [image] Group of Sheets.

4	Enter a group name, and click OK.

5	Click View [image] Group Mode to activate group mode (look for the blue line below the group's sheet tabs).

6	Select the cells on the sheet that contain the most data and click File [image] Print.

Tip

To have the paper advance to the top of a new piece of paper when a new sheet of the notebook is being printed, select File [image] Page Setup [image] Options and click the Page Advance radio button under Print Between 3D Sheets.


Tips for Large Notebooks

Notebooks with Bitmaps

If you are creating a notebook that contains bitmap images, slide shows, and colorful charts, the size of the notebook will vary depending on the setting of your video driver.

If you are using a 16-color driver, the notebook will have the smallest size possible. If you set your screen driver to 256, 16K, or 64K colors, the same notebook will grow more and more. The bigger the color palette, the more information Corel Quattro Pro has to store about colored objects.

Unnecessary Formatting

You should avoid unnecessary formatting in your spreadsheet notebook. Unnecessary formatting results in a bigger file. Format only the portions of notebook sheets that contain data. Use Edit [image] Clear [image] Formats to remove unnecessary formatting.

Use Macro Libraries

You should avoid mixing macro code with the actual user data in your applications. This slows the operation and results in a bigger file.

Ideally, you should put your macros in a notebook and set the notebook's Macro Library property to Yes.

Tip

Also, you should give the macro library notebook a Medium Level password so that it is automatically hidden when it is loaded.


Miscellaneous Tips

"Error Reading a File" Message

If you get an "Error Reading a File" message, the problem is probably a lack of hard disk space.

To be safe, always keep at least 1 MB free on the drive or partition where the Windows Temp directory resides.

Customizing the Default Notebook

You can make your opening notebook file look any way you want.


Toolbar:	 (Chart and Drawing Tools)


Toolbar:	 (Selection Formatting toolbar)


Toolbar:	 QuickSort button (Selection Formatting toolbar)


Toolbar:	 (Notebook toolbar)


Toolbar:	 (Notebook toolbar)


Toolbar:	 (Data Manipulation toolbar)


Toolbar:	 (Data Manipulation toolbar)


Toolbar:	 (Data Manipulation toolbar)


Toolbar:	 (Objects Sheet)


Keyboard:	Ctrl+Z

Toolbar:


Keyboard:	Ctrl+X

Toolbar:


Keyboard:	Ctrl+C

Toolbar:


Keyboard:	Ctrl+V

Toolbar:


Right-click the notebook sheet, then click Paste Special


Toolbar:	 (Selection Formatting)


Toolbar:


Toolbar:	 (Selection Formatting)


Keyboard:	Del

Toolbar:	 (Selection Formatting)


Select All button (upper left of notebook window)


Toolbar:	 (Data Manipulation toolbar)


Toolbar:	 (Data Manipulation toolbar)


Keyboard:	Ctrl+F


Keyboard:	F5


Keyboard:	Ctrl+N

Toolbar:


Keyboard:	Ctrl+O

Toolbar:


Keyboard:	Ctrl+F4


Keyboard:	Ctrl+S

Toolbar:


Keyboard:	Ctrl+P

Toolbar:


Keyboard:	Alt+F4; right-click the Application Bar


Keyboard:	; F12


Keyboard:	F12


Keyboard:	; F12


Toolbar:	 Format [image] SpeedFormat


Toolbar:	 (Notebook toolbar)


Toolbar:	 Bring Forward (Chart and Drawing Tools toolbar)

 Send Backward (Chart and Drawing Tools toolbar)

 Bring to Front (Chart and Drawing Tools toolbar)

 Send to Back (Chart and Drawing Tools toolbar)


Toolbar:	 Align Left

 Align Right

 Align Top

 Align Bottom


Toolbar:	 Horizontal Center

 Vertical Center


Toolbar:	 Horizontal Space

 Vertical Space


Toolbar:


Toolbar:


Toolbar:


Toolbar:	 (Objects Sheet)


Keyboard:	F11


Toolbar:	 (Experts and Numeric Tools toolbar)


Toolbar:	 (Objects Sheet)


Toolbar:	 (Objects Sheet)


Toolbar:


Keyboard:	Ctrl+F3


Keyboard:	Alt+F3


Toolbar:	 (Notebook toolbar)


Toolbar:	 (Chart and Drawing Tools toolbar)


Toolbar:	 (Chart and Drawing Tools toolbar)


Toolbar:	 (Chart and Drawing Tools toolbar)


Toolbar:	 (Chart and Drawing Tools toolbar)


Toolbar:	 (Chart and Drawing Tools toolbar)


Toolbar:	 (Chart and Drawing Tools toolbar)


Toolbar:	 (Chart and Drawing Tools toolbars)


Toolbar:	 (Chart and Drawing Tools toolbars)


Toolbar:	 (Chart and Drawing Tools toolbars)


Toolbar:	 (Chart and Drawing Tools toolbar)


Toolbar:	 (Chart and Drawing Tools toolbar)


Toolbar:	 (Chart and Drawing Tools toolbar)


Toolbar:	 (Chart and Drawing Tools toolbar)


Keyboard	Del


Keyboard:	F11


Toolbar:	 (Objects Sheet)


Toolbar:	 (Light Table)


Toolbar:	 (Objects Sheet)


Keyboard:	Ctrl+F1


Keyboard:	Alt+F2


Keyboard:	Shift+F2


Keyboard:	Ctrl+F2

Toolbar:	 (Notebook toolbar)


Toolbar:	 (Data Manipulation toolbar)


Toolbar:	 (Selection Formatting toolbar)


Keyboard:	Alt+F5


Keyboard:	Shift+F5

Button:


Keyboard:	Shift+F5

Button:


Mode and Status Indicators

Different mode and status indicators appear on the Application Bar to provide information about the current state of Corel Quattro Pro. The following are some of the indicators that apperar.

Indicator	Description

One or more formulas need to be recalculated. Press F9 to recalculate the notebook.

A formula contains a circular reference (it refers to itself or to another formula that refers back to it).

The Caps Lock key is on.

The Num Lock key is on.

Macro recording is in progress.

BKGD	Corel Quattro Pro is calculating in the background.

COPY	You are using the Drag and Drop feature to copy cells (press Ctrl while dragging cells with the mouse).

end	The End key is on. Any arrow keys you press will move to the end of an area in the notebook instead of scrolling.

EXT	You are extending a selection with Shift+F7. When you are finished, choose a option that operates on cells.

FIND	Corel Quattro Pro is searching for entries that match the conditions you specified with the Query option.

FRMT	You are editing a format line during a Parse operation.

INPUT	Input is confined to selected cells with the {RestrictInput.Option} macro command. Press Esc or press Enter with no data in the input line to return to Ready mode.

LABEL	The entry you are making is text (a label).

MACRO	Corel Quattro Pro is executing a macro.

MOVE	You are using the Drag and Drop feature to move cells.

You pressed the Ins key, and anything you type will overwrite existing data. (To return to Insert mode, press Ins again.)

POINT	The notebook is in Point mode, letting you specify a cell or cells or view cell names with F3.

PREVIEW	You are previewing your printed notebook.

READY	Corel Quattro Pro is ready for the next entry or option.

VALUE	The entry you are making is a number or formula.

WAIT	An action is in progress. You must wait before proceeding.


Troubleshooting: Where is the button or menu item?

The Data Modeling Desktop option is dimmed.

I cannot find the button that I am looking for.


Troubleshooting Sheets and Pages
Troubleshooting Pages and Sheets

How do I insert a page break?

How do I rename a sheet tab?


Troubleshooting Selecting Data

How do I select data?


Troubleshooting Numbers

Are the numbers rounded off when I select two decimal places?

Can I create my own number format?


Troubleshooting Headings

I cannot edit the title.

Why is my heading cut off?

I chose Center, but my title was cut off.


Troubleshooting Viewing the Notebook

How can I look at two sheets at the same time?


Troubleshooting Moving Around

Is there a button that will move you to the first sheet of a spreadsheet?

Why am I getting the message "Invalid cell or block address" when I try to go to a named cell area?

I have enabled Move Cell Selector On Enter Key in order to have the cell selector move down automatically after pressing Enter. However, it is not working. Why?


Troubleshooting Protecting a Document

How can I hide rows or columns I do not want anyone else to see?

How do I protect cells that I do not want others to edit?

I have hidden some data, but I cannot redisplay it.

How do I unlock titles?


Troubleshooting Saving and Closing Documents

I opened multiple views of a file with Window [image] New View.  How do I close just one view?

How can I save in a format besides the .WB3 format of Corel Quattro Pro?

Can I save a selected cells?

I do not see the file format I need when I click File [image] Save As [image] As Type.


Troubleshooting Entering Data

Why cannot I include commas when I type numbers?

How do I enter a date?

I want the selector to move down the column when I press Enter.

I want the selector to move across the row when I press Enter.


Troubleshooting Finding Files

I cannot find a file I know I have saved previously.

Why did I lose my document?


Troubleshooting Printing

How can I cancel a print job?

How do I set up another printer for Corel Quattro Pro?

How do I select noncontiguous print areas?

I have a notebook that contains several sheets. How do I print each sheet on a separate piece of paper?

How can I make my notebook print on as many pages as I want?

Can I print page numbers or dates on each page?

The printed report includes a lot of blank pages.

Even though the correct print area is selected, text is cut off when a report prints.

I added more data, but it was not included in the print job.

How do I center a group of cells to print?

How can I make sure it all prints on one page?

Can I print multiple charts from the Objects sheet?


Troubleshooting Maps

How can I resize the legend of a map?

How can I zoom in on an area on the map?


Troubleshooting Opening Files

The password I typed to open a file is not working.

How can I open the same notebook every time I start Corel Quattro Pro?


Troubleshooting Exporting and Importing Files

How do I export ASCII text files with Corel Quattro Pro?

How do I copy a chart from Corel Quattro Pro into Corel WordPerfect for Windows?


Troubleshooting How Things Look

What does ***** mean?

I cannot see all the text I typed.

How do I add lines?

How do I change the text color?

How can I center text in a header?


Troubleshooting Toolbars

How do I get my old toolbar back?

Can I replace the default toolbar with my own toolbar?

How can I tell what toolbar buttons do?

How do I load another toolbar in Corel Quattro Pro?


Troubleshooting Charts

I cannot see the data behind the circle I drew.

How do I add a drop shadow behind the box?

Why aren't all properties available in certain charts?


Troubleshooting Formulas

What does ERR mean?

What does NA mean?

How do I know what to include in a formula?

Why is my formula not calculating?

What does [image] on the Application Bar mean?

I am getting an error message (for example, not enough arguments), but I want Corel Quattro Pro to accept the incorrect formula and I can fix it later.


Troubleshooting Moving from DOS to Windows

I have been using Corel Quattro Pro for DOS and have recently switched to Corel Quattro Pro for Windows. Can I use the DOS menus to run Corel Quattro Pro for Windows?

How can I execute my hot key macros created in Corel Quattro Pro for DOS?


Troubleshooting Copying Data

How do I input or copy information from one spreadsheet into another spreadsheet and have the information start in the cell I designated and not in A1?

Many sheets contain the same text. Is there an easy way to duplicate this text?

Do I have to resize columns every time I paste?


Troubleshooting Corel Barista

Why cannot others see my Corel Barista file?

Why do others not see the same fonts in Corel Barista documents?

Why cannot I see washes and patterns in graphics objects?


I cannot find the button
I cannot find the button that I am looking for.

The toolbars and the Property Bar may not be displaying. Click Tools [image] Setting [image] Display, then select Show Toolbar and Show Property Bar.

Also, the button may be on a different toolbar than is currently displayed. Right-click a toolbar, then click another toolbar. To display all toolbars quickly, click View Toolbars, then select all the toolbars displayed.


Why is my heading cut off?

The heading is wider than the column. If a label is wider than the column, the entry extends beyond the cell and goes into the next cell if it is empty.  If the next cell is filled, the text that fits in the cell remains visible and the rest is hidden. Click the Fit button [image] on the Notebook toolbar to widen the column to the label size.


What does ***** mean?

The number is too wide for the column, so asterisks are displayed.  Select the cell, then click [image] on the Notebook toolbar to widen the column.

By default, columns widen to fit the numbers you are typing.  If ****** appears in your cell, the Fit-As-You-Go setting may have been turned off. To turn it on, click Tools [image] Settings [image] General [image] Fit-As-You-Go.


How can I open the same notebook every time I start Corel Quattro Pro?

Right-click the title bar, then click Application Properties [image] File Options [image] type the notebook name in the Autoload File text box.


Are the numbers rounded off when I select two decimal places?

Numeric formatting does not affect the way Corel Quattro Pro stores values, only the way it displays them. If you want to round a number in a cell, use the @ROUND function.


Can I create my own number format?

Right-click the cell or cells, then click Cell Properties. Click Numeric Format [image] User Defined [image] enter a format code. For descriptions of formatting codes to enter, click Help [image] Related Topics [image] To create a custom numeric format from the dialog.


I chose Center, but my title was cut off
 I chose Center, but my title was cut off.

Use Center Across Cells instead of Center.  Remember to select the range of cells before you center.


I am getting an error message (for example, not enough arguments), but I want Corel Quattro Pro to accept the incorrect formula and I can fix it later
 I am getting an error message (for example, not enough arguments), but I want Corel Quattro Pro to accept the incorrect formula and I can fix it later.

Type an apostrophe (‘) as the first character in the cell, and you can enter the formula as a label. This way you can save the work you have done so far, even though it is not calculating.


Why can I not include commas when I type numbers
Why can I not include commas when I type numbers?

A comma is not a number, so if you type commas in a number, Corel Quattro Pro formats the cell as a label. When you do not include commas, the number is formatted as a number. Even though you do not type commas, you can still display commas in the number.  To display commas. enter the number, then select the cell. Right-click, then click Cell Properties [image] Numeric Format [image] Comma.


I cannot edit the title
I cannot edit the title.

If you center a title across cells, your title may appear to be in one of the middle cells, but you can still edit it from its original cell (left-most cell).


How do I add lines?

Add lines and boxes by clicking from the boxes on the Property Bar.

Or, right-click a cell or cells, then click Cell Properties [image] Line Drawing. Choose any of the line options.


How do I change the text color?

Select a cell or cells. Click [image] on the Property Bar.


I cannot see the data behind the circle I drew
I cannot see the data behind the circle I drew.

To make text appear behind the oval, right-click the oval, then click Ellipse Properties [image] None from the Fill Style drop-down list.


How do I add a drop shadow behind a box?

To change the border of a text box, right-click the box, then click Text Box Properties [image] Box Settings [image] click the style you want.


 How do I get my old toolbar back?

If you do not recognize the toolbar that is displayed, right-click the toolbar and click Notebook.


How do I unlock titles?

Click View [image] Locked Titles [image] to deselect Lock Titles.


How do I rename a sheet tab?

Double-click the sheet tab, type the new name, and press Enter.


Many sheets contain the same text. Is there an easy way to duplicate this text?

Click Insert [image] Name [image] Group of Sheets, then enter the information to create a group. Click View [image] Group Mode to turn on Group Mode. Type the data, then press Crtl+Enter to drill the data to every sheet in the group.


How can I look at two sheets at the same time?

Click Window [image] New View, then resize your windows to look at a duplicate copy of the notebook. This is useful when you want to look at different sheets in the notebook at the same time.


What does ERR mean?

If ERR displays instead of formula results you expected, the formula contains an erroneous calculation, such as dividing by zero. ERR also displays if data is missing or a cell address was entered wrong.


What does NA mean?

NA means that some of the necessary information is currently not available, such as when you link a formula to another source and the notebook was not updated when you opened it.


How do I know what to include in a formula?

If you are typing a function but do not know which arguments to use, follow the prompt at the bottom-right of the screen. You can also press F1 to get help on the function you typed. You can also click [image] to access the Formula Composer.


Do I have to resize columns every time I paste?

When you use Copy and Paste, you willl lose the formatting (column width, fonts, and so on) when you paste text in the new location. To copy cells while retaining the formatting, choose Edit [image] Copy Cells, then select Model Copy.  When you paste the text, the formatting options you selected remain intact.


How do I select data?

Drag across cells to select them.

To select noncontiguous selections of cells (cells not connected to each other), drag one selection, then hold down Ctrl while dragging other selections.


How can I hide rows or columns that other people do not need to see?

Select the rows or columns you want to hide, right-click them, then click Hide.


How do I protect cells that I do not want others to edit?

You may want to lock all cells in a worksheet except for those that other people should edit. To lock an entire sheet, right-click the sheet tab, then click Sheet Properties [image] Protection [image] Enable Cell Locking.

To unlock individual cells within the protected sheet, right-click the cells, then click Cell Properties [image] Constraints [image] Unprotect. You can select cells that are not next to each other by using Ctrl.


I have hidden some data, but I cannot redisplay it.

Select an area containing cells on both sides of the hidden area, or to reveal all hidden areas, click Edit [image] Select All. Right-click the cells [image] click Reveal/Hide [image] Reveal.


The Data Modeling Desktop option is dimmed.

If Start [image] Corel WordPerfect Suite 8 [image] Accessories [image] Data Modeling Desktop is dimmed, you must install the utility from a custom installation.


What does "Multiple Possibilities" mean?
What does “Multiple Possibilities” mean?

You probably dropped a label field a little too low, making it a data item rather than a top label. Click the handle for the Field’s label bar and then select Edit [image] Clear. Reselect the field in the Source window and drag it slightly above the top label bar.


How can I cancel a print job?

Click Cancel or double-click the Printer icon to delete the print job after Corel Quattro Pro sends it. If your printer has a large memory buffer, printing might continue for a few moments after you cancel.


The printed report includes a lot of blank pages.

Select only the area of data you want to print before choosing  File [image] Print. Be careful not to select entire rows or columns, or you will print all the blank cells in those selected columns or rows.


Even though the correct print area is selected, text is cut off when a report prints.

Long labels can spill over into empty cells to the right. If a label spills over to a cell outside the print selection, only the text within the selection is printed. Extend the print selection to the right to include all the text.


I added more data, but it was not included in the print job.

Print settings are saved with the notebook so that subsequent printing is easier. Reselect the cells after adding data you want to print, then print again.


How do I center a group of cells to print?

To center a print selection, click File [image] Page Setup [image] Options [image] Center Cells. Since extra blank columns on the right side of a print selection affect centering, do not include these in the print selection.


How do I make sure it all prints on one page?

To print your data on one page, click File [image] Page Setup [image] Print Scaling [image] Print to desired width, then specify the width and height in pages.


How can I center text in a header?

When you enter text in a header or footer, you can use the bar character (|) to align text. Insert the bar character once to center text (such as |Report) or insert it twice to right-align text (such as ||Report).


How do I insert a page break?

To insert a page break vertically, select a cell in the first column of the row you want on a new page, then click Insert [image] Page Break [image] Create.

To insert a page break horizontally, select a blank cell in the row of the column you want on a new page, then click Insert [image] Page Break [image] Create.


Why is my formula not calculating?

Try beginning the formula with a plus sign (+), for example, +A1+A2 calculates. Otherwise, Corel Quattro Pro thinks that you are entering a label (text).  You can also start a formula with one of the following:  + - ( @ # $ =

Did you include commas in your numbers? If you did, your formula may not calculate. Type the numbers without the commas. After you enter the formula, you can format numbers with commas by changing the Normal setting on the Property Bar to Comma or Comma().

Is Compatible Formula Entry enabled? If Compatible Formula Entry is enabled, you do not need a begining operator (, + , - , etc.). Click Tools [image] Settings [image] General [image] Compatible Formula Entry. Compatible formula entry also affects dates as to whether they appear as a date or as a formula.


What do the red arrows on the Application Bar mean?
What does [image] on the Application Bar mean?

 on the Application Bar informs you of a Circular-Cell Reference in your spreadsheet. A circular-cell reference is a formula whose result is dependent upon itself. For example, placing the formula +A1+A2 in cell A1 produces a circular-cell reference. This formula relies upon its own result to calculate the formula. This type of formula is never truly updated  because recalculating it produces a result and a modification to the supporting cell at the same time.


Why am I getting the message "Invalid cell or block address" when I try to go to a named cell area?

If you have deleted a sheet that contained a named cell, you will receive this message when you try to go to the named cell area. Also, if you make a table of cell names using Insert [image] Names [image] Generate, you will see an "ERR" where you would normally see the address for the named cells.


How do I input or copy information from one spreadsheet into another spreadsheet and have the information start in the cell I designated and not in A1?

There are several ways to do this:

Inserting a file at a specific cell

Select the cell where you want the information inserted. Click Tools [image] Data Tools [image] Combine Files. Specify the file you want to bring in and it will input the information, beginning at the cell you selected previously. Note: By using Combine, any Column Widths, Cell Names, Objects, or Sheet Names will be stripped out.

Copying all formatting

Open the Notebook you want to copy information from as well as the Notebook you want to copy information to. Highlight the cells in the Source Notebook that you want to copy. Click Edit [image] Copy Cells, then specify the Notebook and cell to copy to in the To box. Click Model Copy. This will copy virtually any formatting including Column Widths to the destination notebook.


Can I replace the default toolbar with my own toolbar?

Right click the default toolbar, then choose your toolbar. If you exit, this toolbar will be displayed when you restart Corel Quattro Pro.


I opened multiple views of a file
I opened multiple views of a file with Window [image] New View.  How do I close just one view?

Click the Close button at the far right of the title bar of one of the views.  If you click File [image] Close, all views are closed because all views of the notebook are saved under the same file.


Can you print multiple charts from the Objects sheet?

1	Click View [image] Objects.

2	Click Edit [image] Select All.

3	Click File [image] Print [image].

Note: You can select individual charts by holding down Shift and clicking on individual charts.


How can I save in a format besides the .WB3 format of Corel Quattro Pro?

1	Click File [image] Save As.

2	Type the filename.

3	For the File Type option, select the desired file format to save the file in


Why aren't all of the properties available in certain charts?
Why aren't all properties available in certain charts?

For instance, why can I not find bar width in my 3-D Step chart?

Because of the nature of certain charts, some properties are not necessary. For instance, since the 3-D Step chart is designed to have the bars touch, there is no option to change the percent of Bar Width. Only the relevant properties are displayed with a chart.


Can I save selected cells?

Yes. Click Tools [image] Data Tools [image] Extract to File. Specify a filename and the cells to be saved. You can also password protect the new file and specify whether to save formulas or convert all data to values.


How can I resize the legend of a map?

To change the size of the Legend, you need to change the size of the font used. To do this, click the chart, right-click the legend, then click Legend Properties. Click the Font tab and change the font size.


Why did I lose my document?

If you exit Corel Quattro Pro without saving your document, or if a power or network failure occurs, you will lose your work unless you have turned on the Document Backup feature. To do this, click Tools  [image] Settings [image] File Options [image] set a time interval under Timed document backup.

Then, if you exit Corel Quattro Pro unexpectedly with Timed Backup activated, you will be prompted to recover any open files the next time you start Corel Quattro Pro.


I cannot find a file I know I have saved previously.

Make sure the Look in text box displays the correct drive or folder.

Make sure the For type text box displays the correct file format. The default file type changes depending on the application and feature you are using.

If the document is on a network drive and you do not see the drive in the Look text box, click Tools [image] Map Network Drive, and map the drive. If the drive will not map to the path you specify, you may not have rights to that location. See your System Administrator.

The file you are looking for may be hidden. To show all files, including hidden files, click the Windows Start button [image] Programs [image] Windows Explorer, then click View [image] Options [image] Show All Files.


Is there a button that will move you to the first page of a spreadsheet?
Is there a button that will move you to the first sheet of a spreadsheet?

Pressing Ctrl-Home from anywhere in the notebook will take you to the first sheet of the file.


The password I typed to open a file is not working.

See if your Caps Lock is on.  When you saved the file with a password, Corel Quattro Pro noted if you typed lowercase or uppercase letters.  You will need to type the password in the same case that you saved the file with.


I do not see the file format I need
I do not see the file format I need when I click File [image] Save As [image] File Type.

Corel Quattro Pro supports conversion to several file formats. If you cannot find the format you need and you are saving the document for use in another application, consult the application's documentation to see if it suggests compatible file formats.


I cannot see all the text I typed.

To see all the text you typed without changing the column width, select the cell containing the text, right-click, click Cell Properties [image] Alignment [image] Wrap Text.


How can I zoom in on an area on the map?

To zoom in on a specific area of a map, place your mouse pointer over the region you want to zoom in on, right-click and select Zoom In. The mouse pointer acts as a reference point for zooming. The position of the mouse pointer will be the center of the chart when you zoom in. If you have zoomed a map and want to return to the original state, right-click and select Zoom To Normal.


I want the selector to move across the row when I press Enter.

1	Select the row where you want to type data.

2	Move to the left-most cell in the row.

3	Enter your data in the first cell.  The selector moves across the row as you press Enter.


I want the selector to move down the column when I press Enter.

Down one column for this set of data

1	Select the column where you want to type data.

2	Move to the top cell in the column.

3	Enter your data in the first cell.  The selector moves down the column as you press Enter.

Down the first column, then down the next column

1	Select the cells where you want to type data. (Include both rows and columns.)

2	Move to the top-left cell in the cells.

3	Enter your data in the first cell.  The selector moves down the column, then to the top of the next column as you press Enter.

Always down a column

To set the selector so that it always moves down the column when you press Enter,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] General.

2	Deselect Compatible Keys. Click Move Cell Selector On Enter Key.


What is an Application

A Corel Quattro Pro application is a combination of components that work together to make a task easier. The final look and feel of an application can be radically different from the standard Corel Quattro Pro notebook.

When you build an application, you can create custom components, such as:

toolbars

dialog boxes

menus

After you create these components, you assemble them into an integrated application notebook. This application notebook contains the macros, dialog boxes, and menus that make up the application.

Related Concepts


Understanding Application Components

In a Corel Quattro Pro application, each component is used for a specific purpose:

Toolbars give users shortcuts to common features. They also display information about the active window or object.

Dialog boxes prompt users for information and let the user make choices.

Menus provide custom lists of operations the user can choose from the menu bar. Menu items usually perform more global operations (like saving a file).

You use macros to assemble these components into an application. You can also use macros to automate Corel Quattro Pro operations, change Corel Quattro Pro's appearance, and display dialog boxes.

You can also use link commands to assign actions or connections to controls in a dialog box or a toolbar. A link command can get or change an object's property settings, or run macros.

Related Concepts


Designing Dialog Boxes

When you want to create a dialog box, you can choose Tools [image] Macro [image] Dialog Designer. The toolbar changes to provide tools that create dialog controls, objects you can create in a dialog box or a toolbar.

Displaying Dialog Boxes

After you create a custom dialog box, you can display it using the {DODIALOG} macro command. The most important argument in {DODIALOG} is the third argument, which are cells that contain the initial settings of the dialog box controls.

Using Link Commands

Link commands perform dynamic actions in response to events, which are things the user does in an application. For example, a link command can be assigned to a control so it will get an object property when the control is clicked, or display additional controls.

Events recognized by Corel Quattro Pro include

clicking

right-clicking

pressing a key

entering a new value

Link commands also let you quickly connect a control to another control or a notebook cell.

Related Concepts


Designing Menus

The operations performed by toolbars often overlap with the operations performed by menus; try to use menus for operations that affect the data in a global way (like saving a file, printing a database, and so on).

You can add custom menus and menu commands to the menu bar, and replace the menu bar with one command. Menu commands can

initiate actions

run macros

display dialog boxes

display other menus

To create a menu, you describe the menu with labels. The following table lists macro commands you can use to modify menus, menu commands, and the menu bar:

{DELETEMENU}

Removes a menu from the current menu bar (including submenus like Tools [image] Macro).

{DELETEMENUITEM}

Removes menu commands from the specified menu.

{ADDMENU}

Adds names to the current menu bar.

{ADDMENUITEM}

Adds menu commands to the specified menu.

{SETMENUBAR}

Replaces the active menu bar with the menu described by the cells.

{SETOBJECTPROPERTY}

Changes existing menu commands.

Tip

You can only add new menus to the left of the Edit menu and to the right of the Tools menu. The area between these menus is reserved for menus that change depending on the active window.

Related Concepts


Designing Macros

Macros are the heart of every application; they are the primary method you use to pull all of your application components together. In addition to the {DODIALOG} macro command, which displays dialog boxes, macros are most commonly used in an application to

automate tasks

duplicate keyboard and mouse actions

change the active menus

affect the screen display

select, reposition, and resize objects

prompt users for input

The remainder of this topic lists some of the uses of macros in an application.

Notebook Startup Macros

Developers typically use a notebook startup macro to set up the application and present a unique look for the application.

Changing Properties with Macro Commands

Corel Quattro Pro offers numerous macro commands that developers can use to modify the standard look of Corel Quattro Pro or to change property settings.

Some of these macro commands are

{Application.Display}

{GETOBJECTPROPERTY}

{GETPROPERTY}

{Notebook.Display}

{Sheet.Display}

{SETOBJECTPROPERTY}

{SETPROPERTY}

Related Concepts


Preparing to Build an Application

As a developer, it can be hard to resist jumping right in and building an application. But before doing this, take the time to carefully plan and design the application. This approach makes the application easier to debug and revise.

Planning an Application

Consider these fundamental issues:

User needs. Determine what tasks users need to accomplish. Get suggestions from users for ways to make the proposed application useful.

Examples. Find existing features or applications in other products that perform tasks similar to the ones you plan to design. Ask users if they can improve these examples.

Simplicity. Make the application as easy to use as possible. Try to provide help messages and help lines for users within the application.

Design guidelines

Consider using the following tips:

Involve users. Let users review early versions of the application. Use their suggestions to improve and refine the design.

Think small. Keep all macros, dialog boxes, and menus for a single application organized in one notebook. Also, try to limit the number of supporting files (notebooks, toolbars, graphics, text, and so on). This way, you will have fewer files to install and maintain on user's computers.

Be consistent. Define and follow a set of rules for naming and storing components of your applications. For example, you could begin all component names with the same three-letter code. Also, keep your application files in a specific directory and instruct your users to do the same.

Document your work. Since you might need to update or revise the application later, be sure to include development notes in the application. For example, you can add specific comments and labels to macros, or general comments for an entire notebook sheet of menu items.

Protect yourself. Limit user access to critical components of the application by hiding UI elements such as the tab cluster or by protecting cells from editing. This will keep unexpected maintenance of the application to a minimum. Click here [image] for details.

Avoid traps. If you change the standard menu bar, you might be unable to run a macro by choosing Tools [image] Macro [image] Play. When developing applications, run Corel Quattro Pro in Developer mode; then you can press Ctrl+Shift+N to restore the standard menu bar and reveal hidden UI components. You can also write a macro to restore Corel Quattro Pro to its original state and assign the macro to a key. Handy macros like this one can be saved to a macro library, and the macro library can be open when testing or developing.

Clean up. Remember to restore the standard Corel Quattro Pro settings after users exit your application.

Related Concepts


Using Developer Mode

Starting Corel Quattro Pro with the command line switch /D runs Corel Quattro Pro in Developer mode. Developer mode adds special properties to property menus and lets you use a shortcut key, Ctrl+M, as described below. You do not have to be in Developer mode to change or read these property settings; macro commands can always access them.

You gain additional properties in Developer mode.

Enable Inspection: Lets you disable right-clicking, the property settings from the Property Bar, and the properties key (F12).

Title: Lets you change the text that displays in the Corel Quattro Pro title bar.

In Developer mode, all drawn objects in a chart window gain the following properties.

Dimension: Lets you move and resize chart objects created with the toolbar in the chart window.

Name: Used by macro commands, link commands, and @functions to read or change property settings.

The Developer mode shortcut key, Ctrl+M, varies in function depending on the current program state. When you are debugging a macro, Ctrl+M stops macro execution and exits Debug mode. In all other states, Ctrl+M restores the standard Corel Quattro Pro menu bar, Application Bar, and input line. Ctrl+M also re-enables the ability to right-click and access property menus.

You can also press Ctrl+Shift+N to restore the standard menu bar and reveal hidden UI components.

Related Concepts


About Grouping Notebook Sheets

You can act on several notebook sheets at the same time by grouping the sheets. Then any changes you make to one sheet affect all sheets in the group. For example, you can enter column headings and make formatting changes on multiple sheets simultaneously by first grouping the sheets.

After you create a group, turn it on and off using View [image] Group Mode. The group of sheets is indicated by a blue line under the sheet tabs in the group.

You can have multiple groups in one notebook. Changes to one sheet in a group affect only the other sheets in the same group while you are in Group mode. You cannot have overlapping groups; that is, any given sheet can belong only to one group.

Using a Group

Any 2-D selection that you make on a sheet turns into a 3-D selection when you use Group mode.

For example, if you group sheets A through D of the same notebook, you can apply a heading style and a currency format style to all sheets at once. Just select A1 on any sheet and choose Heading 2 from the Style list, and then select A2..B3 on any sheet and choose Currency from the Style list.

To create a group of notebook sheets

To turn Group mode on or off

To change or delete a group

To drill an entry into grouped sheets

To delete through the sheets in a group

Related Concepts


To create a group of notebook sheets
To create a group of notebook sheets,

1	Click Insert [image] Name [image] Group of Sheets.

2	Type a group name. You can use letters and numbers in the name, as well as the following special characters:

~  `  !  %  _  |  \  '  ?

You can also use spaces, but not as the first character in a name. You cannot use a name you have previously assigned to a sheet in the same notebook.

3	Enter the first and last sheets of the group. If you preselected a series of sheets before choosing the command, they already appear in the dialog box.

Related Topics

More Info


To turn Group mode on or off
To turn Group mode on or off,

Click View [image] Group Mode.

When Group mode is on, a blue line appears below the sheet tabs in the group. Changes made to cells in the group affect all similar cells in other sheets in the group. Also, if you point to cells in the group from dialog boxes or in formulas while Group mode is on, the group name is used. For example, a formula would read 1stQtr:A1:A10 instead of Jan..Mar:A1:A10.

Related Topics

More Info


To change or delete a group
To change or delete a group,

1	Click Insert [image] Name [image] Group of Sheets.

2	Click a group name.

To delete the group, click Delete.

To change the group, change the entries for First Sheet and/or Last Sheet.

Related Topics

More Info


To drill an entry into grouped sheets
To drill an entry into grouped sheets,

1	Click View [image] Group Mode.

2	Type the entry into a cell on any sheet in a group.

3	Press Ctrl+Enter.

Related Topics

More Info


To delete through the sheets in a group
To delete through the sheets in a group,

1	Click View [image] Group Mode.

2	Select a cell or cells on any sheet in a group.

3	Press Ctrl+Del.

Related Topics

More Info


Group Mode Tips

Remember that every action you take affects all sheets in the group when Group mode is on. This means that many operations require you to switch Group mode on and off. For best results, work carefully and enable Undo before you start.

For example, if you are working in Group mode, follow these steps to copy data from one sheet in a group to the remaining sheets in the group,

1	Click View [image] Group Mode to turn off Group mode.

2	Select the source data to be copied, and click the Copy button [image] on the toolbar.

3	Click View [image] Group Mode again to turn Group mode back on.

4	Select the destination cell in any sheet in the group, and click the Paste button [image] on the toolbar.

You can also turn Group mode on and off while writing formulas that involve 2-D and 3-D references. Watch the input line as you point to references; with Group mode on, you get 3-D references, with Group mode off, you point to 2-D references.

The QuickSum button [image] is ideally suited to use with groups. Just select the cells on any sheet in the group to create the desired totals on that sheet, then click QuickSum. The appropriate formula is written into each sheet in the group.

Other operations that are particularly useful in Group mode are

most cell property settings

most sheet property settings

column width and row height changes, either with the mouse or the Fit button

Edit [image] Copy Cells within similarly formatted sheets

inserting and deleting of rows and columns

Tip

Be careful when using Edit [image] Cut or Clear when Group mode is on. Data will be deleted from all sheets in the group.

Related Concepts


About Defining Styles

A Corel Quattro Pro style is a combination of property settings gathered under a style name. You apply a style by selecting it from the Style list in the Property Bar

You can create entirely new styles, or you can modify Corel Quattro Pro's predefined styles. In either case, you can copy property settings from a formatted cell or from an existing style to add to your new style.

If you redefine a style that is already in use in the notebook (such as Normal, which is applied to all cells by default), all cells using that style change to reflect the new property settings. Cells in which you set individual properties with [image] or Format [image] Selection do not change.

You can delete any style except the Normal style. You can also copy styles to other notebooks.

To define a style

To apply a style to cells

To delete a style

To copy a style to another notebook


To define a style
To define a style,

1	Click Format [image] Styles.

2	To change a style, choose it from the Define Style For list. To create a new style, type a new name in the Define Style For box.

3	To add or change properties that make up the style, check the box next to the property name. Then click the property button, change the setting, and click OK. To remove a property from the style definition, uncheck the box next to it.

Note: Only checked properties are included in the style you are defining. The unchecked properties have no effect in the cells to which you apply this new style. This lets you create partial styles that affect only a few properties at a time and apply them in combination with properties already existing in cells.

4	To copy property settings from a preformatted cell or another style, click Merge. Then click Style and choose the style name from the Select Style box to merge another style. Or, choose Cell and point to or type the cell address in the Select Cell box.

Related Topics

More Info


To delete a style
To delete a style,

1	Click Format [image] Styles.

2	Choose the style name in the Define Style For box.

3	Click Delete.

Cells to which you had applied the deleted style revert to Normal style. You can delete any style except the Normal style.

Related Topics

More Info


To copy a style to another notebook
To copy a style to another notebook,

1	Select a cell formatted in the style you want to copy.

2	Click Edit [image] Copy.

3	Select a cell (or cells) in another notebook (click File [image] Open if the notebook is not opened yet).

4	Click Edit [image] Paste to paste the cell into the notebook. The style name appears in the Style list for that notebook.

Related Topics

More Info


Custom Numeric Formats

In addition to the numeric formats built into Corel Quattro Pro, you can create your own numeric formats to further customize the appearance of numbers, dates, and times.

Every time you create a User Defined format, it is saved in the Formats Defined list. To see the Formats Defined list, right-click cells, then click Cell Properties. Click Numeric Format (it is selected by default), then click User Defined.

The format is also added to the list of all open notebooks. It is saved with any of these additional notebooks only if you apply the format to a cell in that notebook.

If you paste a formatted cell into another notebook, the custom format definition is copied, also.

To create a custom numeric format

To apply a custom numeric format to cells

Related Concepts


To create a custom numeric format
To create a custom numeric format,

1	Select the cells you want to format.

2	Click [image].

3	Click Numeric Format.

4	Click User Defined, then select a format in the Formats defined list. This format will be the basis from which you create the new format.

5	Enter a format code in the Formats defined box. Click here [image] for information on how to use numeric format codes.

For information about specific format symbols:

Number format symbols

Date/Time format symbols

Miscellaneous format symbols

Related Topics

More Info


To apply a custom numeric format to cells
To apply a custom numeric format to cells,

1	Select the cells you want to format.

2	Click Format [image] Selection

3	Click the Numeric Format tab.

4	Click User Defined, then select a format in the Formats Defined list.

Related Topics

More Info


Using Numeric Format Codes

Using special codes, you can create custom formats to display values. You can also create formats that display values differently depending on whether they are positive, negative, or zero. Finally, you can add text at the beginning, middle, or end of your format.

Formats are divided into two groups: Number formats and Date/Time formats. You create these formats using codes that represent formatted values in each character position in the formatted cell.

You can add any other characters, which will be inserted "as is" in the displayed entry within the formatted data.

The following code displays a number to three decimal places:

N9.000

For example, 53.97 would appear as 53.970. The N code begins all Number formats. The 9 code displays as many digits as there are in the value to the left of the decimal point. The zero codes require that three digits to the right of the decimal point be displayed.

The next code displays a date and time:

TWeekday, H:M:S

For example, 1/9/92 at 2:30am would appear as Thursday, 2:30:0. The T code begins all Date/Time formats. The Weekday code displays the name of the day, and the H, M, and S codes display the hour, minute, and second. The colons are not codes; they are simply inserted into the formatted value according to their position in the format.

Related Concepts


Numeric format symbols
Number Format Symbols

Symbol	Action

N or n	Begins a Number format (as opposed to a Date or Time format).

0	Always displays a digit. If the number does not have a digit in this position, a 0 appears. If there are more digits in the number than 0s in the format code, extra digits in the integer portion are displayed, and the fraction portion is rounded.

9	Displays a digit if the number has one. If there are more digits in the number than 9s in the format code, extra digits in the integer portion are displayed, and the fraction portion is rounded.

%	Displays the number as a percentage.

, (comma)	Inserts a thousands separator (a comma unless specified otherwise with the application International property). If not part of a Number code, the comma is inserted wherever it is positioned in the format.

. (period)	Inserts a decimal separator, which is a period unless specified otherwise with the application International property.

;(semicolon)	Sets up different formats for positive and negative values. If the format contains two parts separated by one semicolon (part1;part2), the first part formats positive numbers or zero and the second part formats negative numbers. If the format contains three parts, the first part formats positive numbers, the second formats zero, and the third formats negative numbers.

E- or e-	Displays the number in scientific notation, preceding negative exponents with a minus sign. If the format includes at least one 0 or 9 following this symbol, the number displays in scientific notation with E or e. If the exponent contains more digits than 9s or 0s following this symbol, the extra digits are displayed.

E+ or e+	Displays numbers in scientific notation, preceding negative and positive exponents with a minus or plus sign, respectively. If the format includes at least one 0 or 9 following this symbol, the number displays in scientific notation with E or e. If the exponent contains more digits than 9s or 0s following this symbol, the extra digits are displayed.

The next table shows examples of user-defined numeric formats.

Number examples

Cell contents	Format code	Appears as

6435	N$9,999.99	$6,435.

4.3	N9,900.99	04.3

234	N9;Nnil;N(9.00)	234

0	N9;Nnil;N(9.00)	nil

-3	N9;Nnil;N(9.00)	(3.00)

556966830	N999-99-9999	556-96-6830

4155554828	N(999)999-9999	(415)555-4828

37.2	N99.00 ft	37.20 ft

102089	NConfidential	Confidential

.75	N9.99%	75.%

.75	N9.99'%'	.75%

1234567	N0E+999	1E+6

Related Concepts


Date/Time Format Symbols

T or t

Begins a Date/Time format (as opposed to a Number format).

d or D

Displays the day of the month as a one- or two-digit number (1-31).

dd or DD

Displays the day of the month as a two-digit number (01-31).

wday, Wday, WDAY

Displays the day of the week as a three-character abbreviation all lowercase, or with the first letter capitalized, or all uppercase.

weekday, Weekday,WEEKDAY

Displays the day of the week all lowercase, or with the first letter capitalized, or all uppercase.

m or M

Displays the month as a one- or two-digit number (1-12). If preceded by an hour code (h, H, hh, or HH), displays the minute as a one- or two-digit number (1-59).

mm or MM

Displays the month as a two-digit number (01-12). If preceded by an hour code (h, H, hh, or HH), displays the minute as a two-digit number (01-59).

Mo

Displays the month as a one- or two-digit number (1-12).

Mmo

Displays the month as a two-digit number (01-12).

mon, Mon, MON

Displays the month as a three-character abbreviation all lowercase, or with the first letter capitalized, or all uppercase.

month, Month,MONTH

Displays the name of the month all lowercase, or with the first letter capitalized, or all uppercase.

yy or YY

Displays the last two digits of the year (00-99).

yyyy or YYYY

Displays all four digits of the year (0001-9999).

h or H

Displays the hour as a one- or two-digit number. If the format includes ampm or AMPM, the number will be between 1-12. If ampm or AMPM is not included, 24-hour format is used (0-23).

hh or HH

Displays the hour as a two-digit number. If the format includes ampm or AMPM, the number will be between 01-12. If ampm or AMPM is not included, 24-hour format is used (00-23).

Mi

Displays the minute as a one- or two-digit number (1-59).

Mmi

Displays the minute as a two-digit number (01-59).

s or S

Displays the second as a one- or two-digit number (1-59).

ss or SS

Displays the second as a two-digit number (01-59).

AMPM

Displays the time in 12-hour format with characters for morning (AM) or afternoon (PM).

The next table shows examples of user-defined date and time formats.

Date and time examples

Cell contents	Format code	Appears as

2/10/92	TMonth D, yyyy	February 10, 1992

2/10/92	TWeekday	Monday

@TODAY	TMM/DD/YY	02/10/92

@NOW	THH:MM:SS AMPM	02:36:42 PM

Related Concepts


Miscellaneous Format Symbols

Symbol	Action

*	If the formatted entry is shorter than the column width, fills the column by repeating the character to the right of the asterisk.

' '	Literalizes characters enclosed in the single quotation marks and displays them wherever they are placed within the format. After you apply a format, single quotation marks are automatically inserted in the format around characters that are not format codes. To make the actual text of a format code appear in a cell (instead of making it act as a code), surround it with single quotation marks (for example, 'WEEKDAY').

\	Works like the quotation mark symbols described above, except it literalizes only the character after the backslash.

Related Concepts


About Reformatting Text

Format [image] Text Reformat lets you adjust word wrapping in a series of label entries as though they were in a paragraph. You can enter text as a long label or a series of labels, then reorganize the text as a paragraph, using any number of cells or columns.

If an entry is longer than the column width, it overflows into adjoining empty cells and is cut short when it reaches an occupied cell. If you specify only the first row of cells for the reformat cells, be sure there are enough blank rows underneath for the reformatted text. If the destination cells contain data, the data is moved down out of the way.

Remember, even though the text may appear reformatted in several columns or rows, the data is stored in the leftmost cells of each row.

If you reformat entries in different font sizes, the font size of the reformatted text is determined by the size of the entry in the first row. This may change row heights.

Format [image] Text Reformat works only on existing text. If you reformat empty cells, it does not affect data you enter later.

To reformat text within cells

Related Concepts


To reformat text within cells
To reformat text within cells,

1	Enter the text in one or more cells of the same column. You can include up to 1023 characters in a single cell. There can be no blank cells between the cells containing text, and the entries must begin in the same column.

2	Select the cell containing the first cell to reformat, and click Format [image] Text Reformat.

3	For the Cells field, specify the columns or rows where you want the reformatted text to appear.

The upper left cell must be the cell you selected in step 2. For example, if you selected cell A1 in step 2, you can select A1..B3 to reformat the text.

If you specify cells in the active row only, the text fills up as many rows as necessary to display the text within the columns containing those cells.

If you specify both columns and rows, Corel Quattro Pro reformats the text within the cells if there is enough room.

Tip

You can also click Format [image] Selection [image] Alignment to wrap text in a cell.

Related Topics

More Info


About Transposing Columns and Rows

Whether you set up a sheet with entries listed in rows or columns, you can reverse the data in columns and rows with Tools [image] Numeric Tools [image] Transpose.

Tools [image] Numeric Tools [image] Transpose copies data to another area and transposes the columns and rows. Although you can transpose to the same location as the existing cells, it is not wise because the transposed data will usually take a different shape than the original data and will not overwrite it completely. It is safer to specify a different part of the notebook for the transposed cells.

To transpose columns and rows

Related Concepts


To transpose columns and rows
To transpose columns and rows,

1	Select the cells.

2	Click Tools [image] Numeric Tools [image] Transpose.

3	For the To edit field, specify the top left cell where you want to copy the transposed data. Do not specify a cell within the source cells--you will disarrange the data if you do.

Tip

If there is data in the destination cells, Corel Quattro Pro overwrites it with the new data. Also, do not transpose cells containing formulas; cell references do not adjust properly.

Related Topics

More Info


About Converting Formulas to Values

Edit [image] Convert to Values copies the values calculated by formulas without copying the formulas. Resulting values are usually numeric, but they can also be string values, depending on your formulas. You can copy these values to another part of the notebook or copy them over the formulas that computed them.

To convert formulas to values

Related Concepts


To convert formulas to values
To convert formulas to values,

1	Select the cells.

2	Click Edit [image] Convert to Values.

3	For the To field, specify the destination cells.

To replace the formulas in the cells with their values, specify the same cells for the destination cells.

To copy the values of the formulas to another part of the notebook, specify the top left cell where you want to copy them to.

Tips

To copy formulas and their values to another part of the notebook, use Edit [image] Copy Cells or Edit [image] Copy and Paste. To convert a single formula to its result, select the cell containing it, press F2, press F9, then press Enter. The result replaces the formula.

To copy formula values into a separate file, click Tools [image] Data Tools [image] Extract To File [image] Values.

Related Topics

More Info


Moving Formulas or Referenced Cells

To maintain the accuracy of your data, Corel Quattro Pro changes formula references in a logical manner when you move cells containing formulas, or cells referenced by formulas. Here are the specifics:

If you move a formula without moving the cells it references, the references remain intact, regardless of whether they are absolute or relative. Cell references adjust only when you copy a formula.

If you move a formula and the cells it references at the same time, the references do adjust. For example, if A2 contains +A1+1, and you move A2 alone to B1, the formula still reads +A1+1. But if you move A1 and A2 at the same time, the formula reads +B1+1.

If you move a formula to another notebook without moving the cells it references, Corel Quattro Pro links the two notebooks so the formula still references the cells in the original notebook. If you move the formula back to the first notebook, the links are removed.

If you move a cell without moving formulas that refer to it, formulas update to refer to the new location, even if you specified the reference as absolute. For example, if you move the contents of cell B4 to B6 in sheet A, Corel Quattro Pro revises any formula referencing B4 to reference B6. If you move A:B4 into A:B6 of a notebook named TAX, the formula's reference changes to [TAX]A:B6.

If you move a cell from within an area without moving formulas that refer to the cells, formulas still refer to the same cells and no longer refer to the moved cell. However, if you move one of the coordinate cells (the upper left and lower right cells), the references to the cells extend or contract to reflect the new location. For example, if you define BILLS as B1..B7, then move cell B7 to B12, BILLS changes to B1..B12.

If you move a coordinate (corner) cell into another notebook, references to the cells are not adjusted.

If you move an entire named or referenced selection of cells, Corel Quattro Pro updates the cell name or the reference in formulas.

Moving into Referenced Cells

If you move data into a coordinate cell of a referenced area or into a single referenced cell, the formula containing the reference becomes invalid. References in formulas to the single cell or selection of cells are replaced with ERR, and cells containing those formulas display ERR. If you named a selection of cells, the coordinates in the cell names list show as ERR.

Tip

Corel Quattro Pro's error auditing features can help you locate the source of ERR and NA in cells. Click here [image] for details.

To reverse a move operation that causes errors, use Edit [image] Undo immediately after the move.

To move data into a cells referenced by a formula, use Edit [image] Copy Cells, then erase the original data. Edit [image] Copy Cells will not turn cell references into ERR values.

Related Topics


Variations on Pasting

Sometimes you may want to paste only a subset of the data. You can do this in the following ways:

With Corel Quattro Pro cells in the Clipboard, you can use Edit [image] Paste Special to paste only properties of cells instead of values, or vice versa.

With data in the Clipboard from a participating DDE application, you can use Edit [image] Paste Special [image] Paste Link to create a live data link. This type of link causes data changes from the other application to be constantly reflected in Corel Quattro Pro.

With data from many other types of applications in the Clipboard, you can use Edit [image] Paste or Paste Special to create many kinds of data types, including OLE objects, picture objects, and bitmap objects.

You can, of course, paste Corel Quattro Pro data into other applications, as limited by the formats the other application can read.

Related Concepts


Using Paste Special to Control What is Pasted

Ordinarily, when you paste cells, you paste the cell properties, too (such as font, alignment, and numeric format). To paste the data without the properties, or to control the paste in other ways, use Edit [image] Paste Special.

To paste spreadsheet data without properties

Related Concepts


To paste spreadsheet data without properties
To paste spreadsheet data without properties,

1	Use Edit [image] Copy to copy a selection to the Clipboard.

2	Select the destination for the pasted cells.

3	Click Edit [image] Paste Special and check one or more settings: Formula Cells, Label Cells, Number Cells, Properties, Cell Comments, Avoid Pasting Blanks, Transpose Rows and Columns, and Paste Formulas as Values. For help on an option, right-click it.

If you copied cells to the Clipboard (instead of cutting them), you can click Link to paste the cells and link them to the source cells. Then, whenever you update the source, the copy will update as well.

Tip

If the destination already contains data, you will overwrite it when you click OK.

Related Topics

More Info


Pasting Different Data Types

Ordinarily, using Edit [image] Paste puts the most complete version of Clipboard data into Corel Quattro Pro. But, depending on what is in the Clipboard, you can use Edit [image] Paste Special to choose from a variety of types, including:

BIFF3. Excel format data.

WK1. Lotus 1-2-3 versions 2.x format data.

Embedded OLE. A floating object containing data embedded from another application.

Metafile. A graphic format that creates a floating picture object in a notebook.

Bitmap. A graphic format that creates a floating bitmap object in a notebook.

Text. Text data is entered as labels into cells, and numeric data is entered as values.

Linked OLE. A floating object displaying data linked from another application.

Link. A DDE link.

WK3. Lotus 1-2-3 version 3.x format data.

Corel Paradox Table. Corel Paradox for Windows or Database Desktop data.

DIB. A Device Independent Bitmap format that creates a floating bitmap object.

Not all of these formats are available in all situations. Depending on the data copied to the Clipboard and the location within Corel Quattro Pro that is selected, only a subset of the list of formats may be available.

Tip

To paste in a particular format, copy the data from the other application to the Clipboard. Then, in Corel Quattro Pro, select the location to paste the data, and click Edit [image] Paste Special. After you select the format type from the list, click OK. Depending on the data type, the data is entered into cells, or as a floating object above the surface of the notebook sheet.

To paste an OLE object or DDE link into Corel Quattro Pro

Related Concepts


About Creating Floating Objects

You can create floating objects containing a variety of data types. These objects exist in a layer above the notebook cells, but are part of the notebook sheet in which they appear. They obscure entries in cells underneath them. To display the cells underneath, select the floating object and drag it.

Although a floating object is not attached to particular cell borders, it prints when the cells underneath it are selected, and it is saved with the notebook.

Insert [image] Object creates an embedded OLE object created by an OLE server application that you run from within Corel Quattro Pro.

By pasting Clipboard data, you can create these types of objects:

Embedded OLE or linked OLE objects

Rich Text Format objects

Picture objects (metafile format)

Bitmap objects

Using tools in the toolbar, you can create floating charts and QuickButtons. You can also create floating charts with Graphics [image] Insert Chart. Tools in the Chart and Drawing Tools toolbar let you add lines and shapes to the notebook. These are useful for annotating cells and floating objects.

Tip

Another way to create a floating object that contains a bitmap or metafile image is to import the file into a chart window and insert the contents as a floating chart. You can import files in many popular graphics formats.

To quickly create a chart on a notebook sheet

To create a QuickButton

To import graphics

To drag an OLE object into Corel Quattro Pro

To paste an OLE object or DDE link into Corel Quattro Pro

To insert objects into Corel Quattro Pro

To reorder layers of overlapping objects

To protect a floating object from change

To make a floating object transparent

Related Concepts


To create a floating object
To create a floating object,

Use one of these methods:

Click Insert [image] Object to insert an OLE object.

Click Edit [image] Paste to paste Clipboard data.

Click Insert [image] Chart to insert a chart on a notebook sheet or on its own page.

Click the QuickChart tool in the toolbar to create a chart on a notebook sheet

Use tools in the toolbar to create quickbuttons, lines, shapes, and text boxes.

Drag an object from another application.

Related Topics

More Info


Drawing Objects on the Notebook

You can draw lines and shapes and add text boxes directly on a notebook using tools on the toolbar.

Click [image], then click the item you want to add to your notebook.

Drawn objects are like other floating objects; they exist in a layer above the notebook cells, but are part of the notebook sheet in which they appear. Drawn objects do not appear as icons on the Objects sheet. You can edit them in place and change their properties on the notebook.

To draw lines and arrows on the notebook

To draw rectangles and ellipses on the notebook

To create a text box on the notebook

Tips

To make a drawn object transparent to see the cells underneath it, right-click the object, click the Properties option, click the Fill Settings tab, and set Fill Style to None.

To add objects even more quickly, right-click any toolbar, then click the Chart and Drawing Tools toolbar. To keep a tool selected after you use it, double-click the tool.


To draw lines and arrows on the notebook
To draw lines and arrows on the notebook,

1	Click the Line tool [image] or the Arrow tool [image] from the toolbar and drag from where you want the line to start to where you want it to end. If you are using the Arrow tool, the arrowhead appears at the end of the line where you release the mouse button.

Tips

You can also click Insert [image] Shape to draw lines and arrows.

To customize a Line or Arrow, right-click it, click the Properties option, and change its properties.

The properties for lines and arrows that you draw on a sheet differ from the properties of lines and arrows drawn in a chart window.

To add a shape to a chart or map (so that the shape moves with the chart or map), double-click the chart or map, then create the shape.

Related Topics

More Info


To draw rectangles and ellipses on the notebook
To draw rectangles and ellipses on the notebook,

1	From the toolbar, click [image] to create a rectangle or click [image] to create an ellipse.

2	Drag the mouse to create the shape and size you want, then release the mouse to complete the figure.

Tips

To create a perfect square or circle, press Shift while you drag the mouse to create the shape.

You can also click Insert [image] Shape to draw rectangles and ellipses.

To add a shape to a chart or map (so that the shape moves with the chart or map), double-click the chart or map, then create the shape.

Related Topics

More Info


To create a text box on the notebook
To create a text box on the notebook,

1	Click the Text tool [image] from the toolbar.

2	Drag out a text box to the size you want. When you release the mouse, a blinking insertion point signals that you can type text.

3	Type text. As you type, the text wraps to fit the width of the box, and the depth of the box increases automatically. (The Alignment property turns this wordwrap feature off and on.)

4	Instead of typing text, you can type a reference to a cell that contains a label.

5	When you finish typing text, click anywhere outside the text box to deselect it.

Tips

To add a text box to a chart or map (so that the text box moves with the chart or map), double-click the chart or map, then create the text box.

Related Topics

More Info


To resize a floating object
To resize a floating object,

1	Click anywhere in the object to select it; handles appear around the border.

2	To resize only the height or width of an object, drag a side handle. To resize height and width at the same time, drag a corner handle diagonally.

Related Topics

More Info


To move a floating object
To move a floating object,

Drag it from any area except its handles. To copy an object, hold down Ctrl and drag the object as if you were moving it.

Related Topics

More Info


About Protecting Floating Objects

If you do not want other notebook users to modify or delete a floating object, you can lock it by protecting the object and then enabling object protection for the sheet.

Once an object is protected, it cannot be moved, resized, edited, or deleted until you click Format [image] Sheet [image] Protection, and uncheck Enable Object Locking.

Tip

When sheet protection of objects is disabled, Corel Quattro Pro ignores the status of objects that have been individually protected or unprotected.

To protect a floating object from change

Related Concepts


To protect a floating object from change
To protect a floating object from change,

1	Right-click the object, then click the Properties option.

2	Click the Protection tab and select Locked.

3	Click Format [image] Sheet [image] Protection.

4	Select Enable Object Locking.

All floating objects on the sheet (except those that are specifically unlocked) are protected.

Tip

To unprotect floating objects on a sheet, click Format [image] Sheet [image] Protection, and uncheck Enable Object Locking.

Related Topics

More Info


To make a floating object transparent
To make a floating object transparent,

For objects other than drawn objects,

1	Right-click the object, then click the Properties option.

2	Click the Box Type tab, then click Transparent.

For drawn objects,

1	Right-click the object, then click the Properties option.

2	Click the Fill Settings tab, then choose None for Fill Style.

Related Topics

More Info


To add drop shadows to a floating object
To add drop shadows to a floating object,

1	Right-click the object, then click the Properties option.

2	Click the Box Type tab, then check Drop Shadow. You can also check one of the Box Type settings to remove the border around the floating object or change its line weight.

Related Topics

More Info


Changing Floating Object Properties

You can right-click floating objects and change their properties. All floating objects contain the Border Color, Box Type, Protection (to prevent objects from being moved, resized, edited, or deleted), and Object Name properties. OLE objects each have one additional property, called OLE. This property identifies the object and linked document (if any) and lets you specify whether the object can be automatically resized by the server if necessary and, if the object is a link, whether the link should be automatically updated when the server document changes.

OLE objects have additional settings you can change by right-clicking. To view these, right-click the object and click the Object option.

For linked objects, you see:

Edit, Play, or whatever action is appropriate to the server application. You can run a video, play a sound, edit the object, and so on. When you are finished working in the server application, click File [image] Update or File [image] Exit. For OLE 2.0 objects, Edit activates the object for in-place editing. Use Open to open the server.

Open, to open the server application.

Change Link, to specify a different link path -- if the linked document is moved to a different directory, for example.

Update Link, to refresh the information shown in the linked object.

Convert, to change the linked object to another type of object--a metafile picture, for example.

Embedded objects can have the same commands, except for Change Link and Update Link.

To protect a floating object from change

To make a floating object transparent

To add drop shadows to floating objects


To reorder overlapping objects
To reorder layers of overlapping objects,

1	Select the object.

2	Click Format [image] Object Order, then click one of the following options:

Bring Forward moves the object one layer closer to the top.

Send Backward moves the object one layer closer to the bottom.

Bring To Front brings the object to the front or top of the layers.

Send To Back sends the object to the bottom layer.

Tip

You can also layer floating objects using tools on the the Property Bar.

Related Topics


To paste a Quattro Pro image into Windows Paint
To paste a Corel Quattro Pro image into Windows Paint,

1	Select the area you want to include in the image. The area must be contiguous.

2	Click Edit [image] Copy. (Make no further changes in Corel Quattro Pro until you paste this image.)

3	Start Paint (or activate it if it is already started).

4	Click Edit [image] Paste.

The image appears in Paint just as it looks in Corel Quattro Pro.

Tip

Be sure to paste the image into the target application immediately after copying it to the Clipboard from Corel Quattro Pro, before making any changes to the Corel Quattro Pro notebook. Otherwise, the image is invalid--and unavailable.

Related Topics


Analytical Charts

Corel Quattro Pro can calculate new data points using different analytical methods and graph them without changing data in the notebook. This feature is called analytical charts.

Analytical charts relate to other Corel Quattro Pro analysis tools.

Aggregation uses eight @functions.

Moving Average relates to Tools [image] Numeric Tools [image] Analysis [image] Moving Average.

Linear Fit performs the same analyses as Tools [image] Numeric Tools [image] Analysis [image] Regression.

Exponential Fit is similar to Tools [image] Numeric Tools [image] Analysis [image] Exponential Smoothing.

To create analytical charts

To generate a table of analytical chart results

Related Concepts


To create analytical charts
To create analytical charts,

1	Click Insert [image] Chart.

2	Specify cells for the chart, then click Next.

3	Specify Line or Area as the chart type, then follow the remaining steps, clicking Finish to create the chart.

4	Click the chart, then right-click the line or area that represents the data series you want to analyze. Click the Series Properties [image] Analyze [image], then choose an analysis method.

Aggregation

Moving Average

Linear Fit

Exponential Fit

5	Click OK to display the analysis results in the chart window.

Tips

To chart the original values for a series, click None on the Analyze tab.

To create a table of analysis data, after you click an analysis method, specify the upper left cell of the table's location in the Table edit field.

Related Topics

More Info


Aggregation

Aggregation lets you combine multiple data points and plot them as a single point that may be the sum, average, standard deviation, minimum, or maximum of the data. Plotting aggregates transforms a chart series and reveals relationships not immediately apparent in the notebook, such as weekly averages for information recorded daily.

To perform an Aggregation analysis, follow the guidelines for analytical charts. On the Analyze tab, click Aggregation. For help on an aggregation option, click [image], then click the option.

Related Concepts


Aggregation Chart Types

Line charts work well with aggregation because they easily show trends. Bar charts are also impressive when plotting aggregated data over time, although trends are not as easy to see when you chart multiple series in the same chart. X-axis labels are created in the same way as for line charts.

When using aggregation with bar or line charts, Corel Quattro Pro can create x-axis labels but does not aggregate the x-axis series, even if you enter the analyzed series in the X-Axis series edit field. To aggregate the x-axis, right-click the chart, then click Series. Enter the cells containing data for the x-axis in the X-Axis box, then click OK. Right-click the chart, then click Type/Layout [image] Specialty [image] XY [image] OK. Then, right-click the x-axis, and click Properties. Click the Analyze tab, then enter the same Aggregation Period, Series Period, and Function settings as you did for the other series in the chart.

Related Concepts


Aggregation Options and Time Periods

When you click a chart, right-click the line or area that represents the data series you want to analyze, then click the Series Properties [image] Analyze [image] Aggregation. You have these options: Series Period, Aggregation Period, and Function.

The Aggregation commands are based on one day representing a period of 1. For the purposes of aggregation, Corel Quattro Pro uses the following standards:

A week has	A month has	A quarter has	A year has

7 days	30 days	90 days	360 days

4 weeks	12 weeks	51 weeks

3 months	12 months

4 quarters

Related Concepts


Series Period

Series Period indicates what the series values represent, or what period exists in the series. For example, if the series contains weekly information, choose Weeks.

Days (the default) represents a period of 1.

Weeks represents a period of 7.

Months represents a period of 30.

Quarters represents a period of 90.

Years represents a period of 360.

Related Concepts


Aggregation Period

Aggregation Period indicates the number of data values to combine for each point on the chart. Choose one of the following or type in a number to use an arbitrary period:

Weeks (the default) shows weekly data, or aggregates by 7.

Months aggregates by 30.

Quarters aggregates by 90.

Years aggregates by 360.

If you enter an arbitrary period, the Series Period is automatically set to Days. You can reset Series Period to another option, if you want. For example, enter 3 to group information in 3-day periods with Series Period set to Days. If you specify a standard Aggregation Period, for example, 7, the setting will show the standard (Weeks) instead of the number (7).

Arbitrary Aggregation Period

Remember that the aggregation settings are based on a day representing a period of 1, but this does not mean you can use only daily information in an aggregation chart. Regardless of what the series represents (days, weeks, months, quarters, or years), if the period you want is other than one of the settings on the Aggregation Period list, always enter the arbitrary period in terms of days.

For example, if the notebook contains daily data and you would like to see biweekly averages, set Aggregation Period to 14 and press Enter. If you have weekly data and want to see biweekly averages, set Series Period to Weeks, set Aggregation Period to 14 and press Enter.

Tip

The aggregation period must be larger than the series period. For example, if you select Months for the Series Period and Weeks for the Aggregation Period, an error message tells you the series period interval must be smaller than the aggregation period interval.

Related Concepts


Function

Function indicates how to transform the data:

SUM (the default) uses @SUM(list) to total the data.

AVG uses @AVG(list) to average the data.

STD uses @STD(list) to calculate the population standard deviation.

STDS uses @STDS(list) to calculate a sample standard deviation.

MIN uses @MIN(list) to specify a series minimum.

MAX uses @MAX(list) to specify a series maximum.

VAR uses @VAR(list) to calculate the population variance.

VARS uses @VARS(list) to calculate a sample variance.

Think of the Aggregation commands as handy standards for simple periodic aggregation. For example, when you select Days for the Series Period, Months for the Aggregation Period, and AVG for the Function, Corel Quattro Pro will average 30 data points, plot the average, then average the next 30 points, plot the average, and so on.

Related Concepts


Moving Average

Moving Average analysis smoothes fluctuating data points by plotting progressive averages. Starting with the first point in the series, Corel Quattro Pro calculates and plots the average for a specified previous number of points, called a period. At each following point, Corel Quattro Pro maintains the specified period: it drops the oldest value, the one farthest from the new point, so the number of points averaged is always the specified period. Corel Quattro Pro then calculates and plots the new average, and continues in this way.

For example, if daily sales vary widely, you may want to determine a general trend by smoothing data points. With a period of 3,

Corel Quattro Pro starts with the first day's sales and plots this value.

For the second average, Corel Quattro Pro moves to the second day, averages the first and second days' totals, and plots the average.

Corel Quattro Pro moves to the third day and calculates the average of the third, second, and first days' sales, then plots the average.

At the fourth day, Corel Quattro Pro drops the first day's sales and averages the second, third, and fourth days' sales.

With Period set to 3, Corel Quattro Pro averages each day's sales with the previous two. In this way, each point is tempered by previous points and data is smoothed to show a general trend.

To perform a Moving Average analysis, follow the guidelines for analytical charts and click Analyze [image] Moving Average.

Moving Average Chart Types

Line and area charts are most effective for displaying moving averages. They highlight trends better than bar charts, although bar charts are not inaccurate.

Related Topics


Moving Average Options

To perform a Moving Average analysis, follow the guidelines for analytical charts and click Analyze [image] Moving Average. The dialog box offers these options:

Period	Indicates the number of points to average.

Weight	Lets you select a weighted moving average. The default is None. When you select Standard, Corel Quattro Pro numerically places greater emphasis, or weight, on recent points (closest to the point it is working with) and less weight on older points (farthest from the most recent point).

The oldest point is multiplied by 1, the next multiplied by 2, and so on; the most recent point is multiplied by the specified Period.

For example, with Period set to 3, the oldest point is multiplied by 1, the next one by 2, and the most recent point is multiplied by 3. Then, the weighted moving average is determined by dividing the sum of the weighted points by the sum of the weights (in this case, 1+2+3).

Related Concepts


Linear Fit

Simple linear regression generates a line that best fits the data. Not only is Linear Fit useful for showing a general trend among fluctuating points, it is easier to grasp regression information in chart form than in a table.

To perform a Linear Fit analysis, follow the guidelines for analytical charts; choose Line for the chart type.

Linear Fit calculates and plots regression information in a line, even if the data does not have a general trend.

You can create a table of the results and use the table to project hypothetical values.

Related Concepts


Exponential Fit

Exponential Fit generates a curve to fit data that increases or decreases geometrically--through multiplication rather than addition. For this feature to work, all values in the series must be nonzero and of the same sign, either all negative or all positive.

To fit data with a curve, follow the guidelines for analytical charts; choose Line for the chart type.

You can create a table of the results.

Related Concepts


To generate a table of analytical chart results
To generate a table of analytical chart results,

1	Right-click the series you want to analyze in the chart, then click the Properties option.

2	Click the Analyze tab and specify the type of analysis (Aggregation, Moving Average, Linear Fit, or Exponential Fit).

3	Enter cells for the table in the Table edit field. You can indicate cells, or specify only one cell as the top left cell of the table.

If you specify one cell, Corel Quattro Pro extends the table downward as needed.

Caution: Check that there is room for the table; otherwise, Corel Quattro Pro overwrites unprotected existing data. Try specifying cells below and to the right of data.

If you specify cells, depending on how you want to view the table values, you can specify an area one row wide, one column wide, or composed of multiple rows and columns. Corel Quattro Pro fills the cells as in Edit [image] Fill [image] Fill Series. It starts with the upper left cell, fills the column, then starts at the top of the next column, and so on.

If the area you specified is too small, Corel Quattro Pro displays only what the specified cells will hold. To see all the values, choose Table again and specify either one cell as the top of the table (Corel Quattro Pro then extends the table downward as needed), or specify a larger cell area.

Tip

If the type of analysis is Linear Fit or Exponential Fit and you specify a series larger than the number of existing data points, Corel Quattro Pro projects additional values based on the plotted line or curve and enters them after the others. This applies only to standard line charts, not XY charts.

Related Topics

More Info


Viewing Multiple Relationships in One Chart

Corel Quattro Pro makes it easy to view more than one relationship in the same chart without redesigning your notebook and without repetitive calculations. Just follow the guidelines for analytical charts and enter the same cells for several series. Then, perform different analyses on each series.

You can view multiple Aggregation relationships in the same chart if you aggregate by the same period for each analysis.

Related Concepts


Using the Scenario Manager

Models are sets of formulas designed to simulate real situations and conditions. Scenarios are "snapshots" of data models. They show changing data or variable values plugged into a model and the values that result.

Click Tools [image] Scenario [image] New to create scenarios.

The following topics give an overview of scenario management explain how to edit scenarios after you create them.

Scenario management overview

Planning scenarios

The capture area

The scenario baseline

Scenario cells

Scenario groups

Scenario Summary Report

Tracking versions with Scenario Manager


Scenario Management Overview

Scenarios are "snapshots" of data models. They show changing data or variable values plugged into a model and the values that result. For example, a worst-case scenario shows what you can expect from the least desirable set of variable values; a best-case scenario uses the most desirable values as input. The Scenario Manager can also be used for tracking versions of notebooks, with changes as minor as changing the fonts or numeric format of cells. Several commands, such as Edit [image] Copy Cells and Tools [image] Scenario [image] New, help you set up and save scenarios.

The Model Copy option of Edit [image] Copy Cells lets you copy models to different locations in a notebook without affecting formula references. Then you can change values in each copy to produce different scenarios. The Model Copy method of scenario management is most suitable when you want to build a set of scenarios for further analysis--with Tools [image] Numeric Tools [image] Optimizer or Solve For, for example. You can place each scenario on a separate sheet labeled with a unique name, perform a variety of analyses, and print the results whenever you like.

For a more powerful and interactive approach to scenario analysis, use the Scenario Manager. It highlights value changes for new data, so it is easy to compare and summarize scenarios. At any time you can name and save scenario variations in report form.

To create different scenarios

To change the scenario capture area

To change the scenario baseline

To highlight changing and result cells with color

To find scenario cells automatically

To find scenario cells manually

To add more scenarios to a group of scenarios you have created

To rename a scenario group

To display a scenario

To save edits to the active scenario

To display a Scenario Summary Report

To delete a scenario

To delete a scenario group

To track versions using the Scenario Manager

To view previous versions of cells, a notebook sheet, or a notebook

Related Concepts


Planning Scenarios

Before using the Scenario Manager, build a data model. Enter formulas in your notebook spreadsheet and add any supporting data. Then,

1	Decide how much of the notebook to include in the scenario group: cells, a sheet, or the entire notebook. The Scenario Manager tracks all changes within that area, so it is best to include only what you need.

2	Decide which information to change with each scenario. These are the changing cells.

3	Determine which formula cells reference the changing cells and contain the results you are interested in. These are the result cells.

4	If you want, use Insert [image] Name [image] Cells to name each selection of changing and result cells. These names become labels in the Scenario Summary Report. If you have column or row labels, you can use those for identification in the Scenario Summary Report without actually naming scenario cells.

Related Concepts


To edit scenarios
To edit scenarios,

1	Click Tools [image] Scenario [image] Edit, or click here [image] for a shortcut.

2	Set a capture area.. Sheet (the current sheet) is the default, but you can choose Notebook or Cells; adjust other options as needed.

3	Name and save the scenario baseline.

4	Name, save, and edit scenarios.

5	Rename the scenario group (optional); Group1 is the default.

6	View the Scenario Summary Report.

Related Topics

More Info


To create different scenarios
To create different scenarios,

1	Click Tools [image] Scenario [image] New.

Related Topics

More Info


The Capture Area

The capture area is a selection of cells, sheet, or whole notebook where the Scenario Manager tracks changes. Once you set the scenario baseline, the Scenario Manager tracks all changes in the capture area and interprets them as changing cells and result cells.

To verify or change the capture area, click Tools [image] Scenario [image] Edit [image] Modify. These Capture Area options are available:

Notebook tracks changes within the entire notebook.

Page tracks changes in the active sheet.

Cells tracks changes in the specified cells (2-D or 3-D).

If you choose Notebook, scenario changes are tracked and displayed on all sheets except the Scenarios sheet and Objects sheet. Use this setting carefully to avoid unexpected results. For example, suppose you change sheet B, save a scenario, change sheet C, then display the scenario you last saved. All data on sheet B appears but the changes on sheet C disappear.

Set Capture Area to Notebook only if you are interested in tracking changing and result cells across several sheets and do not intend to use the notebook for anything else but storing related scenarios.

Choose Sheet if you will be changing data on a single sheet but do not want to specify where. You can choose Sheet for most purposes.

For maximum control, choose Cells. The specified cells must be contiguous, either 2-D or 3-D.

To change the scenario capture area

Related Concepts


To change the scenario capture area
To change the scenario capture area,

1	Click Tools [image] Scenario [image] Edit [image] Modify.

2	Click one of the following Capture Area options.

Notebook tracks changes within the entire notebook.

Page tracks changes in the active sheet.

Cells tracks changes in the specified cells (2-D or 3-D).

Tip

If you edit data within the capture area then display an existing scenario, any changes not yet saved to a scenario are lost--unless you immediately use Edit [image] Undo to restore them. Choose a capture area carefully to avoid possible data loss or extra changing and result cells; the capture area applies to all scenarios in the current group.

Related Topics

More Info


The Scenario Baseline

The Scenario Manager tracks value changes against a baseline. If you are working with an empty notebook, enter any labels and formulas before setting the baseline. If you will be changing data that is already in the notebook, set the baseline before starting the changes.

To change the scenario baseline

Related Concepts


To change the scenario baseline
To change the scenario baseline,

1	Click Tools [image] Scenario [image] Edit [image] Capture. Think of it as a camera that is taking a snapshot of current data in the capture area.

2	Name the baseline scenario.

The default baseline name is Base Scenario. To use another, type a new name in the Scenario Name edit field.

Now, Corel Quattro Pro tracks all changes within the capture area until you save another scenario.

Related Topics

More Info


Scenario Cells

The Scenario Manager tracks two types of scenario cells: changing cells (which generally contain new data entries) and result cells (formula cells that reference the changing cells).

Once you set the baseline, you can identify scenario cells automatically or manually.

When you save a scenario and generate a Scenario Summary Report, the report includes values in all the shaded cells. You may want to focus on fewer changing and result cells than Corel Quattro Pro has shaded. To exclude extra cells of either type, select them and click Tools [image] Scenario [image] Edit [image] Remove.

To highlight changing and result cells with color

To find scenario cells automatically

To find scenario cells manually

Related Topics


To highlight changing and result cells with color
To highlight changing and result cells with color,

1	Click Tools [image] Scenario [image] Edit [image] Highlight.

2	Check Highlight.

By default, changing cells are shaded yellow on color monitors; result cells are green. To change these colors, click a square in either or both color selection panes.

Related Topics

More Info


To find scenario cells automatically
To find scenario cells automatically,

1	Enter new values into the changing cells.

2	Click Tools [image] Scenario [image] Edit [image] Find.

Tip

The Scenario Manager identifies all cells in the capture area that have had direct entries, property changes, or formula edits since the baseline was set. These are changing cells. They can contain values or formulas. Result cells are all cells containing formulas that have had value changes but no formula edits since the baseline was set.

Related Topics

More Info


To find scenario cells manually
To find scenario cells manually,

1	Select one or more changing and result cells.

2	Click Tools [image] Scenario [image] Edit [image] Add.

All selected cells with values are identified as changing cells; cells with formulas are result cells.

Related Topics

More Info


To add more scenarios to a group of scenarios you have created
To add more scenarios to a group of scenarios you have created,

1	Enter new valutes in the changing cells.

2	Click Tools [image] Scenario [image] Edit [image] Capture.

3	Enter the new scenario name in the Scenario Name edit field (or use the default name).

Repeat these steps until you have added as many scenarios as you want. They are saved permanently when you save the notebook.

Tip

If you have not identified scenario cells manually, the Scenario Manager performs an automatic identification and saves the information under the name you entered.

Related Topics

More Info


Scenario Groups

A set of scenarios is called a group. Each notebook can have as many scenario groups as you need, each with its own baseline.

To rename a scenario group

To delete a scenario group

Related Concepts


To rename a scenario group
To rename a scenario group,

1	Click Tools [image] Scenario [image] Edit [image] Modify.

2	Click one of the following buttons:

New adds a new group. When you create a new group, the first scenario you capture will be the baseline.

Rename gives the active group a new name.

Delete erases the active group and all scenarios in it.

Options lets you change block tracking.

Related Topics

More Info


To display a scenario
To display a scenario,

1	Click Tools [image] Scenario [image] Edit.

2	Click a name in the Scenarios list.

Tips

If you have several scenario groups, select the target group in the Group Management list before selecting the scenario.

When you display a scenario, its changing cell and result cell values replace those currently onscreen. You can change the contents of any cell with standard editing procedures.

Related Topics

More Info


To save edits to the active scenario
To save edits to the active scenario,

1	Click Tools [image] Scenario [image] Edit [image] Capture.

2	Type the name of the active scenario to replace it with current cells and values. You can type another name to replace another existing scenario or create a new one.

Tip

Changes appear in the Scenario Summary Report when you click the Report button.

Related Topics

More Info


Scenario Summary Report

Each time you add a scenario, its changing and result cell values are stored. You can view and print them whenever you want.

If you have checked a labels option or named each changing and result cell, a label or name displays next to each value in the Scenario Summary Report.

To display a Scenario Summary Report

Related Concepts


To display a Scenario Summary Report
To display a Scenario Summary Report,

1	Click Tools [image] Scenario [image] Edit [image] Report.

2	Check any of the following options:

Report All Groups displays a report for each scenario group, not just the active group.

Use Left Labels identifies scenario cells with text in cells immediately to their left.

Use Top Labels identifies scenario cells with text above them.

Find Empty Sheet puts the Scenario Summary Report on the first empty sheet in the notebook. To place it somewhere else, uncheck Find Empty Sheet and enter a sheet and cells in the edit field.

Related Topics

More Info


To delete a scenario
To delete a scenario,

1	Click Tools [image] Scenario [image] Edit.

2	Click a name in the Scenarios list.

3	Click Delete.

Tips

If the scenario is in another scenario group, choose the group name in the Group Management list before step 2.

If you are viewing the Scenario Summary Report when you delete a scenario, it still displays until you click the Report button to update the report.

Related Topics

More Info


To delete a scenario group
To delete a scenario group,

1	Click Tools [image] Scenario [image] Edit.

2	Select the group in the Group Management list.

3	Click Modify.

4	Click Delete.

Related Topics

More Info


About Tracking Versions with Scenario Manager

You can use the Scenario Manager to keep track of different versions of cells, a sheet, or a whole notebook--if you are building a complicated budget notebook or macro application, for example.

To track versions using the Scenario Manager

To view previous versions of cells, a notebook sheet, or a notebook

Related Concepts


To track versions using the Scenario Manager
To track versions using the Scenario Manager,

1	Click Tools [image] Scenario [image] Edit.

2	Click Modify, then

Set the capture area to suit your tracking needs; keep the area as small as possible, but remember that changes outside that area will not be recorded.

Click Options to change the Update On Block Operations setting. For complete version tracking, you will probably want to uncheck it.

3	Click Capture to set the baseline.

4	Make changes in the capture area until you are ready to save a version, then click Capture again and enter a new version name.

If you want to track changes in cell attributes such as shading or fonts, click Highlight and uncheck Highlight to turn highlighting off while you are editing.

5	Continue editing and saving versions until your work session is over. Be sure to save a final version before closing the Scenario Manager dialog box or Corel Quattro Pro.

Tip

If you have been editing anywhere in the capture area, be sure to save the current version in the Scenario Manager before displaying a previous version. Otherwise, edits may be lost. Remember, if Undo is enabled, you can use Edit [image] Undo to restore an unsaved scenario as long as no edits have been made since displaying the current scenario.

Related Topics

More Info


To view previous versions of a group of cells, a notebook sheet, or a notebook
To view previous versions of cells, a notebook sheet, or a notebook,

1	Click Tools [image] Scenario [image] Edit.

2	Choose the target group in the Group Management list if it is not active already, then choose the target version in the Scenarios list.

Related Topics

More Info


Using the Consolidator

The Consolidator is similar to Tools [image] Data Tools [image] Combine Files; it combines data from cells into one location using your choice of @function operators. The following topics give an overview of the Consolidator and explain how to create and use consolidations:

Consolidator overview

To perform consolidations

To add consolidation source cells

Consolidator operators

Consolidator results

Consolidator Options

To save consolidation setups

To delete consolidations


Consolidator Overview

The Consolidator is similar to Tools [image] Data Tools [image] Combine Files; it combines data from cells into one location using your choice of operators. Unlike Combine Files, the Consolidator offers a choice of @functions as operators and lets you save consolidation setups. You can specify source and destination cells plus the @function operator used to combine them, then name that setup and save it for future use.

While the Consolidator is often used for permanent calculations, its flexibility makes it useful for model analysis. For example, you can define several source cells, then use any or all of the operators with different destination cells. If you save each setup, it is easy to change a few values and recompute with a single click.

If you are working with a database, you can choose cells with field names at the top or to the left and automatically sort combined data in the destination cells.

To perform consolidations

To add consolidation source cellss

To save consolidation setups

To delete consolidations

Related Concepts


To perform consolidations
To perform consolidations,

1	Click Tools [image] Consolidate [image] New, then follow the instructions.

Tips

Click Tip if you need help as you use the Consolidate Expert.

Related Topics

More Info


Consolidator Source Cells

Consolidator source cells are the cells you want to combine. For example, you might want to count or average all cells in the source cells. Since the chosen operator works on equivalent cells in each source area, source areas usually have the same number of rows and columns.

To add consolidation source cells

Related Concepts


To add Consolidator source cells
To add consolidation source cells,

1	Click Tools [image] Consolidate [image] Edit [image] Add.

2	Enter the source cells in the edit field. Click the Browse button to select cells in another notebook.

Tips

To enter noncontiguous selections, press Ctrl while selecting cells. Each noncontiguous selection is treated as a separate entry. If you enter 3-D source cells, the selection on each sheet is treated separately and combined with those on the other sheets.

To remove an entry from the Source Cells list, select it in the list and click the Remove button.

Related Topics

More Info


Consolidator Operators

The Operator list offers these operations: SUM, AVG, COUNT, MIN, MAX, STD, STDS, VAR, and VARS. They work like statistical @functions of the same name on equivalent cells of each source cells.

For example, if you choose SUM to perform the consolidation in the following example, the results display in E2..E4.

A	B	C	D	E

1

2	1	4	6	11

3	2	5	7	14

4	3	8	11

5

Cell E2 is the sum of cells A2, B2, and C2; cell E3 is the sum of A3, B3, and C3; and so on. With columns of different lengths, cell E4 is the sum of A4 and C4 only.

Related Concepts


Consolidator Results

When you have specified cells and an operation, click the Consolidate button to perform the consolidation. Results appear in the destination cells and overwrite any other data there. By default, consolidation results are formulas.

The dimension of the destination cells affects the dimension of the consolidation result. If the source cells and destination cells have the same number of columns and rows, the Consolidator displays all results in their corresponding position in the destination. For example, the upper left cell of one source area is combined with the upper left cell of a second source area; the results appear in the upper left cell of the destination cells. This is true even when those upper left cells are in different rows.

When the source and destination cells have different dimensions, the Consolidator combines equivalent cells when possible. Cells without equivalents are handled differently depending on the operator. If the destination area is smaller than a source area, results are limited to the size of the destination area.

Related Concepts


Consolidator Options

Option settings determine whether consolidation results are formulas or values and whether data field labels are used in the consolidation.

Displaying Results as Formulas

When Output With Formulas is checked (it's checked by default), the Consolidator enters results as formulas in the destination cells. When Output With Formulas is unchecked, results are entered as values.

Consolidating with Labels

Suppose you need to consolidate several areas of equivalent data entered in different row and column orders. As long as matching data has identical row and/or column labels, the Consolidator can combine it and sort the results in any order you specify.

Check Use Labels In Top Row to use labels in the top row of Consolidator source and destination cells; check Use Labels In Left Column to use labels in the left column. You can check either or both options.

The Consolidator matches column labels, then matches row labels within columns to find equivalent cells for consolidation. Then it locates cells in the destination cells with the same column and row labels and puts the results there. If the destination area does not contain labels, data is entered according to label order in the first source area. The destination area is formatted to match the first source area.

Related Concepts


To save consolidation setups
To save consolidation setups,

1	Click Tools [image] Consolidate [image] Edit [image] Save As.

2	Type a name.

3	Click OK to enter the name in the Consolidations list.

Tips

To reuse a saved consolidation, click its name in the Consolidations list and then perform the consolidation. Current contents of the source cells are combined; new results appear in the destination area or areas.

If you want to save a "snapshot" of consolidation source and destination cells contents, click Tools [image] Scenario [image] Edit [image] Capture before performing the consolidation.

Related Topics

More Info


To delete consolidations
To delete consolidations,

1	Click Tools [image] Consolidate [image] Edit

2	Click the consolidation name in the Consolidations list.

3	Click Delete.

Tip

Notebook data is not changed, but that consolidation setup is no longer available.

Related Topics

More Info


Frequency Distributions

Frequency distributions show how many values in cells fall within given value intervals. To create a frequency distribution table, you need one or more areas of values to count, and bin cells listing the value intervals--"bins"-- for each count.

To create a frequency distribution table

Related Concepts


To create a frequency distribution table
To create a frequency distribution table,

1	Set up a bin of ranges to analyze in a single column with a column of blank cells to the right. The ranges must be in ascending order.

2	Click Tools [image] Numeric Tools [image] Frequency.

3	Specify the value area(s), the cells to analyze; separate multiple areas with commas ( , ).

4	Specify the bin cells, the values you set up in step 1.

5	Click OK. Corel Quattro Pro calculates the frequency distribution of values within each bin range and enters the results to the right of the bin cells.

Related Topics

More Info


Setting Up Frequency Bin Cells

Bin cells contain the range of intervals you want analyzed. The bin must be a single column with a column of blank cells to its right (where the results will be written).

You can use Edit [image] Fill [image] Fill Series to create the bin. Numbers must appear in ascending order, from top to bottom of the column.

Each value in the bin cells represents all values from it down to the previous value. (The first value represents any value less than or equal to itself.)

The result area will be one cell longer than the bin cells. The last cell contains the number of values found that were greater than the final number in the bin.

Related Concepts


Other Basic Analyses

You can supplement the statistical information in your notebook with appropriate @functions. For example, you could include these formulas at the end of the weekly sales figures, contained in a selection named SALES:

@SUM(SALES)	Calculates total sales.

@COUNT(SALES)	Calculates the number of sales in the column.

@AVG(SALES)	Calculates the average sales amount.

Related Concepts


Charting Frequency Distributions

To create an XY chart of a frequency distribution, specify the bin cells as the x-axis series and the results as the first series of values.

To create an XY chart

Related Concepts


About Regression Analysis

You can create a regression analysis table showing how sets of independent variables affect a certain set of dependent variables.

Regression analysis shows the relationship between a set of independent variables and one dependent variable. It answers the question: To what extent can a dependent variable be explained and predicted by one or more independent variables? For example, you can estimate how the number of hours worked affects production, or how advertising expenditures and frequency affect sales.

The relationship between dependent and independent variables is a linear estimate. With one independent variable, regression analysis plots a line of best fit (regression line) through a scatter plot of each independent-dependent value pair.

Because regressions assume a linear relationship, your results will be more accurate if your data closely matches a linear model. To help you determine accuracy, Corel Quattro Pro's regression table includes two standard error estimates.

To perform regression analysis


To perform regression analysis
To perform regression analysis,

1	Choose the variable data you want to analyze. You can have one dependent variable that you believe is influenced by independent variables; for example, quarterly revenues.

2	Make sure the data cells you want to use in the regression analysis have the same number of rows.

3	Click Tools [image] Numeric Tools [image] Regression.

4	Specify the column of dependent data.

5	Specify the column(s) of independent data; they may be in noncontiguous columns.

6	Specify the upper left cell of the output cells where you want Corel Quattro Pro to write the regression information.

7	If you want to force the y-intercept value to zero, set Y Intercept to Zero.

Tip

Regression tables are not automatically updated. If you alter the values in the independent and dependent cells, use Tools [image] Numeric Tools [image] Regression again to see the new results.

More Info


The Regression Output Block
The Regression Output Cells

The regression output is nine rows deep and three columns wider than the number of columns in the independent cells. Make sure to leave enough blank space; any underlying data will be overwritten. The output cells contain this information:

Constant

The y-intercept value, zero if Y Intercept is set to Zero instead of Compute.

Std Err of Y Est

The estimated standard error of y values; the degree of deviation of observed y values from predicted values.

R Squared

The variance; the degree of relationship between independent and dependent variables. With one independent variable, R Squared is the square of the correlation between the two variables.

No. of Observations

The number of values for each variable; the number of rows in the regression table.

Degrees of Freedom

The number of observations minus the number of independent values being computed by the regression. With Y Intercept set to Zero, Degrees of Freedom = (No. of Observations) - (number of independent variables); with Y Intercept computed, Degrees of Freedom = (No. of Observations) - (number of independent variables + 1).

X Coefficient(s)

The regression coefficients of the independent (x) variables; the slope of the regression line representing the relationship between each independent variable and the dependent variable.

Std Err of Coef.

An error estimate of the X Coefficient above it. Interpret each coefficient as the X Coefficient value plus or minus the Standard Error of Coefficient.

Related Topics


Matrix Operations

A matrix is a rectangular array of numbers. Each column in the matrix corresponds to one variable and each row corresponds to a linear constraint.

Matrix operations can help you solve sets of linear formulas and equations. For example, suppose you have these four unique equations describing variables w, x, y, and z:

1w+1x+2y+3z=10

3w+2x+2y+1z=20

1w+0x+3y+4z=15

1w+1x+0y+1z=6

You can express the coefficients of these equations (the numbers multiplying the variables w, x, y, and z) in this "4 by 4" coefficient matrix:

1 1 2 3

3 2 2 1

1 0 3 4

1 1 0 1

And you can express the results in this "4 by 1" constant matrix (the first variable is at the top of the list, the second is next, and so on):

10

20

15

 6

You can use matrix multiplication and inversion to find the value of each variable in the second matrix that satisfies the constraints in the first matrix.

Multiplying Two Matrices

Matrix multiplication is helpful when you need to multiply the elements of one matrix by the elements of a second and sum their products. For example, matrix multiplication can combine several types of building materials across development phases or compute job costs involving different labor categories.

Matrix Inversion

Matrix inversion is the first step in solving sets of linear equations. When you multiply a matrix by its inverse, the resultant matrix is an identity matrix (all 1s and 0s, with only a single diagonal of 1s).

To multiply two matrices

To invert a matrix

Related Concepts


To multiply two matrices
To multiply two matrices,

1	Click Tools [image] Numeric Tools [image] Multiply.

2	Specify Matrix 1, the first matrix you want to multiply.

3	Specify Matrix 2, the second matrix.

4	Specify the Destination, the top left cell of the area where you want to write the resulting matrix.

Tip

The number of columns in the first matrix must equal the number of rows in the second matrix.

Related Topics

More Info


To invert a matrix
To invert a matrix,

1	Click Tools [image] Numeric Tools [image] Invert.

2	Specify the Source, the matrix cells you want to invert.

3	Specify the Destination, the upper left cell of the cells where you want to write the inverted matrix. If you specify the same cells as the invert cells, the inverted matrix overwrites the existing matrix.

Tips

You can use Invert with "square" matrices only (those with the same number of rows as columns). You can invert matrices up to 90 rows by 90 columns.

You cannot invert a matrix that is mathematically singular. A matrix is singular when its determinant equals zero.

You cannot invert a matrix with mathematical redundancies or inconsistencies.

Related Topics

More Info


Solving Matrix Problems

You can use matrix arithmetic to solve sets of "square" linear equations, those with the same number of rows and columns in the coefficient matrix. For example, consider this set of linear equations:

2x+3y=31

 x+2y=19

The coefficient and constant matrices are

Coefficient	Constant

2  3	31

1  2	19

Follow these steps to solve them with matrix inversion and multiplication:

1	Invert the coefficient matrix to get the invert matrix.

2	Multiply the invert matrix by the constant matrix.

3	The solution matrix contains the results (x=5 and y=7):

5

7

If you multiply the coefficient matrix by the solution matrix, the result is the constant matrix:

2  3	 5  	31

times	     equals

1  2	 7	19

Related Concepts


"What-if" Tables

"What-if" tables show the results of substituting a number of values for one or two variables in a formula.

Also called sensitivity tables, what-if tables can answer questions like these: "What if my company's expenses increase 10%, 20%, 30%? And, what if production increases 10% to 25% at the same time?" What-if tables can also be used to look up values, such as postal charges for different parcel weights.

You can create basic tables that use data you supply, or tables can refer to data already entered in the notebook.

One-Variable "What-if" Tables

One-variable what-if tables are created by varying a single value that is referenced by one or more "what-if" formulas. You can build a basic table that uses only the data you supply, or you can build a table that refers to data already entered in the spreadsheet.

Two-Variable "What-if" Tables

Two-variable what-if tables show the results of varying two values in a "what-if" formula. You can build a basic table that uses only the data you supply, or you can build a table that refers to data already entered in the spreadsheet.

Tip

The easiest way to create what-if tables is using Tools [image] Numeric Tools [image] What-If [image] Expert.

To create a one-variable what-if table

To create a two-variable what-if table


To create a one-variable what-if table
To create a one-variable what-if table,

1	Enter a column of values to substitute in one or more formulas. (This will be the left column of the table.)

2	Enter one or more formulas in the row above the first substitution value, starting in the column to the right. These formulas must refer to a blank cell (the input cell), which can be any cell outside the table.

For example,

3	Click Tools [image] Numeric Tools [image] What-If.

4	Check One Free Variable to indicate the type of table to build.

5	Specify the Data Table cells containing both formulas and substitution values.

6	Specify Input Cell, the blank cell referenced in the formulas.

7	Click Generate. Corel Quattro Pro calculates each formula using the values in the substitution column and fills in the column below each formula with calculated values.

Related Topics

More Info


To create a two-variable what-if table
To create a two-variable what-if table,

1	Create a column of substitution values.

2	In the row above and to the right of the substitution column, enter a second set of substitution values.

3	In the top left cell of the table, enter the formula to be used in calculating table values. It should refer to two blank cells.

4	Click Tools [image] Numeric Tools [image] What-If.

5	Check Two Free Variables to indicate the type of table to build.

6	Specify the Data Table cells, including the formula and both substitution ranges.

7	Specify Column Input Cell and Row Input Cell, the two blank cells referenced in the what-if formula.

8	Click Generate to create a table of what-if values to the right of the substitution column, below the substitution row.

Related Topics

More Info


Goal Seeking with Solve For

Tools [image] Numeric Tools [image] Solve For lets you calculate a formula backward, starting with the result and solving for a variable that produces that result. You just specify the result you want, then indicate which variable Corel Quattro Pro can adjust to reach that result.

To perform goal seeking using Solve For

Related Concepts


To perform goal seeking using Solve For
To perform goal seeking using Solve For,

1	Enter the formula to be solved. It should reference one variable cell.

2	Click Tools [image] Numeric Tools [image] Solve For.

3	Click Formula Cell, and specify the cell containing the formula.

4	Click Target Value, and enter the result you want from the formula, or reference a cell containing the target.

5	Click Variable Cell, and enter the cell Corel Quattro Pro can vary to achieve the result you want.

6	Change the calculation options, if necessary: Max Iterations determines how many passes Solve For can make to solve the formula, and Accuracy specifies how close Solve For must get to the Target Value (the default is 0.0005).

Related Topics

More Info


About Optimizer

The Optimizer helps find optimum solutions for linear and nonlinear problems. You can

evaluate formulas with one or more variables

solve sets of linear and nonlinear equations and inequalities

find a minimum or maximum solution, or meet an exact goal

find values that satisfy limits, or constraints

Once you define a problem, you can save Optimizer settings for future use. You can print reports of interim and final problem solutions.

To solve a problem with Optimizer

To enter an Optimizer constraint

To save an Optimizer model

To re-use an Optimizer model

To produce Optimizer reports


To solve a problem with Optimizer
To solve a problem with Optimizer,

1	Define the problem. You can

maximize or minimize a single formula, or make it meet a target value

solve a set of equations or inequalities

2	Assign a cell to each variable in the problem.

3	If you are solving a single formula, enter it into a cell. The formula should reference any variable cells you have assigned.

4	If you are solving a set of expressions, enter their left terms into cells; you may enter the right term into adjacent cells, or enter the value into the Optimizer directly when adding constraints.

5	Click Tools [image] Numeric Tools [image] Optimizer, or click here [image] for a shortcut.

6	If you have a goal-seeking problem with one formula, enter its location in the Solution Cell input box. Click Max to maximize the formula, Min to minimize it, or None if you are not specifying a solution cell. If you want the solution cell formula to reach an exact value, check Target Value and enter the value in the Target Value edit field.

7	Enter the variable cell or cells in the Variable Cell(s) input box. You can enter them as a selection (A1..A4) or as lists (A1, B1, C1).

8	If you are solving a set of expressions, add them as constraints. You can also enter constraints when goal seeking to set upper and lower limits for the Solution Cell formula.

Tip

For best results, start with reasonable values in the variable cells.

Related Topics

More Info


To enter an Optimizer constraint
To enter an Optimizer constraint,

1	Click Tools [image] Numeric Tools [image] Optimizer [image] Add.

2	In the Cell edit field, enter a cell containing a formula that must be bounded, or that must equal a target value. You can select a single cell, or select cells that must all have the same bound.

3	Select the operator that connects both terms of the constraint and describes their relationship: less than or equal to (<=), equal to (=), greater than or equal to (>=), or Integer (cell must be a whole number).

4	In the Constant edit field, type a value for the target or bound, or specify a cell that contains a value.

You can specify a selection of cells equal to or larger than the number of cells included on the left side of the constraint. Each cell on the left is compared with the corresponding cell on the right. A single cell on the left is compared with the upper left cell of the cells on the right.

Tips

To edit a constraint, select it in the Optimizer dialog box and click Change.

To delete a constraint, select it and click Delete.

Related Topics

More Info


To save an Optimizer model
To save an Optimizer model,

1	Click Tools [image] Numeric Tools [image] Optimizer [image] Options [image] Save Model.

2	Identify cells to hold the model. The cells must be three columns wide with enough rows to hold the model. You can specify the cell in the upper left corner of the cells.

3	For convenience, use Insert [image] Name [image] Cells to name the selection of cells.

Tip

The last Optimizer problem you defined is always saved with the notebook.

Related Topics

More Info


To re-use an Optimizer model
To re-use an Optimizer model,

1	Click Tools [image] Numeric Tools [image] Optimizer [image] Options [image] Load Model.

2	Specify the cells containing the model you want to use.

Related Topics

More Info


To produce Optimizer reports
To produce Optimizer reports,

1	Define the Optimizer problem.

2	Click Tools [image] Numeric Tools [image] Optimizer [image] Options [image] Reporting.

3	Specify blank cells, or just the upper left cell of blank cells where Optimizer can write either or both reports.

4	Click OK twice, then click Solve to generate the report(s).

Related Topics

More Info


Optimizer Answer Report

This report shows how well the constraints were met. It indicates

Starting and final values for the solution cell

Starting and final values for the variable cells

Value, binding, slack, and dual value for the constraints

If Assume Linear is checked in the Optimizer Options dialog box, the Answer Report also indicates

Gradient, Increment, and Decrement for the variable cells

Right Value, Increment, and Decrement for the constraint cells

Binding status, Yes or No, indicates whether the constraint affects the solution; if No, that constraint can be eliminated.

Slack is the difference between the constraint constant value (Right Value) and the value actually used in the solution.

Variable dual values are sometimes called reduced gradients. They show how a one-unit increase in the variable affects the solution cell.

Constraint dual values, or Lagrange Multipliers, measure the amount by which the solution could be improved if the constraint were relaxed by one unit.

Gradient is the coefficient of the objective function for each variable cell.

Right Value is the constant in a constraint expression, the value of the right-most term.

Increment for variable cells is the amount of increase in the Gradient value before a different value is calculated for that variable cell in the solution. For constraint cells, Increment is the amount of increase in the Right Value (constraint value) before the binding status changes.

Decrement for variable cells is the amount of decrease in the Gradient value before a different value is calculated for that variable cell in the solution. For constraint cells, Decrement is the amount of decrease in the Right Value before the binding status changes.


Analysis Experts

Tools [image] Numeric Tools [image] Analysis lets you perform a number of advanced statistical, numerical, and financial analysis tasks.

Before you use an analysis tool, make sure the input cells you are analyzing are arranged properly and contain the right kind of data (that is, numeric data, not strings). The analysis tools have varying restrictions on the contents of the input cells and size of the cell area.

Advanced Regression

The Advanced Regression tool performs linear regression analysis, which shows the relationship between a set of independent variables and a certain dependent variable. In addition to creating a summary output table, the Advanced Regression tool creates output tables for residuals and probability data. Click here [image] for details on simpler regression analysis.

Amortization Schedule

The Amortization Schedule tool creates a table showing the amortization schedule for a mortgage. The table shows principal and interest payments, and interest paid from start to date and from year to date; click here [image] for details on the resulting output table.

ANOVA: One-Way

The ANOVA: One-Way tool performs a single-factor analysis of variance with equal numbers of observations.

ANOVA: Two-Way with Replication

The ANOVA: Two-Way with Replication tool performs a two-factor analysis of variance using more than one sample for each group of data.

ANOVA: Two-Way without Replication

Anova: Two-Way without Replication performs a two-factor analysis of variance using only one sample for each group of data.

Correlation

The Correlation tool computes the correlation coefficient of the numeric values in two or more sets of data. Correlation coefficients range in value from -1.0 to 1.0. A correlation coefficient of zero means that two variables are not correlated. A variable correlated with itself returns a correlation coefficient of 1.0.

Covariance

The Covariance tool returns the covariance matrix of two or more data sets. A positive covariance indicates that as values increase in one data set they increase in another (the sets move together). A negative covariance indicates that as values increase in one data set they decrease in another (the sets move apart). Unrelated data sets have a covariance approaching zero. Covariance, unlike correlation, is scale dependent; related data sets yield different covariances if their scales differ.

Descriptive Statistics

Use the Descriptive Statistics tool to characterize a sample. It computes the mean, variance, median, mode, standard deviation, kurtosis, skewness, range, minimum, and maximum of a distribution.

Exponential Smoothing

The Exponential Smoothing tool, like the Moving Average tool, smoothes out variations in a data series. After using the Moving Average tool to create a set of forecast values, you can use the Exponential Smoothing tool to smooth each forecast value and adjust for error in the prior period.

Fourier

The Fourier tool performs a fast Fourier transformation on cells of data. Fourier transforms are commonly used to solve partial differential equations.

F-Test

The F-test tool compares the population variances of two data sets. If the variances of two data sets are significantly different, you can hypothesize that the samples were drawn from different parent populations.

Histogram

You can use the Histogram tool to view the shape of a sample population's distribution. It calculates the probability and cumulative distributions for a sample population, based on a series of bins you define. Histograms are often used to chart the data in frequency distribution tables.

Mortgage Refinancing

The Mortgage Refinancing tool creates a table of information letting you compare prospective loans with the current mortgage you want to refinance. Click here [image] for details on the resulting output table.

Moving Average

The Moving Average tool generates forecast values by finding the average over a specified number of preceding intervals for each value in a data set. Unlike an average of all the values in the set, the moving average lets you focus on rising and falling trends in the data.

Random Number

The Random Number tool generates random variables from various distributions. You can select one of seven types of distributions.

Rank and Percentile

The Rank and Percentile tool computes the ordinal and percent rank of each value in a sample.

Sampling

The Sampling tool creates a random or periodic sample from a given population of values. Use the Sampling tool to work with a subset of data from a large database. If the population consists of periodic data, you can create a periodic sample to select data from a particular cycle.

t-Test

t-Tests test the hypothesis that means from two small samples are equal. Corel Quattro Pro provides t-Tests for samples with matched pairs, for independent samples with equal variances, and for independent samples with unequal variances.

z-Test

z-Tests test the hypothesis that the means of two large samples (or populations) are equal. The z-Test tool performs a two-sample z-test.

Related Concepts


Amortization Table

The table created by the Amortization Schedule tool consists of two sections. The top section is the input section of the table. Most of the values in the input section correspond to options in the Amortization Schedule dialog box. One additional value, 1st PMT, sets the first payment date for the mortgage. Change any of these input values to customize the bottom section of the table.

When you create the amortization table, you may need to increase the width of columns in the table to display the data. You can use the Fit button [image] in the Notebook toolbar.

The bottom section of the table consists of 10 columns:

Pmt #

Number of payments from 1 to the last payment of the loan or the last one in the last year specified by Last Year.

Date

Date on which the corresponding payment number is due (mortgage payments are typically due on the first day of the month following the month covered by the payment); the default date format is Month-Year (MMM-YY).

Yr Rate

Equivalent yearly interest rate for the period; for fixed rate loans, this rate does not change; for variable rate loans, specify an estimated average interest rate when you create the table, then replace individual monthly rate values later by overwriting the calculated values.

P&I Payment

Shows the principal and interest payment for the corresponding payment period. This will not vary for fixed loans, but would vary with variable interest loans or other variable loans such as graduated payment loans. In the case of "graduated payment" loans, you can type in the actual P&I payment to replace the calculated value. Even if this results in a negative amortization, the new Balance and other columns calculate correctly. (Negative amortization occurs when the P&I payment is insufficient to cover the interest charged for the period, and so the loan balance increases by the shortage amount.)

Principal

Principal portion of the P&I payment.

Interest

Interest portion of the P&I payment.

Extra Prin

Amount of extra principal per pay period. If you intend to pay extra principal for some portion of the loan, enter the amount in this column at the row of the corresponding payment number. The extra principal amount is included in every row that follows. If extra principal payments vary month to month, type in the actual extra principal amount wherever it changes.

New Balance

Balance after each payment. The balance decreases with each payment, and eventually reaches zero (or Ending Balance, if it is not zero). The amortization table stops short of zero if Last Year precedes the end of the loan.

Cum. Interest

Cumulative interest paid through the corresponding payment.

Yearly Total Int

Cumulative interest paid for each calendar year. Use this column to calculate the yearly interest paid for tax purposes.


Mortgage Refinancing Table

The table created by the Mortgage Refinancing tool consists of two sections: Current Loan and Candidate Loans.

In the Current Loan section, Current Balance, Current Rate, and Rem. Term take values from the Mortgage Refinancing dialog box. If you have paid extra principal at any time during the current loan, overwrite the value calculated for Equivalent P&I with the value of your actual monthly principal and interest. Enter a value for Future Value if the mortgage requires a balloon payment. Enter any loan-related fixed monthly fees in the Fixed Mo. Loan Fees cell, such as private mortgage insurance; do not include taxes or hazard insurance fees, which are not loan-related.

The Candidate Loans section of the table consists of 19 columns:

Loan Description

Name of the candidate loan.

Current Balance

Balance of the current loan.

Cash Out

Cash removed from equity (a positive value), or cash paid up front into the loan to pay down balance or to prevent financing or loan fees (a negative value).

Pct Fees

Percentage fees ("points") charged by the lender (for example, 1.75%).

Fixed Fees

Fixed fees involved in the refinancing; if a loss (for example, a loan prepayment penalty), enter a positive value; if a gain (for example, a prorated return of prepaid Private Mortgage Insurance from payoff of current loan), enter a negative number.

Loan Amount

Amount of the candidate loan.

Rate

Annual interest rate of the candidate loan.

Term (yrs)

Loan term in years.

Future Value

Future value of the candidate loan; enter a positive value if the loan requires a balloon payment.

P&I Payment

Principal and interest payment for each period.

Fixed Mo. Loan Fees

Fixed monthly loan fees (such as private mortgage insurance).

Loan Pmt

Monthly payment (Loan Pmt = P&I Payment + Fixed Mo. Loan Fees).

Savings: Gross

The difference in the monthly payment of the candidate loan and the current loan; if negative, the candidate's monthly payment is higher; if positive, the candidate's monthly payment is lower and all gross savings are applied as extra principal.

Term +/-

Portion of gross savings due to lengthening the term of the loan; if the term is lengthened, Term +/- is negative; if the term is shortened, Term +/- is positive.

Cash I/O

Portion of gross savings due to closing costs paid up front (a negative number), or the amount of gross savings that has already been reduced by cash taken out (a positive number enclosed by "><", which does not affect the Net amount).

Net

Sum of savings from Gross, Term +/-, and Cash I/O.

Payback (Years): When

The initial estimate of the number of years it will take for the candidate loan to pay for the cost of refinancing; displays "Never" if the refinance loses money.

Loan Life

The number of years you plan to keep the property before selling it or refinancing.

Bal chg

The difference in the balance at the end of Loan Life of the candidate loan and the current loan due to extra principal paid on the candidate loan; a negative number represents money saved.

After you create the table, enter values for the candidate loan such as Loan Description, Cash Out (if you removed cash from equity or paid additional principal), Pct Fees (points for the candidate loan), Fixed Fees, Rate, Term, Future Value, Fixed Monthly Loan Fees, and Loan Life. All other values in the table are calculated.

Tip

To ensure accurate calculation of the percentage fees and loan amount for the candidate loan, increase the number of recalculation iterations for the notebook from 1 to 5. Click Format [image] Notebook [image] Recalc Settings.

In the Payback section of the table, enter a number of years for Loan Life to indicate how long you plan to keep the candidate loan before selling or refinancing. Payback occurs when the balance of the candidate loan would be equal to that of the current loan, that is, when Bal Chg equals zero; for equal comparison of the loans, any cash put into the candidate loan is alternatively considered a lump sum extra principal on the current loan. You can accurately determine the payback period by trying alternate estimates in the Loan Life column until Bal Chg is near zero. (Bal Chg is a negative number when Loan Life is greater than the payback period.)

To compare several candidate loans with the current loan, copy the row for the first candidate loan into one or more rows below it, then enter information for each loan.

Gross savings indicates how much lower the monthly payment is for the candidate loan compared to the current loan; all gross savings are applied as extra principal. Net savings indicates money saved. It is possible for a candidate loan to have a lower monthly payment but still not save money. For example, a candidate loan can have a lower monthly payment simply by lengthening the loan term, but this does not result in net savings.

In general, there are three ways to handle the savings that result from refinancing:

1	Use the savings to pay extra principal for the life of the candidate loan.

2	Use some of the savings to pay extra principal on the candidate loan.

3	Keep the savings and pay no extra principal on the candidate loan.

By default, the Mortgage Refinancing tool uses the first method. The Net savings cell shows the savings for each payment period that is applied as extra principal. To use some of the savings to pay extra principal, reduce the amount in the Gross Savings cell (overwrite the formula). For example, if the Gross savings cell shows a value of $125, enter $100 to use $100 of the savings to pay extra principal each month (the monthly payment of the candidate loan is still $25 lower than the current loan payment). To keep the savings and pay no extra principal, enter zero in the Net savings cell (overwrite the formula).

When you create a table using the Mortgage Refinancing tool, you may need to increase the width of columns in the table to display the data. You can use the QuickFit button [image] in the Notebook toolbar.


Using Array Features

Corel Quattro Pro has a special @function and other features to help you use data arrays, selections of data you work with as a group.

Working with arrays can save time and memory when you enter formulas repetitively, but be aware that using arrays can lengthen recalculation times.

The following topics explain the use of arrays in formulas and with @ARRAY:

Array Formulas

Block Arrays

Array Constants

Arrays as @Function and Macro Arguments


Array Formulas

Array B2..D3 in the next figure contains data in three columns and two rows that can be worked with independently, not just as a whole block.

A	B	C	D

1

2	 3	 5	 7

3	 9	11	13

4	12	16	20

There are two ways you can get column totals for this array. You can enter @SUM(B2..B3) in B4, then copy it to C4 and D4. Or, you can select B4 and type this formula in the input line: +B2..D2+B3..D3.

When you enter the formula, Corel Quattro Pro recognizes you are specifying arrays and converts the formula to an @function, @ARRAY. You can type @ARRAY and its arguments directly, if you prefer.

The formula in B4, @ARRAY(B2..D2+B3..D3), contains the same information as three @SUM formulas. It tells Corel Quattro Pro to add the values in each column of the array and show the results in the formula cell and the two cells to its right.

Because this formula contains arrays instead of single values, it is called an array formula. The results of an array formula appear in a block of cells, called the output block or output array. The number of columns and rows in the output block depend on the dimensions of the arrays in the array formula. The following sections tell more about the output array and how to limit its size.

The following mathematical and logical operators determine how one value relates to a second: +, -, *, /, ^, =, <>, <=, >=, <, >, #AND#, #OR#, and &. Either or both values can be a block array or array constant.

Related Concepts


Block Arrays

Block arrays are arrays given as variables, block references instead of exact values. To use block arrays in formulas, enter a block and another block or value separated by a mathematical or logical operator. The operator indicates the operation to perform on matching cells of each block or the relationship between them. For example, - (minus) means "subtract each cell of the second block from the equivalent cell of the first block." You need to enter only the first block (preceded by a +), the operator, and the second block. Corel Quattro Pro adds the @ARRAY @function and parentheses. Block arrays can be contiguous or noncontiguous, but they must be 2-D.

When you are working with rows, array results appear in the @ARRAY formula cell. For columns, the results appear beside the @ARRAY formula cell. You can mix columns and rows. You can enter more than two row or column blocks and use multiple operators.

As with other formulas, calculations are performed according to operator precedence: multiplication and division first, then addition and subtraction. For example, the following formula means "multiply C2 by D2 and add B2, multiply C3 by D3 and add B3, then multiply C4 by D4 and add B4:"

@ARRAY(B2..B4+C2..C4*D2..D4)

To change the calculation order, use parentheses.

You can use cell names instead of references to specify arrays. If the cell name is redefined to cover a different block of cells, then all @ARRAY formulas that reference it will automatically change.

Related Concepts


Array Constants

Arrays can be block references, but they can also be array constants--series of exact values separated by row and column delimiters and enclosed in braces {}. Numbers in the same row are separated by semicolons or the argument separator specified Tools [image] Settings [image] International [image]  Punctuation . Rows are separated by the pipe symbol (|), Shift+\. For example, the values in the next figure are indicated by this array constant: {1;2;3;4|5;6;7;8|9;10;11;12}.

 1	 2	 3	 4

 5	 6	 7	 8

 9	10	11	12

This array constant specifies values in the second row of the previous figure: {5;6;7;8}. This array constant specifies values in the third column: {3|7|11}.

Array constants can be used together in formulas or mixed with blocks.

Related Concepts


Arrays as @Function and Macro Arguments

You can use block arrays and array constants as arguments for other @functions besides @ARRAY. Virtually any @function that accepts block arguments can handle array operations, although different types of @functions handle them differently.

@SUM, @AVG, and other statistical @functions always return a single value, no matter how large an array you specify. For example, @SUM(C4..C8*D4..D8) means "multiply each value in C4..C8 by the equivalent value in D4..D8 and add the results."

The database @functions, such as @DSUM, take three arguments: a database block, the column to operate on, and a search criteria block. The first and third arguments must be blocks, not array constants. The second argument can be an array; the @function is calculated once for each value in the array.

@ABS, @SQRT and many other @functions normally take one argument which is a single value or an expression which results in a single value, not a block. If you enter a block or array constant for these @functions, Corel Quattro Pro converts the @function statement into an argument for @ARRAY and provides a value for each row or column of the array.

Using arrays as arguments for index, lookup, and related @functions can be convenient when writing and debugging macros. For example, @ARRAY(@CELLPOINTER(A1..A16) returns a whole column of information about E1 when you select that cell and press F9 to recalculate; cells A1 through 16 contain @CELLPOINTER target attributes. While the previous formula refers to an attribute list in the notebook, you can also enter attributes as an array constant; for example, {"contents";"type";"prefix"}.

Related Concepts


Displaying Chart Properties

Click a chart.

Right-click the part of the chart you want to change, then click the Properties option. Or, click the chart element, then click Format [image] Selected Object.

The best way to change properties from the dialog is to click a tab, change settings, click another tab, change settings, and so on. When you have made all the modifications you want, click OK to apply all the changes simultaneously. To help you track changes, Corel Quattro Pro highlights the property name on the tab in blue whenever you alter an option setting.


To change chart object properties
To change chart object properties,

1	Click a chart on a notebook sheet, or right-click on the notebook sheet and click Edit Chart.

2	Right-click the part you want to change, then click the Properties option.

More Info


To change properties of a chart on a notebook sheet
To change properties of a chart on a notebook sheet,

1	Right-click a chart on a notebook sheet, then click Chart Properties.

2	Set Source Chart, Border Color, Box Type, Protection, and Object Name properties.

Source Chart determines which chart is displayed.

Border Color and Box Type set the appearance of the border of the chart.

Protection works in tandem with the sheet Protection property. You can protect charts from being changed.

Object Name specifies a name for the chart that can be used with macros.

Related Topics


To change chart window properties
To change chart window properties,

1	Click a chart on a notebook sheet, right-click on the border (the slash lines), then click Chart Window Properties.

2	Set Aspect Ratio and Grid properties.

Aspect Ratio affects the proportion of width to height in a chart.

Grid lets you display a grid to help you draw, size, and position chart objects.

Tip

To change properties for a chart on its own page, right-click on the notebook sheet, click Edit Chart, then select the chart. Right-click the chart title bar. If the chart window is maximized, right-click the area outside the chart border.

Related Topics


To change chart legend properties
To change chart legend properties,

1	Click a chart on a notebook sheet, or right-click a blank area of the notebook and click Edit Chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Legend.

Tips

You can also click a chart, then right-click the legend text to change legend properties.

Once you display a legend, you can drag it to any position.

The legend position cannot be moved for some 3-D charts (for example, 3-D bar charts).

Related Topics


To change 3-D options
To change 3-D options,

1	Click a 3-D chart on a notebook sheet, or right-click on the notebook sheet and click Edit Chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Perspective.

3	Click the 3-D View tab.

4	Adjust an option by moving the slider for any of these options: Rotation, Elevation, Perspective, Depth, and Height. The sample chart reflects changes as you make them.

5	When you are satisfied with your changes, click Apply.

6	Click the 3-D Options tab.

7	Click one or more of the four check box options to show or hide 3-D walls. To turn the option off, deselect it.

Tips

To hide the wall, but display the grid lines, leave the wall display on (checked). Right-click the wall on the chart, click the Properties option, click the Fill Settings tab, then select None for Fill Style. Click OK. Grid lines on the walls of 3-D charts are part of the y-axis; grid lines on the base are part of the x-axis.

Related Topics


About Changing Chart Background Appearance

The chart background is the area behind the title, the legend, the chart itself, and any drawing elements you added. The Chart Background has three properties that control the appearance of the chart background:

Box Settings sets the border color and the style of box that encloses the chart background.

Fill Settings assigns a fill color, background color, and fill style to the background.

Chart Button lets you control slide shows. You can assign a macro or show a different chart when the user clicks on an area outside of defined text-box chart buttons.

To change chart background appearance

Related Concepts


To change chart background appearance
To change chart background appearance,

1	Click a chart on a notebook sheet, or right-click on the notebook sheet and click Edit Chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Background.

3	Set the Fill Settings, Box Settings, and Chart Button properties.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Related Topics

More Info


To change chart pane properties
To change chart pane properties,

1	Click a chart on a notebook sheet, or right-click on the notebook sheet and click Edit Chart.

2	Right-click the area bordered by the x- and y-axes in a 2-D chart (a bar chart, for example).

3	Click the Properties option.

4	Set Border Position, Fill Settings, and Border Settings properties.

Border Position sets whether a border line appears on the left, right, top, and bottom of the pane. It also sets whether a grid appears on top of the chart.

Fill Settings sets the foreground and background color of the pane, and the type of fill style used.

Border Settings sets the color and thickness of the border line.

Related Topics


Axis Properties Overview

All charts except pie, column, and text charts have two references for plotting data, the x-axis and the y-axis. The x-axis is the horizontal line that forms the bottom border of the chart pane. This axis usually has fixed points of reference that are often associated with time.

The y-axis is the vertical line on the left side of the chart. It contains a scale, or range of numbers against which a series is plotted. When you create a chart, Corel Quattro Pro automatically scales the y-axis to include the highest and lowest values in all the series.

There are a few exceptions to this format:

Rotated charts have a vertical x-axis and a horizontal y-axis. Corel Quattro Pro reverses the axes of rotated charts automatically.

In XY charts (scatter diagrams), the x-axis series is data, not labels. Corel Quattro Pro gives the x-axis a scale to match the data. When you right-click the x-axis of an XY chart and click the Properties option, the properties match the y-axis properties.

If the chart is a 2-D bar, line, or area chart, you can assign any series to a secondary y-axis, which then appears on the right side of the chart.

Related Concepts


Changing X-Axis Properties

To display properties, click a chart (or right-click on the notebook sheet and click Edit Chart). Then right-click the x-axis of most bar, line, and area charts and click the Properties option.

To select the axis label series

To change the tick style

To prevent x-axis labels from overlapping

To change Major Grid Style options

Related Concepts


To select the axis label series
To select the axis label series,

1	Enter axis labels in a notebook sheet, if suitable cells of labels do not already exist.

2	Click a chart on a notebook sheet, or right-click on the notebook sheet and click Edit Chart.

3	Click Chart [image] Axes [image] X-Axis.

4	Click the X-Axis Series tab.

5	Click [image] to the right of the Select Range edit field, then select the axis label cells on the notebook sheet.

6	Press Enter.

Tip

If your labels are not in a continuous row or column, hold down the Ctrl key as you select each cell or selection of cells.

Related Topics

More Info


About Tick Style

Tick marks are the short vertical lines that separate the major divisions of the x-axis. The Tick Style option controls the display and placement of tick marks and axis labels.

There are four tick styles:  None, Below, Above, and Across.

The y-axis also has a Tick Style option. The four tick styles for the y-axis are None, Left, Right, and Across.

To change the tick style

Related Concepts


To change the tick style
To change the tick style,

1	Click a chart on a notebook sheet, or right-click on the notebook sheet and click Edit Chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Axes [image] X-Axis.

3	Click the Tick Options tab.

4	Click a tick style, then click OK.

The y-axis also has a Tick Style option. The four tick styles for the y-axis are None, Left, Right, and Across.

Related Topics

More Info


To prevent x-axis labels from overlapping
To prevent x-axis labels from overlapping,

1	Click a chart on a notebook sheet, or right-click on the notebook sheet and click Edit Chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Axes [image] X-Axis.

3	Click the Tick Options tab.

4	Use one of these options to adjust label display:

Display Labels toggles label display off and on. To turn label display off, uncheck this option; to turn them on, check it again.

Number Of Rows places the labels in a single row, or in two or three staggered rows.

No Overlapping Labels eliminates some of the labels when label text would otherwise overlap. The default setting is on (checked). Uncheck this option to activate Skip n Labels.

Skip n Labels lets you choose the number of labels to eliminate, to prevent overlap. For example, if you skip two labels, the first label in the x-axis series is displayed, the second and third labels are skipped, the fourth label is displayed, the fifth and sixth labels are skipped, and so on. To specify the number of labels to skip, uncheck No Overlapping Labels, then type a number in the edit field or click the up and down arrows.

Length Limit lets you specify the maximum number of characters displayed in a label. Any additional characters will not appear in the label. To set a length limit, check this option, then enter the number of characters in the edit field that appears (or use the arrows to the right of the edit field to adjust the limit).

Related Topics

More Info


To change Major Grid Style options
To change Major Grid Style options,

1	Click a chart on a notebook sheet, or right-click on the notebook sheet and click Edit Chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Axes [image] X-Axis.

3	Click the Major Grid Style tab.

4	Click Line Style.

5	Choose a line style. (The choice in the upper left corner turns grid lines off.)

6	Click Color.

7	Select a line color from the palette, or use the color scales to create your own.

Related Topics

More Info


Changing Y-Axis Properties

To change y-axis properties, click a chart or right-click on the notebook sheet and click Edit Chart. Then right-click the y-axis of a standard chart and click the Properties option.

To change the y-axis scale

To change the zero line value for the y-axis

To show units in the y-axis labels

To use a logarithmic scale for the y-axis

To change the numeric format for the y-axis scale

To change a major or minor grid line style

Related Concepts


About Y-Axis Scale

Corel Quattro Pro automatically adjusts the y-axis scale to fit the range of values plotted against it. You can change the High, Low, Increment, and No. (number) of Minors values to fine-tune the chart or to zoom in on a specific area.

High sets the highest value displayed on the scale. (If you set this lower than a value in a data series, the plot for the value will appear to run off the top of the chart.)

Low sets the lowest value displayed on the scale. (If you set this higher than a value in a data series, the plot for the value will appear to run off the bottom of the chart.)

Increment determines the numeric "distance" between major y-axis divisions. Y-axis labels, major tick marks, and major grid lines are placed at these divisions.

No. of Minors specifies the number of evenly-spaced minor tick marks and/or minor grid lines between the major y-axis divisions.

To change the y-axis scale

Related Topics


To change the y-axis scale
To change the y-axis scale,

1	Click a chart on a notebook sheet, or right-click on the notebook sheet and click Edit Chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Axes [image] Primary Y-Axis.

3	Click the Scale tab.

4	Select the number in the High edit field, then type the highest number you want to appear on the axis. The new setting overwrites the old. Notice that Automatic is no longer selected.

5	Select the number in the Low edit field, then type the lowest number you want to appear on the axis.

6	Select the number in the Increment edit field, then enter the scale distance between major tick marks. Enter a zero if you want Corel Quattro Pro to calculate an increment using the new High and Low settings.

7	Select the entry in the No. of Minors field, then type over it to enter the number of minor tick marks to place between major tick marks.

Tip

To set a descending axis scale, reverse the high and low values. To reset the scale back to its default setting, check Automatic.

Related Topics

More Info


About Setting a Zero Line

Zero Line appears as a Scale option when you right-click the y-axis of a variance chart and click the Properties option. The zero line provides the frame of reference for the "variance" that gives this chart type its name. Values less than the zero line setting project below the line; higher values extend above the line. The zero line can be set, for example, to show how temperatures vary from the freezing point on the Fahrenheit scale.

To change the zero line value for the y-axis

Related Concepts


To change the zero line value for the y-axis
To change the zero line value for the y-axis,

1	Click a chart on a notebook sheet, or right-click on the notebook sheet and click Edit Chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Axes [image] Primary Y-Axis.

3	Click the Scale tab.

4	Enter a value for Zero Line At no greater than the High scale setting, and no less than the Low scale setting.

Tip

The Zero Line At option appears as a Scale option only for Variance graphs.

Related Topics

More Info


To show units in the y-axis labels
To show units in the y-axis labels,

1	Click a chart on a notebook sheet, or right-click on the notebook sheet and click Edit Chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Axes [image] Primary Y-Axis.

3	Click the Scale tab.

4	Click Show Units. (To turn this feature off again, deselect it.)

To change the font, color, or other properties of the Show Units title, right-click it and click the Properties option.

Related Topics

More Info


To use a logarithmic scale for the y-axis
To use a logarithmic scale for the y-axis,

1	Click a chart on a notebook sheet, or right-click on the notebook sheet and click Edit Chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Axes [image] Primary Y-Axis.

3	Click the Scale tab.

4	Under Scale Type, click Log.

Related Topics

More Info


To change the numeric format for the y-axis scale
To change the numeric format for the y-axis scale,

1	Click a chart on a notebook sheet, or right-click on the notebook sheet and click Edit Chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Axes [image] Primary Y-Axis.

3	Click the Numeric Format tab.

4	Select a format option.

For help on an option, click [image], then click the option.

Related Topics

More Info


To change a major or minor grid line style
To change a major or minor grid line style,

1	Click a chart on a notebook sheet, or right-click on the notebook sheet and click Edit Chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Axes [image] Primary Y-Axis.

3	Click the Major Grid Style or Minor Grid Style tab.

4	Click Line Style.

5	Choose a line style. (The choice in the upper left corner turns grid lines off.)

6	Click Color.

7	Select a line color from the palette, or use the color scales to create your own.

Tip

If major grid lines are too close together, click the Scale tab and increase the increment; if the lines are too far apart, decrease the increment. To change the number of grid lines between labels, increase or decrease the No. of Minors.

Related Topics

More Info


Fill and Border Properties

A solid object has two areas, an interior and a border. The appearance of the interior is determined by the way Fill Settings properties are set. Border Settings control the appearance of the perimeter of the object.

Fill Settings makes the box transparent (None), or fills it with a solid color, a two-color pattern, a wash, or an imported bitmap graphic. If the fill style is a pattern, the Pattern Color is the color of the pattern. If the fill style is a wash, the Start Color is distributed over the End Color.

Border Settings sets the color of the frame or box around the object and the style or thickness of the frame around the object.

Box Settings sets the color of the box around the object, and the look of the box. The 12 box choices range from "no frame" to several 3-D styles.

Note: In order to print text that has a Wash fill on some laser printers, you may have to select the Print Truetype fonts as graphics option. To set the option, click File [image] Print [image] Details [image] Properties [image] Fonts.

To select fill settings for an object

To select a new box type or border style

To fill an object with an imported bitmap

To make an object transparent


To select fill settings for an object
To select fill settings for an object,

1	Click a chart on a notebook sheet, or right-click on the notebook sheet and click Edit Chart.

2	Right-click the object and  click the Properties option.

3	Click the Fill Settings tab.

4	Choose a fill style:

None makes the object transparent.

Solid makes the object one solid color.

Pattern gives you a choice of 24 two-color patterns. The color of the pattern is the Foreground Color; the background behind the pattern is the Background Color.

Wash gives you a choice of 6 two-color wash styles. In a wash, the first color is distributed over the second color.

Bitmap lets you fill the object with an imported bitmapped graphic.

5	Choose the foreground color and background color.

Related Topics

More Info


To select a new box type or border style
To select a new box type or border style,

1	Click a chart on a notebook sheet, or right-click on the notebook sheet and click Edit Chart.

2	Right-click the object and click the Properties option.

3	Click either the Border Settings tab or the Box Settings tab.

If the object has a Box Settings tab, you will see 12 box styles, including transparent (the upper left choice), thick-sided boxes, round-cornered boxes, and 3-D styles.

If the object has a Border Settings tab, you will see 9 options, including transparent (the upper left choice), dashed and dotted line styles, and solid line styles of various thickness.

4	Choose a border color.

5	Click a style.

Related Topics

More Info


To fill an object with an imported bitmap
To fill an object with an imported bitmap,

1	Click a chart on a notebook sheet, or right-click on the notebook sheet and click Edit Chart.

2	Right-click the object and click the Properties option.

3	Click the Fill Settings tab.

4	Select Bitmap for the fill style.

5	Select Crop To Fit to crop the drawing (cut out all pieces that do not fit), Tile To Fit to fill adjacent blocks of the object with the same bitmap, Shrink To Fit to shrink or enlarge the drawing to fit it within the object, or 3-D Perspective (for 3-D chart walls only) to adjust a bitmap to simulate the depth of a 3-D wall. For help about an option, click [image], then click the option.

6	Type the path and name of a bitmap file in the File Name edit field, or click Browse to search for and select a bitmap file. You can select a file with any of these formats: .BMP, .GIF, .JPG, .PCX, .TIF.

Related Topics

More Info


To make an object transparent
To make an object transparent,

1	Click a chart on a notebook sheet, or right-click on the notebook sheet and click Edit Chart.

2	Right-click the object and click the Properties option.

3	Click the Fill Settings tab.

4	Select None.

5	Click the Box Settings or Border Settings tab (the object will have only one of these properties).

6	Click the upper left (blank) selection.

Related Topics

More Info


Chart Series Options

By customizing series options you can

select or change the data to plot

place labels over bars in bar charts, and over data points in line and area charts

enter legend text or the coordinates where legend text is located

create a combination chart

plot the series against a secondary y-axis

To change chart series options

To change the data series of a chart

To override a legend label

To change the label series of a chart

To create a custom combination chart

To create a multiple line or area chart

Related Concepts


To change chart series options
To change chart series options,

1	Click a chart on a notebook sheet, or right-click on the notebook sheet and click Edit Chart.

2	Then use any of these procedures:

Right-click the bar, line, or area that plots the series and click the Properties option.

Right-click the marker that represents the series in the legend box and click the Properties option.

Related Topics

More Info


To change the data series of a chart
To change the data series of a chart,

1	Click a chart on a notebook sheet, or right-click on the notebook sheet and click Edit Chart.

2	Right-click a chart series marker and click the Properties option.

3	The coordinates of the series appear in the Data Series field. Click the Point Mode button [image] or double-click the edit field. The dialog box and chart move behind the notebook.

4	Point to the cells on the notebook sheet that contain data and press Enter.

Tip

Be sure to enter cells that have exactly the same number of cells as the other series in the chart.

Related Topics

More Info


To change the label series of a chart
To change the label series of a chart,

1	Click a chart on a notebook sheet, or right-click on the notebook sheet and click Edit Chart.

2	Right-click a label and click the Properties option.

3	The coordinates of the label series appear in the Label Series field. Click the Point Mode button [image] or double-click the edit field. The dialog box and chart move behind the notebook.

4	Point to the cells on the notebook sheet that contain data and press Enter.

Related Topics

More Info


To override a legend label
To override a legend label,

1	Click a chart on a notebook sheet, or right-click on the notebook sheet and click Edit Chart.

2	Right-click a chart series marker and click the Properties option.

3	Type the label text or enter the label's cell address preceded by a slash (\A:E5, for example) in the Legend field.

Tips

Legend labels appear in the legend box of 2-D charts (except pie and column charts), and in some 3-D charts. In most 3-D charts, legend labels appear along the z-axis. In multiple charts, legend labels appear as "titles" of the sub-charts that represent each series.

To change the font, style, and color of legend text, right-click the legend text in the chart, then click Legend Properties.

Related Topics

More Info


To create a custom combination chart
To create a custom combination chart,

1	Click a chart on a notebook sheet, or right-click on the notebook sheet and click Edit Chart.

2	Right-click a chart series marker and click the Properties option.

3	Click the Series Options tab.

4	In the Override Type box, click Bar, Line, or Area to specify how you want the series to be plotted. To return the series to the original chart type, click Default.

Tip

You can override a series on 2-D bar, line, variance, and high-low charts, and on rotated bar and line charts. (High-low charts restrict the override to the fifth series or greater.)

Related Topics

More Info


To create a multiple line or area chart
To create a multiple line or area chart,

1	Click a chart on a notebook sheet, or right-click on the notebook sheet and click Edit Chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Type/Layout.

3	For Category, choose Bar.

4	Click the Multiple Bar chart type (the bottom right icon), then click OK.

5	Right-click a chart series marker and click the Properties option.

6	Click the Series Options tab.

7	In the Override Type box, click Line for a multiple line chart or click Area for a multiple area chart.

Related Topics

More Info


About Plotting Series on the Secondary Y-Axis

You can plot a series in 2-D bar, line, variance, and high-low charts on a secondary y-axis. (High-low charts restrict this feature to the fifth series or greater.) You may want to do this, for example, when the values in one series are much larger or smaller than those in other series. When there is a wide variation between series, the y-axis scale range may be so large that some series are barely visible above the x-axis. If you plot the series that is very different on the secondary y-axis, the primary y-axis adjusts to accommodate the other series.

You can also use this feature when the data is based on a different kind of scale. For example, in a high-low (open-close) volume chart, you can plot share prices on the primary y-axis, and the volume (number of stocks traded) on the secondary y-axis.

The secondary y-axis has the same properties as the primary y-axis.

To plot series on the secondary y-axis


To plot series on the secondary y-axis
To plot series on the secondary y-axis,

1	Click a chart on a notebook sheet, or right-click on the notebook sheet and click Edit Chart.

2	Right-click a chart series marker and click the Properties option.

3	Click the Series Options tab.

4	Click the Secondary setting under Y-Axis.

Tip

The secondary y-axis has the same properties as the primary y-axis.

Corel Quattro Pro scales the secondary y-axis to accommodate the highest and lowest values in the series

Related Topics

More Info


Customizing Different Types of Charts

To customize the series of a particular type of chart, right-click a bar, line, or area of the chart you want to change, then click the Properties option.

Bar Charts

Bar Series properties change the appearance of bar charts. You can change series options, adjust the width, spacing, and overlap of all bars in the chart, and change the style attributes of bars in an individual series.

Line Charts

You can customize each line in a line chart.

Area and Surface Charts

Area Series properties change the appearance of area, surface, shaded surface, and contour charts.

Pie and Doughnut Charts

Pie and doughnut charts plot a single series. Each value in the series is a "slice" of the pie or doughnut, and is usually expressed as a percentage of the whole.

Column Charts

Column charts plot a single series, and represent each value in the series as a section of the column.

Related Concepts


Customizing High-Low Charts

High-low charts illustrate the difference between corresponding values in two or more series. Though most often used in tracking daily stock prices, high-low charts can be used whenever you want to compare the difference between pairs of values. To change the appearance of a high-low chart, right-click a high-low marker and click the Properties option.

High-low charts have one property that is unique: the Hi-Lo Bar Style. This property determines how high and low values are represented. There are four styles:

Bar	Gives you a "bar and whisker" (or "candle") chart. A line connects high and low values. A bar spans the open and close values. When the close value is higher than the open, the bar is white. When the open value is higher than the close, the bar is red. (Retain this light/dark relationship if you change fill colors.)

I-Beam	Displays high and low values at each end of an I-beam. Open and close are represented by left and right tick marks, respectively.

Line	Connects corresponding high and low values with a line, and shows open and close values as left and right tick marks.

Marker	Assigns different-colored markers to high, low, open, and close values, and connects each set of corresponding values with a line.

To change the style of a high-low chart

To change the marker style for a high-low chart

Related Concepts


To change the style of a high-low chart
To change the style of a high-low chart,

1	Click a chart on a notebook sheet, or right-click on the notebook sheet and click Edit Chart.

2	Right-click any high-low marker and click the Properties option (this property is global, so you do not have to select a specific series).

3	Click the Hi-Lo Bar Style tab.

4	Select a bar style.

Related Topics

More Info


To change the marker style for a high-low chart
To change the marker style for a high-low chart,

1	Click a chart on a notebook sheet, or right-click on the notebook sheet and click Edit Chart.

2	Change the high-low chart type to line.

3	Right-click a series and click the Properties option.

4	Change the marker style, weight, and appearance.

5	Repeat this procedure for all the other series.

6	When you are finished, change the chart type back to High-Low.

More Info


Customizing Bullet Charts

To customize a bullet chart, right-click a bulleted item and click the Properties option.

When you change the properties for a bullet series, the properties for all bulleted items in that series change. You can change the bullet style, fonts, and colors used for all major or all minor bullets at once.

To change the title, subtitle, or text for bulleted items in a bullet chart, edit the data in the notebook cells used to create the bullet chart.

To identify the source cells for a bullet chart, open the bullet chart (right-click on the notebook sheet and click Edit Chart), then click Chart [image] Series. The source cells for the bullet chart are listed in the 1st Series edit field.

Related Concepts


Changing Chart Title and Subtitle Properties

The chart title and subtitle are enclosed in a single text box. When you create a title, you do not see the text box because its fill style and box type are set to None by default. Click either the title or subtitle to display the handles that mark the boundary of the title/subtitle text box.

The title and subtitle have different properties. Click either the title or subtitle to change the mouse pointer to an I-beam, then right-click and click the Properties option to reach title or subtitle properties, depending on which line the pointer is over.

Tip

The chart title's Alignment property also sets alignment for the subtitle.

Related Concepts


What Is a Database?

A database is a collection of data records, for example:

An address book or phonebook (each business or person is one record)

A checkbook (each bank transaction is a record)

A notepad (each sheet is a record)

Each record breaks down into pieces of data called fields. A phonebook entry (record) consists of three fields: name, address, and phone number. Each field has a unique name, as shown in the table below:

Some Database Examples

Database	No. of Fields	Field Names
Phonebook	3	Name, Address, Phone Number
Address book	5	Name, Address, City, State, Postal Code
Checkbook	5	Check Number, Description, Credit, Debit, Balance
Notepad	1	Sheet

In Corel Quattro Pro for Windows databases, each row is a record and each column is a field. You can use Tools [image] Data Tools [image] Cross Tabs to create more elaborate cross tabs reports from a basic database.

Related Concepts


About Setting Up a Database

Once you know what kind of data to include in your database, it is fairly easy to set up. The cells containing the field names and data are called the database cells. To speed data searches, you will need space for a criteria table, which indicates the data you are searching for. You will also need output cells to hold the results of data searches.

These topics describe how to set up each part of a database:

To set up a Corel Quattro Pro database

The Database Cells

The Criteria Table

The Output Cells

Related Concepts


To set up a Quattro Pro database
To set up a Corel Quattro Pro database,

1	Plan the fields and data you want to include in your database.

2	Enter the field names of the database in the first row of the database cells.

3	Enter the data in rows beneath the field name row.

4	To search for data in the database cells, create a criteria table specifying the fields to search and the data to search for in those fields.

Tips

The database cells must be contiguous and confined to one notebook sheet.

The criteria table must be contiguous and confined to one notebook sheet. However, it does not have to be on the same sheet as the database cells.

Related Topics

More Info


The Database Cells

The database cells hold a Corel Quattro Pro database, including field names and data records. Follow these rules:

The database area must be rectangular, although it can contain any number of blank cells.

The database cells must be contiguous and all on one sheet.

Enter the field names in the top row of the database cells, one name per column (each column of the database cells is a field). Field names must be labels (text), less than 16 characters long, with no blank spaces at the beginning or end.

Make sure field names are different from each other. They should also be different from any cell names you are using.

Each row of the database cells beneath the field names is a record. Enter the first row of data directly below the field names without inserting a blank line or a row of decorative symbols.

Use the same type of data throughout each column. In other words, do not mix labels and numeric data in the same column.

Related Concepts


The Criteria Table

A criteria table consists of a row of field names, which must match one or more fields in the database cells and one or more rows of search criteria, either values or logical formulas:

Criteria in the same row indicate an AND query. Data must match all criteria.

Criteria in different rows indicate an OR query. Data can match criteria in one or more rows, but not necessarily all rows.

Criteria tables can combine AND and OR queries.

To create a criteria table

Related Concepts


To create a criteria table
To create a criteria table,

1	In the first row of the table, copy the names of the fields you want to search through.

2	Underneath the appropriate field name(s), enter the data you want to search for. To search for an exact match, enter the value exactly as it appears in the database. To enter a condition, use a search formula.

AND and OR query example

AND query example

OR query example

Using search formulas in a criteria table

Using wildcards in search criteria

Tips

If you want more than one criterion met by each record, enter them all in the same row, under the appropriate field names.

To search for records that meet any of the given criteria, use a separate row for each criterion.

Related Topics

More Info


AND Query Example

Criteria in the same row indicate an AND query. Data must match all criteria.

AND Query Table

LAST_NAME	FIRST_NAME

Lyter	Kelly

Only records with LAST_NAME as Lyter and FIRST_NAME as Kelly match these criteria.

Related Concepts


OR Query Example

Criteria in different rows indicate an OR query. Data can match criteria in one or more rows, but not necessarily all rows.

OR Query Table

LAST_NAME	FIRST_NAME

Lyter

Barbara

Any record with LAST_NAME as Lyter or FIRST_NAME as Barbara matches these criteria. Records for Kelly Lyter, Barbara Lyter, and Barbara Wong all match these criteria.

Related Concepts


AND and OR Query Example

Criteria tables can combine AND and OR queries.

AND and OR Query Table

LAST_NAME	FIRST_NAME

Lyter	Kelly

Barbara

Records for Kelly Lyter and anyone with FIRST_NAME as Barbara match these criteria. These records match the criteria: Kelly Lyter, Barbara Lyter, and Barbara Wong. These records are not matches: Steve Lyter, Kelly O'Toole.

Related Concepts


Using search formulas in a criteria table
Using Search Formulas in Criteria Tables

You can use any of these operators and symbols in formulas:

= equals	<> not equal

< less than	> greater than

<= less than or equal

>= greater than or equal

#AND# both expressions must be true

#OR# either the first or the second expressions may be true

#NOT# the first expression is true, the second is false

Search formulas can use cell names to represent fields. Use Tools [image] Data Tools [image] Notebook Query [image] Field Names to generate cell names that refer to the first record in the database. If you do not use the Field Names feature, specify the cell address of the field in the first record (second row) of the database cells.

When you use field names or named cells on the left side of a search formula, the name MUST be relative. Indicate a relative cell name by preceding it with a tilde (~). For example, +~WAGE>25 is a valid search crtieria. (Typing +WAGE>25 will return incorrect results.)

You can specify conditions that search for payments less than $25.00 (+~PAYMENT<25) or records dated after January 1, 1996 (+~DATE>@DATE(1996,1,1)).

When you reference another cell in a criteria table formula, while the cell reference on the left needs to be relative, the reference on the right needs to be absolute; for example: +~AGE>$H$5.

You can also use wildcards to search for data instead of using comparison formulas. (Click here [image] for details.)

Tip

Logical formulas in criteria tables display either 1 (true) or 0 (false).

Related Concepts


Using Wildcards in Search Criteria

When you are searching for text, you can use special "wildcards" to search for near matches in your data. Corel Quattro Pro supports these wildcard symbols:

?	specifies any single character in a label. For example, "t?p" finds tip, top, or tap, but not tape or stop.

*	specifies any number of characters to the end of a label. For example, "ten*" would find tender, tension, and tent, but not attention.

~	(tilde) searches for all labels in a field EXCEPT those that match the search condition. For example, entering ~"Boston" under the City column in the criteria table finds all records that do not have Boston in the City field.

You can either use wildcards or comparison formulas as search criteria--you cannot combine wildcards and other operators. For example, +~Item="tape" is a valid comparison formula. But if you enter the formula +~Item="t?p" , the exact string "t?p" is found. Records containing tip, tap, or top will not be found.

The following is another example of using wildcards:

Last_Name        Age          Age

W*                     >=21        <=65

If the above example is used with a query or database @function, all records containing last name starting with W, with an age value between 21 and 65 inclusive, would be found.

Related Concepts


The Output Cells

If you intend to copy matching records to other cells with either the Extract or Extract Unique options of Tools [image] Data Tools [image] Notebook Query, you must first prepare the cells to copy the records to (the output cells).

You can include as many field names as you want, in any order. Only fields that you include will be included in the output.

To set up the database output cells

Related Concepts


To set up the database output cells
To set up the database output cells,

1	Choose a blank area of the notebook that will not overlap your data or criteria table.

2	In the first row, copy the name of each field that you want included in the output from the database.

Related Topics

More Info


To search a Quattro Pro database
To search a Corel Quattro Pro database,

1	Create a criteria table containing the conditions and exact matches to search for.

2	If you want to copy the matched records to another part of the notebook, set up output cells (an area with enough blank space to hold extracted data plus the names of the fields you are extracting). Then enter the field names in the first row of the output cells in whatever order you want.

3	Click Tools [image] Data Tools [image] Notebook Query and specify the database cells, including field names.

If you want to specify database cells in another open notebook, use standard linking syntax. For example, [DATA]A1..Z50 specifies cells A1..Z50 in the notebook called DATA.

You can also use linking syntax to query a database file created with Paradox. This lets you access database information without having to translate the database into a notebook file first. Just specify cells including the name of the file (and directory if different).

4	If your search formulas refer to field names, use Tools [image] Data Tools [image] Notebook Query [image] Field Names to name each field.

5	Specify the criteria table, including field names and all rows of criteria.

6	Specify the output cells.

7	Click a search option: Locate, Extract, Extract Unique, or Delete.

Click Locate to highlight matching records, Extract to copy them to the Output Cells, Extract Unique to eliminate duplicate matching records when copying them, or Delete to erase matching records.

Related Topics


To highlight matching records in a Quattro Pro database
To highlight matching records in a Corel Quattro Pro database,

1	Click Tools [image] Data Tools [image] Notebook Query. Specify the database cells, criteria table, and output cells.

2	Click Locate to locate all records that meet the conditions specified in the criteria table.

Tips

Corel Quattro Pro highlights the first record in the database cells that meets the conditions. If there are no matching records, Corel Quattro Pro beeps and returns you to the dialog box.

To highlight other records that meet your criteria, press Up Arrow or Down Arrow. Up Arrow moves to previously found matches, Down Arrow moves to the next match.

Press Esc to return to the Tools [image] Data Tools [image] Notebook Query dialog box.

Related Topics


To copy matching records in a Quattro Pro database
To copy matching records in a Corel Quattro Pro database,

1	Click Tools [image] Data Tools [image] Notebook Query. Specify the database cells, criteria table, and output cells.

2	Click Extract to copy all matching records to the output cells. Corel Quattro Pro copies only those fields whose names are written on the first row of the output cells.

If you want to eliminate duplicate records (records that are identical in all fields), click Extract Unique instead.

Tip

Corel Quattro Pro erases all data in the cells beneath the output cells before extracting. Don't store notebook data below the output cells; it will be lost. To avoid losing data, specify an output area larger than one row; this also limits the number of records the output cells accept.

Related Topics


To delete matching records from a Quattro Pro database
To delete matching records from a Corel Quattro Pro database,

1	Click Tools [image] Data Tools [image] Notebook Query. Specify the database cells and criteria table.

2	Click Delete to find and delete all matching records. Corel Quattro Pro erases all matching records from the database. Records underneath the deleted records move up to fill in the empty rows.

Tip

For best results, use Locate to check the result of a search before using Delete. If you accidentally delete a record, click Edit [image] Undo (if enabled) to bring it back.

Related Topics


Using @Functions with a Database

You can use a variety of @functions with Corel Quattro Pro databases. These functions use database cells and criteria tables like a database search.

Another function, @TABLELINK, links to an external database table and displays it in Corel Quattro Pro.

Related Concepts


About Using External Databases

With Corel Quattro Pro, you can search for records in external Paradox or dBASE tables, and you can access other  features for searching and editing external tables.

To import data from an external database using the expert

To search an external database with the Query command

To query an external database table with QBE

To display external database tables in Corel Quattro Pro

To assign an alias for private and working directories

Tips

To view the first 8192 records in an external database, open it with File [image] Open. This brings the database into Corel Quattro Pro and displays it as a notebook. You can also insert it into a notebook as linked data using the Table Link command or view it with the Database Desktop.

If you use File [image] Open to open an external database file with more than 8192 records, close the file when you are done, but do not save it. If you use File [image] Save, all records that could not fit into Corel Quattro Pro will be lost.

Related Concepts


About the Notebook Query Command

You can use linking with the Tools [image] Data Tools [image] Notebook Query options to access information in a database file created with Paradox, Reflex, or dBASE (II, III, and IV). You can extract the information from the database without having to translate the file first.

You can use the Extract and Extract Unique options of the Notebook Query command to search external data tables as well as databases in Corel Quattro Pro notebooks. Other options--Locate, Delete, and Field Names--do not work with external data tables. (You can use the Database Desktop to view search results in or delete records from an external table.)

To view all the records in an external database, open it with File [image] Open, or access it directly with the Insert [image] External Data [image] Database Desktop or Insert [image] External Data [image] Table Query command. Click here [image] to see the Database Desktop help file.

To search an external database with the Notebook Query command

Related Concepts


To search an external database with the Notebook Query command
To search an external database with the Notebook Query command,

1	Set up a criteria table and output cells in a Corel Quattro Pro notebook. Use the exact field names as those in the database file.

2	Click Tools [image] Data Tools [image] Notebook Query and specify the database file itself as the database cells using linking syntax, for example, [Database]A1..A2. [Database] is the name of the database, including path; for example, [C:\PARADOX\SAMPLE.DB]. The cells specified after the file name can be any valid area with at least two rows. A1..A2 acts as a hook into the database. It remains A1..A2, no matter how large the database area actually is.

3	Specify the criteria table and output cells.

4	Click Extract. Corel Quattro Pro copies the specified information from the outside database file and writes it into the output cells.

Tip

If your criteria contains formulas that contain cell references to data elsewhere, those cell references MUST be absolute. For example, if you have a table with Name and Age as the column titles and you want to identify all those entries with AGE > 25, you could enter the critera as +~AGE>25. Or, if you were referencing the cell C1 that contained the value 25, entering +AGE>C1 would not work. Instead, you would need to enter +~AGE>$A:$C$1 as the critera, using absolute references.

To view all the records in an external database, open it with File [image] Open, or access it directly with the Insert [image] External Data [image] Database Desktop or Insert [image] External Data [image] Table Query command.

Related Topics

More Info


About QBE

Once you use the Query by Example technique to create a QBE file in Paradox or Database Desktop, you can run that query from within Corel Quattro Pro. Use the Insert [image] External Data [image] Table Query command, then specify a QBE file or a QBE query in a notebook selection.

A QBE query in a notebook selection always starts with the word Query and ends with the word EndQuery. The best way to learn the QBE syntax is to create queries in Database Desktop or Paradox, then import them into Corel Quattro Pro, and experiment by revising them. For more information about QBE syntax, see QBE File Syntax.

To query an external database table with QBE

Tip

To make it easier to read a query selection, set the font property for the QBE selection to Courier, a nonproportional font.

Related Topics


To query an external database table with QBE
To query an external database table with QBE,

1	Click Insert [image] External Data [image] Table Query, or click here [image] for a shortcut.

2	Indicate the source of the query, a QBE file or a QBE query in a notebook selection.

3	Specify the file or selection.

4	Specify a notebook destination for the query results.

Tip

When you click OK, Corel Quattro Pro runs the query and displays any retrieved records in the Destination cells.

Related Topics

More Info


About Displaying External Tables in Corel Quattro Pro

You can load small files with .DB or .DBF extensions directly into Corel Quattro Pro and edit them as if they were spreadsheets, as long as they don't contain index or memo files. Because Corel Quattro Pro can handle only files with less than 8192 records, data can be lost if files have more records than that. For best results, use Database Desktop to work with external data tables.

Corel Quattro Pro's ability to create .DB and .DBF files is best used to create new files, which can then be edited in Database Desktop, Paradox, or dBASE.

To link directly to an external data table and see updates as they occur, use the Table Link command, the Table Link button [image] on the Data Manipulation Toolbar, or @TABLELINK.

To display external database tables in Corel Quattro Pro

Related Topics


To display external database tables in Quattro Pro
To display external database tables in Corel Quattro Pro,

1	Click Insert [image] External Data [image] Table Link.

2	Select the cells where you want the linked database table to appear.

3	In the Table edit field, type the path and filename of the database table to which you want to establish a link. Click the Browse button to select a database table from a list.

Related Topics

More Info


Aliases

When using external data tables, it is often convenient to assign aliases for your private and working directories. A private directory is a location for your temporary answer tables and other nonshared files. A working directory is where a database application or a command such as Table Query looks for your external database tables. An alias is a shortcut name that takes the place of a long path name.

To assign an alias for private and working directories

Related Topics


To assign an alias for private and working directories
To assign an alias for private and working directories,

1	Click Insert [image] External Data [image] Aliases.

2	Type the full path name for each directory in the appropriate edit field.

Related Topics

More Info


About Sorting Data

Sorting reorders cells (cells, rows, or columns) called the sort cells, based on sort keys within it.

You can specify up to five sort keys, in the order they are to be sorted. For example, if you want to sort a sales prospect file, the first key might be postal code with the last name of your contact as the second key. You can also sort in ascending or descending order.

The quickest way to sort cells is to use the QuickSort button [image] on the Selection Formatting Toolbar.

To sort data in cells

To sort cells using the QuickSort button

To sort cells using QuickFilter

Related Concepts


To sort data in cells
To sort data in cells,

1	Click Tools [image] Sort.

2	Specify the cells containing all the fields of the records you want to sort (you can also include headings, even though the headings will not be sorted).

3	Specify one to five sort keys.

The data will be sorted by the 1st key, then the 2nd, and so on. If two entries in the first key column are identical, Corel Quattro Pro looks at the second key. For example, the 1st key might be Last Name and the 2nd key might be First Name. Click the down arrow by each item to choose from your headings or type the rows (Sales:B) or column (Sales:2) to sort by.

4	Click Ascending to sort a key in ascending order (from smallest to largest). Or, deselect Ascending to sort in the reverse order.

5	Click Options if you want to further customize the sort (sort blank cells first, sort numbers last, sort from left to right instead of top to bottom, and so on).

Tip

To point to cells in the notebook to sort by, double-click in the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, etc. boxes.

You can also choose from any of your previous sorts. Choose a sort under Previous Sorts.

By default, data is sorted by columns (top to bottom). To sort rows (left to right), click Options.

Corel Quattro Pro guesses what your headings are and displays them in the 1st through 5th boxes. Click the down arrow in the boxes to select them to sort by.

You can quickly sort data using Tools [image] QuickFilter.

Related Topics

More Info


To customize a sort
To customize a sort,

1	Click Tools [image] Sort.

2	Specify the cells containing all the fields of the records you want to sort. (Do not include field names.)

3	Specify one to five sort keys.

4	Click Options.

5	Click Left to Right to sort across rows instead of down columns.

6	To sort blank cells first or sort numbers last, select those options.

Related Topics


Sort Keys

Corel Quattro Pro uses specified keys to reorder data. These sort keys determine which fields the sort is based on. You may specify up to five sort keys. Sorting begins with the first key. If two entries in that field are identical, Corel Quattro Pro looks at the second key. If the first two fields are identical, the third key determines sort order, and so on. For example, if LAST_NAME is the first and only sort key, the following list sorts as shown:

Before Sorting:

FIRST_NAME	LAST_NAME

Sam	Wong

John	Fernandez

Herman	Schwartz

Maria	Fernandez

Lawrence	Jones

Alicia	Fernandez

After Sorting:

FIRST_NAME	LAST_NAME

John	Fernandez

Maria	Fernandez

Alicia	Fernandez

Lawrence	Jones

Herman	Schwartz

Sam	Wong

If FIRST_NAME is added as the second sort key, the Fernandez records sort in this order (if Ascending is checked): Alicia Fernandez, John Fernandez, Maria Fernandez.

Related Concepts


Sort Order

Each sort key you specify can be sorted in ascending or descending order. When you check Ascending, Corel Quattro Pro sorts data in the following order:

labels beginning with numbers (in numerical order)

labels beginning with letters and special characters (in ASCII order)

values (in numerical order)

blank cells

When you uncheck Ascending, Corel Quattro Pro sorts records in descending order.

The Sort options let you change how columns containing values and labels are sorted. Click Tools [image] Sort [image] Options. You can specify to sort blank cells first or sort numbers last.

Related Concepts


Sorting Tips

Dates are sorted by their date serial numbers; formulas are sorted by their results.

If the cells you are sorting contain formulas that reference cells OUTSIDE the sort cells (for example, +A2), make them absolute (+$A$2) before sorting.

Pad numbers stored as labels in the sort cells with leading zeros or spaces. This ensures they sort in numerical order. For example, '5 and '100 will not sort properly unless they are entered as '005 and '100.

Formulas that refer to cells outside of their own row are not updated when records are resorted. If you have such formulas in your records, use Edit [image] Convert to Values to convert them to their end values before sorting them, or edit the formulas to correct the cell references after sorting.

To restore the sort area to its original order after sorting, insert an extra column in the sort area BEFORE you sort it. Use Edit [image] Fill [image] Fill Series to fill this column with consecutive numbers. Then you can specify this column as the first sort key whenever you want to restore the original order.

If you do not specify ALL the cells of each record you sort, the resulting sorted fields will be mismatched. You will then have to retrieve your file again to restore it, or re-enter the records.

To reverse the effects of a sort operation, use Edit [image] Undo.

Records you enter after sorting are not entered in sort order. Sort again to include new records where they belong.

Related Concepts


To sort cells using the QuickSort button
To sort cells using the QuickSort button,

1	Select the cells to sort.

2	Hold the Shift+Ctrl keys and click the column to sort by. If you want a second sort key, click that column next, and so on.

For example, if each record contained a last name, a first name, a middle initial, and an employee ID, you would click the first column to sort by last name.

3	Right-click any toolbar, then click Selection Formatting.

4	Click the QuickSort button [image] to perform the sort and save the sort settings. The top part of the button sorts in ascending order; the bottom sorts in descending order.

Tip

To re-sort the same cells, click QuickSort again. The current settings remain until you select different cells and click QuickSort.

Related Topics

More Info


About Database Desktop

Database Desktop lets you work with external databases in Corel Quattro Pro. Using Database Desktop, you can

view, edit and query databases

copy data from a database into Corel Quattro Pro

link database data to corresponding data in Corel Quattro Pro and have your notebook updated whenever the database changes

query databases from within Corel Quattro Pro and have the results returned directly to the notebook

Database Desktop help


To query an external database using the Database Desktop
To query an external database using Database Desktop,

1	Click Insert [image] External Data [image] Database Desktop.

2	Click File [image] New [image] QBE Query.

3	Type the name of the table you want to query, or select one or more tables from the list of files.

4	Click Open. Database Desktop places an image of each table chosen in the Query window.

5	Enter selection conditions and/or example elements and specify fields to display in the Answer table.

For more information, see Database Desktop help.

Database Desktop help


Dialog Box Overview

A dialog box is a box of options that you create to prompt the application user for information. It contains various controls, such as check boxes and edit fields.

A Toolbar is a custom tool you create that remains onscreen while an application runs (just like the Corel Quattro Pro Toolbar does). It gives the user shortcuts for commonly used commands and procedures.

Dialog boxes are saved with the notebook; Toolbars are saved as separate files.

From a user's point of view, the main difference between dialog boxes and Toolbars is that dialog boxes appear at specific times during an application; Toolbars usually remain onscreen while the application runs.

Because of this difference, you will tend to put commonly used commands or actions on a custom Toolbar, and reserve dialog boxes for those places in an application where you need specific information from a user.

To create dialog boxes, use Tools [image] Macro [image] Dialog Designer. You can create custom Toolbars with View [image] Toolbars.

Related Concepts


Tools for Building Dialog Boxes

When you click Tools [image] Macro [image] Dialog Designer, a dialog window opens that lets you build dialog boxes for a custom application. The Property Bar includes tools to help you create each dialog box control.

Dialog Window

Dialog Designer Property Bar

Related Concepts


Dialog Window

When you click Tools [image] Macro [image] Dialog Designer, you see an empty dialog box within a dialog window. New dialog boxes contain an OK button and a Cancel button, to provide a consistent way for the user to close the dialog box. Also, a default name is automatically assigned.

When you are creating a dialog box in a dialog window, it looks slightly different from how it will appear to the user in a completed application.

The dialog window is the dialog box in an editable form; it contains all the Windows user interface elements for a window: a window border, a Control-menu box, and Minimize and Maximize buttons.

In the dialog window, the name of the dialog box appears in the title bar. You will use this name in a macro to display the dialog box or change its property settings.

This name is different from the title of the dialog box, which is what the user sees when the application runs.

Related Concepts


Dialog Designer Property Bar

When you are creating a dialog box, the Property Bar changes to display tools that are specifically designed to help you build dialog boxes. These tools let you quickly create, copy, move and test controls. Controls are elements you put in a dialog box to gather information from the user or to perform a desired action.

The Cut [image], Copy [image], and Paste [image] buttons are shortcuts for Edit [image] Cut, Edit [image] Copy, and Edit [image] Paste. You can copy a control to the Clipboard to duplicate it or to move it to another dialog box or Toolbar.

The Test button [image] tests the operation of a dialog box. In test mode, the dialog box controls behave exactly as they will when the application runs.

The Selection tool [image] lets you select a control in the dialog window to move it, resize it, or change its properties, etc. You can select several controls at a time, to move or size them together. (You can use Edit [image] Select All to select all controls in a dialog window.)

The remaining tools let you add controls to a dialog box; click here [image] for details.

Related Concepts


Dialog Box Guidelines

Here are the basic steps to follow to create a dialog box:

1	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Dialog Designer. A dialog window appears. Click here [image] for details.

2	Enter a name for the dialog box (later, you will use this name in a macro to make the dialog box appear).

3	Enter a title for the dialog box (the title is what the user will see).

4	Add controls to the dialog box. Click here [image] for details.

5	Customize each control, if necessary. Click here [image] for details.

6	Resize the dialog box, if desired.

7	In the notebook, create a {DODIALOG} command to call the dialog box and pass initial defaults to it. Click here [image] for details.

8	Add a link command to each control, if necessary. A link command indicates what should happen when a user manipulates that control in a specific manner. Click here [image] for details.

9	Test the operation of each control. Click here [image] for details.

10	Save the dialog box (by saving the notebook it is in).

Related Concepts


Creating Dialog Boxes

The following topics describe how to create a dialog box.

To open a new dialog window

To add controls to a dialog box

To label dialog box controls

Customizing controls

To display a dialog box

To link commands to dialog controls

To test dialog boxes


To open a new dialog window
To open a new dialog window,

1	Starting from a new notebook, click Tools [image] Macro [image] Dialog Designer. You will see a new dialog window.

2	To give this new dialog box a name, right-click the dialog box background and click Dialog Properties, then click Name. Type a name and click OK. Notice that the title bar of the dialog box shows its new name.

3	Next, create the dialog box title. Right-click the dialog box background and click Dialog Properties, then click Title. Type the title and click OK. (You will not see any visible change here; the Title is what a user sees.)

4	Dialog boxes are stored within their notebook. To save this dialog box, save its notebook--click anywhere in the notebook, click File [image] Save As, then enter a file name.

Tip

There is an alternative way to create a dialog box. Click View [image] Objects then click the New Dialog tool [image].

Related Topics


About Adding Dialog Controls

Once you have named a dialog box and given it a title, the next stage is to add the desired controls to it.

Use the Property Bar to add controls to a dialog box. Corel Quattro Pro offers a variety of different controls; each control is best suited for presenting (or receiving) a certain type of information. Each control displays a setting, and provides a way for users to change that setting.

Following is a brief description of the most commonly used controls.

Push Button	A push button performs a specific action when the user clicks it. The developer determines what that action is.

Check Box	Check boxes present a Yes/No choice to the user. The user checks the check box to accept the choice. Check boxes often are placed within group boxes, to present the user with mutually exclusive choices.

Radio Button	Radio buttons (also called option buttons) are usually grouped, to give the user a mutually-exclusive list. When a user clicks a radio button, its button darkens to indicate that it is chosen.

Label	A label clarifies to the user what a specific control does.

Edit Field	An edit field is where a user types specific information.

Spin Control	A spin control lets the user click an arrow to increase or decrease the value it displays (the user can also type a value instead).

Rectangle	A rectangle embellishes a dialog box or groups two or more controls together.

Group Box	A group box usually contains other controls such as radio buttons or check boxes. It looks like a rectangle with a title at the top.

To add controls to a dialog box

Related Concepts


To add controls to a dialog box
To add controls to a dialog box,

1	Select the Objects sheet and double-click the dialog icon. If you do not have a dialog window open, click Tools [image] Macro [image] Dialog Designer.

2	Click a tool from the Property Bar.

3	Position the pointer near the upper left corner of the dialog box (leave room for a label on the left). Click to drop the control into place. The control appears, with its top left corner at the position you clicked.

4	To make the control bigger, drag one of the control's handles.

Tips

You can create a control and size it all in one step: Instead of clicking the mouse button, move to the position where you want the control to start, then drag the pointer until the control is the desired size.

There is a fast way to fill a group box with radio buttons--just hold down the Ctrl key while you resize the group box.

Related Topics

More Info


To label dialog box controls
To label dialog box controls,

1	Click the Label tool from the Property Bar.

2	Move the pointer just to the left of a control, then click. (Move the control to the right if you need more room).

3	Next, add text to the label: Double-click the label, type the label text, and press Enter.

Related Topics


Customizing Controls

After you have added controls to a dialog box, right-click on the controls and use the Properties option to customize them.

The following topics provide examples of how to customize controls:

Customizing an edit field

Customizing a spin control

Customizing radio buttons and group boxes

When you are finished customizing the controls, save your work. Click anywhere in the Objects sheet, then click File [image] Save. Your dialog box is saved with the notebook.

Related Concepts


Customizing an Edit Field

This example shows how to customize an edit field and give it a range of 1000-30000:

1	Right-click an edit field in a dialog box, then click the EditField Properties option.

2	Click Field Type, then choose Integer.

3	Right-click the edit field again and click the EditField Properties option. Click Minimum, type 1000, and click OK.

4	Right-click the edit field again and click the EditField Properties option. Click Maximum, type 30000, and click OK.

The edit field will not accept text strings or alphabetical characters, or values above 30000 or below 1000.

Related Concepts


Customizing a Spin Control

This example shows how to limit a spin control to the range 1-5:

1	Right-click a spin control in a dialog box, then click the SpinCtrl Properties option. Click Minimum, type 1 and click OK.

2	Right-click the spin control button again, then click the SpinCtrl Properties option. Click Maximum, type 5 and click OK.

Related Concepts


Customizing Radio Buttons and Group Boxes

This example shows how to add descriptive text to radio buttons and group boxes:

1	Double-click a radio button, type a description of the option, and press Enter.

2	Repeat this process for other radio buttons.

3	To give a group box a title, double-click the group box title, type the title, and press Enter.

To size the dialog box, grab a lower left corner of the dialog box and drag it upward, then release the mouse button.

Related Concepts


The {DODIALOG} Command

After you are finished creating a dialog box and customizing the controls in it, the next step is to create a macro that displays the dialog box and stores the user's choices in cells in the notebook. The macro sends initial values to each control in the dialog box. If the user changes a setting in the dialog box, that change is sent back to a cell in the notebook when the user closes the dialog box.

First, set up an area in the notebook that will send default settings to the dialog box. For example, in the following table for a loan payment dialog box, B1..B5 is a block that defines the initial dialog box settings:

A	B

1	Pay_Every	Month

2	Loan_Amount	100000

3	Int_Rate	12.5

4	Term	30

5	End_Of_Period	No

This sets the default payment period to month, the default loan amount at 100,000, the default interest rate at 12.5%, the default term at 30 years, and specifies payment at the start of the month.

After the initial dialog box settings have been entered in the notebook, enter a macro command that will display the dialog box and send the user's choices back to the notebook. Use the {DODIALOG} command to do this. The {DODIALOG} command has several arguments, which are noted as follows:

The first argument is the name of the notebook that contains the dialog box you want to display, and the name of the dialog box. The name of the notebook is optional if the dialog box is stored in the active notebook.

The second argument specifies a cell that will store a value indicating how the user closed the dialog box. If the dialog box was canceled, 0 is stored in the cell; if the dialog box was closed by Enter or OK, 1 is stored.

The third argument specifies a block that contains initial values for the dialog box controls and receives final values from the dialog box controls when the user closes the dialog box.

The fourth argument (1 or 0) specifies whether the user should manipulate the dialog box (1) or if the macro should manipulate it (0); the default is 1.

Each cell in the block (starting at the upper left cell and proceeding row-wise to the lower right cell) sets the initial value of one control. If the user cancels the dialog box, the values in this block remain unchanged.

Here is an example of a {DODIALOG} macro used to display a loan payment dialog box using the initial settings in B1..B5:

{DODIALOG "LoanData",B6,B1..B5,1}

This command displays the dialog box and passes the initial values in cells B1 through B5 to the dialog box controls. It also sends a value of 0 to cell B6 if the user cancels the dialog box; otherwise, 1. The final argument of the command specifies that the user can manipulate the dialog box.

To make this dialog box dynamic, so that the user's changes are immediately reflected in the notebook, add link commands to each control.

To display a dialog box

Related Concepts


To display a dialog box
To display a dialog box,

1	Set up an area in the notebook that will send default settings to the dialog box.

2	Enter a {DODIALOG} macro command that displays the dialog box and send the user's choices back to the notebook. The {DODIALOG} macro has several arguments:

The first argument is the name of the notebook that contains the dialog box you want to display, and the name of the dialog box. The name of the notebook is optional if the dialog box is stored in the active notebook.

The second argument specifies a cell that will store a value indicating how the user closed the dialog box. If the dialog box was canceled, 0 is stored in the cell; if the dialog box was closed by Enter or OK, 1 is stored.

The third argument specifies a block that contains initial values for the dialog box controls and receives final values from the dialog box controls when the user closes the dialog box.

The fourth argument (1 or 0) specifies whether the user should manipulate the dialog box (1) or if the macro should manipulate it (0); the default is 1.

Tips

Each cell in the block (starting at the upper left cell and proceeding row-wise to the lower right cell) sets the initial value of one control. If the user cancels the dialog box, the values in this block remain unchanged.

To make a dialog box dynamic so that the user's changes are immediately reflected in the notebook, add link commands to each control.

Related Topics

More Info


About Linking Commands to Dialog Controls

Link commands are statements you attach to each control, to indicate what should happen when the user changes the control.

The {DODIALOG} command brings changed values back to the notebook when the user closes the dialog box. However, if you set up a dynamic link you do not have to close the dialog box to see the changed values. You accomplish this with link commands.

For example, you might want to add a link command to an edit field to make it write changes back to cell B2 immediately. To add the link command to an edit field:

1	Double-click the edit field.

2	Click Dialog [image] Set Links.

3	Click Add.

Basically, you enter link commands as statements, specifying "when a happens, do b to c." The statement reads something like a "what, when, where" statement:

"When the user changes a setting, send the new value back to a specific cell in the notebook."

Click here [image] for a list of link events in the Object Link dialog box.

Click here [image] for complete information about link commands.

Click here [image] for an example showing how to add link commands to dialog box controls.

By the way, there is a fast way to create a dynamic link; use Dialog [image] Connect.

After you add link commands, test each control to see if the dynamic links work.

To link commands to dialog controls

Related Concepts


To link commands to dialog controls
To link commands to dialog controls,

1	Click the control.

2	Click Dialog [image] Set Links.

3	Click Add to add a link command.

4	The link command usually specifies at least three things: an event, an action, and an object. Click the event, action, and object you want for the link command.

5	To add more link commands, click Add again.

Tips

You can also create a dynamic link for a control by selecting the control and choosing Dialog [image] Connect.

Link commands are statements you attach to each control, to indicate what should happen when the user changes the control.

The {DODIALOG} command brings changed values back to the notebook when the user closes the dialog box. However, if you set up a dynamic link, you do not have to close the dialog box to see the changed values. You accomplish this with link commands.

Related Topics

More Info


Adding Link Commands to an Edit Field

Here is an example showing how to add link commands to an edit field:

1	First, specify what event triggers the command (a "when" statement): Move to the first button, which is labeled Init. This is the Event pick list button.

Hold down the left mouse button, drag to Valuechanged, then release. (You want a value sent back to the notebook when the value has been changed.)

2	Next, specify the action that should occur (a "what" statement): Move to the second button, labeled RECEIVE. Hold down the mouse button, drag to SEND, then release. (You want to send the change back to the notebook.)

The third button reads Value; since this is correct, leave it as is (you want to send the new value back to the notebook).

Move to the fourth button, beside TO. This is the Object pick list button, where you specify the object to be acted upon. Hold down the mouse button, and click <POINT>.

If you are still on the Objects sheet, click the QuickTab button [image] to return to the notebook.

Move the Object Link dialog box out of the way if you need to.

3	In the notebook, click cell B2 (where you want the value sent). You return to the Link dialog box.

Finally, hold down the last button, drag to Value, then release. This indicates what you want done to the cell--set its value.

4	Click OK.

Related Concepts


To test dialog boxes
To test dialog boxes,

1	Click the Test button [image]. The dialog box will look just as the user will see it, except TEST MODE appears next to the dialog box title.

In Test mode, you cannot activate any other windows unless you have configured a control in the dialog box to do so.

2	Move the dialog box to the left or right, so that you can see the cells in the notebook.

3	Change the control settings in the dialog box and see if the notebook cells change simultaneously. For example, if the dialog box has an edit field, enter a value in the field and check to see that the linked notebook cell has changed.

Tip

To save your work, click any cell in the notebook and click File [image] Save.


Working with Dialog Boxes

You can create, rename, or copy dialog boxes on the Objects sheet. Work with icons on the Objects sheet to perform operations listed in this table:

Operation	Step(s)

Edit	Double-click the dialog box icon. To set dialog box properties, right-click the icon and click Dialog Properties.

Rename	Right-click the dialog box icon, click the Dialog Properties command, then click Name. Enter the new name.

Delete	Click the dialog box icon and click Edit [image] Clear (or press Del).

Copy to another	Click the dialog box icon, click Edit [image] Copy, select the destination notebook's Objects sheet, and click Edit [image] Paste. If both the source and the destination notebook appear on the Corel Quattro Pro desktop, you can copy the dialog box by selecting the source notebook's Objects sheet and dragging the dialog box icon into the destination notebook window.

Duplicate	Click the dialog box icon, click Edit [image] Copy, then click Edit [image] Paste. A duplicate cannot have the same name as the original, so a unique name is automatically generated.

Move to another	Select the dialog box icon, click Edit [image] Cut, click the Window menu, click the destination notebook, click [image] to go to the Objects sheet, then click Edit [image] Paste.

Related Concepts


Working with Controls

The information in this section applies, generally, to all controls used in dialog boxes. Most of these topics also apply to Toolbar controls.

To select several controls

To copy a control

To move a control

To resize or move a control using the mouse

To specify a precise size and position for a control

To move overlapping controls

To set grid options for a dialog box

To align multiple controls

Repositioning controls

Setting a control's value

To set a control's initial value

To change the setting order of controls

To edit the setting order of control

To change a control's text

Using the Clipboard with controls

To assign a shortcut key to a control

To set the Tab order for controls

To edit the Tab order for controls

To change Group Box selection order

Disabling and hiding controls

Using the Depend On property

To group controls

Resizing grouped controls

Connecting controls to cells or other controls

To create a title bar hint for a control


To select several controls
To select several controls,

1	Click the Selection tool [image].

2	Hold down Shift and click each control you want to select. Handles surround each control as you select it.

Tips

To deselect a control, click it again.

Another way to select multiple controls is to click the Selection tool and drag a selection frame around the controls. You can also use Edit [image] Select All to select all controls in a dialog window.

To deselect a group of controls, click the Selection tool and click the dialog window background.

Related Topics


To copy a control
To copy a control,

1	Select the control.

2	Click Edit [image] Copy.

3	If you are moving the control to another dialog window or Toolbar window, select it.

4	Click Edit [image] Paste.

Tips

Deselect any controls in the active dialog window before using Edit [image] Paste, so the selected control is not changed.

Each time you click Edit [image] Paste a new copy of the control is created.

Copying a parent control to the Clipboard copies any controls attached to it as well; removing the parent control from the dialog window also removes the attached controls.

Related Topics


To move a control
To move a control,

1	Select the control

2	Click Edit [image] Cut.

3	If you are moving the control to another dialog window or Toolbar window, select it.

4	Click Edit [image] Paste.

Tips

Deselect any controls in the active dialog window before using Edit [image] Paste, so the selected control is not changed.

Each time you click Edit [image] Paste a new copy of the control is created.

Related Topics


To resize or move a control using the mouse
To resize or move a control using the mouse,

1	Click the Selection tool.

2	Select the control by clicking it.

3	To move a control, point to it and drag it. To resize a control, drag one of its handles.

Tips

If multiple controls are selected, dragging one control moves all the controls; dragging the handle of one control also resizes the other selected controls.

Selecting multiple controls (by holding down Shift while clicking them) and clicking Format [image] Resize To Same resizes the selected controls to the same size as the first control selected.

Related Topics


To specify a precise size and position for a control
To specify a precise size and position for a control,

1	Right-click the control and click the Properties option

2	Click Dimension. Specify the following options:

X Pos is the distance in pixels between the left edge of the control and the left side of the dialog box.

Y Pos is the distance in pixels between the top edge of the control and the bottom edge of the dialog box's title bar.

Width is the width of the control, in pixels.

Height is the height of the control, in pixels.

Related Topics


To move overlapping controls
To move overlapping controls,

1	Select a control that overlaps another control.

2	Click Format [image] Object Order, then click one of the following options:

Bring Forward moves the object one layer closer to the top.

Send Backward moves the object one layer closer to the bottom.

Bring To Front brings the object to the front or top of the layers.

Send To Back sends the object to the bottom layer.

Related Topics


To set grid options for a dialog box
To set grid options for a dialog box,

1	Right-click the dialog title bar, then click Grid Options on the QuickMenu.

2	Set the Grid Size and other options.

Grid Size lets you specify the distance in pixels between grid points.

Show Grid makes the grid visible. Dots appearing in the background represent each grid point. (Users will not see this grid.)

Snap To Grid enables a hidden grid. Controls will align with the grid as you move them.

Related Topics


To align multiple controls
To align multiple controls,

1	Select multiple controls.

2	Click Format [image] Align, then click one of the following commands:

Left lines up the left sides of the selected objects.

Right lines up the right sides of the selected objects.

Top lines up the top edges of the selected objects.

Bottom lines up the bottom edges of the selected objects.

3	To center controls, click Format [image] Position, then click one of the following commands:

Horizontal Center centers controls between the top and bottom of the dialog box.

Vertical Center centers controls between the left and right sides of the dialog box.

4	To space controls, click Format [image] Space, then click one of the following commands:

Horizontal Space horizontally spaces objects by the amount of pixels you specify.

Vertical Space vertically spaces objects by the amount of pixels you specify.

5	To sets all selected controls to the same size as the first control selected, click Format [image] Resize To Same.

Related Topics


Repositioning Controls

The commands Horizontal Space and Vertical Space let you evenly space and arrange controls in a dialog box.

The following example repositions controls using Horizontal Space.

1	Open a dialog box and use Shift+click to select controls to arrange. The first control you select appears at the left after repositioning, the next appears to the right of it, and so on.

2	Click Format [image] Space [image] Horizontal Space.

3	Set their new spacing, in pixels. The default is 5.

4	Click OK.

Vertical Space behaves like Horizontal Space, but the first control you select moves to the top, the second control moves just below the first, and so on.

Related Concepts


About Setting a Control's Value

Each control stores one setting; the user manipulates the control (by clicking a scroll arrow, typing text, and so on) to change that setting.

There are several ways to set a control's value:

through initial settings you pass using a {DODIALOG} command

by a user changing a setting in the dialog box

using the {SETOBJECTPROPERTY} command

with rough link commands from any dialog control

For example, the following macro command uses the Value property to enter Spanish in an edit field:

{SETOBJECTPROPERTY "Dialog1:EditField3.Value","Spanish"}

To set a control's initial value

To change the setting order of controls

To edit the setting order of controls

Related Concepts


About Setting a Control's Initial Value

The macro command {DODIALOG} displays the specified dialog box.

Here is an example of a {DODIALOG} command:

{DODIALOG "LoanData", Result, B1..B5}

This command displays the LoanData dialog box, places the results of how the user closed the dialog box in the cell named Result, and passes the values in cells B1 through B5 to the controls in the dialog box, in order.

For example, if your dialog box has six controls, but you have set the Process Value property of the third control to No, your setting block should be only five cells long. The values in the first two cells will be passed to the first two controls. However, the value in the third cell will go to the fourth control, and the values in the fourth and fifth cells will go to the fifth and sixth controls, respectively.

Controls that do not have a Process Value property will receive no value from a {DODIALOG} command.

To set a control's initial value

Related Concepts


To set a control's initial value
To set a control's initial value,

For a dialog box, specify the initial value of controls in the block specified by the {DODIALOG} macro used to display the dialog.

For a Toolbar, click View [image] Toolbars, then right-click the control and click Links.

Tips

If a control's Process Value property is set to No, the control will not receive an initial value.

Controls that do not have a Process Value property have no initial value.

Related Topics

More Info


About Changing the Order in Which You Pass Initial Values

By default, the order in which you created the controls is the order in which you must pass each control's value (through the {DODIALOG} command). In other words, the first cell in the specified block sends its value to the first control you created no matter where it is positioned within the dialog box.

For example, the last argument in the command {DODIALOG "LoanData", Result, B1..B5} specifies that cells B1 through B5 contain initial values for the controls in the dialog box. Cell B1 must contain the initial value for the first control you created, cell B2 must contain the value for the second one, and so on.

To change the setting order of controls

Related Concepts


To change the setting order of controls
To change the setting order of controls,

1	Click the dialog window background to deselect its controls.

2	Hold down the Shift key and, in the order in which you want to pass initial settings, click each control.

3	Click Format [image] Value Order [image] Set New.

Tip

The first control you clicked will receive its initial value from the first cell of the block, the second control you click will receive its initial value from the second cell of the block, and so on, regardless of their arrangement in the dialog box.

Related Topics

More Info


About Editing the Setting Order

If you have many controls in your dialog box, you can use a shortcut to re-order the controls to match the order of the values in the setting block. Use Format [image] Value Order [image] Reorder From First to place related controls together in the setting order.

For example, suppose you have six controls in this order:

 1 2 3 4 5 6

But the setting block in your notebook already has the values in this order:

 1 2 5 4 3 6

The only controls that are out of order are 4 and 3; you want them to follow 2. You can re-order the controls to match this order.

To edit the setting order of controls

Related Topics


To edit the setting order of control
To edit the setting order of controls,

1	Click the dialog window background to deselect its controls.

2	Hold down the Shift key, then select controls in the order you want to reorder them.

3	Click Format [image] Value Order [image] Reorder From First.

Related Topics

More Info


To change a control's text
To change a control's text,

1	Double-click the control.

2	Type the new text (or edit the existing text) and press Enter.

Related Topics


Using the Clipboard with Controls

When the Clipboard contains text from Corel Quattro Pro or another Windows application, you can paste the text into these controls:

Control	Effect

Buttons	The text becomes the button title.

List Boxes	The text becomes the list; each line becomes one item. The first item becomes the initial title.

Combo Boxes	same as List Boxes

Pick Lists	same as List Boxes

Group Boxes	Creates radio buttons in the group box; each line becomes the title of one radio button.

Edit Fields	The text becomes its new value.

If the Clipboard contains a bitmap, you can select a bitmap button and click Edit [image] Paste to paste the bitmap onto the button's face. This bitmap is saved with the dialog box.

You can also select a dialog control and click Edit [image] Copy to copy control titles, lists, or bitmaps to the Clipboard to paste them into other areas of Corel Quattro Pro and other Windows applications.

Related Concepts


To assign a shortcut key to a control
To assign a shortcut key to a control,

1	Double-click the control's text.

2	Move the insertion point to just before the letter to underline.

3	Type an ampersand (&). For example, B&utton sets the title to Button.

To assign a shortcut key to a control without a title,

1	Right-click the control without a title (such as an edit field or a list box) and click the Properties option.

2	Click Name.

3	Move the insertion point to just before the letter to use. You can type a new name for the control if needed.

4	Type an ampersand (&).

Tips

Use only one ampersand character in the label; if you add more than one, the first is recognized as a shortcut key designation, and the remaining ones will appear in the label as text.

You can add alternative shortcut keys to controls using link commands. See Link Events for details on the event key, which you can use to run a link command when a specific key is pressed.

Related Topics


About Setting Tab Order

A user can press Tab to cycle through each control in a dialog box. To disable this feature for a particular control, right-click the control, click the Properties option, and set the Tab Stop property to No.

To specify the order in which Tab moves from control to control, hold down the Shift key and select each control in the order you want them to cycle. Then click Format [image] Tab Order [image] Set New to save the new order.

You can pull specific controls out of the tab order and group them together using Format [image] Tab Order [image] Reorder From First. For example, suppose the following numbers represented the existing tab order:

 1 2 3 4 5 6

If you select items 2, 4 and 6, choosing Reorder From First would change the tab order as follows:

 1 2 4 6 3 5

To set the Tab order for controls

To edit the Tab order for controls

Related Concepts


To set the Tab order for controls
To set the Tab order for controls,

1	Hold down the Shift key and select each control in the order you want them to cycle.

2	Click Format [image] Tab Order [image] Set New to save the new order.

Related Topics

More Info


To edit the Tab order for controls
To edit the Tab order for controls,

1	Click the dialog window background to deselect its controls.

2	Hold down the Shift key, then the controls in the order you want to reorder them.

3	Click Format [image] Tab Order [image] Reorder From First.

Related Topics

More Info


Group Box Selection Order

When check box buttons are placed in a group box, the user can activate one of the check boxes and then use Tab or arrow keys to select the next check box (the user can then press Space to check the active check box button).

When radio buttons are placed in a group box, the user can activate one of the radio buttons and then use arrow keys to select and choose the next radio button. You can set this selection order the same way as for check boxes.

To change group box selection order

Related Concepts


To change group box selection order
To change Group Box selection order,

1	Click the Selection tool [image].

2	Click the dialog window's background to deselect any selected controls.

3	Hold down Shift and then click each check box (or radio button) in the order you want the user to scroll through them.

4	Drag the check boxes (or radio buttons) until the pointer changes to a four-way arrow. This saves the new order.

Related Topics

More Info


Disabling and Hiding Controls

You can temporarily hide or disable dialog controls by changing their properties. You can use properties in conjunction with link commands to hide unneeded controls or reveal special settings.

Property	Purpose

Grayed	Specifies whether the control can be used. When set to Yes, the control appears dimmer, to indicate it is unavailable, and is disabled.

Disabled	Specifies whether the control can be used, like Grayed, but does not dim the control when it is set to Yes.

Depend On	Specifies the states of Corel Quattro Pro in which the control is enabled.

Enabled	The opposite of Disabled (setting this property to No disables the control). It is used by link commands and does not appear in a control's properties.

Hidden	Setting this property to Yes hides the control when the dialog box displays. (The control still appears in the dialog window while you are editing.)

Show	The opposite of Hidden (setting this property to No hides the control). It is used by link commands and does not appear in the control properties.

Related Concepts


Using the Depend On Property

The most useful property for disabling controls is Depend On. Use it to specify the areas of Corel Quattro Pro in which the control is disabled. For example, some controls are appropriate only when a graph window is active; to create a control that will be available only when a graph window is active,

1	Right-click the control and click the Properties option, then click Depend On.

2	Uncheck all check boxes except Graph to specify that this control is available only when a graph window is active.

Each check box button controls one area of Corel Quattro Pro, as shown in the next table.

Area	When its check box is checked

Desktop	Enables the control when no windows are open.

Notebook	Enables the control when a notebook window is active.

Graph	Enables the control when a graph window is active.

Dialog	Enables the control when a dialog window is active.

Input Line	Enables the control when the input line is active (when typing a new entry or editing a cell).

Objects Sheet	Enables the control when a notebook window is active and the Objects Sheet is selected.

If all options are checked, the dialog control is always available.

Related Concepts


About Grouping Controls

Some dialog controls have an Attach Child property that makes controls dragged on top of them become attached. The control on top is then a child of the control beneath it, which is the parent. Grouping controls provides many advantages to the developer:

Moving the parent control moves any attached elements.

Copying the parent control copies any attached elements.

Hiding the parent control hides any attached elements.

Disabling the parent control disables any attached elements.

Resizing the parent control resizes any attached elements proportionally.

Child controls must cover the parent control only; controls partially covering one another will not attach.

To prevent an object from becoming a parent control, right-click it and click the Properties option, then set the Attach Child property to No. This does not affect controls already attached.

All controls in a dialog window are child controls of the dialog box (or Toolbar), which is the parent control. To disable all controls in a dialog box, right-click the dialog box and click the Dialog Properties option, then set Disabled to Yes.

Nesting Grouped Controls

You can nest attached controls (for example, you can move a parent control on top of another control to attach them). The attached controls still stay associated with the original parent control, not that control's new parent.

To group controls

Related Concepts


To group controls
To group controls,

1	Right-click the parent control (for example, a rectangle or a group box) and click the Properties option.

2	Set the Attach Child property to Yes.

This makes controls dragged on top of the parent control become attached to it. The control on top is then a child of the control beneath it, which is the parent.

Tip

Child controls must cover the parent control only; controls partially covering one another will not attach.

Related Topics

More Info


Resizing Grouped Controls

Moving a parent control moves any child controls with it. (Moving child controls does not affect the parent.) You can use a child control's Position Adjust property to specify how it moves (or resizes) when the parent control containing it is resized.

By default, a child control moves when a handle on the left or top side of its parent control is dragged. If you right-click a child control and click the Properties option, click Position Adjust, and check Depend on parent, each edge of the child control is locked into place so that when the parent control is resized, the child control resizes proportionally.

When a handle of the parent control is dragged while Position Adjust is enabled, an edge of the child control is pushed or pulled, as shown by the arrows in the next figure.

Dragging a corner handle affects two sides of the child control. For example, dragging the lower right handle would affect the bottom and right edges of the child control.

If the edge of a parent control is pushed toward or pulled away from an edge of the child control that is locked, the child control is resized.

The Position Adjust options unlock edges of the child control. If an edge of the parent control is pushed toward or pulled away from an unlocked edge, the child control moves instead of resizing. Check Center Horizontally to center the control between the left and right sides of the parent control whenever the parent control is resized. Check Center Vertically to center the control between the top and bottom edges of the parent control.

Click Position Adjust Example for step-by-step directions.

Related Concepts


Position Adjust Example

This example shows how to use Position Adjust:

1	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Dialog Designer to display a new dialog window.

2	The OK and Cancel buttons are child controls of the dialog box. Right-click the OK button and click the Button Properties option, then click Position Adjust. Check Depend on Parent to enable automatic positioning. Click OK to save the setting.

3	Repeat the previous step for the Cancel button.

4	Drag the lower right corner of the dialog window to shrink the dialog window. Notice that both buttons shrink proportionally.

To make the Cancel button move instead of resizing,

1	Right-click the Cancel button and click the Button Properties option, then click Position Adjust.

2	Check Top Relative and Left Relative to unlock the top and left edges of the Cancel button.

3	Click OK to save the change and drag the lower right corner of the dialog window to shrink it.

Notice that the OK Button still shrinks, but the Cancel button moves. Now whenever the right or bottom edge of the dialog box is dragged, the Cancel button moves instead of shrinking.

Related Concepts


Connecting Controls to Cells or Other Controls

You can quickly link a control to another control or to a notebook cell using Dialog [image] Connect. This creates a link command in the selected object. Use Dialog [image] Set Links to modify "connected" link commands.

This example connects a scroll bar to a notebook cell:

1	Select cell A1 of the notebook and enter 16. This will be the initial value for the scroll bar.

2	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Dialog Designer.

3	Create a vertical scroll bar.

4	Click Dialog [image] Connect. Click cell A1, then click OK.

5	To test the link, click the Test button. The scroll box on the scroll bar will jump to a new position after receiving its initial value from cell A1.

6	Drag the scroll box; the value stored in cell A1 changes.

7	Click OK to exit Test mode.

Related Concepts


To create a title bar hint for a control
To create a title bar hint for a control,

1	Right-click the control and click the Properties option.

2	Click Help Line.

3	Type the hint.

Related Topics


Working with Link Commands

Link commands are statements you attach to a control, to indicate what should happen when the user changes or selects the control. A link command can do many things: it can send a value to a cell in the notebook; it can run a macro; it can close the dialog box; it can change the zoom factor in the notebook.

Link commands will usually specify at least three things: an event, an action, and an object. The event indicates what occurrence should trigger the link command; the action indicates what should happen; the object is what should be acted upon. One control can have many link commands.

To connect a control to cells or other controls

To add a link command to a control

To link a dialog box to Help

To link a Help button to Help

Related Concepts


The Object Link Dialog Box

To add link commands to a control, select the control and click Dialog [image] Set Links.

Button	Purpose

Add	Creates a new link command below the selected link command.

Insert	Creates a new link command above the selected link command.

Delete	Removes the selected link command from the control.

Delete All	Removes all link commands from the control.

Each row of buttons is a link command.

Related Concepts


Link Events

A link command runs in response to some event that occurs in a dialog box (or Toolbar). The first pick list button in a link command (the Event pick list button) shows what specific event you want to trigger the link command.

Tip

A control can have more than one link command respond to the same event. The order in which the link commands appear in the Object Link dialog box is the order they will run.

The next table lists each event and what it detects.

Event	Will trigger the link command when

Init	The dialog box is about to appear. Use this to set initial settings.

Init_Complete	Available only when adding a link command to the dialog box itself, this event occurs immediately after all controls have run all link commands that respond to Init.

OKExit	The user closes the dialog box. The link command runs before the dialog box closes.

CancelExit	The user cancels the dialog box. The link command runs before the dialog box closes.

Clicked	The user clicks the control.

Right_bdown	The user right-clicks the control.

Left_bdown	The user points to the control and is holding down the left mouse button. Releasing the button generates a Clicked event.

Doubleclick	The user double-clicks the control.

Valuechanged	The user changes the value of the control. This event occurs anytime the value is changed (by the user, by a link command, or by a macro command).

key:keystroke	The user presses the key keystroke. When you choose key from the event pick list, it flashes to indicate that you must press a key. Press the key you want to generate the event. The key displays after key: in the pick list button when it is set. For example, key:Ctrl+F5 indicates that the link command is triggered by Ctrl+F5.

Activate	The user has chosen the control for manipulation. For example, clicking an edit field generates this event. Use Valuechanged to trap the final result.

Deactivate	The user has chosen another control, leaving this control inactive.

Enter	The user presses Enter (for edit field controls only).

Lineup	The user increases the scroll bar's value by clicking a scroll arrow (available only on scroll bar controls).

Linedown	The user decreases the scroll bar's value by clicking a scroll arrow (available only on scroll bar controls).

Pageup	The user increases the scroll bar's value by clicking it between a scroll arrow and the scroll box (available only on scroll bar controls).

Pagedown	The user decreases the scroll bar's value by clicking it between a scroll arrow and the scroll box (available only on scroll bar controls).

Thumb	The user clicks or drags the scroll bar's scroll box (scroll bar controls only).

Editdynamic	The user is inserting or deleting characters in the combo box's edit field (combo box controls only).

Trigger	This event cannot be generated by any user action; use it to set link commands that can be run only by other link commands. Use the link command TRIGGER to generate this event.

Alarm	The time of day specified in the timer's Alarm Time property has been reached (time controls only).

Timer	The amount of time indicated in the timer's Timer Interval property has elapsed (time controls only).

Related Concepts


To connect a control to cells or other controls
To connect a control to cells or other controls,

1	Select the control you want to connect.

2	Click Dialog [image] Connect, then select the cell (or control) you want to link to. The linked object's name or address appears in the Target edit field; the control's name appears in Source.

3	If you want to immediately send changes in the control's value to the target cell or control, check Dynamic Connection; otherwise, the target object will be updated only when the dialog box is closed.

Tip

To delete a "connected" link, click Dialog [image] Set Links, select the correct link, then click Delete.

Related Topics


To add a link command to a control
To add a link command to a control,

1	Select the control, then click Dialog [image] Set Links.

2	Click Add to create a new link command.

3	Point to the first pick list button (the Event pick list). Hold down the left mouse button, drag to the event that should initiate the link command, then release.

4	Point to the second button (the Action pick list). Hold down the mouse button, drag to the desired command, then release.

5	The remaining pick list buttons change, depending on which action you chose in step 4. Set the remaining buttons as needed.

6	Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create additional link commands.

Related Topics

More Info


To link a dialog box to Help
To link a dialog box to Help,

1	Select the dialog box and click Dialog [image] Set Links.

2	Click Add and create the following link command:

On Init Set HelpContext@HelpFile To Help Context

In the edit field to the right of Set, type the WinHelp context string following by an at-sign (@) and the name of the Help file. The name of the Help file cannot include a path.

When creating the link command, if you do not see Help on the object pick list, click <Enter> and type Help in the edit field.

Tip

To test the link, click the Test button, then press F1. The Help topic you specified appears.

For details on how to create Windows Help files, refer to the Microsoft Windows Software Development Kit (SDK).

Related Topics


To link a Help button to Help
To link a Help button to Help,

1	Select the Help button and click Dialog [image] Set Links.

2	Click Add and create the following link command:

On Init Set HelpContext@HelpFile To Help Context

In the edit field to the right of Set, type the WinHelp context string following by an at-sign (@) and the name of the Help file. The name of the Help file cannot include a path.

When creating the link command, if you do not see Help on the object pick list, click <Enter> and type Help in the edit field.

3	Click Add again and create the following link command:

On Clicked Execute Help Context

Tips

To test the link, click the Test button, then click the Help button. The Help topic you specified appears.

For details on how to create Windows Help files, refer to the Microsoft Windows Software Development Kit (SDK).

Related Topics


About Data Modeling Desktop

Data Modeling Desktop lets you create reports complete with cross tabs and subtotals by clicking and dragging rows and columns.

To update a Data Modeling Desktop report, reopen it and add the new data. Data Modeling Desktop updates report data whenever you change the data in the spreadsheet.

If your data spans more than 100 years, format dates in Corel Quattro Pro with a 4-digit year format (i.e. 4/4/1901).

Data Modeling Desktop help

Send 3-D Notebook Data to Data Modeling Desktop

To send a 2-D block of data to Data Modeling Desktop


To send a 2-D block of data to Data Modeling Desktop
To send a 2-D block of data to Data Modeling Desktop,

1	From the Windows Start task bar, click Start [image] Corel WordPerfect Suite 8 [image] Accessories [image] Data Modeling Desktop.

2	Specify the block of cells you want to send to Data Modeling Desktop in the Cell Block To Send field. For example, A1..H145.

3	Specify the target block for the results from Data Modeling Desktop in the Cell For Returned Data field.

4	Specify a Data Exchange Method. If you want an active DDE link between your Data Modeling Desktop report and another application, set the Data Exchange Method to Hot. Otherwise, leave the Data Exchange Method set to Cold.

Data Modeling Desktop opens a blank report, and the data from the notebook appears in the Source window. The Source window's title bar displays the name of the notebook where the data is from.

Related Topics

More Info


To send a 3-D block of data to Data Modeling Desktop
To send a 3-D block of data to Data Modeling Desktop,

1	From the Windows Start task bar, click Start [image] Corel WordPerfect Suite 8 [image] Accessories [image] Data Modeling Desktop.

2	Enter a 3-D block in the Send Data to Data Modeling Desktop dialog box. For example, A..C:A2..D6. (You can use a group name as part of the address if the 3-D block includes all sheets in a group.) Click OK to open the Send 3-D Data dialog box.

3	In the New Column edit field, on the Send 3-D Data dialog box, enter a name for the additional column in the Source window for each row's sheet identifier. Sheet appears by default. Click OK.

You can change the sheet names being sent. If you do, be sure to separate the names with semicolons.

Related Topics

More Info


Tips for Creating Lines and Shapes

You can draw lines and shapes in any chart with the tools on the toolbar. You  can quickly add many shapes using the Chart and Drawing Tools Toobar. Here are a few rules and tips:

To add a line or shape to a chart or map, click the chart or map, then draw the line or shape.

You can add lines from the toolbar or click Insert [image] Shape.

Pick the correct Aspect Ratio for a chart before you begin to draw; otherwise, you may have to resize, reposition, or even redraw elements to fit the final format.

To draw a shape, click a tool on the Toolbar. To keep the tool selected after you use it from the Chart and Drawing Tools Toolbar, double-click the tool. If you double-click a tool to keep it active, click it again to deactivate it.

To select fill color and background colors, fill pattern (if any), and border color and style of an object before you draw it, click a color on the Chart Color Schemes Toolbar, then click the drawing tool from the Chart and Drawing Tools Toolbar. To view multiple Toolbars, click View [image] Toolbars.

To change the color and pattern of an object after you create it, right-click the object and click the Properties option.

You can also use the Chart Color Schemes Toolbar to change an object's attributes after you create it. You can change the palette displayed in the Toolbar, or create and save your own custom palettes.

Use the Draw palette (available from the palette list box in the Chart Color Schemes Toolbar) to add color to lines, polylines, freehand lines, and arrows, either before or after you draw them. Choices from this palette also make filled objects appear borderless because the fill color and border color are the same.

Related Concepts


Lines and Arrows

Use the Line tool [image] to draw straight lines. Use the Arrow tool [image] to draw a straight line with an arrowhead at the end.

To draw a line or arrow

Related Concepts


To draw a line or arrow
To draw a line or arrow,

1	Click the Line tool [image] or the Arrow tool [image].

2	Place the pointer where you want to start the line or arrow.

3	Drag to where you want the line or arrow to end, then release the mouse button.

Tips

If you are using the Arrow tool, the arrowhead appears at the end of the line where you release the mouse button.

To customize a Line or Arrow, right-click it, click the Properties option, and change its properties.

The properties for lines and arrows that you draw on a sheet differ from the properties of lines and arrows drawn in a chart window.

Related Topics

More Info


Polylines and Polygons

The Polyline tool [image] draws lines that have more than one segment. The Polygon tool [image] creates closed shapes with as many sides as you want.

To draw a polyline or polygon

Related Concepts


To draw a polyline or polygon
To draw a polyline or polygon,

1	Click the Polyline tool [image] or the Polygon tool [image].

2	Place the pointer on the part of the chart where you want to begin the line or segment.

3	Drag to where you want the first segment or side to end and the second segment or side to begin, then release the mouse button.

4	Create additional segments or sides by dragging the mouse and releasing the mouse button at the end of each segment.

5	When you are ready to create the last side, double-click or right-click. Corel Quattro Pro completes the shape for you. You can also close the polygon by clicking very close to the starting point.

Tip

To customize the Polyline or Polygon, right-click it, click Properties, and change its properties.

Related Topics

More Info


Freehand Shapes

The Freehand Polyline tool [image] draws a line anywhere you drag the mouse. The Freehand Polygon tool [image] creates a closed shape; you drag the mouse to draw the shape's border.

To draw a freehand line or polygon

Related Concepts


To draw a freehand line or polygon
To draw a freehand line or polygon,

1	Click the Freehand Polyline tool [image] or the Freehand Polygon tool [image].

2	Position the mouse pointer where you want the figure to begin.

3	Hold down the mouse button and drag to draw the figure.

4	Release the mouse button to complete the polyline or polygon.

Tip

To customize the Freehand Line or Freehand Polygon, right-click it, click Properties, and change its properties.

Related Topics

More Info


Rectangles and Ellipses

The Rectangle tool [image] on the Toolbar draws squares and rectangles. The Rounded Rectangle tool [image] creates squares and rectangles with rounded edges. The Ellipse tool [image] draws circles and ovals.

To draw a rectangle or ellipse

Related Concepts


To draw a rectangle or ellipse
To draw a rectangle or ellipse,

1	Click the Rectangle tool [image], Rounded Rectangle tool [image], or Ellipse tool [image].

2	Drag the figure to the size you want, then release the mouse.

Tips

To create a perfect square or circle, press Shift while you drag the mouse to create the shape.

To customize the Ellipse, Rectangle, or Rounded Rectangle, right-click it, click Properties, and change its properties.

The properties for rectangles, rounded rectangles, and ellipses that you draw on a sheet differ from the properties of the same objects drawn in a chart window.

Related Topics

More Info


Selecting Chart Objects

You do not have to select an object to change its properties (just right-click it and click Properties). Before you can move or resize an object, though, you must select it.

Right-click any toolbar, then click Chart and Drawing Tools.

To select a single object, click the object.

To select an object group, click any object in the group.

To select several objects individually, click an object, then hold down Shift while you click each object. To deselect an object, click it again while you still hold down Shift.

To select all objects in a chart window, click Edit [image] Select All.

To select every object in an area, click [image], place the pointer just outside one corner of the area, then drag diagonally until the selection box encloses all the objects.

You can tell that an object is selected when handles appear at its corners and sides.

Related Concepts


About Grouping and Ungrouping Objects

You group two or more objects in a chart when you want them to be treated as a single object in subsequent operations. For example, you might group all the objects in a complex drawing to ensure that no objects are left behind or shift position when you move them.

Once you group objects, you can move and resize them with the mouse.

If you ungroup a group that had other groups nested within it, these groups remain intact. You must use Format [image] Ungroup again to ungroup them.

To group and ungroup objects

Related Concepts


To group and ungroup objects
To group and ungroup objects,

To group objects, click in the chart, select the objects by pressing Shift while you click the objects, then click Format [image] Group.

To ungroup objects, click in the chart, select a grouped object and click Format [image] Ungroup.

Tips

To change the properties of every object in a group in one operation, right-click an object in the group (NOT an area between objects) and click Properties, then adjust property settings.

To change the fill settings and border settings of all solid objects in the group simultaneously, right-click any toolbar and click Chart Color Schemes. Click the group, then click a color on the Toolbar.

To nest groups within other groups, select any combination of groups and individual objects, then click Format [image] Group. Once you group objects, you can move and resize them with the mouse.

If the group had other groups nested within it, these groups remain intact. You must use Format [image] Ungroup again to ungroup them.

To group dialog box controls, right-click the parent control, click the Properties option, then set the Attach Child property to Yes.

Related Topics

More Info


To arrange object layers
To arrange object layers,

1	Select the object (or group of objects).

2	Click Format [image] Object Order, then click one of the following options:

Bring Forward moves the object one layer closer to the top.

Send Backward moves the object one layer closer to the bottom.

Bring To Front brings the object to the front or top of the layers.

Send To Back sends the object to the bottom layer.

Tip

You can also arrange object layers using tools on the Property Bar.

Related Topics


About Aligning Objects

Use the Format [image] Align, Position, and Space options to align objects in the Chart window and the Dialog window.

Here are these tips to consider when aligning objects:

You can choose more than one of the alignment options in sequence.

You can also use Snap To Grid to align chart and dialog objects. Right-click the chart/dialog window title bar, click Grid, then click Snap To Grid.

Tip

When you select an object group as one of the objects to be aligned, Corel Quattro Pro aligns the group as if it were a single object.

To align objects

To center objects

To space objects


To align objects
To align objects,

1	Select the objects you want to align.

2	Click Format [image] Align, then choose one of these options:

Left lines up the left sides of the selected objects.

Right lines up the right sides of the selected objects.

Top lines up the top edges of the selected objects.

Bottom lines up the bottom edges of the selected objects.

Related Topics

More Info


To center objects
To center objects,

1	Select the objects you want to align.

2	Click Format [image] Position, then click one of these options:

Horizontal Center lines up the centers of the objects as though they were beads on an invisible horizontal string.

Vertical Center lines up the centers of the objects as though they were beads on an invisible vertical string.

Related Topics

More Info


To space objects
To space objects,

1	Select the objects you want to align.

2	Click Format [image] Space, then click one of these options:

Horizontal Space horizontally spaces objects by the amount of pixels you specify.

Vertical Space vertically spaces objects by the amount of pixels you specify.

Related Topics

More Info


To move and resize chart objects
To move and resize chart objects,

Use one or more of these methods:

To move the object, drag any area except its handles.

To resize only height or width, drag a top, bottom, or side handle.

To change the height and width at the same time, drag a corner handle diagonally.

Related Topics


Changing Object Properties

The easiest and most efficient way to customize an object's appearance is to right-click it and click the Properties. Option. Make changes to as many properties as you want, then click OK to apply all the changes.

Drawn objects have many of the same properties as chart objects. For example, the rectangle properties are also found in the chart pane and bar series properties.

When objects are grouped, you can right-click any object in the group (NOT the area between the objects) and click the Properties opion. You can then make changes that are applied to the entire group.

Related Concepts


To create text boxes in a chart
To create text boxes in a chart,

1	Click the Text tool [image].

2	Drag out the text box to the size you want. When you release the mouse, a blinking insertion point signals that you can type. (If you click the chart instead of dragging the mouse, a default-size text box appears.)

3	Type text. As you type, Corel Quattro Pro wraps the text to fit the width of this box, and the depth of the box increases automatically.

4	When you finish typing, click outside the text box to deselect it.

Tips

You can create text boxes on a notebook sheet using the Text tool.

To enhance the look of the text, right-click the text box and click Properties.

Use standard keyboard procedures to edit the text in text boxes. Cut and Copy apply to the text when text is highlighted. When text is not highlighted, but the text box has handles around it, you cut or copy the text and the text box. To delete a text box, cut it, or move the cursor to the end of a line and press Delete.

Related Topics


To create a text box that references text in a cell
To create a text box that references text in a cell,

1	Click the Text tool [image].

2	Drag out the text box to the size you want. When you release the mouse, a blinking insertion point signals that you can type. (If you click the chart instead of dragging the mouse, a default-size text box appears.)

3	Type a backslash (\), then a forward slash (/), followed by the cell reference (for example, A1) and a closing backslash.

Example

If you enter \/A:A1\ in a text box and cell A1 contains the label First Qtr Sales, the text First Qtr Sales appears in the text box when you display the chart.

Related Topics


To create a text box with text pasted from the Clipboard
To create a text box with text pasted from the Clipboard,

You can paste text into a new or existing text box:

1	Copy text to the Clipboard (from Corel WordPerfect, for example).

2	Create a new text box with the Text tool [image], or click in an existing text box where you want to insert the text.

3	Click the Paste button [image].

Related Topics


To add bullets to text boxes
To add bullets to text boxes,

1	From within a text box, type a backslash character (\).

2	Type the bullet code you want to use. For example, BLT1 or BLT2.

These are the available bullets and the codes that create them:

3	Type a closing backslash character (\).

Tip

You can also create bullet charts, charts that consist of bulleted lists. Bullet charts are easier to revise because their text is based on notebook data.

The bullet code appears when you are editing the text, but the bullet itself appears when you are done editing. For example, if you enter \blt1\Sales Report in a text box, when you display the chart, a square bullet is displayed to the left of Sales Report.

Related Topics


To change text box properties
To change text box properties,

1	Right-click a text box and click the Properties option.

2	Change the text properties.

Tips

Use the Alignment property to make the text left-justified, centered, or right-justified. Alignment also turns wordwrap off and on, and sets tab stops at regular intervals.

Use the Chart Button property to turn a text box into a "live" button in a slide show. When clicked, a chart button can run a macro or show a different chart.

Related Topics


To set text box properties before you create a text box
To set text box properties before you create a text box,

1	Right-click the Text tool.

2	Click Text Box Properties.

3	Choose a text font and size, set the alignment, or change any of the other Text Box properties.

Tips

To create "unboxed" text, set the Fill Settings style to None, and choose the blank (upper left) style on the Box Settings tab.

To preset just the Fill Settings and Border Settings of a text box, click a color square on the Chart Color Schemes Toolbar, then click the Text tool.

The default text box Fill Settings and Border Settings change whenever you click a palette color on the Chart Color Schemes Toolbar, even if you previously used the Text tool properties to preset these properties.

Related Topics


To create text boxes with 3-D text
To create text boxes with 3-D text,

1	Right-click the text box.

2	Click Text Box Properties.

3	Click Text Style.

4	Select 3-D, then specify the type of 3-D text, perspective, and shading.

Related Topics


To add data to a chart
To add data to a chart,

1	Click a chart, or open a chart in a chart window.

2	Click the Link To Cells tool [image] on the Chart and Drawing Tools Toolbar.

3	Drag to create a rectangle where you want the data to appear, then release the mouse button.

If cells are currently selected on a notebook sheet, a linked picture of them appears in the chart.

If only a single cell is selected on a notebook sheet, the Select Cells dialog box appears.

4	Specify the cells you want to appear in the chart, select whether you want to display column or row borders or grid lines for the cells, and check whether you want to maintain the same aspect ratio used on the notebook.

Tips

The cells in the chart update with any changes you make to the data or properties of the notebook cells.

You cannot select noncontiguous selections with the Link To Cells tool.

Related Topics


About Importing Graphics

You can enhance your charts, maps, slides, and notebook sheets with graphics in most popular graphics formats.

Corel Quattro Pro imports graphics files in any of these formats:

.BMP	(Bitmap) The format used in Windows paint programs, like Paintbrush, and the Windows Control Panel for wallpaper.

.CDR	(Corel Draw) The filename extension for files created in CorelDRAW.

.CGM	(Computer Graphics Metafile) The most common vector-based clip art format. To install CGM import, you must select it under Accessories in a custom installation of the suite.

.CLP	A graphic format used by Corel Quattro Pro for DOS.

.CPT	(Corel Photo Paint) The filename extension for bitmap files created by CorelPHOTO-PAINT.

.EPS	(Encapsulated PostScript) The file format universally understood by PostScript printers and image setters. The file contains PostScript code for high-quality output plus a bitmap of the image for lower-resolution screen display. (If the .EPS file does not contain a bitmap image, you cannot import it into Corel Quattro Pro.)

.GIF	(Graphics Interchange Format) A bitmap format originating on CompuServe Information Service (CIS) and widely used on other electronic bulletin boards.

.JPG	(JPEG Bitmap) A standard format developed by the Joint Photographers Experts Group, allowing transfer of files between a wide variety of platforms, using superior compression techniques.

.PCX	A bitmap format supported by many programs, including Paintbrush and Corel Quattro Pro for DOS.

.PIC	The chart format used in the DOS versions of 1-2-3.

.TGA	(Truevision Targa Bitmap) The filename extension for files in Targa format which is a bitmap format commonly used to store digitized color photographs.

.TIF	(Tag Image File Format) A bitmap file format often used for scanned or gray scale images. Because .TIF files can be large, they are often compressed.

.WMF	(Windows Metafile) Format used by many Windows programs.

.WPG	A graphic format used by Corel Presentations.

To import graphics in other formats

Related Concepts


To insert a Clipart image from the Scrapbook
To insert a Clipart image from the Scrapbook,

1	Open the chart, map, slide, or notebook sheet where you want to insert a graphic.

2	Click [image] on the toolbar to open the Scrapbook.

3	Browse through the category folders until you find the Clipart image you want to insert.

4	Drag the image from the Scrapbook into your document.

5	Size and move the image as you would any other drawing object.

For more information on finding topics in the Scrapbook, click [image].

Tips

Thousands of Clipart images are provided with the Corel WordPerfect Suite, only some of which are copied to your hard drive. The remaining Clipart images and photos are located on the Corel WordPerfect Suite Applications CD (or on your network). If you want to insert one of the images on CD, place the Applications CD in your CD drive, then click the CD Clipart tab in the Scrapbook.

All the Clipart images in the Scrapbook are in Corel WordPerfect graphics format (.WPG). If you want to insert images in other graphics formats such as .JPG, .GIF, or .PCX, click Insert [image] Graphics [image] From File. Select the graphics format you want from the File type drop-down list, then locate and select the image you want to insert.

Related Topics

More Info


To import graphics in other formats
To import graphics in other formats,

1	Open the chart, map, slide, or notebook sheet where you want to insert a graphic.

2	Click Insert [image] Graphics [image] From File.

3	Browse through the category folders until you find the Clipart image you want to insert.

4	Drag the image from the Scrapbook into your document.

5	Size and move the image as you would any other drawing object.

Tip

You can also click Insert [image] File, then specify the name of the graphic you want to insert.

Related Topics

More Info


About Cropping, Resizing, and Tiling Bitmaps

When you import a bitmap graphic file (.BMP, .GIF, .JPG, .PCX, or .TIF format), Corel Quattro Pro places the graphic in a rectangle. You can also fill any object in a chart window or a drawn object on the notebook with a bitmapped graphic.

A bitmap fill style has four options:

Crop To Fit displays only the part of the graphic that fits within the object.

Tile To Fit fills adjacent blocks of the object with copies of the same bitmapped graphic.

Shrink to Fit (the default) shrinks or enlarges the bitmap to fit within the object.

3-D Perspective (for 3-D chart walls only) adjusts a bitmap to simulate the depth of a 3-D wall.

To crop a bitmap

To resize an imported bitmap

Related Concepts


To crop a bitmap
To crop a bitmap,

1	Right-click it and click the Properties option.

2	Click the Fill Settings tab.

3	Click Crop to Fit, then click OK.

4	Select the bitmap to reveal the handles.

5	Drag one of the handles. As you decrease the size of the box, Corel Quattro Pro eliminates parts of the bitmap. (The bitmap will not expand if you increase the size of the rectangle beyond its original dimensions.)

Tips

You can right-click the rectangle, choose the Properties option, then change Border Color and Border Style to give the bitmap a fancy border.

The upper left corner of the bitmap is a reference point that cannot be changed or eliminated. If you drag a handle on the left or top side of the bitmap, Corel Quattro Pro crops the right or bottom side of the bitmap, respectively.

Related Topics

More Info


To resize an imported bitmap
To resize an imported bitmap,

Select the bitmap, then drag one of the handles.

To resize only height, drag a top or bottom handle.

To resize only width, drag a side handle.

To change the height and width at the same time, drag a corner handle diagonally.

To maintain the aspect ratio as you size, hold down the Shift key as you drag a corner handle.

Related Topics

More Info


To change sections of .CGM and .CLP graphics
To change sections of .CGM and .CLP graphics,

1	Select the graphic.

2	Click Format [image] Ungroup. Handles appear around the individual objects of the graphic.

3	Right-click any individual objects, then click Properties to display and change properties such as the Fill Settings and Border Settings.

4	When you are finished, select all the graphic's objects and click Format [image] Group to make the graphic a single object again.

Related Topics


About Exporting Graphics

You can export the entire contents of a chart window into other file formats. The exported file can be used in other programs or sent to a 35mm slide service bureau for processing. Corel Quattro Pro exports to these file formats:

.BMP	(Bitmap) The format used in Windows paint programs, like Paintbrush, and the Windows Control Panel for wallpaper.

.CGM	(Computer Graphics Metafile) The most common vector-based clip art format.

.EPS	(Encapsulated PostScript) The file format universally understood by PostScript printers and image setters. The file contains PostScript code for high-quality output plus a bitmap of the image for lower-resolution screen display. (If the .EPS file does not contain a bitmap image, you cannot import it into Corel Quattro Pro.)

.GIF	(Graphics Interchange Format) A bitmap format originating on CompuServe Information Service (CIS) and widely used on other electronic bulletin boards. Gif files can only be exported if the user is in 256 color (or less) mode.

.JPG	(JPEG Bitmap) A standard format developed by the Joint Photographers Experts Group, allowing transfer of files between a wide variety of platforms, using superior compression techniques. .JPG files can only export in true color mode. (Available when using the High Color (16 bit) color palette.)

.PCX	A bitmap format supported by many programs, including Paintbrush and Corel Quattro Pro for DOS.

.TIF	(Tag Image File Format) A bitmap file format often used for scanned on gray scale images. Because TIF files can be large, they are often compressed.

.WMF	(Windows Metafile) Format used by many Windows programs.

.WPG	A graphic format used by Corel Presentations.

If you are exporting a chart to send to a 35mm slide bureau, be sure to set the chart's Aspect Ratio to 35mm Slide.

To export a chart

Related Concepts


To export a chart
To export a chart,

1	Click the chart, then click Chart [image] Export to File.

2	Choose a destination and file name. Be sure to use the filename extension that matches the type of file you want to create.

3	If you are exporting to a .TIF file, you can choose a compression method: PackBits or None (no compression). There are many types of TIF files; make sure the application to which you are exporting can accept the compression method you choose.

4	Check the Bitmap Gray Scale option if you want to convert the colors in the chart to levels of gray.

Tips

The Bitmap Gray Scale option is useful if you are importing the file to a program that can accept only gray scale TIF files.

When you export a chart, you also export any drawn objects, imported graphics, or text boxes associated with the chart.

.GIF files must be exported when you are in 256 color (or less) mode.

.JPG files can only export in true color mode.

The Bitmap Gray Scale option is not available for .EPS files.

If you are exporting a chart to send to a 35mm slide bureau, be sure to set the chart's Aspect Ratio to 35mm Slide.

Related Topics

More Info


Color Palettes

The Chart Color Schemes Toolbar displays a color palette you can use to change the fill and border properties of chart elements and drawn objects. To show the Chart Color Schemes Toolbar, right-click a toolbar, then click Chart Color Schemes.

Each palette square has these properties:

Fill Settings selects the foreground and background color the object, and sets the fill style (none, solid, pattern, wash, or bitmap graphic).

Border Settings sets the color and thickness of the lines that form the boundary of the object.

The large square to the right of the palette displays the active palette selection. Objects you create with a drawing tool display the Fill Settings and Border Settings shown in this square. To create an object with different properties, click another palette color, then click a drawing tool and begin drawing.

Corel Quattro Pro has several predefined color palettes gathered by theme. For example, the colors in the Summer palette are mostly bright and sunny, those of Winter are dark, the Washes palette displays different colors distributed over a white background, and so on. There is also a Monochrome palette that offers 20 distinctive black-and-white pattern choices.

To select a color palette, choose it from the list box. The palette's selections appear on the Toolbar. You can use colors from any number of palettes in the same chart.

To change the color of a chart object

To create a custom color for an object

To define a new color for a palette

To save modified colors in a new palette

To change colors of an existing palette

To delete a palette

Related Concepts


To change the color of a chart object
To change the color of a chart object,

1	Select the object.

2	Right-click a Toolbar.

3	Click Chart Color Schemes.

4	Optionally, select a palette name from the drop-down list at the left of the Toolbar. The default palette is Standard.

5	Click a color.

Tip

The chart object uses the Border Settings of your selection. If you want to change an object's Fill Settings but not its Border Settings, or vice-versa, right-click it, click the Properties option, then make changes to the individual properties. This technique applies to all chart objects, not just drawn ones.

Related Topics

More Info


Custom Colors

Corel Quattro Pro provides three different models for creating new colors: HSB, RGB, and CMY. Only one model displays at a time, but all three update when you change a color setting. Choose whichever model you prefer.

HSB	Stands for Hue, Saturation, and Brightness. Hue is the basic color: red, yellow, orange, or green, for example. Saturation refers to the amount of white mixed with the hue. Brightness is the amount of light energy present. When brightness is zero, no light is present, and the result is black for every hue and saturation value. By adjusting the saturation and brightness scales in the HSB model, you can easily control the amount of gray in a color.

RGB	Is named for its primary colors, Red, Green, and Blue. Using this model, you mix different amounts of red, green, and blue to form all other colors.

CMY	Stands for Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow. You mix different amounts of these colors to form all other colors. Commercial printing houses often use this model to mix colors.

To create a custom color for an object

Related Concepts


To create a custom color for an object
To create a custom color for an object,

1	Right-click the object and click the Properties option.

2	Choose the color property you want to change (Fill Settings or Border Settings, for example).

3	Click the color control you want to set.

4	Click More.

5	Use the Hue/Saturation Level/Luminosity or Red/Green/Blue color models to set a custom color.

6	Click Add To Custom Colors, then click OK.

Related Topics

More Info


Custom Color Palettes

When you cannot find a color in an existing palette, you can define your own. You can then save colors in your own palettes.

To define a new color for a palette

To save modified colors in a new palette

To change colors of an existing palette

To delete a palette

Related Concepts


To define a new color for a palette
To define a new color for a palette,

1	Right-click a Toolbar.

2	Click Chart Color Schemes.

3	Select a palette name from the drop-down list at the left of the Toolbar.

4	Right-click a color square on the palette, then click the Properties option.

5	Change the Fill Settings and Border Settings properties.

Related Topics

More Info


To save modified colors in a new palette
To save modified colors in a new palette,

1	Right-click a Toolbar.

2	Click Chart Color Schemes.

3	Click <Edit> in the drop-down palette list at the left of the Toolbar.

4	Type a new palette name in the edit field, then click New.

Tip

The new palette is saved with Corel Quattro Pro, not with the notebook, so you can use it anytime you are working in a chart window.

Related Topics

More Info


To change colors of an existing palette
To change colors of an existing palette,

1	Right-click a Toolbar.

2	Click Chart Color Schemes.

3	Select a palette name from the drop-down list at the left of the Toolbar.

4	Define the new color(s).

5	Click <Edit> in the palette list.

6	Click a palette name, and click Replace.

Related Topics

More Info


To delete a palette
To delete a palette,

1	Right-click a Toolbar.

2	Click Chart Colors.

3	Click <Edit> in the drop-down palette list at the left of the Toolbar.

4	Click the name of the palette you want to delete,  then click Delete.

Related Topics

More Info


About Clipart

Use Clipart to add interest, emphasis, and underscore ideas in notebooks, slides, and charts.

Thousands of Clipart images and photos are provided with the Corel WordPerfect Suite. During a standard installation, only some of these images are copied to your hard drive. The remaining Clipart images are stored on the Corel WordPerfect Suite CD. You can drag the .WPG images from the Clipart Scrapbook and drop them into a Corel WordPerfect, Corel Presentations, or Corel Quattro Pro document.

You can also insert other types of images into your documents. Corel Presentations can automatically read and convert images in many standard formats, including .JPG, .BMP, .PCX, and more.

You can add images to the Scrapbook by copying and pasting .WPG files into the Clipart folder. You can also create your own group of images and display them as a new category folder in the Scrapbook by creating a new folder, then copying and pasting .WPG image files into it.

To insert a Clipart image from the Scrapbook

To insert a Clipart image from the CD-ROM

To add new folders to the Scrapbook

To add .WPG files to the Scrapbook

To delete a .WPG file from the Scrapbook

Related Topics

More Info


To insert a Corel image from the CD-ROM
To insert a Corel image from the CD-ROM,

1	Click [image] on the toolbar to open the Scrapbook.

2	Insert the Corel WordPerfect Suite Application CD in your CD-ROM drive.

3	Click the CD Clipart tab in Scrapbook.

4	Browse through the Clipart folder categories until you find the image you want to insert.

5	Drag the image from the Scrapbook into your document.

6	Size and move the image as you would any other drawing object.

Tip

You can also click Insert [image] Graphics [image] From File, then specify the name of the graphic you want to insert.

Related Topics

More Info


To add .WPG files to the Scrapbook
To add .WPG files to the Scrapbook,

1	If necessary, create the image you want to add to the Scrapbook, and save it as a .WPG file.

2	In a file management dialog box, go to the folder where you saved the image or group of images.

3	Right-click the image, then click Copy.

4	Go to the Corel WordPerfect Suite Clipart folder (if you chose a standard installation, the path to the Clipart folder will be \\Corel\Suite8\Graphics\Clipart).

5	Right-click outside all the image files, then click Paste from the QuickMenu.

Tips

To copy multiple image files, press the Ctrl key and click each file you want. To copy a range of image files, click the first file at the start of the range, then press Shift and click the last file at the end of the range.

You can copy a folder of image files into the Clipart folder for access through the Scrapbook.

Related Topics

More Info


To delete a .WPG file from the Scrapbook
To delete a .WPG file from the Scrapbook,

1	In a file management dialog box, go to the Corel WordPerfect Suite Clipart folder (if you chose a standard installation, the path to the Clipart folder will be \\Corel\Suite8\Graphics\Clipart).

2	If necessary, double-click a category folder containing the image you want to delete.

3	Right-click the .WPG image file, then click Delete.

Tip

You can restore a deleted Corel Clipart image by reinstalling Graphics using a Custom installation.

Related Topics

More Info


To add new folders to the Scrapbook
To add new folders to the Scrapbook,

1	In a file management dialog box, go to the Corel WordPerfect Suite Clipart folder (if you chose a standard installation, the path to the Clipart folder will be \\Corel\Suite8\Graphics\Clipart).

2	Right-click outside all the current folders, then click New Folder.

3	Select the folder, then click the title to change it from "New folder" to the name you want.

4	Copy and paste .WPG image files from other categories or folders outside (or inside) the Scrapbook into your new category folder.

Tips

To copy multiple image files, press the Ctrl key and click each file you want. To copy a range of image files, click the first file at the start of the range, then press Shift and click the last file at the end of the range.

You can copy a folder of image files into the Clipart folder for access through the Scrapbook.

Related Topics

More Info


Selecting Cells

Before you can enter data or perform an action in a notebook, you need to select the cell or cells you want to affect.

To Select	Do This
A cell	Click the cell.
Cells (a block)	Drag by clicking a cell in one corner, holding down the left mouse button, moving to the opposite corner and releasing the mouse button. Or click one corner, hold down the Shift key, and click the opposite corner.
A noncontiguous selection (a selection consisting of more than one disconnected selection of cells)	Hold down the Ctrl key while you drag each selection of cells.
Every cell in a given row or column	Click the corresponding row number or column letter in the border.
All cells in the active notebook sheet	Click Edit [image] Select All.
A cell on another sheet	Click the sheet tab, then click the cell you want.
A 3-D selection (cells with the same coordinates in multiple sheets)	First select the cells in the first sheet, then hold down the Shift key while clicking the tab of the last sheet for the selection. A black line appears under the tabs of the selected sheets.
You can also use the keyboard to select in a notebook. Click here [image] for more information.

When you select cells, the active cell within the selection contains the selector, while the rest of the selected cells are highlighted.

Related Concepts


Editing Entries

There are two ways to change the data in cells:

Make Changes to the Entire Cell

To change one cell, simply click the cell and type a new entry or select appearance option. When you press Enter or click the checkmark in the input line, the new entry replaces the old.

To make appearance changes to one or more cells, click one cell or drag across multiple cells, then select appearance options from the Property Bar. You can change the font, font size, text color, or attributes such as bold, italic, superscript, subscript, and more.

Make Changes Inside One Cell

To make changes inside a cell, choose any of the following methods:

Double-click the cell

Click the cell, then click anywhere in the input line (above the column letters)

Press F2

The contents of the active cell appear in the input line.

You can move the insertion point by clicking in the cell or input line or by using the arrow keys. Backspace deletes characters to the left of the insertion point, and Del deletes characters to the right.

Once you are in a cell, drag across text you want to change or click where you want to add new text, then press Del to erase a selection, use Cut Copy or Past to move text to a different location, or select text appearance options from the Property Bar. You can have multiple font and font attributes in the same cell.

When you first enter Edit mode, you are also in Insert mode . Any characters you type are inserted to the left of the insertion point. To write over existing characters, press Ins to switch to Overtype mode. Press Ins again to return to Insert mode.

Corel Quattro Pro does not store your changes in the cell until you click the checkmark or press Enter. Until then, you can click the X button or press Esc to return the entry to its original state.

Related Concepts


About Erasing Entries

There are several ways to erase data:

You can erase the contents of a selected cells but leave the properties (alignment, numeric format, font, and so on) unchanged.

You can erase the contents of cells and remove property settings.

You can erase and move the contents of cells to the Clipboard.

You can remove the data and the cells containing it by deleting entire or partial rows, columns, or sheets.

Undoing an Erase

If you accidentally erase data, use the Undo button [image] on the Toolbar or Edit [image] Undo to restore it.

To erase without changing cell properties

To erase cell properties without changing contents

To erase and remove cell properties

To erase and move data to the Clipboard

Related Topics


To erase cell properties without changing contents
To erase cell properties without changing contents,

Click Edit [image] Clear [image] Formats.

Tips

Clear Formats does not affect column width or row height.

Unnecessary cell formatting can add significantly to the size of a notebook file. Clear Formats removes unnecessary formatting and reduces the size of the notebook file.

Related Topics

More Info


To erase without changing cell properties
To erase without changing cell properties,

Click Edit [image] Clear [image] Values.

Related Topics

More Info


To erase and remove cell properties
To erase and remove cell properties,

Click Edit [image] Clear [image] Cells.

Related Topics

More Info


To erase and move data to the Clipboard
To erase and move data to the Clipboard,

Click Edit [image] Cut.

Related Topics

More Info


About Copying and Moving Data

There are three ways to copy and move cells in Corel Quattro Pro:

Use the Drag and Drop feature to drag cells anywhere on a sheet, between sheets, and between notebooks.

Use the Clipboard options. Use Edit [image] Copy and Paste in combination to copy cells, or use Edit [image] Cut and Paste in sequence to move cells.

Use Edit [image] Copy Cells.

You can also move entire sheets.

Choosing a method

The advantage of Drag and Drop copying or moving is its ease and visual nature.

The advantages of the Clipboard options are

You can copy or move text within the input line or to other text objects.

You can paste the same cells to many different destinations without reselecting the source.

You can copy data to other Windows applications.

The advantages of Copy Cells are

You can specify cells to be copied or moved by name.

If you are already familiar with these options or if you have macros that use them, they are more convenient.

Copy Cells works a bit faster than the Clipboard options.

The Copy Cells option provides a unique, time-saving feature called Model Copy. Use it to copy cells that contain absolute references to cells within the copied area.

To move cells by dragging and dropping

To copy and move data with the Clipboard

To make a cell address absolute (instead of relative)

To copy cells using Copy Cells

To move sheets

Related Concepts


To move cells by dragging and dropping
To move a cell or cells by dragging and dropping,

1	Select the cell or cells.

2	Point to an edge of the cells to see a four-way arrow.

3	Drag the cells to where you want to move them, using the colored outline as a guide. Be careful; unprotected data under the colored outline will be overwritten. Release the mouse button to "drop" the cells into place.

4	To move cells to another notebook, drag the cells down to the other notebook name on the Application Bar. Keep the left mouse button down until the other notebook displays, then drag the cells into the other notebook. Release the mouse button to "drop" the cells into place.

Tips

To copy cells, follow the steps above, except hold down the Ctrl key after selecting the cells in step 1.

While Drag and Drop can move and copy cells, it does not work on noncontiguous selections, and you cannot make multiple copies. Depending on which one of these things you want to do, use the Clipboard options, or Edit [image] Copy Cells.

You can also move and copy cells by holding down the mouse pointer and then dragging the cells. To change the time for the four-way arrow to appear when holding down the left mouse button, click Tools [image] Settings [image] General, then enter a value (in milliseconds) in the Cell Drag and Drop Delay Time edit field. (The default time is 5 seconds.)

Related Topics

More Info


About Copying and Moving with the Clipboard

Edit [image] Copy and Edit [image] Cut place copies of the current selection (the source) to the Clipboard in preparation for being pasted elsewhere (the destination). While Copy leaves the source intact, Cut erases it.

The Clipboard features in Corel Quattro Pro work as in other Windows applications.

Pasting Multiple Copies

If the source is a single cell, column, or row, you can make multiple copies of it by selecting more cells as the destination.

You can also make multiple copies of data you have cut. The first time you click the Paste button (or click Edit [image] Paste), the source is simply moved. Clicking Paste the second time copies the source throughout the destination area.

Copying Noncontiguous Selections

If the source is a set of noncontiguous selections, imagine the noncontiguous selections contained by one large area. Choose the new position for the upper left corner of that large area for the destination.

To copy and move data with the Clipboard

Related Concepts


To copy and move data with the Clipboard
To copy and move data with the Clipboard,

1	Select the source you want to copy or move.

2	Click the Copy button [image] (to copy data) or Cut button [image] (to move data).

3	Select the destination. The destination can be a cell on this or another sheet, a cell in another notebook, or characters in the input line or in a text box. If you choose a cell, the entire source is pasted, using that cell for the upper left position of the pasted copy.

4	Click the Paste button [image] to paste the data into the destination.

Tip

If the destination already contains data, you will overwrite it when you choose Paste. Be careful that you allow enough space for the complete source to be pasted.

Related Topics

More Info


About Copying Formulas

When you copy data by dragging and dropping the cells, Corel Quattro Pro adjusts formulas to correspond to their new positions. When you copy formulas with Edit [image] Copy Cells or Edit [image] Copy and Paste, Corel Quattro Pro adjusts the formulas to the new location.if there are values to use in the formula in the new location.

For example, you enter +A1+A2 in cell A3. You then copy the formula to cell B3, and Corel Quattro Pro adjusts the formula to +B1+B2 (if there is a value in either B1 or B2).

However, if you copy the formula to B3, and B1 and B2 are empty, Corel Quattro Pro alerts you that the formula is using an empty cell. If you want to keep the adjusted formula (even though you have not yet entered data to add, subtract, and so on), just click Close. If you want to use the original formula, click Fix It.

Related Concepts


Specifying Absolute and Relative Addresses

If you plan on copying formulas, you might want to specify absolute references in the original formula—to keep if from adjusting to new addresses when you copy it.

Relative Addresses

Unless you specify otherwise, cell references in a formula are relative. Corel Quattro Pro finds each cell reference by its position in relation to the cell containing the formula, not by its address.

For example, if you enter +A1+A2 in cell A3, Corel Quattro Pro interprets it as "Add the values in the two cells directly above this one." When you copy this formula to cell B4, Corel Quattro Pro adjusts the formula to add the values in cells B2 and B3 (the two cells directly above).

Absolute Addresses

To prevent a cell reference from adjusting when you copy a formula, make the reference absolute by entering dollar signs ($) before the column and the row coordinates. An absolute cell reference always refers to the original cell address, regardless of where you copy the formula. You can also make a sheet reference absolute if you are copying from one sheet to another.

For example, if you enter +$A$1+$A$2 in cell A3, Corel Quattro Pro reads this as "Add the values in the cells A1 and A2." When you copy this formula to cell B4, Corel Quattro Pro still refers to cells A1 and A2.

You can specify all or part of a cell address as absolute. Just insert a dollar sign ($) before the coordinate you want to remain fixed. For example,

$A$1 makes both coordinates of address A1 absolute.

$A1 locks the address into column A, but lets the row coordinate adjust.

A$1 locks the address into row 1, but lets the column coordinate adjust.

$A:A$1 locks the address into sheet A and row 1, but lets the column coordinate adjust.

When copying between sheets, you can make sheet references absolute, also. Include a dollar sign before the sheet name. If you omit the sheet rference in a formula, it will adjust to refer to the current sheet, wherever it is copied.

To specify a selection as partially absolute, use its coordinates, not its name.

Use the Abs key (F4) while in Edit mode to quickly make the selected cell reference absolute.

To make a cell address absolute (instead of relative)

Related Concepts


To make a cell address absolute (instead of relative)
To make a cell address absolute (instead of relative),

Enter dollar signs ($) before the column and the row coordinates you want to remain fixed.

Tip

In Edit mode, use the Abs key (F4) to make the cell address to the left of the cursor absolute (instead of relative) by entering dollar signs ($) before the column and row coordinates. Press F4 when a cell address is highlighted in the input line. Press F4 repeatedly to cycle through the eight absolute combinations.

Related Topics

More Info


Using the Abs Key (F4)

In Edit mode, the Abs key (F4 ) makes the cell address to the left of the cursor absolute (instead of relative) by entering dollar signs ($) before the column and row coordinates. Press F4 when a cell address is highlighted in the input line. Press F4 repeatedly to cycle through the eight absolute combinations.

The next table shows the effect of each repeated press of F4.

Press F4	Cell reference

starting reference	B6

1x	$A:$B$6

2x	$A:B$6

3x	$A:$B6

4x	$A:B6

5x	$B$6

6x	B$6

7x	$B6

Related Concepts


Copying and Moving Cells

Use Edit [image] Copy Cells to copy a cell or many cells. With Edit [image] Copy Cells, you can also copy noncontiguous selections. To copy or move data or objects other than cells, use the Clipboard features.

Copying

You can use Edit [image] Copy Cells to copy the following:

Cell or cell references; either named or not (such as B4..B4 or C5..D10 or INCOME)

Noncontiguous selections (such as B4..B4,C5..D10 with Edit [image] Copy Cells)

Cells in other sheets in the same notebook (such as C:B4..B6)

Cells in other notebook files (such as [C:\BUDGETS\SALES]B:D10..D15)

Use the Model Copy option if you are copying cells that contain absolute references to cells within the copied area.

When you copy named cells, just the value is copied--not the name.

Moving

Edit [image] Move Cells moves the contents of cells from one location to another. It overwrites existing data in the new location.

If you move a cell at either corner of a named or referenced area, the definition or reference changes.

To copy cells using Copy Cells

Related Topics


To copy cells using Copy Cells
To copy cells using Copy Cells,

1	Click Edit [image] Copy Cells.

2	Look at the selection that appears in the From box. If this is what you want to copy, skip to step 4. Otherwise, do step 3.

3	Double-click in the From field (or click [image] next to the edit field), then point to the cells you want to copy.

When you are finished pointing, click the Maximize button in the title bar of the reduced dialog box.

4	Select or double-click the To entry. Then to make a single copy, point to (or type the address of) the upper left cell of the destination cells (where you want to place the copy).

5	If appropriate, check the Model Copy option. (Use the Model Copy option if you are copying cells that contain absolute references to cells within the copied area.)

Tips

If the destination already contains data, you will overwrite it when you click OK.

Instead of pointing to the cells you want to copy, you can type new coordinates, or press F3 to choose from a list of cell names.

The source cells can be the following types of references:

Cell or cell references; either named or not (such as B4..B4 or C5..D10 or INCOME)

Noncontiguous selections (such as B4..B4,C5..D10)

Cells in other sheets in the same notebook (such as C:B4..B6)

Cells in other notebook files (such as [C:\BUDGETS\SALES]B:D10..D15)

When you copy named cells, just the value is copied, not the name.

Related Topics

More Info


Using the Model Copy Option

Relative and absolute addresses let you control how formulas adjust when you copy them. The Model Copy option of Edit [image] Copy Cells offers another way to control how formulas adjust; it is useful when the cells you are copying contain absolute references to other cells within that cell area. Use the Model Copy option when you want absolute references to adjust to the new copied location.

Although the absolute reference adjusts, it remains absolute to make future copies absolute.

Related Concepts


About Moving Sheets

You can move sheets within a notebook or between notebooks to reorder them. With the mouse, you can directly manipulate the sheets, similarly to the Drag and Drop feature used on cells. Just drag the sheet tab to another location.

If you move a sheet into or out of grouped sheet while Group mode is on (the blue line appears under the tabs), the sheet moves alone, and the group expands or shrinks accordingly. If you move the first or last sheet in a group, the group expands to include all new sheets enclosed by the moved sheet.

If you drag a sheet that is part of a selected 3-D selection (the black line appears under the tabs), all sheets in the 3-D selection move together.

To move sheets

Related Concepts


To move sheets
To move sheets,

1	Click the tab of the sheet you want to move and drag it in any direction until the tab separates from the sheet and a + appears on it.

2	Drag right or left along the row of other tabs, moving the highlighted tab that appears. Release the mouse button when the highlighted tab is just before the tab where you want to place the moved sheet.

The moved sheet drops into place.

Tips

To copy instead of move a sheet, hold down Ctrl when dragging a sheet.

You can also move sheets with Edit [image] Move Sheets, then specify the sheets to move. For example, in the Move Sheets box, type A..C to move sheets A through C.

Related Topics

More Info


About Inserting

You can insert blank columns, rows, or sheets anywhere in the notebook. You can also insert partial rows, columns, or sheets. Wherever you insert, existing data is pushed down, to the right, or to the back of the notebook to make room.

You can also insert from another file onto a new sheet.

Tips

If inserting spaces pushes a named cell area or cell reference beyond the limit of a sheet (beyond column IV or row 8192), or beyond sheet IV, the reference becomes ERR.

If you go to the bottom right of your notebook and type any value or text string in the cell, you can prevent anyone from adding rows or columns to the sheet. Just go to cell IV8192 by pressing End Down End Right and then type anything (a space, for example) in the cell. Press the Home key to get back to the upper left cell in the notebook. When you try to add a row or column, an Out of Boundary message displays.

To insert rows

To insert columns

To insert a blank sheet

To insert cells

Related Topics


To insert rows
To insert rows,

Click the row border just below where you want the row inserted and click the Insert button [image] on the Toolbar.

To insert multiple rows, select as many row borders as you want to insert.

Tips

You can also insert a row by selecting a row border, then clicking Insert [image] Row.

If you insert a row within the boundaries of a named area or a cell referenced by a formula, Corel Quattro Pro expands cell references to include the new row.

Related Topics

More Info


To insert columns
To insert columns,

Click the column border just below where you want the column inserted and click the Insert button [image] on the Toolbar.

To insert multiple columns, select as many column borders as you want to insert.

Tips

You can also insert a column by selecting a column border, then clicking Insert [image] Column.

If you insert a column within the boundaries of a named area or cells referenced by a formula, Corel Quattro Pro expands cell references to include the new column.

Related Topics

More Info


To insert a blank sheet
To insert a blank sheet,

1	Click the tab of the sheet you want to follow the new sheet.

2	Click Insert [image] Sheet.

Tips

To insert more than one sheet, select the first sheet tab you want to follow the new sheet, then hold down Shift while you click the last sheet tab you want. A black line appears under the tabs.

You can also insert multiple sheets by typing a 3-D selection in the Cells field. Click Insert [image] Cells, select Sheets for the Dimension and select Entire for the Span, then type a 3-D selection in the Cells field. For example, to insert three sheets before sheet B, enter B:A3..D:A3 (it does not matter which cell you reference).

Related Topics

More Info


To insert cells
To insert cells,

1	Select cells in the same location where you want to insert space; make sure the upper-left corner of the cells you select contains the first cell entry you want shifted right, down, or back. The cells you select should be the same size as the amount of space you want to insert.

2	Click the Insert button [image] on the Toolbar.

3	For Span, click Partial.

4	For Dimension, click Rows if you want the selected entries to shift down out of the way. Click Columns if you want them to shift to the right. Click Sheets if you want them to shift to the next sheet.

Tip

You can also insert cells, a row, a column, or a sheet by clicking Insert [image] Cells, Insert [image] Row, Insert [image] Column, or Insert [image] Sheet.

Related Topics

More Info


About Deleting

You can delete entire or partial columns, rows, or sheets anywhere in the notebook. Deleting space is different from erasing (or blanking) data with Edit [image] Clear or the Del key. Deleting with the Delete button [image] on the Toolbar or Edit [image] Delete makes remaining rows, columns, or sheets move to take up the deleted space.

Tip

If you delete space that is within the boundaries of a named area or cells referenced by a formula, Corel Quattro Pro adjusts all references to not include the deleted space. However, if one of the deleted cells is a coordinate cell that defines a named area, the area becomes invalid and any formulas or names referencing the area display ERR. Any formulas that reference a cell within a deleted column, row, or sheet also display ERR.

To delete rows or columns

To delete a sheet

To delete cells

Related Concepts


To delete rows or columns
To delete rows or columns,

Click the row or column border and click Edit [image] Delete.

To delete multiple rows or columns, select all their row or column borders.

Related Topics

More Info


To delete a sheet
To delete a sheet,

1	Click a sheet tab.

2	Click Edit [image] Select All.

3	Click Edit [image] Delete Sheet(s).

Tip

To select multiple sheets, click the first sheet tab, then hold down Shift while you click the last sheet tab you want. A black line appears under the tabs.

Related Topics

More Info


To delete cells
To delete cells,

1	Select the cells you want deleted.

2	Click Edit [image] Delete.

3	For Span, click Partial.

4	For Dimension, click Rows to shift entries up into the selected cells, click Column to shift entries left, or click Sheets to shift from the next sheet.

Related Topics

More Info


Named Cells

Instead of referring to a single cell or cells by their coordinates, such as B10 or C15..F21, you can assign a specific name. This has several advantages:

Names are easier to remember than coordinates.

If you move the contents of named cells, Corel Quattro Pro still associates the name with the same data, regardless of the new coordinates.

Referencing names in a formula makes the formula easier to understand. For example, +PRICE - COST is more intuitive than B15 - D8.

Using names increases accuracy. If you mistype a name, Corel Quattro Pro alerts you to the error. If you mistype coordinates, you operate on the wrong cells.

When you link to another notebook, you will not need to open the other notebook to find the coordinates.

Consider the following formula, which calculates a monthly mortgage payment:

@PMT(B3,B4/B6,B5*B6)

Here is the same formula using named cells:

@PMT(PRICE,INTEREST/MONTHS,TERM*MONTHS)

Before you use Insert [image] Name [image] Cells, check the labels you plan to use. If there are duplicate labels or labels that duplicate existing names, Corel Quattro Pro overwrites previous assignments. Use a choice list, or make a table of named cells to see a list of existing names.

To name a selection of cells

To reference named cells in a formula

To assign names to cells using adjacent labels

To name selections automatically

To create a table of named cells

To delete cell names

Related Concepts


To name a group of cells
To name a selection of cells,

1	Select the cells you want to name.

2	Click Insert [image] Name [image] Cells, or click here [image] for a shortcut.

3	Type a name in the Name field. Enter a name not included on the list of existing names at the left, and click Add.

Tips

To change the cells assigned to a name, click Insert [image] Name [image] Cells and choose the name from the list. Then enter new coordinates in the Cell(s) edit field and click Add.

To change a name, delete the existing name first, then assign the new name to the cells.

If you use Edit [image] Copy Cells to alter the contents of the upper left or lower right cells of a named area, the name becomes invalid. Formulas referencing the named area display ERR to indicate the formulas no longer reference the data they did before. Deleting any of the two coordinates of a selection of cells makes any reference to that named area display ERR, also.

By default, when you copy and paste formulas containing cell names, the cell names in the new location use absolute cell referencing. To force Corel Quattro Pro to use relative cell referencing, precede the cell name with a tilde (~). For example, AGE would be an absolute cell reference and ~AGE would be a relative cell reference.

Related Topics

More Info


Guidelines for Naming Cells

Keep the following guidelines in mind when naming selections of cells:

Names can be up to 63 characters long.

Use any keyboard characters (A to Z, 0 to 9, spaces, punctuation marks, and some special characters such as %). Accented characters such as Â and Ä are also allowed if they are available on your keyboard.

Do not use operator characters (+, -, *, /, ^, =, <, >, #, or &), ~, $, and open and close parentheses. If you use a name with these characters in a formula, Corel Quattro Pro will not parse the formula correctly.

If you use any of these characters in a name, you will not be able to enter the name within a formula.

Uppercase and lowercase letters are equivalent; in other words, INCOME is the same as income. Names always appear in uppercase letters in formulas.

Do not use numbers alone (such as 327) or valid cell addresses (such as G1) as names.

Names can define overlapping areas. For example, the following names are acceptable:

HOTEL	B3..B7

TRANS	C3..C7

MEALS	D3..D7

TOTAL	B3..D7

Related Concepts


To reference named cells in a formula
To reference named cells in a formula,

Type the cell name or choose it from a choice list.

To display a choice list while writing or editing a formula, use one of these methods:

Click the Navigate button in the input line. A drop-down list of names appears.

Press F3.

Tips

The Navigate button provides quick access to the list of named cells. Use F3 if you need to know coordinates as well as names.

To display the list while entering or editing a formula, the insertion point must be to the right of an operator or open parenthesis.

Related Topics

More Info


To assign names to cells using adjacent labels
To assign names to cells using adjacent labels,

1	Select the labels you want to use as names and click Insert [image] Name [image] Cells, or click here [image] for a shortcut.

2	Click the Labels button.

3	Indicate the position of the cells you want to name in relation to the labels. For example, if the cells you are naming are below the labels, click Down.

4	Click OK.

Tips

You can also use Tools [image] Data Tools [image] Notebook Query [image] Field Names to assign names to the cells in the first row of a database.

Corel Quattro Pro uses each label in the specified cells (up to 64 characters) as a name for the adjacent cell. It ignores numeric values in the cells; you can use only labels as names.

Later changes to the labels themselves do not affect the names.

If there are leading or trailing spaces in a label, they are included in the name. For example, a name that appears as "INCOME" may have been entered as "INCOME  " (with a space at the end).

Related Topics

More Info


To name selections automatically
To name selections automatically,

1	Click Insert [image] Name [image] Cells, or click here [image] for a shortcut.

2	Click Generate.

3	Specify the cells to name, including labels.

4	Check the location of the cells to name; you can check more than one, depending on whether the labels are in the top row, the leftmost column, the bottom row, or the rightmost column.

If you want to name individual cells, check at least two of the location boxes, then check Name Cells At Intersections.

5	Click OK.

Tips

Corel Quattro Pro uses each label in the specified cells (up to 64 characters) as a name for the adjacent cell. It ignores numeric values in the selection; you can use only labels as names. Later changes to the labels themselves do not affect the cell names.

If there are leading or trailing spaces in a label, they are included in the name. For example, a name that appears as "INCOME" may have been entered as "INCOME  " (with a space at the end).

Click here [image] for an example of how to automatically name cells using Insert [image] Name [image] Cells.

Related Topics

More Info


Example: Naming Selections Automatically

The label in each row or column is applied to all selected cells in that row or column. If you checked more than one location box, a set of names is created for each set of labels. For example, if you select A1..C4 in the next figure and check the first two boxes in the Generate Cell Names dialog box, Corel Quattro Pro creates five names: Jan., B2..B4; Feb., C2..C4; Housing, B2..C2; Utilities, B3..C3; and Food, B4..C4.

A	B	C

1	Jan.	Feb.

2	Housing

3	Utilities

4	Food

If you check Name Cells at Intersections, each cell has an additional name created by combining the two sets of labels. Each name can have up to 64 characters. Here is a table of cell names for this example.

Cell	Name

B2	JAN._HOUSING

B3	JAN._UTILITIES

B4	JAN._FOOD

C2	FEB._HOUSING

C3	FEB._UTILITIES

C4	FEB._FOOD


To create a table of named cells
To create a table of named cells,

1	Click Insert [image] Name [image] Cells, or click here [image] for a shortcut.

2	Click the Output button.

3	Select the top left cell of the cells where you want the table.

Tips

Make sure there is enough room for a two-column table, with one row for each name. Corel Quattro Pro overwrites existing data in cells it uses for the table.

Corel Quattro Pro does not update a named cell table. If you add, change, or delete cell names, you must re-create the table to reflect the changes. Putting a QuickButton next to this table is a handy way of updating the table quickly.

In the two-column cell name table, the first column lists names alphabetically. The second indicates the corresponding coordinates.

Related Topics

More Info


To delete a cell name
To delete a cell name,

1	Click Insert [image] Name [image] Cells, or click here [image] for a shortcut.

2	Choose a name from the list, or type a name in the Name box.

3	Click Delete.

Tips

To delete all names in the notebook, click Insert [image] Name [image] Cells, then click Delete All. Click Yes to confirm that you want to delete all names.

Although clicking Insert [image] Name [image] Cells and clicking Delete All deletes all cell names in the notebook from memory, the notebook data is not affected. Formulas that reference named cells change so they refer to cell coordinates instead of names.

Related Topics

More Info


About Go To

Edit [image] Go To is useful for quickly moving to named cells (to identify or change them) or for moving quickly to distant parts of the notebook, or for selecting noncontiguous selections in different parts of a notebook. The selector moves to whatever location you choose with the option.

You can also use Go To to extend the selection or to find the original source of an error (that is, cells containing NA or ERR values).

To go to a cell or selection of cells

To extend selections with Go To

To find the original error with Go To

Related Concepts


To go to a cell or selection of cells
To go to a cell or selection of cells,

1	Click Edit [image] Go To.

2	Choose the target cell name from the list, or type the target cell address in the text box. If the cell is on another sheet, add the sheet prefix preceded by a colon.

For instance, to move to cell Z36 on sheet D, type D:Z36. If the cell is in another notebook, add the notebook prefix. For instance, to move to the corresponding cell in the Budget notebook, type

[Budget]D:Z36

Related Topics

More Info


To extend selections with Go To
To extend selections with Go To,

1	Move to the upper left corner of the cells.

2	Click Edit [image] Go To.

3	Specify the lower right corner.

4	Press Shift, then click OK.

Related Topics

More Info


To find the original error with Go To
To find the original error with Go To,

1	Select a cell containing NA or ERR.

2	Click Edit [image] Go To. The original source of the error appears in the Reference edit field.

3	Click OK to select that cell and display its contents in the input line.

For example, if cell E5 contains 4/0 (an invalid formula), F5 contains +100+E5, and G5 contains +100 + F5, all three cells display ERR. If you select F5, then click Edit [image] Go To [image] OK, the selector moves to the original error, E5. To trace errors through a notebook, (find the error in F5, in addition to finding the original error in E5), use Auditing.

Related Topics

More Info


To find and replace data
To find and replace data,

1	Click Edit [image] Find and Replace. In the edit fields at the top of the dialog box, enter

the text or value to find

the replacement text or value

the cell or cells to search; leave it blank to search the current sheet

2	Specify any Look In or Options settings you want.

3	To begin the search, click Find Next or Previous. If a match is found, click Find Next, Previous, Replace, Replace All, Reset, or Close.

Tip

You can also select the cell or cells you want to search before clicking Edit [image] Find and Replace.

You can also use Tools [image] Data Tools [image] Notebook Query to search a database.

Related Topics


About QuickCorrect

Use QuickCorrect to automatically replace your common spelling errors and mistyped words. You can also use it to expand abbreviations. For example, if you frequently type "frmo", you can have the word automatically corrected to "from". Or, if you type the abbreviation "pim", you can have it automatically replaced with "personal information manager".

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image] then click the option.

QuickCorrect is on by default. To turn it off, click Tools [image] QuickCorrect and deselect Replace Words as you type.

To add QuickCorrect words

To delete QuickCorrect words


To add QuickCorrect words
To add QuickCorrect words,

1	Click Tools [image] QuickCorrect.

2	In the Replace field, type the incorrect spelling of a word you commonly misspell or mistype, or type an abbreviation that you want expanded in your document.

3	In the With field, type the correct spelling of the misspelled or mistyped word, or type the expanded word(s) of the abbreviation.

4	Click Add Entry.

5	Continue adding words to the Replace and With fields.

6	Make sure Replace Words As You Type is selected.

Related Topics

More Info


To delete QuickCorrect words
To delete QuickCorrect words,

1	Click Tools [image] QuickCorrect.

2	Select an entry in the list box, then click Delete Entry.

Related Topics

More Info


Basic Data Entry

When you start Corel Quattro Pro, a blank notebook appears, ready for data entry. To enter data in a cell, click the cell (or use the arrow keys to move the selector to the cell) and type the entry. The characters you type appear in the cell and on the input line above the column letters.

Correcting Mistakes

Use Backspace to erase mistakes as you type or use the mouse to move the insertion point, then type new characters from that point. To replace characters with new ones, highlight the original data with the mouse (click at the beginning of the area to correct and drag to the end) then type the new data. When your entry is complete, click the checkmark button in the input line, press Enter, or press one of the arrow keys to put it into the cell. You can click the X button to clear the input line and cancel your changes, @ to display a list of @function categories, or { } for a list of macro categories.

Quick Entry

When you press Enter in the cell, the selector moves to the next cell in the column. To move across rows, select a row of empty cells before you start entering data. Then, when you complete an entry, the selector moves to the next cell in the row. You can also change a setting so the selector does not moves to the next cell in the column; click here [image] for details.

Changing Fonts and Font Attributes

You can change fonts or font attributes (such as bold, superscript, or text color) for entire cells, or you can enter multiple fonts and attributes in the same cell. Click the cell, select a different font or attribute from the Property Bar, then begin typing. To change in the middle of a cell as you type, simply select an option and resume typing. To make changes after you type, select the cells or double-click a cell and select text within a cell, then choose font options.

Formulas

If the entry is a formula, the result of the formula appears in the cell. Click here [image] for a description of what you can enter into a cell.

You can also click the Navigate button (the first button in the input line) to insert cell names into the formula; click here [image] for details.

More Basic Features

Error Messages

Corel Quattro Pro displays an error message if it discovers a problem with an entry, such as an invalid character. After you click OK to clear the error message, you enter Edit mode, with the insertion point positioned at the problem character in the input line. Corel Quattro Pro will not accept the entry until you correct the problem. To cancel the entry, click the X button or press Esc.

Error Correction

If you make a mistake while entering data or want to take back a command, use Edit [image] Undo. Click here [image] for details.

Multisheet Entries

You can drill an entry into several sheets at once using Group mode. Click here [image] for details.

Input Line

If you need more room onscreen or want to close the input line for any other reason, click Tools [image] Settings, then click the Display tab. Deselect Show Input Line. You can still enter and edit data directly in the cell.

Precalculating Values

You can calculate values before you enter them. Type a formula on the input line, but press F9 instead of Enter. For example, if you type 8*9 on the input line, then press F9, Corel Quattro Pro replaces the formula with the result, 72. Press Enter or click the checkmark button to write the result into the cell.

To enter data in a cell

To enter dates and times

Related Concepts


To enter data in a cell
To enter data in a cell,

1	Click the cell (or use the arrow keys to move the selector to the cell).

2	Type the entry.

The characters you type appear in the cell and on the input line above the column letters.

Tip

To make changes to text appearance after you type, select the cells or double-click a cell and select text within a cell, then choose text appearance options from the Property Bar.

Related Topics

More Info


Types of Data

There are two types of data in a notebook sheet: labels and values.

A label is a text entry such as "Total."

A value is a number, a date, a formula, or a formula's result. Formulas usually refer to numbers in other cells to calculate a value, such as the difference between the values in two cells or the total of values in a column. You can also use @functions and numeric values in formulas.

Corel Quattro Pro automatically determines whether data is a label or a value. It replaces the READY indicator on the Application Bar with LABEL for text or VALUE for numbers, dates, or formulas. After you enter the data, the READY indicator reappears.

Related Concepts


Entering Labels

A label is a text entry. It can begin with any letter or punctuation mark except the following:

/	slash

+	plus symbol

-	minus symbol, or hyphen

$	dollar sign

(	open or left parenthesis

@	At symbol

#	pound or number symbol

.	period

=	equal sign

You can also force cells to accept only labels. Click here [image] for details.

Tips

In addition to the characters on your keyboard, you can enter any ANSI character. Click a cell twice to be in editing mode. Click the Insert Character button on the Property Bar. The button appearance changes according to what is currently selected. This includes international characters such as Ä and Â, and special symbols such as .

To make changes to text appearance after you type, select the cells or double-click a cell and select text within a cell, then choose text appearance options from the Property Bar.

Related Concepts


About Aligning Labels

When you enter a label, it is positioned within the cell according to the default label alignment, which is usually left-aligned. Instead, you can right align the text, center the text, indetn text, rotate text, and so on.

To align data in cells

To join cells

To center text over cells

To align labels using label prefix characters

Related Concepts


To align labels using label prefix characters
To align labels using label prefix characters,

1	Double-click the label to edit it.

2	Type one of the following label-prefix characters to start the label:

' (apostrophe) = left-aligned

^ (caret) = centered

" (quotation mark) = right-aligned

Label-prefix characters appear in the cell when you double-click to edit it, and appear on the input line when you select the cell.

Tip

You can also precede the label with a label-prefix character. When you use a label-prefix character to align a label that is wider than the cell, the label spills into the cell to the right, even if it is right-aligned or centered. Corel Quattro Pro's default label alignment spills long label text to the right if the label is left-aligned, to the left if the label is right-aligned, and to both left and right if the label is centered.

To begin a label with one of the label-prefix characters, precede it with another label-prefix character indicating the alignment you want. For example, to enter the label

"Lefty" Grove

and left-align it, enter the label as follows:

'"Lefty" Grove

Related Topics

More Info


Entering Numbers in Labels

When you enter information into Corel Quattro Pro, the application checks to see if it contains any characters that are not numbers. If it finds one, it checks to see if the entry is a date. If it is not a valid date, Corel Quattro Pro assumes the entry is a label--unless it starts with a formula prefix character (+ - ( @ # $ =). If the entry starts with a formula prefix character, Corel Quattro Pro tries to interpret it as a formula. If the entry is a valid formula, Corel Quattro Pro evaluates it. Otherwise, it displays the Syntax Error message.

This means that you can enter street addresses and telephone numbers without a special prefix character. They will be treated as labels. If you actually want to subtract a four-digit number from a three-digit number, precede the entry with an = or +. Otherwise, Corel Quattro Pro enters it as a phone number.

For example, these entries are treated as labels:

145 Howard Street

408-726-3670

12/72/94

These entries are treated as formulas and a date:

=408-726-3670

+12/72/94

12/24/94

The first entry evaluates to -3988, the second evaluates to 0.001773, and the third is December 24, 1994 (with a date serial number of 34692).

Related Concepts


Entering Wide Labels

When a label exceeds the width of the cell, the text spills into blank cells to the right, left, or both depending on the alignment setting--Left, Right, or Center. When the label runs into a cell that contains an entry, Corel Quattro Pro displays only the portion of the label that fits within the column width, but still stores all of it.

To see all of a label entry that is only partly visible, select the cell. The entire label appears in the input line. Be sure to select the leftmost cell (the one that actually contains the entry). To fully display a label entry in its own cell, widen the column containing it, or erase the cells to the right of it.

If you prefer, you can format a cell so text wraps within it instead of overflowing into other cells. You can also control the width of text overflows.

Tip

If you click Tools [image] Settings, click the General tab, then check Compatible Keys--or if you use an alignment character--label display changes. Then, labels always extend to the right until they reach an occupied cell.

To align data in cells

To reformat text within cells

Related Concepts


To repeat characters in labels
To repeat characters in labels,

1	Double-click the cell that you want to edit.

2	Type a backslash character (\) followed by the character you want repeated in the cell.

For example, to fill a cell with hyphens, type

\-

Tips

To repeat a series of characters in a pattern, enter the first set of characters to be repeated after the backslash, such as \abc.

If you want a label to begin with a backslash, but you do not want to repeat the characters after it, precede the backslash with a label-prefix character.

Related Concepts


Entering Numbers

When you begin typing a number, the word VALUE appears on the Application Bar. After you complete the entry, the indicator changes to READY. By default, numbers appear right-aligned in the cell. To change alignment, choose a setting from the Alignment list in the Property Bar  or change the Alignment property setting.

Keep these rules in mind when entering numbers:

A number entry can contain only numerals (0 to 9), a leading negative (-) sign, a leading positive (+) sign, a single decimal point, a trailing percent sign (%), or an E (if you are using scientific notation).

Do not use parentheses to indicate a negative number. Use a minus sign (-) instead. However, if you change the numeric format to Currency or Comma, negative numbers appear in parentheses.

Do not include commas when entering numbers. You can display them by changing the numeric format.

Do not include spaces in the entry.

Do not substitute a lowercase l ("el") for 1 (one) or an uppercase O ("oh") for 0 (zero).

An entry that does not follow these rules will be interpreted as a label, formula, or date.

Tips

If you want to surround negative numbers with parentheses, to add commas, or to otherwise change the appearance of numbers, you can use the Style list on the Property Bar or set the Numeric Format property.

You can use scientific notation (for example, 2.35E+8) to enter a number. If the calculated number fits in the cell (and the numeric format makes it possible), it appears in full. You can use Edit [image] Fill [image] Fill Series to automatically enter a sequence of numbers into cells.

Length

Like a label, a number can be longer than the width of the cell. By default, when you enter a number, the column widens to fit the number (unless the number is interpreted as General format). If columns are not expanding when you enter numbers, click Tools [image] Settings [image] General [image] Fit-As-You-Go.

To align data in cells

To set the numeric format for cells

To fill cells with a sequence of values

Related Concepts


About Dates and Times

A date or a time is a type of value entry as long as it is entered in one of the legal date or time formats.

The International date and time formats correspond to Tools [image] Settings [image] International settings. If you change those settings, you must then conform to the new settings when you enter dates or times in one of the international formats.

Once you enter a date or time, you can change to another date or time format with the Numeric Format property.

To enter a formula that resembles a date format, use a + before the formula (for example, +4/12).

You can force cells to accept only dates or times.

Date Calculations

Dates and times are represented on the input line by serial numbers. For dates, the serial number is an integer ranging from -109,571 (for January 1, 1600) to 474,816 (for December 31, 3199; 0 is December 30, 1899). The serial number for times is a decimal fraction between 0.000 (for 00:00:00) and 0.99999 (for 23:59:59). Mixed numbers indicate the date and time: 2.5 represents January 1, 1900 at 12:00 noon.

Serial numbers let you use date or time values in formulas. For example, subtracting 10/1/92 from 10/8/92 results in 7.

To enter dates and times

To set the numeric format for cells

To restrict entries in cells to a certain type of data

About the Year 2000

Related Concepts


To enter dates and times
To enter dates and times,

1	Click Insert  [image] Date to enter the current date, or enter the date or time in one of the following formats:

DD-MMM-YYYY (28-Apr-1997)

DD-MMM-YY (04-Mar-92)

DD-MMM (04-Mar, assumes current year)

MMM-YY (Mar-92, assumes first day of the month)

MMM-YYYY (Apr-1997, assumes first day of the month)

the Long International date format--the current application International property setting, ordinarily MM/DD/YY

the Short International date format--the shortened version of the current application International property setting, ordinarily MM/DD

HH:MM:SS AM/PM (01:42:30 PM)

HH:MM AM/PM (01:42 PM)

the Long International time format--the current application International property setting, ordinarily HH:MM:SS

the Short International time format--the shortened version of the current application International property setting, ordinarily HH:MM

Tips

Once you enter a date or time, you can change to another date or time format with the Numeric Format property.

To enter a formula that resembles a date format, use a + before the formula (for example, +4/12).

You can also use the @DATE function to return the date/time serial number of a specified date. (97,8,22) = 35664).

Related Topics

More Info


About Entering Formulas

You can enter a value with a formula. Corel Quattro Pro formulas are like algebraic formulas. They combine values and operators to calculate a single value. See the following topics for specific information on formulas:

Formula basics

Types of formulas

Using values in formulas

Using operators in formulas

Types of operators

Using @functions in formulas

To enter an @function into a cell

Input line parenthesis matching and closing

To use QuickSum to create totals

To add a hidden comment to a formula or value

Using array features


Formula Basics

You can use numbers, cell coordinates, or cell names for the values in formulas. For example,

+A1 - 3

subtracts three from the value in cell A1.

The result of a formula appears in the cell. The formula appears on the input line when you select the cell and appears on the Application Bar when you are editing the entry.

You can include spaces between operators and values, but Corel Quattro Pro deletes them when you click the checkmark button to complete the formula. A formula must begin with one of the following characters:

. + - ( @ # $ =

By default, Corel Quattro Pro calculates formulas when you enter them, and recalculates them each time you change the data involved. If a notebook contains many complex formulas, you may want to delay recalculation to save time.

Tips

To begin a formula with a letter, such as for a cell address or cell name, precede it with a plus sign so the entry is considered a value, not a label.

Click [image] to get help building simple and complex formulas. It helps you choose the right @functions and enter their arguments correctly.

To use the Formula Composer

Related Concepts


Types of Formulas

Corel Quattro Pro works with three different kinds of formulas:

Arithmetic formulas, such as +B3+421.3, calculate numeric values. These are the most commonly used formulas.

Text formulas are any formulas that have a textual result. For example, +C4&" Review" enters the text in cell C4 and adds a space and the word Review. Text formulas include those created with string @functions or an @IF function that results in a text string.

Logical formulas are true/false statements concerning values in other cells; for example, +C3<10. Corel Quattro Pro checks the notebook to see if the statement is true or not. If true, it enters a 1 in the cell; if false, it enters a 0.

Corel Quattro Pro uses relative addressing to keep track of cells referenced in formulas.

Related Concepts


Values in Formulas

Values in a formula can be any of the following:

Numbers (for example, 948, -84, 43.23).

Coordinates of other cells (for example, B12, G29..G31, B:A3..D6, or [NOTEBK2]A:A1).

Cell names which are names you give to a cell or cells (for example, EXPENSES). Among other things, cell names make rereading formulas easier.

@Functions (for example, @SUM(B1..B24)). Corel Quattro Pro @functions are a set of standard formulas used to simplify complex calculations.

Text surrounded by double quotation marks (for example, "PROFIT" or "Dear Mr.").

When you use a cell address, Corel Quattro Pro refers to the values in the cells. For example, the formula +B6+C1 adds the values in those two cells and displays the result.

Related Concepts


Operators in Formulas

Formulas use operators, such as +, -, *, and /, to act on two or more values. Often formulas contain several operators, as in

+C5 - D12 + F24 * 0.123

The result of a formula depends on the order in which the arithmetic operations are performed. Corel Quattro Pro assigns each operator a precedence and performs the operations in order of precedence. Multiplication has higher precedence than addition, therefore

+5 + 1 * 3 = 8, not 18

Operations with equal precedence are performed from left to right.

The next table lists the operators and the precedence assigned to each. Operators with the highest precedence (7) are performed first.

Corel Quattro Pro Operator Precedence

Operator 	Description = Precedence

& 	String combination = 1

#AND#,  #OR#	Logical AND, logical OR = 1

#NOT# 	Logical NOT = 2

 =, <> 	Equal, not equal = 3

<, >	Less than, greater than = 3

<= 	Less than or equal = 3

>= 	Greater than or equal = 3

-, + 	Subtraction, addition = 4

*, / 	Multiplication, division = 5

-, + 	Negative, positive = 6

^ 	To the power of (exponentiation) = 7

To quickly remember the order of precedence of the common arithmetic operators, use the phrase "My Dear Aunt Sally" (multiplication, division, addition, and subtraction).

You can override operator precedence by including parentheses in formulas. Enclose in parentheses the portion of a formula you want calculated first. You can nest parentheses inside other parentheses; Corel Quattro Pro calculates the innermost part first. For example,

+4 * 2 + 3 = 11

+4 * (2 + 3) = 20

(4*2) + (3 + 5) * 4 = 40

((4*2) + (3 + 5)) * 4 = 64

Related Concepts


Types of Operators

Arithmetic operators, such as + and * used in +B3*1.3, perform addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, and exponentiation. These are the most commonly used operators:

   -   +   *   /   ^

The & (concatenation) operator is a text operator. You can use it to append text strings, whether each string is typed into the formula or pulled from a cell reference. For example, to concatenate a label from a cell to a string,

1	Type a plus sign (+) to begin the formula.

Enter the first string by pointing to the cell containing it (the cell must contain a label).

2	Type an ampersand (&).

3	Enter the second string by surrounding it with quotation marks. If you want a space between strings, be sure to type it within the quotation marks.

4	Click the check mark or press Enter to complete the formula.

Logical operators determine whether expressions are true or false. For example, +A1<10 determines whether the value in A1 is less than 10. If the statement is true, the cell displays 1; if false, it displays 0.

These are logical operators:

<   >   <=   >=   <>   =   #NOT#   #AND#   #OR#

Related Concepts


@Functions in Formulas

Corel Quattro Pro provides many built-in functions, called @functions because they begin with an @ sign. @Functions are special commands that perform particular calculations and return results. You enter them into notebook cells, either alone or within formulas.

Corel Quattro Pro has more than 450 built-in @functions. Some of the most commonly used @functions are mathematical @functions like @SUM and @AVG. @SUM totals the contents of the cells you reference, and @AVG counts the number of values in the referenced cells and returns the average of the values.

@Functions have these parts:

the name of the @function (such as @SUM, or @AVG)

the arguments (the values, cells, or text strings to be operated on)

the commas that separate multiple arguments

the parentheses around the arguments

All of these parts and the order in which they are used are called the syntax. Each @function has its own particular syntax.

Tip

If you change the Punctuation setting of the application International property, other characters besides commas can be used to separate arguments (click here [image] for details).

To see how @functions work, here are some examples:

@SUM(A1..A4,B1) is equivalent to +A1+A2+A3+A4+B1

@AVG(A5..A8) finds the average of the values in A5 through A8

@ROUND(A9,2) rounds the value in A9 to two decimal places

@ROUND(@AVG(A5..A8),3) rounds the average of the values in A5 through A8 to three decimal places

To enter an @function into a cell

Related Concepts


To enter an @function into a cell
To enter an @function into a cell,

1	Select the cell.

2	Click Insert [image] Function.

3	Choose a category, then click the @function you want from the list.

4	Click Next.

5	Enter the value, cell references, or text string as the arguments. Optional arguments appear in <>s.

Tips

For more information about an argument or a specific function, click [image] next to the function or argument in the Formula Composer.

You can also enter @functions into cells by typing them; keep an eye on the Application Bar to follow the correct syntax.

You can also type + or click in the input line to begin entering the formula, then click [image] to open the Formula Composer.

Related Topics

More Info


Input Line Parenthesis Matching and Closing

An input line display feature helps you enter formulas, links, and macros. If you type one of these characters-- ( [ { --it is colored red in the input line until you type the matching character-- ) ] }. Then, they both turn green.

If you forget to type a matching parenthesis in a complex formula with several sets of parentheses or brackets, for example, it is easy to pinpoint the error. Press F2 or double-click the cell to display the selected formula in Edit mode, then move the insertion point through the formula. When you reach an unmatched parenthesis or bracket, the character turns red.

You can check the formula and insert the matching character where it belongs. You know when you are right--the new character and its match both turn green. If a parenthesis is missing when you press Enter, Corel Quattro Pro adds one at the end of the formula.

Related Concepts


Cells in Formulas

Many formulas operate on one cell or many cells. For example, to total the values in a column, type @SUM(B1..B7).

To specify the cell coordinates, type the address of the top left cell, followed by one or two periods (..) and the address of the bottom right cell. For example, the C3..D6 refers to cells C3, D3, C4, D4, C5, D5, C6, and D6. You can enter the addresses of any two cells in opposite corners in any order. Corel Quattro Pro rewrites the coordinates to list the top left cell followed by the bottom right cell.

When specifying cells, you can enter just one dot (period) instead of two; for example, F4..F11 and F4.F11 indicate the same cells. However, you must enter two periods in coordinates if you specified a period as the argument separator in the Punctuation setting of the application International property (click here [image] for details).

To refer to cells in another sheet in the same notebook, type the sheet name and a colon before the cell reference (for example, B:B4 refers to cell B4 in sheet B). For information on referring to cells that span multiple sheets, click here

If you rename a sheet, you can use the new name on its tab in the cell reference or the sheet letter. Also, if you group sheets, you can refer to them by their group name instead of by their individual sheet names.

To refer to a cell in a different notebook, type the file name in brackets and the sheet name before the reference (for example, [SALES]C:B5 refers to cell B5 of sheet C in the SALES notebook file).

If you named cells, you can also specify the cells by entering the name.

Related Concepts


About Pointing to Cells

The easiest way to enter cell references into formulas is to point to them. If you click the cell, or move the selector to the cell you want to include, you enter Point mode.

For example, to enter the formula +B3*(B4-B5) into cell B6 by pointing,

1	Select cell B6.

2	Type + to begin the formula.

3	Click cell B3 or press Up until the selector is in B3. (The indicator changes to POINT.)

4	Type an asterisk (*) to indicate multiplication. Corel Quattro Pro enters an asterisk after +B3 and returns the selector to B6.

5	Type an open parenthesis, (.

6	Select cell B4 and type a minus (-).

7	Select cell B5 and type a close parenthesis, ).

8	Press Enter. Corel Quattro Pro writes the formula into B6.

To enter Point mode, the insertion point must be after one of these characters:

an arithmetic operator [+ - / * ^]

a text operator [&]

the last character of a logical operator [< > = #]

an open parenthesis [(]

a comma [,]

a semicolon[;] (or whatever character you have chosen as an argument separator through the Punctuation setting of the application International property)

You can also enter Point mode if a cell reference is selected in the input line. Otherwise, if you click another cell or press an arrow key, Corel Quattro Pro enters the formula into the cell and returns to Ready mode.

Instead of only pointing to cells, you can point to cells by dragging them. You can also point to cells using the keyboard.

Related Concepts


About Pointing from Dialog Boxes

Point mode is useful from dialog box edit fields that require cell references. In the case of commands requiring cell references, you can make the dialog box temporarily collapsed to make pointing easier.

When you first choose a command, the active cells are highlighted in the primary edit field. When you click and drag to point to cells, you enter Point mode, and the dialog box is reduced to its title bar until you release the mouse button. The cell coordinates you point to appear in the edit field.

You can also enter Point mode from a dialog box using any of these methods:

click the Point Mode button

press Up, Down, or F2

double-click the contents of the edit field

In these cases, the dialog box remains collapsed until you exit Point mode or until you expand it with the Minimize/Maximize button.

You can exit Point mode by pressing F2 (which enters the cells in the edit field), or by pressing Esc (which restores the previous entry in the edit field).

Related Concepts


Noncontiguous Selections

Noncontiguous selections are separate cells that you operate on at the same time. You can write formulas that refer to many noncontiguous selections at once, or you can act on noncontiguous selections with commands.

To point to noncontiguous selections, select the first group of cells, hold down the Ctrl key, and select additional cells. When every selection you want to refer to or act on is highlighted, complete the formula or command.

To type references to noncontiguous selections into a formula, separate each selection with a comma, as shown in this example:

A2..A5,B7,D5..E12

Most commands can work on noncontiguous selections.

Related Concepts


3-D selections
3-D Selection

A 3-D selection is a group of cells selected on more than one notebook sheets. For example, A2..B5 on sheets A through D is a 3-D selection.

To point to a 3-D selection, first select the cells on the first sheet. Then hold down the Shift key while you click the tab for the last sheet in the series. A black line appears under the tabs. The same cells are now selected on all the sheets where the black line appears. Complete the formula that refers to this selection or choose the command to act on it. The cells remain selected only until you select elsewhere in the notebook.

To type a reference to a 3-D selection, include the sheet references first, followed by the cell coordinates. For example,

A..D:A2..B5

refers to cells on sheets A, B, C, and D.

If the same sheets were grouped under the name Receipts, the same 3-D reference would look like this:

Receipts:A2..B5

Another way to type a reference to a 3-D selection is to visualize it as a cube. Type the sheet and cell coordinates of the cube's front upper left corner, followed by two periods, then the back lower right corner. For instance, you can refer to the same cells as in the previous example by typing

A:A2..D:B5.

Either 3-D syntax is correct, but by default, all references you point to or type are converted to the first method. If you prefer the second method, you can switch to it with the application Display property.

Related Concepts


To select data with SpeedSelect
To select data with SpeedSelect,

1	Click one cell within the data.

2	Right-click a Toolbar and click Data Manipulation.

3	Click the SpeedSelect button [image]. Corel Quattro Pro automatically determines the corners of the table and selects all the cells for you.

Related Topics


To move to a corner of data cells
To move to a corner of data cells,

1	Select one cell within the data.

2	Right-click a Toolbar and click Data Manipulation.

3	Click one of the navigation tools:

Top Left of Table button

Top Right of Table button

Bottom Left of Table button

Bottom Right of Table button

The selector moves in the direction of the arrow to a corner of the data.

Related Topics


To zoom data to fit on screen
To zoom data to fit on screen,

1	Select the cells (or just one cells).

2	Right-click a Toolbar and click Data Manipulation.

3	Click the Zoom To Fit button [image].

Tip

If you selected just one cell, Corel Quattro Pro uses SpeedSelect to find the boundaries of the data, then zooms it. To restore the screen to its normal display, pull down the Zoom Factor list in the Property Bar and choose 100%.

Related Topics

More Info


About QuickSum

Corel Quattro Pro includes QuickSum, a way to quickly total columns and rows of numbers. The QuickSum button [image] on the Toolbar uses @SUM to add the values of the specified cells. You can use it to total a single row or column, multiple rows or columns, all the rows and columns you have selected, or 3-D selection.

The entries added depend on what you select before clicking QuickSum:

To total several cells in a column, select the data plus one blank cell below. For example, to total the values in the column A1..A3, select A1..A4. The total appears in cell A4.

To total several cells across a row, select the cells plus one blank cell to the right.

To total many columns, select the data and a blank row below.

To total many rows, select the data and a blank column to the right.

To total all rows and columns and create a grand total at the same time, select the data with a blank column to the right and a blank row below.

To total all cells on multiple sheets onto a blank sheet, select the 3-D cells and the same cells on an extra blank sheet.

To create totals outside all rows and columns on multiple sheets, select a 3-D area with a blank row and column around the data.

You can also use QuickSum without selecting the data you are totaling. This is useful for totaling large cells of data that are time-consuming to select. Just select the blank cells where you want the totals placed (the blank cells must be adjacent to the data), and click QuickSum. Corel Quattro Pro guesses which cells you want totaled by the extent of the data above (if you selected cells in a row), to the left (if you selected cells in a column), or on previous sheets (if you selected cells). After clicking QuickSum, check each @SUM formula to make sure it actually refers to the appropriate cells.

Tip

QuickSum adds values only. Any label entries in the selected cells are treated as zero values.

To use QuickSum to create totals

Related Concepts


To use QuickSum to create totals
To use QuickSum to create totals,

1	Select cells, including the data to total plus a blank cell (or cells) beneath or to the right to contain the results.

2	Click the QuickSum button [image].

Tip

QuickSum adds values only. Any label entries in the selected cells are treated as zero values.

Related Topics

More Info


To add a hidden comment to a formula or value
To add a hidden comment to a formula or value,

Type a semicolon (;) after the formula or value and type your comment.

Tips

You cannot add a hidden comment to a label.

To hide an entire entry, click Format [image] Selection [image] Reveal/Hide, then click Hide.

The semicolon and the characters after it are stored with the cell, but they do not appear in the cell. You can see the comment on the input line when you select the cell.

Hidden comments do not appear in a printed notebook unless you click File [image] Page Setup [image] Options, then check Cell Formulas, or if you click Format [image] Selection [image] Numeric Format, then click Text.

Related Topics


About Entering a Sequence of Values

You can use the QuickFill button [image] to fill cells according to one or more seed values or series lists.

Use Edit [image] Fill [image] Fill Series to specify rules for filling the selected cells. You can use numbers, dates, times, or formulas.

To fill cells with a sequence of numbers or formulas

To fill cells with a sequence of dates or times

To use QuickFill with a seed value

To use QuickFill on empty cells

To use QuickFill on sheet tabs

Related Concepts


To fill cells with a sequence of numbers or formulas
To fill cells with a sequence of numbers or formulas,

1	Select the cells to fill. If you select a group of noncontiguous selections, Corel Quattro Pro fills it in the order selected.

2	Click Edit [image] Fill [image] Fill Series, or click here [image] for a shortcut.

3	Type a Start value for the first cell. You can enter a number, a formula, a date, or a time.

4	Type a Step value. This is the constant value to add (or multiply or use as an exponent) with the Start value or the previous value. If you want the values to decrease, enter a negative number and a Stop value lower than the Start value. The Step value can also be a formula.

5	The default stop value is 8191. Enter a different value if you want a higher or lower limit for the fill values.

6	Choose column or row order. Click Column to fill down the columns, starting with the leftmost column. Click Row to fill across rows instead, starting with the top row.

7	Choose the type of series you would like to govern the fill.

8	If the Start value is a number or a formula, you can choose Linear (addition), Growth (multiplication), or Power (exponentiation). Linear adds the Step value to the previous value (defined at first to be the Start value). Growth multiplies the Step value by the previous value. Power uses the Step value as the exponent of the previous value.

Related Topics

More Info


To fill cells with a sequence of dates or times
To fill cells with a sequence of dates or times,

1	Select the cells to fill. If you select noncontiguous selections, Corel Quattro Pro fills it in the order selected.

2	Click Edit [image] Fill [image] Fill Series or click here [image] for a shortcut.

3	Type a beginning date or time in the Start field. The date or time format you use is repeated in subsequent cells.

4	For Step value, type the number of years, months, and so on to add.

5	For Stop value, type a number larger than 50000, or if you want to stop at a particular date, enter the date.

6	Choose column or row order. Click Column to fill down the columns, starting with the leftmost column. Click Row to fill across rows instead, starting with the top row.

7	In the Series box, click the time unit you want to use. The fill operation works linearly (Step values are added), but you can add cells in units of years, months, weeks, weekdays (thereby skipping weekends), or in days, hours, minutes, or seconds.

Tips

If you are filling with dates instead of times, only the integer part of the Start, Step, and Stop values are used; the fractional part is ignored.

The Stop value needs to be greater than the date serial number of the Start date. For example, if you are entering 10-Sep-92 as the Start date, the serial number is 33857. So, the Stop valus needs to be at least 33858 (instead of the default 8192), or the selected cells will remain blank.

If the Start value is a number that is not formatted as a date (for example, if you enter 33764 instead of 09-Jun-92), cells are filled with different date or time-related information depending on the Series setting. If you choose Month, only month names are entered. If you choose Year, 4-digit year values appear. Choosing Week, Weekday, or Day fills with days incremented by the appropriate interval, and choosing Hour, Minute, or Second displays times with the corresponding level of detail.

Related Topics

More Info


About QuickFill

Based on the entries in one or more cells, you can quickly fill cells with a sequence of entries. You can do this either by continuing a pattern or using a predefined series with the QuickFill button [image]. You can fill cells with numbers, a combination of letters and numbers, or with specific types of labels, such as days of the week or months of the year.

You can use QuickFill with a seed value or on empty cells. You can also use QuickFill to name sheet tabs and you can create custom series to use with QuickFill.

To use QuickFill with a seed value

To use QuickFill on empty cells

To use QuickFill on sheet tabs

To create a new QuickFill list series

To create a new QuickFill formula series

To change a QuickFill series

To delete a QuickFill series

To rename a QuickFill series

Related Concepts


To use QuickFill with a seed value
To use QuickFill with a seed value,

1	Select the cell to act as a seed value for the sequence plus the blank cells to fill with entries.

2	Click the QuickFill button [image].

Tip

You can extend a sequence in any direction, using these rules:

You can have one seed value, or many.

The blank cells to be filled must be contiguous with the seed value(s), extending down the column or across the row to the right.

You can fill a 3-D or noncontiguous selection, but each sheet or subselection must have its own seed value(s) for its own filled sequence.

You can extend in two directions at once by selecting cells with seed values next to the upper left cell.

Related Topics

More Info


To use QuickFill on empty cells
To use QuickFill on empty cells,

1	Select the cells.

2	Click the QuickFill button [image].

3	Choose a series in the Series Name list. A list of its elements appears in the Series Element field.

4	Indicate how to fill the cells: Check Columns to fill to the bottom of the first column in the cells, then continue at the top of the second column. Check Rows to fill the first row in the cells then the second. This procedure is similar to using Edit [image] Fill [image] Fill Series.

Related Topics

More Info


To use QuickFill on sheet tabs
To use QuickFill on sheet tabs,

1	Select one empty cell.

2	Click the QuickFill button [image].

3	Choose a list series in the Series Name list. A list of its elements appears in the Series Element field.

4	Check Tabs to fill the sheet tabs.

Tip

All tabs are filled until the series is complete. If you want to use only part of the series, modify the series and save it under another name, then use the new series to fill the tabs.

Related Topics

More Info


About Creating and Modifying QuickFill Series

You can create your own sequences of values and labels to enter with QuickFill. You can create new series by entering lists or formulas and by modifying existing series.

To create a new QuickFill list series

To create a new QuickFill formula series

To change a QuickFill series

To delete a QuickFill series

To rename a QuickFill series

Related Concepts


To create a new QuickFill list series
To create a new QuickFill list series,

1	Select one empty cell, then click the QuickFill button [image].

2	Click Create.

3	Type a descriptive name in the Series Name field.

4	Check List in the Series Type group. Check Repeating if you want the series to start again when every element has been entered once.

5	Enter the first element of the list in the Value field. Then, click Add to add the element to the list.

6	Enter the remaining elements the same as the first. To insert an element above an existing element, highlight the existing element, type the new element in the Value field, then click Insert.

7	To delete an element from the list, select it, then click Delete.

8	To modify an element, select it, edit it in the Value field, then click Modify.

9	To add elements from a list in the notebook, click Extract and specify the cells that contain the new series elements. Check Override Existing Values to replace any existing elements with those in the notebook.

Tip

You can also click Edit [image] Fill [image] Define QuickFill to create a QuickFill series.

Related Topics

More Info


To create a new QuickFill formula series
To create a new QuickFill formula series,

1	Select one empty cell, then click the QuickFill button [image].

2	Click Create.

3	Type a descriptive name in the Series Name field.

4	Check Formula in the Series Type group.

5	Enter the first number in the series into the Seed Value field. This value is used as a constant in the formula. A string seed value is evaluated as 0.

6	Enter the formula into the Formula field. Use the Seed, Previous, and Iteration buttons to insert the seed value, previous value, and iteration number into the formula.

For example, this formula produces a series that starts with 5 and increases by 5 (5, 10, 15, 20, and so on): #SEED#+(5*#ITER#).

Tip

You can also click Edit [image] Fill [image] Define QuickFill to create a QuickFill series.

Related Topics

More Info


To change a QuickFill series
To change a QuickFill series,

1	Select one empty cell, then click the QuickFill button [image].

2	Select the series you want to change.

3	Click Modify.

4	Change the series options. If you selected a list series, change the Series Elements Options. If you selected a formula series, change the Formula Definition Options. For help about the options, click [image] in the title bar, then click the option.

Tip

You can also click Edit [image] Fill [image] Define QuickFill to change a QuickFill series.

Related Topics

More Info


To delete a QuickFill series
To delete a QuickFill series,

1	Select one empty cell, then click the QuickFill button [image].

2	Select the series you want to delete.

3	Click Delete, then click Yes.

Tip

You can also click Edit [image] Fill [image] Define QuickFill to delete a QuickFill series.

Related Topics

More Info


To rename a QuickFill series
To rename a QuickFill series,

1	Click Edit [image] Fill [image] Define QuickFill.

2	Select the series and click Rename.

3	Type the new name.

Related Topics

More Info


QuickFill Seed Values

These are the types of entries you can use as QuickFill seed values, along with the resulting sequence:

Seed values(s)	Continued sequence

1st	2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th...

Qtr 1	Qtr 2, Qtr 3, Qtr 4, Qtr 1...

1st Quarter	2nd Quarter, 3rd Quarter...

Jan	Feb, Mar...

January	February, March...

Mon	Tue, Wed, Thu...

Monday	Tuesday, Wednesday...

Week 1	Week 2, Week 3...

P1, P2, Total	P3, P4, Total, P5, P6, Total...

Jan 89, Feb 89	Mar 89, Apr 89...

100 Days	101 Days, 102 Days, 103 Days...

100 Days, 200 Days	300 Days, 400 Days, 500 Days...

1, 3, 5	7, 9, 11, 13...

1, 3, 6	8.333333, 10.83333, 13.33333...

04/05/92	04/06/92, 04/07/92...

The last example shows the seed value formatted as a date.

Related Concepts


About Formula Composer

The Formula Composer is a visual tool for creating, editing, and debugging formulas. You can use the Formula Composer to build a formula from scratch or to edit an existing formula.

The Formula Composer dialog box provides multiple views of a formula, including

an outline pane to examine the structure of a formula, edit parts of the formula, and trace cell references and cell names

an @function description pane with a brief description of the selected @function

an argument pane to make entering arguments easy

To use the Formula Composer

To switch views of the Formula Composer

To expand or collapse a formula in an outline

To convert an expression to a value

Related Concepts


To use the Formula Composer
To use the Formula Composer,

1	Select a cell that contains a formula, or select a blank cell to create a new formula.

2	Click [image].

3	Edit the formula using one or more of these methods:

Revise the formula by typing in the Expression edit field. Click here [image] for details.

Use the outline pane to select part of the formula, expand or collapse the formula outline, or go to referenced cells. Click here [image] for details.

Click the Function button [image] to open the Functions dialog box, and choose a function from the list.

Tips

Click the [image] to get specific help about a formula and each of its parameters.

You can resize the Formula Composer dialog box to make it smaller or larger. Just drag a side or corner of the dialog box to change its size. To resize the panes within the Formula Composer dialog box, drag the vertical pane divider to the left or right.

Related Topics

More Info


To switch views of the Formula Composer
To switch views of the Formula Composer,

Click one of the view buttons located on the Formula Composer Toolbar:

 (Standard View) Displays all three panes (@Function Description, Outline and Argument).

 (Argument View) Displays the Outline and Argument panes.

 (Outline View) Displays only the Outline pane.

Related Topics

More Info


Outline Pane

The Outline pane of the Formula Composer works like the Windows Explorer. You can expand or collapse parts of the outline to focus on the part of the formula you want to edit. Folder icons to the left of the outline indicate whether expressions have been expanded or collapsed. Expressions that cannot be expanded, such as values, have a node (a small yellow circle) to the left of them. The outline can consist of several levels, with each level containing a different expression. By default, the outline pane shows one level of the outline expanded.

To select part of the formula outline, use one of these methods:

Click an expression in the outline.

Press Alt+C to make the outline the focus of the dialog box, then use the up and down arrow keys to select part of the outline.

When you select part of the formula outline, the Expression edit field changes to show the expression you selected. If the selected expression is an @function, the right side of the dialog box displays the @function description and argument panes (in Standard or Argument view).

To expand or collapse part of the formula outline, double-click it or select it and press Enter. You can also expand or collapse part of the formula outline by using the Expand or Collapse buttons.

Tip

If an expression is incomplete or syntactically incorrect (for example, an @function might be missing an argument), a red question mark icon appears to the left of the outline. The red question mark icon is a helpful debugging tool. It alerts you when something is wrong with part of a formula.

Related Concepts


@Function Description Pane

When you type an @function--for example, @SUM--in the Expression edit field of the Formula Composer, the @function description pane appears on the right side of the dialog box (in Standard view).

Tip

For further help about an @function displayed in the @function description pane, click [image] to the left of the @function name.

Related Concepts


Argument Pane

The argument pane appears on the right side of the dialog box (under the @Function Description pane, in Standard view), and provides entry fields for the @function arguments.

The Formula Composer Toolbar has three buttons that help you enter each argument:

To nest an @function in the formula, click the Function button. You can then select an @function from several categories.

To insert a cell name in the formula, click the Name button and select a name from the list.

To insert a cell or cell reference, click the Point Mode button. When you click the Point Mode button, the Formula Composer dialog box shrinks to show only its title bar until you make a selection.

Tip

Brackets around an argument indicate an optional argument. If you enter a value for an optional argument, you must also enter values for all preceding optional arguments. For a short description of each @function argument, click [image] to the left of the argument.

Related Concepts


Editing Formula Composer Expressions

You can create or revise formulas, or parts of a formula, directly in the Expression edit field. An expression is any isolated part of the formula that you choose in the formula outline. To edit the entire formula, select the first expression in the formula outline. To edit part of the formula, select any other expression in the outline.

There are three buttons on the Formula Composer Toolbar that help you edit a formula:

To insert an @function in the formula, click the Function button. You can then select an @function from several categories.

To insert a cell name in the formula, click the Cell Names button and select a name.

To insert a cell or cell reference, click the Point Mode button. When you click the Point Mode button, the Formula Composer dialog box shrinks to show only its title bar until you make a selection.

The Function, Cell Names, and Point Mode buttons are also used to enter @function arguments in the arguments pane.

Tip

To clear the Expression edit field, press Ctrl+Backspace.

Related Concepts


To expand or collapse an outline
To expand or collapse a formula in an outline,

Select the formula and click the Expand button [image] to expand the outline one level, or click the Collapse button [image] to collapse the current expression of the outline.

Tip

You can also double-click an expression to expand or collapse it.

Related Topics


To convert an expression to a value
To convert an expression to a value,

Click the Value button [image] on the Formula Composer Toolbar to convert the current expression to a value. For example, if the selected expression is @SUM(24,54,33), pressing the value button converts this expression to 111, a value.

Tip

Once you convert an expression to a value, you cannot convert it back into an expression. You can, however, click Revert to restore the original formula.

Related Topics


Tracing Formula Cell References

Click the Follow button [image] or Back button [image] located on the Formula Composer Toolbar to examine a cell's relationship with other cells on the spreadsheet. When you trace cell references using the Follow and Back buttons, you can determine how cells that are referenced in the formula depend on other cells. For complex formulas with nested levels of cell references, the Follow and Back buttons serve as basic spreadsheet auditing tools.

When you trace cell references in a formula, the referenced cells appear in the Formula Composer title bar. For example, if cell A:A1 contains the formula +B1, when you use the Formula Composer to follow to cell A:B1 the title bar of the dialog box changes to Formula Composer - A:A1->A:B1. (The cell you first started to follow from is always displayed on the far left of the list, and the current cell is always displayed on the far right.) To go back to cell A:A1, click the Back button on the Toolbar or press Ctrl+B.

Tips

For a nested series of cell references contained in multiple formulas, use the shortcut keys Ctrl+F and Ctrl+B to follow and backtrack, respectively, through a stack of cell references.

If a cell reference is not selected in the formula outline, the Follow and Back buttons are dimmed. When you click Follow for a selection reference, the Formula Composer goes to the first cell in the selection; for example, if you click Follow for the cells A:A1..C4, the Formula Composer goes to cell A:A1.

Related Concepts


Nesting @Functions in the Formula Composer

When you nest @functions, the @function description pane always displays the selected @function from the formula outline. For example, the following @function formula contains a nested @AVG @function:

@ROUND(@AVG(C14..F24),2)

To edit the @AVG @function, select the @AVG expression in the formula outline.

Related Concepts


File handling options
File-Handling Options

Whether you are saving or opening a file, options that operate on files require the name of a file to work on. When you choose one of these options, you will see a dialog box with the options described below.

If the file name you want is already displayed, double-click it. To display file names in other drives or folders, use these controls:

Look in

Highlights the current folder. The drive or folder that contains the current folder appears above it; any subfolders are listed below it. To change to a different folder, double-click a folder.

Drives

Lets you switch to another drive. Click the arrow at the right of the box and click the drive name you want to switch to.

File Types

For File [image] Save and File [image] Open, File type controls the file names that are listed in the File name list box above it. Initially, the dialog box is set to display all files with any extension beginning with .W, but you can choose another popular file type by clicking the arrow and choosing a type from the list.

Important: For File [image] Save As, File type controls the file format. Regardless of the file name and extension you enter, the file is saved in the selected format.

File Name

Lets you choose the file to be saved or opened, either by typing it in the edit field or clicking it from the list below. You can also control the types of files displayed using DOS wildcards.. For this version of Corel Quattro Pro, the default file extension for notebooks is .WB3.

Protection Password

Lets you enter a password to protect your notebook from unauthorized use.

About Folders

When you first open the dialog box, it displays files in the startup folder. The startup folder is initially the folder from which you start Corel Quattro Pro, but you can change it with Tools [image] Settings [image] File Options [image] File Extension.

If you save or load a file in a folder other than the startup folder, this last-used folder becomes the default folder. Then the next time you choose a option to save or load a file, the default folder initially appears in the dialog box. The last-used folder is always the default folder displayed until you restart Corel Quattro Pro, when the startup folder again appears.

About Wildcards

You can use DOS wildcard characters (* and ?) in any part of the File Name edit field to limit the files displayed. For instance, *.PRN lists all files with the extension .PRN, and BUDGET9?.WB3 lists all notebooks that begin with BUDGET9 followed by one character before the .WB3 extension. An asterisk stands for any number of characters in its position; a question mark stands for any single character in its position.

About Read-Only Files

If you are working on a network and the file you are trying to open or retrieve has already been opened by another user, you will view a Read-only prompt. You can choose to open the file with read-only rights (able to save it under a different name) or cancel the operation.

About Alternate File Handling Dialog Boxes

You will see an alternate dialog box if you are using a document managing system that is compliant with the Open Document Management API (ODMA) standard.

Related Concepts


About Opening Files

Saving a notebook writes it to a file. You can redisplay it anytime by opening the file into a window. You can also load files created with other notebook programs; Corel Quattro Pro translates them automatically.

These File menu options open another window or load another file into a window:

New creates a new, blank notebook window or a notebook based on an existing project.

Open creates a new window and opens the file you specify into it.

Tip

Although Corel Quattro Pro has other types of windows (chart windows and dialog box windows), notebook windows are the ones opened, created, and saved with the File options.

To create a new file

To open a file

Related Concepts


To create a new file
To create a new file,

1	Click File [image] New to turn on the PerfectExpert.

2	Click Quattro Pro Notebook to open a blank notebook, or click a specific project to create a notebook based on that project.

3	Click options from the PerfectExpert to help you create your document.

4	Click in the document to enter or replace text.

Tips

The PerfectExpert can help you get right to work creating forms and spreadsheets. You can select from many projects to help you create balance sheets, invoices, and other documents. Plus you can create your own forms using the PerfectExpert. To turn the PerfectExpert on or off click Help [image] PerfectExpert.

If no projects are enabled, File [image] New creates a blank notebook. To enable existing projects, click Tools [image] Settings [image] File Options, then check Enable QuickTemplates.

Related Topics

More Info


About Entering Filenames

Corel Quattro Pro can open notebooks on your local hard drive, network servers, the Internet, or ODMA systems. The syntax of the filename you enter tells Corel Quattro Pro where the notebook is located.

DOS filenames

Long filenames

Universal Naming Convention (UNC) filenames

Uniform Resource Locator (URL) filenames

Open Document Management API (ODMA) filenames


DOS Filenames

Syntax:	drive:\path\filename.extension

Example:	C:\COREL\SUITE8\ PROGRAMS\SAMPLE\BUDGET.WB3

DOS filenames consist of an optional drive letter, an optional folder path, a filename no longer than eight characters, a period, and an extension of up to three characters. Filename and extension cannot contain spaces, periods, backslashes, and colons. See your DOS documentation for more on DOS filenames.


Long Filenames

Syntax:	drive:\path\filename

Example:	C:\COREL\SUITE8\PROGRAMS\SAMPLE\3rd Quarter Budget

Long filenames consist of an optional drive letter, an optional folder path, and a filename no longer than 255 characters. Long filenames can contain characters not allowed in DOS filenames, like spaces. See your Windows documentation for more information on long filenames.

Tip

Long filenames are not supported in versions of Windows and DOS earlier than Windows 95.


Universal Naming Convention (UNC) Filenames

Syntax:	\\server\volume\path\filename

Example:	\\MAIN\APPS\COREL\SUITE8\PROGRAMS\SAMPLE\BUDGET.WB3

Syntax:	server\volume:path\filename

Example:	MAIN\APPS:COREL\SUITE8\PROGRAMS\SAMPLE\BUDGET.WB3

UNC filenames let you access files on network servers without having to map server areas to drive letters. They consist of a network server name, an area on the server, an optional folder path, and a filename.


Uniform Resource Locator (URL) Filenames

Syntax: protocol://server/path/filename

Examples:

http://www.corel.ca/product/prod.htm

ftp://ftp.corel.ca/pub/win/info.wb3

http://qs.secapl.com/cgi-bin/qs?tick=cosff

http://quote.yahoo.com/quotes?symbols=cosff&detailed=f

http://www.ino.com/cgi-bin/qw?exch=forex

http://qs.secapl.com/cgi-bin/qs?tick=cosff.

URL filenames let you open files on the Internet. They consist of a resource type (protocol), an Internet server, an optional folder path, and a filename. Corel Quattro Pro can access World Wide Web (http), gopher, and ftp sites. Internet files are opened for read-only access and you cannot save files onto the Internet.


Open Document Management API (ODMA) Filenames

Syntax:	::ODMA\\DMSPath

Example:	::ODMA\SOFTSOL\311\TEST\10\1

ODMA filenames let you open documents stored in a document management system (DMS). DMSPath is a string identifying the location of the file; it varies depending on the DMS you are using (the example is for SoftSolutions).


About Opening a File

To work with another existing notebook without putting away the active notebook window, use File [image] Open or click the Open button [image] on the Toolbar.

Automatically Opening a File

When you start Corel Quattro Pro, a blank notebook appears. However, if you have specified an autoload file, this file is opened automatically. This feature lets you immediately display the notebook you use most often.

An autoload file is a notebook specified with Tools [image] Settings [image] File Options [image] Autoload File. Initially, this default is QUATTRO.WB3, and any notebook with that name in the startup folder is opened automatically if no other is specified. You can change this default to any file you like.

If you use a template (a notebook you created with the characteristics you use most often), you can display it automatically instead of a blank notebook.

You can also open a file and Corel Quattro Pro at the same time using the Windows Run option. For example, in the Run dialog box, type

C:\COREL\SUITE8\PROGRAMS\QPW BUDGET

To open a file

Related Concepts


To open a file
To open a file,

1	Click [image].

2	Choose the file name you want.

3	If the file has a password, type the password.

4	If the notebook contains a link to another notebook, the Hotlinks dialog box appears. Select a choice, and click OK.

Tips

If the password is incorrect, Corel Quattro Pro displays an error message and cancels the Open option.

You can also click File [image] Open to open a file.

Related Topics

More Info


To open a file on the Internet
To open a file on the Internet,

1	Click [image].

2	In the Filename field, type a URL. Click here [image] for URL syntax.

Tips

Corel Quattro Pro makes a local copy of the file; you do not have to be continuously connected to the Internet to work with the file.

You can also click File [image] Open to open a file on the Internet.

Related Topics

More Info


About Saving Files

There are two options that save notebooks to disk:

Save saves the notebook to the name under which you last saved it. If the notebook has not yet been saved, choosing Save opens the same dialog box used by Save As. You can also use the Save button [image] on the Toolbar to save notebook files.

Save As saves the notebook under a new name you specify.

If you are using Save with a notebook for the first time, or if you use Save As, the Save File dialog box appears.

Corel Quattro Pro saves the notebook, storing the data along with all its properties. Corel Quattro Pro also saves any named cells, charts, slide shows, and dialog boxes you have created. You can also protect the file with a password.

After you name a notebook, you can store changes to it with File [image] Save. Corel Quattro Pro assumes you want to save the file under the same name.

To save a notebook for use with another program, such as Paradox, dBASE, or 1-2-3, include the program’s data file extension when you save the notebook and be sure the File Type field is set to the appropriate type.

Unless you are saving a file for use with another program, it is best if you do not include an extension with the file name. Corel Quattro Pro then adds the default extension, initially .WB3.

To save a file

Related Concepts


To save a file
To save a file,

1	Use one of the following File menu options:

File [image] Save saves the notebook to the name under which you last saved it. If the notebook has not yet been saved, choosing Save opens the same dialog box used by Save As.

File [image] Save As saves the notebook under a new name you specify.

If you are using Save with a notebook for the first time, or if you use Save As, continue with the following steps.

2	Enter the file name you want.

3	Set the File type option to the type of file you want to save. The default file type is QPW v7/v8 (*.WB3). Regardless of the file name and extension you enter, the file is saved in the selected format.

Tips

You can also use the Save button [image] on the Toolbar to save notebook files.

If you select Save As and the file name you specify already exists, a dialog box will open and tell you. Click Replace to overwrite the file on disk with the file you are working on. Click Cancel to not save the file with that name, then specify a different name.

Related Topics

More Info


About Passwords

The highest level of password protection is to save a notebook with a password. Then, only users who know the notebook can open the notebook.

You can also set lower password protection, though, so users can open files but they cannot look at formulas in the file.

To assign a password to a file

To use a password at startup

To assign passwords just to formulas in a file


To assign a password to a file
To assign a password to a file,

1	When saving for the first time, click File [image] Save, then select Password Protect.

2	To save the file with a password after you have saved it previously, click File [image] Save As, then select Password Protect

3	Specify a filename, then click Save.

4	Type the password and click OK.

5	Type the password again for verification.

Tips

Be sure to write down the password and keep it in a safe place. If you lose it, you are locked out of part or all of the protected notebook.

Passwords are case-sensitive. For example, Corel Quattro Pro considers "MYBUDGET" and "mybudget" different passwords.

You can also assign a password while you are working on the notebook instead of specifying it when saving the file. Click Format [image] Notebook [image] Password Level [image] High.

Related Topics

More Info


To assign passwords just to formulas in a file
To assign passwords just to formulas in a file,

1	Click Format [image] Notebook.

2	Click Password Level.

3	Check Low, Medium, or High. The options are discussed below.

4	Type a password and click OK.

5	Type the password again for verification.

The Password Protection Level pane offers these Password Protection Level options:

None

Requires no password to open and use the notebook.

Low

Requires a password to view formulas in the notebook. Anyone can open the notebook, but only password holders can view and edit formulas. Other users see values instead of formulas. Selected formula cells show asterisks (*****) in the input line.

If you plan to assign Low or Medium protection to a notebook, it is wise to protect formula cells first or shade them so they are easily distinguishable from data cells.

Medium

Requires a password to show the notebook and view formulas in it. The notebook is always hidden once it is saved and closed. Then, only password holders can show it again. All the features of Low protection apply as well.

High

This is the same as saving the file with a password. Requires a password to open the notebook. This option is suitable for most purposes. You are prompted for the password following any option that attempts to open the protected file. Remember, you must enter the assigned password in the same combination of lowercase and capital letters as the original entry. You can also open the notebook with a startup option (click here [image] for details).

Once the notebook is open, you can hide and show it or edit its formulas without restriction. You can also change the password protection level.

Tips

Be sure to write down the password and keep it in a safe place. If you lose it, you are locked out of part or all of the protected notebook.

Passwords are case-sensitive. For example, Corel Quattro Pro considers "MYBUDGET" and "mybudget" different passwords.

Related Concepts


To use a password at startup
To use a password at startup,

1	Exit Corel Quattro Pro.

2	Click Start in the taskbar, then click Run.

3	Enter this in the Open edit field:

   path\QPW filename /Spassword

Example

For example, if Corel Quattro Pro is in C:\ SUITE8\PROGRAMS\ you could enter this option line to open MYFILE.WB3 in subfolder DATA with password SESAME:

   C:\COREL\SUITE8\PROGRAMS\ QPW C:\COREL\SUITE8\PROGRAMS\DATA\MYFILE.WB3 /SSESAME

If MYFILE.WB3 had Medium password protection, you could click Window [image] Show to display it again.

Related Topics

More Info


About projects
About Projects (Templates)

A project is a predesigned notebook template you can use to serve as the basis for a new notebook when you click File [image] New. Many of the projects that come with Corel Quattro Pro provide the formatting and structural skeleton for common spreadsheets and data entry forms used in business and at home. You can also create your own customized projects.

To create a new notebook based on a project

To create a new project

Related Concepts


To create a new notebook based on a project
To create a new notebook based on a project,

1	Click File [image] New.

2	Click a project from the list.

Tip

If projects are not enabled, File [image] New creates a blank notebook. To enable QuickTemplates click Tools [image] Settings [image] File Options, then check Enable QuickTemplates.

Related Topics

More Info


To create a new project
To create a new project,

1	Click File [image] New.

2	Click Options [image] Add Project, then follow the instructions.

Related Topics

More Info


To e-mail the current file
To e-mail the current file,

1	Click File [image] Send To [image] Mail.

2	Set mail options according to your mail system.

3	Send the mail.

Tip

Corel Quattro Pro supports WordPerfect Office 4.0, Novell GroupWise 4.1, and Digital Teamlinks, as well as any mail system using MAPI or CMC standards.

You can send selected parts of your notebook by first selecting the parts you want, then clicking File [image] Send To [image] Mail.

More Info


To close a file
To close a file,

1	Click File [image] Close.

2	If a notebook has unsaved changes, a dialog box appears asking you if you want to save your changes. To save the file first then close, click Yes. Click No to close the file without saving it.

Tips

To close all windows and exit Corel Quattro Pro at the same time, click File [image] Exit.

You can also exit Corel Quattro Pro and save all notebooks by right-clicking on the Application Bar (at the bottom of the screen).

To close a particular window (without closing related views), click the X button in the window's title bar.

Related Topics


Using Notebook Document Icons

If you created a notebook icon on the Windows 95 Desktop, you can use it to print, open, or view the notebook.

To print a notebook from the Windows 95 Desktop, right-click its document icon and click Print, or drag the document icon over a printer shortcut icon or into a printer window.

To open a notebook when Corel Quattro Pro is already running, drag it into the Corel Quattro Pro window. To start Corel Quattro Pro and open a notebook, double-click the notebook's document icon, or right-click it and click Open.

To view a notebook without opening it in Corel Quattro Pro, right-click its document icon and click Quick View. (This option is available if Quick View is installed on your system.)

To create a new notebook icon from the Windows 95 Desktop, right-click an empty area of the Desktop, then click New [image] Corel Quattro Pro Notebook. This creates an icon that you can double-click whenever you want to create a new notebook. The new notebook appears on the Desktop as a separate document icon.

To display summary information about the notebook, right-click its document icon and click Properties. This displays the summary information entered using File [image] Properties.


To view and edit summary information and statistics
To view and edit summary information and statistics,

1	Click File [image] Properties.

2	Enter summary information about the file.

Tip

You can use the file's summary information to search for the file.


About Workspaces

The arrangement of windows onscreen is called a workspace. It includes the position and size of all notebook windows and the names of the files contained in each window. The positions of chart and dialog windows are not saved as part of a workspace.

You can save and retrieve workspaces. Workspaces make it easy to work with multiple files and windows.

Saving a workspace does not save contents of the files within it; use File [image] Save or File [image] Save As for this.

When you retrieve a workspace, Corel Quattro Pro overlays any existing windows with the windows stored in the workspace file, then retrieves the appropriate file for each.

Corel Quattro Pro always retrieves the latest saved version of files when you retrieve a workspace. If you leave the workspace and save a file included in the workspace, Corel Quattro Pro retrieves the updated version of the file the next time you click File [image] Workspace [image] Restore.

Workspace files have a WBS filename extension.

To save a workspace

To retrieve a workspace

Related Concepts


To save a workspace
To save a workspace,

1	Click File [image] Workspace [image] Save.

2	Enter the file name you want. Do not include a file-name extension; Corel Quattro Pro includes the .WBS extension for workspace files.

Tip

Saving a workspace does not save the contents of the files within it; use File [image] Save or Save As for this. Also, if you use File [image] Save As, you must use File [image] Workspace [image] Save afterward so that Corel Quattro Pro can open the correct file the next time you try to retrieve the workspace.

Related Topics

More Info


To retrieve a workspace
To retrieve a workspace,

1	Click File [image] Workspace [image] Restore.

2	Double-click the file you want from the list, or type a filename.

Tips

Corel Quattro Pro overlays any existing windows with the windows stored in the workspace file, then retrieves the appropriate file for each.

Corel Quattro Pro always retrieves the latest saved version of files when you retrieve a workspace. If you leave the workspace and save a file included in the workspace, Corel Quattro Pro retrieves the updated version of the file the next time you click File [image] Workspace [image] Restore.

Related Topics

More Info


Read-only Files

The file you are trying to open or retrieve has already been opened by another user or is marked read-only.

You can choose to open the file with read-only rights (able to save it under a different name) or cancel the operation.

Related Concepts


About Settings

Click Tools [image] Settings to change application properties.

Display Options

International Options

Macro and Menu Options

File Options

General Options

Tip

You can also change application properties by right-clicking the title bar and clicking Application Properties.


Display Options

The Display property shows or hides portions of the Corel Quattro Pro window, and switches between 3-D syntax schemes.

To change a Display property setting, click Tools [image] Settings, then click the Display tab.

Tip

You can also set display options for specific notebooks by clicking Format [image] Notebook [image] Display Options.

To hide parts of the Corel Quattro Pro window

To switch to an alternative 3-D sheet range syntax


To hide parts of the Quattro Pro window
To hide parts of the Corel Quattro Pro window,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click the Display tab.

3	Deselect options in the Display Options group. For example, deselecting Show Toolbar hides all Toolbars.

Tip

To show a hidden feature, follow the same procedure but check it instead.

Related Topics

More Info


To switch to an alternative 3-D sheet range syntax
To switch to an alternative 3-D sheet range syntax,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click the Display tab.

3	In the 3-D Syntax group, click one of the two options.

A..B:A1..B2 expresses sheet references first, followed by a colon and the cell coordinates. This syntax makes group references more concise.

A:A1..B:B2 refers to each corner of the 3-D selection with the sheet reference included.

Tip

After you click to select a new cell, all existing 3-D references in formulas in open notebooks switch to the new syntax.

Related Topics

More Info


International Options

The International property controls the appearance of currency, punctuation, dates, times, international characters, and negative values. These options affect the appearance of values, how the date and time on the Application Bar appear, how you enter arguments in @functions, and how certain international characters appear.

The initial defaults are standard for the United States. If you are using Corel Quattro Pro in another country, or are doing business with another country, you can change these settings.

To change an International property setting, click Tools [image] Settings, then click the International tab.

To change the currency symbol

To change punctuation settings

To change international date formats

To change time formats

To convert LICS characters


To change the currency symbol
To change the currency symbol,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click the International tab.

3	Click Currency in the Selection group.

4	In the Currency group, click a country whose currency symbol you want to use. To change the currency symbol for a country (including whether the symbol is placed before or after values), click Change.

5	In the Negative Values group, click Signed to precede negative values with a minus sign, or click Parens to surround them with parentheses.

Tip

When you set the cell Numeric Format to Currency, you can use the default currency symbol or choose a currency symbol from a different country. This lets you use multiple currencies in one notebook.

Related Topics

More Info


To change punctuation settings
To change punctuation settings,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click the International tab.

3	Click Punctuation in the Selection group.

4	Click one of the alternative punctuation settings listed.

These options show the punctuation marks used to mark thousands and the decimal place, followed by the punctuation mark used to separate arguments in @function and macro (a1,a2). The last four options specify that a blank space separates thousands in numbers.

Tip

By default, Corel Quattro Pro uses commas as thousands separators, a period as a decimal separator, and a comma as an argument separator. Regardless of the punctuation setting, semicolons are always accepted as argument separators.

Related Topics

More Info


To change international date formats
To change international date formats,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click the International tab.

3	Click Date Format in the Selection group.

4	Choose one of the alternative formats.

Each of these options is shown in long and short versions. The short form is shown in parentheses. The format you choose here appears (in both long and short form) as a choice in the cell Numeric Format property. Corel Quattro Pro uses the long version of the format as the international clock setting.

Tips

By default, Corel Quattro Pro displays dates in long form as MM/DD/YY (06/18/92, for example) and in short form as MM/DD (06/18, for example).

The International property's Date Format option does not directly determine how dates appear. Rather, it determines the international date formats given as options for date appearance. To set the actual appearance of dates, click Format [image] Selection [image] Numeric Format.

Related Topics

More Info


To change time formats
To change time formats,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click the International tab.

3	Click Time Format in the Selection group.

4	Choose one of the alternative formats.

Each of these options is shown in its long and short versions. The format you choose here appears (in both long and short form) as a choice in the cell Numeric Format property. Corel Quattro Pro uses the long version of the format as the international clock setting.

Tips

By default, Corel Quattro Pro displays times in long form as HH:MM:SS (09:32:30, for example) and in short form as HH:MM (09:32, for example).

The International property's Time Format option determines the international time formats given as options for time display. To set the actual appearance of times, click Format [image] Selection [image] Numeric Format.

Related Topics

More Info


To convert LICS characters
To convert LICS characters,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click the International tab.

3	Click LICS in the Conversion group.

Tips

LICS stands for Lotus International Character Set. LICS characters are identical to the standard ANSI set except in the range 128 through 255, which is usually used for international and graphics characters. For more on LICS characters, see the 1-2-3 documentation.

When you save the file, Corel Quattro Pro writes these characters back to the LICS equivalents.

Related Topics

More Info


Macro and Menu Options

With Macro property settings, you can control what the screen displays as macros are running. You can also make alternative menu systems available through the use of the slash key and specify a macro to run when a notebook is opened.

To change a Macro property setting, click Tools [image] Settings, then click the Macro tab.

To control screen redrawing while running macros

To use an alternative menu system

To run a macro when a file opens


To control screen redrawing while running macros
To control screen redrawing while running macros,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click the Macro tab.

3	In the Suppress-Redraw group, click one of these options:

Both suppresses redrawing of the panel and windows.

Panel suppresses redrawing of menus, dialog boxes, the Application Bar, and the input line.

Window suppresses redrawing of windows only.

None redraws everything during macros.

Related Topics

More Info


To use an alternative menu system
To use an alternative menu system,

To use an Excel, QP7, or a simplified Windows menu structure,

1	Right-click anywhere on the main menu.

2	Click a different menu system (QP8, QP7, Excel, or Desktop).

To use a DOS menu system,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click the Macro tab.

3	Choose the menu system name from Slash Key options. For example, choose 1-2-3/R 2.01 to use 1-2-3 menus.

After you click OK, you can press the slash key to open menus in the chosen menu system.

Related Topics

More Info


To run a macro when a file opens
To run a macro when a file opens,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click the Macro tab.

3	Enter the new name for the Startup Macro edit field. By default, \0 is the startup macro.

Tips

To run a startup macro every time you start Corel Quattro Pro, include it in the notebook named in Tools [image] Settings [image] File Options [image] Autoload File. You can also create macros that run when you close a notebook or start Corel Quattro Pro.

Every time you open a notebook, Corel Quattro Pro looks in it for a macro named _NBSTARTMACRO and runs it, if found. If that macro is not found, Corel Quattro Pro looks for the name you enter above.

Related Topics

More Info


File Options

The File Options property includes information that is used every time you start Corel Quattro Pro.

To change a File Options property setting, click Tools [image] Settings, then click the File Options tab.

To specify a new default folder

To open a file when you start Corel Quattro Pro

To specify a default filename extension

To specify a folder for QuickTemplates

To create temporary backup files

To show full folder paths in title bars

To disable projects


To specify a new default folder
To specify a new default folder,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click the File Options tab.

3	In the Folder edit field, enter the path, including the drive letter, of the new default folder.

Tip

When you first start Corel Quattro Pro, the default folder is the drive and folder from which you started Corel Quattro Pro. When you save or open a file in another folder, the last-used folder becomes the default folder until you exit Corel Quattro Pro.

Related Topics

More Info


To open a file when you start Quattro Pro
To open a file when you start Corel Quattro Pro,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click the File Options tab.

3	Enter the new file name in the Autoload File edit field. The default Autoload File is QUATTRO.WB3.

If the file is not in the default folder specified in the Folder option (just above Autoload File), include the full pathname of the file.

Tip

You can also automatically open a notebook file if you start Corel Quattro Pro using the Start  button in the Windows taskbar. Click Start, then click Run, then type the full path and filename of the file you want to open.

Related Topics

More Info


To specify a default filename extension
To specify a default filename extension,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click the File Options tab.

3	Enter one to three letters in the File Extension edit field. The default filename extension is .WB3.

Related Topics

More Info


To specify a folder for QuickTemplates
To specify a folder for projects,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click the File Options tab.

3	In the QuickTemplates edit field, enter the path, including the drive letter, of the folder where template files are stored.

Related Topics

More Info


To create temporary backup files
To create temporary backup files,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click the File Options tab.

3	Set a time interval under Auto-backup Time (from 1 to 59 minutes) and check Activate.

For example, if you set the time to 5 and check Activate, Corel Quattro Pro saves the active notebook to a temporary backup file every 5 minutes.

Tip

If you exit Corel Quattro Pro unexpectedly with Auto-backup activated, you will be prompted to recover any open files the next time you start Corel Quattro Pro.

Related Topics

More Info


To show full folder paths in title bars
To show full folder paths in title bars,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click the File Options tab.

3	Click Enable Full Path Titles.

Related Topics

More Info


To disable QuickTemplates
To disable projects,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click the File Options tab.

3	Deselect Enable QuickTemplates. By default, projects (templates) are enabled.

Tip

When QuickTemplates are disabled, File [image] New creates a new, blank notebook without letting you choose a project.

Related Topics

More Info


General Options

The General applications property enables Undo, determines key behavior, and sets Drag and Drop delay time.

To change a General property setting, click Tools [image] Settings, then click the General tab.

To enable Undo

To use Corel Quattro Pro for DOS editing keys

To make the selector move down when you press Enter

To change the delay time for Drag and Drop


To enable Undo
To enable Undo,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click the General tab.

3	Check Undo Enabled.

Related Topics

More Info


To use Quattro Pro for DOS editing keys
To use Corel Quattro Pro for DOS editing keys,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click the General tab.

3	Check Compatible Keys.

Related Topics

More Info


To make the selector move down when you press Enter
To make the selector move down when you press Enter,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click the General tab.

3	Make sure the Compatible Keys setting is deselected.

4	Check Move Cell Selector On Enter Key.

Tip

After clicking Move Cell Selector On Enter, you can press the Enter key to move the active cell down by one cell. Press Shift+Enter to move the active cell back up again. Press Tab to move to the right. Press Shift+Tab to move to the left.

To turn off this feature, deselect Move Cell Selector On Enter Key.

Related Topics

More Info


To change the delay time for Drag and Drop
To change the delay time for Drag and Drop,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click the General tab.

3	Enter a new interval time in milliseconds in the Cell Drag And Drop Delay Time edit field. The default interval for Cell Drag And Drop Delay Time is 500 ms.

Tip

Change the delay time for Drag and Drop when you find that the four-way arrow appears too slowly (or too quickly) when you attempt to drag an object.

Related Topics

More Info


To hide notebook scroll bars, sheet tabs, and floating objects
To hide notebook scroll bars, sheet tabs, and floating objects,

1	Click Format [image] Notebook.

2	Click the Display tab.

3	Deselect the items you do not want to show.

4	For floating objects, select one of the following options:

Show Outline

Hide

Show All

Tip

You can also set display options for specific notebooks by clicking Format [image] Notebook [image] Display Options.

Related Topics


To zoom in or out
To zoom in or out,

1	Click View [image] Zoom.

2	Adjust the Zoom Factor setting.

The default setting is 100%. Percentages less than 100% show more columns and rows; percentages greater than 100% show fewer.

You can click Selection to expand the current selection to fill the screen.

3	In the Apply To group, click Notebook or Sheet to set where the zoom setting is applied.

Tip

The Zoom Factor setting does not affect printed output; click File [image] Page Setup [image] Print Scaling to scale printed documents.

Related Topics

More Info


Recalculation Options

Recalculation refers to how Corel Quattro Pro updates formula results when you change values that those formulas depend on. If you need to change the way recalculation works, click Format [image] Notebook, then click the Recalc Settings tab.

To set recalculation mode

To change recalculation order

To change the number of recalc iterations

To display error sources in cells


To set recalculation mode
To set recalculation mode,

1	Click Format [image] Notebook.

2	Click the Recalc Settings tab.

3	Click one of these options:

Automatic, which also recalculates formulas automatically, but pauses until recalculation is finished. Use Automatic if you have complex formulas that Background calculation does not handle fast enough.

Manual, which recalculates the formulas you enter or edit, but does not recalculate the entire notebook until you press F9. For example, if you enter +B3-C16 in a cell, Corel Quattro Pro displays the resulting value, but the value is not updated if the values in B3 or C16 change. If a formula needs to be recalculated, a calculator appears on the Application Bar to remind you that the displayed results of formulas may not be accurate. Press F9 or click the calculator to recalculate all formulas.

Background (the default), which recalculates formulas between keystrokes. It does not interrupt your work and recalculates automatically. Corel Quattro Pro always finishes recalculation before saving, extracting, or printing the notebook.

Tips

Either Background or Automatic is the recommended mode; both ensure that your data is always accurate. Manual mode is appropriate as a temporary break from recalculation while you adjust crucial cells in large notebooks that take a long time to recalculate.

In Manual mode, floating charts do not adjust automatically; press F9 to replot after supporting values change. To recalculate a single cell in Manual mode, select the cell, press F2, then press Enter. (This works only if the formula is not dependent on other formulas.)

In Background mode, when you want to pause your work in the notebook to finish recalculation in the background, press F9.

Related Topics

More Info


To change recalculation order
To change recalculation order,

1	Click Format [image] Notebook.

2	Click the Recalc Settings tab.

3	Click one of these options:

Natural calculates cells in dependency order. Formulas without dependencies are calculated first, followed by formulas that depend on them.

Column-wise starts recalculation in cell A1 of the first sheet and proceeds down column A, ignoring formulas in other columns. When A is finished, recalculation continues in B1, and on down column B. This continues to the end of the sheet (column IV), and on to the last sheet in the notebook.

Row-wise also starts recalculation in cell A1, but proceeds by rows, starting at 1 and continuing through row 8192, through to the last sheet.

Tips

If you specify Column-wise or Row-wise order of recalculation, you should set the number of iterations to at least two. Otherwise, the notebook may be inaccurate.

Column-wise and Row-wise recalculation are provided for special purposes, such as for a series of formulas that create circular references to solve a problem or attain a goal. If you are not trying to solve problems such as these, use Natural recalculation order.

Related Topics

More Info


To change the number of recalc iterations
To change the number of recalc iterations,

1	Click Format [image] Notebook.

2	Click the Recalc Settings tab.

3	Enter any number up to 255 for the # of Iterations option.

Tips

Before constructing elaborate formulas requiring limited iterations, see if Tools [image] Numeric Tools [image] Optimizer or Solve For can find solutions to your problems.

If the notebook has a formula with a circular reference, its cell address appears on the Recalc Settings tab to the right of  the # of Iterations edit field. Elaborate formulas are sometimes deliberately constructed to contain circular references because the formulas require multiple evaluations to attain an acceptable degree of accuracy.

If the notebook contains no circular references and recalculation order is set to Natural, the iteration count is ignored.

Related Topics

More Info


To display error sources in cells
To display error sources in cells,

1	Click Format [image] Notebook.

2	Click the Recalc Settings tab.

3	In the Advanced group, check Audit Errors.

Tips

If necessary, use the Fit button [image] to adjust the width of columns containing asterisks (******).

When Audit Errors is checked, each problem cell displays the sheet and cell reference where the problem started. The notebook name is included if the cell is in another notebook.

Related Topics

More Info


To change the notebook color palette
To change the notebook color palette,

1	Click Format [image] Notebook.

2	Click the Palette tab.

3	Click the color square you want to change, then click Edit Color.

4	Click the color control to display the available colors. Click a color, then click OK.

To define a custom color, click More, and then use the Windows Color dialog box to create a color. To get information on an option in the Color dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

The new color palette appears when you select other color controls in Corel Quattro Pro.

Tips

Changing any color square in the notebook palette also changes any previous uses of that color square throughout the notebook. For example, if you set the Shading property for a cell with the color square that is initially set to red and later change the corresponding color square in the notebook palette to green, the shaded cell switches to green.

To reset the color palette to its default colors, click Reset Defaults.

Related Topics


To make a notebook a macro library
To make a notebook a macro library,

1	Click Format [image] Notebook.

2	Click the Macro Library tab.

3	Click Yes.

Tip

A macro library is a convenient place to store frequently used macros. When you set a notebook's Macro Library property to Yes, Corel Quattro Pro searches the library when you try to run a macro that is not in the active notebook.

Related Topics


To create a system notebook
To create a system notebook,

1	Click Format [image] Notebook.

2	Click the System tab.

3	Click Yes.

4	You will probably want to designate the notebook as a macro library, too. If so, click the Macro Library tab, then click Yes.

Tip

System notebooks are hidden from user view and access. Choose one of these methods to hide the notebook:

When you open the notebook in your application, click Window [image] Hide to hide it.

Click Format [image] Notebook, then click the Password Level tab. If you apply the Medium protection level, the notebook will be hidden each time it is opened without a password.

Related Topics


To change the properties of notebook objects
To change the properties of notebook objects,

1	Select an object on the spreadsheet sheet.

2	Click Format [image] Selection.

3	Change the settings you want for each set of options, then click OK.

Tip

You can change the properties of several objects at once. Use Shift+click to select multiple objects on the spreadsheet. Then click Format [image] Selection.


Chart Basics

There are three basic methods for creating a chart:

Click Insert [image] Chart to create a chart on a notebook sheet or on its own page.

Use the QuickChart tool [image] to create a chart on a notebook sheet using defaults.

Create a chart from scratch by right-clicking on the notebook sheet, then clicking New Chart Window.

Using charts to analyze your data is faster and easier than examining the data cell-by-cell. A chart presents a set of data as a picture. It may uncover a trouble spot, display a trend, or illustrate a correlation between categories of data in your notebook.

A single chart can appear in three places in Corel Quattro Pro: as a chart on the notebook sheet, in a separate chart window, and as an icon on the Objects sheet.

Create a chart directly on the notebook sheet when you want to view or print your chart on the same sheet as your data. To enhance the chart, click the chart, then choose options from the Chart menu.

Create a chart in a chart window when you want the chart to appear in a slide show or on a printed page, but not on the notebook. From the toolbar you can add text boxes, draw objects, or import graphic elements such as pictures and logos. You can change or rearrange data series before you build the chart. You can also customize all parts of the chart by right-clicking a part and clicking the Properties option.

Each time you create a chart, an icon appears on the Objects sheet to represent the new chart. The Objects sheet is always the last sheet of the notebook. To quickly display it, click the QuickTab button [image] at the bottom of the notebook window. (When you have finished, you can click it again to return to the sheet you left.)

To quickly create a chart on a notebook sheet

To create a chart

Related Concepts


The Chart Window

To bring a chart into a chart window for editing, use one of these methods:

Right-click the chart on a notebook sheet, and click Open from the QuickMenu.

Double-click the chart icon on the Objects sheet.

Right-click anywhere in the notebook, click Edit Chart, then select the chart name.

Create a new chart in a window.

You can also edit a chart directly on a notebook sheet instead of in a chart window. Click here [image] for details.

From a chart window, the Format menu lists the options needed to arrange graphics, such as Align, Position, Space, Group, Ungroup, and Object Order.

For exporting graphics, use Chart [image] Export To File. To import a graphics file into a chart, use Insert [image] Image.

The Chart and Drawing Tools Toolbar

This toolbar includes a set of quick-access tools and buttons:

The Cut button [image], Copy button [image], and Paste button [image] transfer objects to and from the Windows Clipboard.

The Import button [image] provides quick access to importing a file.

The Selection Tool [image] switches to selection mode after you finish using a drawing tool.

The Text tool [image] creates text boxes.

The following drawing tools create shapes:

Line tool

Arrow tool

Polyline tool

Freehand Polyline tool

Polygon tool

Rectangle tool

Rounded Rectangle tool

Ellipse tool

Freehand Polygon tool

To make drawing easier, maximize the chart window.

The chart window has properties for setting the aspect ratio and grid options; click here [image] for details.

To close a chart window, double-click the Control-menu box in the upper left corner of the window, or press Ctrl+F4.

Related Concepts


The Objects Sheet

The Objects sheet displays an icon for every chart and slide show in the notebook. It also displays icons for any custom dialog boxes you build. On the Objects sheet you can

cut and copy chart icons (to cut or copy charts)

double-click a chart icon to edit a chart (or double-click any icon to edit its object)

rename a chart

print a single chart, a group of charts, or a slide show

use tools on the toolbar to create charts, slide shows, and dialog boxes

In addition to the standard toolbar buttons, the Objects Sheet Property Bar has the following buttons:

	Create Slide Show - Creates new slide shows.
	New Dialog - Builds a new dialog box (equivalent to Tools [image] Macro [image]  Dialog Designer).
	Play Slide Show - Runs the selected slide show, or displays a dialog box showing a list of slide shows to choose from.
The Objects sheet is always the last sheet of the notebook. To quickly display it, click the QuickTab button [image] at the bottom of the notebook window. When you have finished, you can click it again to return to the sheet you left.

Related Concepts


To quickly create a chart on a notebook sheet
To quickly create a chart on a notebook sheet,

1	Select the cells you want to plot. If surrounding cells contain explanatory labels you want to use as axis or legend labels, include them in the selection.

2	Click the QuickChart tool [image], then drag over the area of the notebook sheet where you want to place the chart. (If you click the notebook sheet--instead of dragging the mouse--Corel Quattro Pro creates a default size chart.)

3	Release the mouse button to create the chart.

Tips

To edit the chart on the notebook, click it. To edit the chart in a chart window, right-click the chart, then click Open.

To change the chart type, right-click the chart, then click Type/Layout.

To add, delete, or rearrange the data series, right-click the chart, then click Series.

To add a main title, subtitle, and axis titles, right-click the chart, then click Titles.

To display properties for a chart on a notebook sheet, right-click the chart and click the Properties option.

Related Topics

More Info


To create a chart
To create a chart,

1	Select the cells containing the data you want to plot, including any explanatory labels.

2	Click Insert [image] Chart, then follow the steps.

Tips

If you need additional information as you create the chart, click Tip.

Once you create a chart, you can make any additional changes. Click here

Related Topics

More Info


To create a chart from scratch
To create a chart from scratch,

1	Select the cells containing the data you want to plot, including any explanatory labels.

2	Right-click on the notebook sheet, then click New Chart Window.

3	Assign data cells to as many series as you want, including the X-Axis and Legend series. You can select a single cell, a contiguous selection, or noncontiguous selections. Type the coordinates in the series edit fields, or click [image] to point to cells on the notebook sheet.

4	Click Reverse Series or Row/Column Swap, if appropriate.

5	Click the Type tab (optional). Select a chart category: Area/Line, Bar, Stacked Bar, Pie, Specialty, or Text. Then, click an icon to choose a chart type from that category.

If you do not specify a chart type, Corel Quattro Pro automatically assigns one based on the number of data points and series you entered.

6	Click the Titles tab (optional), then type names for the Main Title and Subtitle. You can also enter titles for the chart axes.

7	Click the Name tab (optional), then enter a name for the chart in the Chart Name edit field. If you do not type a new name, Corel Quattro Pro assigns a default name (for example, Chart1).

8	Click OK.

You can change the chart series, type, titles, and name.

To assign cells to a chart series

To change the chart type

To add titles to a chart

To change the chart name

Tip

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Related Topics

More Info


How Series Are Plotted

The way Corel Quattro Pro plots your data depends on the dimensions and contents of the cells you select before you create the chart.

When the selection contains more rows than columns, or when there are an equal number of rows and columns in the selection,

Corel Quattro Pro plots each column as a single series.

If the first series contains labels, the labels are placed along the x-axis. This column of labels is called the x-axis series.

If the first row contains labels, these labels are used in the chart legend. This row is called the legend series.

When a selection contains more columns than rows,

Corel Quattro Pro plots each row as a single series.

If the first row (the first series) contains labels, it automatically becomes the x-axis series.

If the first column contains labels, these labels become the legend series.

Tips

Blank columns and rows in the selection of data can create a series of zero values that may throw off the chart. Delete them (or select the data as a non-contiguous selection) before you create the chart.

If you select noncontiguous selections, Corel Quattro Pro uses the dimensions of the first selection to determine whether to plot rows or columns.

If you specify a 3-D selection (the same cells selected on several sheets), Corel Quattro Pro starts the selection with the row or column from the first sheet, then appends the corresponding cells from succeeding sheets to form the series. For example, if you select A..C:B3..D11, the first series is A..C:B3..B11, the second series is A..C:C3..C11, and the third series is A..C:D3..D11.

Pie charts, doughnut charts, column charts, and 3-D area charts plot negative numbers as positive values.

Related Concepts


About the Chart Gallery

The Chart Gallery is a collection of predesigned chart templates and color schemes that make formatting charts easy. Instead of changing the properties of individual chart elements, you can quickly change the overall look of a chart using the Chart Gallery's visual tools.

To use the Chart Gallery

Related Concepts


To use the Chart Gallery
To use the Chart Gallery,

1	Select one or more charts. You can use the Chart Gallery to format selected charts on notebook sheets, chart icons on the Objects sheet, a chart window, or charts in the Light Table window of a slide show.

2	Click Chart [image] Gallery. If you selected a slide in the Light Table window, click Slides [image] Chart Gallery.

3	Select a chart category, a style, and a color scheme. If you need help deciding on the right style for a chart or chart background, click the Advisor button.

Tips

Click the chart's border to select charts on a notebook sheet.

If you have a bullet chart or a blank chart selected when you click Chart [image] Gallery, the Chart Gallery dialog box lets you select a template style for the chart. You can click the Advisor button to show suggested template styles based on stylistic criteria you specify.

Related Topics

More Info


Chart Gallery Categories

You can choose from six chart categories. Bar, Rotated Bar, Pie, Line or Area, and Specialty are categories for plotting numeric series. The Templates category provides different template styles used to format master slides and charts.

Bar

Shows each series as a bar plotted against the y-axis scale (vertically). The taller the bar, the greater the value. When you plot more than one series, the bars appear side by side, so you can easily compare series.

Rotated Bar

Shows each series as a bar plotted against the x-axis scale (horizontally). You might use this category when you want to emphasize that values "move forward," rather than increase.

Pie

Plots a single series, and shows each value in the series as a percentage of the whole. Includes variations on a pie chart such as doughnut charts and multiple pie charts.

Line or Area

Line charts plot series values as points, then connect the points in each series with a line. Area charts plot cumulative rather than individual values. The first series is plotted without modification. The second series is plotted using the top of the first series as the baseline. The third series is plotted on top of the second, and so forth. Shows the progression of values over time--to track sales, for example.

Specialty

Includes charts that mix two different chart types, such as Line-Bar and Area-Bar, and Radar charts.

Templates

Displays a template used for a slide (such as a master slide in a slide show) or chart.

Some basic chart styles are equivalent to chart types. You can also click the chart, then click Chart [image] Type/Layout to change a chart type.

Related Concepts


Chart Gallery Color Schemes

The Chart Gallery color schemes apply colors to all elements of numeric charts, including the background, chart pane, titles, text, legends, axis and series labels, chart walls, and series. If you select a Templates style in the Chart Gallery dialog box, or if the selected chart is a bullet chart or blank chart type, Color Scheme is unavailable. To select a chart style without using a color scheme, click No Change for Color Scheme.

If you want to change the color of individual chart elements, use the Chart Color Schemes Toolbar; click here [image] for details.

Tips

When you right-click a chart and choose Open (or double-click a chart on the Objects sheet) to display the chart in its own window, you can click [image] to choose a color scheme.

The chart color scheme does not affect the color of drawn objects, such as text boxes, lines, and shapes, that you add to a chart. Click here [image] for details on changing the color of drawn objects.

Related Concepts


Chart Gallery Advisors

The Chart Gallery offers Advisors, an alternative method for choosing a style for a chart or master slide in a slide show. The Advisors present a selection of styles that match the stylistic criteria you specify.

To choose chart styles using Advisors

Related Concepts


To choose chart styles using Advisors
To choose chart styles using Advisors,

1	Select one chart or master slide. If you select multiple charts, the Advisor button does not appear in the Chart Gallery dialog box.

2	Click Chart [image] Gallery. If you selected a slide in the Light Table window, click Slides [image] Chart Gallery.

3	Select a chart category, then click the Advisor button.

4	Specify the constraints you want to use, then click the Advise button to generate a selection of suggested styles.

5	Select one of the suggested styles, then click Apply.

Related Topics

More Info


Chart Types

Corel Quattro Pro builds many different chart types automatically. The type of chart you choose usually depends on the analysis you want to perform. Certain charts are best suited for plotting certain types of data.

Each basic chart can be drawn in various ways. Corel Quattro Pro divides these variations, or chart types, into the following categories:

Area/Line

Bar

Stacked Bar

Pie/Doughnut

Specialty

Text

When you create a chart, you can specify the chart type. To later change the chart type, right-click the chart, then click Type/Layout.

To change the chart type


Bar Charts

Bar charts represent each value in a series as a bar. Values are plotted against the y-axis scale; the taller the bar, the greater the value. You can customize bar chart features such as bar width, bar margins, and bar colors by right-clicking the bar and clicking the Properties option.

	2-D Bar charts show each series value as a bar plotted against the y-axis scale. When you plot more than one series, the bars appear side by side, providing a good comparison of corresponding values in different series.
	Variance charts show how the values in each series deviate from the zero line, which is an arbitrary baseline you choose through the Scale property (right-click the y-axis and choose the Properties option).
	3-D Bar charts plot series as columns with square tops and bases on a three-dimensional grid. The first series is plotted across the front of the chart, from left to right. Bars that represent additional series are plotted, in order, in front of the first.
	2.5-D Bar charts are similar to 3-D bar charts, except the bars of all series are drawn next to each other (rather than in front of each other) on the three-dimensional grid. Each bar projects all the way to the back of the grid.
	Step charts look similar to 3-D bar charts, but adjacent bars touch, to emphasize the progression of values in the series. In this way, the step chart serves the same purpose as a 3-D unstacked area chart (see Area/Line Charts for details), but the steps give greater emphasis to individual values.
	Rotated Bar charts plot values as horizontal bars. You might use this chart type instead of a standard bar chart when you want to emphasize that values "move forward," rather than increase. This is also a good bar chart choice if you have long x-axis labels.
	Rotated 3-D Bar charts display series values as horizontal columns on a three-dimensional grid. The first series is plotted at the back of the chart, and additional series are drawn in front of the first. Unlike standard 3-D bar charts, which display legend text along the z-axis, a rotated 3-D bar chart has a legend box.
	Rotated 2.5-D Bar charts plot the values in each series as horizontal plates that project from the front to the back of a three-dimensional grid. The first value in the first series is plotted on the base of the chart, and corresponding values of additional series are layered on top, in order.
	Multiple Bar charts plot each series in its own small bar chart, to provide side-by-side comparisons of different sets of data. Even though each series looks like a separate chart, a multiple bar chart is really one chart. Each unit displays the same y-axis scale, x-axis divisions, and so forth. Any changes to one chart unit are reflected in all the others. You can plot as many series as you like in a multiple bar chart, but the plot for each series gets smaller as you add new series.
	Line-Bar and Area Bar are combination charts. Combination charts mix bars, lines, and areas in the same chart, to highlight a series or to provide a contrast between different series in the chart. Corel Quattro Pro builds these combination charts automatically. You can create your own custom combination charts by overriding the chart type for any series in 2-D bar, rotated bar, 2-D line, rotated line, and variance charts. For example, to create a multiple line chart or multiple area chart, right-click any bar in a multiple bar chart, click the Properties option, then override the chart type for the series with a line or area type.
	High-Low Bar charts are used when showing stock market activity and volume (number of shares exchanged that day). The bar in a High-Low chart represents the volume. See High-Low Charts for more details.
Related Concepts


Stacked Bar Charts

Stacked Bar Charts show the relationship of each value to the total--how total sales are divided between regions, for example. You can customize bar chart features such as bar width, bar margins, and bar colors, by right-click a bar and choosing the Properties option.

	Stacked Bar charts plot the corresponding values of different series in vertical stacks, showing both the total reached by the combined values, and the way each value contributes to that total. The first series is plotted on the bottom; additional series are stacked on top, in order. Stacked Bar charts may be 2-D or rotated 2-D.
	100% Stacked Bar charts show the relationship of each value to the total by displaying the percentage of the total contributed by each series. They may be 2-D, rotated 2-D, 3-D, or rotated 3-D.
	3-D Stacked Bar charts also show individual and cumulative values. The first series is plotted on the base of a three-dimensional grid; additional series are stacked on top. The 3-D Stacked Bar chart may also be rotated.
	Comparison charts have lines connecting the boundaries between series. This makes it easier to compare series values or proportions from one bar to the next. They may be stacked bar or 100% stacked bar charts, 2-D and 2-D rotated.
Related Concepts


Area/Line Charts

Line charts plot series values as points, then connect the points in each series with a line. You can customize markers, line styles, and other properties by right-clicking a line and clicking the Properties option.

Area charts (except 3-D unstacked area charts) plot cumulative rather than individual values. The first series is plotted without modification. The second series is plotted using the top of the first series as the baseline. The third series is charted on top of the second, and so forth. You can customize area by right-clicking an area and choosing the Properties option.

	2-D Line charts show how values change over time. Since it is so simple, the 2-D line chart is the easiest chart to read when there are many data series plotted.
	Ribbon charts are essentially line charts plotted on 3-D grids, with each line flattened out into a segmented ribbon. Ribbon charts are good for showing trends over time, but individual points are less visible than on standard line charts.
	Rotated Line charts, like standard line charts, show the pattern of values over time, but the x-axis and y-axis positions are reversed. The rotation leaves more room for long x-axis labels.
	3-D Floating Marker charts use floating solid shapes (cubes, spheres, pyramids, diamonds, hexa-diamonds, or octa-diamonds) to plot a series against a 3-D grid. The 3-D Floating Marker chart clearly shows each point in a series, though the individual points are not connected as they are on a standard line chart.
	2-D Area charts best show how each series affects the whole over time. Although only the first line plotted is an accurate pattern (a dip in a further series might appear as a rise if values beneath it are high), the size of the area corresponding to each series represents its contribution to the whole.
	3-D Area charts are like 2-D area charts, except series are plotted as three-dimensional areas inside a frame of two walls and a base.
	Rotated Area charts reverse the x-axis and y-axis, so areas are stacked side-by-side. The width of an area indicates the series contribution to the whole.
	3-D Unstacked Area charts plot actual series values, not cumulative values. The first series is plotted at the back of the chart; additional series are drawn in front of it. Like line charts, 3-D unstacked area charts are useful for showing changes over time.
Related Concepts


Pie/Doughnut Charts

Pie, doughnut, and column charts plot a single series. Each value is plotted as a percentage of the whole. You can change these chart properties by right-clicking a part of the map, then clicking the Properties option.

	Pie charts plot each value in a series as a "slice" of the "pie."
	3-D Pie charts have a thicker look for a more dramatic appearance, but otherwise are exactly like 2-D pie charts.
	2-D Multiple Pie charts display different data series as side-by-side pie charts. Use this chart type to provide a comparison of how individual values in the series affect the whole, and how these proportions change from series to series.
	3-D Multiple Pie charts display data a little more dramatically than the 2-D version, but you use them in the same way, to provide comparisons of how each value in a series affects the whole, and how these proportions change from series to series.
	Doughnut charts are like pie charts with holes. They can be either 2-D or 3-D. For details, see Doughnut Charts.
	Column charts represent values as sections of a vertical rectangle. The first value in the series is plotted on the bottom; additional series are stacked on top, in order.
	3-D Column charts plot series values as sections of a column. Like the 2-D version, 3-D column charts plot series values from the bottom up.
	2-D Multiple Column charts display each series as an individual column chart. Like multiple pie charts, multiple column charts provide a comparison of how individual values in the series affect the whole, and how these proportions change from series to series. In addition, the column arrangement leaves more room for labels.
	3-D Multiple Column charts plot each series as individual 3-D column charts. They have the same purpose as 2-D multiple column charts.
Related Concepts


Specialty Charts

Surface charts plot rows and columns as lines that form a "mesh" on a 3-D frame. When you chart a square array of cells, values in columns correspond to mesh lines from left to right. Rows of data correspond to mesh lines from front to back. Each data point is represented by an intersection of two mesh lines. The way the surface of the mesh is shaded depends on the type of surface chart (3-D Surface, 3-D Contour, or 3-D Shaded Surface) you choose.

	3-D Surface charts shade the area between each series with a different color.
	3-D Contour charts have shading that follows the grid lines, making it easy to compare points on the surface with values on the y-axis scale.
	3-D Shaded Surface charts shade a single-colored surface as though a light is shining down from directly above the chart. Flat areas, where values are the same from series to series, or from one point to another in the same series, are lightest. Places where there are great differences between adjacent values have the darkest shading.
	XY charts plot data against two scaling axes. XY Charts describes how to create an XY chart.
	High-Low charts are mostly used for tracking daily stock market prices. For details, see High-Low Charts.
	Radar charts are circles with a line for each x-axis value extending from the center to the edge, like the spokes of a wheel. Y-axis values for each series are charted on the spokes. For more details, see Radar Charts.
Related Concepts


Text Charts

Bullet charts and Blank charts are text charts. Text charts are charts with no numeric data. Bullet charts use text data to create bulleted items in an outline form. Blank charts plot no data. You build them from scratch using tools on the Chart and Drawing Tools Toolbar.

Bullet Charts

Blank Charts

Related Concepts


Radar Charts

Radar charts are circles with a line for each x-axis value extending from the center to the edge, like the spokes of a wheel. Y-axis values for each series are charted on the spokes.

Radar charts can highlight trends. Growth trends show as outward spirals; static or fluctuating values look more like circles or stars. Radar charts can also simplify series comparisons; the series with the highest values occupies the most area.

To display a radar chart, click a chart, click Chart [image] Type/Layout [image] Specialty, then click the Radar button.

You can customize radar chart markers and lines. To change radar chart properties, right-click any part of the chart and click the Properties option.

Related Concepts


XY Charts

XY charts plot data against two scaling axes. The x-axis scale is determined by the x-axis series, which in XY charts contains numeric data, not text labels. The y-axis scale is calculated from the data in all the other series you plot.

Each series value is plotted as a pair of coordinates. The first coordinate is an x-axis series value. The second coordinate is the corresponding value in the series you are plotting.

The first coordinate determines where the data point is placed relative to the x-axis. The second coordinate gives the data point's position in relation to the y-axis.

XY charts are useful for illustrating statistical trends. You can plot a frequency distribution using an XY chart.

Tip

If the x-axis series contains dates, the XY chart plots the data against the date serial number of each date.

To create an XY chart

Related Concepts


To create an XY chart
To create an XY chart,

1	On the notebook sheet, select all series except the x-axis series (Corel Quattro Pro will automatically designate an x-axis series only if the series contains labels). You can also select legend labels if you want.

2	Right-click the notebook sheet, then click New Chart Window.

3	To select the x-axis series, click [image] to the right of the x-axis series edit field, point to cells on the notebook sheet, then press Enter.

Tips

If the x-axis series contains dates, the XY chart plots the data against the date serial number of each date.

You can use XY charts to create scatterplot charts. To show only plotted points instead of a zigzag line, right-click the line, and set the Line Style to None.

Related Topics

More Info


High-Low Charts

The usual purpose of high-low (open-close) charts is to track daily stock prices. You need at least two series to create the chart (the two series represent the highest and lowest price a stock reached each day); to create a "bar and whisker" style high-low chart, you need at least four series (the two additional series represent the opening and closing prices for the stock each day).

If the high-low bar style is an I-beam, each I-beam corresponds to a pair of values in the first two series. The top of each I-beam shows the high value (the highest price the stock reached that day), and the bottom of the I-beam shows the low value (the lowest price of the day).

The way Corel Quattro Pro plots additional series depends on how many series you assign to the chart.

When you plot only three series, the third series contains the close data (the price of the stock at the end of the business day). This data is shown as a tick mark to the right of the I-beam.

When you plot four series, the third series contains the open data (the price of the stock at the beginning of the day), and the fourth series contains the close data. Each open value is plotted as a tick mark to the left of the I-beam, and each close value is shown as a tick mark to the right of the I-beam.

When you plot more than four series in a high-low chart, the additional series are plotted as lines (as though they are part of a line chart).

Adding a Volume Series

A common use for the fifth series is to display the volume data, or number of shares of stock that changed hands that day. Volume data is usually much larger than high-low (open-close) data, so the high-low data does not show up well in the chart. The High-Low-Bar chart has special formatting to deal with this problem. High-Low-Bar charts plot the first four series like regular high-low charts. The fifth series, however, is plotted as bars against the secondary y-axis. The secondary y-axis scale is adjusted to plot the bars on the lower one-quarter of the chart, where the bars are unlikely to cover the high-low (open-close) values. To do this, Corel Quattro Pro calculates the High and Increment values for the secondary y-axis then multiplies them by four (the Increment adjustment makes the scale less crowded).

High-Low Styles

Corel Quattro Pro offers four different high-low styles:

Bar style (the default) give you a "bar and whisker" or "candle" chart. A line connects high and low values. A bar spans the open and close values. When the close value is higher than the open, the bar is white. When the open value is higher than the close, the bar is red. (Retain this light/dark relationship if you change fill colors.)

I-Beam style shows high and low values at each end of an I-beam. Open and close are represented by left and right tick marks, respectively.

Line style connects corresponding high and low values with a line, and shows open and close values as left and right tick marks.

Marker style assigns different-colored markers to high, low, open, and close values, and connects each set of corresponding values with a line.

To create a high-low chart

To create a high-low bar chart with volume series

To change the style of a high-low chart


To create a high-low chart
To create a high-low chart,

1	Right-click the notebook sheet, then click New Chart Window.

2	Assign cells to each series by pointing, then click OK.

3	Click Chart [image] Type/Layout.

4	For Category, click Specialty.

5	 Click the High-Low icon.

Related Topics

More Info


To create a high-low bar chart with volume series
To create a high-low bar chart with volume series,

1	Right-click the notebook sheet, then click New Chart Window.

2	Assign cells to each series by pointing, then click OK.

3	Click Chart [image] Type/Layout.

4	For Category, click Bar.

5	 Click the High-Low-Bar icon.

You can change the volume series from bars to a line or area by overriding the chart type for the series.

Related Topics

More Info


To change the style of a high-low chart
To change the style of a high-low chart,

1	Click the chart, right-click any high-low marker and click the Properties option.

2	Click the Hi-Lo Bar Style tab.

3	Select a bar style.

Tip

You can give each marker in the Marker high-low bar style a different look. Change the chart type to line, right-click a series and click the Properties, then change the marker style, weight, and appearance. When you are finished, change the chart type back to High-Low.

Related Topics

More Info


Doughnut Charts

Like pie and column charts, doughnut charts plot a single series. Each value is plotted as a percentage of the whole. Doughnut charts can be 2-D or 3-D. The only difference is that 3-D charts have height as well as diameter. You can also use the drawing tools in the chart window to add graphics and text to the interior "hole."

To change doughnut chart properties, right-click any part of the chart and click the Properties option. As with pie charts, you can "explode" any section.

Related Concepts


Bullet Charts

Bullet charts are charts that list bulleted items. A bullet chart consists of a title, followed by major bulleted items and, if needed, minor bulleted items. Bullet charts help emphasize major points in a speech or presentation.

Bullet chart cells consist of up to three columns of labels: the first column contains the bullet chart title and, optionally, the subtitle; the second column contains major bullets; and the third column contains minor bullets. The third column is optional; you can create a bullet chart with only one level of bulleted items. However, you cannot create a bullet chart with more than two levels of bulleted items.

To choose a template for the bullet chart, click the bullet chart, click Chart [image] Gallery.

To create and format multiple bullet charts for a slide show, click Tools [image] Slide Show [image] New.

You can change the bullet style, fonts, colors, and line spacing used in a bullet chart by changing the properties of the bullet series.

To create a bullet chart

Example of bullet chart cells and bullet chart

Related Concepts


Example of Bullet Chart Cells and Bullet Chart

Bullet chart cells looks like this:

The bullet chart created from cells looks like this:


Blank Charts

Blank charts are empty charts you can use to create custom charts and slides by adding graphics, text boxes, and other drawn objects. Unlike numeric charts and bullet charts, blank charts do not plot data; instead, you build them from scratch using tools on the Chart and Drawing Tools Toolbar.

You can use blank charts in slide shows, as areas to display a bulleted list of text, as vehicles for original art, or as temporary scratch pads where you create a drawing before cutting and pasting it to a different chart. You can also import a graphic image from another application and insert it as a chart on the notebook sheet.

Like other types of charts, blank charts can exist as charts on the notebook sheet, or they can appear solely in a chart window.

To create a blank chart on a notebook sheet

To create a blank chart in a window

Related Concepts


To change the chart type
To change the chart type,

1	Right-click a chart, then click Type/Layout.

2	Click a chart category from the drop down list:

Area/Line

Bar

Stacked Bar

Pie/Doughnut

Specialty

Text

3	Click an icon to choose a chart type from that category. The name of the chart type you select appears below the chart icons.

Related Topics

More Info


About Chart Series

The Chart [image] Series option lets you change how data is plotted in the chart. To use this option, click the chart, then click Chart [image] Series. The Chart [image] Series dialog box has these features:

Edit fields (X-Axis, Legend, 1st, 2nd, and so on) display the coordinates of the series. A series can be a single cell, cells, or noncontiguous selections. Type the coordinates in the series edit fields, or click [image] to point to cells on the notebook sheet. (You can also double-click an edit field to activate Point mode.)

Add and Delete buttons let you insert a series after the selected series, or remove the selected series.

Reverse series plots the last series first, then moves backward through the series order to plot the first series last. This feature is useful in 3-D bar and unstacked area charts, for example, when a series with high values is plotted at the front of the chart, covering other series.

Row/column swap plots columns as series when the series you have selected are rows, and plots rows as series when the series you have selected are columns. Row/column swap also puts x-axis series labels in the legend, and places legend series labels along the x-axis.

To assign cells to a chart series

To add a new series to a chart

To add a new first series to a chart

To cut and paste a chart series

To add series to a chart on a notebook using Drag and Drop

To delete a series from a chart

To adjust the legend and x-axis series

Related Concepts


To assign cells to a chart series
To assign cells to a chart series,

1	Click the chart, then click Chart [image] Series.

2	Click [image] to the right of a series edit field or double-click the edit field. The chart and the dialog box move behind the notebook. The current coordinates for the series are highlighted on the notebook.

3	Drag the mouse to select the cells. To select noncontiguous areas, hold down the Ctrl key as you drag each selection.

4	To return to the dialog box, click the maximize button in the dialog box title bar (which appears over the Toolbar), or press Enter.

5	Change as many series assignments as you want.

Related Topics

More Info


To add a new series to a chart
To add a new series to a chart,

1	Click the chart, then click Chart [image] Series.

2	Select the series you want to precede the new series.

3	Click Add. The new series is added after the selected series. If no series is selected (or if the x-axis series or legend series is selected), the series you add becomes the last one in the chart.

Tip

Once you create the series, you can assign cells by pointing or by typing coordinates into the series edit field.

Related Topics

More Info


To add a new first series to a chart
To add a new first series to a chart,

1	Select the current first series.

2	Click the chart, then click Chart [image] Series.

3	Click Add. A new, blank series is added after the first series.

4	Enter the coordinates currently assigned to the first series into the edit field for this new second series. (The first and second series should now have the same data coordinates.)

5	Choose new data for the first series, either by pointing to cells, or by deleting the old coordinates and typing in the new.

Related Topics

More Info


To cut and paste a chart series
To cut and paste a chart series,

1	On the notebook sheet, select the cells you want to assign to the series.

2	Click [image].

3	Right-click the notebook sheet, click Edit Chart, then select the chart name.

4	Select the insertion point for the series:

To insert the new series after an existing series, select the bar, line, or area that represents the series.

To add the cells as the first series in the chart, select the chart pane (the area bounded by the x-axis and y-axis).

To add the cells as the x-axis series, select the x-axis. (This method is especially useful for adding a numeric x-axis series to an XY chart.)

5	Click [image].

Tip

The new series are always plotted to match the existing row/column arrangement of the chart. For example, if you copy a row of four cells to the Clipboard, then paste it into a bar chart where columns are plotted as series, you will see four new bars plotted at the first x-axis division, because you have just added four new series, of one value each, to the chart.

Related Topics

More Info


To add series to a chart on a notebook sheet using Drag and Drop
To add series to a chart on a notebook sheet using Drag and Drop,

1	Select the cells, release the left mouse button, point to an edge of the cells until you see a four-way arrow. Left-click, and drag the cells over a chart.

2	Release the mouse button while the pointer is over the chart to add the series to the chart.

Tip

If you "drop" the series while the mouse pointer is not over a chart, you move the cells.

Related Topics

More Info


Charting Grouped or Linked Data

When you assign a 3-D selection to a series, Corel Quattro Pro starts the selection with the row or column from the first sheet, then appends the corresponding cells from succeeding sheets to form the series. For example, if you select A:B3..C:B5, the series has 9 values, in this order: A:B3, A:B4, A:B5, B:B3, B:B4, B:B5, C:B3, C:B4 and C:B5.

When a chart appears in one notebook, and some or all of the data for the chart is located in another notebook, the chart is linked to the data. To assign data located in a different notebook to a series, either type the coordinates in the form [Notebookname]Sheetname:Cell Reference, or assign cells by pointing.

This is one method for managing windows as you point to cells in different notebooks:

1	Open all the notebooks that contain data you need for the chart; close all notebooks you do not need. (This makes it easier to see the data you do need.)

2	Click the notebook where you want to place the chart, to make its window the active window.

3	Click Insert [image] Chart.

4	Double-click a series edit field, then point to cells of data and press Enter to define the series. To switch notebooks, choose a notebook from the Window menu, or use Ctrl + F6 to cycle through the notebooks.

5	Click OK when you have finished assigning cells to series.

Each time you open a notebook, Corel Quattro Pro checks whether all notebooks that provide data for its charts are open. If they are not, a dialog box appears with three options: Open Supporting, Update References, and None.

Related Concepts


To delete a series from a chart
To delete a series from a chart,

1	Click the chart, then click Chart [image] Series.

2	Click the edit field to select the series.

3	Click Delete.

Tip

In a chart window or a chart on a notebook sheet activated for editing, you can also select a bar, area, or line directly on the chart, then click the Cut button [image] or press the Del key to delete the series.

Related Topics

More Info


About the Legend and X-Axis Series

When you add or delete a data series, the legend series (if one is defined) does not change automatically. If you insert a new series into the chart, or delete a series from the chart, you also have to insert or delete an entry in the appropriate position in the legend series.

You can also enter legend label text (or label cell coordinates) for individual series by right-clicking a series then clicking the Properties option.

Tip

You do not have to change the x-axis series when you add another series to the chart. Additional series just add another bar, line marker, or area boundary point at each x-axis division. If you see new x-axis divisions without labels after you add a series, it means the new series has a greater number of data points than the other series in the chart. Select the series again, and assign a selection that has the correct number of values.

To adjust the legend and x-axis series


To adjust the legend and x-axis series
To adjust the legend and x-axis series,

1	Click the chart, then click Chart [image] Series.

2	The coordinates of the Legend and X-Axis Series appear in their respective fields. Click [image] or double-click the edit field. The dialog box and chart move behind the notebook.

3	While holding down the Ctrl key, point to the label for each series, in order.

Related Topics

More Info


Chart Titles

The Chart [image] Titles option creates a title and subtitle for any numeric chart type, but not for bullet charts and blank charts. This option can also place titles on the chart axes. On 2-D charts, you can add titles for the x-axis, the primary y-axis (the left, or Y1 axis) and for a secondary y-axis (the right, or Y2 axis). 3-D charts will not display secondary y-axis titles.

You can reference a cell containing text in a title edit field. Instead of title text, type the cell reference preceded by a backslash (\). For example, entering \G8 in a title edit field displays the text in G8 as the title. You can use @STRING and other string @functions with numeric formulas to create dynamic titles that change along with your data. For example, the following formula in G8 creates a string that displays the average of cells C5..C9 after the equal sign:

+"Five-Year Mileage Average = "&@STRING(@AVG(C5..C9),0)

Tip

If your y-axis scale labels are greater than 1000, you can use the Show Units option to simplify the scale and add an appropriate title--"(thousands)" for example--between the y-axis title and the axis itself. Right-click the y-axis, choose the Properties option, then choose Scaling.

You can change the font, color, or other properties of the title and subtitles by clicking the chart, then right-clicking the title or subtitle and clicking the Properties option. You can edit the main title and subtitle text directly on the chart, or change the title or subtitle in the edit fields of the Chart [image] Titles dialog box.

You must edit axis title text in the Chart [image] Titles dialog box. By right-clicking the axis and clicking the Properties option, you can also change the font and color of axis titles.

To add titles to a chart


To add titles to a chart
To add titles to a chart,

1	Right-click the chart, then click Titles.

2	Enter text in the appropriate edit fields.

Related Topics

More Info


To add labels to bars or data points on a chart
To add labels to bars or data points on a chart,

1	Enter a series of labels into cells, if suitable labels do not already exist.

2	Right-click the bar, line, or area that represents the series and click the Properties option. The Series Options property is automatically selected.

3	Click [image] to the right of the Label Series edit field, then point to the cells he notebook sheet that contain the labels and press Enter.

Tips

To delete labels, delete the label series.

The cells you specify as the label series can contain text or data. For example, if you assign the same cells to the data series and the label series of a bar chart, Corel Quattro Pro places a label that shows the actual data value over each bar in the series.

Related Topics


To view a chart full-screen
To view a chart full-screen,

1	Select one or more chart icons on the Objects sheet (hold down Shift and click each chart to select it).

2	Click Tools [image] View Chart.

3	When viewing multiple charts, press any key or click the mouse to go to the next chart. When the last chart is displayed, a mouse or key click returns you to the active window.

Tips

Tools [image] View Chart gives you a full-screen view of selected charts as they would appear in a slide show.

Chart buttons and chart button macros are active, so you can test them.

When you use Tools [image] View Chart, the same keys that let you move to different slides in a slide show are available. Click here [image] for details.

Related Topics

More Info


To save charts
To save charts,

Click File [image] Save or click File [image] Save As to save the notebook. When you save a notebook, Corel Quattro Pro saves every chart in that notebook.

Tip

To save all graphics features, save the notebook in Corel Quattro Pro 8 file format. When you click File Save, specify QPW v7/v8 (*.WB3) as the File type.

Related Topics

More Info


To change the chart name
To change the chart name,

1	Click the QuickTab button [image] to display the Objects sheet.

2	Right-click the icon of the chart you want to rename. Then, click Icon Properties [image] Name.

3	Type the new name.

Tip

When you create charts on a notebook sheet, Corel Quattro Pro automatically gives them the default names of Chart1, Chart2, and so on, according to the order in which they are created in the notebook.

Related Topics

More Info


About Editing Charts

You can right-click the chart to change the chart type, add chart titles, rearrange the data series, and view the selected chart full-screen.

To edit a chart on a notebook sheet in a full screen, right-click the chart on a notebook screen, then click Open.

On the Objects sheet, double-click a chart to edit it.

When you edit a chart on a notebook sheet, chart window properties are still available. The chart window properties let you control the proportion of width to height and whether to display a grid while editing--the grid is helpful for aligning chart objects. To change chart window properties for a chart you are editing, right-click the /////// border of the chart.

Tip

When you click a chart that is only partially visible in the notebook window, the window scrolls automatically to display the entire chart. If the chart cannot fit in the window, Corel Quattro Pro opens it for editing in a chart window. If a source chart on the Objects sheet is already opened in a chart window, when you click the related chart on a notebook sheet, Corel Quattro Pro switches to the chart window.

To edit a chart


To edit a chart
To edit a chart,

Use one of these methods:

To edit a chart in a chart window, right-click an empty place on the notebook, click Edit Chart, then select a chart.

To edit a chart on a notebook sheet, click the chart.

On the Objects sheet, double-click a chart to edit it.

Related Topics

More Info


To delete a chart
To delete a chart,

1	Click any chart, then click Chart [image] Delete Chart.

2	Select the chart name from the list that appears.

Tips

If you have the Objects sheet displayed, you can click an icon, then click the Cut button [image] or press Del to delete the chart.

If you select a chart on a notebook sheet, then click [image], the chart is erased from the notebook.

Related Topics

More Info


About Copying Charts

Copying Charts Within a Notebook

There are three ways to copy a chart within a notebook: use the Drag and Drop feature, use the Windows Clipboard, or copy and paste a selection of chart attributes using the Copy and Paste Special options.

The Edit [image] Paste Special option lets you copy the attributes of a chart, including the style, data, and annotation objects, from one chart to another. You can use the Paste Special option to copy some or all attributes of a chart template to several charts at a time.

Copying Charts Between Notebooks

You can copy charts between notebooks using the Windows Clipboard, the Edit [image] Paste Special option, or the Drag and Drop feature. These methods give the destination notebook a record of where the original data is located. (The data is not physically copied.) Each time you open the destination notebook, Corel Quattro Pro checks whether the source notebook is open. If it is not, a dialog box appears with three options: Open Supporting, Update References, and None.

If the destination notebook already has a chart with the same name, the newly made copy is given a default name (Chart6, for example).

To copy charts using the Clipboard

To copy selected attributes of a chart

To copy a chart to another notebook using Drag and Drop


To copy charts using the Clipboard
To copy charts using the Clipboard,

1	Select a chart or several charts.

In the chart window, click Edit [image] Select All.

On a notebook sheet or the Objects sheet, click the chart border or chart icon.

2	Click Edit [image] Copy.

3	Select the sheet where you want to paste the chart.

To place the copy as a chart on a notebook sheet, select the sheet.

If you want the chart to appear only in a window and on the Objects sheet, click the QuickTab button [image] to display the Objects sheet. (You cannot paste a chart directly into a chart window.)

4	Click Edit [image] Paste.

Related Topics

More Info


To copy selected attributes of a chart
To copy selected attributes of a chart,

1	Select a chart (click the chart border, the chart icon, or click Select All if the chart is in its own window). This chart is the source of the style, data, and annotation objects you choose to copy.

2	Click Edit [image] Copy.

3	Select one or more charts on a notebook sheet, or select one chart in a window.

4	Click Edit [image] Paste Special.

5	Check any combination of items to copy. To not copy an item, uncheck it. For help on an option, right-click it.

If you check all options, Corel Quattro Pro builds an exact copy of the source chart. (You can copy the source chart through the Clipboard to get the same results.)

If you uncheck Data Series, but check all other options, Corel Quattro Pro builds a chart that has the same chart type and properties as the source chart, but uses the data of the destination chart. (The source chart serves as a style template for the destination chart.)

Tips

To preserve annotation objects already existing in the destination chart, uncheck Annotations. Annotations erases all annotation items in the destination chart, even when there are none to copy from the source chart.

The destination chart for the Paste Special option must be an existing chart; you cannot use Paste Special to create a new chart.

Paste Special does not copy annotations drawn on a blank chart type or chart templates selected with the Chart Gallery.

Related Topics

More Info


To copy a chart to another notebook using Drag and Drop
To copy a chart to another notebook using Drag and Drop,

1	Open the source notebook and destination notebook.

2	Click Window [image] Tile to make sure that both notebooks are visible.

3	To copy charts from the Objects sheet, click the QuickTab button [image] at the bottom of each window to display the Objects sheet for both notebooks.

4	Press Ctrl while dragging the chart from the source notebook to the sheet of the destination notebook.

5	Release the mouse to "drop" the chart onto this sheet.

Tip

If you drag a chart on a notebook sheet or chart icon without pressing Ctrl, you move the chart instead of copying it.

Related Topics

More Info


To insert a chart on a notebook sheet
To insert a chart on a notebook sheet,

1	Go to the sheet where you want the chart to appear.

2	Right-click the notebook sheet, then click Insert Chart.

3	Select a chart from the list.

4	Click OK. The mouse pointer changes to a miniature chart.

5	Click the upper left corner of the area where you want the chart to appear, or drag the mouse to specify the size and placement of the chart.

6	Release the mouse button.

Tips

If the chart appears to have too much background area, change the chart's aspect ratio. Click the chart, then click View [image] Floating Chart, Screen Slide, 35mm Slide, Printer Preview, or Full Extent.

You can insert the same chart in more than one place in the notebook. Any time you make changes to a chart, all charts on a notebook sheet associated with that chart reflect the changes.

Related Topics

More Info


To move or resize a chart on a notebook sheet
To move or resize a chart on a notebook sheet,

Click anywhere inside the chart frame to select it. Square handles appear at eight positions on the border of the chart.

To move the chart, drag any area of the chart except its handles.

To resize only height or width, drag a top, bottom, or side handle.

To change the height and width of the rectangle at the same time, drag a corner handle diagonally.

Related Topics

More Info


To create a bullet chart
To create a bullet chart,

1	Type the title of the bullet chart in a notebook cell, for example, cell A1. If the bullet chart has a subtitle, type it in the cell directly below the title. Click here [image] for an example.

2	Select the cell one row below and one column to the right of the title/subtitle cells, for example, cell B2. Type the text for a major bullet.

3	If the bullet chart contains minor bullets, select the cell one row below and one column to the right of the major bullet, for example, cell C3. Type the text for the first minor bullet. Type other minor bullets in the same column as needed.

If the bullet chart contains only major bullets, enter other major bullets in the same column as the first.

4	Continue typing major and minor bullets in cells until you are finished typing the text of the bullet chart.

5	Select the bullet chart cells, right-click the selected cells, click New Chart Window, then click OK.

Tips

To create the bullet chart on the notebook sheet, click [image], then click or drag where you want the chart.

To create and format multiple bullet charts for a slide show, use Tools [image] Slide Show [image] New.

Corel Quattro Pro uses only the text contained in the bullet chart cells to create bullet charts. Cell properties such as fonts and colors do not affect the bullet chart. However, the cell Numeric Format property does affect how numeric values appear in the bullet chart.

Related Topics

More Info


To create a floating blank chart
To create a blank chart on a notebook sheet,

1	Select an empty cell and click [image].

2	Click and drag over the area of the notebook sheet where you want to place the chart.

Related Topics

More Info


To create a blank chart in a window
To create a blank chart in a window,

1	Click Insert [image] Chart [image] Finish.

Related Topics

More Info


Why Use Links?

A notebook link is a reference to a cell or cells in another notebook, another spreadsheet format that Corel Quattro Pro supports, or a file on the Internet. The reference is live; which means Corel Quattro Pro updates the link results when the referenced data changes.

Notebook links are identical to sheet and cell references except that they begin with the name of the file to link to. Corel Quattro Pro provides options for keeping notebook links accurate even if one of the files is closed.

If you want to create a dynamic link to another application, click here [image] for details.

There are several advantages to setting up notebook links instead of multisheet notebooks:

To build models that fit into memory. By dividing an application over several files and accessing only the linked values from closed files, you can build larger models.

To share information. By linking pertinent information in different files, you can eliminate redundancy. Because Corel Quattro Pro updates primary formulas when you make a change, your data is always up to date. And by using one formula for several files or notebooks, you save disk space.

To divide work among several people. If you use linked files for a single application, you can divide the application's work among several people.

To preserve portability to non-3-D spreadsheets or databases. Because only one sheet of a notebook is saved when you save it in some other formats, you may want to link the first sheets of different notebooks instead of sheets within the same notebooks.

Related Concepts


About Creating Links

Links are formulas with file names in them. The file name precedes the sheet reference and is enclosed in brackets; for example, +[BUDGET]B:A15.

To create a notebook link by typing

To point out a link

To paste a notebook link

Tip

The primary notebook must be a Corel Quattro Pro file. The supporting files can be in any spreadsheet format that Corel Quattro Pro supports. A supporting file could also be an Internet file. Click here [image] for information about linking to Paradox, Reflex, or dBASE database tables.

Related Concepts


About Typing Links

When you type spreadsheet links, use this format:

+[Drive:\Path\File name.Extension]Sheet:Cell reference

Drive identifies the drive containing the file. This is necessary only if the file you are referencing is not on the same drive as the primary notebook.

Path is the path to the folder containing the file. This is necessary only if the file is not in the same folder the primary notebook.

File name is the name of the file.

Extension is a three-letter suffix separated from the file name by a period (.). It is necessary only if the file has a different extension from the primary notebook.

Sheet is any valid sheet name, sheet range, or group name (such as C, Sales, or D..F, or YearToDate).

Cell reference is any valid cell address, pair of coordinates, or cell name. However, cell coordinates are valid only if the link contains an @function to operate on the cells. The link in the example above (beginning with +) simply links the active cell with the referenced cell.

If you keep all linked files in the same folder and use the same extension for each, you only have to enter a file name for links. This is because the default drive, path, and extension are the same as the primary notebook. Also, if you move all linked files to a different folder, you will not need to edit the references.

Tip

If the file you are linking to is a file on the Internet, open the Internet file in Corel Quattro Pro, then the cell reference is the cell containing the information you want to link to.

To create a notebook link by typing

Related Concepts


To create a notebook link by typing
To create a notebook link by typing,

Type the link as a sheet reference and cell reference preceded by the file name in brackets. Use this format:

+[Drive:\Path\File name.Extension]Sheet:Cell reference

The plus sign is needed only if the link is the first item in a cell entry (otherwise, Corel Quattro Pro regards the reference as a label).

Example

The following formula enters the value from cell B9 on sheet C in the BUDGET.WB3 file from the C:\ARCHIVE folder into the active cell,

+[C:\ARCHIVE\BUDGET.WB3]C:B9

Tip

You can enter all parts of the link in either uppercase or lowercase. Do not include blank spaces in any part of the reference.

You can enter a URL in brackets to link to a file on the Internet. Click here [image] for URL syntax.

Related Topics

More Info


To point out a link
To point out a link,

1	If the file you want to reference is not open, use File [image] Open to access it. You can open Corel Quattro Pro notebooks, spreadsheets in other formats, or a file on the Internet.

2	After typing +, or at the appropriate place in the formula, activate the target notebook you want to reference. You can do this in one of these ways:

Click anywhere in the notebook.

Click a window listed at the bottom of the screen (on the Application Bar).

Open the Window menu and choose the window from the numbered list at the bottom of the menu. You can click Window in the menu bar or use the shortcut Alt+W.

Press the Next Window key, Ctrl+F6, until you are in the notebook you want.

3	By default, the last-selected cell in the target notebook appears in the formula. To change the reference to another cell or cells, point elsewhere in the notebook.

4	If there is more to the formula, finish typing it. Press Enter.

The selector returns to its original place in the primary notebook and enters the cells (along with the linked file's name) in the input line.

Tip

If you are entering an @function (such as @SUM) that allows multiple cell references, you can enter a comma after the first cell reference (which returns you to the primary notebook), then point to the next cells in any notebook. After the last one, type ) (close parenthesis) to complete the @function, then press Enter to complete the formula. For example, your formula might look like this:

@SUM([NOTEBK1]A:A1,[NOTEBK2]A:B1)

Related Topics

More Info


To paste a notebook link
To paste a notebook link,

1	Select the cells to which you want to link. The selection can even be noncontiguous selections.

2	Click the Copy button [image] on the Toolbar.

3	Select the upper left cell of the destination cells for the links.

4	Click Edit [image] Paste Special.

5	Click the Link button.

Each pasted cell contains a formula beginning with a plus sign followed by

the file name in brackets (if different from the active notebook)

the sheet name and a colon (if different from the active sheet)

the cell address

Related Topics

More Info


Naming Links

If you often link to certain cells, you can store the reference in a named cell (either in the active notebook or in a separate one) to simplify the process. This offers several advantages:

To reference a different file or different cells, you need to edit only the reference in the named cell instead of editing each individual link.

If the link statement is long, you can reference a short named cell instead of typing the entire link.

When you move a named cell in a supporting notebook while the primary notebook is closed, the primary notebook is updated to reflect the change the next time you open it. With links that refer to cell addresses, the primary notebook is not updated.

For example, suppose you often reference the total of cells F12..F36 on sheet B in the file BUDGET. Instead of typing @SUM([BUDGET]B:F12..F36) wherever you want that sum, you can name a cell TOTAL, and enter @SUM([BUDGET]B:F12..F36) in it. This way, wherever you want that sum, just enter +TOTAL instead of typing the full link.

Related Concepts


Shortcuts for Linking Notebooks

If you are consolidating information from several files that have the same layout, you can use wildcards to link to the same place in all of them. A notebook link is a reference to a cell or cells in another notebook, another spreadsheet format that Corel Quattro Pro supports, or a file on the Internet.

Click File [image] Open to open the primary notebook and all its supporting files. Then, close all files you do not want to reference. To reference corresponding values in all open files, use a wildcard character in place of the file names in the link.

As soon as you finish entering the link, the formula is revised to include specific file names. This means that if you open new files after using a wildcard in a link, they are not referenced in the formula.

You can use ? and * wildcards in links. As in DOS, a question mark (?) stands for any single character, and an asterisk (*) stands for any number of characters.

Related Concepts


Wildcard Link Examples

These examples show wildcard characters used in notebook links:

@SUM([*]A:A1) adds the values in A1 in sheet A of all open notebooks (except the active one), and places the result in the active cell.

@AVG([*]BUDGET:B3..C10) finds the average of all values in B3..C10 in the sheet named BUDGET of each open notebook.

@SUM([*]TOTALS) sums the values of all cells in the selection TOTALS in any open notebooks with TOTALS. These selections need not be the same size, or in the same relative positions.

Related Concepts


How Wildcards Work in Links

You can use ? and * wildcards in links. As in DOS, a question mark (?) stands for any single character, and an asterisk (*) stands for any number of characters. The following examples show how different wildcard characters work in notebook links:

[] looks in the active notebook.

[*] Links to all open notebooks.

[AB*] Links to all open notebooks whose names begin with AB.

[A*B] Links to all open notebooks whose names begin with A and end with B.

[A?B] Links to all open notebooks with three-character names that begin with A and end with B.

[AB???] Links to all open notebooks with five-character names that begin with AB.

Related Concepts


Linking to Closed Notebooks

A file does not have to be open for you to link to it. You can type a link to a closed file. When you open a primary notebook, you can also click Update References from the dialog box that appears. This loads only the linked values from supporting files, leaving the supporting files closed. This is useful if all your linked files will not fit into memory.

Linking closed files has one disadvantage: You cannot update closed files. For best results, structure linked files hierarchically, with links that flow only one way. Then you can work on one file at a time. As long as you start with the file at the bottom of the hierarchy and proceed upward (choosing Update References for each file you open), the values will always be correct.

If you are revising notebook A on a network and someone else is revising B or C, click Edit [image] Links [image] Refresh Links after that person saves and closes B or C to update the links in notebook A.

Related Concepts


Moving and Copying Links

These rules apply when you copy and move notebook links:

When you copy a link, relative cell references in the formula adjust like other cell addresses: relative cell references change to reference position, while absolute cell references stay the same.

When you copy a link from one notebook to another, the link remains, even if you copy it into the notebook it references. However, if you move a link into the notebook it references, Corel Quattro Pro removes the link, leaving only the sheet and cell reference.

If you move a formula to another notebook without moving the cells it references, Corel Quattro Pro creates a link to the original notebook.

When you move cells in a supporting file, any links to it in open primary notebooks adjust accordingly. However, links in closed files are not updated. To avoid this problem, use cell names in links when possible. Each time you open a primary notebook, cell names that have been moved are updated.

Related Concepts


About Maintaining Links

Use the Edit [image] Links option to maintain notebook links. Choose from these options:

Open Links opens any or all supporting files linked to the active notebook. These could be other notebooks, files saved in other spreadsheet formats, or files on the Internet.

Refresh Links recalculates data in the active notebook based on data in closed supporting files.

Delete Links deletes all link references to any supporting files.

Change Links switches all links that reference one supporting file to a different file.

To open files linked to the active notebook

To refresh links to unopened files

To delete notebook links

To switch links from one file to another

Related Concepts


To open files linked to the active notebook
To open files linked to the active notebook,

1	Click Edit [image] Links [image] Open Links. Corel Quattro Pro displays a list of unopened files referenced in the active notebook.

2	Select the file you want to open. You can select multiple files by holding down the Ctrl key (as you click individual files) or the Shift key (as you click the last file in a range to be selected).

Tip

Edit [image] Links [image] Open Links opens only files that are directly linked to the active notebook. A notebook link is a reference to a cell or cells in another notebook, another spreadsheet format that Corel Quattro Pro supports, or a file on the Internet. If additional files are linked to those directly linked, you need to activate the directly linked files and choose Open Links again.

Related Topics

More Info


To refresh links to unopened notebooks
To refresh links to unopened files,

1	Click Edit [image] Links [image] Refresh Links. Corel Quattro Pro displays a list of unopened files referenced in the active notebook.

2	Select the file whose values you want to access. You can select multiple files by holding down the Ctrl key (as you click individual files) or the Shift key (as you click the last file in a range to be selected).

Tips

A notebook link is a reference to a cell or cells in another notebook, another spreadsheet format that Corel Quattro Pro supports, or a file on the Internet.

Refresh Links is useful when you are working on a network. While you are using one notebook, others can be working on supporting files (which remain closed to you). If people announce over the network when they save or close a file, you can use Refresh Links to access updated values in the primary notebook.

If you refresh links to a Internet file specified by a URL, the file is reloaded from the Internet, not from a local temporary file.

Related Topics

More Info


To delete notebook links
To delete notebook links,

1	Click Edit [image] Links [image] Delete Links. Corel Quattro Pro displays a list of files referenced in the active notebook.

2	Select any file whose links you want to delete. You can select multiple files by holding down the Ctrl key (as you click individual files) or the Shift key (as you click the last file in a range to be selected).

Tips

A notebook link is a reference to a cell or cells in another notebook, another spreadsheet format that Corel Quattro Pro supports, or a file on the Internet

When you click OK, Corel Quattro Pro replaces all link references to the selected files with ERR values, but does not remove any formulas containing ERR values. You can edit them to replace the ERR values with valid references.

Edit [image] Undo cannot restore deleted links.

Related Topics

More Info


To switch links from one file to another
To switch links from one file to another,

1	Click Edit [image] Links [image] Change Link. Corel Quattro Pro displays a list of files referenced in the active notebook.

2	Select the item whose links you want to change. In the To edit field, type the name of the file you want to change links to.

3	Click OK. In the active notebook, all link references to the selected file change to the new file name.

Tips

A notebook link is a reference to a cell or cells in another notebook, another spreadsheet format that Corel Quattro Pro supports, or a file on the Internet.

The new supporting file must have the same layout as the previous one because the same relative cells are referenced. If it does not, formulas that reference linked cells may show errors or produce meaningless values. To avoid this, enter all links as cell names so the correct values are included.

Related Topics

More Info


To link to information on the Internet
To link to information on the Internet,

To link to information on the Internet (for example, stock quotes), you need to:

Retrieve the Internet site into Corel Quattro Pro, find the specific information you want to link to, and note the cell it appears in

Type a link in a notebook to that Internet site and cell reference

To accomplish this,

1	Click File [image] Open, then specify a URL in the File name text box (for example, http://www.corel.ca/product/prod.htm).

2	Move through the notebook and find the cell where the information you want to link to appears.

3	Open a notebook where you want to link the information.

4	Enter +[URL]Sheet:Cell reference (Sheet:Cell reference is where the information appeared when you opened it in a notebook)—for example, +[http://www.corel.ca/product/prod.htm]C:B9

5	Click File [image] Save to save the notebook.

Tip

You can then update your links at a specified interval or just when you want to.

Related Topics


Updating Links from the Internet

Whenever you open a notebook that has a link in it, you are prompted to update the links.

To update links at any time, click Edit [image] Links [image] Refresh Links.

To have Internet links automatically updated at a specific interval, click Tools [image] Settings [image] File Options [image] Refresh URLs, then specify how often to have the links updated.


What Is a Macro?

A macro is a sequence of commands Corel Quattro Pro runs automatically. When running a macro, Corel Quattro Pro performs the actions listed in it. You can store macros in the notebook they apply to or in a macro library file for use by other notebooks. You can also attach macros to buttons, and you can run macros from another application using Dynamic Data Exchange.

Macros can perform keystrokes, mouse actions, and menu commands. Special macro commands can perform actions such as prompting the user for input, looping a macro repeatedly, or controlling other Window applications. Use macros to automate complex or repetitive command sequences (like printing a standard report), to enter frequently used labels with a keystroke, or to build complete applications that people with limited Corel Quattro Pro experience can use.

Related Concepts


Using Corel Quattro Pro and PerfectScript macros
Using Corel Quattro Pro and PerfectScript

Corel Quattro Pro can use two types of macros:

Corel Quattro Pro syntax macros that are stored as labels in notebook cells and edited in Corel Quattro Pro. Macros available in early versions for Window were only available in this format.

Corel PerfectScript macros that are compatible with the Corel PerfectScript macro technology available in other applications, such as Corel WordPerfect and Corel Presentations. PerfectScript macros are stored in .WCM files.

Information on particular Corel Quattro Pro macros can be found in the Macro Command Index, accessible from Corel Quattro Pro Help Contents. Syntax descriptions are in Corel Quattro Pro macro syntax.

To record a PerfectScript macro

To translate a Corel Quattro Pro macro command to PerfectScript syntax

Related Concepts


To edit a PerfectScript macro by selecting commands from a list
To edit a PerfectScript macro by selecting commands from a list,

1	Click the Windows Start menu [image] Corel WordPerfect Suite 8 [image] Tools [image] Corel PerfectScript.

2	Click File [image] Edit.

3	Select the macro you want to work on, then click Edit.

4	Move the insertion point to the place in the macro where you want to insert the commands.

Corel WordPerfect opens, and you can edit the macro there.

5	Click Commands, then select Quattro Pro as the command type

6	Double-click any command, select a parameter, and type in or select the value for the parameter.

7	Double-click enumerations to add both the parameter and enumerations.

8	Click Insert to place the new command in the macro.

9	Click File [image] Save to save the revised macro.


Planning Macros

Whether you record or type a macro, try these tips:

Plan your macro carefully. If your macro is efficient, it will be easy to modify later. If it involves menu commands, step through them first, writing down each action involved. If it involves special macro commands, know exactly what you are going to enter as the command arguments. Keep track of the selector after each macro command; its position can affect the macro's behavior.

Try sketching a flow chart of your macro before entering it. A flow chart is a diagram showing the actions and decisions a macro steps through while running. Boxes in the chart contain an action the macro performs. Diamonds contain decisions the macro must make to determine the next step; for example, a cell achieving a certain value or the selector reaching a specific location. Arrows show where to go after a step is completed. Arrows exiting a diamond have a decision listed next to them dictating the next step. If a decision is not listed, the step at the end of the arrow is always the next step. Flow charts do not show actual macro commands; they show the planning and logic behind the macro.

Related Concepts


To record a Corel Quattro Pro macro
To record a Corel Quattro Pro macro,

1	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Record.

2	Select the cells to store the macro in.

3	Click OK to place Corel Quattro Pro in recording mode.

4	Perform your task. Corel Quattro Pro records each action, writing it as one or more macro commands in the first column of the cells previously specified.

5	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Record to finish recording. The macro is now stored in the cells.

6	Move to the first cell of the macro, and click Insert [image] Name [image] Cells. Type a macro name, click Add, then click Close.

Tips

When you select cells to store the macro in, select a single cell if there is no chance of overwriting data in cells below; Corel Quattro Pro fills the cells below as necessary. When you select more than one cell, the macro is confined to those cells only, and stops recording when those cells are full.

By default, Corel Quattro Pro records macros as command equivalents with normal cell references (like A1..B26). For greater portability, you can record with relative cell references. Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Options to change the default settings.

Related Topics


To record a PerfectScript macro
To record a PerfectScript macro,

1	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Record, then click PerfectScript Macro.

2	Enter the name of a file to store the macro in.

3	Click OK to place Corel Quattro Pro in recording mode (noted by the REC indicator on the Application Bar).

4	Perform your task. Corel Quattro Pro records each action, writing it as one or more macro commands in the file previously specified. You can click Tools [image] Macro [image] Pause to temporarily pause recording, then click it again to resume recording.

5	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Record to finish recording. The macro is now stored in the file.

To edit a PerfectScript macro by selecting commands from a list

Related Topics


About Recording Relative Cell References

By default, addresses in macro commands use standard cell addressing like A1..C6. By choosing Relative from the Tools [image] Macro [image] Options dialog box, you can record macro commands that use relative references.

Relative references are cell addresses specified as an offset from the cell selector. For example, the cell selector's relative reference is []P(0):C(0)R(0). The first piece of the reference, ([]), specifies that you are referring to the active notebook. The second piece, P(0):, is the number of sheets from the selector (in this case, zero); it is optional (except when selecting an entire row or column, which is discussed next). The third piece, C(0), is the number of columns from the selector. The final piece, R(0), is the number of rows from the selector. The cell below the selector is []C(0)R(1), the cell to the right of it is []C(1)R(0), and the cell beneath the selector (on the next notebook sheet) is []P(1):C(0)R(0).

Tips

If [] does not precede a relative reference, the relative reference is offset from the cell containing the macro command, not the cell selector. For example, if {BLANK C(1)R(0)} were stored in A:A16, running it would erase the cell to the right of it (A:B16).

You can precede a relative reference with a colon (:) to affect the same cell, but on the active sheet. For example, if {BLANK :C(1)R(0)} were stored in A:A16, running it when sheet B is active would erase the cell B:B16.

You can omit C( ) or R( ) to select entire rows or columns. For example, {SELECTBLOCK []P(0):C(0)} selects the column containing the active cell; {SELECTBLOCK []P(0):R(0)} selects the row containing the active cell. To select the three columns to the right of the active cell, use {SELECTBLOCK []P(0):C(1)..C(3)}.

Relative references can use negative or positive offsets. For example, if the selector is in cell A2, you could use []C(0)R(-1)..C(2)R(1) to specify the cells A1..C3.

Using relative references increases macro portability, but hinders readability, since it is harder to track which cells the macro affects. If your macros use @CELLPOINTER frequently, try relative references.

To record relative cell references

Related Concepts


To record relative cell references
To record relative cell references,

1	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Options.

2	Click Relative.

Tip

Relative references specify cells as offset from the cell selector. For example, the cell selector's relative reference is P(0):C(0)R(0).

To record absolute cell references,

1	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Options.

2	Click Absolute.

Use absolute cell references to always refers to the original cell address. By default, addresses in macro commands use absolute cell addressing like A1..C6.

Related Topics

More Info


Macro Recording Tips

Here are some handy tips to make macro recording easier:

Use the shortest steps possible to perform your task. The longer a recording session goes, the more errors can result.

Use any method available to choose menu commands when recording. The resulting macro reads the same when recorded logically.

You cannot record a macro that pauses for user input. If you want the macro to pause, edit it after recording it.

Related Concepts


About Typing Macros

You can type macros directly into cells as labels instead of recording them. This method requires precision (one incorrect keystroke can invalidate a macro). Some macros can only be typed, such as those that prompt for user input or that use Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) to communicate with other Window applications.

When you finish entering a macro, name its first cell using Insert [image] Name [image] Cells. Then you can run the macro by choosing its name from the Tools [image] Macro [image] Play dialog box or pressing a Ctrl+Shift shortcut. Cell names make macros more readable and easier to remember. Give your macros names reflecting their task. For example, PERCENT could be the name of a macro that changes the numeric format of the current cell to percentage.

Tip

When naming macros, avoid names that duplicate macro commands. Otherwise the macro commands become invalid. For example, if you name a macro READLN, which is the name of a predefined macro command, and then try to read a line from a file into cell A6 using {READLN A6}, Corel Quattro Pro assumes you are running the READLN macro instead of running the predefined {READLN} command.

To type a macro

Related Concepts


To type a macro
To type a macro,

1	Move to the first cell where you want to store the macro.

2	Enter the macro commands that perform your task. You can enter multiple macro commands in the same cell, or in the cell below the last command entered. If using more than one cell, be sure the entries proceed downward (A1, A2, A3) with no empty cells between them. Each cell must contain a label or a text formula.

3	Leave an empty cell, {QUIT}, or {RETURN} at the end of the macro. Otherwise the macro interprets labels below it as macro commands.

Related Topics

More Info


Macro Typing Tips

Here are some suggestions to follow when typing macros:

Use Tools [image] Macro [image] Record to create sections of a macro that consist of menu choices. This speeds entry time and reduces errors.

Add comments to your macros to make them easier to understand and debug. Type the comments in a separate column to the right of the macro column.

List cell names to the left of the macros or cells they reference; then you can use Insert [image] Name [image] Cells to create the cell names quickly.

Place macros in an area unaffected by macro commands. For example, do not place macros to the right of cells  where rows will be inserted or deleted. The ideal place for a macro depends on what operations it performs. If you want to use a macro with many notebooks, place it in a macro library or create a PerfectScript macro (which is an actual file) . If only one notebook uses the macro, add a sheet named Macros to that notebook and place the macro there.

Related Concepts


Macro Syntax and Arguments

Macro commands are like @functions in that they have specific grammatical rules, or syntax. The syntax for macros is:

{COMMANDNAME Argument1,Argument2,Argument3...}

COMMANDNAME is the exact name of the command. Arguments are values providing instructions to the command. Not all macro commands require arguments; when they do, they require a specific type of information. Some examples of macro commands are

{Query.Criteria_Table B27..B29}

{BlockCopy A1,A2..A37}

{Search.Find "3rd Quarter Profits"}

{BEEP 3}

{GETNUMBER "How old are you?",AGE}

{CONTENTS E15,F15,15}

Many command equivalents contain a period (.) in their command name.

Related Concepts


Macro Syntax Rules

The syntax rules for macro commands are as follows:

The command must begin and end with braces { }.

There must be a space between the command name and the first argument. For example, {GETNUMBER"Number?",A1} results in a syntax error; {GETNUMBER "Number?",A1} works correctly.

Separate multiple arguments with commas. By changing the Punctuation option of the Application International property, you can use semicolons or periods instead. Click here [image] for details.

Arguments must be the correct type; if a string is required, the argument must be a valid character string or a syntax error occurs.

If an argument contains spaces or punctuation, enclose it in quotation marks. For example,

{GETLABEL "Hello, world",A4}

is allowed, but not

{GETLABEL Hello, world,A4}

You must enter the entire macro command in a single cell.

You can enter the command in any case (upper or lower).

You can include more than one macro command in a cell. For example,

{BEEP}{GETLABEL "Hello, world",A4}{QUIT}.

Because macro commands are labels, Corel Quattro Pro will not recognize a syntax error when you type it in; an error occurs when you try to run the macro. To save debugging time, pay careful attention to the format of macro commands as you enter them and record macros whenever possible.

Related Concepts


Macro Command Arguments

Arguments in macro commands require specific information to be supplied with the command. There are four types of arguments: numbers, strings, locations, and conditions.

Number arguments require any numeric value, entered as

an actual number (such as 2 or 0.45)

a formula resulting in a number (such as A3*15)

a cell address or named cell containing a numeric value or formula (such as C10, where C10 contains a valid number or formula)

String arguments require a text string, entered as

an actual string in quotation marks ("Corel Quattro")

a reference to a cell or named cell containing a label

a comma-separated list of property or command equivalent settings, enclosed in quotation marks ("Currency,2"). If a setting in the list would normally take a single quotation mark, enter two quotation marks ("Prefix,""Windows Default"",No"). If a setting contains spaces or punctuation, enclose it in two sets of quotation marks.

a formula resulting in a label, such as @UPPER("hello").

Location arguments require a reference to a cell or cells. The reference can be

a cell name

selections referencing one or more cells; for example, A1, A1..A4 or A..B:C4..D22

the relative reference of cells; for example, []C(0)R(0), []P(-2):C(0)R(22), or []C(0)R(0)..C(3)R(10)

coordinates for noncontiguous selections, enclosed in parentheses; for example, (A1,B1..B7,C1..C7) or (A1,B:C27..C52)

a label or text formula resulting in any of these options; for example, +"A"&"2", which results in A2

Condition arguments require a logical expression; that is, a formula that can be evaluated as either true or false; for example, +C4 > 500.

Some commands accept a combination or choice of argument types. For example, {LET} stores either a label or a number in a cell, depending on the argument type.

Tip

Unlike @functions, cell references in macros are not updated when the macro is copied. If you move the contents of a cell, or insert or delete a row or column, the macro reference might be wrong. For this reason, use cell names whenever possible. Corel Quattro Pro updates cell names to reference the correct location.

Related Concepts


About Entering Macro Commands

Each macro is a sequence of macro commands. These commands include command equivalents (which emulate menu commands) and unique functions you cannot do directly in Corel Quattro Pro, such as sounding the computer's speaker, pausing for a fixed length of time, or prompting for input.

You can enter macro commands by typing them, using the Macros button on the input line when it is active, or using the Macros key (Shift+F3). This displays a menu of command categories.

To insert a macro command with the Macros key

To type a macro

Related Concepts


To insert a macro command with the Macros key
To insert a macro command with the Macros key,

1	Press Shift+F3 to display a list of macro command categories.

2	Click the category containing the desired command.

3	Click the command to insert.

Corel Quattro Pro inserts the macro command name on the input line. When a list of categories or commands is displayed, you can search for an item in the list by pressing F2 and typing the first few letters of the item's name. Corel Quattro Pro highlights the first item in the list that begins with the text you type.

Related Topics

More Info


Using Macro Subroutines

A subroutine is a macro stored separately from the macros using it. You name the subroutine just like other macros. You can call the subroutine from another macro, and Corel Quattro Pro runs the subroutine's macro commands. After running the subroutine, the command immediately following the call (in the main macro) runs. Using subroutines makes the macro more readable and easier to debug.

To call a subroutine from within a macro, type its name inside braces. For example, {go_right} calls the subroutine named go_right.

You can pass arguments to a subroutine for use by its commands. These arguments are stored in cells referenced by the subroutine. For example,

{set_cost C10,36}

calls the subroutine set_cost and passes two arguments (C10 and 36) to it. In order for the subroutine to know what to do with the arguments, you must define them within the subroutine using {DEFINE}, which tells Corel Quattro Pro where to store the arguments and whether they should be interpreted as values or labels.

Whenever you call a subroutine, Corel Quattro Pro stores the return point in an internal list called a stack. One return point on this stack clears when the subroutine encounters a {RETURN} command or empty cell. If you do not clear all of these locations, the stack fills up, causing the error Too Many Nesting Calls.

Use {BRANCH} instead of a subroutine when a macro

does not need to pick up where it left off after calling the subroutine

needs to return to a different point in the macro than the point right after the subroutine call

calls the main macro as a subroutine

{BRANCH} can move to or return from any cell in a macro.

Related Concepts


About Command Equivalents

The commands in this category perform operations normally done with menus or dialog boxes. Options normally set in a dialog box are passed as arguments to a command equivalent, like passing them to a subroutine. Command equivalents make macros easier to read and understand, and let the macro run in any Corel Quattro Pro menu system.

Menu commands containing many settings (such as File [image] Print) have a set of command equivalents that emulate their operation. The next example shows a macro that emulates Edit [image] Find And Replace:

search_string	Fri

\s	{GETLABEL "Search For? ",+search_string}

{Search.Reset}

{Search.Block ""}

{Search.Find +search_string}

{Search.ReplaceBy +search_string}

\n	{Search.Next}

Notice that each command equivalent sets one option in the Edit [image] Find And Replace dialog box. You do not have to set each option every time; if one of the command equivalents is omitted, the default setting is used. The final command ({Search.Next}) performs the find operation. You can use command equivalent names with @COMMAND to find current Corel Quattro Pro settings. For example, @COMMAND("BlockFill.Series") returns the current setting of Series in Edit [image] Fill [image] Fill Series.

Menu commands with a few settings (such as Edit [image] Copy Cells) have one command equivalent to emulate them. Command equivalents without a period are typically of this type. For example, the following macro command emulates Edit [image] Copy Cells:

{CellsCopy A1,A2..A36}

If you specify a command equivalent with a question mark (?) after the command name, the macro command displays a dialog box that the user can manipulate. If the name of the command equivalent contains a period, use only the part of the command name that precedes the period. For example, {BlockFill?} displays the Edit [image] Fill [image] Fill Series dialog box for the user to manipulate. When the user clicks OK, the fill occurs and the macro resumes running.

If you specify a command equivalent with an exclamation mark (!) after the command name, the macro command displays a dialog box that the macro can manipulate. You can make the dialog box revert to user control at any point in the macro using the command {PAUSEMACRO}.

Tip

Make sure that a dialog box is displaying or that Corel Quattro Pro is in INPUT or FIND mode when the macro command runs {PAUSEMACRO}; otherwise, the macro waits until it is stopped by Ctrl+Break.

The next example shows a macro that uses {PAUSEMACRO} and {RestrictInput} to display a small form for the user to enter a name and phone number.

new_name	Nick Piercherd

new_phone	(804) 555-2315

get_record	{BLANK A:E28..E29}

{RestrictInput.Enter A:D28..F29}

{PAUSEMACRO}

{IF #NOT#@ISSTRING(E28)}{RETURN}

{IF #NOT#@ISSTRING(E29)}{RETURN}

{LET new_name,E28}

{LET new_phone,E29}

Related Concepts


About DDE Macro Commands

Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) lets Window applications communicate with one another. Use {INITIATE} to open a channel of communication with another application. This is called initiating a conversation. Every DDE conversation consists of a client and a server. The application initiating the conversation is the client; the other application is the server. Once you have initiated a conversation, you can use {POKE} to send data, {REQUEST} to receive data, or {EXECUTE} to run macros in the server. {TERMINATE} ends the conversation.

The data source that a DDE conversation connects with in the server application is called a topic. Many DDE applications support the topic System and items available from it.

Other DDE applications can call Corel Quattro Pro as their server; to do so, use the server name "QPW" and specify "System" or the file name of an open notebook as the topic. When a notebook is the topic, you can enter cell addresses or coordinates as the item to request, or run Corel Quattro Pro macro commands. When "System" is the topic, you can run Corel Quattro Pro macros or request these items:

Item	Returns

SysItems	A list of the items you can request from System.

Topics	A list of topics currently available from the server application.

Status	The current status of the application. In Corel Quattro Pro, this is the text of the Application Bar indicator (READY, WAIT, LABEL and so on).

Formats	A list of Clipboard formats supported by the application.

Selection	The coordinates of the active cells.

Tip

You can also request any property from Corel Quattro Pro. The property must be enclosed in parentheses and quotation marks, for example, "(Application.Display)".

Running Corel Quattro Pro Macros from Other Applications using DDE

To run Corel Quattro Pro macro commands in Corel Quattro Pro using DDE, establish a link to Corel Quattro Pro using "QPW" as the DDE topic. To run PerfectScript macro commands in Corel Quattro Pro using DDE, establish a link using "QPMacros" as the DDE topic. Then use the EXECUTE command provided by your DDE client application to run the command.

Related Concepts


About Object Macro Commands

Object commands can create Corel Quattro Pro objects, change their property settings, or move them to new positions. Object commands can create three types of objects:

Drawn objects are objects in a chart window that you would normally create using the Toolbar. When you are creating a drawn object with a macro command, the position for the object is specified by stating how many pixels it should appear from the upper left corner of the chart background. A pixel is the smallest dot that Window can display on your screen. You can create drawn objects with {CREATEOBJECT}. The following command activates a chart window and creates a line near the upper left corner of the chart:

{GraphEdit "PROFITS"}

{CREATEOBJECT "Line",0,0,25,25}

Dialog controls are objects in a dialog window. When you create a dialog control using a macro command, the position is also specified by stating how many pixels it should appear from the upper left corner of the dialog window. You can create dialog controls with {CREATEOBJECT}. For example, this command creates a push button in the active dialog window:

{CREATEOBJECT "Button",43,41,58,77}

Floating objects are QuickButtons and charts that appear on the notebook sheet. Unlike chart objects and dialog controls, the position of a floating object is specified as an offset from a cell in the notebook. The offset is specified in twips; each twip is 1/1440th of an inch. You can create floating objects with {FLOATCREATE}. For example, the following macro command creates a QuickButton that is half an inch from the left edge of A:A1:

{FLOATCREATE "Button",A:A1,720,0,A:B2,720,360,"Bt1"}

In this example, A:A1,720,0 specifies that the upper left corner of the button is in A:A1, and is 720 twips from the left side of the cell (half an inch), as well as 0 twips from the top of the cell. A:B2,720,360 specifies that the lower left corner of the button is in A:B2, 720 twips from the left side of A:B2, and a quarter inch (360 twips) from the top of A:B2.

After you create an object with a macro command, use {SETPROPERTY} to set its name or {GETPROPERTY} to store its name in a cell; then you can change its properties with macro commands at any time.

Selecting, positioning, and sizing objects

After creating a dialog control or floating object, they are selected, so you can reposition them or change their property settings. There are three commands that select Corel Quattro Pro objects:

1	You can use {SELECTBLOCK} to select cells and change or read its properties.

2	You can use {SELECTOBJECT} to select chart objects or dialog controls. When a chart object or dialog control is selected, you can use {MOVETO} and {RESIZE} to move and resize it.

3	You can select a floating object with {SELECTFLOAT}. When a floating object is selected, you can use {FLOATMOVE} and {FLOATSIZE} to move and resize it.

Changing/reading property settings

You can use {SETPROPERTY} and {SETOBJECTPROPERTY} to change property settings of Corel Quattro Pro objects. For example, the following macro selects cells and changes their text color:

{SELECTBLOCK A:A1..C22}

{SETPROPERTY "Text_Color",5}

You can also change a property setting without selecting the cells using the following command:

{SETOBJECTPROPERTY "A:A1..C22.Text_Color",5}

You can use {GETPROPERTY} and {GETOBJECTPROPERTY} to read property settings. {GETPROPERTY} reads settings of the selected object; {GETOBJECTPROPERTY} lets you read property settings without selecting an object.

Related Concepts


Accessing Other Notebooks in Macros

You can use links in macros just as you would in formulas. Macros can run macros in other notebooks, access data from them, or store user input in them.

If you run a macro that is in a different notebook, such as a macro library, the macro behaves as though it were stored in the active notebook; coordinates entered in dialog boxes refer to the active notebook. However, coordinates stored in the macro as arguments to a macro command refer to the macro library. For example, {BRANCH A1} branches to cell A1 of the macro library, not the active notebook. To refer to cells in a different notebook, use linking. For example, the following command branches to sheet B, cell A1 of the notebook MACROS:

{BRANCH [MACROS]B:A1}

To refer to cells in the active notebook, precede the coordinates with empty brackets. For example, {BRANCH []A1} branches to cell A1 in the active notebook.

Related Concepts


Self-Modifying Macros

You can use macro commands and text formulas to create self-modifying macros (also called dynamic macros) that alter themselves while running. For example, to save the active notebook as ACCTx.WB3, where x is a value stored in cell A5, enter the following text formula into a cell:

+"{FileSaveAs ""ACCT"&@STRING(A5,0)&".WB3""}"

The result of this formula runs as a macro command. For example, if cell A5 contains the value 5 in the previous example, Corel Quattro Pro runs {FileSaveAs "ACCT5.WB3"}; if cell A5 changes to 10 and the notebook recalculates, Corel Quattro Pro runs {FileSaveAs "ACCT10.WB3"}.

You can also use macro commands to change a portion of the macro while it is running. The next example shows a macro that uses {GET} to convert user keystrokes into macro actions.

cell_type	b

type_indic	{INDICATE @UPPER(@CELLPOINTER("type"))}

{LET cell_type,@cellpointer("type")}

{IF cell_type="l"}{INDICATE LABEL}

{IF cell_type="b"}{INDICATE BLANK}

{IF cell_type="v"}{INDICATE VALUE}

{GET next_key}

{IF @UPPER(next_key)="{ESC}"}{BRANCH clear_indic}

next_key	{Esc}

{BRANCH type_indic}

clear_indic	{INDICATE}

{QUIT}

You can use these concepts to create powerful macros that completely change themselves based on their environment.

Related Concepts


About Macro Libraries

The best way to store macros is in a macro library, a special notebook reserved for macros. You can use it to store macros you want to access from any notebook. There are many advantages to storing macros in a library:

It simplifies linked access.

It is easier to track macros.

If Corel Quattro Pro cannot find the macro you specify within the active notebook, it searches through all open macro libraries until it finds it.

The macros do not interfere with the notebook data and vice versa.

Using one set of macros for a group of notebooks saves disk space.

If there is a set of macros you do want to insert into individual notebooks, you can store them in a library, then copy the macros into notebooks as you need them.

You can have a separate set of macros for each application or type of notebook you work with.

Use Window [image] Hide (or the macro command that emulates it, {WindowHide}) to hide a macro library. You can also use Medium password protection to ensure that a macro library is always hidden. This prevents novices from altering the macro library. If a hidden macro library is also a system notebook, it remains open even when all other notebooks have been closed.

Tip

It is a good idea to keep only one macro library open at a time. If two open libraries contain a macro with the same name, it is difficult to predict which macro will run. Corel Quattro Pro searches only open macro libraries for macros; closed libraries are ignored.

To create a macro library

Related Concepts


To create a macro library
To create a macro library,

1	Open a new notebook. (You can also use an existing notebook.)

2	Create the macros to store in it (or copy them to it from another notebook).

3	Click Format [image] Notebook [image] Macro Library.

4	Click Yes to define the active notebook as a macro library.

5	Click OK to save the change.

6	Click File [image] Save to save the macro library.

Related Topics

More Info


About Running Macros

 appears on the Application Bar while a macro runs. When Corel Quattro Pro runs a macro, it begins with the first cell in the macro cells. It continues down through the column, interpreting everything it encounters as part of the macro, until it finds one of the following:

an empty cell

a cell containing a value

the {QUIT} macro command

the {RETURN} macro command

an invalid macro entry

At that point, the macro stops and control returns to the user. Leave an empty cell, {QUIT}, or {RETURN} after each macro in a notebook, or the macro will try to interpret labels below the macro as commands.

If the macro contains an error, Corel Quattro Pro beeps, displays an error message, and stops the macro. You can use the debugger to pinpoint and correct macro errors.

To stop a macro while it is running, click Tools [image] Macro [image] Play (or press Ctrl+Break) and click OK to clear the break message and return to Ready mode.

Tip

If the Ctrl+Break key has been disabled with {BREAKOFF}, you will not be able to interrupt the macro. If you need to use {BREAKOFF} in the macro, add it as a last step after debugging the macro.

Suppressing screen redraw

By default, Corel Quattro Pro does not show the actions a macro performs while it is running (this makes the macro run faster). To see the actions a macro performs, click Tools [image] Settings [image] Macro, then click None in the Suppress-Redraw box.

Running macros from Window

You can run a macro as you open Corel Quattro Pro. For example, the following Run command loads Corel Quattro Pro, retrieves the notebook named EXPENSE, and runs the macro named \F:

QPW EXPENSE \F

Windows applications that support Dynamic Data Exchange can make Corel Quattro Pro run macro commands; see their documentation for more details.

To run a macro

To run a PerfectScript macro

Related Concepts


To run a macro
To run a macro,

1	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Play.

2	If desired, use Macro Library to specify the name of the notebook containing the macro. This displays a list of macros available under Macros.

3	Choose the name of the macro to run from Macros or choose Location and enter the macro's cell coordinates. If the macro is in another notebook, use full linking syntax (for example, [LIBRARY]A:C26).

Related Topics

More Info


To run a PerfectScript macro
To run a PerfectScript macro,

1	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Play, then click PerfectScript Macro.

2	Enter the name of the macro.

Related Topics

More Info


About Attaching Macros

Many objects in Corel Quattro Pro can have macros attached to them that run when the user performs some action (clicks a button, activates a control, changes a value). There are two ways to assign a macro to an object:

Using properties. You can use the properties of QuickButtons and chart buttons to specify what macro should run when they are clicked.

Using link commands. Many objects in a dialog window can run macros using link commands. You can also attach link commands to menu commands created by {ADDMENU} and {ADDMENUITEM}.

To attach a macro to a key

To create a chart button

To create a QuickButton

Related Concepts


To attach a macro to a key
To attach a macro to a key,

1	Select the starting cell of the macro.

2	Click Insert [image] Name [image] Cells.

3	In the Name field, type a backslash (\) followed by a letter of the alphabet (A-Z).

4	Click Add.

Tips

You can run the macro from the keyboard by pressing Ctrl+Shift and the letter you specified (in either uppercase or lowercase).

Because there can be only 26 of these macros (one for each letter of the alphabet), reserve them for macros you use often.

Macros assigned to Alt keys in the DOS version of Corel Quattro Pro run in the Window version using Ctrl+Shift.

Related Topics

More Info


About QuickButtons

You can use the QuickButton tool [image] on the Notebook Toolbar to add a button (called a macro button or QuickButton) that runs macros in a notebook.

You can make the QuickButton display a dialog box. You can also link the QuickButton to a Uniform Resource Locator (URL) to display a document on the Internet.

To create a QuickButton

To display a dialog box with a QuickButton

Related Concepts


To create a QuickButton
To create a QuickButton,

1	Click Insert [image] QuickButton.

2	Place the pointer in a notebook sheet, point where you want the upper left corner of the button to appear, then click.

To resize the button, right-click it and press Esc to select it. When handles appear, drag them until the button is the size you want. To move the button, click and drag it to a new position.

3	Change the appearance of the QuickButton, if you want:

To paste a graphic image onto the button, select all or part of a bitmap and copy it into the Clipboard, select the QuickButton (to select a QuickButton, right-click it and press Esc), and click Edit [image] Paste.

To change the text appearing on the button, right-click it and click the Properties option, click Label Text, and type the text to display on the button. Click OK to set the new button title.

4	Attach a macro to the button or make it display a document on the Internet:

To attach a macro, right-click the QuickButton and click the Properties option, then click the Macro tab. Enter the macro commands to run when the button is clicked. You can use {BRANCH} to run a macro in a notebook. Click OK to save the macro.

To attach to a URL, right-click the QuickButton and click the Properties option, then click the Macro tab. Click Link To URL. Type the URL address in the URL field, then click OK twice to save the change.

Tip

To select a QuickButton after the macro is attached, right-click it, then press Esc.

Related Topics

More Info


To display a dialog box with a QuickButton
To display a dialog box with a QuickButton,

1	Right-click the QuickButton and click the Properties option, then click the Macro tab.

2	Click Execute Dialog.

3	Click the name of the dialog box to display in the Activate Dialog list box.

4	Click Result Cell and point to a cell in the notebook. After the dialog box is closed, this cell contains 1 or 0. The value 1 means the dialog box was closed by OK; the value 0 means it was canceled.

5	Click Values Range and point to cells in the notebook that contain initial settings for the dialog box. When the dialog box is closed, its final settings are written back into these cells.

6	Click OK to create the {DODIALOG} command that displays this dialog box.

7	Click OK to save the macro.

Related Topics

More Info


About Startup and Exit Macros

Sometimes it is helpful to run a macro each time you open or close a notebook. For example, you can "stamp" the current date and time or open another notebook after closing one. You can also run a macro each time you start Corel Quattro Pro.

Notebook Startup Macros

Each time you open a notebook, Corel Quattro Pro looks for a macro named _NBSTARTMACRO and runs it, if found. If _NBSTARTMACRO is not found, Corel Quattro Pro looks for the startup macro name entered as a Macro property in Application properties; \0 is the default.

Notebook Exit Macros

Notebook exit macros, which are named _NBEXITMACRO, run after you give the command to close a notebook. When you close a notebook containing a macro named _NBEXITMACRO, Corel Quattro Pro branches to the macro before closing.

Application Startup Macros

There are two ways to launch a macro each time you start the application. You can specify an autoload file and the startup macro it contains in Tools [image] Settings, or you can define a startup macro in QPW.INI. The .INI method is useful for linking add-ins and performing other procedures at startup without loading an autoload file.

To create a notebook exit macro

To create a notebook startup macro

To define a notebook startup macro in QPW.INI

Related Concepts


To create a notebook startup macro
To create a notebook startup macro,

1	Use Tools [image] Macro [image] Record to record a macro, or type a macro into a cell(s).

2	Move to the first cell of the macro, and click Insert [image] Name [image] Cells. Type _NBSTARTMACRO, click Add, then click Close.

Tips

To ensure that a startup macro runs in a notebook regardless of whether it is linked to another, begin the macro with {ESC}. This cancels the dialog box that appears when opening a notebook containing links. You can use Edit [image] Links to access linked values or to load supporting notebooks after accessing the file.

Each time you open a notebook, Corel Quattro Pro looks for a macro with that name and runs it, if found. If that macro is not found, Corel Quattro Pro looks for the startup macro name entered as a Macro property in Application properties; \0 is the default.

When the startup macro is renamed in Tools [image] Settings, the old startup macro name no longer runs automatically in any notebook. For example, if you set the startup name to AUTOSTART, macros named \0 would no longer run automatically; they would have to be renamed AUTOSTART.

Related Topics

More Info


To create a notebook exit macro
To create a notebook exit macro,

1	Use Tools [image] Macro [image] Record to record a macro, or type a macro into a cell(s).

2	Move to the first cell of the macro, and click Insert [image] Name [image] Cells. Type _NBEXITMACRO, click Add, then click Close.

Tip

When you close a notebook containing a macro named _NBEXITMACRO, Corel Quattro Pro branches to the macro before closing. It is up to the macro to make sure any ongoing operations are completed and ready for exit before it closes the notebook.

Related Topics

More Info


To define a notebook startup macro in QPW.INI
To define a notebook startup macro in QPW.INI,

1	Open QPW.INI in a text editor (make a backup copy first).

2	Type the expression InitMacro= followed by a series of macro statements (up to 255 characters). To launch a longer macro, use the {BRANCH} command following InitMacro=.

3	Save QPW.INI as an unformatted text file.

Example

This statement loads two add-ins, DLL1 and DLL2:

InitMacro={DLL.LOAD DLL1}{DLL.LOAD DLL2}

Tips

InitMacro expressions can be used with {ADDMENUITEM}, {ADDMENU}, {MESSAGE}, and similar macro commands to change the application interface or deliver information to users when they start Corel Quattro Pro.

The InitMacro statement in QPW.INI is useful for linking add-ins and performing other procedures at startup without loading an autoload file.

Related Topics

More Info


To run Corel Quattro Pro for DOS keystroke macros
To run Corel Quattro Pro for DOS keystroke macros,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings, then click the Macro tab.

2	Choose Slash Key and select Corel Quattro Pro - DOS.

You can now press the slash key (/) to display a menu system that is keystroke compatible with Corel Quattro Pro for DOS.

To run a macro, click Tools [image] Macro [image] Play from the menu, or press the slash key (/) and click Tools [image] Macro [image] Execute.

Tips

Macros assigned to Alt keys in the DOS version of Corel Quattro Pro run in the Window version using Ctrl+Shift.

It is recommended that you disable Tools [image] Settings [image] General [image] Move Cell Selector on Enter when playing keystroke macros used for cell input.  This ensures that the macro will not skip to the wrong cell during execution.

Related Topics

More Info


To run 1-2-3 keystroke macros
To run 1-2-3 keystroke macros,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings, then click the Macro tab.

2	Choose Slash Key and select 1-2-3/R 2.01.

To run a macro, click Tools [image] Macro [image] Play from the Corel Quattro Pro menu, or press the slash key (/) and click Worksheet [image] Macro [image] Execute.

Tips

Macros assigned to Alt keys in 1-2-3 run in Corel Quattro Pro using Ctrl+Shift.

1-2-3 menus will display as the macro issues commands. For example, /GT displays the 1-2-3 menu's chart types. However, Corel Quattro Pro dialog boxes will appear where appropriate.

It is recommended that you disable Tools [image] Settings [image] General [image] Move Cell Selector on Enter when playing keystroke macros used for cell input.  This ensures that the macro will not skip to the wrong cell during execution.

Be alert when executing 1-2-3 macros containing {?} statements--you may want to change those statements to {MENUCALL} statements, and create macro menus for the corresponding 1-2-3 menu choices. This ensures that the macro will still run within 1-2-3.

If Corel Quattro Pro encounters a macro command it cannot understand, or that is not supported, an error message appears.

Related Topics

More Info


About Debugging Macros

Debugging is the process of isolating and fixing problems in a macro. Corel Quattro Pro contains a powerful utility for debugging macros. With the debugger, you can

run macros in slow motion (step by step), pausing as long as you want between steps

set breakpoints to pause a macro when it reaches a given cell or satisfies a given condition

run macros at full speed until reaching a breakpoint, then either continue in slow motion or at full speed until the next breakpoint

monitor, or trace, changes to specific cells as a macro runs

Isolating a problem in a long macro is not simple at regular speed. For this reason, the debugger uses a special mode called Debug. In Debug mode, Corel Quattro Pro runs a macro step by step, pausing for a signal from the mouse or keyboard before going on to the next step. This way, you can monitor each phase of the macro.

To run a macro in Debug mode

To set a standard breakpoint in a macro

To set a conditional breakpoint in a macro

To clear trace cells and macro breakpoints

To set a trace cell for a macro

To edit macro cells from the debug window

To exit Debug mode

Related Concepts


To run a macro in Debug mode
To run a macro in Debug mode,

1	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Debugger.

2	Run the macro to debug.

Tips

You can also activate Debug mode by pressing Shift+F2 or the Pause key.

You can step through a macro in Debug mode. To run the first command of the macro, click in the debug window or press the Spacebar. Clicking repeatedly steps through each macro command until an error is pinpointed. To run the rest of the macro at full speed, click Go or press Enter.

Related Topics

More Info


Debug window
The Debug Window

When running a macro in Debug mode, a debug window appears in the bottom half of the screen. The first cell of the macro appears in the middle of the debug window, and [image] appears on the Application Bar.

The debug window is divided into two sections:

The top (macro) section contains at most three rows. The middle row displays the macro cell running. The top row displays the previous macro cell, if any, and the third row displays the next macro cell, if any. The macro command about to run is highlighted.

The bottom (trace) section displays the contents of trace cells specified using Trace, and it shows how the macro affects them.

The debug menu

The menu bar at the top of the debug window shows the following debug commands:

Command	Description

Breakpoints	Lets you specify up to four cells or selections where you want to pause the macro.

Conditional	Lets you specify up to four cells that contain logical formulas, such as +A3=10; when the formula becomes true, the macro returns to running step-by-step.

Trace	Lets you specify up to four cells whose contents you want to monitor while a macro is being debugged.

Edit	Lets you change the macro you are debugging without leaving debug mode.

Go	Runs the macro until it reaches a breakpoint or finishes.

Terminate	Stops the macro and removes the debug window from the screen (this is the same as pressing Ctrl+Break).

Reset	Removes breakpoints and trace cells set with the Breakpoints, Conditional, and Trace commands.

Related Concepts


About Macro Breakpoints

If you know that most of a macro is correct, you can use breakpoints to run parts of a macro at full speed and then enter Debug mode. Standard breakpoints pause the macro when the breakpoint cell is reached. Conditional breakpoints pause the macro when the result of a logical formula in the conditional breakpoint cell is true. Up to four standard breakpoints and four conditional breakpoints can be set at one time.

Standard breakpoints

When debugging a macro containing a standard breakpoint, Corel Quattro Pro runs the macro at full speed until it reaches a breakpoint, then pauses the macro. To resume stepping through the macro, click in the debug window; to continue at full speed until the next breakpoint or the end of the macro, click Go.

Tip

If there are several macro commands in the breakpoint cell, you may need to click Go more than once to make the macro run at full speed.

Breakpoints in action

The following macro includes a loop that continuously increments a single cell called COUNTER.

counter	0

is_done	+COUNTER>=100

\m	{LET counter,0}

again	{; increment counter}

{LET counter,counter+1}~

{BRANCH again}

If you specify the cell containing {BRANCH again} as the first breakpoint and leave the pass count at 1, the macro stops at the {BRANCH} command each time it goes through the loop. When you click Go, it continues, incrementing the counter cell by one. In the top of the debug window, the selector highlights the {BRANCH} command, indicating that it is the next command.

If you specified a pass count of 5 for the first breakpoint in this example, then every time you click Go, five loops occur, and the counter increments from 0 to 5 to 10 and so on.

Conditional breakpoints

Conditional breakpoints stop the macro when the result of a logical formula becomes true. In the previous figure, the cell is_done contains a logical formula. (The cell containing the formula is formatted so that the formula, rather than the value calculated, appears.) Is_done is false (has a value of 0) until 100 or more loops occur. If this cell is specified as a conditional cell, the macro pauses when the counter reaches 100.

You can set up to four conditional breakpoints per notebook. Conditional breakpoints can be extremely valuable. Suppose you have a macro loop that does some date calculations and you want it to pause whenever December is reached. If the date is in cell A5, assign the first conditional breakpoint to a cell containing the following formula:

@MONTH(A5)=12

As long as the formula in the condition cell is true (has a value of 1), the macro runs in step-by-step mode. Once the formula is false (has a value of 0), click Go to let the macro continue until the next conditional formula evaluates as true. This process repeats until all conditional breakpoints are passed.

Clearing trace cells and breakpoints

To remove all breakpoints (standard and conditional) and trace cells set for the notebook, click Reset from the debug window. You can remove a standard breakpoint by setting its pass count to 0.

To set a standard breakpoint in a macro

To set a conditional breakpoint in a macro

To clear trace cells and macro breakpoints

Related Concepts


To set a standard breakpoint in a macro
To set a standard breakpoint in a macro,

1	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Debugger.

2	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Play to run a macro to debug. Select the macro name or the location and click OK.

3	In the debug window, click Breakpoints. Corel Quattro Pro displays four breakpoints.

4	Choose the breakpoint to set.

5	Choose Location and specify the cell or cells where you want the macro to stop. If you specify cells, Corel Quattro Pro uses its first cell.

6	Sometimes a problem appears after many repetitions of the same commands in a loop macro. If this is the case, you can set a pass count to indicate how many times to pass through the breakpoint before stopping. Choose Pass Count and specify the number of passes. The default, 1, tells Corel Quattro Pro to stop every time it passes through the breakpoint. Setting it to 2 makes Corel Quattro Pro stop every other pass. Click OK to set the breakpoint and return to the debug window.

To set additional breakpoints, repeat steps 3 through 6.

Related Topics

More Info


To set a conditional breakpoint in a macro
To set a conditional breakpoint in a macro,

1	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Debugger.

2	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Play to run a macro to debug. Select the macro name or the location and click OK.

3	In the debug window, click Conditional to display a menu of conditional breakpoints.

4	Choose the conditional breakpoint to set.

5	Specify the cell containing the condition.

Repeat steps 3 through 5 to set additional conditional breakpoints.

Related Topics

More Info


To clear trace cells and macro breakpoints
To clear trace cells and macro breakpoints,

Click Reset from the debug window. You can remove a standard breakpoint by setting its pass count to 0.

Related Topics

More Info


About Trace Cells

Macros often affect the contents of one or more cells. By tracing these cells, you can see what the macro is doing. Corel Quattro Pro lets you specify up to four trace cells, whose addresses and current values show during debugging in the debug window. Corel Quattro Pro updates the debug window as the contents of the trace cells change.

To set a trace cell for a macro

To clear trace cells and macro breakpoints

Related Concepts


To set a trace cell for a macro
To set a trace cell for a macro,

1	Click Trace from the debug window.

2	Choose the trace cell to set (1st Cell through 4th Cell).

3	Specify the cell to trace and click OK to set the trace cell and return to the debug window.

To specify additional trace cells, repeat these steps.

Related Topics

More Info


To edit macro cells from the debug window
To edit macro cells from the Debug window,

1	Click Edit from the debug window.

2	Point to or enter the address of the cell to edit using Cell.

3	Edit the contents that display in Content.

Related Topics


To exit Debug mode
To exit Debug mode,

Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Debugger.

Tips

You can also exit Debug mode by pressing Shift+F2 or the Pause key.

To stop a macro before debugging finishes, click Terminate from the debug window or press Ctrl+Break. Then you can debug another macro or exit Debug mode.

When the debug window displays, part of the notebook is covered. You can move the debug window to see the data it covers.

Related Topics

More Info


About Creating Maps

When you need to find the best route to your destination, or want to know where news events are occurring around the world, you turn to a map. With Corel Quattro Pro you can also create maps that display data, using colors or patterns to distinguish regions from each other, along with labels or symbols to mark points on the map.

Maps present data in a familiar form, where it is easy to see differences between regions; maps may also expose trends in adjoining regions that would be hidden in a spreadsheet table or a numeric chart.

You create maps just as you create numeric charts. Corel Quattro Pro automatically selects the most appropriate map from those available, then assigns colors or patterns to each region. You can also customize maps and include them in a slide show, just as you would with charts.

Maps appear in the same places in Corel Quattro Pro as charts: as a map on a notebook sheet, in a separate chart window, or as an icon on the Objects sheet.

Note:	Maps are available only if you have done a custom installation, and selected the Mapping component in Corel Quattro Pro.

Tip

If you print a color map on a monochrome printer, the colors will be replaced by shades of gray.

To create a map on a notebook sheet

To create a map in a window

To change map data

To add overlays to a map

To add map titles

To zoom a map

Related Concepts


Ways to Create a Map

There are three basic methods for creating a map, just as there are for charts. You can

Use the Map Expert to create a map directly on the spreadsheet (a floating map), or in a chart window. To use the Map Expert, click Insert [image] Graphics [image] Map.

Right-click any toolbar, click Experts and Numeric Tools Toolbar, then click [image] to create a map on a notebook sheet.

To create a map on a notebook sheet

To create a map in a window

Related Concepts


To create a map on a notebook sheet
To create a map on a notebook sheet,

1	Select cells containing map data (click here [image] for details). Make sure the first cell contains the first map region name.

2	Right-click any toolbar, click Experts and Numeric Tools Toolbar, click [image], then drag to create the map.

Corel Quattro Pro selects a map that is appropriate for your data and displays it in a chart window, where you can edit the map.

Tips

You can also create a map and set more options by clicking Insert [image] Graphics [image] Map.

Click a chart, click Chart [image] Map, then select an option to edit the map in the chart window.

Related Topics

More Info


To create a map in a window
To create a map in a window,

1	Select cells containing map data. Make sure the first cell contains the first map region name. Click here [image] for details.

2	Click Insert [image] Graphics [image] Map, then follow the prompts.

Related Topics

More Info


Setting Up Map Data

You can plot only geographical data in a map. Usable map data is typically stored in a spreadsheet or database, and must include recognizable location names or IDs.

Some examples of geographical data are the population in each prefecture in Japan, the number of automobiles in each California county, or product sales by state in Australia.

Before you can display data in a map, you first need to arrange the data so Corel Quattro Pro can interpret it, or select the data in the required sequence. The next table shows the sequence of data for a basic map:

Column A (Region Name)	Column B (Color Data)	Column C (Pattern Data)	Column D (Pin Location_	Column E (Pin Name)
Utah	23.9	13	Provo	Provo
CA	123.9	2.2	San Jose	San Jose
Column A contains region names or IDs. You can list country names in full (United Kingdom, France, Germany, and so on), or you can list standard abbreviations (GB, FR, DE). You can also use standard region IDs such as postal codes if you have installed maps of those regions.

Column B contains color data associated with each region name. Variations in this set of data are displayed as different colors in the map. Color data may be either numbers or text.

Column C contains pattern data associated with each region name. Variations in this second set of data are displayed as different patterns in the map. Pattern data may be either numbers or text.

Column D contains the pin location.

Column E contains the pin name.

When you create a map from data, Corel Quattro Pro always looks for regions in the first column, color data in the second column, pattern data in the third column, pin location in the fourth column, and pin name in the fifth column.

Map data is easier to select when it is arranged in adjacent columns. If your notebook has blank columns or columns containing other data between your map data columns, you need to exclude those columns from your selection. You can do this by pressing the Ctrl key then selecting each column of data you want to plot.

Results with different map data

The following table shows the type of map you get with different data selections:

If you select:	The resulting map has:
Regions only	Region boundaries but no colors or patterns
Regions and color data	Regions colored according to range of data
Regions, color, and pattern data	Regions colored and patterned according to ranges of data
Tip

If you want to create a map with patterns but no colors, leave the second column blank, or remove the color data from the map afterwards. Click here [image] for details.

Related Concepts


Map Data Guidelines

When setting up map data, keep the following rules in mind:

Corel Quattro Pro can recognize regions belonging to installed maps only. For example, if you have data from states in India, Corel Quattro Pro will not recognize those states as part of India without installing the map India by State.

All region names to be used in a map must be of the same type. For example, you cannot use France, Germany, and Sicily as region names in the same map, as Sicily is a part of Italy, and not a nation. If you replaced Sicily with Italy, however, you could display your data in a map of Western Europe.

You can automatically mark points on your map if you include location coordinates along with your data. Click here [image] for details.

Related Concepts


Checking Region Names

If Corel Quattro Pro recognizes enough region names to determine which map to display, but cannot interpret all of your region names, the Check Regions dialog box appears. You can use this dialog box to:

Replace each unknown name in your notebook with standard region name or abbreviation. For example, you could replace "Oz" with "Australia".

Ignore the data associated with the unknown region name.

Related Concepts


Map Edits You Can Make

Once a map is created, you can customize it in many ways. Some of these ways are unique to maps, while others are shared with charts.

To edit a map in window, click Chart [image] Map, then select the options you want. To edit a map in a notebook sheet, click the map (make sure the hash border appears around the map), then use the options from the Chart menu.

To change map data

To add overlays to a map

To add map titles

To zoom a map

To change map properties

To set map redraw options

To display pin labels but no pin symbols in maps

To display pin symbols with no pin labels in maps

To change map legend properties

To change the map name

To change map properties

To add objects to maps

To insert a map on a notebook sheet

Tip

You can also right-click the map to bring up editing options.


To change map data
To change map data,

1	In a notebook sheet, click a map (make sure a hash border appears around the map).

2	Click Chart [image] Map [image] Data.

3	To add data, click [image] to the right of the Color Data or Pattern Data edit fields, then select the data you want to appear in your map.

4	To remove data, select the contents of the color or pattern data edit field and press the Delete key.

5	Click OK. The map redraws and displays your changes.

Tip

You can also right-click the map to bring up editing options.

From the Objects Sheet (click View [image] Objects), double click the map object to edit it.

Related Topics


About Map Overlays

A map consists of one or more overlays with or without spreadsheet data. For example, a map of the U.S. usually shows state borders, but may also show highways, or the location of major cities. Each of these sets of boundaries or locations is called an overlay, because they can be laid on top of each other, like overhead transparencies or sheets of tracing paper.

Tips

Every time you add an overlay to a map, the map becomes more complex. Use overlays conservatively so that your maps are easy to read.

If you add an overlay from a different geographic location, you will need to zoom out before you can see the new overlay in the map.

To add overlays to a map

Related Concepts


To add overlays to a map
To add overlays to a map,

1	In a notebook sheet, click a map to edit it. In the Object View, double-click a map object to edit it.

2	Click Chart [image] Map [image] Data.

3	Click the Add Overlay button.

4	Click a tab for the type of overlay you want to add: Region, Static, or Pin.

5	Depending on which type of overlay you selected, click one of the topics below for more information:

Tip

Every time you add an overlay to a map the map becomes more complex. Use overlays conservatively so that your maps are easy to read. To remove an overlay from your map, select the overlay and click the Delete Overlay button.

Adding region overlays

Adding static overlays

Adding pin overlays


Types of Map Overlays

There are three types of overlays you can add to a map; the Add Overlays dialog box includes a separate tab for each type:

Region overlays show boundaries, such as states or districts. A basic map consists of one region overlay. You can link color or pattern data to region overlays.

Static overlays show other features, such as highways or the world grid. You cannot alter the content of a static overlay.

Pin overlays show points, such as cities or corporate offices. The term pin comes from the tack-board pins used to mark wall maps. Unlike static overlays, pin overlays are dynamically linked to location coordinates in Corel Quattro Pro notebooks, so you can select the points you want to display and mark them with symbols or labels.

After you select the overlay you want to include in your map, you return to the Map Data dialog box, which displays the name of the new overlay in the Overlay list box. The fields in the dialog box also change to reflect your current overlay selection.

Tip

If you want to use data from a different file or notebook, copy the data to your working notebook or open the file before you add an overlay to your map. When the Map Data dialog box is displayed, you can switch between open notebooks, but you cannot open any other files.

Related Concepts


Adding Region Overlays

After you select a region overlay, the Map Data dialog box displays the name of the new overlay along with three fields: Region Name, Color Data, and Pattern Data. If you want to associate color or pattern data with the regions in the new overlay, you need to select region names or IDs along with your color and/or pattern data. If you leave all three fields blank, Corel Quattro Pro will add only the overlay's region boundaries to your map.

If you add a region overlay to a map that already contains color data but no pattern data, you can display pattern data in the regions defined within the new overlay. Conversely, you can add color data to your overlay if the original map has only pattern data.

You can display the same type of data as colors or patterns across more than one overlay if (1) the data has the same type and increment and (2) the regions in each overlay do not overlap. For example, you can add an overlay of Canada by province with population data to a map of the USA showing population by state, as long as both sets of population data have the same increment, such as population in thousands. You cannot, however, mix Canadian employment data with USA population data, unless you display one in colors and the other in patterns.

Related Concepts


Adding Static Overlays

After you select a static overlay, the Map Data dialog box lists the name of the new overlay without any additional fields. Unlike other types of overlays, static overlays do not require any notebook data. Static overlays will display correctly only if they are appropriate for the current map. For example, a static overlay of U.S. highways is of no use in a map of Japan.

Related Concepts


Adding Pin Overlays

You can mark any location on a map using names or coordinates. If you enter names of U.S. state capitals, world capitals, or world major cities, Corel Quattro Pro can mark those on the map. To enter any other location, you can enter the latitude and longitude coordinates.

When Creating a Map

If you have entered names or IDs of major cities in a notebook, you can add dots (pins) at those cities in the map.

In the Mark Points on Your Map dialog,

1	Click [image] to the right of Pin Names or IDs, then select the names or IDs that identify the cities.

2	To display labels next to the dots, click [image] to the right of Pin labels, then select the labels.

When Editing a Map

If you have entered location names or latitude/longitude coordinates in your notebook, you can add dots (pins) at those locations on the map.

Using Pin Names or IDs

1	Right-click the map, then click Data.

2	Click Use Pin Names,  then select one of the predefined overlays.

3	Click [image] to the right of Pin Names or IDs, select the names or IDs that identify the cities, then press Enter.

4	To display the Pin names next to the dots, click Use pin names as labels. Or to display different labels, click [image] to the right of Pin labels, select the labels, then press Enter.

Using Lat./Long Coordinates

1	Right-click the map, then click Data.

2	Click Use Lat./Long, then enter a custom name for the overlay.

3	Click [image] to the right of Latitude Cells, then select the latitudes for all locations.

4	Click [image] to the right of Longitude Cells, then select the longitude for all locations.

5	To display labels next to the dots, click [image] to the right of Pin labels, then select the labels.

Tips

You can change the symbol that appears at the location and the label font.

Latitude and longitude must be expressed in decimals. See Converting Latitude and Longitude to Decimals for details.

You can include pin data when you first create a map. See Automatically Mapping Pin Data for details.

If you purchase additional overlays of U.S. ZIP codes or equivalent postal codes from other countries, you can use these codes as both region IDs and as pin names. As region IDs, they identify boundaries; as pin names, they specify the approximate center of the postal region.

Related Concepts


Converting Latitude and Longitude to Decimals

Latitude is usually expressed as degrees, minutes, and seconds north or south of the equator. Longitude is usually expressed as degrees, minutes, and seconds east or west of the prime meridian that runs through Greenwich, England. Before Corel Quattro Pro can interpret Latitude and Longitude coordinates, they must first be converted to decimals.

The simplest way to convert coordinates to decimals is to use the @LLDEC function to create a new series. The resulting coordinates are preceded by a minus sign if they are south of the equator or west of the prime meridian. For example, the longitude coordinate 38⋅20’40”W converts to -38.334444.

Related Concepts


Automatically Mapping Pin Data

If you include pin data in your selection when you first create a map, Corel Quattro Pro will automatically add a pin overlay. The order in which you arrange or select the data depends on the type of pin data you are using. The following tables show the correct sequence for pin name series and for Latitude and Longitude series.

Pin Name Data Sequence

A	B	C	D	E
Region	Color data	Pattern data	Pin name	Pin label

Latitude and Longitude Data Sequence

A	B	C	D	E	F
Region	Color data	Pattern data	Latitude	Longitude	Pin label
Related Concepts


To add map titles
To add map titles,

1	If the map appears on a notebook sheet, click a map to edit it. If you don't see the map, click View [image] Objects, then double-click the map to edit it.

2	Click Chart [image] Map [image] Titles.

3	Enter text in the appropriate edit fields.

Tips

You can also edit the main title and subtitle text directly on the map.

If you want to delete a title or subtitle, use Chart [image] Map [image] Titles to remove the title box along with the title.

To add a title to the Map Legend, click the map, right-click the legend, then click the Properties option.

Related Topics


To zoom a map
To zoom a map,

1	In a notebook sheet, click a map to edit it. If you don't see the map, click View [image] Objects, then double-click the map object to edit it.

2	Click View [image] Zoom, click a Zoom command, then click the map:

Zoom to Normal returns the map to its original magnification.

Zoom In lets you expand a section of the map to fill the map window. After you click Zoom In, the pointer changes to a magnifying glass. Click and drag the pointer to select the section of the map you want to magnify.

Zoom Out reduces the magnification by a factor of two.

Center lets you make a different point the center of the map window without changing magnification. After you click Center, the pointer changes to cross-hairs. Click the point you want to become the new center.

Tip

The fastest way to zoom in and out on a map is to right-click the area you want to zoom, then select the Zoom command you need from the QuickMenu.

Related Topics


To change map properties
To change map properties,

1	Right-click the map to display a QuickMenu, then click the Properties command.

Related Topics


To set map redraw options
To set map redraw options,

1	In a notebook sheet, click a map to edit it. If you don't see the map, click View [image] Objects, then double-click the map object to edit it.

2	Click Chart [image] Map [image] Redraw Options.

3	Click Manual or Automatic.

Tip

When you set the Map Redraw property to Manual, the map redraws only when you use the Chart [image] Map [image] Redraw Options command or when you open it or view it with Chart [image] View Chart.

Related Topics


About Changing Pin Symbols and Labels

When you create a map with pin names or latitude and longitude coordinates, Corel Quattro Pro displays the default symbol xx at each of the locations. Use the Pin Symbol property to choose a different symbol or to change the symbol's size and appearance.

To display pin labels but no pin symbols in maps

To display pin symbols with no pin labels in maps

Related Concepts


To display pin labels but no pin symbols in maps
To display pin labels but no pin symbols in maps,

1	Right click the map, then click Map Properties.

2	Click the Pin Symbol tab.

3	Click Display Pin Labels (if unchecked), then click Display Pin Symbol to uncheck it.

Tips

Pin labels will appear in your map only if you select them along with your pin names or latitude and longitude coordinates. If you do not include the labels in your selection, pin locations will be marked with a symbol or left blank, depending on the Display Pin Symbol setting.

The Map Font property lets you change the font type, size, and style for pin labels.

Related Topics

More Info


To display pin symbols with no pin labels in maps
To display pin symbols with no pin labels in maps,

1	Right click the map, then click Map Properties.

2	Click the Pin Symbol tab.

3	Click Display Pin Symbol if it is unchecked, select a symbol, then click Display Pin Labels to uncheck it.

Related Topics

More Info


To change map legend properties
To change map legend properties,

1	In a notebook sheet, click a map to edit it. If you don't see the map, click View [image] Objects, then double-click the map object to edit it.

2	Click Chart [image] Map [image] Legend.

3	Click the Title tab, then specify the text, font, and color of the legend title.

4	Click the Color tab to change the color used for a region.

5	Click the Pattern tab to change the pattern used for a region.

6	Click the Font, Fill Settings, and Border Settings tabs and set options to change the appearance of the legend.

Related Topics

More Info


How Map Legends Work

When you create a map with data, Corel Quattro Pro calculates the full range of map data and assigns each map region one of six colors or patterns depending on where that region lies in the data range. The map legend explains the range of data associated with each color or pattern. Each color or pattern and its associated range of values is called a bin.

For example, the color red might represent values ranging from 0 to 500, the color blue might represent values of 500 to 1000, and so on. In this case, a region with a value of 375 would be colored red, whereas a region with a value of 725 would be colored blue.

A map can contain only six colors and six patterns, but you can display data for many regions at once by assigning multiple regions to one of the available colors or patterns.

NOTE: Unless you change bin ranges manually, the upper range of the first bin is always greater than the lowest value or group of values, while the upper range of the last bin is always greater than the highest value in the map data series.

You can use the Map Legend Properties to override Corel Quattro Pro's bin assignments.

To change map legend properties

Related Concepts


Changing Map Legend Colors and Patterns

The Map Legend Colors tab lets you hide or display the color data legend, change the color and range of values for each color bin, and add descriptive text next to each color bin. You can use this property to change the color in a specific region by:

Changing the color of the region's bin, or

Changing the range of values in the region's bin so the region moves to another bin (either up or down).

You can also exclude color data from some regions by requiring exact matches with bin values. Bin values may be either numbers or text.

Like the Colors property, the Map Legend Patterns property lets you hide or display the pattern data legend, change the patterns and range of values for each pattern bin, and add descriptive text next to each pattern bin.

To change map legend properties

Related Concepts


Changing the Position of the Map Legend

The Map Legend Position tab lets you change the position of the map legend. You can place the legend on the right of the map, below the map, or hide the legend from view. When you place the legend on the right of the map, legend bins are arranged vertically. When you place the legend below the map, bins are arranged horizontally.

Once you display a legend, you can drag it to any position.

To change map legend properties

Related Topics


Changing the Appearance of the Map Legend

Three other properties let you change the appearance of the map legend:

The Map Legend Font tab lets you change the font type, size, and style for the legend’s descriptive text.

The Map Legend Fill Settings tab lets you fill the legend box with a background of different colors and patterns. This property does not affect the colors and patterns of your map.

The Map Legend Border Settings tab lets you specify the thickness and color of the border around the legend.

To change map legend properties

Related Topics


What is a Menu?

A menu is a collection of onscreen lists that manipulate an application. Each list contains menu items the user can choose to perform commands (such as saving a file) or display other menus (called submenus or cascading menus). Here are some terms associated with menus:

menu bar is a line at the top of the application window that displays menu commands.

menu is an onscreen list of items the user manipulates to communicate with the program.

menu command is an item on a menu the user can choose to perform actions (such as displaying a dialog box, saving a file, or displaying another menu).

menu path is the sequence of menu commands chosen to perform an action or display a dialog box. To enter menu paths in a macro command, enter the sequence of menu commands separated by forward slashes. For example, /File/Save As.

dimmed describes a menu command that shows in a lighter color (usually gray instead of black) and is not selectable. Also known as an unavailable or grayed menu command.

divider line is a horizontal line in a menu that separates groups of menu commands.

hint is a line of text appearing on the title bar to provide help when a menu command is highlighted.

link command is an action performed by a menu command when chosen.

shortcut key is a keystroke listed to the right of a menu command's name that the user can press to choose it. Also known as an accelerator.

underlined letter is an underlined character in a menu command's name. The user can press this letter to choose the menu command (if its menu is displayed). Also known as a mnemonic.

Corel Quattro Pro includes the file QUIKSAVE.WB3 in the SUITE8\SAMPLES folder. This file contains a macro that replaces the standard File [image] Save command. Refer to QUIKSAVE.WB3 for examples of macros that customize Corel Quattro Pro menus.

Tip

You can use the macro commands {MENUBRANCH} and {MENUCALL} to produce pop-up menus that disappear once an item is selected.

Related Concepts


About Adding Menus to the Menu Bar

Changing the menu bar is a process of removing unneeded menus and menu commands with {DELETEMENU} and {DELETEMENUITEM} and then adding your own with {ADDMENU} and {ADDMENUITEM}. The macro _add_menu below uses {DELETEMENUITEM "/File/Save"} to remove the standard Save command from the File menu. The command {ADDMENU "/File/Save As",A1..G6}} adds the new Save command to the File menu ("/File/Save As" indicates that the menu is to be inserted above Save As on the File menu).

_add_menu	{DELETEMENUITEM  "/File/Save"}

{ADDMENU "/File/Save As",A1..G6}

{SETOBJECTPROPERTY "/File/Save.Depend_On","No,Yes,No,No,No,No"}

{SETOBJECTPROPERTY "/File/Save.Help_Line","Save the active notebook"}

{WindowHide}

{ADDMENU} uses a menu block to construct the menu added. The menu block contains labels that define the menu; the block Complete:A1..G6 in QUIKSAVE.WB3 is a menu block. The first row of the menu block contains the title of the menu to create. This title is preceded by MENU. In QUIKSAVE.WB3, MENU &Save specifies that the name of this menu is Save. Each row in the menu block (except for the first) defines one menu command using a command definition. Each cell within a command definition specifies one aspect of the command to add; every command definition is a row of six adjacent cells.

The first row of a menu block defines the menu command that displays the menu. Any command definitions that begin in the first column of the menu block display on this menu. In the sheet named Complete in QUIKSAVE.WB3, cell A1 defines the command that displays the menu as Save. The commands Replace and Backup (defined by the labels in row A2..F2 and A3..F3) are on the Save menu because their definitions start in the same column as MENU &Save.

To make a command in the menu block display a menu, start the command definitions below it one column to its right. For example, in QUIKSAVE.WB3, starting the definitions of Same Directory, Backup Directory, and Options in the second column of the menu block has these results:

Makes Backup a command that displays a menu.

Places Same Directory, Backup Directory, and Options on the Backup menu.

Starting the command definition of Backup Directory in the third column would make Same Directory a menu containing the Backup Directory command.

To add a menu to the menu bar

To replace the menu bar

Related Concepts


To add a menu to the menu bar
To add a menu to the menu bar,

1	Create a macro using the {ADDMENU} or {ADDMENUITEM} commands to add new menus and commands. You can also remove standard Corel Quattro Pro menus using the {DELETEMENU} and {DELETEMENUITEM} commands.

2	If you use the {ADDMENU} command, specify a menu block (an area of the spreadsheet containing labels that define the menu).

3	Run the macro containing the {ADDMENU} and/or {ADDMENUITEM} commands.

Tips

The first row of the menu block contains the title of the menu to create. The title is preceded by the word MENU.

Each row of the menu block (except the first) contains these six settings which define the menu:

name of the command

link command or name of a macro to run

title bar hint

shortcut key

areas in which the command is active

whether the command is checked

Tip

You can add new menus to the menu bar on either side of the Edit and Tools menus only--that is, one position to the left or right of the Edit menu and one position to the left or right of the Tools menu. The area between these menu positions is reserved for menus that change depending on the active window. Likewise, you cannot delete menus within this menu area, either. You can add menu items to menus between the Edit and Tools menus, but the new menu items will be swapped out of the menu when the active window changes.

Related Topics

More Info


To replace the menu bar
To replace the menu bar,

Use the {SETMENUBAR} command, which specifies a menu block that replaces the standard menu bar. The command defined in the first row of the menu block is ignored.

Tip

To restore the original menu bar, use the macro command {SETMENUBAR} without an argument. If Corel Quattro Pro is in Developer mode, you can press Ctrl+Shift+N to restore the original menu bar.

Related Topics

More Info


About Menu Command Definitions

The following topics describe how to work with the six settings (cells) that make a command definition. Because many of these cells contain long labels, the sample file QUIKSAVE.WB3 breaks down the menu block setting-by-setting, starting with the notebook sheet Names. The sheet Complete shows the actual menu block used by the macro _add_menu.

Naming a menu command

Making menu commands act

Menu hints and help

Assigning a shortcut key

Dimming menu commands

Inserting check marks


Naming a Menu Command

The first cell of a command definition contains the name of the command. Its underlined letter is preceded by an ampersand (&). (The user can press this key to choose the command.) For example, entering &File makes the menu command name display as File in the menu. See the sheet named NAMES in QUIKSAVE.WB3 for examples.

You can use {SETOBJECTPROPERTY} to change a menu command's name after it is created.

Related Concepts


Making Menu Commands Act

The second cell of a command definition contains a link command--similar to those in dialog boxes--or the name of a macro to run when the menu command is chosen. See the sheet named LINKS in QUIKSAVE.WB3 for examples.

To run a macro stored in a notebook, enter MACRO MacroName into the cell, where MacroName is the name of the macro to run. For example, the menu command Backup Directory shown below uses the label MACRO [QUIKSAVE]floppy_backup to make the menu command run the macro floppy_backup when chosen.

A	B	C

1	MENU &SAVE

2	&Replace	ON Clicked DOMACRO {FileSave}

3	&Backup

4	&Same Directory	MACRO [QUIKSAVE]local_backup

5	&Backup Directory	MACRO [QUIKSAVE]floppy_backup

6	&Options...	MACRO [QUIKSAVE]set_options

Menu commands can display the dialog boxes in Corel Quattro Pro's normal menus using command equivalents. For example, the following link command makes the menu command behave like Edit [image] Copy Cells:

ON Clicked DOMACRO {BlockCopy?}

In menu commands, a link command is typed instead of specified with a dialog box (click here [image] for information on link commands in dialog boxes, which are created by Dialog [image] Set Links). A menu command's link command can detect the following events:

Event	Description

Clicked	The user chose the command from the menu.

Init	The menu containing the menu command is about to display.

Activate	The menu command has just been highlighted.

Deactivate	The menu command has just been unhighlighted.

You can attach multiple link commands to the same menu command; enclose the first command in quotation marks, and separate the link commands with commas in the cell. If you do not want to assign any actions to a menu command, leave the second cell of its definition blank.

The remainder of this section lists the syntax of link commands that you can enter into a menu block. In each link command, event is one of the events listed above, Object.ObjectProperty is a string identifying the object and property setting to change or read, and Property is the name of a property in the menu command. Click here [image] for more information on the syntax of Object.ObjectProperty and Property.

EXECUTE

Format: ON event EXECUTE Object.Action

Performs Action on Object when event occurs. Object is a dialog box or dialog control.

DOMACRO

Format: ON event DOMACRO MacroText

Runs the macro MacroText when event occurs. MacroText is a series of macro commands. The following link command saves the active notebook when the menu command is chosen:

ON Clicked DOMACRO {FileSave}

RECEIVE

Format: ON event RECEIVE Property FROM Object.ObjectProperty

Sets the menu command's Property property to Object's ObjectProperty when event occurs. ObjectProperty and Property do not have to be the same. The following link command enables the menu command whenever Tools [image] Macro is enabled:

ON Init RECEIVE Enabled FROM /Tools/Macro.Enabled

SEND

Format: ON event SEND Property TO Object.ObjectProperty

Sends the current setting of the menu command's Property property to Object's ObjectProperty when event occurs. ObjectProperty and Property do not have to be the same. The following link command stores the menu command's title in the current cell:

ON Clicked SEND Title TO Active_Block.Value

SET

Format: ON event SET Setting TO Object.ObjectProperty

Sets Object's ObjectProperty to Setting when event occurs. Setting is a value appropriate to the property (for example, Yes or Beveled Out). The following link command sets the active notebook's zoom factor to 150 percent:

ON Clicked SET 150 TO Active_Notebook.Zoom_Factor

Related Concepts


Menu Hints and Help

The third cell of a command definition contains a brief help message that displays on the title bar when the menu command is highlighted. Use these hints to make the menus easier to understand. See the sheet named HINTS in QUIKSAVE.WB3 (in the SAMPLES folder) for examples.

You can also use the third cell of a command definition to link the command to a Help topic in a Windows Help file that you have created. When the command is highlighted, press F1 to display the Help topic.

To link the command to Help, add a backslash after the hint message and type the WinHelp context string for the Help topic followed by an at-sign (@) and the name of the Help file. The name of the Help file cannot include a path; the file must be located in the Corel Quattro Pro directory. For example, the following hint links the Replace command to a Help topic with the context SAVE_REPLACE in the Help file QUIKSAVE.HLP:

Overwrite the notebook file on disk\SAVE_REPLACE@QUIKSAVE.HLP

For details on how to create Windows Help files, refer to the Microsoft Windows Software Development Kit (SDK).

Related Concepts


Assigning a Shortcut Key

The fourth cell of a command definition contains a shortcut key that the user can press to choose the command. If an item does not need a shortcut key, leave the fourth cell blank. See the sheet named HOTKEY in QUIKSAVE.WB3 for examples.

Separate each component of the keystroke with the plus sign (+). For example, if a shortcut key is comprised of Alt and the F2 key, enter it as Alt+F2. If a shortcut key is used by Corel Quattro Pro for some other operation, that operation occurs first.

You can assign shortcut keys to existing commands using {SETOBJECTPROPERTY}.

Related Concepts


Dimming Menu Commands

The fifth cell of a command definition specifies the areas of Corel Quattro Pro in which the menu command is available. Enter Yes or No for each area, separated by commas, in the following order: Desktop, Notebook, Chart window, Dialog window, Input line, Objects sheet. The string must be enclosed in quotes. A menu command dims when it is not available and the user cannot select it. To make a command available in all areas, leave this cell of the definition blank. See the sheet named DEPENDENCIES in QUIKSAVE.WB3 for examples. The new Save menu in QUIKSAVE.WB3 is available only when a notebook window is active.

You can also disable an existing menu command with {SETOBJECTPROPERTY}.

Related Concepts


Inserting Check Marks

The sixth cell of a command definition contains Yes if the menu command should appear checked when it is displayed. If this cell is blank (or contains No), the item displays unchecked. You can check or uncheck a menu command after its creation using {SETOBJECTPROPERTY}.

Related Concepts


To delete a menu
To delete a menu,

1	Use the {DELETEMENU} command or hide the menu using the {SETOBJECTPROPERTY} command.

Examples

The following macro removes the Tools menu:

{DELETEMENU "/Tools"}

{SETOBJECTPROPERTY "/Tools.Hidden","Yes"}

Tip

You cannot delete menus on either side of the Edit and Tools menus--that is, one position to the left or right of the Edit menu and one position to the left or right of the Tools menu. The area between these menu positions is reserved for menus that change depending on the active window.

Related Topics


To add a menu command
To add a menu command,

1	Create a macro using the {ADDMENUITEM} command.

2	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Play to run the {ADDMENUITEM} macro.

Tips

The six arguments for the {ADDMENUITEM} command contain these settings:

name of the command

link command or name of a macro to run

title bar hint

shortcut key

areas in which the command is active

whether the command is checked.

You can add new menus to the menu bar on either side of the Edit and Tools menus only--that is, one position to the left or right of the Edit menu and one position to the left or right of the Tools menu. The area between these menu positions is reserved for menus that change depending on the active window. You can add menu items to menus between the Edit and Tools menus, but the new menu items will be swapped out of the menu when the active window changes.

Related Topics


To delete a menu command
To delete a menu command,

1	Use the {DELETEMENUITEM} command to delete a single menu command, or to hide the menu command using the {SETOBJECTPROPERTY} command.

Examples

The following macro removes the Tile command:

{DELETEMENUITEM "/Window/Tile"}

{SETOBJECTPROPERTY "/Window/Tile.Hidden","Yes"}

Tips

{DELETEMENUITEM} removes only menu commands that do not display a menu; use {DELETEMENU} to remove menus.

You can add and delete menu items from any menu, but if you change a context-sensitive menu (all menus between Edit and Tools on the menu bar), the change applies only to the menu in the active window.

Related Topics


To insert a divider line in a menu block
To insert a divider line in a menu block,

1	Insert a row between the definitions of the two menu commands you want to divide.

2	In this row (and in the same column as the names of the command being divided), enter eight hyphens (-) as a label.

Tip

You can also add divider lines with {ADDMENUITEM}. For example, to place a divider line before Update Links in the Notebook menu, use

{ADDMENUITEM "/Notebook/Update Links","--------"}


Changing Command Properties

Each command on the menu bar has properties you can manipulate. To identify a menu command in @PROPERTY or to identify a macro command, enter the menu path separated by forward slashes (/). Do not include ellipses (...). For example, the following formula returns whether Edit [image] Paste Special is dimmed on the menu:

@PROPERTY("/Edit/Paste Special.Grayed")

Each menu command has the following properties:

Title is set to the name of the menu command; the command's underlined letter is preceded by an ampersand (&). Use this property to rename a command or change its underlined letter. For example, the following command changes the underlined letter of File to i:

{SETOBJECTPROPERTY "/File.Title","F&ile"}

Checked is set to Yes when a check mark is displayed by the command. Use this property to check and uncheck menu commands. For example, the following command checks Edit [image] Copy:

{SETOBJECTPROPERTY "/Edit/Copy.Checked","Yes"}

HotKey is set to the shortcut key that you want to invoke the command with. For example, the following macro assigns Shift+F11 to File [image] Save:

{SETOBJECTPROPERTY "/File/Save.HotKey","Shift+F11"}

Help line is set to the hint that appears on the title bar. For example, the following command removes the hint from File [image] Save:

{SETOBJECTPROPERTY "/File/Save.Help_Line",""}

Depend On is set to the areas in which the menu command is available, using the same syntax as dependencies in a menu block (click here [image] for details). For example, the following command makes File [image] Close available everywhere except the desktop:

{SETOBJECTPROPERTY "/File/Close.Depend_On", "No,Yes,Yes,Yes,Yes,Yes"}

Grayed is set to Yes to dim the menu command and disable it. For example, the following command dims File [image] Save:

{SETOBJECTPROPERTY "/File/Save.Grayed","Yes"}

Enabled is set to No to disable a menu command without dimming it. For example, the following command enables File [image] Save:

{SETOBJECTPROPERTY "/File/Save.Enabled","Yes"}

Disabled behaves like Enabled, but it is set to No to enable the menu command and Yes to disable it.

Hidden is set to Yes to hide the menu command. For example, the following command hides Tools [image] Numeric Tools:

{SETOBJECTPROPERTY "/Tools/Numeric Tools.Hidden","Yes"}

Show is the same as Hidden, but it is set to No to hide the menu command and Yes to display it.

To identify menu command properties

To change menu command properties


To identify menu command properties
To identify menu command properties,

Use an @PROPERTY formula specifying the menu command and the property you want to identify.

Example

The following formula returns whether Edit [image] Paste Special is dimmed.

@PROPERTY("/Edit/Paste Special.Grayed")

Tips

Enter the menu path separated by forward slashes (/). Do not include ellipses (...).

Each menu command has the following properties:

Title

Checked

HotKey

Help line

Depend On

Grayed

Enabled

Disabled

Hidden

Show

Related Topics

More Info


To change menu command properties
To change menu command properties,

Use the {SETOBJECTPROPERTY} command to change a menu command property.

Related Topics

More Info


Menu Design Tips

Here are some design guidelines for creating a menu:

Keep menus short. Users lose track after about eight menu commands. Use submenus to put more commands in a menu.

Do not create too many levels of submenus. Count how many steps it takes to choose a command; keep it down to two or three.

Group menu commands logically. Keep related commands near each other (for example, do not put Save As in the Windows menu when Save is in the File menu). If menu commands are often chosen in sequence, arrange them in the order you choose them, from the top down. Use divider lines to separate groups visually.

Put the most common menu commands at the top. Putting common menu commands at the top makes them easier to find.

Keep menu names short but understanble.

Try to make the first letters of menu commands unique. Then you can make the first letter of each menu command its underlined letter. This is easier for the user to remember.

Use ellipses (...) correctly. If a menu command leads to a dialog box, its text should end with an ellipsis. By Windows convention, an ellipsis means a dialog box follows, both in menu commands and in dialog boxes.

Only dim menu commands when appropriate. A menu command should be dimmed when it is irrelevant to what the user is currently doing. See the description of {SETOBJECTPROPERTY} for information on dimming menu commands.

Change File and Edit menus only when necessary. Windows users expect these menus to be consistent between applications.

Related Concepts


What Was New in Corel Quattro Pro 7

New file formats

Corel Quattro Pro can now translate files created by Corel Quattro Pro version 5.5 for DOS, 1-2-3 releases 4 and 5, Excel versions 5 and 7, and HTML version 3.

Parsing Text with the QuickColumns Expert

The new Data [image] QuickColumns Expert makes it easy to parse and arrange text in a block or from an imported file.

Fit-As-You-Go

The Fit-As-You-Go option assures that number values are shown and not displayed as asterisks, (*******). Like a label, a number can be longer than a cell is wide. With Fit-As-You-Go set, if the format you choose creates a number too wide for its column, the column automatically adjusts to fit the value.

A New Look

For easier use, Corel Quattro Pro has a new look. Menus are simplified and commands regrouped.

Mapping

Create geographical maps of regions (the world, countries, or states) that relate directly to your spreadsheet data. For example, you can create a map that shows sales data by country.

There is also a new Map Expert. Click Tools [image] Experts [image] Map.

Calc-As-You-Go

Calc-As-You-Go lets you quickly evaluate blocks of cells. Select.a block or blocks of cells, and you can see the sum, average, count, maximum value, and minimum value for those cells at the bottom-left of the screen.

QuickType

QuickType helps you enter labels and functions. As you type a label, the closest match from the column is displayed. If it is the text you want, just press Enter. As you type a function, the likeliest function is displayed.

More File Formats

Corel Quattro Pro can now import and export the following graphic types:  CDR (Corel Draw), CPT (Corel Photo Paint), JPG (JPEG Bitmap), TGA (Truevision Targa bitmap), and WMF (Windows Metafile).

Toolbar Designer

The new Toolbar Designer lets you edit Toolbars onscreen. You can drag buttons between Toolbars and drag Toolbars to other positions in the Corel Quattro Pro window.

Internet Support

Open files on the Internet. Link to Internet files in formulas. Open and save HTML version 3 documents. Use your Internet browser to view documents on the World Wide Web. Click Help [image] Help Online to access Corel's online support.

PerfectScript Macro Support

Play, record, and create PerfectScript macros.

QuickCorrect

Correct typos and spelling errors as you type text.

New @Functions

Corel Quattro Pro 7 has over 100 new @functions, including @TOTAL and @SUBTOTAL.

Ask The PerfectExpert

You can ask a question in your own words about Corel Quattro Pro. The PerfectExpert guides you to the appropriate help you need, including Guide Me Through It (step-by-step assistance), Experts, and Demos. To use this feature, click Help [image] Ask The PerfectExpert.

Notebook Templates

When you create a notebook with File [image] New, you can apply a notebook template to the file. Corel Quattro Pro 7 has several new templates for a range of financial tasks. You can also create your own custom templates.

Publish to Envoy

Click File [image] Publish to Envoy to convert the active notebook to an Envoy document.

New Macros

There are several new command equivalent macros.

Notes/FX Support

Notes/FX lets you embed a Corel Quattro Pro notebook in a Lotus Notes field and use it to exchange data between the applications.

Related Topics


Menu Command Changes in Corel Quattro Pro 7

Some Corel Quattro Pro 6.0 commands have moved to new menus in this version. Menus change depending on the active window. Choose a menu to view its changes:

File menu

Edit menu

View menu

Block menu

Notebook menu

Graphics menu

Slide Show menu

Dialog menu

Tools menu

Help menu

The Window menu is unchanged.

Note

Most command equivalent macro commands have not changed, except for macros for new features.

Related Topics


File Menu Changes in Corel Quattro Pro 7

Corel Quattro Pro 6.0	Corel Quattro Pro 7.0

File [image] Page Setup	File [image] Print [image] Page Setup

File [image] Print [image] Change Printer	File [image] Print [image] Select Printer

Related Topics


Edit Menu Changes in Corel Quattro Pro 7

Corel Quattro Pro 6.0	Corel Quattro Pro 7.0

Edit [image] Insert Break	Insert [image] Page Break

Edit [image] Insert Object	Insert [image] Object

Related Topics


View Menu Changes in Corel Quattro Pro 7

Corel Quattro Pro 6.0	Corel Quattro Pro 7.0

View [image] Panes	View [image] Split Window

Related Topics


Block Menu Changes in Corel Quattro Pro 7

The Block menu has been removed. Its commands are now on the Edit, Insert, Format, Data, and Tools menus. Block [image] Restrict Input has been removed in Corel Quattro Pro 7.0 for Windows.

Corel Quattro Pro 6.0	Corel Quattro Pro 7.0

Block [image] Copy	Edit [image] Copy Block

Block [image] Delete	Edit [image] Delete

Block [image] Fill	Data [image] Fill

Block [image] Insert	Insert [image] Block

Block [image] Move	Edit [image] Move Block

Block [image] Names	Insert [image] Block Names

Block [image] Reformat	Format [image] Text Reformat

Block [image] Sort	Data [image] Sort

Block [image] Transpose	Tools [image] Numeric Tools [image] Transpose

Block [image] Values	Data [image] Values

Related Topics


Notebook Menu Changes in Corel Quattro Pro 7

The Notebook menu has been removed. Its commands are now on the Edit, Insert, Format, and Data menus.

Corel Quattro Pro 6.0	Corel Quattro Pro 7.0

Notebook [image] Combine	Data [image] Combine Files

Notebook [image] Define Group	Insert [image] Group Name

Notebook [image] Define Series	Data [image] Define Fill Series

Notebook [image] Define Style	Format [image] Styles

Notebook [image] Extract	Data [image] Extract to File

Notebook [image] Insert	Insert [image] File

Notebook [image] Move Pages	Edit [image] Move Pages

Notebook [image] Parse	Data [image] Parse

Notebook [image] Text Import	Data [image] Text Import

Notebook [image] Update Links	Edit [image] Links

Related Topics


Graphics Menu Changes in Corel Quattro Pro 7

Some Graphics commands have been moved to the Chart menu, available in a Chart window.

Corel Quattro Pro 6.0	Corel Quattro Pro 7.0

Graphics [image] Delete Graph	Graphics [image] Delete Chart

Graphics [image] Edit Graph	Graphics [image] Edit Chart

Graphics [image] Graph Gallery	Chart [image] Gallery

Graphics [image] New Graph	Graphics [image] New Chart

Graphics [image] Run Slide Show	Graphics [image] Play Slide Show

Graphics [image] Series	Chart [image] Series

Graphics [image] Titles	Chart [image] Titles

Graphics [image] Type	Chart [image] Type/Layout

Graphics [image] View Graph	Graphics [image] View Chart

Related Topics


Slide Show Menu Changes in Corel Quattro Pro 7

Corel Quattro Pro 6.0	Corel Quattro Pro 7.0

Slides [image] Insert Slide	Slides [image] New Slide

Slides [image] Run Slide Show	Slides [image] Play Slide Show

Related Topics


Dialog Menu Changes in Corel Quattro Pro 7

Toolbar commands have been moved to the View menu.

Corel Quattro Pro 6.0	Corel Quattro Pro 7.0

Dialog [image] New Toolbar	View [image] Toolbars [image] Add

Dialog [image] Open Toolbar	View [image] Toolbars [image] Show

Dialog [image] Save Toolbar	View [image] Toolbars [image] Add [image] Toolbar Name [image] OK

Dialog [image] Save Toolbar As	View [image] Toolbars [image] Add [image] Optional File Name [image] OK

Dialog [image] Close Toolbar	View [image] Toolbars [image] Hide

Related Topics


Tools Menu Changes in Corel Quattro Pro 7

Tools [image] Database Tools [image] Form has been removed in Corel Quattro Pro 7.0 for Windows.

The UI Builder is now called the Dialog Designer.

Align, Group, Ungroup, and Object Order commands have been moved to the Format menu.

Corel Quattro Pro 6.0 Tools	Corel Quattro Pro 7.0 Format
Align	Align, Position, and Space
Align [image] Resize To Same	Resize To Same
Group	Group (when a chart is active)
Ungroup	Ungroup (when a chart is active)
Object Order [image] Bring Forward	Object Order [image] Bring Forward
Object Order [image] Bring To Front	Object Order [image] Bring To Front
Object Order [image] Order Controls	Value Order [image] Set Now
Object Order [image] Order From	Value Order [image] Reorder from First
Object Order [image] Order Tab Controls	Tab Order [image] Set Now
Object Order [image] Order Tab From	Tab Order [image] Reorder from First
Object Order [image] Send Backward	Object Order [image] Send Backward
Object Order [image] Send To Back	Object Order [image] Send To Back

Database, Data Modeling, and Consolidator commands have been moved to the Data menu.

Corel Quattro Pro 6.0 Tools	Corel Quattro Pro 7.0 Data
Consolidator	Consolidate
Data Modeling Desktop	Data Modeling Desktop
Database Desktop	External Data [image] Database Desktop
Database Tools [image] Aliases	External Data [image] Aliases
Database Tools [image] Query	Notebook Query
Database Tools [image] Table Link	External Data [image] Table Link
Database Tools [image] Table Query	External Data [image] Table Query

Other Tools menu changes are:

Corel Quattro Pro 6.0	Corel Quattro Pro 7.0
Tools [image] Export Graphics	Chart [image] Export to File
Tools [image] Import Graphics	Insert [image] Image
Tools [image] Numeric Tools [image] Analysis Tools	Tools [image] Experts [image] Analysis
Related Topics


Help Menu Changes in Corel Quattro Pro 7

Experts commands have been moved to the Tools menu. Help [image] Experts [image] Performance has been removed in Corel Quattro Pro 7.0 for Windows.

Corel Quattro Pro 6.0	Corel Quattro Pro 7.0
Help [image] Experts [image] Analysis Tools	Tools [image] Experts [image] Analysis
Help [image] Experts [image] Budget	Tools [image] Experts [image] Budget
Help [image] Experts [image] Consolidate	Tools [image] Experts [image] Consolidate
Help [image] Experts [image] Graph	Tools [image] Experts [image] Chart
Help [image] Experts [image] Scenario	Tools [image] Experts [image] Scenario
Help [image] Experts [image] Slide Show	Tools [image] Experts [image] Slide Show
Help [image] Experts [image] What-If	Tools [image] Experts [image] What-If
Related Topics


Embedding and Linking with OLE and DDE

You can use data and objects from one application in a different application, either by embedding or linking. Linking and embedding work through two Windows features--OLE and DDE. This version of Corel Quattro Pro supports OLE 2.0 as a container (client) and server, so you can edit OLE objects in place and drag and drop objects across applications to move or copy them. Corel Quattro Pro also acts as a client and server for OLE 1.0 and DDE.

Several Corel Quattro Pro macros can help application developers initiate and conduct DDE exchanges, called conversations.

Application developers can use Corel Quattro Pro macro commands and other features to create and control OLE objects in other applications that support OLE automation as a client.

Related Concepts


OLE and DDE Terms and Concepts

OLE object

An OLE object is a notebook selection, text selection, chart, drawing or other document element that is inserted into a document (file) in another application by OLE embedding or linking, or DDE linking.

Server application

A server application is the application that provides, or is the source, of OLE or DDE objects inserted into another application.

Container application

A container application (or client) is the application that receives an OLE or DDE object provided by the server. Container applications are also called compound documents because they contain objects from other applications.

Related Concepts


Embedding Information

Embedding information is inserting actual data into a container application's file, usually by pasting it with Paste Special or using Insert Object. The embedded information is saved in the container’s data file. In contrast, when you link information, you insert only a reference to the information--the actual information remains in the server application. Corel Quattro Pro uses OLE to embed (and link) data, pictures, sound clips, video clips, and other objects.

When you embed data, it is fully contained in the container application. If you give someone else a disk containing the container file, the data is included. However, if changes are made to the original source file, the embedded data is not updated.

If the server application is installed on your system and supports in-place activation for editing, you can edit OLE 2.0 objects in place or in the server application. Embedded OLE 1.0 objects look similar, but when you double-click one, the whole server application loads for editing; in-place activation for editing is not available.

Why Choose Embedding

Choose embedding for information that is not likely to change, such as your company logo or a chart of last year's sales that uses final, unchanging figures. Or you might use embedding for data that does not need to be updated every time it changes. Because linked data updates when the source document changes, it is more convenient to use linking for information that needs to stay current. You might also want to choose embedding to ensure that data is stored with a certain type of object instead of in a source document.

Embedding and OLE Support

You can embed objects only from applications that support OLE, and you can embed Corel Quattro Pro objects only  in applications that can act as OLE containers.

Related Concepts


Linking Information

You can link information from one application to another. Linking does not insert the actual information--it inserts references to it. This enables links to be updated automatically whenever information changes. Unlike embedded objects, linked objects cannot be edited in place.

When to Link Objects

Choose linking (instead of embedding) for information that changes frequently, such as weekly sales figures. If linked files are open in both the container and server application, when you change data in the server application, the data in the container file is updated immediately. If the source data changes while the container is closed, the linked information is automatically updated as long as you checked Automatic Update when you created the link. Otherwise, you must update the linked information manually.

You might also want to link to a very large object such as a bitmap, especially if it is used several places in a notebook. This can help keep the container file size smaller because the object is stored in the source file, not the container.

When you link data, the information itself remains in the server application data file, even though a copy appears in the container.

OLE and DDE Links

You can create links using OLE or DDE. OLE links are similar to DDE links--with both a container and server application open, when you change linked information in the server application, it is updated in the container. But OLE links can be created from within the container object, not just copied there. You can update OLE links by starting the server application from within the container. The linked document is immediately opened for editing. To update DDE links, you must start the server application in the usual way, then open the linked document manually.

When you open a file that contains DDE links, Corel Quattro Pro checks whether all supporting DDE server applications are open. If not, the Hotlinks dialog box appears.

To update or change links for objects

Related Concepts


Creating and Using Objects and Links in Corel Quattro Pro

You can use Corel Quattro Pro as a container for linked OLE objects and DDE links that update whenever you change data in an open server application. With OLE 2.0, you can also create or edit embedded OLE objects within Corel Quattro Pro using commands and tools provided by the server.

An Example of Embedded Corel WordPerfect Documents in Corel Quattro Pro

Suppose you insert a Corel WordPerfect document into Corel Quattro Pro as an embedded OLE object. When you double-click the Corel WordPerfect document, the menu bar and Toolbar change to offer Corel WordPerfect features and tools. The server application negotiates with the container--in this case, Corel Quattro Pro--to determine which editing features appear. The results are different for each container-server combination. For embedded OLE objects, data is stored with the container, not the server.

Once you create an object you can move or resize it, lock it so it cannot be edited or deleted, change its border color and box type, add a drop shadow, or make it transparent.

You can also use QuickMenus to edit or open OLE objects and DDE links, change and update links, convert OLE objects or DDE links to another format (such as a bitmap), and "play" sound or multimedia objects.

To drag an OLE object into Corel Quattro Pro

To paste an OLE object or DDE link into Corel Quattro Pro

To insert objects into Corel Quattro Pro

Related Concepts


To drag an OLE object into Corel Quattro Pro
To drag an OLE object into Corel Quattro Pro,

1	Select an object--text, data, or graphics--in another application.

2	Drag it into position in Corel Quattro Pro.

Tip

The application providing the object must support OLE 2.0. Each application has different control keys or settings that let you cut, copy, or link the object by dragging. Frequently, dragging without a key moves the object, while you can copy it by pressing and holding Ctrl while you drag the object. If you press Shift and drag the object, it is usually linked instead of embedded. For details, refer to manuals and Help for each application you are using.

Related Topics

More Info


To paste an OLE object or DDE link into Corel Quattro Pro
To paste an OLE object or DDE link into Corel Quattro Pro,

1	Copy text, data, or graphics from another application to the Clipboard--usually with Edit [image] Copy.

2	Select a cell in Corel Quattro Pro to indicate the placement of the upper left corner of the object.

3	Click Edit [image] Paste Special.

4	To create a link between the server application and Corel Quattro Pro, click Paste Link. To create an embedded object or perform an ordinary paste operation, click Paste.

5	Depending on the type of object in the Clipboard and whether you chose Paste or Paste Link in step 4, you will see a list of formats in the As field.

To create an OLE object, choose the format labeled Object or Document. Usually this format contains the name and version number of the server application.

Choose any other format to create a DDE link (if you chose Paste Link in step 4) or to perform an ordinary Paste operation (if you chose Paste in step 4).

6	Sometimes it is convenient to display an object as an icon. Then, it takes up very little space until you double-click it or right-click it and click Open or Edit. To display an object as an icon, check Display As Icon.

Related Topics

More Info


About Inserting OLE Objects

You can create OLE objects in Corel Quattro Pro using the Insert Object button [image] on the Chart and Drawing Tools Toolbar or the Insert [image] Object command. You can create a brand new embedded object or create an embedded object or link from an existing file.

After you insert an object and are finished with in-place editing, click outside the object to deactivate it, then save the file as usual. If the entire server appeared for editing, click File [image] Update or File [image] Exit in the server application. (If you use File [image] Exit, be sure to reply Yes to the update prompt.)

The server's commands and tools go away and an embedded OLE object appears in the notebook sheet. Now you can move or resize the object or change its properties. To restore the OLE server's editing features, double-click the OLE object in Corel Quattro Pro.

To insert objects into Corel Quattro Pro

Related Concepts


To insert objects into Corel Quattro Pro
To insert objects into Corel Quattro Pro,

1	Select a cell in the notebook sheet approximately where you want to place the object (you can always move it later).

2	Click Insert [image] Object.

3	Click Create New to create a new embedded object, or click Create From File to create a linked or embedded object from an existing file.

If you click Create New, the Object Type field lists the types of objects you can create. These are OLE servers available on your system. Choose one. To display the new object as an icon, check Display As Icon. This option can be convenient if you want to save space onscreen and do not need to view the information at all times.

If you click Create From File, you can type the file path and name in the File field or click Browse to locate it visually. By default, the inserted object is embedded. Check Link to create a linked object. To display the object as an icon, check Display As Icon.

Tips

If you chose Create From File, the file appears in the notebook as an OLE object. It is selected but not activated for in-place editing. To edit the object, double-click it.

If you chose Create New, a new blank object appears. If the server application supports in-place activation for editing, the object is activated for in-place editing. Otherwise, a new window opens; the server is running in it. Use the server's editing commands and tools to create and manipulate the data you want.

When you are finished with in-place editing, click outside the object to deactivate it, then save the file as usual. If the entire server appeared for editing, click File [image] Update or click File [image] Exit in the server application. (If you use File [image] Exit, be sure to reply Yes to the update prompt.)

Related Topics

More Info


Using and Changing Objects and Links in Corel Quattro Pro

You can change the properties of an OLE or DDE object. First select the object on the Corel Quattro Pro notebook sheet, then click Format [image] Selection.

Depending on the type of object, you can also "play," edit, and open objects and object servers; update links; or convert objects to other formats. Select the object, then click Edit [image] Embedded/Linked Object.

To play, edit, or open OLE objects

To update links for objects

To convert an object format or change its activation effect

Related Concepts


To play, edit, or open OLE objects
To play, edit, or open OLE objects,

1	Select the object and click Edit [image] Embedded/Linked Object, or right-click the object and click Embedded/Linked Object.

2	Choose one of the commands from the submenu.

You will probably see commands such as Edit and Open on the QuickMenu. You might also see Play for a video, animation, or sound object. These commands let you edit, view, or use the object, depending on what the server defines as appropriate actions for it:

Edit activates an OLE 2.0 object for in-place editing, or opens the server for other editable objects. When you are through editing in place, click outside the object to deactivate it and save the changes.

Open opens the server so you can edit or view the object. When you are finished working in the server application, click File [image] Update or click File [image] Exit.

Play activates the object and makes it perform. Sometimes you need to wait until the object completes the action. Or, you might be able to choose a control within the application or click outside to close it.

Related Topics

More Info


To update links for objects
To update or change links for objects,

1	Select the object and click Edit [image] Embedded/Linked Object, or right-click the object and click Embedded/Linked Object.

2	Choose one of the following commands from the submenu.

Change Link lets you specify another file and path as the source of the link. For example, if the linked file is moved to a different directory, choose this to relink to the file in its new location.

Update Link copies the latest data from the server application.

Related Topics

More Info


To convert an object format or change its activation effect
To convert an object format or change its activation effect,

1	Select the object and click Edit [image] Embedded/Linked Object, or right-click the object and click Embedded/Linked Object.

2	Click Convert.

To permanently change the object format, click Convert To. Then, choose one of the formats in the Object Type list.

If you want the selected object to appear as an icon, check Display As Icon.

When you click OK, the object is permanently converted to the selected format. For example, if you change an embedded OLE object to a picture object, you can no longer edit the object in the server anymore.

Tips

You can use Convert To when you want to change an object to display as an icon, or when you want to restore it from an icon to its original format. Click Convert To and check or uncheck Display As Icon, but do not change the format in the Object Type field. You can change the icon that is displayed by clicking the Change Icon button.

Some objects can appear in more than one server for editing when activated. If more than one activation choice is available for the object, you can click Convert To, then check Activate As to change the current activation effect. When you click OK, the object is set to activate in the selected server.

Related Topics

More Info


Creating and Using Corel Quattro Pro Objects in Other Applications

To create embedded and linked Corel Quattro Pro OLE objects in container applications, start the application, then follow a procedure similar to those used to create embedded objects in Corel Quattro Pro. If you are using the Clipboard, you will usually use Edit [image] Paste Special. Insert [image] Object is often used to create objects in other applications.

To drag and drop a new object, use a procedure similar to that described in Dragging Objects. Select an object in Corel Quattro Pro--a chart or selection of text, for example--and drag that object into the other application. Use Ctrl while dragging to copy the object. Use Ctrl+Shift while dragging to link it.

To paste an object, use a procedure similar to that described in Pasting Objects. Copy data or a chart from Corel Quattro Pro to the Clipboard, switch to the client application, then use its Paste Special command to choose one of the Corel Quattro Pro formats to paste.

To insert an object, the steps are similar to those given in Inserting Objects. Use the container application's Insert Object command, choose Corel Quattro Pro Notebook or Corel Quattro Pro Chart from the server list, then click Update or Exit in Corel Quattro Pro's File menu.

Related Concepts


Editing OLE Objects in Container Applications

You can edit OLE 2.0 objects in place or in the server application. OLE 1.0 objects are edited in the server application, but you can open the server application by double-clicking an object in the container. DDE links are edited in the server application, started from outside the container application.

Editing Objects in Place

To edit an embedded Corel Quattro Pro OLE object in a container application, double-click it. If the application supports OLE 2.0, Corel Quattro Pro tools and editing commands appear so you can modify the object. This is called in-place activation. While you are editing an embedded object in place, it appears with a crosshatched border around it.

When you finish editing in place, close the object by clicking outside its border within the container document. Corel Quattro Pro editing tools and commands are removed and appropriate container application features are restored. To save the edits, save the container document.

Editing Objects in the Server Application

You can also open the server application from within the container and edit objects in it. To do this with Corel Quattro Pro as the server, select a Corel Quattro Pro object in the container document. Try right-clicking to display a menu. If the container supports this feature, you will see commands similar to these--"Open OLE Object" and "Edit OLE Object." Otherwise, look for similar commands on the Edit menu. Click the Open command to open Corel Quattro Pro with the active object ready to edit. Click the Edit command to edit the Corel Quattro Pro object in place.

How the Object Appears in Corel Quattro Pro

When you are editing an embedded Corel Quattro Pro object in Corel Quattro Pro, it appears in its own window and looks like any Corel Quattro Pro notebook or chart except for its name. Instead of the usual notebook or chart name, the edited object's title bar indicates the type of object and the container filename. When you finish editing, close the object as you would a notebook.

Menu Command Changes

When you are editing an embedded Corel Quattro Pro object within Corel Quattro Pro--not in place--these command changes appear in the File menu: Save changes to Update (if you edit the notebook, Update transfers the changes to the container file), and Save As changes to Save Copy As.

You can choose Update to immediately show your edits in the container application. Or, you can wait until you are finished editing and are closing the embedded object. To save your edits to the embedded object in the container, click File [image] Save from the container (not from Corel Quattro Pro, the server application).

Saving Embedded Objects To Another File

To save a snapshot of the embedded object to another file, click File [image] Save Copy As from Corel Quattro Pro. You can only save a copy--the original belongs to the container.

Editing Linked Objects

If you are editing a linked OLE object, the menus do not change. Changes in the server notebook are immediately reflected in Corel Quattro Pro, unless Corel Quattro Pro is set for manual updating. Updating also occurs each time you open a file containing an OLE link to Corel Quattro Pro; Corel Quattro Pro runs in the background to update all links. This may take a few seconds.

To edit an embedded Corel Quattro Pro object in a container application

To edit a Corel Quattro Pro object in the server application

Related Concepts


To edit an embedded Corel Quattro Pro object in a container application
To edit an embedded Corel Quattro Pro object in a container application,

Double-click the Corel Quattro Pro object to activate it.

Tips

If the application supports OLE 2.0, Corel Quattro Pro tools and editing commands appear so you can modify the object. This is called in-place activation. While you are editing an embedded object in place, it appears with a crosshatched border around it.

When you finish editing in place, close the object by clicking outside its border within the container document. Corel Quattro Pro editing tools and commands are removed and appropriate container application features are restored.

To save the edits, save the container document.

Related Topics

More Info


To edit a Corel Quattro Pro object in the server application
To edit a Corel Quattro Pro object in the server application,

1	Select a Corel Quattro Pro object in the container document.

2	Try right-clicking to display a menu. If the container supports this feature, you will see commands similar to these: "Open OLE Object" and "Edit OLE Object." Otherwise, look for similar commands on the Edit menu.

3	Choose a command to edit the object:

Click Open to open Corel Quattro Pro with the active object ready to edit.

Click Edit to edit the Corel Quattro Pro object in place.

Related Topics

More Info


About Notes/FX

Notes/FX lets you embed a Corel Quattro Pro notebook in a Lotus Notes field and use it to exchange data between the applications. Either application can use the data.

Creating Field Blocks

Notes/FX uses a field block to determine how Corel Quattro Pro and Lotus Notes exchange data. The field block is defined in Corel Quattro Pro and contains two columns of information. The first column lists the field names in Lotus Notes with which Corel Quattro Pro exchanges data. The second column contains a field value or block reference.

Here is an example of a field block. The labels in A5..A8 are field names; B5..B8 contains field values.

A	B	C

1	213,000.00	256,000.00

2	134,000.00	344,344.00

3

4

5	Author	Nick Piercherd

6	Date	11/7/96

7	DataBlock	B1..C2

8	SizeInK	8.5

There are three types of fields:

Data Fields contain data from a Lotus Notes database. You can edit them in Corel Quattro Pro or Lotus Notes. The data is always returned to Lotus Notes. In the figure above, Author and Date are data fields.

Predefined Fields contain a calculated value, such as the size of the notebook, its creation date, and so on. In the figure above, SizeInK is a predefined field. Here are the predefined fields supported by Corel Quattro Pro:

LastRevisionDate is the date the notebook was last saved.

DocumentClass is always set to "Corel Quattro Pro Notebook".

SheetTitles are the custom sheet names used in the notebook.

SizeInSheets is the number of sheet s used in the notebook.

Reference Fields are block coordinates that reference a block of data. In the above figure, DataBlock is a reference field.

To use Notes/FX with Corel Quattro Pro

To name a Notes field block


To use Notes/FX with Corel Quattro Pro
To use Notes/FX with Corel Quattro Pro,

1	In Lotus Notes, create or view a database with at least one rich text field, then select the rich text field.

2	Click Edit [image] Insert [image] Object, then select Corel Quattro Pro Notebook from the list of objects and click OK. Corel Quattro Pro starts and displays an empty notebook.

3	Create a field block that defines the field data exchanged by Corel Quattro Pro and Lotus Notes. Name it Notes Fields.

4	Set up the notebook to use the data received from Lotus Notes (for example, create charts, reports, macros, and so on).

5	Click File [image] Exit to save your changes and return to Lotus Notes.

Tip

In Lotus Notes, whenever you change the data in a field, you can double-click the embedded notebook to start Corel Quattro Pro and work with the data. The field block in Corel Quattro Pro always reflects the field values in the active record of the Lotus Notes database.

Related Topics

More Info


To name a Notes field block
To name a Notes field block,

1	Select the field block and click Insert [image] Name [image] Cells.

2	Enter Notes Fields as the cell name, then click Add to create it.

The cell name is used by Lotus Notes to find the field block.

Related Topics

More Info


About Saving Files in Other Formats

Corel Quattro Pro can save files in many spreadsheet and database program formats. The table below shows the types of files Corel Quattro Pro can save--in addition to its default format, .WB3--and the file extensions to use for each type. Corel Quattro Pro looks at the extension to determine the type of saving to perform.

To save a file for use with one of these programs, include the appropriate extension when you save it and make sure the File Type field is set to the appropriate type. For example, to save the notebook MYFILE for use with Quattro Pro for Windows version 1, use File [image] Save As and specify the file name MYFILE.WB1.

To open a file created by one of the following programs, include the file's extension after click File [image] Open.

Extension	Program

.WB3	Corel Quattro Pro 7 and 8 for Windows 95 and Windows NT

.WB2	Corel Quattro Pro for Windows, version 6.0

.WB1	Quattro Pro for Windows, version 1.0 and 5.0

.WQ1	Quattro Pro for DOS

.WQ2*	Corel Quattro Pro for DOS, version 5.0 and 5.5

.XLS	Excel, version 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, and 7.0

.WKS	1-2-3, version 1A

.WK1	1-2-3, version 2.x

.WK3	1-2-3, version 3.x, 1-2-3 for Windows

.WK4	1-2-3, version 4 and 5

.WKE	1-2-3, educational version

.DB	Corel Paradox

.DB2	dBASE II

.DBF	dBASE III, dBASE III Plus, and dBASE for Windows

.DB4	dBASE IV

.TXT	tab-delimited text

.DIF	VisiCalc

.SLK	Multiplan (SYLK)

.HTM	HTML version 3 (tables only)

* = Open only, not save

If you have Corel Quattro Pro for DOS, you can open SQZ files by saving them as .WQ1 files first.

If you are opening a .WK3 file, Corel Quattro Pro also opens any Impress file it includes. If you are opening other 1-2-3 files, Corel Quattro Pro opens any included Impress or Allways files.

If you omit the filename extension while opening a file, Corel Quattro Pro looks for the file name you specify with the following extensions in this order: the File Extension setting in Tools  [image] Settings [image] File Options, .WB3, .WB2, .WB1, .WQ2, .WQ1, .WK1, .WK3, .WKS, and .XLS. This means you can open a file from some spreadsheet products without specifying the extension as long as a file with the same name does not exist with a higher-ranking spreadsheet extension.

Tips

Only the contents of the current sheet (or if it is empty, the first nonempty sheet) of a notebook are saved when importing to all formats except 1-2-3 3.x (.WK3).

If you use unique Corel Quattro Pro features like linking or presentation-quality graphics, you may see a warning when you try to save the file to a format other than Corel Quattro Pro Version 8 format. The warning states which features will be lost when the file is saved. If you do not want to lose the features, save the file as a QPW v7/v8 (*.WB3) file.

To open a file from another program

To save a Corel Quattro Pro file in another format

To save the current sheet as a tab-delimited text file

Related Concepts


To open a file from another program
To open a file from another program,

1	Click File [image] Open.

2	In the Filename field, enter the appropriate extension for the file format you want to use.

Tips

If you are opening a .WK3 file, Corel Quattro Pro also opens any Impress file it includes. If you are opening other 1-2-3 files, Corel Quattro Pro opens any included Impress or Allways files.

If you omit the filename extension while opening a file, Corel Quattro Pro looks for the file name you specify with the following extensions in this order: the File Extension setting in in Tools  [image] Settings  [image] File Options, .WB3, .WB2, .WB1, .WQ2, .WQ1, .WK1, .WK3, .WKS, and .XLS. This means you can open a file from some spreadsheet products without specifying the extension as long as a file with the same name does not exist with a higher-ranking spreadsheet extension.

Related Topics

More Info


To save a Quattro Pro file in another format
To save a Corel Quattro Pro file in another format,

1	Click File [image] Save As.

2	In the Filename field, enter the appropriate extension for the file format you want to use.

3	Make sure the File type field is set to the appropriate type.

Tips

Only the contents of the current sheet (or if it is empty, the first nonempty sheet) of a notebook are saved when saving to all non-Corel Quattro Pro formats except 1-2-3 3.x (.WK3).

If you use unique Corel Quattro Pro features like linking or presentation-quality graphics, you may see a warning when you try to save the file to a format other than Corel Quattro Pro Version 8 format. The warning states which features will be lost when the file is saved. If you do not want to lose the features, save the file as a QPW v7/v8 (*.WB3) file.

Related Topics

More Info


Opening and Saving Allways Files

Spreadsheets created with 1-2-3 version 2.x and designed using Allways can be opened directly into Corel Quattro Pro. When you open a .WK1 file that has a corresponding .ALL file, the Allways formatting is automatically added to the file.

Corel Quattro Pro imports only .ALL files (not .AFS, .ALS, or .ENC files). To import multiple saved formats or font sets, create a separate .WK1 file for each saved format with a corresponding .ALL file. Corel Quattro Pro imports the following Allways options:

These Format options: font selection, line style (the Layout [image] Options [image] Line-weight setting is used to gauge overall line thickness), shading, boldface, underline, and font colors. Corel Quattro Pro converts up to 255 different combinations of font, boldface, underline, and italic. Any additional combinations convert to the font specified as Normal style.

Layout options: margins, titles, borders, line weight, paper type, and grid on printing.

The Print range option.

Worksheet options: column width and row heights.

Corel Quattro Pro does not import the following:

Inserted charts (because Allways only points to a chart stored in a separate .PIC file in its "inserted" charts).

These Worksheet options: page breaks, column page breaks, and display zoom.

Label alignment with spillover to the left (usually found in centered labels).

The display (screen) colors.

These Layout options: page size and borders on the bottom.

These Print options: printer type, orientation, print settings, and port bin print options.

To save an Allways formatted file you previously imported, use File [image] Save to automatically save it with an Allways file, or use File [image] Save As to choose Impress or None (no format file).

Related Concepts


Saving Impress Files

Corel Quattro Pro can now import 1-2-3 files created with either the WYSIWYG or Impress add-in.

When you open a .WK1, .WKS, or .WK3 file that has a corresponding .FMT or .FM3 file, Corel Quattro Pro asks if you want to read the .FMT or .FM3 file and apply the WYSIWYG/Impress formatting to it.

When retrieving a .WK1 or .WKS file, if there is a corresponding .ALL file in the current directory, you can choose to open it instead. If there is a corresponding .FMT file, Corel Quattro Pro chooses it automatically and asks you to confirm the choice. The .ENC and .CNF files created by WYSIWYG/Impress are not imported.

Corel Quattro Pro opens and applies some chart formats as well as text formats. Not all chart formats are retained, however. Corel Quattro Pro imports the following WYSIWYG/Impress formats:

These Format commands: assigned fonts, lines (except shadow), shading, boldface, underline (except double or wide), italics.

Corel Quattro Pro converts up to 255 different combinations of font, boldface, underline, and italic. Any additional combinations convert to the font used in Normal style in Corel Quattro Pro.

Inserted charts.

Blank charts (usually containing annotations).

Named styles, but the descriptions are not preserved.

These Print settings: range, configuration/orientation, layout/compression (which converts to Print-To-Fit), layout margins, layout titles, and grid on printing.

Label Alignment (except left-side spillover).

The following Worksheet settings: row height, page breaks.

Colors (global negative, lines, text color).

Grid display.

Corel Quattro Pro does not import the following formats:

Column page breaks.

Label alignment with left-side spillover.

Formatting embedded in text.

These Display options: colors, mode, font directory, rows, and options.

These Format options: line shadow and colors (except global negative, line, double or wide underline, and text color).

These Print Layout settings: page size and borders on bottom.

These Print settings: frame and settings.

The Print Configuration settings (printer type, port bin, and so on).

Related Concepts


Saving 1-2-3 Release 2 or 3 Files

When opening a 1-2-3 version 2.x file, linking is converted to Corel Quattro Pro's syntax, as shown in the following example:

+<<BUDGET.WK1>>B4 changes to +[BUDGET.WK1]B4

To import a 1-2-3 version 3.x file into Corel Quattro Pro, just specify the .WK3 extension when you open it.

If the only version 3-specific features in the 1-2-3 file are a 3-D worksheet or LMBCS characters, Corel Quattro Pro opens it and converts it. If, however, there are other version 3-specific features in the 1-2-3 file, any of the following might happen:

Any @function not in Corel Quattro Pro converts to the value of the original cell (string or numeric).

Any .WK3 chart feature not supported in Corel Quattro Pro is lost.

Due to the way Corel Quattro Pro stores numbers, any extremely large number (larger than 10 raised to the power of 308) converts to ERR, and any number smaller than 10 raised to the power of negative 308 converts to 0.

Numeric format of Automatic, Negative Color, Label and Parenthesis convert to the Corel Quattro Pro format General.

Numeric formatting of blank cells will not be identical to the original once converted.

To export a Corel Quattro Pro file to 1-2-3 version 3 format, save it with the .WK3 file extension and set the File type option in the Save File dialog box to 1-2-3 v3.x (*.WK3).

Related Concepts


Opening and Saving Multiplan Files

Since Multiplan does not save its files in .SLK format by default, you must do the following in Multiplan before importing the files in Corel Quattro Pro:

1	Click Transfer [image] Options [image] Symbolic.

2	Click Transfer [image] Save, and save the file with the extension .SLK.

Alternatively, you could do the following to save the file in 1-2-3 format in preparation for importing to Corel Quattro Pro:

1	Click Transfer [image] Options [image] Other.

2	Click Transfer [image] Save, and save it with the extension .WK1 or .WKS depending on your version of Multiplan.

Related Concepts


Saving Database Files

Corel Quattro Pro can save files to dBASE and Corel Paradox formats. You specify the file format by selecting its extension in the Save As dialog box.

When you open any database file into Corel Quattro Pro, it converts database field names to spreadsheet labels that serve as column headings and assigns cell names to the cells beneath each name.

When you save a Corel Quattro Pro notebook in Corel Paradox or dBASE format, a dialog box appears with options for ordering the spreadsheet data into a database file structure:

The Fields box lists database field names based on the data in the first row of the first notebook sheet. If the first row contains data that is invalid as a database field name--for example, containing numbers, spaces, symbol characters, or duplicate labels--Corel Quattro Pro uses the spreadsheet column letters to represent the field names. To change a field name, choose the default name in the Fields box and type a new name in the Name edit field.

To mark a field to be deleted, highlight it on the list and press Del. An asterisk appears next to the field name. To restore it, press Del again.

Use the Type settings to change the type of data contained in the column. The default setting is based on the spreadsheet data. If the Type is Numeric, you can specify a number of decimal points for the field.

Use the Width edit field to specify the number of characters in the structure for that field name.

The Write button proceeds with saving to the database file format corresponding to the File type option you selected in the Save File dialog box.

Related Concepts


To save the current sheet as a tab-delimited text file
To save the current sheet as a tab-delimited text file,

1	Click File [image] Save As.

2	In the File name text box, type the file name with extension .TXT.

3	Select ASCII Text ("tab delimited") from the File type list.

Related Topics

More Info


About Importing Text

Corel Quattro Pro can import text files and break their contents into data fields. Files must be unformatted and saved as plain ASCII text files without any control codes or other word-processor formatting. Before you import a text file, remove any special formatting characters such as bold, underlining, or centering.

You can bring text files into Corel Quattro Pro as a file with File [image] Open or Insert [image] File. To combine data in a tab-delimited text file with data in the active notebook, use Tools [image] Data Tools [image] Combine Files.

Tools [image] Data Tools [image] QuickColumns can either parse cells in the notebook or from a text file.

To import tab-delimited text files

To import text files without tabs

To parse a text file

To parse cells of text

To import .QIF files

Related Concepts


To import tab-delimited text files
To import tab-delimited text files,

1	Click File [image] Open.

2	Select ASCII Text ("*.txt") from the File type list. A text file can have any extension except one reserved for other file formats.

3	Select a text file.

Tips

Make sure no lines in the file are longer than 1022 characters, the maximum size of a cell. Characters beyond the 1022-character limit will not be imported.

File [image] Open loads the specified text file into a new notebook.

To combine data in a tab-delimited text file with data in the active notebook, use Tools [image] Data Tools [image] Combine Files.

To insert a tab-delimited file into the active notebook without combining data, use Insert [image] File.

Related Topics

More Info


About Inserting a File into a Notebook

You can copy an entire file into a notebook, pushing existing sheets back to make room. Only sheets containing data are inserted. Use Insert [image] File to insert the contents of a file.

Every sheet in the inserted file that contained data is placed on a new sheet in the active notebook. If only one sheet is inserted, the sheet is given the name of the inserted file. If multiple sheets are inserted, the new sheets are named in the default letter sequence.

To insert a file into a notebook

Related Concepts


To insert a file into a notebook
To insert a file into a notebook,

1	Make sure the file you want to insert is closed.

2	Select any cell on the sheet before which you want to insert the file.

3	Click Insert [image] File.

4	Choose the file name you want. If you want to insert a file from another program, include its filename extension.

Tips

If the file has a password, you will be prompted to enter it before the file is inserted.

If the file is inserted within the boundaries of a named selection of cells or cells referenced by a formula, Corel Quattro Pro expands references to include the new sheets.

To insert a file at a specific cell instead of having it inserted at cell A1, select the cell where you want the information inserted. Click Tools [image] Data Tools [image] Combine Files. Specify the file you want to bring in and it will input the information, beginning at the cell you selected previously. (When using Combine, any column widths, cell names, objects, or sheet names will be stripped out.)

If inserting a file would expand a named selection of cells or cell reference beyond the limit of a notebook (beyond sheet IV), the reference becomes ERR.

Related Topics

More Info


Parsing Text with the QuickColumns Expert

The Tools [image] Data Tools [image] QuickColumns expert rearranges text from cells in the notebook or from a file into columns. The text can be fixed width or delimited by selected characters.

Fixed width text appears in columns of a set number of characters.

Delimited text is set apart by commas, quotes, tabs, or your choice of characters.

Importing and Parsing a Text File

You can use the QuickColumns expert to import a text file and rearrange the text in columns at the same time.

Parsing Cells

If you import text using the Insert [image] File command, you may need to rearrange the data into individual cells. Inserted text files often require parsing because each line of text converts into a single label. Remember that labels reside in a single column, even though they may spill over several.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

To parse a text file

To parse cells of text

Related Concepts


To parse a text file
To parse a text file,

1	Click Tools [image] Data Tools [image] QuickColumns.

2	Select File from the Source group box list.

3	Type the name of the file in the Source text box (or click the Folder button to select the file you want).

4	In the Destination text box, enter the cells to copy the parsed data into (or click [image] to select the cells).

5	Click Options or Load Settings to specify the parse options to use.

If you have previously specified the parse options to use, you can load them by clicking Load Settings.

If you need to specify new parse options, click Options, specify the format of the text and how to parse it, then click OK. You can save the options by clicking Save Settings.

6	Click Advanced to adjust the default parsing, if needed. Click here [image] for details.

7	Click Parse. QuickColumns parses the text and copies it as data to the destination cells.

Tip

If the text contains more than 8,192 lines, excess lines are copied to the next notebook sheet.

Related Topics

More Info


To parse cells of text
To parse cells of text,

1	Select the text to parse.

2	Click Tools [image] Data Tools [image] QuickColumns.

3	Select Block.

4	In the Destination box, specify the cells to copy the parsed data into (or click [image] to select the cells).

If you have previously specified the parse options to use, you can load them by clicking Load Settings.

If you need to specify new parse options, click Options, specify the format of the text and how to parse it, then click OK. You can save the options by clicking Save Settings.

5	Click Advanced to adjust the default parsing, if needed. Click here [image] for details.

6	Click Parse. QuickColumns parses the text and copies it as data to the destination cells.

Tip

If the text contains more than 8,192 lines, excess lines are copied to the next notebook sheet.

Related Topics

More Info


Previewing and Fine-Tuning the Parse

After specifying the text to parse and setting parse options, click Advanced to display a preview of how QuickColumns will parse your data. The preview pane lets you change the column width, alignment, and numeric format of parsed columns, and skip rows. Use the scroll bars to view data that is not being displayed.

Adjusting Column Width

Vertical lines in the preview area (called column breaks) show where the data is divided into columns. To adjust the column, drag its triangle in the ruler. Adjusting column lines when parsing fixed-width text can change where the data is placed in the destination cells. When parsing delimited data, dragging the column line resizes the entire column; it does not affect where the data is placed.

Changing Column Format

To change the alignment and numeric format of a column, select the column in the preview pane, then set options for Alignment, Type, and Decimal Places in the Format box.

Changing Row Format

Click a row format button to the left of a row, then select an option for parsing an individual line.

Parse (the default) parses the row.

Skip skips the row.

Label copies the row to the destination cells as an unparsed label.

Click [image] to view the next or previous instance of a row that does not follow the same parsing rules as the rows surrounding it.

Related Concepts


About Combining Files

Tools [image] Data Tools [image] Combine Files lets you copy all or part of a notebook into any area of the active notebook. Tools [image] Data Tools [image] Combine Files does not erase the active notebook; it affects only the portion of the sheets covered by the inserted cells.

You can also perform arithmetic operations with Tools [image] Data Tools [image] Combine Files, to add, subtract, multiply, or divide cells from one notebook to another.

Tips

If you make changes to a file to be combined into another file, save it first before combining. Tools [image] Data Tools [image] Combine Files reads data from the stored notebook file, whether it is open or not.

Tools [image] Data Tools [image] Combine Files copies the contents of named cells, but to avoid confusion with names in the active notebook, it converts references to named cells into cell coordinates.

Tools [image] Data Tools [image] Combine Files overwrites any cells in the destination cells, even if they are protected.

If you prefer, you can copy cells directly from one notebook to another with Edit [image] Copy or with the Clipboard commands. You can also perform arithmetic operations between cells with notebook links.

The contents of the specified file or cells appear in the active notebook. If you copied the data, Corel Quattro Pro also copies any properties such as alignment and numeric format. Column widths in the receiving notebook do not automatically adjust to correspond to the copied data; you can do this explicitly with the Fit button.

To combine files

Related Concepts


To combine files
To combine files,

1	If you intend to combine only part of a file with the active one, make sure you know the exact cell name or coordinates from the source file.

2	Select the receiving notebook. Then select the cell where you want the upper left of the source file to begin being copied. Make sure you have enough space so data will not be overwritten unexpectedly.

3	Click Tools [image] Data Tools [image] Combine Files, and click the appropriate option in the dialog box:

Copy inserts the exact contents of the incoming file.

Add adds the incoming values to the existing values.

Subtract subtracts the incoming values from the existing values.

Multiply multiplies the incoming values by the existing values.

Divide divides the existing values by the incoming values.

4	Click Entire File to copy the entire file (including all sheets) into the existing one, or click Cell(s) to copy specified cells from the file. If you choose Cell(s), enter a cell name or coordinates in the edit field. You can also specify noncontiguous selections by separating the selections with commas. (Because the cell names are from another file, you cannot display a list of the names.)

5	Choose the file name you want.

Tip

Tools [image] Data Tools [image] Combine Files overwrites any cells in the destination cells, even if they are protected.

Related Topics

More Info


Copying Combined File Data

Tools [image] Data Tools [image] Combine Files [image] Copy copies data directly from a file into the active notebook. The data is inserted starting at the position of the selector. If you specify the entire file, Corel Quattro Pro copies only the cells that contain data.

The references in formulas adjust to reflect their new positions, even if they are absolute. If a formula refers to cells outside of the selection being copied, the result may be inaccurate. To copy formulas' resulting values instead of the formulas themselves, use Edit [image] Convert to Values on the file you are combining to copy them to another sheet first. Then click Tools [image] Data Tools [image] Combine Files [image] Cell(s) to copy only the sheet with the values.

Related Concepts


Operating on Combined File Data

Tools [image] Data Tools [image] Combine Files [image] Add combines values in the inserted cells with existing values in the notebook and calculates the sum.

The inserted cells can contain formulas as well as values. However, the receiving notebook should contain only values--if it contains formulas, convert them to values (with Edit [image] Convert to Values) before using the Add option. Addition will not occur in cells with formulas or labels.

Tip

Another way to add values between files is to create notebook links (click here [image] for details).

Tools [image] Data Tools [image] Combine Files [image] Add is useful for combining files for a cumulative total; for example, to compile year-to-date figures from monthly notebooks. You could load one file, select cell A1, and combine the other files with Tools [image] Data Tools [image] Combine Files [image] Add. A cumulative notebook showing year-to-date expense totals would be created.

Before you use the Add option, select the cell where you want the added data to start. Data will be added to values below or to the right of the selector.

If you add an entire file, Corel Quattro Pro adds all cells that contain values. If you specify cells to add, Corel Quattro Pro adds the values from those cells.

When adding values, make sure the source and destination areas are set up similarly; for example, put headings in the same position. The incoming data assumes the properties of the active notebook, except that it retains its numeric format.

Accurate selector placement is critical when adding combined values. If the selector is one cell off from proper alignment when you combine the files, the combined data may be useless. For this reason, save the active notebook before combining data. Then, if you do not get the results you want, you can open the original file and try again.

When you add values with Tools [image] Data Tools [image] Combine Files [image] Add, Corel Quattro Pro follows these rules:

In the active notebook, cells that contain labels, formulas, ERR, or NA are not altered by the incoming data.

Value entries in the destination cells of the receiving notebook are replaced by the sum of the original and incoming values.

When adding incoming values to those existing in the notebook, all incoming formulas convert to their end values, and labels and blank cells are ignored. Formulas resulting in ERR, NA, or strings are ignored, also.

Subtracting, multiplying, or dividing data

Tools [image] Data Tools [image] Combine Files [image] Subtract subtracts incoming values from values in the active notebook. The Multiply option multiplies the values together, and the Divide option divides active notebook values by the incoming values. Subtract, Multiply, and Divide have the same requirements and rules as Add.

Related Concepts


About Extracting Part of a Notebook

Tools [image] Data Tools [image] Extract to File saves part of a notebook to a separate file, leaving the original file intact.

If you prefer, you can open a blank notebook in a new window and copy cells to it with the Clipboard commands or with Edit [image] Copy rather than extracting the cells.

Tools [image] Data Tools [image] Extract to File is similar to Edit [image] Copy, with two major differences:

With Extract you can choose to copy values only. When you choose its Values option, the actual formulas are not copied--just the resulting values.

Extract saves the notebook's cell names and charts along with the specified cells. Some cell names or charts may not be meaningful if they refer to cells outside the extracted cells. You can delete them, reassign them, or ignore them.

The Tools [image] Data Tools [image] Extract to File dialog box has Formulas and Values options. Formulas saves an exact copy of the cells, including formulas. Values converts formulas to their end values.

When you load a file saved with the Formulas option, formulas adjust to reflect their new positions, even if they are absolute. If a formula refers to cells outside the selection being saved, its results may be inaccurate. In this case, it is best to use the Values option.

You can extract a file to a different file format by including the appropriate filename extension. To create a tab-delimited text file, use the extension .TXT and set the File Type to Text (*.TXT).

For the extracted data to work with the program, the extracted cells must be set up in a way that makes sense to the program. For example, to extract data to a Corel Paradox file, the cells should list related data in columns (which are interpreted as fields), and should contain column headings, (which are interpreted as field names).

To extract part of a notebook

Related Concepts


Opening .QIF Files

Corel Quattro Pro 8 can open a Quicken Interchange Format (.QIF) file. This format is created in Quicken when you export an account register and choose the .QIF export format option. You can choose options in Quicken that let you specify which categories and information you want to export.

When the .QIF file is opened in Corel Quattro Pro, each spreadsheet row contains a single transaction record with the date, check number, payee, cleared status, and amount columns. Additionally, the assigned categories are broken out into columns. You can then sum the category amounts for each column, create custom reports and charts, or use the transaction data within Quattro Pro as actual data.

1	To open a .QIF file, click File [image] Open.

2	From the File Type list, click Quicken Interchange Format ("*.qif"), then specify a file.

Tips

When you save the opened .QIF file, you must save it as a Corel Quattro Pro 8 (.wb3) file.

In addition to checking account registers, you can also import other .QIF files such as investment accounts.

Split transactions (multiple categories assigned to a single transaction) will place the correct amount into each category column. If a split transaction is composed of only a single category but multiple descriptions, then the category column will contain a formula that includes all of the individual amounts.

More Info


To extract part of a notebook
To extract part of a notebook,

1	Click Tools [image] Data Tools [image] Extract to File.

2	In the Cell(s) edit field, enter the cell name or coordinates to be saved. You can specify noncontiguous selections by separating the selections with commas.

3	Choose Formulas to save the cells exactly as they are, or choose Values to save the resulting values instead of the original formulas.

4	Enter the file name you want.

Tips

The extracted data begins at cell A1, regardless of its position in the original file.

If you include the filename extension used by a different program, the file is saved in the appropriate file format. To create a tab-delimited text file, use the extension .TXT and set the File Type to Text (*.TXT).

For the extracted data to work with the program, the extracted cells must be set up in a way that makes sense to the program. For example, to extract data to a Corel Paradox file, the cells should list related data in columns (which are interpreted as fields), and should contain column headings, (which are interpreted as field names).

Related Topics

More Info


About Printer Setup

Before printing from Corel Quattro Pro, use the Windows Control Panel to specify the printers available; the Control Panel also enables printing from all Windows applications. If multiple printers are attached to your system, you can specify which printer to use.

Print Defaults

In the File [image] Page Setup and the File [image] Print dialog boxes, you can specify default print settings such as the following:

paper type (wide, letter, envelope)

paper source on the printer (manual, bin 1, bin 2)

print orientation (landscape, portrait)

output size using a percentage (50%, 200%, and so on)

pen colors in a plotter

number of copies

fonts available in the printer (cartridge fonts, soft fonts, internal fonts)

output resolution (300 dpi, 150 dpi)

color or black-and-white printing

the amount of memory in the printer

Because many of these settings are printer-specific, they will not all be available for your printer. Consult your Windows documentation and printer manual for more information on these and additional settings.

To specify which printer to use

Related Concepts


To specify which printer to use
To specify which printer to use,

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Select a printer in the Name text box.

Tips

Changes made to print defaults affect printing in all Windows applications. You can use File [image] Page Setup to set many of these options (output size, paper type, and so on) for only Corel Quattro Pro.

If the printer you want is not on the Name list, click Add Printer, then follow the prompts.

Related Topics

More Info


About Printing Notebooks

When a notebook window is active, you can use File [image] Print to print parts of the notebook. You can print a simple list or a sophisticated multiple-sheet report, enhanced with headers, footers, and sheet numbers.

File [image] Page Setup determines how the printed sheet will look. When Corel Quattro Pro prints, "what you see is what you get." You can use the Property Bar to format notebooks with lines, new typefaces, shading and a number of other enhancements before you print.

To print a notebook

Related Concepts


To print a notebook
To print a notebook,

1	Click File [image] Page Setup to adjust print settings.

2	After adjusting print settings, click OK.

3	Click File [image] Print.

4	For print area, click Current Sheet, Notebook, or Selection. If you click Selection, specify the cells (or selections of cells).

5	To print only certain pages of a notebook sheet, type the page numbers in the From and To text boxes next to Range.

6	For Copies, enter the number of copies you want to print.

7	Click Print to print the data. (If you would like to print the data later, click Close to save the current print settings.)

Tips

Corel Quattro Pro displays a message showing Corel Quattro Pro's progress while sending information to the Print Manager. If you want to stop the print job, click Cancel, or use the Windows Print Manager to delete the print job after Corel Quattro Pro sends it. If your printer has a large memory buffer, printing may continue for a few moments after cancellation.

If your printout is not readable because of colored background or text, File [image] Print [image] Details, then click Adjust image to print black and white to print all backgrounds white, all text black, and all lines black.

Print settings are saved with the notebook, so subsequent printing is easier. In most cases, you can just click File [image] Print [image] Print. You can also store print settings under a name for easy retrieval.

Related Topics

More Info


Selecting a Print Area

You can choose to print all data on a sheet, all data in a notebook, or only selected cells--contiguous or noncontiguous. To specify a print area, click File [image] Print, then click Current Sheet, Notebook, or Selection.

When Current Sheet is selected, Corel Quattro Pro scans the active sheet from left to right, top to bottom, and prints the smallest area that covers all the data.

If two or more cells are selected when you click File [image] Print, Selection is the default setting. The coordinates of the selected cells appear in the edit field. This setting lets you choose which part of a sheet to print.

To print a selection different from the one in the edit field without closing the Spreadsheet Print dialog box, click Selection, then click [image]. Select the cells you want, then press Enter. The new coordinates appear automatically in the Selection text box.

You can select 3-D and noncontiguous selections.

When checked, Notebook prints all data in the entire active notebook.

Tips

If a cell's contents spill over into adjacent cells onscreen, include the spillover cells in the selection; otherwise only part of the entry will print.

If Selection is checked, but you want to print all data on the active sheet or notebook, check Current Sheet or Notebook instead. You do not need to delete the selection from the edit field.

When you print a selection, Selection appears as the default setting the next time you click File [image] Print. The previous selection appears in the edit field. You can use these defaults, select different cells to print, or check another print area setting.

Printing Floating Objects

Any floating objects (charts, QuickButtons, drawn objects) in the print area are printed with the notebook data. Only the selected portion prints; if the floating object covers a page break, the image splits, printing on multiple pages.

Related Concepts


About Page Setup

Use File [image] Page Setup to control printed margins, paper type and orientation, scaling, and headers and footers. You can also store current print settings under a name to use again later.

When switching orientation, margins switch as well; for example, the top margin stays with the top of the notebook data printed, along with the header and top heading (if any).

The Named Settings options lets you store the current print settings under a name so that you can easily reuse them. Since named settings are saved with the notebook, use File [image] Save to save your file after changing named settings.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

To change paper size or orientation

To enter a header or footer

To change margin settings

To print data without soft page breaks

To change print size

To restore default print settings

To save new default print settings

To save the current print settings as a named group

To print using a named setting

To change options

Related Concepts


About Paper Type and Print Orientation

If you do not change any settings, Corel Quattro Pro prints data on 8.5" by 11" paper and orients it vertically, so the narrower side of the page is at the top and bottom. Use File [image] Page Setup to change paper size or print orientation.

If you change print orientation, margins change to match. For example, the top margin stays with the top of the notebook data printed, along with the header and top heading (if any).

To change paper size or orientation

Related Concepts


To change paper size or orientation
To change paper size or orientation,

1	Click File [image] Page Setup.

2	Click the Paper Type tab.

3	Choose a paper size from the list.

4	Click the orientation setting you want--Portrait (vertical) or Landscape (horizontal).

Related Topics

More Info


About Headers and Footers

Headers and footers are lines of text that print at the top and bottom of each page.

Corel Quattro Pro separates headers and footers from the notebook data by the amount of space specified in the Header and Footer Height box, minus the height of the header or footer text. Unless you specify otherwise, headers and footers are left-aligned.

Formatting Header and Footer Text

To insert dates, times, file names, calculations based on the page number, and multiple lines of text to headers and footers, click View [image] Page View. Double-click inside the colored, dotted area at the top or bottom of the page, then click [image] to easily add any of the following symbols using the Property Bar.

You can also add the following special characters when creating the header or footer in File [image] Page Setup [image] Header/Footer.

Code	Description

|	(vertical bar) Determines the position of the text: left-aligned, right-aligned, or centered.

#d	Enters the current date in the short format specified in the Date Format option in Tools [image] Settings [image] International.

#D	Enters the current date in the long format specified in the Date Format option in Tools [image] Settings [image] International.

.

#ds	Enters the current date in Short Date format

#Ds	Enters the current date in Long Date format.

#t	Enters the current time in the short format specified in the Time Format in Tools [image] Settings [image] International.

#T	Enters the current time in the long format specified in the Time Format option in Tools [image] Settings [image] International.

#ts	Enters the current time in Short Time format.

#Ts	Enters the current time in Long Time format.

#p	Enters the current page number.

#p+n	Enters the current page number plus the number n.

#P	Enters the number of pages in the document.

#P+n	Enters the number of pages plus the number n.

#f	Enters the name of the notebook printing with no path (BUDGET.WB3).

#F	Enters the name of the notebook printing, including the path (C:\DATA\BUDGET.WB3).

#n	Prints the remainder of the header or footer on a second line.

#	(number sign) Enters the current page number. Use for compatibility with Corel Quattro Pro for DOS.

@	Enters the current date (per your computer's calendar). Use for compatibility with Corel Quattro Pro for DOS.

Tips

If you want a # or @ character to appear in your header or footer instead of being treated as a header or footer code, type a backslash (\) character before the # or @.+

The vertical bar character | works like a tab; one preceding vertical bar centers the text; two preceding vertical bars || right-align the text. To enter this character on most keyboards, hold down Shift and press the backslash key (\). On some keyboards, the vertical bar character appears broken in the middle.

You can also use | characters to align parts of the header or footer. Up to two vertical bar characters can be in a header or footer line.

To enter a header or footer

To print column or row headings on each page

Related Concepts


To enter a header or footer
To enter a header or footer,

1	Click File [image] Page Setup [image] Header/Footer

2	Click Create, then type the text you want to appear as the header and/or footer. Use Backspace or other editing keys to correct mistakes as you type.

3	If you want, click Header Font and/or Footer Font and specify a typeface, font size, and font option. You can make different settings for the header and footer.

4	To align text and add dates, times, file names, page numbers, and multiple lines of text to headers and footers, click View [image] Page View. Double-click inside the colored, dotted area at the top or bottom of the page, then click [image] to easily add any of the following symbols using the Property Bar.

Tip

To change the distance between the header or footer and the first or last row of data, type a different height setting. Use inches if in is displayed next to the default margin settings; use centimeters if cm is displayed. Use decimals to indicate partial inches or centimeters, such as 0.5 for half.

Related Topics

More Info


About Margins

You can change margins to best present your data--to center a small area of data on the page, for example. Use File [image] Page Setup to set margins. You can also set margins by dragging margin lines in File [image] Print Preview or View [image] Page.

Corel Quattro Pro uses the measurement system specified in the Windows Control Panel to determine whether to use inches or centimeters for margin measurements. You can override the default for a particular margin by entering in (for inches) or cm (for centimeters) after its value. The default suffix is displayed next to each default margin setting. For example, to set the left margin to three centimeters when the default measurement system is inches, choose Left Margin and enter 3 cm. Corel Quattro Pro then converts the entry into the default measurement system.

To change margin settings

Related Concepts


To change margin settings
To change margin settings,

1	Click File [image] Page Setup.

2	Click the Print Margins tab.

3	Choose the margin you want to adjust: Top, Bottom, Left, or Right. Highlight the current margin measurement.

4	As you highlight a measurement, a line darkens in the drawing in the center of the dialog box. It shows the margin you are setting.

For Top and Bottom margins, enter the distance between the top or bottom of the paper and the header or footer.

For Left and Right margins, enter the distance from the edge of the paper to the data.

Tips

To change the distance between the header or footer and the first or last row of data, type a different height setting.

Use inches if in is displayed next to the default margin settings; use centimeters if cm is displayed. Use decimals to indicate partial inches or centimeters, such as 0.5 for half.

Some printers are not able to print to the edge of the paper, and many print drivers do not allow 0" margins.

Related Topics

More Info


About Page Breaks

There are two kinds of page breaks: soft page breaks and hard page breaks.

Corel Quattro Pro creates soft page breaks every 62 rows and 11 columns by default to avoid running your data off the bottom or right of a printed page.

You can create hard page breaks wherever you want to start a new page.

Printing Large Notebooks

Corel Quattro Pro will not print unless at least one cell fits on the printed page. If the data in the print selection will not fit on one printed page, Corel Quattro Pro fits as many columns as possible across the first page, and prints all rows in those columns using as many pages as necessary. Then, Corel Quattro Pro returns to the first row of data and picks up at the column where it left off, until all data in the selection has printed. You can combine the pages to create one large notebook.

Corel Quattro Pro will not split a column. If the full column will not fit, it prints on the next page. Use View [image] Page or File [image] Print Preview to see where your pages will break.

To insert hard page breaks

To print data without soft page breaks

Related Concepts


To insert hard page breaks
To insert hard page breaks,

Use one of the following methods:

To insert a page break vertically, select a cell in the first column of the row you want on a new page, then click Insert [image] Page Break [image] Create.

To insert a page break horizontally, select a blank cell in the row of the column you want on a new page, then click Insert [image] Page Break [image] Create.

To drag to create page breaks, click View [image] Page to see the notebook as it will print. Click View [image] Zoom [image] 50% to see multiple pages. Then drag the blue page break line to a new location to change the page break.

Tips

To remove a page break vertically, select a cell in the first column of the row you no longer want on a new page, then click Insert [image] Page Break [image] Delete.

To remove a page break horizontally, select a blank cell in the row of the column you no longer want on a new page, then click Insert [image] Page Break [image] Delete.

Related Topics

More Info


To print data without soft page breaks
To print data without soft page breaks,

1	Click File [image] Page Setup.

2	Click the Print Margins tab.

3	Deselect Break Pages.

Tip

Disabling page breaks is useful for producing long printouts on continuous-form paper. Deselecting Break Pages also disables headers, footers, and all margins but the right and left margins. Hard page breaks are not disabled.

Related Topics

More Info


To change print size
To change print size,

1	Click File [image] Page Setup.

2	Click the Print Scaling tab.

To adjust by an exact percentage (15 to 1000), select the Print to % of normal size setting, then specify a percentage. Specifying 110% enlarges output by 10%; specifying 90% reduces it by 10%.

To specify a maximum width or height, select Print to desired width, then specify the width and height in pages. This setting prints the notebook on as many pages as you specify.

Related Topics

More Info


About Spreadsheet Page Setup Options

Use File [image] Page Setup [image] Options to specify whether to include headings, borders, gridlines, and cell formulas in your printout. You can also specify the space between selections in the printed document.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

To print column or row headings on each page

To print gridlines and row/column borders

To print cell formulas

To center print selections between left and right margins

To space printouts of noncontiguous or 3-D selections

To restore default print settings

To save new default print settings


To print column or row headings on each page
To print column or row headings on each page,

1	Click File [image] Page Setup.

2	Click the Options tab.

3	Specify a Top Heading (for a row of headings) or Left Heading (for a column of headings):

To specify a top heading, select the address of any cell in the row to use; the entire row is used regardless of which cell you select.

To specify a left heading, select the address of any cell in the column to use; the entire column is used as the heading regardless of which cell you select.

Selecting cells makes all columns (for a left heading) and all rows (for a top heading) in the cells print as headings.

Tip

Do not include top or left headings in the print selection, or they will print twice. For example, if you have specified A2..G2 as a top heading, and you want to print all data through row 30, specify A3..G30 as the print selection.

Related Topics

More Info


To print gridlines and row/column borders
To print gridlines and row/column borders,

1	Click File [image] Page Setup.

2	Click the Options tab.

3	To print gridlines, check the Gridlines box in the Print Options group.

4	To print row and column borders, check the Row/Column Borders box.

Related Topics

More Info


To print cell formulas
To print cell formulas,

1	Click File [image] Page Setup.

2	Click the Options tab.

3	Check the Cell Formulas box in the Print Options group.

Tips

When you print using Cell Formulas, the following print features are disabled: Center Cells, Left and Top Heading, Gridlines, and Row/Column borders.

Corel Quattro Pro prints the contents of each cell, one per line, just as they appear on the input line when you select a cell. This includes each cell's address and contents as entered, as well as any comments you have added to the regular cell contents.

The information is printed in the font specified under Header Font (in the File [image] Page Setup [image] Header/Footer tab).

Related Topics

More Info


To center print selections between left and right margins
To center print selections between left and right margins,

1	Click File [image] Page Setup.

2	Click the Options tab, then check Center Cells in the Print Options group.

Tips

By default, the first column of each contiguous selection within the print area prints at the left margin.

Extra blank columns on the right side of a print selection will affect centering by printing the data closer to the left margin. Do not include these blank columns in the print selection if you want the data to be centered.

Related Topics

More Info


To space printouts of noncontiguous or 3-D selections
To space printouts of noncontiguous or 3-D selections,

1	Click File [image] Page Setup.

2	Click the Options tab.

3	In the Print Between Selections group, click Lines, then specify the number of lines to put between each selection.

4	In the Print Between 3D Sheets group, click Lines, then specify the number of lines to put between each page.

Tips

Each noncontiguous selection or sheet of a 3-D selection prints as though it was selected individually.

One line equals a sixth of an inch.

To start each subitem or sheet on a new printed page, click Page Advance (just below the Lines radio button).

Related Topics

More Info


About Restoring and Saving Default Print Settings

If you change settings in either the Spreadsheet Print dialog box or Spreadsheet Page Setup dialog box, then want to restore the original settings, click the Load Defaults button in the Spreadsheet Page Setup dialog box. Current settings change back to the defaults.

Initially, these are defaults set when Corel Quattro Pro is installed. To save new defaults for either dialog box, enter the Page Setup settings to use as defaults. Then, click Save Defaults. The next time you click Load Defaults, the saved defaults appear instead of the original settings.

If you print several different types of reports, you can create and use named settings for each report type. Choosing Load Defaults does not clear named settings.

To restore default print settings

To save new default print settings

Related Concepts


To restore default print settings
To restore default print settings,

1	Click File [image] Page Setup.

2	Click the Load Defaults button then click OK.

Current print settings change back to the defaults.

Related Topics

More Info


To save new default print settings
To save new default print settings,

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Make whatever changes you want to the print settings.

3	Click the Save Settings button, click OK, then click Close.

4	Click File [image] Page Setup.

5	Click the Save Defaults button, then click OK.

Related Topics

More Info


About Saving Print Settings

Many notebooks contain more than one report. You can store print settings for each report and save them with the notebook. Saved settings include all options in the following dialog boxes:

Spreadsheet Print (click File [image] Print)

Spreadsheet Page Setup (click File [image] Page Setup)

Named print settings are saved with the notebook.

To save the current print settings as a named group

To print using a named setting

Related Concepts


To save the current print settings as a named group
To save the current print settings as a named group,

1	Click File [image] Page Setup.

2	Click the Named Settings tab.

3	To add the current settings as a new group, enter its name in the New Set edit field, then click Add.

4	Click OK to save the settings.

Tips

To update an existing group, click File [image] Page Setup [image] Named Settings [image] click the name to update, then click Update.

To remove a name from the list, click File [image] Page Setup [image] Named Settings [image], click the name to delete, then click Delete.

Since named settings are saved with the notebook, use File [image] Save to save your file after changing them.

Related Topics

More Info


To print using a named setting
To print using a named setting,

1	Click File [image] Page Setup.

2	Click the Named Settings tab.

3	Choose the group of settings to use.

4	Click Use.

Related Topics

More Info


About Print Preview

You can use File [image] Print Preview (or the Print Preview button in the File [image] Print dialog box) to see an onscreen preview of how the document will appear.

The current zoom level displays to the right of Zoom. When previewing, left-click the sheet or click the Zoom In button [image] to zoom in a level, increasing detail; right-click the sheet or click the Zoom Out button [image] to zoom out a level, decreasing detail. You can use scroll bars to adjust the section of the sheet viewed.

The Toolbar provides a variety of tools for controlling a document while previewing. When you point to a tool, its name appears in a yellow box.

To preview a print job

To view a list of keys you can use while previewing

Related Concepts


To preview a print job
To preview a print job,

Click File [image] Print Preview.

Tip

To end the preview, click the End Preview button (the X) on the Toolbar.

Related Topics

More Info


About Printing to a File

Printing to a Binary File

If you want to print from a machine that does not have Corel Quattro Pro installed, or if you take your printing to a service bureau with high quality printers, you can store the document in a file. This file, called a binary file, contains instructions in the printer's native language for creating the document. For example, if your printer is a PostScript printer, Corel Quattro Pro creates a PostScript file. If your printer is an HP LaserJet, it creates a PCL (Printer Control Language) file.

Printing to an ASCII File

Sometimes you need to prepare an ASCII, or plain text, file of Corel Quattro Pro output. For example, you might want to import Corel Quattro Pro data into an application whose format is not available through File [image] Save.

Tip

You can also click File [image] Save As to save a notebook sheet as a tab-delimited text file.

To print to a binary file

To print to a text file

Related Concepts


To print to a binary file
To print to a binary file,

1	Click File [image] Print [image] Details.

2	Select the printer from the Name list that the document will eventually be sent to.

3	Click Print to file.

4	Enter the file name in the text box. If you do not specify a file extension, the extension .PRN is used. To store the file in a directory other than the default, or on a floppy disk, include the complete path.

5	Click Print.

Printing in Corel Quattro Pro now sends the output to the binary file (overwriting the old file each time), not the printer.

6	To set printing to normal, click File [image] Print [image] Details, then select Port.

Tip

To print a binary file from DOS, use the DOS COPY command with the /B parameter:

COPY filename.PRN /B LPT1

This sends a binary file (/B) to the LPT1 printer port. If your printer is connected to a different port (such as COM1 or PRN), specify it instead of LPT1.

Related Topics

More Info


To print to a text file
To print to a text file,

1	Change to the alternative menu system:

Click Tools [image] Settings.

Click the Macro tab.

In the Slash Key text box, select Quattro Pro - DOS.

2	Press /P to display the Print menu.

3	Click Destination [image] Text File.

4	Enter the file name, including path, and click OK.

5	Press /P, verify the other print settings (including Block), then click Spreadsheet Print.

Output prints to the file you specified. To restore the default Corel Quattro Pro for Windows menus, perform the alternative menu selection steps listed previously, but choose Menu Bar instead of Quattro Pro - DOS.

Tip

This method is useful for sending small portions of your notebook to an ASCII text file.

Related Topics

More Info


About Printing Charts

Printing a chart is the same as printing notebook data, except:

You can set the chart's aspect ratio before printing.

You can print multiple charts from the Objects sheet by selecting their icons before printing. To select mulitple chart icons, press the Shift key, then click the chart icons you want. You can also print all charts in a slide show by selecting the Slide Show icon first.

To print a chart

Related Concepts


To print a chart
To print a chart,

1	Select a chart on a notebook sheet, a chart icon on the Objects sheet, or a slide in a Light Table window.

2	Click File [image] Print.

3	Click Print.

Tips

 	Click the border of a chart on a notebook sheet to select ig.

To adjust print settings, click File [image] Page Setup.

You can print multiple charts from the Objects sheet by selecting their icons before printing. You can also print all charts in a slide show by selecting the Slide Show icon first.

Related Topics

More Info


To publish an Envoy document
To publish an Envoy document,

1	Click File [image] Send To [image] Envoy.

2	Specify whether you want to publish the notebook, sheet, or selected cells.

3	Click Print.

Tips

If the Send To Envoy option is not available, you can get the Envoy print driver from the Internet. For more information, see http://www.corel.com/products/wordperfect/envoy7.

You can save the Envoy document by clicking File [image] Save.

You can view an Envoy document without having Corel Quattro Pro installed on your system.

More Info


Formatting with the Toolbar and Property Bar

Toolbar buttons and Property Bar lists help you format cells or text within cells. You can

Set type to bold, italic, or bold italic, superscript, subscript, or strikeout

Set type font and point size

Align labels and values in cells: left, right, centered, or centered over cells

Draw lines and boxes

Apply styles to labels and values

Apply formats to cells of data and labels

Resize columns and rows

In each case, you are using shortcuts to set properties or groups of properties.

To choose boldface, italic, underline, superscript, subscript, or strikeout using the Toolbar

To enter special font characters

To change the color of text

To change font size

To change fonts using the Property Bar

To align data using the Property Bar

To center text over cells

To draw lines and boxes

To zoom a sheet using the Property Bar

To apply a style to cells

To apply a predesigned format to cells

Resizing rows and columns

Related Concepts


To choose boldface, italic, underline, superscript, subscript, or strikeout using the Toolbar
To choose boldface, italic, underline, superscript, subscript, or strikeout using the Property Bar,

Click [image] to make text bold.

Click [image] to make text italic.

Click [image] to underline text.

Click [image] to superscript text.

Click [image] to subscript text.

Click [image] to strikeout text.

Tips

To toggle off bold, italic, underline, superscript, subscript, or strikeout, click the button again.

To change only some of the data in a cell, double-click the cell, select the data, then click a button on the Property Bar.

Related Topics

More Info


To change font size
To change font size,

Use one of these methods:

Click the Size list on the Property Bar, then select a font size.

Click [image], then click the Cell Font tab. Select a point size for the font.

Right-click a cell, select Cell Properties, then select the Cell Font tab. Select a point size for the font.

Tip

If you enlarge or reduce the font size, the row height changes to display the tallest letters in the row (unless you have set the row height in the Row/Column tab using [image].

Related Topics

More Info


To change fonts using the Property Bar
To change fonts using the Property Bar,

1	Click the Font list on the Property Bar.

2	Choose a font from the list.

Tip

You can use [image] to set other font options in the Cell Font tab.

Related Topics

More Info


To align data using the Property Bar
To align data using the Property Bar,

1	Select the cells you want to align.

2	Click [image] on the Property Bar.

3	Click an option. (You can also point to an option to see what it does: General, Left, Center, Right, Center Across Cells to span several cells, or Indent.)

Tip

To set the default alignment of all labels, change the alignment setting of the Normal style. Click Format [image] Styles. Set Define Style For to Normal. Click Alignment, then set the alignment style.

Related Topics

More Info


To center text over cells
To center text over cells,

1	Type the text to be centered in the leftmost cell of the cells to center across. If you are centering text in row 12 across columns C, D, and E, type the text to be centered in C12.

2	Highlight the cells to center within, starting with the cell containing the text: C12..E12, in this example.

3	Click [image] in the Property Bar and click Center Across Cells.

The text moves to the center of the selected cells. To display the centered text in the input line, click the cell where the text was originally entered.

Tip

Shading applied to the leftmost cell appears in the rest of the cells. For example, if cell C12 in the previous figure is shaded red, D12 and E12 also are red.

Related Topics

More Info


Multiple Entries when Centering Across Cells

If you enter text in a second cell where text is centered across cells, the first entry is centered over formatted cells to the left of the next entry. The position of the next entry depends on the alignment character typed before it, as shown in the next figure:

If ', the new text is left-aligned in its entry cell.

If ", the new text is right-aligned in its entry cell.

If ^, the new text is centered over the remaining blank cells in the formatted cells.


To zoom a sheet using the Property Bar
To zoom a sheet using the Property Bar,

1	Click the Zoom Factor list on the Toolbar.

2	Select a percentage to enlarge or reduce the active sheet. You can click Selection to expand the current selection to fill the screen.

Tips

You can also use View [image] Zoom to zoom a sheet.

Zoom Factor affects only onscreen display, not printed output.

Related Topics

More Info


About Styles

Corel Quattro Pro contains several predefined styles, each of which is identified by a name.

Use the Style list on the Property Bar to apply a style to cells. The default style is Normal.

Styles included with Corel Quattro Pro:

Comma	Sets Numeric Format to Comma with two decimals

Comma0	Sets Numeric Format to Comma with no decimals

Currency	Sets Numeric Format to Currency with two decimals

Currency0	Sets Numeric Format to Currency with no decimals

Date	Sets Numeric Format to User Defined (with the date format specified; click here [image] for details)

Fixed	Sets Numeric Format to Fixed with two decimals

Heading 1	Sets Font to Arial (or Helvetica) 18 point bold

Heading 2	Sets Font to Arial (or Helvetica) 12 point bold

Normal	Sets Numeric Format and Alignment to General; sets Font to Arial (or Helvetica) 10 point regular; sets Shading to White; sets Line Drawing to None; turns Protection on; and sets Text Color to Black.

Percent	Sets Numeric Format to Percent

Total	Inserts a double line above the active cell

To define a style

To apply a style to cells


To apply a style to cells
To apply a style to cells,

1	Select the cells(s).

2	Click the Style list on the Property Bar.

3	Click a style.

Tip

The default style is Normal.

Related Topics

More Info


About SpeedFormat

Instead of setting properties in individual cells, you can choose a predefined set of properties to apply to different parts of what you select. This set of properties is called a format, which you apply with Format [image] SpeedFormat. You can create custom formats.

The different parts that a format can affect are:

column headings (cells in the top row)

column totals (cells in the bottom row)

row headings (cells in the left column)

row totals (cells in the right column)

subtotals (column and row totals occurring within the selection)

the body (remaining cells in the selection)

A format consists of a series of property settings for each of the parts of the selection. You can apply a format to the body and selectively to any of the other parts. You can also control which properties of a format to apply.

When you use SpeedFormat, it overrides existing property settings. For example, suppose you shade an entire selection using [image]. If you use SpeedFormat, choose a partially shaded format and click Shading, the original shading will be removed and recolored to match shading settings for the chosen format.

You can create custom SpeedFormats or revise existing ones.

To apply a predesigned format to cells

To create a custom format

To delete a format

Related Concepts


To apply a predesigned format to cells
To apply a predesigned format to cells,

1	Select the cells to be formatted.

2	Click [image] or click here [image] for a shortcut.

3	Choose a format.

4	Deselect any properties you do not want applied to the cells.

5	Deselect any parts (column headings, row headings, column totals, row totals, or subtotals) you do not want included as part of the format.

Tip

SpeedFormat properties override existing property settings.

Related Topics

More Info


To create a custom format
To create a custom format,

1	Click [image] to format selected cells. Change any of these properties: Numeric Format, Font, Shading, Text Color, Alignment, Line Drawing, and Column Width (Auto-Width setting on or off).

You can format each of these areas separately: column headings, column totals, row headings, row totals, subtotals, and the body of the table. These cells serve as an example of the format you want to create.

2	Select the example cells--data and headings--and click Format [image] SpeedFormat, or click here [image] for a shortcut.

3	Click Add.

4	Enter the name of the new format in the Format Name field.

5	Enter the coordinates of the example cells in the Example Cells field.

6	Click OK to save the format. Now, it is available in the SpeedFormat dialog box and you can apply it to other tables.

Related Topics

More Info


To delete a format
To delete a format,

1	Select a blank cell.

2	Click Format [image] SpeedFormat, or click here [image] for a shortcut.

3	Select the format to delete in the Formats list.

4	Click Delete.

Related Topics

More Info


About Resizing Rows and Columns

There are several ways to change the width of columns or height of rows. You can

use the QuickFit button [image] in the Toolbar to tailor column width to the longest entry in the column.

drag the row or column border with the mouse.

specify an exact numerical setting with the cell Column Width and Row Height properties.

You can also hide rows or columns from being displayed, yet retain the data for other cells to reference for calculation in the notebook.

Finally, you can set a global width for all columns in the active sheet with the sheet Default Width property.

To set column width automatically

To resize rows and columns with the mouse

To set column width to an exact size

To resize rows to exact sizes

To hide rows or columns

To change the default column width for a sheet


To set column width automatically
To set column width automatically,

1	Select the cells whose column width you want to change.

2	Click Format [image] QuickFit.

Tips

You can use QuickFit on multiple columns at the same time (they must be contiguous).

QuickFit adjusts column width to one character wider than the longest entry in a given column.

Related Topics

More Info


To resize rows and columns with the mouse
To resize rows and columns with the mouse,

1	Move the cursor over the right edge of the column border to be resized, or over the bottom edge of the row border to be resized.

The pointer turns into a double-arrow: (the left pointer is for resizing rows, the right pointer for resizing columns).

2	Drag the pointer until the row or column has reached the size you want.

Tip

You can also resize several rows or several columns in the same sheet to a uniform size. Select several rows or columns, then drag the double-arrow pointer for the governing column or row.

Related Topics

More Info


About Cell Properties

Most cell properties affect the appearance of cell entries or of rows or columns. To set cell properties directly,

1	Select the cells you want to affect.

2	Click [image].

You can change many properties at the same time. You can see an example of what your changes will look like before you click OK.

The coordinates of the selected cells appear in the title bar. This helps you confirm which cells you are affecting.

For information about formatting using the Property Bar, click [image].

To set the numeric format for cells

To choose a font

To shade cells

To align data in cells

To draw lines and boxes

To change the color of text

To set column width to an exact size

To resize rows to exact sizes

To hide rows or columns

To reveal hidden rows or columns

To unprotect cells on a sheet

To restrict entries in cells to a certain type of data

Tips

Although it is tempting to preset cell properties in large areas of the notebook, doing so consumes memory. It is more efficient to set properties only in the cells or sheets you are currently using. Or, change the Normal style to change default properties.

If you move a cell, its properties move with the data and are removed from the original cell. If you copy a cell, the copy takes on the properties of the original cell. If you paste cells you copied or cut with Edit [image] Paste Special, you can control whether the cell's properties are pasted (click here [image] for details).

Related Concepts


About Numeric Format

When you enter numbers, they display as you enter them (in the Normal style, unless you have changed the Normal style).

To change how the number displays (add commas, dollar signs, or other characters to the number), you can select a predefined format or set the numeric format.

To change from Normal to another predefined format, choose a style from the Property Bar (Comma, Currency, and so on).

To determine how many decimal places to display, you will want to set the numeric format.

Tip

All numeric formats leave the cell values intact; they affect only the way values are displayed.

To set the numeric format for cells

Related Concepts


To set the numeric format for cells
To set the numeric format for cells,

1	Select the cells you want to format.

2	Click [image].

3	Click the Numeric Format tab.

4	Choose one of the formats listed.

If the format you chose allows a variable number of decimal places, an edit field appears. Type a number from 0 to 15 (the default is 2).

If you click General, numbers display exactly as you enter them (unless the column width is too narrow).

If you click Currency, choose the country whose currency symbol you want to use.

If you click Date, choose a specific date format.

If you click Time, choose a specific time format.

If you click User Defined, you can choose from a list of formats you create yourself.

Tips

By default, when you enter a number, the column widens to fit the number (unless the number is interpreted as General format). If columns are not expanding when you enter numbers, click Tools [image] Settings [image] General [image] Fit-As-You-Go.

All numeric formats leave the cell values intact; they affect only the way values are displayed.

Related Topics

More Info


Formatting Date Serial Numbers

Corel Quattro Pro stores each date you enter as a five-digit serial number. Corel Quattro Pro uses this number for calculations. If you type a date, it displays in the format in which you type it. If you enter the date using @DATE, @DATEVALUE, or @NOW, you must reformat the cells with the Date numeric format. Otherwise, Corel Quattro Pro displays the results as a date serial number. For example, 33857 appears instead of 10-Sep-92.

Related Concepts


Precision of Calculations

Numeric Formatting does not affect the way Corel Quattro Pro stores values, only the way it displays them. For example, some formats limit the number of decimal places that appear. This does not affect the precision of Corel Quattro Pro calculations, which are accurate to 16 significant digits. The stored number is displayed on the input line when you select a cell.

A significant digit is any digit that is not a leading zero. Decimals, commas, dollar signs, and percent signs do not count as part of the total. For example, the number 1.23 has three significant digits. The number .000123 also has three significant digits because the leading zeros do not count.

Corel Quattro Pro rounds the appearance of numbers to the specified decimal place in the case of Fixed, Scientific, Currency, Comma, and Percent formats. The +/- format truncates decimal numbers to whole integers. The General format rounds off fractional numbers as necessary to fit in the cell.

To round the number actually stored in a cell, use @ROUND.

Related Concepts


To choose a font
To choose a font,

1	Select the cells whose font you want to change.

2	Click [image].

3	Click the Cell Font tab.

4	Choose the Font face, Font size, and options you want to use.

Tips

You can also choose a font from the Property Bar, which appears above the column letters.

If a font has a TT (TrueType) or a (ATM) symbol beside it, text in that font will appear in print just as it does onscreen. Fonts with a printer symbol will print on your printer, but may not appear in the correct font onscreen. Fonts without a symbol appear accurately onscreen, but may not appear in correct font when printed.

If you enlarge or reduce the font size, the row height changes to display the tallest letters in the row.

To add a line or double underline for totals or grand totals, click the cell, click  [image] [image] Cell Font [image] Single Line or Double Line under Accounting Style.

Related Topics

More Info


To shade cells
To shade cells,

1	Select the cells.

2	Click [image].

Tips

With some color choices, you need to deselect the cells to see the new shading. This is because selected cells are shown in reverse color.

If shading does not appear on your printout, you may need to choose a darker color. Light colors print as white on some printers.

If you want to select more colors, click More. Choose the two colors to be mixed by clicking color squares in Color 1 and Color 2. Then, choose the Blend square that provides the mix you want.

Related Topics

More Info


About Aligning Entries in Cells

You can align data horizontally at the right or left edge of a cell, centered within a cell, or centered over cells. These alignments are basic--if the entry is wider than the cell, it spills over into adjacent cells. You can use the Alignment options to wrap data within a single cell, align data vertically, and display entries vertically.

Horizontal Alignment

General alignment right-aligns values and left-aligns labels. Left, Right, Center, and Indent perform left-alignment, right-alignment, centering of entries, and indenting, respectively. Center Across Cells centers text across the selected cells.

Vertical Alignment

Vertical Alignment options position data from top to bottom within a cell.

Text Orientation

Normally, text displays horizontally within a cell, from left to right. The Orientation alignment option offers vertical orientation, so text displays from top to bottom. Click horizontal or vertical.

Cell Options

By default, when you enter long labels into cells, they extend into adjoining cells on the right, the left, or both, depending on the alignment setting for each cell. To make text wrap within a cell without spilling over into other cells, click Wrap Text. This feature works only on text, not numeric data.

Where text may spill over into other cells, you can also join the cells together. To join selected cells, click Join Cells.

To align data in cells

Related Concepts


To align data in cells
To align data in cells,

1	Select the cells you want to align.

2	Click [image] on the Property Bar.

3	Click an option. (You can point to an option to see what it does: General, Left, Center, Right, Center Across Cells to span several cells, or Indent.)

To access all alignment options,

1	Click [image].

2	Click the Alignment tab.

3	Select any options.

For help about a dialog box option, click [image], then click the option.

Related Topics

More Info


About Drawing Lines Around Cells

With the Line Drawing property, you can draw lines around the sides and tops of cells. You can also set the thickness and color of lines.

You can combine line drawing options in the same selection. For example, you can draw a double-lined border around the entire selection, and draw single vertical lines between the columns in the selection.

You can also apply the chosen line type in a preset pattern by clicking one of the three pattern boxes.

The lines you draw in the sample box indicate where lines will be drawn within the selected cells. For example, clicking the outer edges of the sample box draws lines only on the outside of the selection; clicking the inner lines in the sample box draws lines between every row or column in the selected cells.

The default line color is black. To change the line colors available, use the notebook Palette property. If you create a new color for the palette that is dithered and later choose it for the Line Color option, your lines will appear in a substitute, nondithered color. You can use dithered colors for other elements besides text and drawn lines.

To draw lines and boxes

Related Concepts


To draw lines and boxes
To draw lines and boxes,

To choose from predefined lines and boxes,

1	Select the cells that you want to draw lines around and between.

2	Click [image] on the Property Bar, and choose a line or box drawing.

To create your own line combination,

1	Select the cells, then click [image] [image] Border/Fill.

2	Click a line segment on the left. Use Shift+click to select multiple line segments.

3	Click a border type or border color, or apply the chosen line type in a preset pattern by clicking one of the three pattern boxes.

Tips

To remove lines when you are creating your own lines, click the lines you want to remove in the sample, then click the No Line type.

If you change your mind as you are creating your own lines, click the line you recently changed, then click the No Change line type. It returns the line to the line type in effect when you last clicked OK. To cancel all changes, click Cancel.

Related Topics

More Info


To change the color of text
To change the color of text,

1	Select the cells your want to change, then click [image].

2	Choose the color you want. If you already changed the cell's shading, make sure the Text Color setting will contrast enough to be visible.

Tips

If text does not appear on your printout, you may need to choose a darker color. Light colors print as white on some printers.

With most color choices, you need to deselect the cells to see the new shading. This is because selected cells are shown in reverse color.

To change the colors available, click Format [image] Notebook [image] Palette. If you create a new color for the palette that is dithered and later choose it for the Text Color, your text will appear in a substitute, nondithered color. You can use dithered colors for other elements besides text and drawn lines.

Related Topics

More Info


To set column width to an exact size
To set column width to an exact size,

1	Select any cell in each column you want to resize, or select their borders. You can also select noncontiguous columns.

2	Click [image].

3	Click the Row/Column tab.

4	Click Set Width. Then, click Characters, Inches, or Centimeters, and enter the number you want in the Column Width edit field.

To return column width to the default, click Reset Width instead of Set Width.

To resize contiguous columns based on the longest entry instead of an exact measurement, click [image] on the Toolbar. If entire or partial columns are selected, the width is based on the longest entry in the selection. If a single-row (or just one cell) is selected, the width is based on the longest entry in that row and all cells below it.

Tips

The setting of the sheet Default Width determines the default column width. Columns whose widths you have explicitly adjusted (using Format [image] QuickFit, the mouse, or the Column Width property) are not controlled by the Default Width property.

If a column you are adjusting contains a long entry that spills over into blank cells to the right, and you do not want the column adjusted to that cell entry's length, specify more than one row but that stops short of the cell.

Related Topics

More Info


To resize rows to exact sizes
To resize rows to exact sizes,

1	Select a row.

2	Click [image].

3	Click the Row/Column tab.

4	Click Set height, then click Points, Inches, or Centimeters, and enter the number you want in the Height Options edit field.

Tips

To return the row height to the default (as determined by the largest font used in the row), click Reset Height.

You can also click Format [image] Selection [image] Row/Column.

Related Topics

More Info


About Hiding Rows and Columns

You can temporarily remove rows or columns of data from view and from printouts, but still use the data in calculations. With Reveal/Hide, you can hide rows or columns from view without losing the data they contain. You can later redisplay the rows or columns with the same property.

Columns to the right of the hidden columns move left to fill in the empty space, or rows below the hidden rows move up. However, the identifying row numbers and column letters in the borders do not change. In other words, if you hide column B, the columns onscreen are labeled A, C, D, and so on.

If you use Tools [image] Data Tools [image] Extract To File to save part of a notebook that includes hidden rows or columns, Corel Quattro Pro saves the hidden rows or columns in the new file, although they will still be hidden from view when you open the file.

To hide rows or columns

To reveal hidden rows or columns

Related Concepts


To hide rows or columns
To hide rows or columns,

1	Select the rows or columns to hide.

2	Right-click the rows or columns, then click Hide.

Tips

To hide all rows and columns on a notebook sheet, select a cell in each column or row you want to hide, then follow the same steps.

You can also click Format [image] Selection [image] Row/Column.

Related Topics

More Info


To reveal hidden rows or columns
To reveal hidden rows or columns,

1	Select an area containing cells on both sides of the hidden area.

2	Click [image].

3	Click the Row/Column tab.

4	Click Reveal under Column options or Row options.

Tip

You can also reveal a single hidden row or column with the mouse. To reveal a hidden column, place the mouse pointer slightly to the right of the hidden column’s border, then drag. For a hidden row, drag from just below the hidden row’s border. The hidden row or column is revealed and sized as you drag. For example, you can use this technique to reveal row 1 and column A when they are hidden.

Related Topics

More Info


About Protecting Cells

The Protection sheet property lets you protect cells and objects on entire sheets. You can then remove protection from individual cells. That way, you can enter data in those cells, leaving the remainder of the sheet protected.

When a cell is protected, you cannot edit, replace, or delete its contents. Nor can you delete a column or row that contains a protected cell.

Tips

When you disable cell protection with the Protection sheet property, no cells are protected, even those you protected individually by clicking [image] [image] Protect [image] Constraints.

With sheet protection enabled for cells, you can move the selector around the entire sheet, but you can make changes only to unprotected cells. To restrict the selector to unprotected cells only, use the {RestrictInput.Option} macro command.

To protect cells and floating objects on a sheet

To unprotect cells on a sheet

Related Concepts


To unprotect cells on a sheet
To unprotect cells on a sheet,

1	Select the cells.

2	Click [image].

3	Click the Constraints tab.

4	Set Cell Protection to Unprotect.

Tip

The Cell Protection option works with the sheet Protection property. If you are creating a data entry form for other users, protect the entire sheet, then unprotect the cells you want users to edit.

Related Topics

More Info


To restrict entries in cells to a certain type of data
To restrict entries in cells to a certain type of data,

1	Select the cells.

2	Click [image].

3	Click the Constraints tab.

4	Set Data Input Constraints to General, Labels Only, or Dates Only to indicate the type of data the cells can accept. Dates Only restricts entries to dates or times.

Tips

To return to unlimited data entry, follow the same procedures but in step 3 set Data Input Constraints to General.

If someone types a date, time, or number in a label-only cell, it is converted to a label. If someone tries to type a label or number into a date-only cell, an error message appears.

Related Topics

More Info


About Sheet Properties

To change sheet properties, do one of the following:

Click Format [image] Sheet, or

Right-click the sheet tab.

You can use sheet properties to

Set display options--suppress the display of zero values, hide and show page borders and grid lines

"Zoom"--enlarge and shrink the sheet display

Name sheets

Set cell and object protection for a sheet

Set default conditional cell color and column width for a sheet

Color-code sheet tabs

To stop zeros from displaying on a sheet

To remove row and column borders from a sheet

To hide spreadsheet grid lines from a sheet

To name a sheet

To rename a sheet to its original letter name

To protect cells and floating objects on a sheet

To change the color of specific types of data

To change the default column width for a sheet

To change the color of a sheet tab


To stop zeros from displaying on a sheet
To stop zeros from displaying on a sheet,

1	Select a sheet.

2	Click Format [image] Sheet.

3	Click the Display tab.

4	Click No in the Display Zeros group.

Tips

All values that equal exactly zero are suppressed. For example, a value such as .004 that appears as 0 if decimal precision is 0, will still appear even if Display Zeros is set to No, because it is not actually 0.

Zero suppression does not remove zero values from the sheet. They remain in memory and reappear if you set Display Zeros to Yes.

When Display Zeros is set to No (zeros are suppressed), it is easy to accidentally write over cells containing formulas that evaluate as zero. Make sure Undo is enabled, or consider protecting the sheet.

You can also right-click the sheet tab, then select Sheet Properties to stop zeros from displaying on a sheet.

Related Topics

More Info


To remove row and column borders from a sheet
To remove row and column borders from a sheet,

1	Select a sheet.

2	Click Format [image] Sheet.

3	Click the Display tab.

4	Deselect Row Borders (numbers) and/or Column Borders (letters) in the Border Options group.

Tips

To show row and column borders again, follow the same procedure and click the type of border to show.

You can also right-click the sheet tab, then select Sheet Properties to remove row and column borders.

Related Topics

More Info


To hide spreadsheet grid lines from a sheet
To hide spreadsheet grid lines from a sheet,

1	Select a sheet.

2	Click Format [image] Sheet.

3	Click the Display tab.

4	Deselect Horizontal and/or Vertical in the Grid Lines group.

Tips

To show grid lines again, follow the same procedure and click the type of lines to show.

The Grid Lines setting affects only onscreen display. Grid lines do not print. Use the Line Drawing cell property to produce printed grids.

You can also right-click the sheet tab, then select Sheet Properties to hide spreadsheet grid lines.

Related Topics

More Info


About Zooming In or Out

You can reduce or enlarge the displayed size of all cells on a sheet. View [image] Zoom and the Zoom Factor sheet property let you pull back to see a whole printed page, or focus in on the detail of a few cells.

Tip

The Zoom Factor setting does not affect printed output. To scale printed documents, click File [image] Page Setup, then click the Print Scaling tab.

To zoom in or out

To zoom a sheet using the Property Bar


About Sheet Names

Sheets are initially named with letters of the alphabet in sequence, from A to Z, continuing from AA to AZ, up to IV. You can assign a descriptive name to a sheet. You can use up to 64 characters--letters and numbers--in the name, as well as these special characters:

~   `   !   %   _   |   \   '   ?

To name a sheet

To rename a sheet to its original letter name

Related Concepts


To name a sheet
To name a sheet,

1	Double-click the sheet tab, and type the name.

Tips

You can use up to 64 characters--letters and numbers--in the name, as well as these special characters:

~   `   !   %   _   |   \   '   ?

You can use blank spaces within a name (not at the beginning), but you cannot use a name previously assigned to a group in the same notebook.

When you rename a sheet, formulas that refer to the renamed sheet adjust to use the new name.

The Objects sheet (the last sheet in the notebook) cannot be renamed.

Related Topics

More Info


To rename a sheet to its original letter name
To rename a sheet to its original letter name,

1	Right-click the sheet tab.

2	Click Sheet Properties [image] Name [image] Reset

Related Topics

More Info


About Sheet Protection

With the sheet Protection property, you can prevent cell entries and floating objects from being changed.

To prevent unauthorized access to an entire notebook, protect it with a password.

Protecting Cells

The Protection sheet setting Enable Cell Locking works with Constraints cell. When Enable Cell Locking is checked, all cells on a sheet are protected against edits or data entry. Use sheet cell protection to set up protection for a sheet, then use cell protection (set through the Constraints cell property) to unprotect specific cells where changes are allowed.

Protecting Floating Objects

You can use the Protection sheet property to protect all floating objects on an entire sheet from being moved, resized, edited, or deleted. Protected objects include floating charts and graphic objects, linked and embedded DDE and OLE objects, drawn objects, and QuickButtons.

Tip

Individual objects also have a Protection property which can be set with [image] [image] Protection. When sheet protection of objects is disabled, Corel Quattro Pro ignores the status of objects that have been individually protected or unprotected.

To protect cells and floating objects on a sheet

Related Concepts


To protect cells and floating objects on a sheet
To protect cells and floating objects on a sheet,

1	Select a sheet.

2	Click Format [image] Sheet.

3	Click the Protection tab.

4	Click Enable Cell Locking (if unchecked) to protect all cells on a sheet from edits or data entry.

5	Click Enable Object Locking (if unchecked) to protect all floating objects on a sheet from being moved, resized, edited, or deleted.

Tips

You can unprotect individual cells and floating objects on the sheet by right-clicking them and changing their properties. To unprotect a floating object, turn off its protection property before enabling sheet protection.

When sheet protection of cells and objects is disabled, Corel Quattro Pro ignores the status of cells or floating objects that have been individually protected or unprotected.

Related Topics

More Info


About Coloring Conditional Cells

With the sheet Conditional Color property, you can change the color of specific types of data: values above or below a specified range, and ERR values. For example, you can use it to display all negative values in red or all values greater than 1000 in green. Choose from these settings in the Conditional Color property:

Smallest Normal Value and Greatest Normal Value let you enter a range of values you consider normal. Cells with values within this range will appear in the Normal Color. You can specify different colors for values above and below this range.

Below Normal Color sets the color of cells whose values are below the Smallest Normal Value.

Normal Color sets the color of cells whose values fall within the range set by Smallest Normal Value and Greatest Normal Value.

Above Normal Color sets the color of cells whose values are above the Greatest Normal Value.

ERR Color specifies the color to use for ERR and NA values generated by formula errors.

Enable indicates whether to use the colors set with this menu.

To change the color of specific types of data


To change the color of specific types of data
To change the color of specific types of data,

1	Select a sheet.

2	Click Format [image] Sheet.

3	Click the Conditional Color tab.

4	If you want to change the color of ERR values, click ERR Color in the Options box. Then skip to step 7.

5	If you want to change the color of values above, below, or within a specified normal range, type values for Smallest Normal Value and Greatest Normal Value. The default settings are 0 (smallest) and 1E+300 (largest).

6	Click Below Normal Color, Normal Color, or Above Normal Color.

Below Normal Color sets the color of cells whose values are below the Smallest Normal Value.

Normal Color sets the color of cells whose values fall within the range set by Smallest Normal Value and Greatest Normal Value.

Above Normal Color sets the color of cells whose values are above the Greatest Normal Value.

7	Click a color square in the color palette.

8	Click Enable (if unchecked) to turn on conditional colors.

Tips

When Conditional Color is enabled, [image] [image] Cell Font [image] Text Color does not change the color of normal values.

To turn off conditional colors, deselect Enable.

If colored entries do not appear on your printout, you may need to choose a darker color. Light colors print as white on some printers.

Related Topics

More Info


To change the default column width for a sheet
To change the default column width for a sheet,

1	Right-click a sheet tab, then click Sheet Properties.

2	Click the Default Width tab.

3	Click Characters, Inches, or Centimeters and enter the number of units in the Column Width edit field.

Tips

By default, columns are wide enough to display approximately nine characters in the default font.

The Default Width setting does not affect columns that were changed using Format [image] QuickFit, [image] [image] Row/Column, or the mouse. Before those columns can be affected by a change in the default width, you must select them and click [image] [image] Row/Column, then click Reset Width.

Related Topics

More Info


To change the color of a sheet tab
To change the color of a sheet tab,

1	Right-click a sheet tab, then click Sheet Properties.

2	Click the Tab Color tab.

3	Deselect Use System Color if you want to use a color other than the default.

4	Click the color you want.

Tip

The default sheet tab color is white. You can create custom sheet tab colors.

Related Topics

More Info


About Creating a Slide Show

Corel Quattro Pro slide show features let you present your charts in a full-screen display with special transition effects.

If you are creating a slide show that consists mainly of bullet charts, click View [image] Draft, then click Tools [image] Slide Show [image] New.

If you are creating a slide show that has a mix of bullet charts and numeric charts, click To create a slide show below.

To create a slide show

Related Concepts


To create a slide show
To create a slide show,

1	Click View [image] Object, then click a blank area of the Objects sheet to deselect all chart icons.

2	Click Tools [image] New Slide Show.

3	Type a name for the slide show and click OK. The Light Table for the slide show appears.

4	Click Window [image] Tile Top to Bottom to display both the Objects sheet and the Light Table.

5	Add slides to the slide show from either the Light Table window or the Objects sheet.

To add an existing chart to your slide show. Drag the chart from the Objects sheet to the Light Table.

To create a slide,click [image].

6	To set effects, right-click the Light Table Light [image] Table Properties.

7	Click Default Effect, then set the default visual transition effect, display time, and other properties.

8	Click Tools [image] Slide Show [image] Play to start a test run. If slides have chart buttons, be sure to test them, too.

Tips

To quickly create multiple bullet charts and place them in a new slide show, click View [image] Draft, then click Tools [image] Slide Show [image] New Slide.

To select a background template for all slides in a slide show. Click Slides [image] Master Slide Gallery, select the style you want (you may need to scroll), then click OK.

Related Topics

More Info


About Slide Show Effects and Display Times

Corel Quattro Pro has special transition effects and timing parameters you set to make slide show presentations more interesting. When you want to assign the same effect and display time to the majority of slides in your presentation, change the default settings before you add slides to the slide show. (Changes to slide show defaults affect only those slides added after the settings are changed.)

To change slide show effects and display times

To adjust slide show defaults

Related Concepts


To adjust slide show defaults
To adjust slide show defaults,

1	Right-click a blank space in the Light Table, then select Light Table Properties.

2	Click Default Effect.

3	Make any changes to the following options:

Transition Effect controls the way each slide appears.

Slow, Medium, and Fast buttons control the speed of the transition effect.

Overlay Previous Slide makes the selected slide overlay the previous one instead of replacing it.

Use Master Slide makes the selected slide display the template style and chart elements used in the master slide. The master slide also affects the position and color of chart titles and bulleted text in bullet chart slides.

Skip Slide In Presentation skips the selected slide when viewing the slide show. You can skip a slide without removing it.

Display Time specifies how long (in seconds) the slide remains on screen. Enter zero when you want the slide to stay on screen until the viewer clicks the mouse or presses a key.

Tips

Changes to slide show defaults affect only those slides added after the settings are changed.

After you create slides, you can use the buttons on the Property Bar to adjust slide show effects and display times for individual slides.

Related Topics

More Info


Adding Transition Effects

By default, each slide immediately wipes right to the next slide in a slide show. You can choose a different effect from the Effect list at the bottom of the Light Table dialog box. This list contains all the visual transition effects available. The effect you assign to a chart controls how that chart appears. (The way the chart disappears from the screen depends on the transition effect of the next slide in the slide show.)

The names of the effects in the list box describe what the effect does. When the Overlay box is checked, the second image overlays the first instead of replacing it. The best way to choose a visual effect is to try as many as you can, then select the most appropriate one. Here are some tips on using visual effects:

Use wipes to simulate turning a page because the second slide appears to be underneath the first one. Use tilts to give the effect of one image pushing away another.

Avoid slower effects like the dissolve--2x2 pixels unless there is good reason to keep your viewers waiting (perhaps to increase suspense). Moderate dissolves and fade out/fade in can be restful, but fast dissolves (when run at full speed) can appear almost violent.

Use overlays to build slides from other ones. This is often effective when discussing a list of bulleted items. The first slide shows only the first bulleted item. The second slide then builds on the first by adding the second item. The subsequent slides continue building until all items are onscreen.

Take care to match the effects to the overall tone of your presentation. Showy effects like spirals, sides to center, center to sides, vertical stripes, or diamonds are best in small doses; they can look out of place in a serious slide show.

The speed of the transition effect is controlled by the Slow, Medium, and Fast buttons.

If you want the slide to remain on the screen for a set number of seconds (up to 3600) instead of waiting for the viewer to click or press a key, enter a number in the Display Time edit field. Entering 0 (the default) means the slide stays on the screen until the viewer clicks the mouse or presses a key.

Related Concepts


Ways to Add Slides to a Slide Show

There are several methods you can use to add slides to a slide show:

To add slides when you create a slide show

To add slides by dragging and dropping

To insert an existing chart into a slide show

To create a new slide from the Light Table window

To copy charts and slides into a slide show using the Clipboard


To add slides when you create a slide show
To add slides when you create a slide show,

1	Click View [image] Objects.

2	Hold down the Shift key and select several chart icons on the Objects sheet.

3	Click Tools [image] New Slide Show, type a name for the slide show, then click OK.

The charts are automatically added to the slide show in the order in which they were selected.

Tip

If you select a slide by mistake, hold down the Shift key and click the slide to deselect it.

Related Topics

More Info


To add slides by dragging and dropping
To add slides by dragging and dropping,

You can drag and drop charts and slides to add them to a slide show using any of these methods:

Drag one or more slides in a Light Table window and drop them into another Light Table window. Click Window [image] Tile Top to Bottom to display two Light Table windows.

Drag one or more chart icons or slide show icons on the Objects sheet and drop them on a slide show icon.

Drag one or more chart icons on the Objects sheet and drop them into a Light Table window. Click Window [image] Tile Top to Bottom to display the Light Table and the Objects sheet windows.

Tips

To copy slides using drag and drop, press Ctrl as you select and drag slides.

You can also drag slides from the Light Table window onto a notebook sheet to create a chart.

Related Topics

More Info


To insert an existing chart into a slide show
To insert an existing chart into a slide show,

1	Select a slide in the Light Table window.

2	Click Slides [image] New Slide [image] From Existing Chart.

3	Select a chart.

The slide is inserted before the currently selected slide.

Related Topics

More Info


To create a new slide from the Light Table window
To create a new slide from the Light Table window,

To create a slide,click [image]. For information about an option, click [image], then click the option.

Related Topics

More Info


To copy charts and slides into a slide show using the Clipboard
To copy charts and slides into a slide show using the Clipboard,

1	Select one or more charts on a notebook sheet, select chart or slide show icons on the Objects sheet, or select slides in a Light Table window. (If you select a slide show icon, all slides in the slide show are selected.)

2	Click Edit [image] Copy.

3	Open the Light Table for the slide show you want to add the slide to.

From the Objects sheet, click Tools [image] Slide Show [image] Edit.

From the Light Table window, click Slides [image] Edit Slide Show.

4	Select the slide you want before your new slide.

5	Click Edit [image] Paste. The slide(s) is added after the selected slide.

Related Topics

More Info


Tips on Running a Slide Show

When a slide show is running, the following actions have special meaning:

Action	Result

Left-click+right-click	Go to a selected slide

Press F5	Go to a selected slide

Left-click	Go to next slide

Right-click	Go to previous slide

Press Backspace	Go to previous slide

Press Esc	Cancel slide show

Click a chart button	(or type its first letter) Perform the actions defined in the chart button

Press any other key	Go to next slide

To run a slide show

Related Concepts


To run a slide show
To run a slide show,

1	From a notebook sheet, cick Tools [image] Slide Show [image] Play. From a Light Table window, click Slides [image] Play Slide Show.

2	Choose a slide show name from the Select Slide Show dialog box and click OK.

Tip

Corel Quattro Pro for Windows can run Corel Quattro Pro for DOS slide shows, which are built on the spreadsheet. Open the Corel Quattro Pro for DOS file, highlight the range that contains slide show information, click Tools [image] Slide Show [image] New, and give the show a name. Sound files in the slide show will be ignored.

Related Topics

More Info


Slide Show Editing

Editing a slide show is easy because Corel Quattro Pro displays the slides as though they were laid out on a light table. You can change the slide order, transition effect, display time, and transition speed assigned to each slide.

When a slide show is open, you can edit other slide shows by clicking the Edit Slide Show button [image]. The Light Table window appears.

The Light Table shows all the charts in the slide show in miniature form, in the order in which they will appear. You can change the slide order, transition effect, display time, and transition speed assigned to each slide.

The Light Table is a resizable window that can be tiled or cascaded with other Corel Quattro Pro windows. You can open multiple slide shows at once, and copy slides from one Light Table window to another.

The Slide Show Property Bar contains additional tools for editing slide shows and formatting slides.

To open a slide show for editing

To change the slide type displayed in a Light Table

To select a master slide in a Light Table

To create a new master slide in a Light Table

To use the Master Slide Gallery

To change slide show effects and display times

To edit a slide in the Light Table window

To close the Light Table Window

Related Concepts


To open a slide show for editing
To open a slide show for editing,

Double-click the slide show's icon on the Objects sheet.

You can change the order of slides and the transition effect, display time, and transition speed for individual slides. You can also make the following changes:

To move a slide to a new position, drag the miniature of the chart to a new location.

To rearrange slides using the Clipboard, use the Edit [image] Cut, Copy, and Paste commands.

To delete a chart from the Light Table, select it and click Slides [image] Delete Slide.

Tips

You can edit selected slides using controls on the Property Bar. The Property Bar for the Light Table contains pull-down lists and controls for changing slide effects and display times. To see what each Property Bar control does, point to it.

You can also delete a chart from the Light Table by selecting the slide and pressing Del or clicking the Cut button [image].

Related Topics

More Info


To change the slide type displayed in a Light Table
To change the slide type displayed in a Light Table,

Click View, then click an option (for example, View [image] Medium Slides). To display only the names of slides, click View [image] Name Only.

Related Topics

More Info


About Master Slides

The first slide position in the Light Table window is reserved for the optional master slide. The master slide maintains common elements (such as a corporate logo and other chart annotations) and renders a common background style for all slides in a slide show. When the master slide is a bullet chart, it also affects the position, size, and color of chart titles, bullets, and bulleted text in all bullet chart slides in the slide show.

The master slide does not display when you run the slide show unless it is also included as a separate slide. You can use any chart on the Objects sheet as a master slide, including charts not in the slide show. You can customize a blank bullet chart to create a master slide template.

The master slide's background and chart annotations are set in other slides, but its chart elements are not. For example, if the master slide is a pie chart, the pie chart does not appear in each slide.

If a slide has the Use Master Slide option checked, the master slide's background and chart annotations are set first, and then the slide is drawn. Any chart elements, such as the chart pane, that have a defined fill color will overlay the master slide background. If the slide has a colored background fill style, the Use Master Slide option is automatically turned off.

To select a master slide in a Light Table

To create a new master slide in a Light Table

To use the Master Slide Gallery

Related Concepts


To select a master slide in a Light Table
To select a master slide in a Light Table,

1	Right-click the Light Table window anywhere outside a slide, then select Light Table Properties.

2	Click the Master Slide tab, then select a chart from the list.

Related Topics

More Info


To create a new master slide in a Light Table
To create a new master slide in a Light Table,

1	Click Slides [image] New Master Slide.

2	A chart window for a bullet chart appears. To customize the bullet chart, do one of the following:

Right-click the title box or sample bullet text and click the Properties command.

Use the Master Slide Gallery to choose a template style.

Tips

If you do not want a slide to use the master slide as its template, turn off the User Master Slide option before you select a master slide. To turn off the option, right-click the slide, click Slide Properties [image] Slide Effect, then deselect Use Master Slide.

If you want to use some of the attributes of the master slide, copy the master slide to the Clipboard, select the slide you want to change, then click Edit [image] Paste Special.

Related Topics

More Info


About the Master Slide Gallery

Once you have selected a master slide, you can use the Master Slide Gallery to choose a template style. The Master Slide Gallery provides a collection of predesigned slide templates.

Tip

You do not have to choose a template style from the Master Slide Gallery. The master slide you selected might already serve as an appropriate template.

To use the Master Slide Gallery

Related Concepts


To use the Master Slide Gallery
To use the Master Slide Gallery,

1	Click Slides [image] Master Slide Gallery from a Light Table window.

2	Select a background style for the master slide.

Tips

The template styles in the Master Slide Gallery are identical to the ones available in the Chart Gallery.

You do not have to choose a template style from the Master Slide Gallery. The master slide you selected might already serve as an appropriate template.

Related Topics

More Info


To change slide show effects and display times
To change slide show effects and display times,

1	Select the slide(s) in the Light Table.

2	Right-click the selected slide(s), then select Slide Properties.

3	Choose the Slide Effect property and select a different transition effect or display time.

Related Topics

More Info


To edit a slide in the Light Table window
To edit a slide in the Light Table window,

1	Double-click the slide to open the slide in a chart window.

Tips

When you edit a slide, you actually edit the chart on which the slide is based. You can also edit the chart in a chart window or directly on a notebook sheet.

If you selected a master slide for the slide show and the slide you are editing has the Use Master Slide option checked, the slide displays elements from the master slide such as the background color and chart annotations. However, you can edit only those chart elements contained within the specific slide. If you choose a colored background fill style for the slide, the Use Master Slide option is automatically turned off.

Related Topics

More Info


To close the Light Table Window
To close the Light Table Window,

1	Double-click the Control-menu box in the upper left corner of the window, or press Ctrl+F4.

Related Topics

More Info


Slide Show Shortcuts

If you are in a hurry and do not want to bother with some of the fine points of putting together a slide show, there are several ways to accelerate the process:

To get a fast idea of what your charts will look like full-screen, select the chart icon on the Objects sheet, then click Tools [image] View Chart. To see several charts in sequence, select their icons and click Tools [image] View Chart or Tools [image] Play Slide Show. Chart buttons work when you display charts in this way.

To quickly assign charts to a slide show, hold down Shift and select their icons--in the order you want them shown--then click the New Slide Show button [image]. The current default effects are applied to these charts.

To create a new blank chart while you are working in the Objects sheet, click Tools [image] New Chart. Leave all the series blank in the dialog box that appears and click OK to begin editing a new blank chart.

Related Concepts


About Chart Buttons

Chart buttons are a special type of text box that can greatly enhance the usefulness of a chart. A chart button can

Branch to another chart, using visual transition effects if desired

Run a macro

Run a macro and then branch to another chart

Chart buttons are most useful in slide shows, where they let you construct branching presentations driven by the viewer's clicks. This hypertext-like ability offers virtually unlimited possibilities. For example, you can set up a self-running slide show that starts by asking what the viewer wants to learn.

Chart buttons are active whenever the chart appears full-screen--in a slide show or when you right-click the chart and choose View. They are not "live" in a chart window or in a chart on a notebook sheet.

To create a chart button

To create a background chart button

Related Concepts


To create a chart button
To create a chart button,

1	Display a chart in a chart window, or double-click a chart on a notebook sheet to edit it on the spreadsheet.

2	Click Insert [image] Shape [image] Text Box. Type any text or want in the text box or leave it blank.

3	Right-click the text box and select Text Box Properties.

4	Click the Chart Button tab, then check one or more check boxes:

Check the Execute Macro box if you want the chart button to run a macro when it is clicked. Enter a macro into the Macro edit field.

Check Select Chart to pick the chart you want the chart button to display after it is finished running the macro. If you do not want it to display a different chart, uncheck this box.

For help on an option, click [image], then click the option.

Tip

Chart buttons are active whenever the chart appears full-screen--in a slide show or when you right-click the chart and choose View. They are not "live" in a chart window or in a chart on a notebook sheet.

Related Topics

More Info


To create a background chart button
To create a background chart button,

1	Right-click the background of the chart, then select Background Properties.

2	Click the Chart Button tab, then check one or more check boxes:

Check the Execute Macro box if you want to run a macro whenever the background is clicked. Enter a macro into the Macro edit field.

Check the Select Chart box, then choose the name of the chart you want the chart button to display after it is finished running the macro.

For help on an option, click [image], then click the option.

Related Topics

More Info


Light Table Window

The Light Table window shows all the charts in the slide show in miniature form, in the order in which they will appear. You can change the slide order, transition effect, display time, and transition speed assigned to each slide.

To move a slide to a new position, drag the miniature of the chart to a new location on the Light Table. When you are rearranging slides in this way, the pointer changes to a four-way arrow. When you release the mouse button, the chart moves to the new position. The Light Table scrolls to reveal more slides if you drag the pointer to the top or bottom edge.

To rearrange slides using the Clipboard, use the Edit [image] Cut, Copy, and Paste commands.

To delete a chart from the Light Table, select it and click the Cut button.

The Light Table is a resizable window that can be tiled or cascaded with other Corel Quattro Pro windows. You can open multiple slide shows at once, and copy slides from one Light Table window to another.

To close the Light Table window, click the X button in the upper right corner of the window.

Related Topics


Designing Toolbars

Use Toolbars to quickly access frequently used commands, programs, files, and macros. You can select a predefined Toolbar that is included with Corel Quattro Pro or you can create your own Toolbars.

The Toolbars you design can use buttons to run an existing command, launch a Windows application or document icon, or play a Corel Quattro Pro or Corel PerfectScript macro. You can also add controls to a Toolbar; these controls (edit field, spin control, combo box, and others) are identical to many of the controls you can add using the Dialog Designer. To better space and group buttons, add separators to your Toolbar.

To switch to a different Toolbar

To show or hide a Toolbar

To reposition a Toolbar

To create a new Toolbar

To edit a Toolbar

To reset a standard Toolbar to its default settings

To change Toolbar options

To delete a Toolbar

To add existing Toolbars to Corel Quattro Pro

Related Concepts


Standard Toolbars

The following Toolbars come with Corel Quattro Pro:

Notebook

Tools for entering and editing data.

Chart and Drawing Tools

Tools for drawing or inserting objects in a chart window, and for arranging objects on a layer on top of the notebook.

Outlining Tools

Tools for grouping data into collapsible and expandable sets of information.

Data Manipulation

Tools for working with notebook cells and selections.

Selection Formatting

Tools for manipulating data in cells or changing the look of data.

Auditing Tools

Tools for tracing dependent cells, precedents, and even errors in large, complex notebooks.

Experts and Numeric Tools

Tools for quickly creating maps, charts, budgets, and more, and performing computations.

Tips

You can edit standard Toolbars, but you cannot delete them. If you make changes to a standard Toolbar, you can reset the Toolbar back to its default settings.

You can turn on or off preselecting with the mouse by clicking Tools [image] Settings [image] Display [image] Show Preselection.

Print Preview Toolbar

When you click File [image] Print Preview, the Toolbar changes. Use the Print Preview Toolbar to preview different pages, zoom in and out, set page setup and print options, and print the selected cell, sheet, or notebook.

Toolbars in Data Modeling Desktop and Database Desktop

Data Modeling Desktop and Database Desktop use a different Toolbar system from Corel Quattro Pro. You cannot customize the Toolbars in Data Modeling Desktop or Database Desktop, nor can you change which Toolbars display.

Related Concepts


To switch to a different Toolbar
To switch to a different Toolbar,

1	Right-click any Toolbar.

2	Click the name of the Toolbar to display.

Related Topics

More Info


To show or hide a Toolbar
To show or hide a Toolbar,

1	Click View [image] Toolbars.

2	Select a Toolbar in the Toolbars list.

3	Click the checkbox to the left of the Toolbar name to show or hide the Toolbar.

4	Click Close to save your changes.

Related Topics

More Info


To reposition a Toolbar
To reposition a Toolbar,

1	Point to an empty area of the Toolbar. The pointer changes to a four-way arrow.

2	Drag the Toolbar to a new position.

You can drag the Toolbar to the top, bottom, left, or right edge of the Corel Quattro Pro application window. If you drag the Toolbar away from all edges of the application window, it becomes a floating palette of buttons.

Related Topics

More Info


To create a new Toolbar
To create a new Toolbar,

1	Click View [image] Toolbars.

2	Click Create.

3	Click Toolbar Name and type a name for the Toolbar. Corel Quattro Pro saves Toolbar information in files with a .BR3 extension. To specify the name of the .BR3 file, click Optional File Name and type a filename.

4	Click Edit to drag buttons from the dialog box, drag or Ctrl+drag buttons from other Toolbars to the new Toolbar, or create new controls.

Related Topics

More Info


Editing Toolbars

You can rearrange buttons on an active Toolbar by dragging them. You can add a Toolbar button, drag buttons off a Toolbar, or drag buttons from one Toolbar to another.

Corel Quattro Pro lets you make quick edits to onscreen Toolbars by moving, removing, or copying buttons.

To edit a Toolbar

To move a Toolbar button

To remove a Toolbar button

To copy a Toolbar button to another Toolbar

Related Concepts


To edit a Toolbar
To edit a toolbar,

1	Right-click the toolbar, then click Edit. (If the toolbar you want to edit is not onscreen, click View [image] Toolbars, select the toolbar, then click Edit.)

All toolbars have a black border, and white boxes appear in the spacing between buttons to indicate separators.

3	Add buttons or separators (spacing) to the toolbar, following these instructions:

To add a Toolbar button that activates an existing feature

To add a Toolbar button that launches a Windows application or document icon

To add a Toolbar button that plays a Corel Quattro Pro macro

To add a Toolbar button that plays a Corel PerfectScript macro

To add complex controls to a Toolbar

To add a separator to a Toolbar

4	While in Edit mode, you can drag a Toolbar to a new position. You can also drag a button to another Toolbar, copy it by pressing Ctrl while dragging, or remove it by dragging it off the Toolbar.

5	Click Close to leave Edit mode.

When you create or edit a Toolbar, Corel Quattro Pro stores the information in a Toolbar file in the main Corel Quattro Pro directory. Toolbar files have the extension .BR3. You can copy these files to distribute Toolbars to other Corel Quattro Pro users.

Tip

If the toolbar you want to edit is onscreen, right-click it, then select Edit to open the Edit Toolbar dialog box.

Related Topics

More Info


To add a Toolbar button that activates an existing feature
To add a Toolbar button that activates an existing feature,

1	Right-click a Toolbar, then click Edit.

2	Click the Command tab.

3	Select a feature area from the Categories list and click one of the buttons that appear (a description appears when you point to a button).

4	Drag the button from the Buttons panel to a Toolbar.

Tip

A button might not work in all areas of Corel Quattro Pro. For example, buttons for customizing charts will not work when a notebook window is active. Create Toolbars for each area of Corel Quattro Pro you work in (a chart Toolbar, a notebook Toolbar, and so on).

Related Topics

More Info


To add a Toolbar button that launches a Windows application or document
To add a Toolbar button that launches a Windows application or document,

1	Right-click a Toolbar, then click Edit.

2	Click the File tab.

3	Specify the filename (Target), command-line options (Parameters), and working directory (Start In). Leave Start In blank to use the Corel Quattro Pro startup directory.

4	Select a bitmap to associate with the file from the Select Icon panel, then drag the button from the Button panel to the Toolbar.

Related Topics

More Info


To add a Toolbar button plays a Corel Quattro Pro macro
To add a Toolbar button that plays a Corel Quattro Pro macro,

1	Right-click a Toolbar, then click Edit.

2	Click the Macro tab.

3	Click Corel Quattro Pro Macro and enter the macro commands to run in Enter Macro.

4	Select a bitmap to associate with the macro from the Select Icon panel, then drag the button from the Button panel to the Toolbar.

Related Topics

More Info


To add a Toolbar button that plays a Corel PerfectScript macro
To add a Toolbar button that plays a Corel PerfectScript macro,

1	Right-click a Toolbar, then click Edit.

2	Click the Macro tab.

3	Click Corel PerfectScript Macro and enter the name of a macro (.WCM) file to play.

4	Select a bitmap to associate with the macro from the Select Icon panel, then drag the button from the Button panel to the Toolbar.

Related Topics

More Info


To specify a different bitmap for a Toolbar button
To specify a different bitmap for a Toolbar button,

1	Right-click a Toolbar, then click Edit.

2	Right-click the button on the toolbar, then click Properties.

3	Specify the name of a bitmap to use. The bitmap can be up to 18 pixels wide and 16 pixels high.

Tip

The Bitmap property is not available for buttons created by the Command tab.

Related Topics

More Info


To add complex controls to a Toolbar
To add complex controls to a Toolbar,

1	Right-click a Toolbar, then click Edit.

2	Click the Controls tab.

3	Drag a button representing the new control (for example, an edit field, spin control, combo box, or drop-down list box) from the Controls panel to the Toolbar.

To customize the control, right-click it and click Properties.

To make the control perform actions, right-click it and click Links.

You can resize some custom controls; drag its right edge.

Tip

If a control is too large, it is hidden when the Toolbar is docked in certain positions. For example, an edit field wider than 24 pixels will be hidden if you drag the Toolbar to the left or right edge of the Corel Quattro Pro window. If a control is taller than a button (22 pixels), it will be hidden if you drag the Toolbar to the top or bottom of the Corel Quattro Pro window.

Related Topics

More Info


To add a separator to a Toolbar
To add a separator to a Toolbar,

1	Right-click a Toolbar, then click Edit.

2	Drag the separator image from the dialog box to the Toolbar and drop it where the spacing should appear.

Tip

While you are editing a Toolbar, the separator appears on the Toolbar as a white box.

Related Topics

More Info


To change the properties of a Toolbar button
To change the properties of a Toolbar button,

1	Right-click a Toolbar, then click Edit.

2	Right-click a Toolbar button that activates anything but a menu option (activates an application, macro, or control).

3	Click the Properties command.

4	Change property settings, then click OK.

Tips

The icons for the menu options are standard, but you can change the properties for any application, macro, or control icons.

You can right-click a Toolbar control, then click Links to add link commands that perform additional functions.

To change the icon for an application or macro Toolbar button, right-click the button, then click Properties. Click Bitmap, then select a different bitmap. You can also copy a bitmap into the Clipboard, right-click the Toolbar button, then click Paste.


To move a Toolbar button
To move a Toolbar button,

Point to a button with the mouse, then hold down Alt and drag the button to its new position.

You can also drag the button to other onscreen Toolbars.

Tip

You can use View [image] Toolbars to reset a standard Toolbar to its original settings.

Related Topics

More Info


To remove a Toolbar button
To remove a Toolbar button,

Point to the button with the mouse, hold down Alt, then drag the button off the Toolbar.

Tip

You can use View [image] Toolbars to reset a standard Toolbar to its original settings.

Related Topics

More Info


To copy a Toolbar button to another Toolbar
To copy a Toolbar button to another Toolbar,

Point to the button with the mouse, then hold down Ctrl+Alt and drag the button to the other Toolbar.

Tip

You can use View [image] Toolbars to reset a standard Toolbar to its original settings.

Related Topics

More Info


To reset a Toolbar to its default settings
To reset a standard Toolbar to its default settings,

1	Click View [image] Toolbars.

2	Select the Toolbar to reset.

3	Click Reset. Any controls, property settings, and link commands that you changed are restored to their original state.

4	Click Close.

Related Topics

More Info


To change Toolbar options
To change Toolbar options,

1	Click View [image] Toolbars.

2	Select a Toolbar in the Toolbars list.

3	Click Options.

4	Set the Toolbar name and docking position.

Related Topics

More Info


To delete a Toolbar
To delete a Toolbar,

1	Click View [image] Toolbars.

2	Select the Toolbar to delete.

3	Click Delete.

Tip

You can only delete Toolbars you created. Toolbars included with Corel Quattro Pro cannot be deleted.

Related Topics

More Info


To add existing Toolbars to Corel Quattro Pro
To add existing Toolbars to Corel Quattro Pro,

1	Copy the .BR3 or .BAR file to the \Corel\Suite8\Programs folder.

2	Click View [image] Toolbars.

3	Click Create and enter a name for the Toolbar.

4	Click Optional File Name and enter the name of the file, or click the folder button and specify it.

5	Click OK. The Toolbar is added to the list and appears onscreen.

Tip

If a control is too large, it is hidden. For example, an edit field wider than 22 pixels will be hidden if you drag the Toolbar to the left or right edge of the Corel Quattro Pro window. If a control is taller than a button (24 pixels), it will be hidden if you drag the Toolbar to the top or bottom of the Corel Quattro Pro window.

Related Topics

More Info


To select a window
To select a window,

Use any of these methods:

Click any part of the window.

Click the window button at the bottom of the screen (on the Application Bar).

Choose the document window from the list at the bottom of the Window menu. A checkmark appears next to the name of the active window.

Press Ctrl+F6 to move to the next document window. If that window is beneath other windows, it moves to the top.

Tips

To move to the next non-document window, such as the Spell Check or Scenario Manager dialog boxes, press Alt+F6.

The window with the highlighted title bar is active.

Related Topics


About Duplicating a Window

Duplicate a window when you want to look at different sheets in the notebook at the same time, or if you want to see distant parts of one sheet at the same time. You can create as many duplicate views of a notebook as you want. These views are titled with the name of the notebook followed by a colon (:) and the number of the view.

The duplicate window appears full size in front of other open windows, with cell A1 selected on the first sheet. Now you can resize the windows so you can see parts of both of them. Then scroll them or select different sheets as desired.

If you use the following features to change a view, the change does not display in duplicate views:

Format [image] Sheet [image] Display [image] Border Options

Format [image] Sheet [image] Display [image] Grid Lines

View [image] Locked Titles

View [image] Split Window

View [image] Zoom

To display a new view of a notebook window

Related Concepts


To display a new view of a notebook window
To display a new view of a notebook window,

1	Click Window [image] New View.

Tips

You can resize the windows so you can see parts of both of them. Then scroll them or select different sheets as desired.

You can also see two parts of a notebook at the same time by splitting a window into two panes. Unlike duplicate views, however, you can have only two panes.

To remove an extra view, click the X button at the top right of the window or press Ctrl+F4.

Related Topics

More Info


To resize and arrange windows
To resize and arrange windows,

Use one of these methods:

Click Window [image] Tile Top to Bottom or Window Tile Side by Side to show all windows displayed one after another. Tiling displays all open windows without overlapping them. When possible, the windows are all given equal room on the screen.

Click Window [image] Cascade to rearrange all open windows in overlapping layers. The top line of each window is revealed so you can see the name of the notebook, chart, or dialog box it contains.

Click Window [image] Arrange Icons to place icons for minimized windows in a neat row along the bottom of the screen.

Related Topics


To hide a window
To hide a window,

1	Click the window and click Window [image] Hide.

Related Topics


To show a hidden window
To show a hidden window,

1	Click Window [image] Show.

2	Choose the name of the window to show.

Related Topics


About Window Panes

To view different parts of the same notebook, you can duplicate the window or you can split the window into two panes. The panes can be split vertically or horizontally. Use the pane splitter [image] at the lower-right corner of the window to split a window into panes.

If window panes are synchronized, you can scroll both of them at once to compare the data in rows or columns. Vertically split panes scroll together vertically, and horizontally split panes scroll together horizontally.

The active pane is the one containing the selector. If you unsynchronize the panes, you can scroll the panes independently to display different parts of the notebook.

To split a window into panes

To resize panes

To unsynchronize panes

To close the second pane

Related Concepts


To split a window into panes
To split a window into panes,

1	Move the mouse pointer to the lower-right corner of the window over the pane splitter.

2	The pointer changes to a black double-arrow. Depending on where you position the mouse pointer, the double-arrow points horizontally or vertically.

3	For horizontal panes, display the vertical double-arrow and drag up. Release the mouse button when the dotted line reaches the separation point you would like.

For vertical panes, follow the same procedure, but use the double-arrow that points horizontally and drag left.

Tips

You can also split a window into panes using View [image] Split Window. The window is split at the position of the selector or, if there is not enough room to split the window at the current position, the window is split in half.

To select the other pane, click anywhere in the pane, or press Shift+F6.

Related Topics

More Info


To resize panes
To resize panes,

1	Move the mouse pointer to the pane splitter at the lower right of the left or top pane until the double-arrow appears.

2	Drag to the new position where you would like the first pane to end.

Tips

You can point across panes while entering formulas or using dialog boxes.

When you resize panes, the following property changes in one pane do not affect the appearance of the other pane: Display and Default Column Width properties (in Sheet Properties); Row Height, Column Width, and Reveal/Hide properties (in Cell Properties); and locked titles created with View [image] Locked Titles.

Related Topics

More Info


To unsynchronize panes
To unsynchronize panes,

1	Click View [image] Split Window (either before or after splitting the window).

2	Uncheck Synchronized to be able to scroll the panes independently.

Tip

To synchronize panes, click View [image] Split Window, then check Synchronized.

Related Topics

More Info


To close the second pane
To close the second pane,

1	Click View [image] Split Window.

2	Click Clear.

Tips

You can also remove the second pane with the mouse. Move the mouse pointer to the pane splitter between the first and second pane so a black double-arrow appears. Drag the double-arrow back to the top or bottom edge of the window (for horizontal panes) or to the left or right edge (for vertical panes).

Any column width changes, locked titles, or columns that were hidden or revealed in the top or left pane remain in effect.

Related Topics

More Info


About Locking Rows and Columns

View [image] Locked Titles locks specific rows and/or columns of a notebook sheet onscreen as titles. When you scroll the spreadsheet, the titles remain fixed onscreen while the rows below (or columns to the right) scroll as usual.

The Locked Titles area is represented by a blue line that divides the locked area and the notebook data. Locking titles has no effect when printing.

Tips

To repeat column or row titles on each sheet of a printed notebook, click File [image] Page Setup, click Options, and set the Top Heading and Left Heading options.

To edit data in a Locked Title area, click the appropriate cell in the locked area and edit the cell's contents.

As with hidden and widened columns, locked titles affect the active pane only. If the window is divided into two panes, locked titles are retained after you close the second pane only if you create them in the top or left pane.

To lock rows and/or columns as titles

Related Concepts


To lock rows and/or columns as titles
To lock rows and/or columns as titles,

1	Scroll the spreadsheet so the column(s) or row(s) you want as titles are visible at the upper left of the window. You cannot adjust the position of the titles after they are locked.

2	To always display rows of titles, select the cell in column A that is below the last row you want displayed. To display columns of titles, select the cell in row 1 that is to the right of the last column you want displayed. To display both rows and columns, select the top-left cell of the part you want to remain scrollable.

3	Click View [image] Locked Titles.

Tip

To unlock titles, click View [image] Locked Titles.

Related Topics

More Info


Upgrade Help

Click your previous spreadsheet for upgrade information:

Corel Quattro Pro 7 for Windows

Corel Quattro Pro 6 for Windows

Corel Quattro Pro for DOS

1-2-3 for DOS

1-2-3 for Windows

Excel


Upgrading from Corel Quattro Pro for DOS

Opening Corel Quattro Pro for DOS files

Running Corel Quattro Pro for DOS macros

@Functions

Corel Quattro Pro for DOS Commands


Opening Corel Quattro Pro for DOS Files

Corel Quattro Pro for Windows supports all Corel Quattro Pro for DOS functions and most features. However, once you change a DOS notebook in Corel Quattro Pro for Windows, you should save it as a WB3 file (QPW v7/v8) to avoid losing new features and @functions not known to the DOS program.


Corel Quattro Pro for Windows supports all Corel Quattro Pro for DOS @functions. However, once you change a DOS notebook in Corel Quattro Pro for Windows, you should save it as a WB3 file (QPW v7/v8) to avoid losing new functions not known to the DOS program.


Corel Quattro Pro for DOS Commands

Menu	Command
File	New
	Open
	Template
	Retrieve
	Save
	Save As
	Save All
	Close
	Close All
	Erase
	Directory
	Workspace [image] Save
	Workspace [image] Restore
	Utilities [image] DOS Shell
	Utilities [image] File Manager
	Utilities [image] SQZ!
	Utilities [image] Consolidate
	Exit
Edit	Copy
	Copy Special
	Move
	Erase Block
	Undo
	Insert [image] Rows
	Insert [image] Columns
	Insert [image] Row Block
	Insert [image] Column Block
	Insert [image] Sheets
	Delete [image] Rows
	Delete [image] Columns
	Delete [image] Row Block
	Delete [image] Column Block
	Delete [image] Sheets
	Names
	SpeedBlock [image] SpeedSum
	SpeedBlock [image] QuickFill
	Fill
	Search & Replace
	Sheet [image] Name
	Sheet [image] Move
	Group [image] Create
	Group [image] Delete
	Group [image] Mode
Style	Alignment
	Numeric Format
	Protection
	Column Width
	Reset Width
	Hide Column
	Block Size
	Line Drawing
	Shading
	Font
	Use Style
	Define Style
	SpeedFormat [image] Use
	SpeedFormat [image] Create
	SpeedFormat [image] Remove
	Insert Break
Graph	Graph Type
	Series
	Text
	Customize Series
	X-Axis
	Y-Axis
	Overall
	Insert
	Hide
	Name
	View
	Fast Graph
	Annotate
	Quit
Print	Block
	Headings
	Destination
	Layout
	Format
	Copies
	Adjust Printer
	Spreadsheet Print
	Print-to-Fit
	Graph Print
	Print Manager
	Quit
Database	Sort
	Query
	Restrict Input
	Data Entry
	Paradox Access
Tools	Macro [image] Record
	Macro [image] Paste
	Macro [image] Instant Replay
	Macro [image] Macro Recording
	Macro [image] Transcript
	Macro [image] Clear Breakpoints
	Macro [image] Debugger
	Macro [image] Name
	Macro [image] Library
	Macro [image] Execute
	Macro [image] Key Reader
	Reformat
	Import
	Combine
	Xtract
	Update Links [image] Open
	Update Links [image] Refresh
	Update Links [image] Change
	Update Links [image] Delete
	Advanced Math [image] Regression
	Advanced Math [image] Invert
	Advanced Math [image] Multiply
	Parse
	What-If
	Frequency
	Solve For
	Optimizer
	Audit
	Library
Options	Hardware
	Colors
	International
	WYSIWYG Zoom
	Display Mode
	Startup
	Toolbar
	Graphics Quality
	Other
	Network
	Update
	Values
	Formats
	Recalculation
	Protection
	Quit
Window	Zoom
	Tile
	Stack
	Move/Size
	Options
	Pick


File Manager

Use the Windows Explorer.


Not supported in Corel Quattro Pro for Windows.


Windows now handles this. See your Windows documentation for more information.


Use the Windows Print Manager.


Click the X button in the upper right of the window to close a dialog box or window.


To attach a macro to a notebook
To attach a macro to a notebook,

When you finish recording a macro with Tools [image] Macro [image] Record,

1	Move to the first cell of the macro.

2	Click Insert [image] Name [image] Cells.

3	In the Name text box, enter a name for the macro.

4	Click Add, then click Close.


Upgrading from 1-2-3 for DOS

Importing 1-2-3 files

Using 1-2-3 Menus and Macros in Corel Quattro Pro

Using the Macro Translation Assistant

@Functions

1-2-3 for DOS Commands


Using 1-2-3 Macros in Corel Quattro Pro

You can run keystroke macros created in 1-2-3 (release 2.x and 3.x) within Corel Quattro Pro. Click Tools [image] Settings, then click the Macro tab. Click the Slash Key option and choose 1-2-3 / R 2.01.

Related Concepts


1-2-3 for DOS Commands

Top-level commands in square brackets [ ] indicate Object Inspector menus.

Lotus 1-2-3 Release 2.01 Menu Command	Corel Quattro Pro 6.x Menu Command
WORKSHEET
Global
Format	Format [image] Styles [image] Format
Label Prefix	Format [image] Styles [image] Alignment
Column Width	Format [image] Sheet [image] Default Width
Recalculation	Format [image] Notebook [image] Recalc Settings
Protection	Format [image] Notebook [image] Password Level
Default
Printer
Interface	File [image] Print [image] Select Printer
Auto LF	NA
Left	File [image] Page Setup [image] Print Margins [image] Left
Right	File [image] Page Setup [image] Print Margins [image] Right
Top	File [image] Page Setup [image] Print Margins [image] Top
Bottom	File [image] Page Setup [image] Print Margins [image] Bottom
Page Length	File [image] Page Setup [image] Paper type
Wait	NA
Setup	File [image] Print [image] Select Printer [image] Setup
Name	File [image] Print [image] Select Printer
Directory	[Application] [image] File Options [image] Directory
Status	NA
Update	NA
Other	Edit [image] Preferences
International	[Application] [image] International
Help	NA
Clock	[Application] [image] Display [image] Clock Display
Zero	Format [image] Sheet [image] Display [image] Display Zeros
Insert
Column	Insert [image] Columns
Row	Insert [image] Rows
Delete
Column	Edit [image] Delete [image] Columns
Row	Edit [image] Delete [image] Rows
Column
Set Width	Format [image] Block [image] Column Width [image] Set Width
Reset Width	Format [image] Block [image] Column Width [image] Reset Width
Hide	Format [image] Block [image] Reveal/Hide [image] Hide
Display	Format [image] Block [image] Reveal/Hide [image] Reveal
Erase	File [image] Close
Titles	View [image] Locked Titles
Windows	View [image] Split Window
Status
Normal Memory	NA
Expanded Memory	NA
Co-Processor	NA
Recalc Mode	Format [image] Notebook [image] Recalc Settings [image] Mode
Recalc Order	Format [image] Notebook [image] Recalc Settings [image] Order
Iterations	Format [image] Notebook [image] Recalc Settings [image] # of Iterations
Circular Reference	NA
Cell Format	Format [image] Styles
Label Prefix	Aligning Labels
Column Width	[Sheet] [image] Default Width [image] Column Width
Suppress Zero	[Sheet] [image] Display [image] Display Zeros
Protection	[Sheet] [image] Protection [image] Sheet Protection
Macro Library	Format [image] Notebook [image] Macro Library
Page	Insert [image] Page Break
RANGE
Format	[Block] [image] Numeric Format
Label	[Block] [image] Alignment
Erase	Edit [image] Clear Values
Name	Insert [image] Block Names
Justify	Format [image] Text Reformat
Protect	Format [image] Block [image] Constraints [image] Cell Protection [image] Protect
Unprotect	Format [image] Block [image] Constraints [image] Cell Protection [image] Unprotect
Input	Format [image] Block [image] Constraints
Value	Data [image] Values
Transpose	Tools [image] Numeric Tools [image] Transpose
COPY	Edit [image] Copy
MOVE	Edit [image] Cut and Edit [image] Paste
FILE
Retrieve	File [image] Open
Save	File [image] Save
Combine	Data [image] Combine Files
Xtract	Data [image] Extract To File
Erase	NA
List	File [image] Open
Worksheet	File [image] Open
Print	File [image] Open
Graph	Graphics [image] Edit Chart
Other	File [image] Open
Import	File [image] Open
Directory	Edit [image] Preferences [image] File Options [image] Directory
PRINT
Printer	File [image] Print
Range	File [image] Print [image] PrintArea
Line	File [image] Print [image] Options [image] Print Between Blocks [image] Lines
Page	File [image] Print [image] Options [image] Print Between Blocks [image] Page Advance
Options	File [image] Page Setup
Header	File [image] Page Setup [image] Header/Footer [image] Header
Footer	File [image] Page Setup [image] Header/Footer [image] Footer
Margins	File [image] Page Setup [image] Print Margins
Borders	File [image] Print [image] Options [image] Headings
Setup	File [image] Print [image] Select Printer [image] Setup
Pg Length	File [image] Print [image]  Page Setup [image] Paper Type
Other
As Displayed	File [image] Print [image] Options [image] Cell Formulas (Unchecked)
Cell Formulas	File [image] Print [image] Options [image] Cell Formulas (Checked)
Formatted	File [image] Page Setup [image] Print Margins [image] Break Pages (Checked)
Unformatted	File [image] Page Setup [image] Print Margins [image] Break Pages (Unchecked)
Clear	Load Defaults button
Align	NA
Go	File [image] Print [image] Print
File	File [image] Print [image] Select Printer [image] Redirect to File (Checked)
GRAPH
Type	Graphics [image] New Chart [image] Type [image] Category
X	Graphics [image] New Chart [image] Series [image] X-Axis
A-F	Graphics [image] New Chart [image] Series [image] 1st - 6th Series
Reset
Graph	Graphics [image] Delete Chart
X	Chart [image] Series [image] X-Axis [image] Delete
A - X	Chart [image] Series [image] Delete
View	Graphics [image] View Chart
Save	File [image] Save
Options
Legend	Chart [image] Series [image] Legend
Format	[Line Series] [image] Marker Style, Line Settings
Titles	Chart [image] Titles
Grid	[Y-Axis], [X-Axis] [image] Major Grid Style, Minor Grid Style
Scale	[Y-Axis], [X-Axis] [image] Scale
Color	File [image] Print Preview (Color Button)
B&W	File [image] Print Preview (B&W Button)
Data Labels	[Line Series] [image] Series Options [image] Label Series
Name
Use	Graphics [image] View Chart
Create	Graphics [image] New Chart
Delete	Graphics [image] Delete Chart
Reset	Graphics [image] Delete Chart
DATA
Fill	Data [image] Fill
Table	Tools [image] Numeric Tools [image] What-If
Sort	Data [image] Sort
Query	Data [image] Notebook Query
Distribution	Tools [image] Numeric Tools [image] Frequency
Matrix
Invert	Tools [image] Numeric Tools [image] Invert
Multiply	Tools  Numeric Tools  Multiply
Regression	Tools  Numeric Tools  Regression
Parse	Data  Text Parse Expert


Upgrading from 1-2-3 for Windows

Importing 1-2-3 files

Using 1-2-3 Menus and Macros in Corel Quattro Pro

Using the Macro Translation Assistant

@Functions

1-2-3 for Windows Features


Importing 1-2-3 files

Corel Quattro Pro includes read/write support for the latest 1-2-3 files created from the DOS version 4.0+ and Windows version 5.0+. These files have a WK4 extension, and include information that in previous versions of 1-2-3 was split between a WK[1-3] File and a format file FMT, FM3 or .ALL. There is a new record type for storing graph information. Support continues for WK1, WK3, FMT, FM3, ALL and WKS formats.

@Function translation

Corel Quattro Pro imports 1-2-3 @functions and translates them to Corel Quattro Pro @functions where there is a functional match. That is, if Corel Quattro Pro has a function that takes the same parameters and returns the same result, the 1-2-3-function is translated, even if it has a different name. If the 1-2-3 function does not have an equivalent in Corel Quattro Pro, the formula is translated to a value and the cell shading is set to red.

Corel Quattro Pro exports its @functions to 1-2-3 @functions if there is a functional match.

Cell attribute information

The following 1-2-3 cell attributes are translated on import and export:

Font (style, size, bold, italic, underline, color)

Line drawing (single, double, thick, color)

Cell width

Row height

Numeric format

Hidden rows and columns

Hidden row and column information is imported from and exported to 1-2-3 files.

Named styles

Corel Quattro Pro imports and exports styles up to the maximum the format allows:

FM[T,3] files can contain up to 8 named styles (WK1,WK3)

ALL files can contain up to 8 named styles

WK4 files can contain up to 16 named styles

Graph translation

On import, Corel Quattro Pro translates 1-2-3 graphs to the nearest Corel Quattro Pro equivalent. On export, Corel Quattro Pro translates its graphs to the nearest 1-2-3 equivalent.

Print options

On import and export, the following print options are translated:

Orientation

Margins (top, left, right, bottom)

Header size (inches)

Footer size (inches)

Header text

Footer text

Print grid lines

Locked Titles

Corel Quattro Pro imports 1-2-3 Frozen Titles. Corel Quattro Pro exports its Locked Titles as 1-2-3 Frozen Titles.

Zoom

1-2-3 does not have a zoom setting for each sheet; it has one single setting. This setting is applied to each sheet upon import. On export, Corel Quattro Pro takes the zoom setting (a. The current sheet, b. The first sheet, c. Other) and writes that as the WK4's zoom setting.

Window split

Corel Quattro Pro imports the Split attribute from 1-2-3 files. Corel Quattro Pro exports the Split attribute to 1-2-3 files that support it.

OLE 2 Links and Objects

OLE 2 links and objects are not supported in Corel Quattro Pro.

Inserted graphs

On import, Corel Quattro Pro translates 1-2-3's inserted graphs to the nearest equivalent Corel Quattro Pro Graph type. On export, Corel Quattro Pro translates its inserted graphs to 1-2-3 to the nearest 1-2-3 equivalent.

Draw layer

WK4 files include draw layer information from 1-2-3 for Windows v5+. The following draw layer objects are translated to Corel Quattro Pro’s draw layer on import:

Arrows

Lines

Rectangles (filled)

Rounded Rectangles (filled)

Ellipses (filled)

Text

Buttons

Arcs, polylines, polygons, and freehand drawings are not supported by Corel Quattro Pro.

When writing 1-2-3 WK4 files, Corel Quattro Pro includes the Corel Quattro Pro draw layer objects listed above. No draw layer information is written to WK3 or WK1 files.

Macros

Corel Quattro Pro can import 1-2-3 macros. Corel Quattro Pro can also run 1-2-3 keystroke macros from 1-2-3 versions 2 and 3.

Corel Quattro Pro does not translate its macros to run under 1-2-3.

Password protection

When importing WK3 and WK4 files, Corel Quattro Pro cannot decipher the password, so it displays a warning message to that effect. However, Corel Quattro Pro can decipher passwords in WK1 files and, when opening, asks the user for the password.

No passwords are exported to 1-2-3 WK3 or WK4 formats. A warning message appears indicating this attribute cannot be saved in these formats. Passwords can be saved in WK1 files.

Formula annotations

Corel Quattro Pro supports formula annotations (comments after a semicolon). They are imported from and exported to 1-2-3 files.

Version information

1-2-3 for Windows v5+ can have several different versions within a spreadsheet file. A user can actively select which version to see and edit. Corel Quattro Pro opens only data from the version that was active when the file was last saved in 1-2-3.

Related Concepts


Using 1-2-3 Menus and Macros

Included in Corel Quattro Pro are 1-2-3 compatible menus that let you run 1-2-3 keystroke macros and display 1-2-3 menus using the slash key (/). The Slash Key setting in Corel Quattro Pro controls which menu system displays when you press the slash key (/) from Ready mode.

To display 1-2-3 menus when you press the slash key,

1 Right-click the Corel Quattro Pro title bar, then click Application Properties.

2 Click the Macro tab.

3 From the Slash Key list, select 1-2-3 / R 2.01.

4 Click OK.

Now you can run keystroke macros written for 1-2-3 (release 2.x and 3.x) within Corel Quattro Pro: Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Play from the Corel Quattro Pro menu, or press the slash key (/) and click Worksheet [image] Macro [image] Execute.

Macros assigned to Alt keys in 1-2-3 run in Corel Quattro Pro using the Ctrl+Shift keys. 1-2-3 menus will display as the macro gives commands. For example, /GT displays the 1-2-3 menu's graph types. However, Corel Quattro Pro dialog boxes will appear where appropriate.

Note

Be alert when executing 1-2-3 macros containing {?} statements. You might want to change those statements to {MENUCALL} statements, and create macro menus for the corresponding 1-2-3 menu choices. This ensures that the macro will still run within 1-2-3.

If Corel Quattro Pro encounters a macro command that it cannot understand or that is not supported, an error message appears.


Using the 1-2-3 Macro Translation Assistant

Corel Quattro Pro for Windows includes a notebook file named 123toQPW.WB3 that converts keystroke macros from 1-2-3 (Release 2.01 through Release 2.4) to Corel Quattro Pro's macro syntax.

Your use of the 1-2-3 Macro Translation Assistant is governed by the terms of the Software License Agreement, Limited Warranty and Limitation of Liability that accompany your copy of Corel Quattro Pro. 1-2-3 is a registered trademark of Lotus Development Corp.

To use the 1-2-3 Macro Translation Assistant,

1	Open 123toQPW.WB3 in Corel Quattro Pro. It's a hidden macro notebook that adds an extra option under the Tools [image] Macro submenu. This option is called Translate, which can also be activated via a keyboard shortcut (ALT-F1).

2	Open the 1-2-3 file containing the macro(s) you want to convert.

3	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Translate to begin the translation process.

4	In the Convert dialog box, specify the block (range) of macros you want to convert.

5	Check the Highlight Unsupported Macros checkbox (it is checked by default) if you want to highlight problem macros. Then click OK.

If you checked Highlight Unsupported Macros, macros that could not be converted are highlighted with the following colors:

Blue	= contains macros not supported in Corel Quattro Pro

Red	= contains unrecognized macros

Purple	= contains both unsupported and unrecognized macros

Demonstration Files for the 1-2-3 Macro Translation Assistant

The following demonstration files are installed in the Corel Quattro Pro Samples directory:

PRODDEV.WK1	1-2-3 spreadsheet application file

PRODDEV.FMT	1-2-3 spreadsheet formatting file

PRODDEV.WRI	Conversion demonstration instructions

This demonstration shows how a budget application (PRODDEV.WK1) created in 1-2-3 can be upgraded to run under Corel Quattro Pro for Windows. Read the PRODDEV.WRI file (a Windows Write file) for instructions.

Specifications of the 1-2-3 Macro Translation Assistant

The 1-2-3 Macro Translation Assistant translates only 1-2-3 keystroke commands that start with a "/".

It translates only full menu commands. For example, /G alone is not translated because it only opens the graph menu, but does not perform any action in the graph menu.

Commands that are broken into more than one line are not translated. For example,

A1: /F

A2: R

This is equivalent to /File [image] Retrieve in 1-2-3, but the Macro Translation Assistant does not translate it. The 1-2-3 command is translated if it reads:

A1: /FR

If you check Highlight Unsupported Commands, the 1-2-3 Macro Translation Assistant highlights any "/" (slash) it cannot translate. For example, if you select a block that has text containing a slash, the Macro Translation Assistant highlights that cell.

If you have text labels in the selected block that contain an identical character string found in a 1-2-3 menu command, the string is treated as a macro and translated.

/X commands are not translated because they are supported by Corel Quattro Pro.

Self-modifying macros that concatenate menu commands are not translated.

Macros that count on the user to input menu keystrokes are not translated. These might work in some situations, but most 1-2-3 macros that use this method get users to a certain menu (for example, /G to the graph menu), then let them make a selection. This case would fail because only full menu commands are translated.

Macros that use other macro commands to navigate or answer the menus are not translated. For example /{RIGHT 2}~, which takes the user to the 1-2-3 Copy menu option, is not translated.

Tips

After you open the 1-2-3 file, if you have an autoload macro in it (for example, \0), it might activate Corel Quattro Pro menus. Press CTRL-BREAK while your file is being loaded to stop this macro from executing.

Save your 1-2-3 file as a Corel Quattro Pro .WB3 notebook before you start the translation process. And keep a backup of your 1-2-3 file.


1-2-3 @Functions Supported by Corel Quattro Pro

The following 1-2-3 @functions are supported by Corel Quattro Pro. Any other 1-2-3 @functions are not imported but are translated into values. The cells containing these values are shaded red to warn you that the formula has not been brought into Corel Quattro Pro.

@@

@ABS

@ACCRUED

@ACOS

@ACOSH

@ACOT

@ACOTH

@ACSC

@ACSCH

@ASEC

@ASECH

@ASIN

@ASINH

@ATAN

@ATAN2

@ATANH

@AVEDEV

@AVG

@BESSELI

@BESSELJ

@BESSELK

@BESSELY

@BETA

@BETAI

@CELL

@CELLPOINTER

@CHAR

@CHIDIST

@CHITEST

@CHOOSE

@CLEAN

@CODE

@COLS

@COMBIN

@CORREL

@COS

@COSH

@COT

@COTH

@COUNT

@CSC

@CSCH

@CTERM

@DATEDIF

@DATEINFO

@DATEVALUE

@DAVG

@DAY

@DCOUNT

@DDB

@DEVSQ

@DMAX

@DMIN

@DSTD

@DSTDS

@DSUM

@DURATION

@DVAR

@DVARS

@ERF

@ERFC

@ERFD

@ERR

@EVEN

@EXACT

@EXP

@EXP2

@FACT

@FACTLN

@FALSE

@FDIST

@FIND

@FTEST

@FV

@GAMMA

@GAMMALN

@GEOMEAN

@HARMEAN

@HLOOKUP

@HOUR

@IF

@INDEX

@INT

@ISERR

@ISNA

@ISNUMBER

@ISSTRING

@LEFT

@LENGTH

@LN

@LOG

@LOWER

@MAX

@MAXLOOKUP

@MDURATION

@MEDIAN

@MID

@MIN

@MINLOOKUP

@MINUTE

@MIRR

@MOD

@MODULO

@MONTH

@N

@NA

@NETWORKDAYS

@NOW

@NPV

@ODD

@PERCENTILE

@PERMUT

@PI

@PMT

@POISSON

@PRICE

@PROPER

@PV

@QUOTIENT

@RAND

@RATE

@REGRESSION

@REPEAT

@REPLACE

@RIGHT

@ROUND

@ROUNDDOWN

@ROUNDUP

@ROWS

@S

@SEC

@SECH

@SECOND

@SERIESSUM

@SETSTRING

@SHEETS

@SIGN

@SIN

@SINH

@SLN

@SQRT

@SQRTPI

@STD

@STDS

@STRING

@SUM

@SUMPOSITIVE

@SUMSQ

@SUMXMY2

@SYD

@TAN

@TANH

@TDIST

@TERM

@TIME

@TIMEVALUE

@TODAY

@TRIM

@TRUE

@TRUNC

@TTEST

@UPPER

@VALUE

@VAR

@VARS

@VLOOKUP

@WEIGHTAVG

@WORKDAY

@XINDEX

@YEAR

@YIELD

@ZTEST


1-2-3 for Windows Features

Ease of Use

Templates

Background Recalc

Toolbar

Context-sensitive Toolbar

Object Inspection

Automatic Column Widths

Automatic Summing

Automatic Sort

QuickFill/AutoFill

Automatic Formats

Mail Enabled

Spreadsheet Formatting

Spell Checker

Center Across Block

In-Cell Editing

Nameable Sheet Tabs

Formula and Analysis

@Functions

Matrix Operations

What-If Tables

Goal Seeker

Nonlinear Solver

Multi-variable Backsolver

Scenario Manager

Graphing

Pie Graphs

XY Graphs

Combination Bar/Line Graphs

Perspective Graphs

3D Graphs

Dual Y-axes

Log Scaling

Floating Graphs

Graphing on Worksheet

Graph Colors

Graph Series

Presentations

Floating Text Boxes

Drop Shadow Text

Notebook Drawing Layer

Macros and Customization

Keystroke Recording

Trace Mode

Floating Buttons

Visual Dialog Builder

Menu Equivalents and Procedural Macro Language

Toolbar Designer

Data Access and Compatibility

3D Notebooks

Macro Translator

DOS-counterpart keystrokes ("slash" menu)

dBASE II/III/IV (DBF)

Paradox 3.5/4.0 (DB)

Impress

Allways

Comma Separated Values (CSV)

Database Management

Search/Replace

Queried Import

Visual Query-By-Example (QBE)

Sort Databases%OV_DATABASE_SORTPERFORM

Auto Filter

PivotTable Report

Group and Outline

Auditing and Security

Password-protect File

Cell Notes

Auditing

External Range Links

Automatic File Backup


Upgrading from Excel

Importing Excel Files

Functions

Excel Features

Using Excel Menus


Importing Excel Files

To open an Excel file in Corel Quattro Pro,

1 Click File [image] Open.

2 Select the drive and directory containing the file to open.

3 Select Excel (*.XLS) in the File type field.

4 Click the Excel file to open.

5 Click Open.

Important

Corel Quattro Pro reads the Excel file into memory. If you make changes to the data, click File [image] Save As to save your changes to a WB3 (QPW v7.v8) file so you do not lose any formulas or features not supported by Excel.

Corel Quattro Pro reads a Excel version 3, 5, 7, and 97 spreadsheet files.

To save a Corel Quattro Pro file in another format

Corel Quattro Pro imports the following Excel data:

Values and labels

Most cell formatting

Embedded charts

Links to different sheets or different files

Most functions

Arithmetic formulas

Chart sheets (they're converted to floating graphs)

OLE objects contained in Excel sheets

Corel Quattro Pro converts any Excel function that it doesn't support to a value, then shades it red.

Tip

Make sure no cells in the Excel file are shaded red or contain red text before working with the file in Corel Quattro Pro.

Corel Quattro Pro notebook sheets support up to 8192 rows of data. If you try to open an Excel file with more than 8192 rows of data, the excess rows are not imported and a message notifies you of this.

Formulas

On importing, Corel Quattro Pro maps as many Excel formulas to @functions as possible. Those that have no equivalent in Corel Quattro Pro are translated to a value, and the background color of the cell changes to red. On exporting to XLS format, Corel Quattro Pro translates @functions to the nearest equivalent Excel function.

User-defined functions

When Corel Quattro Pro loads Excel spreadsheets that contain user-defined functions, they are converted to values and the cells are shaded red. Corel Quattro Pro does not export user-defined functions.

Cell attributes

The following cell attributes are translated when importing and exporting XLS files:

Font (style, size, bold, italic, underline, color)

Line drawing (single, double, thick, color)

Cell width

Numeric format

Named Blocks

Corel Quattro Pro imports Excel’s named ranges, including 2D and 3D ranges. Corel Quattro Pro also exports its named ranges, 2D and 3D, into Excel spreadsheets. Corel Quattro Pro does not support Excel's relative addresses.

Styles

Styles are imported from and exported to XLS files. Their names and formatting are translated into Corel Quattro Pro styles. The formatting includes the following cell attributes:

Font (style, size, bold, italic, underline, color)

Line drawing (single, double, thick, color)

Cell width

Numeric format

Print options

The following print options are imported from and exported to XLS files:

Orientation

Margins (top, left, right, bottom)

Header size (inches)

Footer size (inches)

Header text

Footer text

Print grid lines

Chart types

When importing an Excel file, Corel Quattro Pro converts Excel chart type to its own when there is a match; otherwise, it converts it to the chart that comes closest, adding properties when it can, to make the chart look as much as possible like the Excel chart.

When exporting a Corel Quattro Pro notebook to an XLS file, charts are converted to the nearest Excel equivalent.

Window records

Corel Quattro Pro imports and exports split and hidden window attributes.

Array formulas

Array formulas are imported.

Hidden formulas

On importing, Corel Quattro Pro converts Excel Hidden formulas into a protected cell with format set to hidden. However, Corel Quattro Pro does not export hidden formulas.

OLE 2.0 links

Corel Quattro Pro loads OLE2 links embedded in an XLS file. However, Corel Quattro Pro does not export OLE2 links when writing XLS files.

OLE 2.0 objects

Corel Quattro Pro imports OLE2 objects embedded in Excel sheets. However, Corel Quattro Pro does not export OLE2 objects when writing XLS files.

Inserted graphs

Corel Quattro Pro imports Excel’s inserted graphs, mapping them to the nearest Corel Quattro Pro style. Corel Quattro Pro also exports its inserted graphs, mapping them to the nearest match in Excel.

Solver

Excel’s Solver information is imported into Corel Quattro Pro's Optimizer. However, Corel Quattro Pro's Optimizer information is not exported into Excel's Solver.

Draw layer objects

Draw layer objects are imported into Corel Quattro Pro’s draw layer. Draw layer objects include: arrows, text boxes, buttons, line segments, rectangles, filled rectangles, rounded rectangles, and ellipses. Polygons and freehand drawings are not imported.

Corel Quattro Pro's draw layer objects are not exported to XLS files.

Scenario Manager data

Excel Scenario Manager data is ignored in Corel Quattro Pro.

Pivot Table data

Excel Pivot Table data is ignored in Corel Quattro Pro.

Publish

Not supported.

Password protection

Excel’s password protection is not supported. Corel Quattro Pro displays a warning if a user attempts to open a protected Excel file.

Different sheet and file types

Corel Quattro Pro imports and exports only XLS spreadsheet files. In Excel versions 5 and greater, this includes multiple-sheet support. Corel Quattro Pro does not recognize Excel chart pages or macro pages. Corel Quattro Pro does not recognize chart files (XLC), templates (XLT), add-ins (XLA, XLL), or toolbars (XLB).


Excel Functions Supported by Corel Quattro Pro

Corel Quattro Pro supports the import and export of the folowing Excel functions:

ABS

ACCRINT

ACCRINTM

ACOS

ACOSH

ADDRESS

AND

ASIN

ASINH

ATAN

ATAN2

ATANH

AVERAGE

BESSELI

BESSELJ

BESSELK

BESSELY

BETADIST

BETAINV

CEILING

CELL

CHAR

CHIDIST

CHIINV

CHITEST

CHOOSE

CLEAN

CODE

COLUMN

COLUMNS

COMPLEX

CONCATENATE

CONFIDENCE

CONVERT

CORREL

COS

COSH

COUNT

COUNTA

COUNTIF

COUNTBLANK

COUPDAYBS

COUPDAYS

COUPDAYSNC

COUPNCD

COUPNUM

COUPPCD

COVAR

CRITBINOM

CUMIPMT

CUMPRINC

DATE

DATEVALUE

DAVERAGE

DAY

DAYS360

DB

DCOUNTA

DCOUNT

DDB

DEGREES

DELTA

DEVSQ

DGET

DISC

DMAX

DMIN

DOLLAR

DOLLARDE

DOLLARFR

DPRODUCT

DSTDEV

DSTDEVP

DSUM

DURATION

DVAR

DVARP

EFFECT

EOMONTH

ERF

ERFC

EVEN

EXACT

EXP

EXPONDIST

FACT

FACTDOUBLE

FALSE

FDIST

FIND

FINV

FISHER

FISHERINV

FIXED

FLOOR

FORECAST

FREQUENCY

FTEST

FV

GAMMADIST

GAMMAINV

GAMMALN

GCD

GEOMEAN

GESTEP

GROWTH

HARMEAN

HOUR

HYPGEOMDIST

IF

IMABS

IMAGINARY

IMARGUMENT

IMCONJUGATE

IMCOS

IMDIV

IMEXP

IMLN

IMLOG10

IMLOG2

IMPOWER

IMPRODUCT

IMREAL

IMSIN

IMSQRT

IMSUB

IMSUM

INDEX

INDIRECT

INT

INTERCEPT

INTRATE

IPMT

IRR

ISBLANK

ISERR

ISERROR

ISEVEN

ISLOGICAL

ISNA

ISNONTEXT

ISNUMBER

ISODD

ISTEXT

KURT

LARGE

LCM

LEFT

LEN

LINEST

LN

LOG

LOG10

LOGEST

LOGINV

LOGNORMDIST

LOWER

MATCH

MAX

MDETERM

MDURATION

MEDIAN

MID

MIN

MINUTE

MINVERSE

MIRR

MMULT

MOD

MODE

MONTH

MROUND

MULTINOMIAL

N

NA

NEGBINOMDIST

NETWORKDAYS

NOMINAL

NORMDIST

NORMINV

NORMSDIST

NORMSINV

NOT

NOW

NPER

NPV

ODD

ODDFPRICE

ODDFYIELD

ODDLPRICE

ODDLYIELD

OFFSET

OR

PEARSON

PERCENTILE

PERCENTRANK

PERMUT

PI

PMT

POISSON

POWER

PPMT

PRICE

PRICEDISC

PRICEMAT

PROB

PRODUCT

PROPER

PV

QUARTILE

QUOTIENT

RADIANS

RAND

RANDBETWEEN

RANK

RATE

RECEIVED

REPLACE

REPT

RIGHT

ROMAN

ROUND

ROUNDDOWN

ROUNDUP

ROW

ROWS

RSQ

SEARCH

SECOND

SIGN

SIN

SINH

SKEW

SLN

SLOPE

SMALL

SQRT

SQRTPI

STANDARDIZE

STDEV

STDEVP

STEYX

SUBSTITUTE

SUBTOTAL

SUM

SUMIF

SUMPRODUCT

SUMSQ

SUMX2MY2

SUMX2PY2

SUMXMY2

SYD

T

TAN

TANH

TBILLEQ

TBILLPRICE

TBILLYIELD

TDIST

TIME

TIMEVALUE

TINV

TODAY

TRANSPOSE

TREND

TRIM

TRIMMEAN

TRUE

TRUNC

TTEST

TYPE

UPPER

VALUE

VAR

VARP

VDB

WEIBULL

WEEKDAY

WORKDAY

XIRR

XNPV

YEAR

YEARFRAC

YIELD

YIELDDISC

YIELDMAT

ZTEST

These Excel functions are not supported. Only the values are imported, and the cells are shaded red to indicate that the formula was not brought in.

AMORDEGRC

AMORLINC

AREAS

BIN2DEC

BIN2HEX

BIN2OCT

COMBIN

DCOUNT

DEC2BIN

DEC2HEX

DEC2OCT

DGET

DPRODUCT

EDATE

ERROR.TYPE

FVSCHEDULE

HEX2BIN

HEX2DEC

HEX2OCT

HLOOKUP

INFO

ISREF

LOOKUP

OCT2BIN

OCT2DEC

OCT2HEX

TEXT

VLOOKUP


Excel Features

Ease of Use

Templates

Background Recalc

Undo/Redo Last Action

Toolbar

Context-sensitive Toolbar

Automatic Column Widths

AutoSum

AutoFill

Automatic Formats

Mail Enabled

Wizards

Page Break Preview

Spreadsheet Formatting

Spell Checker

Center Across Block

In-Cell Editing

Nameable Sheet Tabs

Formula and Analysis

@Functions

Function Wizard

Matrix Operations

What-If Tables

Goal Seeker

Nonlinear Solver

Multi-variable Backsolver

Array Formulas

Scenario Manager

Graphing

Pie Graphs

XY Graphs

Combination Bar/Line Graphs

Perspective Graphs

3D Graphs

Dual Y-axes

Log Scaling

Floating Graphs

Graphing on Worksheet

Drag and Drop Graph Series

Graph Colors

3D View Perspective Control

3D View Rotation Control

3D View Elevation Control

Presentations

Floating Text Boxes

Import graphics

Slide Shows

Interactive Slide Shows

Notebook Drawing Layer

Macros and Customization

Macro Libraries

Customizable Menus

Trace Mode

Break Points

Floating Buttons

Visual Dialog Builder

Menu Equivalents and Procedural Macro Language

Built-in Full Debugger

Toolbar Designer

Data Access and Compatibility

3D Notebooks

Excel 2.1/3.0/4.0/5.0 (XLS)

Lotus 1-2-3 Files

dBASE II/III/IV (DBF)

Impress

Comma Separated Values (CSV)

Multiplan (SLK)

Database Management

Search/Replace

Queried Import

Sort Databases

Auditing and Security

Cell-based Auditing

Password-protect File

Cell Notes

External Range Links

Automatic File Backup


About Help
About Corel Quattro Pro Help

You can use Help to get information about Corel Quattro Pro.

Help Topics

You can get Help wherever you are in Corel Quattro Pro by clicking the [image] icon, by clicking the Help button, or by pressing F1. You can also search for information by the kind of work you have to do (How Do I...?) in the Contents, by searching in the keyword Index or Find text in Help topics. You can also use the PerfectExpert to ask for help in your own words.

To find Help topics

To use context-sensitive Help

To view the online manuals

About QuickTips

Ask the PerfectExpert

Lets you enter a question in your own words, and then finds the best solution in Help.

To ask the PerfectExpert for help

The PerfectExpert

The new the PerfectExpert combines the best features from QuickTasks, templates, Help, and Coaches to help you accomplish your work more quickly. The PerfectExpert can guide you through a detailed project such as creating a resume (even if you want to use other suite applications to create parts of the document), or it can guide you through a smaller task such as inserting a clipart image. The PerfectExpert even provides you with galleries of professionally-designed documents to choose from, and you can change the layout and content in any number of ways to match your needs.

Click Help [image] PerfectExpert to display the PerfectExpert in a window next to your document.

Click File [image] New to have the PerfectExpert guide you through a new project.

Corel Web Site

If you have installed Netscape Navigator and have a modem or network connection to an Internet service provider, you can go to the Corel Quattro Pro home page, which contains links to information and resources that can help you use Corel Quattro Pro.

Select Help [image] Corel Web Site to go to the Corel Quattro Pro home page on the World Wide Web.

About Corel Quattro Pro

Displays serial number, personal identification number (PIN), release versions, login alias, memory use, and copyright information.


To find Help topics
To find Help topics,

Click Help [image] Help Topics.

Click Contents for visual examples, help with tasks (How Do I...?), help with macros, and other Corel information.

Click Index to look up a topic or task in an alphabetical list.

Click Find to search for a word in the text of all Help topics.

Click Ask the PerfectExpert to search for help in your own words.

Tips

Click Help [image] PerfectExpert or File [image] New for help creating specific types of documents.

The Showcase Corel Quattro Pro page in Contents illustrates many tasks you can do. Click in the illustrations for specific help about a task.

Each book listed in the How Do I book in Contents represents a category of tasks. The pages represent individual topics.

When you search with Find, all topics containing the word you type are listed. Type a second or third word to narrow the search.

Ask the PerfectExpert lists several topics that should match your query. Click different books if the topic you want is not listed.

You can keep the Help window displayed on top of the application you're working in. In the Help window, click Options [image] Keep Help on Top [image] On Top.

About Corel Quattro Pro 8 Help


To use context-sensitive Help
To use context-sensitive Help,

1	Click [image] on the top right corner of a dialog box.

2	Place the pointer on the item you want information about, then click.

Tips

You can also right-click an item to get information.

To get more help on pull-down menu items, press Shift+F1, place the pointer on the item, then click.

About Corel Quattro Pro 8 Help


About QuickTips

QuickTips provide information about the icons and buttons on the Toolbar, Property Bar, and Application Bar, and about options on the menu bar. QuickTips pop up in a small box next to the pointer when you point to the icon or button for a few seconds.

You can also view What's This Tips on dialogs by clicking on the question mark in the upper right corner of the dialog, then clicking on the option you want help on. You can also right-click the option.

To turn QuickTips on or off,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click the Display tab [image] Show QuickTips.

About Corel Quattro Pro 8 Help


About the Reference Center

The Reference Center contains the full text of the printed manuals available for the Corel WordPerfect Suite in Envoy format. This allows you to search the manuals to quickly find the information you need.

You can access the Reference Center by clicking Start on the Windows Taskbar [image] Corel WordPerfect Suite 8 [image] Setup & Notes [image] Reference Center.

To view the online manuals

Go to the Reference Center

Tip

You can access the Reference Center from within Corel Quattro Pro by clicking Help [image] Help Topics [image] Contents [image] View Manuals [image] Go to the Reference Center.

About Corel Quattro Pro 8 Help


Reference Center
To view the online manuals,

1	Insert the Corel WordPerfect Suite 8 CD-ROM.

2	Click Start on the Windows taskbar [image] Corel WordPerfect Suite 8 [image] Setup & Notes [image] Reference Center.

Tips

You can also run the Setup Program on the CD-ROM, then click Reference Center on the startup screen.

To install the Reference Center locally, rerun the Setup program, specify a Custom Install, then click the Reference Center option.

About the Reference Center

Related Concepts


To ask the PerfectExpert for help
To ask the PerfectExpert for help,

1	Click Help [image] Ask the PerfectExpert.

2	Type a question, then click Search.

3	Click the topic that matches your task, then click Display.

Tips

If a Help window is already open, click Help Topics [image] Ask the PerfectExpert to type in a question.

Ask the PerfectExpert displays matching topics in two categories: Most Likely Choices and Other Possible Choices. If the topic doesn't appear in the top list, you can click a book to view more topics. The list is sorted by application.

To select a question you asked previously, click the down arrow to the right of the edit field, then select an item from the drop-down list.

About Corel Quattro Pro Help


To go to the Corel Quattro Pro home page on the World Wide Web
To go to the Corel Quattro Pro home page on the World Wide Web,

1	Click Help [image] Corel Web Site.

About Corel Quattro Pro Help


About Importing Data from a Database

When you need to work with data that is stored away from your computer--for example in a Paradox or Quicken database or on a networked mainframe computer--you can import that data and save yourself the work of retyping or opening a large database as a spreadsheet file.

You can access and retrieve data from Paradox, dBase, or any ODBC or BDE (Borland Database Engine) data source provided there is a full conformance 32-bit ODBC or IDAPI driver installed for that data source. When using an ODBC driver to access data, password-protection is an issue for that driver.

For information about the installation and conformance level of a specific driver, see the documentation for that driver.

ODBC and IDAPI drivers may be purchased separately from a third party.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

To import data from an external database using the expert

To select a database

To select tables

To set criteria

Related Concepts

Related Topics


To import data from an external database using the expert
To import data from an external database using the expert,

1	Click Insert [image] External Data [image] Expert.

2	Specify the type of the data you are going to import.

3	Click the database you want to import or specify the path where it is stored, then click Next.

4	Click the tables in the database that you want to import, then click Next.

5	Double-click the fields you want to import, clicking [image] and [image] if you need to change the order of the fields you are importing, or clicking [image] to remove a field from the list.

6	As necessary, set import options, join tables, and define filters.

7	If necessary, specify a notebook destination for the import results.

8	Click Finish.

To select a database

To select tables

To set criteria

Tip

To update imported data that has changed in the original database, click on the sheet containing the data, then click Insert [image] External Data [image] Expert [image] Finish.

About Importing Data from a Database

Related Topics


To select a database
To select a database,

1	Specify the type of the data you are going to import.

2	Click the database you want to import or specify the path where it is stored.

3	Click Next.

Tip

If no ODBC sources are listed in the Database list, you may need to add them. Click Start [image] Settings [image] Control Panel [image] 32BitODBC, then click Help if you need assistance.

If no BDE sources (also called aliases) are listed, to create them click Start on the Windows 95 taskbar [image] Corel WordPerfect Suite 8 [image] Tools [image] Database Engine 4.0. Click Help as you run the utility if you need assistance.

About Importing Data from a Database

Related Topics


Select the database you want to import.


Specify the data type for a database you want to import.


Specify the path for a database you want to import.


Click the database you want to import.


To select tables
To select tables,

1	Click the tables in the database that you want to import.

2	Click Next.

About Importing Data from a Database

Related Topics


Select the tables you want to import.


To set criteria
To set criteria,

1	Double-click the fields you want to import.

2	As necessary, set import options, join tables, and define filters.

3	If necessary, specify a notebook destination for the import results.

4	Click Finish.

To set import options

To join tables

To define filters

Tip

Click [image] and [image] to change the order of the fields you are importing, or click [image] to remove a field from the list.

About Importing Data from a Database

Related Topics


Double-click the available fields you want to import.


Click an available field you want to import, then click >>.


Move selected fields you want to import up or down, or delete selected fields.


Move a selected field up in the list.


Move a selected field down in the list.


Delete a selected field from the list.


Specify a notebook destination for the import results.


To set import options
To set import options,

You can keep duplicate rows of information out of the data you are importing. For example, if you want the imported data to list all customers who have ordered books, any customers who have ordered more than one book are listed on a new row for each book. To avoid this, click Options, then click Allow duplicate rows to deselect it.

If you do not want to include field names as column headings in the first row of data you are importing, click Options, then click Include column headings to deselect it.

If you want the parameters you have specified to clear once the data is imported so that you can import all new data the next time you click Insert [image] External Data [image] Expert, click Options, then click Keep query definition to deselect it.

About Importing Data from a Database

Related Topics


Set import options for fields you want to import.


Specify whether to allow duplicate rows in the data you are importing.


Specify whether to include field names as column headings in the first row of data you are importing.


Specify whether to keep the query definition the next time you import the database.


Completes the Expert.


Clears the highlighted statement to join fields OR define filters.


To join tables
To join tables,

If you are using more than one table, you need to join common fields in the tables, even if they have different field names, to avoid duplicating their records in the data you import. For example, if two of the tables you are using contain the same customer ID field, you need to join the tables by those two fields. Click Join, click the field in the first Field list, then click the common field in the second Field list to join them.

If you are using more than two tables, join any other common fields by clicking And, then clicking those fields in the second Field list.

About Importing Data from a Database

Related Topics


Join tables for fields you want to import.


Select a common field you want to join.


Select another common field you want to join.


Add another statement for additional fields you want to join.


To define filters
To define filters,

You can retrieve only the portions of data you want. For example, you could list only those customers who have ordered a particular book so that you can send them a mailer announcing the sequel. Click Filter, click the field you want to narrow, click an operator (such as = or >), click List Values to list a few sample values from the selected field in the Value list, then select one of those values or type a value.

Use the And button when you need to narrow your filter. For example, you could list customers who have a credit limit above a certain amount and who live in a certain city. Using the Or button broadens the results of your filter; using the And button narrows the results.

About Importing Data from a Database

Related Topics


Define filters for fields you want to import.


Specify the field you want to filter.


Specify the operator to use in your filter.


Specify the field's value you want to filter.


See or hide possible values for the field.


Add another statement for a value you want to filter.


Add an alternative statement for a value you want to filter.


To use SQL statements when inserting external data
To use SQL statements when inserting external data,

1	Edit the SQL statement manually, if you want to import a different set of data.

Tips

Even though Corel Quattro Pro cannot graphically represent the SQL statement you used to import your data, you can proceed to import the data without editing the SQL statement if you want to.

Click Options to set import options for fields you want to import. The Allow duplicate rows is unavailable.

Related Topics


Edit the SQL statement that Corel Quattro Pro could not graphically represent.


To open a password-protected table
To open a password-protected table,

1	Type the password for the table.

The pound symbol (#) represents the characters you type.

Tips

When you import a password-protected file using Insert [image] External Data [image] Import Database File (or File [image] Open), the password for the table is discarded once you close the file.

When you perform a QBE query using Insert [image] External Data [image] Table Query, the password(s) is retained until you exit Corel Quattro Pro.

Click Add to store the password in memory so that if other tables you want to query require the same password, you can open them without re-entering the password.

Click Remove to release the password from memory so that if any table you want to query requires the password, you must re-enter the password to open it.

Click Remove All to delete all passwords from memory so that you must enter a password for any protected table you want to query.


Type the password for the database table you want to import or query.


Store the password in memory so you can perform a table query for any additional protected tables that require the same password--without re-entering the password.


Remove the password from memory, requiring you to type the password the next time you perform a table query on a protected table.


Remove all passwords from memory, requiring you to type a password the next time you perform a table query on a protected table.


About Outlines

Use Outline to organize row or column cells into groups so you can show summary cells, such as totals and averages, while hiding detailed cells.

An outline can summarize data in part or all of a notebook. A notebook sheet can contain only one outline. In an outline, each group of detailed cells with their associated summary cells is known as an outline group. You can create outline groups automatically, then add additional outline groups as needed manually. Or you can create all outline groups manually.

To filter your notebook to see only certain data you specify, use QuickFilters.

To automatically create an outline

To manually create an outline

To group or ungroup cells in an outline

To expand or collapse an outline group

To hide or show an outline

To position an outline's summary cells

Related Concepts


To automatically create an outline
To automatically create an outline,

1	In your notebook add a formula(s) that summarizes data cells in adjacent rows or columns. For example, add a column of totals next to the cells you want to total.

2	Click any cell in the notebook.

3	Click Tools [image] Outline [image] Auto Outline.

Tips

Before you can use Auto Outline to automatically outline data, your notebook must already contain detailed cells that are summarized in summary cells. If the rows and columns of summary cells contain values instead of formulas, or if summary cells are not adjacent to the detailed cells, or if you want to add more outline groups, you can create an outline manually.

To hide or show the Outline toolbar, click Tools [image] Outline [image] Show Outline Toolbar.

The [image] [image] in the panel on the side or top of the notebook, indicate each outline group.

To apply a predesigned format to cells in an outline, select the outline cells you want to format, then click [image].

About Outlines


To manually create an outline
To manually create an outline,

1	In your notebook add a formula(s) that summarizes cells.

2	Select the cells you want in an outline group, including the summary cells.

3	Click Tools [image] Outline [image] Group.

4	Click Tools [image] Outline [image] Show Outline Toolbar.

5	Continue selecting rows or columns and clicking [image] until you have created all of the outline groups you want in your outline.

Tips

When selecting cells you want in an outline group, select cells in the rows or in the columns. Include the summary row or column cells. You can hold down Ctrl to select cells that are not adjacent.

To change outline groups, click [image] or [image] to group or ungroup selected cells, or click [image] to remove all groups in an outline.

The [image] [image] in the panel on the side or top of the notebook, indicate each outline group.

To apply a predesigned format to a cells in an outline, select the outline cells you want to format, then click [image].

About Outlines


To group or ungroup cells in an outline
To group or ungroup cells in an outline,

1	Click Tools [image] Outline [image] Show Outline Toolbar.

2	Select the row or column cells you want to group or ungroup, including the summary cells.

3	Click [image] or [image] to group or ungroup the selected cells.

4	Continue selecting rows or columns and clicking [image] or [image] until you have created or removed all of the outline groups you want in your outline.

Tips

When selecting cells you want in an outline group, select cells in the rows or in the columns. Include the summary row or column cells. You can hold down Ctrl to select cells that are not adjacent.

You can create a multi-level outline, made up of outline groups that include other outline groups.

For example, Column C contains subtotals for Columns A - B, Column E contains subtotals for Columns A - D, and Column G contains grand totals of all the Columns A - F. You can create outline groups for Columns A - C, for Columns A - E, and for Columns A - G. When creating multi-level outline groups, select all of the detailed cells and the summary cells that make up each outline group level.

To remove all outline groups on the current sheet, click [image].

You can also click Tools [image] Outline [image] Group, Ungroup, or Ungroup All.

About Outlines


To expand or collapse an outline group
To expand or collapse an outline group,

1	Click either [image] or [image] in the panel on the side or top of the notebook to show either all data cells or only the summary cells in an outline group.

Tips

To show or hide detailed cells for all the groups in one level of the outline, click [image] in the panel on the side or top of the notebook. All data below the level you click is hidden.

To print an outlined summary report, expand or collapse the outline groups you want to show or hide, then click File [image] Print.

To sort an outline group that is either expanded or collapsed, click Tools [image] Sort.

You can select the outline group you want to expand or collapse, then click [image] or [image] to expand or collapse the outline group.

You can also select the outline group you want to expand or collapse, then click Tools [image] Outline [image] Expand Group or Collapse Group.

To hide or show the Outline toolbar, click Tools [image] Outline [image] Show Outline Toolbar.

About Outlines


To hide or show an outline
To hide or show an outline,

1	Click Tools [image] Outline [image] Show Outline.

2	Click [image] to hide or show an outline and its outline indicators, which appear in the panel on the side or top of the notebook.

Tip

To hide or show the Outline toolbar, click Tools [image] Outline [image] Show Outline Toolbar.

About Outlines


To position an outline's summary cells
To position an outline's summary cells,

1	Click Tools [image] Outline [image] Show Outline Toolbar to show the toolbar.

2	Click [image].

3	Select where to display the row and column summary cells.

Tips

You can also click Tools [image] Outline [image] Options to position an outline's summary cells.

To show either all data cells or only the summary cells in an outline group, click either [image] or [image] in the panel on the side or top of the notebook.

The [image] indicator, which appears in each outline group in the panel on the side or top of the notebook, shows where--in what row or column--the summary cells are for the outline group.

About Outlines


Lets you specify where to place row and column summary cells, the cells containing formulas (average, subtotal, total, and so on) that summarize data in detailed cells.


Troubleshooting Outlines

I can't see the Outlining Tools toolbar.

I can't see the outline indicators on my notebook.

My rows or columns are not grouped properly in a multi-level outline.

When I sort cells in an outline group, should the outline groups be collapsed or expanded?

How can I create a chart of my summary cells--without the detailed cells?


Troubleshooting: I can't see the Outlining Tools toolbar.
I can't see the Outlining Tools toolbar.

1	Click Tools [image] Outline [image] Show Outline Toolbar.


Troubleshooting: I can't see the outline indicators on my notebook.
I can't see the outline indicators on my notebook.

1	Click Tools [image] Outline [image] Show Outline to hide or show an outline and its indicators.


Troubleshooting: My rows or columns are not grouped properly in a multilevel outline.
My rows or columns are not grouped properly in a multi-level outline.

When creating multi-level outline groups, select all of the detailed cells and the summary cells that make up each outline group level.

When grouping cells in a multi-level outline, display all the data to make sure you select the detailed cells and their associated summary cells for each outline group level.

For example, Column C contains subtotals for Columns A - B, Column E contains subtotals for Columns A - D, and Column G contains grand totals of all the Columns A - F. You can create outline groups for Columns A - C, for Columns A - E, and for Columns A - G.

Tip

To regroup cells in an outline group, first click Tools [image] Outline [image] Show Outline Toolbar to display the toolbar. Then, expand the outline group, select the cells in the outline group, then click [image] to remove the outline group. Next, select the cells you want in the outline group, then click [image] to group the cells.


Troubleshooting: When I sort cells in outline groups, should the outline groups be collapsed or expanded?
When I sort cells in outline groups, should the outline groups be collapsed or expanded?

It doesn't matter because all the cells in the collapsed or expanded outline groups will be sorted.


Troubleshooting: How can I create a chart of my summary cells without the detailed cells?
How can I create a chart of my summary cells--without the detailed cells?

1	Select the summary cells, then insert a chart.


About Outline Indicators

You can use outline indicators to hide or show detailed cells in a notebook outline. To display the outline indicators, click Tools [image] Outline [image] Show Outline.

Indicates that the detailed cells are collapsed in the outline group. Click the indicator to expand the outline group.

Indicates that the detailed cells in rows are expanded in the outline group. Click the indicator to collapse the outline group.

Indicates that the detailed cells in columns are expanded in the outline group. Click the indicator to collapse the outline group.

Appearing in each outline group in the panel on the side or top of the notebook, indicates where--in what row or column--the summary cells are for that outline group.

Shows specific multi-levels of an outline. To show or hide detailed cells for all the groups in one level of the outline, click the row and column level indicators. All data below the level you click is hidden.


About QuickFilter
About QuickFilters

You can quickly filter and sort rows by the information in any column.

When you sort items in a column, you can sort either numbers or letters, either ascending (A-Z) or descending (Z-A). The filter buttons above each column let you choose the way you want to sort or filter the rows.

For example, in the data below you could sort the rows numerically by the middle column or alphabetically by the column on the right.

Filtering is a quick and easy way to work with a subset of data in a column. When you create a filter, only the rows that contain the values you specify are displayed. Other rows in the list are temporarily hidden.

For example, if your data includes a list of sales personnel and their monthly sales, you could specify that you only want the sales people to display who made over $1,000.

When a filter is applied to a column, the filter button above that column turns blue.

To sort and filter data

About Custom Filters

To use the Top 10 filter

To create a custom filter

Related Concepts


Click Sort A-Z or Sort Z-A to sort the list in alphabetical order or reverse alphabetical order. To show only certain information, click another option. For example, click Blanks to see information that is missing, click Non-Blanks to see only cells that contain information, or click Custom to create your own filter, for example listing items greater than a certain number.


To sort and filter data
To sort and filter data,

1	Click in the data where you want to create a QuickFilter.

2	Click Tools [image] QuickFilter.

3	Click the filter button over the values you want to sort or filter by.

4	To sort, click Sort (A-Z) for ascending order, or click Sort (Z-A) for descending order.

5	To filter by a single value, click that value from the list.

For example, if your data listed personnel, you could select sales from a job description list and have only sales personnel display.

Tips

When you click in your data to create filters, Corel Quattro Pro assumes the first row is a heading row. If this is not the case and you want the filter buttons to display above the data, drag to select the data and the blank row above it.

To display only rows that contain data in a certain column, click the filter button over that column, then click Non Blank. To display only rows that do not contain data, click Blank.

To turn off a filter in a column, click the filter button in that column, then click Show All.

To turn off QuickFilters, click Tools [image] QuickFilter.

To specify sort conditions that you can change and reuse, click anywhere in the data you want to sort, click Tools [image] Sort, then specify the column(s) you want to sort by; click Previous Sorts to select sorts you have defined so you can change and reuse them.

Related Concepts

About QuickFilters


About Custom Filters

When you use QuickFilters, you can use the Top 10 option to display rows in your data that contain whatever upper or lower amounts you want, for example, the top 10% of a class of students.

Using the Custom option, you can customize a filter to include search conditions for up to three values. For example, you could display items that begin with a certain letter. Plus you can specify three different values, which means you could have all names display that begin with A, or B, or C, for instance. If you are filtering for numeric values, you could filter for items equal to a certain amount, greater than, less than, and so on.

To use the Top 10 filter

To create a custom filter

Related Concepts


To create a custom filter
To create a custom filter,

1	Click in the data where you want to create QuickFilters.

2	Click Tools [image] QuickFilter.

3	Click the filter button where you want to create a filter, then click Custom.

4	Select a phrase from the drop down list on the left.

5	Select an item from the center list or type a value (letter or number).

6	If you want to specify more than one value, click either And or Or from the list on the right, then specify another row of options.

For example, to have numbers display between 50 and 100, you would choose the following:

greater than or equal to	50	And

less than or equal to	100

To display names that begin with A, B, or C, you would choose the following:

begins with	A	Or

begins with	B	Or

begins with	C

Tip

You can also specify multiple filters. For example, in a column containing states, you could specify Idaho. In an income column, you could specify the top 10%. In a name column, you could create a custom filter and specify names that begin with S. This would display persons from Idaho in the top 10% income bracket whose names begin with S.

Related Concepts

More Info


To use the Top 10 filter
To use the Top 10 filter,

To filter using the Top 10 option, the column where you create the filter must contain numerical values.

1	Click in the data where you want to create QuickFilters.

2	Click Tools [image] QuickFilter.

3	Click the filter button where you want to create a filter, then click Top 10.

4	Specify Top or Bottom to display either the top or bottom of the amounts you specify.

5	Specify a number.

6	Click Value if you want the number to be an exact value, or click Percent if you want the number to be a percent.

Tip

You can also specify multiple filters. For example, in a column containing states, you could specify Idaho. In an income column, you could specify the top 10%. In a name column, you could create a custom filter and specify names that begin with S. This would display persons from Idaho in the top 10% income bracket whose names begin with S.

Related Concepts

About


Click the up and down arrows to increase or decrease the number. You can also type a number.


Click the down arrow, then select a filter option.


Locked
Protects or unprotects an object.


Object Name
Shows the name for the selected object.


Create Header
Creates or hides a header.


Create Footer
Creates or hides a footer.


What is New in Corel Quattro Pro 8

Corel Quattro Pro 8 is easier to use in four key ways:

See your work--What You See Is What You Get (WYSIWYG). Corel Quattro Pro lets you see and work with margins, headers, and footers on screen before you print.

Stay focused on your work. Corel Quattro Pro lets you include comments, find and replace data more easily, switch between notebooks from the Application Bar, outline your data, and quickly format your data.

Get assistance with your work--as you work. Corel Quattro Pro has many new user assistants that help you create and complete your projects quickly.

Work faster and easier. Corel Quattro Pro starts up faster, opens files faster, recalculates faster, includes font-attributed text such as bold in cells, has better sorting and printing, shows a new look for the toolbars, and uses a default notebook style that you can customize.

Menu Changes in Corel Quattro Pro 8

For easier use, Corel Quattro Pro has a new look. Menus are simplified and commands regrouped. Some terms have been replaced with more understandable terms. The individual tabs in the notebook are no longer pages, but are referred to as sheets.

Where Did It Go in Corel Quattro Pro 8?

Some Corel Quattro Pro commands have been moved and regrouped so you can work faster.

New Features

Corel Quattro Pro 8 has been enhanced with the addition of several key new features.

The PerfectExpert

Corel Quattro Pro 8 adds many new tasks to this groundbreaking technology that combines interactive Help and advanced Wizard technology. Now you have the help you need to complete tasks without hunting through manuals, online references, or menus. The PerfectExpert helps you with tasks, not just tools, by blending the best of Corel QuickTasks, templates, Help, and coaches across applications.

Toolbars

Buttons on the toolbar look flat, but when you move the mouse over them they change to show you have selected them. (You can turn on or off preselecting with the mouse by clicking Tools [image] Settings [image] Display [image] Show Preselection.)

Property Bars

Property Bars gives you a quick and easy way to access the tools you need to complete a task, depending on the context of your work. For example, when you are working on a table, a Property Bar displays table tools. When you select a graphic, a Property Bar displays graphics tools.

Application Bar

The Application Bar shows open notebooks; icons that let you know if Num Lock is on or off, what mode the program is in, and the QuickSum of the cells you are calculating.

The Application Bar makes it easier to toggle back and forth between opened notebooks. You can easily drag-and-drop data between notebooks or switch to another notebook. For example, you can drag a table from the current notebook to one of the open notebooks via the Application Bar. When you drag a table to the name of the notebook, the notebook displays and you can then drop the table within it.

QuickCell--Corel Quattro Pro 8 adds QuickCell to its already powerful Application Bar. Drag any cell to the Application Bar at the bottom of the window to see its updated value as you change other cells elsewhere in the spreadsheet.

Page View

Corel Quattro Pro 8 includes the first editable WYSIWYG (what you see is what you get) view in any major spreadsheet program. As you work on areas such as margins, headers, and footers, you can see how your pages will appear when you print them.

Cell Enhancements

Combine multiple cells with Join Cells. Control your spreadsheet’s look with new layout capabilites like multiple fonts, attributes, and sizes within a cell. Do not miss the frequently requested features of superscript and subscript.

Cell Reference Checker

Cell Reference Checker ensures accuracy by checking and fixing formulas that refer to other cells. It suggests corrections for cell references that should have referred to a specific cell (an absolute reference) but referred to a cell relative to a new location (relative reference) when filled or pasted.

Hyperlinks

Create links to Internet addresses or files inside cells in your notebook.

Paste Special

You can right click to use Paste Special.

Ask the PerfectExpert

You can ask a question in your own words about Corel Quattro Pro. Ask the PerfectExpert guides you to the appropriate help you need. To use this feature, click Help [image] Ask the PerfectExpert.

Auditing Tools

As you work with large sources of data, you need powerful auditing tools. Corel Quattro Pro 8 enables you to extract crucial business information from a sea of data.

Auditing acts as your watchdog to effortlessly trace dependent cells, precedents, and even errors in large complex spreadsheets.

QuickFilter instantly removes irrelevant data to let you focus on key information.

Outlining Tools

Outlining groups data into collapsible and expandable sets so you can better handle large sections of information.

And essential tools including database access tools and the cross tabs feature are even easier to use than ever.

Year 2000

Corel Quattro Pro handles dates which span the 20th and 21st centuries.

@Functions

Corel Quattro Pro has such new @functions as @LASTCELLVALUE, @XCOUNT, and @PMTC and @GETREGISTRYKEY.

New Macro Commands

Corel Quattro Pro has many new macro commands.

Related Topics


Where Did It Go in Corel Quattro Pro 8?

To make using commands easier and more intuitive, some Corel Quattro Pro commands have moved to new menus or to property bars in this version.

On the Property Bar

Using the Property Bars, you can quickly and easily access many of the the tools you need to complete a task. For example, when you are working on a table, a Property Bar displays table tools. When you select a graphic, a Property Bar displays graphics tools.

Data Menu

Look in the Insert menu or Tools menu for menu items that used to be in the Data menu.

Graphics Menu

Look in the Insert menu or Tools menu for menu items that used to be in the Graphics menu.

Keystrokes in Menus

Look in the Quicktips for shortcut keystrokes that used to be in the menus.

Experts

Experts are now the way to perform an analysis; create a budget, chart, map, or slide show; consolidate data; and test a scenario or what-if. Look in the appropriate menu that applies for each expert. For example, Insert [image] Chart lets you create a new chart using the Chart Expert.

Related Topics


Menu Changes in Corel Quattro Pro 8

To simplify menus, some Corel Quattro Pro commands have moved to new menus in this version. (If you want to use the Corel Quatto Pro 7 menu structure, right-click the menu bar, then click QP7 Menu.)

Keep in mind that menus change depending on the active window. For example, when you insert a chart, the menus change to reflect what commands are available when working in a chart. You can choose a menu to view its changes.

File menu

Edit menu

View menu

Insert menu

Format menu

Data menu

Graphics menu

Tools menu

Window menu

Help menu

Chart menu

Slides menu

Note

Commands for new features have been added. Most of the macro commands for commands in the menus have not changed.

Related Topics


File Menu Changes in Corel Quattro Pro 8

Corel Quattro Pro 7	Corel Quattro Pro 8
(new in 8)	File [image] Version Control
File [image] Print [image] Page Setup	File [image] Page Setup
File [image] Publish to	File [image] Send To
File [image] Send	File [image] Send To
Related Topics


Edit Menu Changes in Corel Quattro Pro 8

Corel Quattro Pro 7	Corel Quattro Pro 8
Edit [image] Copy Block	Edit [image] Copy Cells
Edit [image] Move Block	Use Cut and Paste.
Edit [image] Move Pages	Edit [image] Move Sheets
Data [image] Values	Edit [image] Convert to Values
Edit [image] Clear Values	Edit [image] Clear [image] Values
Edit [image] Clear Formats	Edit [image] Clear [image] Formats
(new in 8)	Edit [image] Clear [image] Comments
Data [image] Fill	Edit [image] Fill
Edit [image] Preferences	Tools [image] Settings
Related Topics


View Menu Changes in Corel Quattro Pro 8

Corel Quattro Pro 7	Corel Quattro Pro 8
View [image] Spreadsheet	View [image] Draft View [image] Page
View [image] Objects Page	View [image] Objects
View [image] Display Options	Tools [image] Settings [image] Display
Related Topics


Insert Menu Changes in Corel Quattro Pro 8

Corel Quattro Pro 7	Corel Quattro Pro 8
Insert [image] Block	Insert [image] Cells Insert [image] Row Insert [image] Column Insert [image] Sheet
Insert [image] Block Names	Insert [image] Name [image] Cells
Insert [image] Group Name	Insert [image] Name [image] Group of Sheets
Insert [image] Image	Insert [image] Graphics [image] Clipart Insert [image] Graphics [image] TextArt Insert [image] Graphics [image] Draw Picture
Graphics [image] New Chart	Insert [image] Chart
Graphics [image] New Map	Insert [image] Graphics [image] Map
Insert [image] Draw Objects (chart edit mode)	Insert [image] Shape
(new in 8)	Insert [image] Comment
(new in 8)	Insert [image] Date
Data [image] External Data	Insert [image] External Data
Related Topics


Format Menu Changes in Corel Quattro Pro 8

Corel Quattro Pro 7	Corel Quattro Pro 8
Format [image] Block	Format [image] Selection
Format [image] Page	Format [image] Sheet
Related Topics


Data Menu Changes in Corel Quattro Pro 8

Corel Quattro Pro 7	Corel Quattro Pro 8
Data [image] Values	Edit [image] Convert to Values
Data [image] Sort	Tools [image] Sort
Data [image] Fill	Edit [image] Fill
Data [image] Define Fill Series	Edit [image] Fill [image] Define QuickFill
Data [image] Consolidate	Tools [image] Consolidate
Data [image] Combine Files	Tools [image] Data Tools [image] Combine Files
Data [image] Extract to File	Tools [image] Data Tools [image] Extract to File
Data [image] Data Modeling Desktop (previously used to create cross tabs)	Tools [image] Data Tools [image] Cross Tabs
Data [image] Notebook Query	Tools [image] Data Tools [image] Notebook Query
Data [image] External Data	Insert [image] External Data
Data [image] QuickColumns	Tools [image] Data Tools [image] QuickColumns
Related Topics


Graphics Menu Changes in Corel Quattro Pro 8

Corel Quattro Pro 7	Corel Quattro Pro 8
Graphics [image] New Chart	Insert [image] Chart Or Click a chart, then Chart [image] New Chart
Graphics [image] Edit Chart	Right-click the notebook, then click Edit Chart. Or Click a chart, then click [image] on the property bar.
Graphics [image] Insert Chart	Right-click the notebook, then click Insert Chart. Or Click a chart, then Chart [image] Insert Chart
Graphics [image] Delete Chart	Right-click a chart, then click Cut. Or Click a chart, then Chart [image] Delete Chart
Graphics [image] View Chart	Click a chart, then click [image] on the property bar. Or Click a chart, then Chart [image] View Chart
Graphics [image] New Map	Insert [image] Graphics [image] Map
Graphics [image] New Slide Show	Tools [image] Slide Show [image] New
Graphics [image] Edit Slide Show	Tools [image] Slide Show [image] Edit
Graphics [image] Play Slide Show	Tools [image] Slide Show [image] Play
Related Topics


Tools Menu Changes in Corel Quattro Pro 8

Corel Quattro Pro 7	Corel Quattro Pro 8
Tools [image] Experts [image] Analysis	Tools [image] Numeric Tools [image] Analysis
Tools [image] Experts [image] Budget	Tools [image] Numeric Tools [image] Budget
Tools [image] Experts [image] Chart	Insert [image] Chart
Tools [image] Experts [image] Map	Insert [image] Graphics [image] Map
Tools [image] Experts [image] Slide Show	Tools [image] Slide Show [image] New
Tools [image] Experts [image] Consolidate	Tools [image] Consolidate
Tools [image] Experts [image] Scenario	Tools [image] Scenario [image] New
Tools [image] Experts [image] What-If	Tools [image] Numeric Tools [image] What-If [image] Expert
Tools [image] Formula Composer	Click [image] on the toolbar.
Tools [image] Scenario Manager	Tools [image] Scenario [image] Edit
Tools [image] Toolbar Designer	Right-click the toolbar [image] Edit.
Tools [image] Dialog Designer	Tools [image] Macro [image] Dialog Designer
(new in 8)	Tools [image] QuickFilter
Data [image] Sort	Tools [image] Sort
(new in 8)	Tools [image] Outline
(new in 8)	Tools [image] Auditing
Data [image] Data Modeling Desktop (previously used to create cross tabs)	Tools [image] Data Tools [image] Cross Tabs
Data [image] Notebook Query	Tools [image] Data Tools [image] Notebook Query
Data [image] Combine Files	Tools [image] Data Tools [image] Combine Files
Data [image] Extract to File	Tools [image] Data Tools [image] Extract to File
Data [image] QuickColumns	Tools [image] Data Tools [image] QuickColumns
Graphics [image] New Slide Show	Tools [image] Slide Show [image] New
Graphics [image] Edit Slide Show	Tools [image] Slide Show [image] Edit
Graphics [image] Play Slide Show	Tools [image] Slide Show [image] Play
Edit [image] Preferences	Tools [image] Settings
Related Topics


Window Menu Changes in Corel Quattro Pro 8

Corel Quattro Pro 7	Corel Quattro Pro 8
Window [image] Tile	Window [image] Tile Top to Bottom Or Window [image] Tile Side by Side
Related Topics


Help Menu Changes in Corel Quattro Pro 8

Corel Quattro Pro 7	Corel Quattro Pro 8
Help [image] Ask the PerfectExpert	Help [image] Ask the PerfectExpert
(new in 8)	Help [image] PerfectExpert
Help [image] Online	Help [image] Corel Web Site
Related Topics


Chart Menu Changes in Corel Quattro Pro 8

Corel Quattro Pro 7	Corel Quattro Pro 8
Graphics [image] New Chart	Insert [image] Chart Or Click a chart, then Chart [image] New Chart
Graphics [image] Edit Chart	Click a chart, then click [image] on the property bar. Or Click a chart, then Chart [image] Edit Chart
Graphics [image] Insert Chart	Click a chart, then Chart [image] Insert Chart
Graphics [image] Delete Chart	Right-click a chart, then click Cut. Or Click a chart, then Chart [image] Delete Chart
Graphics [image] View Chart	Click a chart, then click [image] on the property bar. Or Click a chart, then Chart [image] View Chart
Related Topics


Slides Menu Changes in Corel Quattro Pro 8

Corel Quattro Pro 7	Corel Quattro Pro 8
(No changes)	(No changes)
Related Topics


About Send To

Use File [image] Send To to send or publish your notebook through such electronic formats as e-mail, Envoy, or Corel Barista.

To e-mail the current file

To publish an Envoy document

To publish a file to Corel Barista

Tip

Corel Quattro Pro supports WordPerfect Office 4.0, Novell GroupWise 4.1, and Digital Teamlinks, as well as any mail system using MAPI or CMC standards.

Related Concepts


About Sending to Envoy

You can distribute notebooks electronically in Envoy format so others can view your notebooks without using Corel Quattro Pro. Recipients of an Envoy document can view, annotate, and print it.

When you publish a notebook to Envoy, a copy of the notebook is created in Envoy format (.EVY) and displayed in the Envoy Viewer.

You can distribute Envoy documents on disk or through e-mail. If your recipients have installed Envoy you can create an Envoy Distributable Viewer disk. (The viewer is also available on the Corel WordPerfect Documentation home page on the World Wide Web.) If your recipients do not have Envoy, you can send a runtime file, which does not need Envoy to run. You can then distribute the file on disk, by e-mail, or on a Web server. The runtime viewer does not include all of the Envoy Viewer features.

For more information, open Envoy, then click Help [image] Help Topics.

To publish an Envoy document

Related Concepts


About Sending Mail
Sending Mail

You can send selected text or an entire notebook by e-mail while you work in Corel Quattro Pro. Corel Quattro Pro supports Novell GroupWise 4.1, Digital Teamlinks, and other mail systems using the MAPI or CMC standards.

To e-mail the current file

Related Concepts


About Version Control

Version Control lets you control and track multiple copies of the same file. Instead of tracking updates to a file by saving new versions under different file names, Corel Versions lets you save changes you have made to successive versions of your file.

You can archive each version of a file to its own folder or to the folder you choose, on any read/write drive. Through a history list, you can retrieve any archived version of a file. You can compare any two files to see the text differences between them.

You can use Corel Versions on a network when a number of people work on the same files. Each saved version shows the name of the user who archived it.

Note:	Version Control is available from the File menu only if you have done a custom installation of the suite, and selected the Corel Versions component in Accessories.

To archive a version of the current notebook

To retrieve an archived version of the current notebook

To retrieve an archived version of a notebook

Corel Versions


To archive a version of the current notebook
To archive a version of the current notebook,

1	Click File [image] Version Control [image] Update Current.

2	Click Permanent if you want to save this version of the file as a permanent copy.

3	Enter any comments in the Comments field.

4	Click OK.

Tips

When you archive a file for the first time, you are not given a comments field. Instead, you are given the option to make the first version permanent, and options for setting the number of temporary versions and using compression.

When you enable the permanent option, your file is kept until you delete it. If you do not choose the permanent option, your file will automatically be saved as a temporary version. Temporary versions of a file are replaced by newer version when the maximum number of temporary versions for the file is reached.

To change the maximum number of temporary versions for a file, open the Windows Control Panel, click the Control Versions icon, then specify the number you want in the Default maximum number of temporary versions text box.

About Version Control


To retrieve an archived version of the current notebook
To retrieve an archived version of the current notebook,

1	Click File [image] Version Control [image] Retrieve Current to open a previous version of a file you currently have open.

2	Select the file or the version of the file you want.

3	Click Retrieve.

About Version Control


To retrive an archived version of a notebook
To retrieve an archived version of a notebook,

1	In your application, click File [image] Version Control [image] Retrieve Notebook to open any archived version of any previously saved document.

2	Select the file or the version of the file you want.

3	Click Retrieve.

About Version Control


To insert today's date
To insert today's date,

1	Click Insert [image] Date to enter the current date.

About Dates and Times

Related Topics


To enter fractions
To enter fractions,

1	Click a cell to edit the cell or a formula.

2	Enter the fraction you want.

Tip

To specify other settings for fractions, click Format [image] Selection [image] Numeric Format [image] Fractions.

Related Topics


About TextArt

Use TextArt to change words in your documents into designs. You can shape the image using patterns, colors, and other options, or you can select from a wide variety of predesigned shapes. Besides creating 2-D TextArt images, you can create 3-D TextArt images if you select the 3D TextArt component during a Custom install.

TextArt designs are graphics images. They are contained in a graphics box which can be moved and sized in the notebook. They can also be used in any Windows application as an OLE object.

To create art-shaped text

To create a TextArt image


To create art-shaped text
To create art-shaped text,

1	Click where you want to create art-shaped text

2	Click Insert [image] Graphics [image] TextArt, then type the text you want.

3	Change any options to make it look the way you want it.

4	When you are finished, click outside the text box.

About TextArt


About Draw Picture

You can use more sophisticated drawing tools in Corel Presentations.

To use drawing tools in Corel Presentations


To use drawing tools in Corel Presentations
To use drawing tools in Corel Presentations,

1	Click Insert [image] Graphics [image] Draw Picture to launch Corel Presentations.

Tip

From within Corel Presentations, click Help [image] Help Topics if you need help using that product.

About Draw Picture


About Special Font Characters

You can add font characters that are not on your keyboard, such as iconic symbols, phonetic characters, and characters in other alphabets. You can insert these special characters in cells.

To enter special font characters


To enter special font characters
To enter special font characters,

1	Click a cell twice.

2	Click [image] on the property bar.

3	Click the character you want to be inserted.

Tip

Not all fonts include all characters. Excluded characters are represented by a hollow box on your screen.

To see different characters sets, change the currently selected font.

About Special Font Characters


About Quick Formatting
About QuickFormat

You can copy and paste formatting (background color, font, numeric format, etc.) of one cell to another cell using QuickFormat.

To copy format from one cell to another

Related Concepts


To copy format from one cell to another
To copy format from one cell to another,

1	Click the cell(s) whose formatting you want to copy

2	Click [image] on the toolbar to turn on QuickFormat.

3	Click or drag the cell(s) where you want to paste the formatting.

4	Click [image] to turn off QuickFormat.

About QuickFormat


About Viewing Your Notebook

You can work with your notebook in three view modes: Draft, Page, and Objects. In Draft and Page view, you can also use Zoom to change the display size of the text or graphics you are viewing.

Draft View

Draft view displays the document close to the way it will look when printed. Draft view does not display certain document features such as footers, page breaks, and margins although they might exist in the notebook. Because not all features display, working in Draft view is often faster than working in Page view.

Page View

Page view displays your notebook pages the way they will look when printed. Page view displays such elements as fonts and appearance features, headers, footers, footnotes, page breaks, and margins.

While in Page View, you can move margins by dragging the dotted lines, move hard page breaks by dragging solid lines, and get to the Page Setup dialog by double clicking or right clicking in a margin.

You can also add a header or footer by right clicking in the margins, change the size of a header or footer by dragging its borders, and edit the header or footer text by double clicking the header or footer.

Objects View

Objects view displays the Objects sheet, which contains icons, each representing a chart, slide show, or dialog box you have created.

To change the view of your notebook

Related Concepts

Related Topics


To change the view of your notebook
To change the view of your notebook,

1	Click View.

2	Click Draft, Page, or Objects.

Tips

You can drag objects or charts while in draft or page view.

To see multiple pages while in Page View, click View [image] Zoom, then specify 50 percent or less.

To change margins while in Page View, drag a blue margin line to set the current margin for a column or row of pages.

About Viewing Your Notebook


About Auditing

Auditing visually shows data used in formulas. If you are looking at a formula cell, Auditing can show all cells that provide data to that formula. It can also show all formulas that use the data from a particular cell. Auditing is particularly useful for fixing errors.

To see all cells that provide data to a formula

To see all formulas that use the data from a particular cell

To watch a formula cell as it updates


To see all cells that provide data to a formula
To see all cells that provide data to a formula,

1	Click the formula cell, then click Tools [image] Auditing [image] Trace Precedents.

The cells that provide data to the formula are outlined in blue. These are the first level precedents. These cells might rely on other cells for data.

2	Click Tools [image] Auditing [image] Show Auditing Toolbar.

3	Click [image] (Trace Precedents) to display the next (second) level of precedents. Continue to click [image] until no more precedents display.

Tips

Click [image] to hide the precedents tracings.

Point to each button on the Auditing Toolbar to see what it does.

To remove all arrows, click the [image] button.

About Auditing


To see all formulas that use the data from a particular cell
To see all formulas that use the data from a particular cell,

1	Click the cell, then click Tools [image] Auditing [image] Trace Dependents.

2	Click Tools [image] Auditing [image] Show Auditing Toolbar.

3	Click [image] (Trace Dependents) to see if the formula cells are, in turn, used by other formulas. Click [image] until no more dependents appear.

Tips

Click [image] on the Auditing palette that appeared to hide the precedents tracings.

Point to each button on the Auditing Toolbar to see what it does.

To remove all arrows, click the [image] button.

About Auditing


To watch a formula cell as it updates
To watch a formula cell as it updates,

To watch a formula cell as it updates, you can drag that cell to the bar at the bottom of the screen in the Application Bar. This is helpful if you are working in another notebook or on another sheet.

About Auditing


To change the page setup
To change the page setup,

1	Click File [image] Page Setup.

More Info


Help for Data Modeling Desktop and Database Desktop
Help for Data Modeling Desktop and Database Desktop,

Help for Data Modeling Desktop and Database Desktop is available if you have done a custom installation of the suite, and have selected Additional Help Files under the Corel Quattro Pro Help component for Corel Quattro Pro 8.


About Cross Tabs

You can create a summary of your data in a format that is simple and easy to read. This is especially useful when you are working with large pieces of data, such as imported databases.

To summarize data in a Cross Tabs report

Related Concepts


To summarize data in a Cross Tabs report
To summarize data in a Cross Tabs report,

1	Click any cell on the sheet containing the data, then click Tools [image] Data Tools [image] Cross Tabs.

2	If necessary, specify the cells that contain the data you want to summarize, then specify the top-left cell where you want to place the results.

3	Click the field you want to use for row labels, then click the button showing the red row label area.

(In the example below, the Winery field was specified for row labels.)

4	Click the field you want to use for column labels, then click the button showing the blue column label area.

(In the example below, the Quarter field was specified for column labels.)

5	Click the field with the values you want to summarize in the main body of the table, then click the button on the left showing the green data area.

(In the example below, Cases Sold was specified for data values.)

6	If you want, click an area to change the type of value (such as sum, average, count, percent, or string) to report for a field.

Example

You can easily find out how many cases of wine were sold each quarter by the two wineries in the following data

by including only the part you want in the summary:

Tips

Unless you specify a different destination, Corel Quattro Pro places the Cross Tabs report you create in the next available sheet.

To arrange data in the dialog, click a raised button to put data in or click an inset button to take data out. The three top buttons at the left correspond to the three row fields. The three top buttons at the right correspond to the three column fields. The two buttons at the bottom correspond to the data fields.

If your data spans more than 100 years, format dates in QP with a 4-digit year format (such as 4/4/1901).

To change the type of value (such as sum, average, count, percent, or string) to report for a field, after specifying a field for an area, click the area, then specify the resolution option you want.

You can use the additional colored buttons not mentioned in the steps above to show more information in your table. For example, if you are summarizing data in the sample file Wines.wb3, you could specify the Year field as the top row of labels, the Quarter field as the second row of labels (pink), the Winery field as the left-most column of labels, the Region field as the second column of labels (yellow), and the Sales field as the second data field (the button on the right showing the green data area).

Once you have summarized your data, you might find it useful to display it as a chart.

About Cross Tabs


Specifies the cells that contain the data to summarize.


Specifies the top-left cell where to place the results.


Lists the possible fields to use for rows, columns, and data.


Select a field, then click the appropriate colored button to position the field in the report. Click an inset button to take data out.


Select a field, then click one of the three top colored buttons on the left to position the field in the corresponding row.


Select a field, then click one of the three top colored buttons on the right to position the field in the corresponding column.


Select a field, then click one of the two colored buttons on the bottom to position the field in the corresponding data area.


About Cell Reference Checker

With the Cell Reference Checker, you can easily fix errors you might encounter when copying formulas that contain references to cell addresses.

The Cell Reference Checker shows you how a formula you copy appears in the new location. You can either have the formula adjust to the new location using "relative" cell addresses or change it to contain the original formula using "absolute" cell addresses.

For example, suppose you copy a formula that references the value in cell B2. If you want the formula at the new location to continue referencing the value in cell B2, then the formula's reference to cell B2 must be changed to $B$2, making the reference "absolute"; otherwise, the formula's reference is "relative" to the new location.

When a formula at the new location refers to cells that are now empty or different from the referenced cells in the original formula, the Cell Reference Checker indicates the new formula uses empty cells. The Cell Reference Checker assumes you want the copied formula to reference the same cell addresses as in the original formula.

To change the formula to contain the original formula using absolute cell addresses, click Fix It, then click Close.

To have the formula adjust to the new location using relative cell addresses, click Close.

Tips

You can click Fix It to see the change, then click Undo Fix to reverse the change.

The red and blue Audit arrows indicate which cells are being referenced in the formula at the new location.

Click Details to show or hide specific information about the formula and its cell addresses--both as it is as copied from the original formula and after fixing the relative references.

When you enter a formula, you can specify that all or part of a cell address remain the same if copied. To do so, insert a dollar sign ($) before the coordinate you want to remain absolute. For example, A$1 makes only row 1 absolute. The column letter will change to the new location. Cell addresses containing dollar signs ($) are called absolute addresses.

To turn on or turn off the Cell Reference Checker, click Tools [image] Settings [image] General [image] Cell Reference Checker.

To make a cell address absolute (instead of relative)

Related Concepts


About Summarizing Data

You can summarize data in your notebook by outlining, sorting, filtering, and cross tabs reporting.

You can show or hide as much data as you want in a notebook by grouping the rows and columns of data in an outline.

You can quickly sort or filter rows of data by specifying sort criteria in a specific column.

You can create a summary of your data in a format that is simple and easy to read.

To automatically create an outline

To sort data in cells

To filter data

To summarize data in a Cross Tabs report

Related Concepts


About the Year 2000

Quattro Pro has always stored dates entered into a cell (except when entered as a label) as a unique date/time serial number, or integer date value. Therefore, Quattro Pro has always provided for date storage which includes the century information.

For the transition to the year 2000, you should enter all dates (in both numeric and label formats) into Corel Quattro Pro 8 in a 4-digit year, or "explicit century" year format (i.e., mm/dd/yyyy). However, if you choose to enter dates into Corel Quattro Pro 8 in a 2-digit or "implicit century" year format (i.e., mm/dd/yy), be aware of the following points:

Corel Quattro Pro assumes the century based on a 00-50/51-99 range

Two-digit year dates entered as a label in previous versions of Quattro Pro may need to be edited

Corel Quattro Pro can be set to display 4-digit years by default

The current date can be inserted into a cell and formatted to display 4-digit years

@ functions that required integer date values now accept string date values

Corel Quattro Pro has new 4-digit year display formats

Display negative serial date values with either Short or Long Date International formats

Dates imported from other spreadsheet applications may need to be edited since the dates may follow a 2-digit year format

The latest information concerning Corel's Year 2000 policy is available at Corel's Year 2000 Web Site

About the Year 2000--Details


Two-digit Year Numeric Format Entry and Storage

If you enter a year using two digits, Corel Quattro Pro assumes the century based on the following year ranges:

51-99	for	1951-1999
00-50	for	2000-2050
For example, suppose you enter the date 4/26/99. Since the two-digit year 99 is between 51 through 99, Corel Quattro Pro assumes you are entering dates between the years 1951 through 1999 and interprets the century as the 20th (1900s).

When you enter a two-digit year between 00 through 50, Corel Quattro Pro assumes you are entering dates between the years 2000 through 2050 and interprets the century as the 21st (2000s).

You can override this century assumption by entering all four digits for the year, for example, 4/26/1947.

About the Year 2000


Two-digit Year Label (Text) Format Entry and Storage

Any two-digit year dates entered into a cell or formula as a label in earlier versions of Corel Quattro Pro now use the two-digit year entry window. For example, if cell A1 contains the label '1/1/40' (assumed to be 1/1/1940 in versions of Quattro Pro prior to Corel Quattro Pro version 7 upgraded for Windows NT), the formula @DATEVALUE(A1) now returns the integer date value for 1/1/2040 in Corel Quattro Pro 8.

You should change any label previously entered using a two-digit-year date format to a four-digit-year date format in order to explicitly indicate the century by entering all four year digits. (For example, you should edit the label '1/1/40' to be '1/1/1940' by entering all four year digits.)

Once you have edited a date label from two to four digits, the century designation will remain unless you override it by reentering all four-year digits of the date.

About the Year 2000


Setting the Date Default to Display Four Digits In Corel Quattro Pro

You can set all dates to display in a four-digit year format by default in Corel Quattro Pro. In Windows (Settings [image] Control Panel [image] Regional Settings), set the preferred date short style format to M/d/yyyy. Exit Windows (Settings), then set the default Date Format in Corel Quattro Pro to Windows Default (Tools [image] Settings [image] International [image] Date Format).

About the Year 2000


Inserting the Current Date to Display Four digits

You can insert the current date into your spreadsheet by selecting a cell then clicking either Insert [image] Date or PerfectExpert [image] Format Title Area [image] Insert Current Date.

To format the date, click Format [image] Selection [image] Numeric Format [image] Date, then select the 4-digit date display you want (i.e., 08/14/1997).

About the Year 2000


Date Functions

Date functions that require an integer date value as the Date argument now accept a valid date string such as '12/31/1991' and '31-Dec-1997'.

The date functions @DATE, @LWKDAY, @MDAYS, @NWKDAY AND @YDAYS now accept a standard year like 2001 in addition to the original year arguments of 0 (1900) and 199 (2099).

For example:

@DATE (40,12,31) and @DATE (1940,12,31) both return 14976 (31-Dec-1940).

@DATE (140,12,31) and @DATE (2040,12,31) both return 51501 (31-Dec-2040).

If you use arguments for date functions, Corel Quattro Pro assumes the century based on the following year ranges:

00-99	for	1900-1999
100-199	for	2000-2099
About the Year 2000


New Four Digit and Two Digit Year Formats
New Four Digit Year Formats

Four new four-digit year Date Formats have been added to the Application settings dialog (Tools [image] Settings) in Corel Quattro Pro. The new formats are MM/DD/YYYY, DD/MM/YYYY, DD.MM.YYYY and YYYY-MM-DD. One of these date formats may be chosen as the default date format and applied to a range of cells by selecting Format [image] Selection [image] Numeric Format [image] Date.

Two new four-digit year formats (DD-MM-YYYY and MM-YYYY) have been added to the Active Cells dialog and can be applied to a range of cells by selecting Format [image] Selection [image] Numeric Format [image] Date.

About the Year 2000


Formatting Negative Serial Date Values

If you enter a negative serial date value (i.e., for a date before December 30, 1899) and reformat it as a date, you should set your system to the 4-digit Windows default setting, then select either the Short Date International (11/15/1899) or Long Date International (Wednesday, November 15, 1899) date format in order to properly display the century information for the date.

(Other standard and user-defined 4-digit display options will not display the century information properly for negative serial date numbers.)

About the Year 2000


Exchanging Date Information

If you are importing data containing dates in strings or numeric format from an application which does not support 4-digit year date formats, the data imported may also use the 2-digit year window.

All Corel Quattro Pro 8 date functions updated for easier multi-century use remain compatible with previous versions of Corel Quattro Pro. For example, @DATE (46,3,12) will return 16873 (12-Mar-1946) in Corel Quattro Pro 8 and all previous versions.

About the Year 2000


Corel's Year 2000 Web Site

Corel Corporation has a Year 2000 policy web site. For the latest information visit the site at http://www.corel.com/2000.htm.

About the Year 2000


About Using Microsoft IntelliMouse with Corel Quattro Pro

You can use Microsoft IntelliMouse with Corel Quattro Pro to scroll through your notebook as you roll the wheel.

If you click the wheel (or center mouse button of any 3-button mouse), a graphic spot appears where you clicked. You can then move the mouse pointer to pan the screen from the spot in the direction you move the mouse. The farther away from the spot you move the mouse pointer, the faster the screen pans.

To zoom in or zoom out while viewing your notebook, hold down the Ctrl key as you roll the wheel on the mouse.


Group
Prints multiple copies sorted by page.


Collate
Prints multiple copies sorted by sets of copies.


Properties
Specify the options for the selected printer driver.


Add Printer
Use the wizard to add a printer.


Resolution
Specifies the print resolution to use when printing.


Status
View the status of print jobs.


Join Cells

When creating titles and vertical side bars, you may want to use the join feature rather than the Center Across Block or the Text Box options. When you join cells it is easier to center or align text where you want it, plus you can calculate in the joined cell and access it with formulas just as you would a regular cell. (If you create a text box, this is not the case.)

To join cells,

1	Drag across the cells you want to join.

2	Right-click the cells, then click Cell Properties [image] Alignment [image] Join Cells.

To center and join cells,

1	Drag across the cells you want to join.

2	Click [image].

Tips

You can join cells in rows, columns, or both. Create a vertical side bar by joining cells in a column.

When typing in a joined cell, press Alt+Enter to return to the next line inside the joined cell. Pressing Enter moves the insertion point to the next cell in the column.

Related Topics


To rotate text

You can rotate text in any regular or joined cell. Plus you can change the font and font attributes so that you can create vertical side bars to emphasize information.

1	Click the cell where you want to rotate text.

2	Click [image] [image] Alignment [image] Rotated, then specify an amount. Specify 90 or 270 to rotate the text vertically.

Tip

Rotating text works well with the Join feature. Join the cells first, type your text, then rotate the text.

Related Topics


Insert Hyperlink

1	Click Insert [image] Hyperlink.

2	Specify the path or URL to the file you want to link to.

Tip

To remove a link, select the cell containing the link, then click Insert [image] Hyperlink [image] Remove Link.


Specify the path or URL to the file you want to link to.


Removes the link from the selected cell.


About Comments

Add annotations to cells with the Comment feature. By default, comments do not print with the document.

To add a comment

To edit a comment

To delete a comment


To add a comment
To add a comment,

1	Click the cell you want to comment on.

2	Click Insert [image] Comment.

3	Enter your comment, then click outside the comment bubble.

Tip

To view the text of a comment, position the mouse pointer over a cell with a [image] icon.

About Comments


To edit a comment
To edit a comment,

1	Click the cell containing the comment you want to edit.

2	Click Insert [image] Comment.

3	Edit your comment, then click outside the comment bubble.

Tips

To change the font, size or such attributes as bold, italics, underline, and strikeout, right-click inside the comment bubble, then click Cell Comment Properties.

To move a comment, click the cell containing the comment you want to edit, then drag the [image] icon to another cell.

About Comments


To delete a comment
To delete a comment,

1	Click the cell containing the comment you want to delete.

2	Click Edit [image] Clear [image] Comments.

Tip

To restore a comment, click Edit [image] Undo [image] Clear Comments.

About Comments


When checked, hides the lines forming a box around grouped controls in dialogs.


When checked, as you move the mouse over over controls such as Toolbar buttons and dialog buttons and checkboxes, they change to show you have selected them.


Sets Corel Quattro Pro to display notebooks in Draft view.


Sets Corel Quattro Pro to display notebooks in Page view.


Sets Corel Quattro Pro to use letters in the sheet tab labels.


Sets Corel Quattro Pro to use numbers in the sheet tab labels.


Sets the minimum number of sheet tabs to display in the notebook.


Shows the basic colors available. To define a custom color, click the basic color closest to it, click More, then click Define Custom Colors.


Specifies that no colors should be mixed for the Fill Color.


About Spell Check

Use Spell Check to check for misspelled words, duplicate words, and irregular capitalization.

Click to get detailed help on Spell Checker.


Corel Web Site

1	Click [image] to go to the Corel home page on the World Wide Web.


 Click automatic to redraw the map each time you modify an element in the map.


 Click Manual to redraw the map only when you open or view it by right-clicking, then click View.


 Sets the alignment of the title to left, center, or right.


 Choose a bullet type, then specify the relative bullet size.


 Select a chart from the list.


 Specify a name (which you can use in macros) for the active chart, dialog box, or slide show icon in the Objects sheet, or the active dialog control in the dialog window.


 Type the label text or enter the label's cell address preceded by a slash (\A:E5, for example).


 Type the label text or enter the label's cell address preceded by a slash (\A:E5, for example).


 Specify the position of the text.


Specify the cell where you want the macro to stop.


You can change how many times to pass through the breakpoint before stopping. The default, 1, tells Corel Quattro Pro to stop every time it passes through the breakpoint. Setting the pass number to 2 stops at the breakpoint every other pass.

You may want to increase the pass number in loop macros because sometimes a problem appears only after many repetitions of the same commands.


Specify the cell containing the logical condition or formula. The macro will stop when the result in the cell is true (has a value of 1). As long as the formula in the condition cell is true, the macro runs in step-by-step mode.


Specify the cell to monitor. This cell's address and current value show in the debug window while you debug the macro. When the cell's value changes, it is updated in the window.


Specity the cell you want to edit while the oint to or enter the address of the cell to edit using Cell. Edit the contents that display in Content.


Type the new contents for the cell.


The file is not found. It may not be installed.


The file is not found. It may not be installed.


The file is not found. It may not be installed.


The file is not found. It may not be installed.